f X- LW l      II_
m              __ 1i I I8,
t 1 6-                                                                               III
I  1 _tML II
t.   t  I  I  S,  I  _~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~. mq,~r.fq2H.




ii:i.
II.
i
ii
r
i
I
r
ii~ I                                    r
ia
a;BI
C
i:
~~
il I
1
B
B
ii R
t);i
j
I
x
i:
I
 r;:r
r F
II:r::
"~ i
a~
L,
% ~  L4E;"~
I
i
rr
i
i;
a
I




N~~ ~~ ~~ ~~ ~~ ~~ ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~li




-~~~e~~ -a-~~~~~8!  a ~~~~~WIAAIII  aBBBR ~~~~~~~~~~~~ Il~~~~-~~*~~~p~~aTOzll W I  -- II.zB, I 


1


'I


I 0. y


1r,




Attention Patron:
This volume is too fragile for any future repair.
Please handle with great care.
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN UBRARY - CONSERVATION & BOOK REPAIR
Ecu iffier — --.......................: -, lS~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~


*




A  A2  -,H, &.
/         / -\
011,419


THE SANDWICH ISLANDS.




Ilorlqdop 6' aOprqv, aSO 6' 6pOaGXpoiatv ItEOat'
'E 6v a cin Icai ao'Xfov, irfi vv ro tiva&v otrwc.
'Ou. lX.




I




,,,i; - 11I|i | i  
I _    _   -11 I I  S l-  I I II  iiII
613 --  -  -   -  l S -  |  -  l l i l l l -  l l l l  ~ ~ ~ ~~;1: n~li
i i  _  I I | i-I i | I I I | I I I I _  ni-~~lr~~
_ _  _ - I S * |-I I 1 3 I I-i l I I __~~~~i8.8;
_ _.   I   *l-II II _ II _




HAWAII:
JlTHE PAT PRESENT, NiANID Fi'L  OF
ITS ISLAND- KINGiDOM
AN  IISTORICAL ACCOUNT OF T'TI   S iNIG-CII ISiiANDS  POLYNESIA)
ANLEY tIOPKINS
WITHL E D T ON1 LIIO 1 A1 1 I TI S 011
LONDON:
LONGMANS A GREN, AND) CO.
18'l6




r


LONDON
rRINTED BY SPOTTISWOODE AND 00.
NEB-STRRET SQUARE




TO THE
RIGHT HONOURABLE
JOHN EARL RUSSELL, K.G.
FIRST LORD OF THE TREASURY &c.
THESE PAGES ARE
(WITH HIS LORDSHIP'S PERMISSION)
GRATEFULLY DEDICATED.




I




AUTHOR'S PREFACE


TO
THE SECON D EDITIION.
ENDEAVOURED in my volume on Hawaii, to give
a short but clear account of the state and history of
that kingdom. Since completing its pages, three years
ago, the march of events there has been rapid and
important. The extreme interest awakened in this
country by the visit to England of the young and
widowed Queen of Hawaii has called fresh attention to
the islands; and the telescope has been, as it were,
frequently turned towards their distant and faintlyshining cluster, as if endeavouring to separate it into
its constituent and many-coloured spheres.  It has,
consequently, been thought desirable to re-edit my
work, bringing the history down to the present time.
In a series of five new chapters I have described the
blow which fell upon Hawaii by the death of its young
Prince Royal; the yet heavier grief of the people when
their beloved sovereign prematurely died, at the close
of 1863; the installation and progress of the English




AUTHOR'S PREFACE TO


mission for planting a scion of the Reformed Episcopal
Church in the North Pacific; the change in the Constitution effected by the present sovereign —which some
have named the Coup d'Etat; and lastly, I have given
a sketch of the life and important services of Robert
Crichton Wyllie, whose death has lately taken place in
the islands.
On the appearance of my book a few angry comments were made on it, chiefly by or on account of the
American missionaries. What I wrote, I strove to write
impartially, without malice and without fear. One
lady of American birth, but long resident in the islands,
eminent in literature as in other walks of life, has
suggested in print, that two gentlemen should set out
from Honolulu to Europe, for the purpose of castigating
-not my history, but myself. Such a step would seem
a very laborious means for effecting a very small object.
Should these correctors of the press arrive, they would
perhaps find me different from what they had been led
to suppose, and not the enemy or detractor of that
great nation which is ' bone of our bone, and flesh of
our flesh,' whose late agony of internal conflict we
watched so sorrowfully. A closer acquaintance might
elicit that English and American hearts beat more in
unison than they even themselves suspect; and it is
possible that ere our parting, we three might be found
kneeling together in prayer to the Common Father,
that He would, by ALL MEANS, send out the light and




THE SECOND EDITION.            ix
grace and truth of His Gospel into every dark corner of
earth and ocean, and cause it to shine abundantly not
only on Hawaii, but on ' the regions beyond.'
In the spirit of conciliation I have in this edition
withdrawn the sketch of a person who played a considerable part in the earlier history of the country;
because I find that the attached friends of the late
Mr. Richards supposed that the drawing-which was a
sketch from recollection only, and somewhat altered in
engraving-was intentionally a caricature, a thing
which was not meant.
I have enriched the present volume with a few extracts which I have been permitted to make from the
letters and journals of Archdeacon and Mrs. Mason.
I have added an important summary of the commerce
of Hawaii, and an able statement concerning the trade
and producing powers of the islands drawn up by
W. W. Follett Synge, Esq., late British Commissioner
and Consul-General in Hawaii, now our ConsulGeneral in Havana and Judge of the Court of Mixed
Commissions.
Some fresh works touching, in part or entirely, on the
islands have come into my hands; of which the most
important is the brochure published in Boston, by the
Rev. Dr. Rufus Anderson, of which some mention will
be found in these pages.
In my chapter on the English Church Mission, I
have endeavoured to correct several misconceptions




X     AUTHOR'S PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION.


about it which have obtained currency in England,
America, and elsewhere.
Whilst re-editing a work which deals with a state of
things existing four years previously, I have been unable altogether to avoid some literary inconsistency.
In reproducing generally my former volume, it was
necessary to correct some figures to the present time,
and, in places, to complete the history of transactions
which were then in progress. A few paragraphs, therefore, belong to two periods. I can only ask indulgence
for a defect which is almost unavoidable.
I have to thank the press for the cordial and gratifying manner in which they noticed my former volume,
and made it known to the public. With a painful
consciousness of all its shortcomings, I commend the
present work to the attentive consideration of my
readers.
The excellent likeness of Her Majesty Queen Emma
of Hawaii is engraved by Mr. Adlard after a photograph
by Messrs. John and Charles Watkins, of Parliament
Street.
M. H.
April 1866.












PREFACE.


IT is not much that need be said by way of preface to
this volume. Few will begin to read it who will
not soon find that it is not a book to be laid down when.it has been commenced. It is, indeed, a notable record
of a very peculiar form of our common humanity. The
character of the Sandwich Islanders is, in many respects,
one of those clearly marked developments of national
life on which we always gaze with peculiar interest,
from the distinctness with which we trace the lines of
dissimilarity to ourselves, even whilst we feel everywhere present the great underlying basis of our essential
brotherhood.
There is about these islanders a remarkable union of
the attractiveness of childhood with the strength of
maturity. And this union of diverse elements in their
nature has embodied itself strikingly in their institutions, and fixed itself in their history. In this they
greatly resemble the Coral Islands of their own seas,




xiv


PREFACE,


and with the concurrence of our Queen, a Bishop of
our nation has been consecrated at Lambeth, to bear
the precious seed to the distant island of his adoption.
To him is to be committed the training of the future
heir to the throne. For the Bishop's coming the public
reception of the young prince into the Church has been
postponed; whilst to mark our gracious Queen's interest
in the movement, SHE, even in this day of her sorrow,
has consented to be sponsor to the royal youth, and
sends out sponsorial gifts befitting England's Queen, as
pledges of the reality of her interest in the religious
act in which, though absent, she is to partake.
May it please God greatly to bless and prosper this
new undertaking of our Sovereign and her nation's
church. In venturing on it we are but paying the debt
which in virtue of our own Christianity and our own
national prosperity we owe to less favoured tribes of
men.   It is surely specially appropriate that such gifts
as these,-the high gifts of the doctrine and perfect
organization of the Church of Christ, which have built
up her own liberties and greatness, should be imparted
by the (cean Queen to her sister islands. Our relation,
too, to New Zealand adds greatly to the interest of this
undertaking. From the New Zealand church, our own
Bishop Patteson ---clft-um  et venerabile nomen-is
making his way of blessing northward through the
Melanesian group.  Southward, on his way of benediction, may the Bishop of Honolulu speed, until the




PREFACE.                  XV
two advancing currents of the living waters of the
living Gospel of our Lord knit in one long grasp the
hands of the two Island-Prelates; and they kneel together on the shore of some jointly-conquered island,
to exclaim in grateful adoration, Tins IrATH GOD DONE!
S. OXON.
CUDDESDON PALACE:
May 24, 1862.




\
I




AUTHOR'S PREFACE


TO
THE FIRST EDITION.
WiHEN a native of Tahiti was shown a map of the
world, he convicted the geographer of jealousy
and untruth in having made Tahiti so small, and other
parts of the earth so disproportionately large.
I have to apologise to a world in which there is
already a greater number of writers than readers, for
adding one more volume to the printed burthen it
sustains;-a book, too, about a very small and very
distant nation. I feel that in taking this responsibility
I have the public nausea audiendi against me,
Those, however, who are still left with time enough
to go through a new book, will perhaps find something
to interest them in the history, or, as I may venture to
call it, the biography of a nation, so circumscribed that
the story from its pre-historic period to the present
time embraces scarcely more than eighty years; and
relating to an island group so far removed from us in
space, that it affects our vision only like 'some bright
a




XVlll


AUTHOR'S PREFACE TO


particular star.' It is even hoped that something useful
may be learned from such a recital, in which we have
before us the life of a community, its efforts, its errors,
its failures, its escapes, its repentances; its vivacious
childhood, its noon-day struggles, and-must we add?
-its instructed but premature decay. If such examples afford no lesson, we are compelled to arrive at
Coleridge's melancholy conclusion, that experience is
like the stern-lights of a vessel, which only illumine
the track that it passed.
A book of this kind must necessarily be to a considerable extent a compilation. I have, consequently, made
the fullest use of what writings exist on the subject of
the Sandwich Islands, either in a separate form or included in volumes of voyages. The industrious and
well-arranged history of Mr. James Jackson Jarves
(Honolulu, 1847) has been of the greatest service to
me in transactions previous to that date. A little circumspection is, of course, required in accepting the
views of an American citizen on points wherein other
nations are concerned; and as a corrective, I had before
me Mr. A. Simpson's pamphlet entitled, ' Progress of
Events,' which deals with a very important period of
Hawaiian history, the cession of the islands to this
country, through Lord George Paulet, in 1843; Mr.
Simpson, who took a leading part in that transaction,
being very much opposed to the Americans, the missionaries, and, as far as I can judge, to everybody.




THE FIRST EDITION

xix


I have consulted the Rev. S. Dibble's History (Lahainala, in 1843) in which is embodied the information
derived directly from the native pupils at the Government Seminary, Lahaina.
I have found useful information scattered through
the volumes on the Sandwich Islands by Mr. Cheever,
Mr. Hill, and some other travellers.
Sir George Simpson's 'Overland Journey round the
World' contains some chapters devoted to the Hawaiian
Archipelago. The views of that acute observer relative
to the then and the future condition of the islands are
important and enlightened. Sir George sent me his
M.S. to see through the press, and I published it, in
two volumes, with the late Mr. Colburn, in 1847. The
arrival in England during the progress of my work, of
my brother, after a residence in Hawaii of sixteen years,
was very opportune. His emendations have been valuable, and I have embodied in my pages some original
information he has given me on subjects of which they
treat. His office of Director of the Government Press
at Honolulu, and, latterly, the part which he has himself taken in public affairs, as a member of the House
of Nobles, qualify him to speak with distinctness, as he
has been able to observe from a central point of view.
The archives of my own office and the official and
unofficial communications I constantly receive from the
islands enable me to give statistical and other information down to the latest date.
a 2




XX


AUTHOR'S PREFACE TO


The Rev. William Ellis, author of' Polynesian Researches,' A Journey through Hawaii, and a more
recent work on Madagascar, to which island he has just
returned, very kindly sent me his most interesting
Narrative, published in the year 1825. It is a sort of
text-booK, to all subsequent writers, of the earliest
history of the islands, their traditions and old customs,
collected by Dibble and the first American missionaries,
assisted by the natives themselves. Though a dissenter
from the Church of England, Mr. Ellis's large and
liberal mind shows itself in every line of his writing,
and in the personal intercourse with which he obliged
me. I have to thank the London Missionary Society
for supplying me with the Reports of the Boston Board
of Foreign Missions; and I own my obligations to the
Hon. Hudson's Bay Company for permitting me to read
in their library the early editions of oceanic explorers.
I have not, of course, omitted to examine the splendid
volumes of the United States Exploring Expedition,
commanded by Commodore Wilkes,-an officer whose
reputation will depend more on the scientific than the
belligerent part of his profession.
For earlier events I have also gleaned from the
agreeable pages of my friend the late Admiral Beechey,
in his interesting 'Narrative of the Voyage of the
"Blossom."'
After such preparations, my book will appear but a
slight sketch of the subject on which it treats. It was




THE FIRST EDITION.             XXi
intended for nothing more. Its design is to give a
popular but connected account of an interesting and
imperfectly known group of islands, which have had,
during eight decades, an association with our own
country, unusually close and frequent for so small and
distant a nation. If one word may be permitted as to
the execution of my task, I have to own, and that with
regret, that owing to the unceasing nature of other
occupations, I have not been able to expend on my book
so much of the labor limce as a writer would desire for
his own satisfaction, or the public would have a right
to expect in every printed work which solicits its
notice.
LONDON: May 1862.




i




CONTENTS.
CHAPTER I.
PAGE
GEOGRAPHICAL POSITION AND ORIGIN-HARBOURS       1
CHAPTER IIL
PHYSICAL FEATURES AND PHENOMENA-VOLCANOES.    12
CHAPTER III.
CLIMATE-PRODUCTIONS-COMMERCE.                  31
CHAPTER IV.
OUR ROYAt CITY OF HONOL-ULU.46
CHAPTER V.
DERIVATION OF THE HAWAIIAN RACE-TRADITIONS OF  60
CHAPTER VI.
EARLY ISLAND DISCOVERIES-NATIVE HISTORY-COOK'S
FIRST ARRIVAL....... 83
CHAPTER VII.
THE TRAG-EDY IN KEALAKEAKUA BAY. 




xxiv


CONTENTS.


CHAIPTER VIII.
PAGE
THE SEQUEL OF COOK'S DEATH-SUBSEQUENT VISITS    II11
CHAPTER IX.
HISTORICAL SKETCH1-'A DUST OF SysT~ms'-' THE LONELY
ONE'......... 137
CHAPTER X.
HISTORICAL SKETCHl-KAMf,'HAXMlA THE CON.QUEROR-INEPTNESS FOP. TILE LYRE.151
ChAPTER XI.
IIISTORICAL SKETCH-KAMtlIAMIf-I1E TILE KING-HIS DEATH
-'ICOME TO BURY C2~ESAR, and TO PRAISE HIM'..163
CHAPTER XII.
HISTORICAL SKETCHi-ACCESSION OF LiHOLIHEO-TH!rE A-BOLITION OF IDOLATRY.180
CHAPTER XIII.
HISTORICAL SKETCH-ARRIVAL OF AMERICAN MISSIONARIES
-THE VISIT OF TILE KING AND QUEEN To ENGLAND,
AND THEIR D)TEAT.194
CHAPTER XIV.
HISTORICAL SKETCH-THE BROOK BECOMES A STREAM —
AN APOSTOLIC PREFECT ARRIVES-THEF ARGONAUTS.212
CHAPTER XV.
HISTORICAL SKETCH-THE STREAM BECOM ES A RIVERREIGN OF KAMPOHAMPIHA III..                   226
CHAPTER XVI.
HISTORICAL SKETCHr-THE. FIRST FREFNCH TRIBULATION. 244




CONTENTS.XX


xxv


CHAPTER XYIIL
PA-GE
IIISTORICAL SKETOJI-ESSAYS IN CONSTIT-UTION-MAKING. 259
CHAPTER XVIII.
HISTORICAL SKETCH1-THEE CARYSFORT AFFAIR... 280
CHAPTER XIX.
HISTORICAL SKETChr-TiE ENVOYS EXTRA.ORDINARY-THEi
BELGIAN CONTRACT.298
CHAPTER XX.
HISTORICAL SKETCHi-THiE TREATIES OF COMMERCE AND
FRIENDSHIP, AND CONSEQUENT HOSTILITIES...312
C HAPTER XXI.
HISTORICAL SKETCHI-R-EIGN OF ]KAMP.1AMt~HA IV...328
CHAPTER XXII.
HAWAIIAN CHARACTERISTICS.348
CHAPTER XXIII.
THE DEPOPULATION OF THE ISLA-NDS —KIBROTH-HA.TAAVA 367
CHAPTER XXIV.
MISSIONARY ACHIEVEMENT AND FAILURE...381
CHAPTER XXV.
GLANCES AT THE PAST AND GUESSES AT THEfi FUTURE.399
CHAPTER XXVI.
KALELBO-KA.-LANI-' THE FLIGHT OF THE CHIEF'..420
b




Xxvi               CONTENTS.
CHAPTER XXVII.
PAGE
BROKEN-HEABTED....... 428
CHAPTER XXVIII.
THE WILD OLIVE-TREE..                   450
CHAPTER XXIX.
AccEssION OF KAMtEHAMEHA V.-THmE 'COrP D'ETAT'. 476
CHAPTER XXX.
ROBERT CRICHTON WYLLIE.....   497
APPENDIX.
CORAL ISLANDS.                           513




LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS.
0-'aPORTRAIT OF EMMA, QUJEEN DOWAGER OF HAWAiI To face Title-pvage
(From a rhotograph. Engraved by Adlard, after a Photograph by Watkins.)
MAP.Tojface page                      1
CASCADE IN THE WAIALU& VALLEY (Vignette in Title-page) W. J. Linton
(Drawn on Wood by Miss C. Lane.)
CRATER OF KILAUEA..   (G~. Pearson). o face page,  12




THE, HARBOU.R, HONOLULU.       I
ENTRANCE OF THE NUUA-XU VALLEY, HONOLULU
EWA, FROM HONOLULU..   (60. Pearson)
PORTRAIT OF KING KAM1'HAM]'1HA IV. 
PROPOSED CHURCH AT HONOLULU (G. Pearson)
(Designed by W. Slater.)
DIAMOND HEAD, HONOLULU.    (G~. Pearson)


Y)  46
5,  59,,      170,,      328
page   347


To face page 380




I~~~~~~~~~~~~~~




t                 'I~~~~~~~~~~~~~
I 
'4


Is k of- s At
-= = 'a He...4.' v




C)


d)
blD
c,,


0


4.i)
* 
r t




THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.
CHAPTER I.
GEOGRAPHICAL POSITION AND ORIGIN —HARBOURS.
O the imagination of the ancient Greek or Roman
the pillars of Hercules formed the entrance into a
dark and mysterious sea; yet, somewhere in its unknown waters, towards the setting of the sun, lay, in
his belief, the Fortunate Islands, under a clearer sky
and in a happier climate than any known in the world
of men. This dream of a land, of which they spoke
sometimes as an Elysium for departed spirits, sometimes
almost as a region which might be reached by the
living, was not altogether without an influence for good.
It kept awake a longing curiosity, which might one day
give birth to active enterprise; it prevented the mind
from accepting the bounds of one or two inland seas as
the limits of the habitable world.
Such dreams were doomed to be dispelled, when,
eighteen centuries later, the march of geographical discovery began; but in their place was left the fact, that
the earth was larger than antiquity had taken it to be;
and the belief gradually grew up that even another
B




2


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


continent lay interposed in the untraversed sea between
Europe and the Indian land. The conviction was justified by the discoveries of Columbus, and his successors.
One of the latest results of geographical research may
be thus stated:-All the continents stretch downwards
from the northern pole of our planet, and terminate in
points; as if its waters, receding to the south, had left
bare at the lower extremities of the land the central
ridges only. In the Southern hemisphere, islands form
a partial equipoise to these continental masses of land,
and declare themselves, by several indications, to be
peaks of land, once elevated but afterwards submerged
by the increased depth of ocean. Islands elevated by
volcanic action constitute exceptions to this general
formula.
Lieutenant Julien, of the French navy, gives, as a
farther fruit of his own investigation, that in proceeding from the North to the South Pole, the ratio of land
to water diminishes regularly with every parallel of
latitude.
Islands, comparatively few in number above the
Tropic of Cancer, stud the southern waters of the world
in countless abundance. Group after group spreads
onwards like the constellations of the firmament. In
size, they vary from the vast mass of Australia, and of
Borneo, with its fifty millions of inhabitants,* to little
pulos and low lagoon-islands, rising but a few feet
above the sea-level.
The whole of this tropical and southern realm of
waters has been named Oceanica, and has been divided
hydrographically, for convenience of reference, into five
districts-as the stars have been mapped out into ima

* Its population is so reported by the bishop of Labuan.




GEOGRAPHICAL POSITION.


ginary figures with corresponding names. The divisions
of the Ocean World are the following:-To the eastward, POLYNESIA; comprising the Sandwich, Marquesas, Society, Harvey, Friendly, New Zealand, and
Samoan groups. To the south, MELANESIA-inhabited
by black races; it includes the Figi (or Feejee), New
Hebrides and Solomon Archipelagoes, and New Guinea.
Still more south, AUSTRALAsIA-comprehending the
great land of Australia, and its dependencies. Westward, MALAISIA-embracing the East India Islands,
and inhabited principally by the Malay races. These
islands, six thousand in number, contain the largest in
the world, with the exception of Australia. Lastly,
situated somewhat centrally with respect to the other
groups, a region of small isles and islets, fitly named
MICRONESIA.
It is proposed in the following pages to give an
account of the most northerly cluster of the Polynesian
Archipelago, viz. the Hawaiian or Sandwich Islands.
And if on close inspection we find reason to remove the
place of the Islands of the Blest still onward with the
retreating horizon, and discover that, amidst natural
charms and delicious climate, vice and death and sorrow
hold their place, we only confirm the poet's discovery
that'things which to the world belong,
So false doth sad experience find,
She learns betimes among the throng,
To bound the kingdom to the mind.'
But we shall be made acquainted with a very interesting
people, evincing an extraordinary aptitude for European
civilisation, and possessing a ' government which, youthful as it is, will bear comparison with those of the best
2




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


ruled states in Europe.'* These islands have, moreover, a special interest to our countrymen at the present
moment, inasmuch as, at the invitation of their
sovereign, the English Episcopal Church has been
planted for the first time on their shores; not merely,
it is hoped, to enlighten that immediate spot, but to
shed its light across the waters to other island-homes.
The importance of the Sandwich Islands, politically
and commercially, arises from their particularly central
situation. They lie in a diagonal position from southeast to north-west, in a parallelogram rather exceeding
one formed by the 19th and 22nd degrees of north
latitude, and the 155th and 160th meridians of west
longitude; and it will be seen, by reference to a map,
that the group is nearly equidistant from the coasts of
America and Japan, and that a radius from its centre
would touch in succession the shores of central America,
the north-west States, the Russian territory, the Aleutian Archipelago, Japan, the Philippine Islands, Torres'
Straits, New Zealand, and the Feejee Islands. And
whilst Australia is just beyond the ambit, California
and Vancouver's Island are within a shorter distance of
the Hawaiian Islands.
Thus they form an oasis in the ocean desert-a stepping-stone between two worlds; and they afford a place
of refreshment of the utmost value for merchantmen
and the large fleet of whalers in the northern Pacific.
Commerce is establishing for itself a new road from east
to west, and from west to east, across the ocean; and
we still wait in expectation to see an opening forced
through the Isthmus of Panama, by which ships may
sail from sea to sea, carrying on the interchange of


* C. St. Julian.-' Report on Central Polynesia.'




IMPORTANCE OF THEIR SITUATION.


human labour and natural production, without the necessity of a protracted voyage round the South American
Continent, and consequent exposure in the inclement
and dangerous latitudes of Cape Horn.* Should the
Darien Ship Canal be constructed, the Hawaiian Islands
will assume a far greater importance than they have
yet had, for they lie in the very path which navigation
would then take. Even now, says a recent visitor, 'the
islands, on account of their position and the extent of
cultivable land they contain, enjoy advantages above
any other of the numerous groups which lie scattered
over the Pacific Ocean.'t
Humboldt, writing before the year 1822, says-' The
Sandwich Islanders are excellent sailors..... They
have attempted to build schooners, and even armed
vessels, with which they project distant expeditions... They have profited more from their communication with Europeans than all the other South Sea
islanders. The sphere of their ideas has been extended;
wants have been communicated to them which they
were ignorant of; and within these twenty years they
have made a considerable progress towards that social
state which we very improperly designate by the word
"civilisation."..  Perhaps this people will one day
be as formidable on the Great Ocean as the privateers
and pirates of the Bermudas and Bahama Islands and
Barbary who are dreaded in the Atlantic Ocean and the
Mediterranean.' t
The origin of the islands is clearly volcanic. This
* On the globe of John Schoner, made in 1520, and preserved in the
library of Nuremberg, a passage through the Isthmus of Panama is laid
down:-an interesting anachronism.
t Hill-' Travels in the Sandwich and Society Islands.' London, 1856.: ' Political Essay on the Kingdom of New Spain.' 1822.




6


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


tremendous agency, by which they were elevated from
the depths of the sea, 'and which has tossed up mountain peaks in Hawaii 14,000 feet above the water-level,
appears to have taken a direction from South-east to
North-west; the first exertion of force having been
greatest, and diminishing in intensity as it proceeded.
Thus Hawaii, the most Southerly island, has an area
of 4000 out of 6000 square miles, the whole superficial contents of the group; and it possesses also the
highest elevation; the two mountains Mauna Kea and
Mauna Loa being of nearly equal altitude, viz. 14,000
feet. On the side of the latter mountain is situated the
great volcanic crater Kilauea. Next in position to
Hawaii, is the island of Maui, with an area of 620
miles, and having in its neighbourhood the smaller
islands of Lanai and Kahoolawe. To the north-west of
Maui lies Molokai, a long narrow island extending east
and west, formed by a mountain ridge, which runs its
whole length. Next comes Oahu, with an area of 530
miles. Nearly two degrees beyond Oahu is situated
Kauai, 500 miles in extent. Last in order of the
greater islands is Niihau; and farther westward Kaula
rises, which, with one or two islets and uninhabited
rocks, shews itself the expiring effort of Plutonic energy.
The observations of Mr. Hill led him to an opposite
conclusion with regard to the direction and order in
which the islands were projected. He is of opinion that
Niihau was the first thrown up, and that the volcanic
action advanced towards the south-east, and increased
in energy till it culminated in Hawaii, the last and
largest link of the chain. As the grounds of this opinion,
he gives the more or less advanced state of the soil, the
progress of vegetation, and the cessation or diminution
of eruptions and earthquakes. Upon all these data he




THEIR ORIGIN.


7


decided Kaui to possess the greatest antiquity, and
Hawaii the least. He feels his opinion fortified by the
volcanic activity existing in Hawaii, and by the fact
that in 1837 an extraordinary retreat of the sea took
place from the shores of that island, followed by a
returning wave, indicating great disturbance, and giving
rise to the impression that another island was about to
rise to the south-east of Hawaii. The phenomena do
not appear quite conclusive in establishing the relative
dates of the islands. The oldest lava in Hawaii may
be, and probably is, overlaid by newer deposits and
thus concealed; and the present volcanic activity may
only shew that the original seat of energy remains unchanged; and that the action, greatest at Hawaii, expanded itself in a north-west direction,-its last result
being the rudimentary island of Niihau, and the rock
called Bird Island.*
The volcanic, though it is the primary, is not the
sole origin of the group. From the flanks of the submerged mountains the coral insect builds upwards its
wonderful structure, till it emerges from the waves as a
reef, more or less distant from the shore. The antiquity
of the islands is, shewn by their coralline formations,
which could only have attained their present elevation
by the incessant labours of an infinitude of insects,
acting through vast periods of time. In some places
there is a double reef; the outer line indicating, perhaps, the slow upheaving of the base of the mountains
from the sea-bottom subsequently to its first projection, until it approached sufficiently near the surface
of the water to fulfil the conditions necessary to insect
* Two slight earthquakes have been experienced since the commencement of the present year (1862) at Honolulu. On both occasions the
motion was from east to west.




8


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


existence.   The coral reefs of the Hawaiian islands are,
however, of much smaller extent than those of more
southern groups, and only appear on some of the
coasts.
As might be supposed from the igneous origin of the
islands, no metals are found on them.* Scoriae, decomposed lava, with sand, &c., are the materials of the soil;
but ledges of compact limestone are found at considerable elevations above the sea; portions of the bottom
of the ocean, probably forced upwards by the great
submarine eruptions which have produced the lofty
craters which abound. There is also found on the shore
a species of white stone, which, from the description received of it, would seem to be analogous to the English
'clunch,' used in the restorations of Ely Cathedral;
which, from the ease with which it is worked, is very
valuable for carved tracery. This stone, found in the
districts of Ewa and Waianae, island of Oahu, is soft
whilst lying in the water or under the sand, and easily
cut; but hardens by exposure to the sun. For building
purposes there are basalt, compact lava, coral rock and
sandstone.
* Ellis remarks a fact which appears an exception to the absence of
metals stated above. In journeying from the village of Keapuana, in
Hawaii to the foot of Mauna Loa, he crossed a waste or desert of fine
sparkling sand, into which the feet sank at every step. It was of a
dark olive colour, and adhered readily to the magnet. Unless meteoric,
it is difficult to account for its presence; and it recalls the tracts of steel
or ferruginous sand abundant on some of the shores of New Zealand.
Mr. Goodrich, one of Mr. Ellis's fellow missionaries, remarked also,
that when ascending the great mountain Mauna Kea, the compass,
which pointed true North whilst held in the hand, was deflected between two and three degrees to the eastward when placed on the blocks
of lava which abounded; and he attributed this effect to iron contained
in the mountain. May not the mass of the mountain in proximity alone
have produced the deflection?




SOIL AND PRODUCTIONS.


9


The regions of fertility lie at the bases of the inountains and in the valleys, where abrasion and disintegration have proceeded for untold years, and rich deposits
of vegetable mould have accumulated. Such a valley
runs up from the capital, Honolulu, among the hills;
and from the beautiful views it affords,-its grassy
slopes, its bridged rivulets, its villas, and especially
its air, which becomes more invigorating as the road
winds upward,-the Nuuanu Valley is one of the
favourite rides of the residents of Honolulu.
The soil is generally thin and poor, but this is not
universally the case; and it affords fine pasturage. On
the 'lands,' or grazing farms, are raised large herds,
which supply meat for the whalers and merchant-shipping, and thus find a ready market. Vast numbers of
horses also subsist on the islands, mostly of an inferior
kind; and it would be an advantage to the kingdom if
four-fifths of them were destroyed. They unnecessarily
consume the grass, and break the fences; but horseriding is a passion with the natives of both sexes.
Some of the islands are well supplied with rivers
and streams, particularly Hawaii and Kauai. Along
the shore of Hilo, a district of that island, sixty permanent streams of various sizes fall into the sea; whilst
their numerous branches and feeders thread the country, and give unrivalled facilities for irrigation.
Large forests abound, very dense, and broken with
chasms, ravines, and extinct craters. In making the
ascent of the two great mountains in Hawaii, twelve
miles of forest have to be passed through.
The great harbour of the group is Honolulu, situated
on the south side of Oahu. It is formed by an indentation of the coast, protected by a broad coral reef.
The channel through the reef has only twenty-two and




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


a half feet water at its shallowest part; so that though
the harbour is commodious, vessels drawing more than
twenty feet are excluded, and lie in the roadstead outside, where there is excellent anchorage, except during
a Souther, or 'Kona.' 'For shipping of less draught,
pilots are in attendance, and the vessels either run
through the channel on a wind, or, more generally,
are towed in. Ships go out of harbour under sail, as
for nine months in the year the trade wind is blowing
seaward.
Within the harbour there is plenty of space and every
convenience. On the right hand a battery, seated on
Punch-bowl Hill, commands the port.    There are
wharves and warehouses, conveniences for heaving ships
down for repairs, and pipes for supplying fresh water.
A steam-dredging machine is at work deepening and
cleaning the harbour. The inhabitants of Honolulu
speak with pride of 150 sail of shipping having been
seen in their port at one time.
During the year 1859, Honolulu was visited by two
British, one French, one American, and one Russian
ships of war: 109 merchantmen and 170 whalers
entered the harbour; whilst 19 merchant-ships and 79
whalers remained outside.
Eight miles westward, at Ewa, on the same island,
is an inland basin, in which the entire commerce of
the Pacific might lie; but this great harbour is almost
useless, from there being only twelve feet water on the
bar at low tide.
The next place of importance, as regards commerce,
is Lahaina, on the south-west or leeward side of Maui.
Five merchantmen and 116 whalers entered this road

* This number includes second and third visits of some of the vessels.




HARBOURS.


II


stead in 1859. On the north-west side of Hawaii, in
Byron's Bay, is the harbour of Hilo; spacious, and with
a good entrance through the wide coral reef. This port
is on the windward face of the island, and is not now
much frequented. Only two merchant-ships entered it
in 1859, and forty-nine whalers. Formerly it appears
to have been a place of greater resort. In 1846, four
men-of-war, sixty-seven whalers, and thirty-four trading
schooners arrived there. Three or four other harbours
are accessible; and other parts of the coast possess undeveloped potentialities. The estuary of Pearl River
(Oahu), for example, is a port, safe, large, and deep
enough to contain all the shipping of that ocean; but
its shallow channel will only permit small vessels to
enter.
Independent of the harbours, ships can lie at anchor
with safety in many of the roadsteads; which, though
they are exposed, have good holding ground, have no
dangers from hidden reefs or rocks, and the winds prevailing for nkne or ten months in the year are more or
less favourable, according to the bearing of the Trades
and Konas upon the coasts.




12


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


CHAPTER II.
PHYSICAL FEATURES AND PHENOMENA-VOLCANOES.
ON approaching the group from certain directions the
first objects which meet the sight are the two lofty
peaks on Hawaii, each 14,000 feet in height,-two miles
and a half,-one of them capped with perpetual snow,
which contrasts with the deep blue of the tropical sky
above, and with the darkness of the lava forming the
sides of the mountains. A rude and irregular outline of
high lands then presents itself; and on the north side
are seen, on a nearer view, the dark forests which clothe
the lower region of the mountains; whilst giddy
precipices front the sea, of from 1000 to 3000 feet in
perpendicular height, against whose walls the waves
beat and surge and thunder through the caverns which
they have hollowed for themselves in their ceaseless
war. In some places, streams which have united their
waters on their way, rush together over one of these
palis, or precipices, into the ocean. Still nearer, the
white foam is seen pouring in sheets over coral reefs,
of which there is sometimes an outer and inner ridge.
The islands are generally lofty; the small isle of Lehua,
near Niihau, having an elevation of 1000 feet. The
upland region of Kauai has an uniform height above
the sea of 4000 feet. Once through the reefs, or anchored in a leeward roadstead, scenes of gentler beauty




n  - - 
i-i~ --




I_




PHYSICAL CONFORMATION.


are discovered,-pleasant bays, with sandy shores, a
native village, often with its small chapel, and generally
with its school, sheltered by groves of palms and cokernut, and the deeper green of the bread-fruit tree; rivers
running to the sea, down some of whose cascades the
native girls and youths cast themselves with laughter,
and take a bath which must exceed any douche ever
experienced at the severest of our water-cure establishments. At the mountain-foot grassy plains meet the
forest, roamed over by herds of cattle, which in many
instances have become wild. Coffee plantations and
sugar-cane give their verdure to the cultivated districts.
The construction of the islands being essentially volcanic, the character of the scenery depends on that condition. Indeed, it is probable that they are but domes
concealing the vast internal fires, and the crust which
separates living nature from this great agent of destruction seems in places to be thin enough. Not that it is
to be supposed there is any want of permanence in
their existence; forests have grown old, and a hundred
generations of men have trod the hills and valleys in
security. During the late great eruption of Mauna Loa,
one of the newspapers published in Honolulu spoke of
the volcano as a national institution, of which the inhabitants of the islands were proud, and to which they
were, perhaps, almost attached.
The crater of Kilauea is the largest active one in the
world. Other volcanoes, of great size, exist in a state
of partial or entire quiescence. The crater on Mauna
Haleakala (House of the Sun), on Maui, has not been
active within the traditions of the people. Its dimensions exceed those of any crater known, being nine miles
in diameter, and 2000 feet in depth. Extinct volcanoes
are very common. They are of every age, size, and




14


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


shape; at some places crowning the summits of lofty
hills and mountains; elsewhere rising precipitously
from plains, or projecting into the ocean they form
prominent landmarks for navigators.  The singular
promontory, near Honolulu, called Diamond Head, is a
well-known instance. One uninhabited island of the
group, Molokini, is an extinct crater, crescent-shaped,
of slight elevation, with one side open to the sea.
The very remarkable salt lake, named Aliapaakai,
situated four miles from Honolulu, and one mile inland
from the sea, is probably the remains of a volcanic
crater. Its form is oval, being about a mile in circuit;
its elevation above the ocean is only a few feet, and its
general depth but eighteen inches. It is a natural
evaporating pan for the production of salt, which forms
abundantly on its surface at certain seasons, even to
bearing a man's weight on the deposit. The level of
the pool is slightly affected by the tides, which appear
to act through a hole which exists in its centre, and to
which it is said no bottom has been found. If a syphonlike connection is maintained, however, with the sea, it
is difficult to understand how the waters of the lake are
supported above the general hydrostatic level.
Deep conical pits are met with in the dense forests,
which hive probably also been craters. These are very
dangerous in traversing the woods, their mouths being
often concealed by trailing and orchidaceous plants.
One member of an expedition which ascended Mauna
Loa, in February 1859, to observe the great eruption,
lost his life by falling into a cavity of this kind. He was
recovered from the pit, but his spine was injured, and he
died a few days afterwards. Chasms and ravines also interrupt the forest, the scars of former cosmic convulsion.
In such a volcanic region earthquakes are not un



VOLCANIC PHENOMENA.


15


common; but they are severe only in Hawaii. At Hilo,
in that island, in the year 1838, the earth continued
in a state of agitation for two days and nights, causing
the plants to tremble, and producing in human beings
a sensation of nausea. Forty or fifty shocks occurred
in the space of eight days. In 1841, an earthquake
more severe was experienced; throwing down large
portions of rock from one of the palis of sheer cliffs,
but not destroying either house or life. Slight shocks
in all the islands are not uncommon.
In the Pacific there are various indications of the
submarine volcanic action. Ships occasionally feel a
blow from beneath, when traversing the deep sea, as
if they had struck on ground.  Nearer the coast of
South America marine geysers occur. From a small
circular space vapour is seen ascending, and on entering
the circle the water is found to be of scalding heat.
The great wave, or rising of the sea which occasionally
takes place, and sometimes with lamentable results, is
in all probability due to an earthquake below the
depths of ocean, producing unusually deep oscillation of
the waters. In December 1860, during fine weather
with very little wind, the sea gradually rose in the harbour of Kahului, Island of Maui, eight or ten feet above
its ordinary high-water level, spreading over the beach,
destroying several fences, but doing no further damage.
The next morning the sea, though still very full, had
greatly subsided in height, but throughout the day the
bay was full of rip-tides, and the water boiled as in
a kettle. At Maliko, on the same island, the sea ran
inland up a little valley, and washed away a small
hamlet of ten or twelve native houses, leaving only
one standing. As the rising was gradual, the people
received warning, and no lives were lost.




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


In 1746, the town of Callao, Peru, was destroyed by
a great wave; and during the present century risings
of the sea have occurred three or four times in the
Hawaiian Islands. The first, mentioned by Mr. Jarvis,
happened in Honolulu harbour, in the year 1809; but
that was caused by the bursting of a water-spout. It
caused the sea to rise three feet on the beach. In 1819,
another oscillation took place, but unattended with any
fatal consequences. On the 7th of November, 1837,
the sea was observed, at 5 P.M., to be suddenly and
rapidly retiring in the harbour of Honolulu. The barometer had not indicated any atmospheric change. The
fall was eight feet, and the reefs were left entirely dry.
Hundreds of the natives, who are as much at their ease
in water as they are on the land, pursued the retreating
wave, gathering up fish which were left stranded. The
sea then returned, and in about half an hour, had reached
the mark of its highest spring-tides. On receding again,
it fell six and a half feet. These marine vibrations
continued for about twenty hours, gradually diminishing, and then ceased. Their effects in the other islands
were more disastrous than at Oahu. On the windward
side the phenomena were increased by the trade wind
and the tides, which act on the north side of the group
with greater force. On Maui, the sea, having retired
about twenty fathoms, returned with great speed in one
great wave, sweeping before it canoes, houses, trees, and
human beings. At Kahului, the inhabitants followed
the retreating waters, full of delight; but suddenly they
rose like a steep wall, and, returning to the shore,
rushed forward, burying the natives in foam, and destroying the whole hamlet. Nevertheless, so perfect is
the islander's swimming science that only two persons
lost their lives. In Byron's Bay, Hawaii, far more




RISING OF THE SEA.


disastrous events occurred. In consequence of a religious meeting in the village, it was crowded with people.
At 6.30 P.M. the sea ran out at the rate of five miles
an hour, and left great part of the harbour dry. The
multitude gathered eagerly on the beach to witness
the unusual spectacle, when a gigantic wave came
roaring towards them, at the speed of seven or eight
miles per hour, its height being twenty feet above highwater mark, and dashed itself upon the shore with a
crash like thunder. The ruin was universal. People,
animals, houses, canoes, all property, were mingled entangled, and overwhelmed together-as when the horse
and his rider were buried by the Red Sea. Loud
wailing and cries of shrill distress were joined with the
hiss and roar of the flood, and made themselves heard
above it. The water was full of human beings struggling
for their lives among the floating wreck, or entangled
by it. The great wave had dashed over the deck of an
English whaler at anchor in the bay. As soon as her
crew recovered from the shock, they lowered their boats
and succeeded in saving many lives, for not a canoe had
escaped, and numbers of people, stunned and insensible,
were being floated seaward.  In one hamlet sixty-seven
habitations were destroyed, and eleven lives lost. The
destruction of food and other property was universal.
The wave struck the several islands from the same direction, rendering it probable that the force was generated
at a distance from the group. Although the action of
the crater of Kilauea, on Mauna Loa, had been unusually furious during the previous night, and new chasms
opened in it with violent explosions, no earthquake or
terrestrial disturbance was observed.
Of aerial phenomena, it is recorded that, on the 25th
of September, 1825, a great shower of meteoric stones
C




18


IHAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


fell at Honolulu, attended with very loud noises. Large
fragments struck the ground with such force as to indent
deeply the coral rock. Pieces of the stone were found
of from fourteen to twenty pounds weight.
The great volcano of Kilauea is situated on the eastern
ascent of Mauna Loa, in Hawaii. The crater is generally in activity; but as it never emits smoke, only
its moods of anger and of rarer violence are observable
from a distance. Several powerful eruptions have occurred in the memory of the present generation.  The
crater is situated about 4000 feet above the base of the
mountain, and is approached by a not very difficult
ride. Deep forests have to be traversed, and then rough
ground, formed of broken lava, and interrupted by
strong rapids and deep ravines. The brink of the gulf
being attained, an abyss confronts the spectator too
wide and too deep to allow him to see its opposite side
or its bottom, except the active portion of matter within,
burning and fusing, and hourly changing form. The
circumference of the orifice has been variously stated to
be six and nine miles, and its depth from 400 to 1000
feet. A gloomy mythology has not let escape so apt an
arena without adding her 'supernumerary horror.' This
was the dwelling-place of the terrible goddess Pele, the
most dreaded divinity of the Hawaiian Pantheon. Here,
in this fiery abyss, she, with attendant demons, bathed
and sported in its sulphurous waves. This, too, was
the scene of Christian courage triumphing over material
and supernatural terrors, when the converted chiefess,
Kapiolani, in the year 1825, dared the anger' of the
invaded goddess and the dangers of the way, and descended alone into the crater, casting from her hands
into the seething lava the sacred berries, as an open act
of desecration.




CRATER OF KILAUEA.


Though no smoke isemitted, a thin vapour arises
from the orifice, and by day hangs above it like a silvery
cloud. Mr. Hill, who made the ascent of Mauna Loa
in 1849, describes the varying effects of the light projected upwards from the crater as day declined to be
very beautiful. At a distance of twenty miles from the
volcano, he perceived a faint light in the sky when first
daylight began to diminish. As darkness increased, the
light assumed the appearance of the Aurora borealis in
its most fixed condition. When night was complete,
the glare, seen from the brow of a hill, was like that of
a vast forest in flames; while the vapour, which floated
high above the crater, threw down its reflection of the
volcanic fire, enhancing the effect by a mirror-like repetition. On reaching the brink of the gulf, lava was
seen issuing from a dark cone, apparently in the centre
of the pit, and ran down in a vast stream of liquid fire
into a bed of luminous vapours. At sunrise the crater
assumed a very different appearance. Mr. Hill and his
companions turned their eyes from the splendid effects
of light, as the two great peaks ' stood up and took the
morning,' gathering colour from the unseen orb, and
rising into the heavens, as by some magic power, from
the abyss of vapours floating lower down, whilst peaks,
hills, forests, and. deep ravines, caught in succession the
sun's beams, till day was again established upon a beautiful earth. They looked into the crater, which nothing
could exceed in frightful desolation. By the latest
actual surveys, its form is oval, having the length of
three miles and a half, and a breadth of two miles and
a half, giving a circumference of nine miles. Its height
above the sea-level is about 6000 feet. Within, two
high back cones rose in the midst of a rude plain of
black and pink-coloured lava, rocky substances being
c 2




20


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


thrown up into hills of no mean dimensions. Around
the cones lay a lake of liquid fire, which appeared ready
to overthrow the cool beds forming the more even part of
the lava plain. A curious fibrous substance, resembling
threads of flax, but brittle as glass, is found adhering to
the bushes round the banks of the crater. In many
places it covers the shrubs like cobwebs. ' Pele's hair'
is the appropriate name given to these fibres found so
near the dwelling of that most feared and dread divinity.
Eight hundred feet below the brink of the abyss a
ledge of hard lava encircles the changing contents of
the volcano. The descent to this ledge is rough and
difficult, but not impracticable: it occupied Mr. Hill
about half an hour.  Continuing on the ledge, and
steering by a compass and by recollection of the appearance of the crater from above, he and his companions
proceeded for a quarter of a mile, till they were stopped
by huge basaltic blocks, confusedly piled up, and rising
to the height of three or four hundred feet. Taking a
new direction, they again approached the banks of the
crater, which they found in one place were formed of
immense deposits of pure sulphur. The plain on which
they now walked was smoother; but several deep cavities were passed, caused by sinkings of the volcanic
matter after cooling. Two more hours of difficult march
brought them to the brink of the great lake of liquid
fire —' the Stygian lake forlorn'-in the midst of which
rose the two remarkable cones they had previously seen.
Jets of the seething cauldron were thrown upwards at
intervals, and hissing vapour oozed from many fissures
in the fixed lava-bed on which they trod, the form of
which was continually changing.  The appearance of
the inner walls of the crater was remarkable, exhibiting
irregular patches of calcareous and other earths; and




DESCENT OF THE CRATER.


the whole effect was so illusive, that it was impossible
to decide how far the explorers were from the sides.
This uncertainty was probably in part caused by heterogeneous vapours mixing at different temperatures,
and from the novelty of the whole circumstances. As
they gazed, the illusion took an extraordinary form.
They seemed to see before them an immense country
stretching from the lava-plain at their feet, varied by
hills and dales, upon whose slopes flocks of sheep were
grazing, whilst cities and villages studded this land of
fa6ry.
The adventurous travellers next descended about one
hundred feet, through fissures and by ledges, till they
stood beside some small pools of molten elementsdetached outposts of the great central, unbroken sea of
fire.* Enduring a good scorching, and covering their
faces, they were able to dip the ends of their staves into
these pools, and the green wood was reduced instantly
to ashes. The two great cones, rising high and dark
amidst the fiery turmoil, excited their extremest interest.
Seeking some means of approaching nearer to them,
and proceeding along the ledge of firm lava, they arrived
at a sort of natural bridge, or inclined causeway, across
the gulf, connecting the ledge with one of the cones.
They commenced traversing the ascending causeway,
the upper part of which was, in places, a thin, brittle
crust, separated from one to five feet from the more
solid matter below, and through which upper lamina
one of the party fell. When halfway across, they paused
to contemplate the terrible scene. At a great depth
beneath boiled the fiery pool; above them appeared a
huge conduit of unchained fire; and on all sides a region
* It is proper to say that the descent has been frequently made by
ladies.




22


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


of frightful desolation. The two travellers and their
native guide had not long recommenced climbing when
their course was suddenly arrested. The infirm lavacrust beneath their feet began to shake ominously, whilst
frightful, unearthly sounds from the mouth of the cone
pierced their ears. As soon as they were released from
the first panic, which transfixed them, they commenced
the most rapid retreat in their power along the causeway. But before they had advanced many paces towards
the lava-plain, the prelude of mighty blasts changed to
cracks of near thunder, and immense masses of hot lava
were thrown to a great height. The travellers' immediate danger was that of being crushed by the falling
lava, and from this there was no shelter. At first the
blocks issuing perpendicularly, fell back into the crater;
but they then began to fall beyond the cone, plunging
into the gulf on both sides the causeway, or rolling
past the travellers with a terrible impetuosity. Some
even fell on their frail bridge, broke through, and
were lost beneath it. Through the wild uproar and
confusion Mr. Hill and his companions finally reached
the firm ledge in safety. Within the general crater,
which they explored, there are several more of these
volcanic tumuli, some extinct, or active at intervals
only. There are on Mauna Loa several other ancient
craters, from which, at present, streams of vapour alone
issue. The temperature on the mountain varied, during
the twenty-four hours, from 17 to 50 degrees Fahrenheit.
The many volcanoes on the sides of the sister heights of
Mauna Kea are entirely inactive.
From  about the middle of 1856, for nearly three
years, the volcano continued in a state of more than
usual energy. Rivers of lava rolled downwards, through
the forest, and over precipices, destroying the native




ERUPTION OF 1859.


23


kalo grounds, and rendering villages uninhabitable.
They found their way through valleys even to the shore,
until in deadly struggle with the waves their course
was stayed,-the temperature of the sea being so raised
during the conflict as to kill great quantities of fish.
On the 23rd of January, 1859, a great eruption conmmenced on Mauna Loa. The lava took a northerly
direction, rounded the side of another mountain, and by
the 28th, had debouched over the plateau and run
some distance into the sea; destroying in its way a small
fishing village.  At the same time an interruption of
the trade-wind took place, probably having some connection with the volcanic action. Sight-seers, who are
indigenous to all lands, hastened to Hawaii. They were
rewarded by a spectacle of indescribable grandeur. The
fire rose 250 feet above the crater, taking, sometimes,
the form of a cone of flame; at others, that of a jet de
feu, before which all artificial pyrotechnics would have
had to pale their ineffectual fires.  The descending
lava presented a head of incandescence 200 rods in
width, curving over the mountain-sides like a blood-red
snake, and occasionally leaping sheer down a pali.
On the 9th of February an observing party left the
College at Honolulu for the purpose of ascending to the
crater.  It was one of their number who was killed, as
previously mentioned, by falling into a concealed pit in
the forest. On the 15th, Capt. Montresor, in H. B. M.s
ship 'Calypso,' conveyed the king and his suite, from
Oahu to Hawaii, to observe' the phenomena of the eruption. Its first appearance, seen at night from sea, was
that of a star having two rays of light depending from
it,-a double-comet, in fact, —hanging two-thirds up
the mountain-side. Landing at Kaawoloa, or Cook's
Bay, the expedition commenced their ascent, and having




24


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


passed through a forest seven miles in breadth, emerged
on a plateau 5000 feet above the sea-level, affording a
good site for observation. By daylight, two great and
solemnly moving rivers were seen flowing northward
and westward from the crater, with subsidiary streams.
Their motion was marked by the sudden ignition of
trees, which fell in that short, fiery embrace. The appearance at night is thus described: 'The immense
arena; the intense glare of the flows and fissures covering the mountain-side, to the height of some 6000 feet
above us, describing horizontal lines and points of
molten mineral matter; the sullen glow above the
crater and inferior orifices from which the lava issued;
the fire and smoke rising from the far-off streams, and
those nearer at hand, in which latter, every now and
then, the burning trees threw up their wreathed flames,
like the arms of an agonised victim-added to the sort
of glimmer and twinkle seen on a frosty night, produced
a spectacle of such grandeur that words before it become
powerless. If on some mountain-side the largest fire
that ever devastated San Francisco could be reproduced,
and four or five hundred domes, like that of St. Peter's
at Rome when illuminated, be dotted about on the
slopes below, the general effect might be that of a very
pretty miniature on ivory of the eruption on Mauna
Loa. Every five minutes or so, some new chasm or
torrent shewed itself, comparable at first to the spark
of a glow-worm, but suddenly extending like a train of
gunpowder.'
Lest this picture should seem to be somewhat deeply
tinged with that excusable exaggeration in which new
impressions from great natural phenomena often clothe
themselves, we will add to it the more scientific account of the eruption given by Professor Alexander,




ERUPTION OF 1859.


25


of the Punahou College. He describes the jet, when
first seen by his party, as 300 feet in height; in form
and movement exactly like a fountain, and accompanied
by immense columns of steam. By day his companions
explored the craters. The principal sources of action
were two cones, about 150 feet high, composed of
pumice and fragments of lava. The suffocating gases
which escaped from the red-hot ventholes of these furnaces, rendered it a matter of danger to approach them.
At night, the party encamped by a fresh lava-stream,
which served well for all cooking purposes. The next
morning they followed the central flow from the lower
crater, and reached its outlet from its subterranean
channel. Its appearance, there, was that of a pool of
blood, a few rods in width, boiling up like a spring, and
spouting out thick, clotted masses to the height of ten
or twenty feet. On the lower side it poured like a cataract of molten metal at white heat, down a descent of
about fifty feet, with a roar like that of a heavy surf.
Keeping to windward, and protecting their faces with
their hats, they approached the brink. The lava appeared almost as fluid as water, and ran with a velocity
which the eye could scarcely follow. For several miles
the fiery river was a continuous series of rapids and
cataracts. They travelled for three or four hours along
the edge of the stream. The open part of the canal was
from  twenty to fifty feet wide; but the stream  was
really broader, because both its banks were undermined
to a considerable distance. Over this part of it, flowing
beneath their steps, there were frequent openings,
through which they could see the rushing torrent a few
inches below their feet. 'To describe the scene,' says
Professor Alexander, ' is impossible. For the first time
we saw actual waves and actual spray of liquid lava.




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


As its surges rolled back from the enclosing walls of
rock, they curled over and broke like combers on the
reef.  There was, besides, an endless variety in its
forms. Now we passed a cascade; then a smooth majestic river; then a series of rapids, tossing their waves
like a stormy sea; now rolling into lurid caverns, the
roofs of which were hung with red-hot stalactites; and
then under arches, which it had thrown over itself in
sportive triumph.'  After pursuing the great stream
some miles, it reticulated into so many rivulets, which
formed the ground between them into islands, that it
required great caution not to be isolated on the latter.
The lava often penetrated caves, and blew them up with
loud explosions. Where the flow debouched upon the
ocean, it filled up a bay, and formed a promontory in
its stead. Through the first six months of the year 1859,
the volcano continued in unabated activity. Among
its results, it produced a drought in the district of
North Kona, all the wells there having become dry.
When Mr. Ellis* visited Kilauea in 1823, he and his
companions observed fifty-one conical crater-islands of
various sizes rising round the edge, or from the surface
of the burning lake. Twenty-two of these constantly
emitted columns of grey smoke, or pyramids of brilliant
flame, and several of them  vomited streams of lava.
The conclusion they arrived at, as to the present formation and condition of the crater was, that it had been
originally full to the horizontal black ledge of lava 400
feet below the surface of the ground. From this ledge,
the cliffs, composed of strata of ancient lava, rose perpendicularly.  This we may call the first or upper crater.
The second, or inferior crater, descended from the black


* 'Missionary Tour through Hawaii.' London. 1826, 1827.




CONSTRUCTION OF THE CRATER.


ledge some three or four hundred feet, with sloping
sides; its floor being the burning lake with extended
cones, described above. It was Mr. Ellis's opinion, that
this fiery bottom was only a roof or diaphragm, of no
great thickness, the upper and solidified portion of
incandescent matter of the volcano; and that the liquid
mass had quite recently sunk away from it, and found a
subterranean outlet to the ocean; inasmuch as the great
rising of the sea, previously spoken of, had occurred
only three weeks before his visit to the volcano. The
pent-up gases and fluid matter found vents through the
numerous mammelons, on the upper flooring of the
crater. The natives, too, believed that Pele had an
underground exit from the mountain to the sea; and
we know that heathen myths are often poetic renderings of natural facts. There were other symptoms of a
great flow of lava about the same time, though unseen.
At Kaimu, a village on the south-east coast, about two
months previous to Mr. Ellis's arrival, a slight earthquake was felt; and after the tremulous motion, the
earth cracked in a fissure, taking a direction from northby-east to south-by-west, and extending several miles.
The fracture was perpendicular, and the chasm not
more than two feet in width. Smoke and luminous
vapour were emitted from it at the time of the occurrence.
Of the craters on Mauna Hualalai, on the western
side of Hawaii, the largest seen by Mr. Ellis was about
one mile in circumference, and 400 feet deep. This
was extinct at the time of his visit; but in 1800 a
great eruption took place from it. On that occasion
the stream of lava which flowed from the volcano filled
up a bay nearly twenty miles long, and formed a headland, which runs out three or four miles into the ocean.




28


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


Adjoining this pit was a much smaller one, from which
sulphurous vapour ascended.   Sixteen other craters
were examined by his party on the same mountain.
On the next island, Maui, lying north-west of Hawaii,
is the mountain Mauna Hale-a-ka-la, ' the house of the
sun.' A journey on horse of about six hours brings the
traveller from the foot of the mountain to the brim of
the largest crater in the world.  Mr. Cheever, who
visited the spot in 1850, says that as he and his party
advanced to its edge, there suddenly opened upon them
a pit, twenty-five or thirty miles in circumference, and
two or three thousand feet deep. They counted in it
about sixteen basins of old volcanoes-volcano within
volcano. To the north-east and to the south-east two
vast openings broke the lava walls; sluice-gates, out of
which the molten lava and sand once poured down to
the sea. On the sides of the volcanic cones grew large
plants of the silver-sword (ensis armentec), looking,
at that distance from the spectator, like little white
pebbles. From the elevated position where the party
stood, 10,000 feet above the sea level, the scene was
magnificent. Four thousand feet below them was a vast
expanse of cloud, like new-fallen snow, rolled in drifts
and ridges, and which reflected the sunbeams upwards
with dazzling splendour. When this sea of cloud broke,
the island of Lanai was seen, lying directly west, over the
mountain-tops of Lahaina, themselves having a height
of 6000 feet. Trending off to the horizon, a hundred
miles, lay the blue Pacific, not seeming far beneath
them, but as if lifted up to their own plane of vision.*
Rising out of the ocean was the dome of Mauna Loa,
* Edgar Poe gives a graphic description of the effect of the rising
of the horizon round an aeronaut as he ascends from the earth in a
balloon.




CRATER OF HALE-A-KA-LA.


29


on Hawaii, its snow-capped summit flashing in the sun
like a bank of alabaster. The clouds, and their shadows
seen on other clouds far beneath, hovered over the blue
deep, sometimes seeming to float in it like great icebergs. The extent covered by the vision on each of
three sides of the mountain, was at least 200 miles.
The following account of a visit to the crater of
Hale-a-ka-la made in 1865, occurs in a letter from
Mrs. Mason, wife of the Archdeacon of Lahaina, Maui:Early next day we set off and had a lovely, though tiresome
journey up to the summit of Hale-a-ka-la. As we went up
we passed through the clouds, which we could see as thin
mist all round. The rare air made Mr. M. feel sick and faint.
It is a very peculiar sensation, a lightness of your head.
When we got up I threw myself at the edge of the crater, and
gazed my fill. I cannot give an idea of the sight, but it strikes
one dumb with awe. You look down many thousand feet of
steep declivity into this vast crater. In it are thirteen little
craters, which only look like small mounds, but really are
mountains of red lava: beneath you are seen clouds floating
midway between you and the crater. Sometimes it is clear,
and then you see the clouds, floating in at the narrow neck of
the crater, wreath themselves into fantastic shapes, and in five
minutes fill it. In the distance, tower the Hualalai and the
Mauna Kea of Hawaii. The crater looks as though one could
walk through it easily, but it takes a week to ride round the
mouth of it! The sun sank to rest in a bed of rosy clouds,
and was a glorious sight, as was also the young moon rising.
We sat up late round a large wood fire, and then slept in a
tent; I did not suffer from the cold, though when I rose next
day I was reminded of an English frosty morning. It was
rather too cloudy to see the sun rise to advantage, but the sight
of the vast crater, and those wonderful clouds sailing beneath
our feet, amply repaid us for the exertion. We saw several
bright meteors flashing, leaving a long trail of light, but they
are very common here. One thing struck us, the sense of




30


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


stillness. One could feel the silence. Not a sound or sign of
life, vegetable or animal, in that vast crater.
From the foregoing accounts of the volcanic condition of the islands, it is possible that some readers, who
may have entertained an idea of visiting them, may
infer that there is a degree of general instability about
the country, and a consequent want of permanence in
its institutions. The supposition is a mistaken one;
the Hawaiian Islands and their institutions are probably
as permanent as other portions of the globe which are
removed a little farther fromn the central fires. And
with regard to persons who are not certain about the
strength of their nerves, it is by no means incumbent
on them    to make the actual descent into the crater of
Kilauea.*
* From experiments instituted by Arago, Marcet, and others, and
lately by observations made in sinking a deep mine at Dukinfield, in
which a depth of 2100 feet has been attained, it is well ascertained
that a gradually increasing temperature attends the descent from the
surface of the earth, and bears at different depths ascertainable ratios
to the depression; any irregularities being dependent,. apparently,
on the different strata pierced, their conducting power for heat, &c.
The rate of increase varies from about 1 degree in 50 feet to 1
degree in 100 feet. On this scale, boiling point of water would be
reached at a depth of two and a half miles; and at forty miles beneath
the earth's surface the deduced temperature would be 3000 degrees, at
which heat every metal and every rock would be in a state of fusion.
Mr. W. Fairbairn, LL.D., read an interesting paper upon the thermometrical experiments in the Dukinfield mine, at the Manchester Literary
and Philosophic Society, in April 1861.




31


CHAPTER III.
CLIMATE-PRODUCTIONS-COMMERCE.
THOUGH situated within the tropics, the Hawaiian
Islands enjoy a propitious climate; one belonging rather to the temperate than to the torrid zone.
There is scarcely a place on the globe which has a temperature so equable as that of Honolulu, one of more
desirable register, or where the elements are kindlier
mixed. So invisible is the subject of weather to the
islanders, that Mr. Jarvis remarks their language has
no word to express the general idea. The diurnal range
of the thermometer in Honolulu, is twelve degrees.
During twelve years the extremes of temperature in
shade were 90~, and 53~; the entire range during that
long period not exceeding 37~.  In Canada, near
Montreal, about the beginning of March of the year
1861, a variation of 80~ occurred in forty-eight hours.
The mean temperature of the capital of the islands is
about 75~. At Lahaina the thermometrical range in
ten years was 32~; viz., from 54~ to 86~; and during no
day in that period did the variation exceed 19~. What
may be called the summer and winter seasons correspond pretty nearly with our own-June being the
warmest month, January the coldest. Honolulu, Lahaina, and some other places on the shores, are, from
their genial climate, eminently serviceable to invalids
suffering from pulmonary complaints. On the leeward




32


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


side of the islands, and away from the mountains, little
rain falls, and the sun is rarely obscured by cloud. For
about nine months of the year the north-east trade-wind
blows uninterruptedly; that north-east wind, so dreaded,
so disliked, often so fatal, in our own Continent,-' neither
good for man nor beast;' but there a wind coming down
from the temperate regions, and softened by passing
over 2000 miles of ocean. During its prevalence, the
leeward side of the islands basks in the 'bright sunny
lapse of a long summer day;' inducing by the very
beauty of the weather some degree of enervation in the
human system, and a corresponding lotus-eating condition of mind. A more bracing air may be obtained by
ascending the mountains. A mere ride from the capital
up the Nuuanu Valley will give a cooler climate in an
hour. Lahaina and some other leeward spots on the
shore, possess the refreshing influence of a regular land
and sea breeze. Above Lahaina, at an elevation of 3000
feet, is Mountain Retreat, with a temperature varying
from 40~ to 75~, and at Waimea, Hawaii, the average
reading is 64~, the minimum being 48~. But though
on the mountains, owing to the nature of the soil, the
ground does not remain damp, rains are very frequent;
and on the upland region of Kauai, at a height of 4000
feet, fires are required even in the month of July. The
vast quantity of vapour absorbed into the atmosphere
below, becomes condensed by the masses of the mountains, so that showers and mists are habitual with them,
and the two loftiest peaks of Hawaii are rarely free from
a belt of cloud. On the windward side of the islands
the climate is rougher, and the rain-fall much more
abundant. Whatever there is of disagreeable in the
weather of the leeward districts, occurs at the time of
the change, or rather interruption, of the Monsoon.




CLIMATE.-PRODUCTIONS.


33


Then violent winds sweep through Honolulu, eddying
in the streets, and, no doubt, do their work in purifying
and dispelling stagnant air and unwholesome exhalations. Rains of a tropical character fall at this season,
and also play their part in flushing streets and cleansing
hidden corners. But the sybarites of the capital dislike
the three months' interval of settled calmness, complain of it, and write little pasquinades on the weather
in their newspapers. Sometimes, perhaps, this may
not be without cause. One January lately, it rained
at Lahaina continually for eight days, and the rain
was accompanied by furious squalls from the eastward. A shower that lasts eight days may seem to
indicate weather not so genial; but it occurs only at one
season. After all, it is not much worse than the climate
of Killarney, and is not to be compared with the rains
of intertropical India, or to Venezuela, where, according
to Humboldt, it rained incessantly for ten months.*
Of the natural productions of the islands, the indigenous Fauna is small. It consists of swine, dogs, rats,
and a bat, which, forgetful of the decencies, flies by
day. Of birds, domestic fowls appear to be native. In
the mountainous region of Hawaii wild geese abound,
but do not approach the shore. Snipes, plovers, and
wild ducks are found on all the islands. There are only
a few species of singing birds; Ellis mentions one with
an exceedingly sweet note, resembling that of the
English thrush. Some of the birds are remarkable for
the beauty of their plumage; a small paroquet of glossy
purple, the tropic bird, the feathers of which are used
to form the kahili, a kind of fan carried near the king
* Ellis gives a meteorological table kept by the American missionaries in Oahu during one year. By this, rain fell on only forty days
of the twelve months, and only forty-seven days besides were cloudy.
D




34


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


and chiefs as one of their insignia, and a species of woodpecker, with a variegated plumage of yellow, red, and
green, from which the heads of some of the idols and
the beautiful cloaks and helmets of the chiefs were
made. A bird* inhabits the mountainous parts of the
islands having under each wing a single feather of
yellow colour, one inch in length. The birds were
caught by means of a viscous substance smeared on
poles, and the two precious feathers were secured.  Of
such feathers alone was the man o, or war-cloak, of
Kamehameha composed. - This invaluable mantle was
four feet long, and eleven feet and a-half in width at
the bottom. Its formation occupied nine successive
reigns.
Formerly, no poisonous or noxious reptile was a denizen
of the islands, except centipedes; and these were not
large in size or numerous. Since intercourse with other
nations commenced, however, insects and vermin, the
camp-followers of civilisation, have made their appearance. A small lizard was abundant. Few species of
insects were found, but they numbered among them
some which were destructive to vegetation, particularly
a caterpillar, having the native name of pelua.
Many varieties of fish frequented the shores, but not
in such abundance as in some other groups. The Hawaiians were expert fishermen; and they used, as once
was done in Europe, to preserve and fatten fish in tanks
or stews. Such perfect confidence had the natives in
the water, that one of their amusements was to attack a
shark, and after having evaded and taunted him, to kill
him with a dagger carried in the maro or girdle. On
the reef is fished the Sea Slug, or Beche de Mer (holo

* 3M!ithreptes Pacifica.




VEGETATION.


35


thuria), which when dried and prepared forms an
important article in the cuisine of China: 7135 lbs.
of this marine production, in a dry state, were exported
in 1864, and the fishery may be profitably increased.
The vegetable kingdom in the islands included among
its indigens the sugar cane, the bread fruit, plantain,
banana, cocoa-nut, candle-nut, calabash, and other
palms; tree-ferns, having the stem fifteen feet in
height, and cycas. Valuable timber trees grew in the
forests on the flanks of the mountains; the Kou tree
(Cordia), the Koa, and others of hard and heavy wood
with a handsome grain. Sandal wood abounded on the
heights, but was lavishly cut down as an article of commerce, till the tree was nearly exterminated. Of fruitbearing trees, shrubs, and flowering plants, there were
the Hibiscus, Pandanus odoratissime, the Ohia, a tree
producing plentifully a juicy, pulpy, but rather insipid
fruit, red, and of the size of an apple; the Mairi, a very
fragrant plant, from which wreathes were made; the
Ohelo, a shrub bearing abundantly edible berries, and
which belonged in an especial manner to the goddess of
the volcano, Pele; the prickly pear, &c. Strawberries and
raspberries were plentiful on the highlands of Hawaiitheir fruit large, but inferior in flavour to the British
kinds. From the Kukui was obtained a useful oil; from
the sweet potato, an intoxicating drink; and they had
the Gardenia among the flowers with which they were
accustomed to adorn themselves. On the whole, however, vegetation was not so bountiful in this group as in
the Society Islands.
Three indigenous plants require special notice from
their extreme value and importance to the natives.
The first is the taro (Arum esculentum). It formed
the staple of their food, and is still very generally used.
D 2




36


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


This succulent root was sometimes cooked, but was more
generally pounded into a semi-fluid mess, and allowed
partially to ferment, when it was called poi. Among
the reasons which made some Hawaiians object to visiting England was that poi could not be obtained here.
Poi requires very industrious cultivation. It is grown
in pits or beds, kept very wet; but under diligent culture
it is so productive that it has been said, a taro pit
a few yards in length will supply food for one man
throughout the year. Beechey says* that at the time
of his visit to the Hawaiian Islands, ' On gaining the
heights at Oahu, extensive taro plantations were seen
filling every valley; and Oahu was distinguished by the
name of the Garden of the Sandwich Islands.'
Another esculent arum, the mountain taro, grows
on the higher ground, and in very dry soil. Its value is
comparatively little.
The second to be mentioned is the cloth-plant (Morus
papyrifera), in the native tongue wauti. From the
inner bark of the young shoots were made the fine and
very beautiful cloths for which the islands were famous.
The osier-like plants are very carefully tended, and
when the rods springing from the roots attained the
length of ten or twelve feet, which they did in a year
or eighteen months, they were cut, at a certain season;
and by careful and delicate processes, the inner bark or
liber was separated; and women, sometimes a chiefess
and her female attendants, devoted themselves to make
from it tapa, or cloth, of various degrees of fineness.
By beating it with a mallet, having different patterns
carved on its four faces, several varieties of cloth were
produced. These formed the pau, or women's garment,


* 'Narrative of a Voyage to the Pacific,' &c., vol. i. 316.




NATIVE MANUFACTURES.


37


reaching from the waist nearly to the ancles; the maro,
or narrow cloth worn by the men round the loins; the
sleeping-cloths of the chiefs, &c.  The people had a
method of printing the tapa with very beautiful colours,
derived from vegetables and earth; and they even
scented the somewhat scanty habiliments of the female
with sandal wood and pandanus seeds.
The last indigenous plant of importance is the ti
(Draccena). Its leaves are used in thatching houses and
huts, and were also employed for symbolical purposes
connected with religion and tabu. A branch of this
plant was the emblem of peace, corresponding with the
olive of Europe. In times of war it was carried, together with a young plantain tree, as a flag of truce.
Its lustrous green leaves woven by their stalks formed
a short cloak used by the islanders in their mountain
journeys. It was planted round inclosures, its intertwined stems forming a valuable permanent hedge. Its
roots, large, woody, and fusiform, were baked and eaten.
When macerated and fermented there is produced from
them an intoxicating drink. Another plant, the Awa
(Piper' mythysticum), yields a beverage still more potent,
and has been a constant subject of legislation and police.
The effects of azwa do not end in inebriation; it possesses
curative powers in disease, and its action, from Beechey's
account, is very remarkable in obstinate cutaneous disorders.* Ellis also thinks it an excellent antiscorbutic.
Vancouver, in 1792-93, introduced cattle in the
islands; and various useful seeds were given to the
natives by that great and generous navigator. From that
time foreign animals and plants have been imported.
Large herds of cattle are now grazed, and a very profit

* 'Narrative of a Voyage to the Pacific, 1831.' Vol. ii. 120.




38


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


able trade was, till lately, carried on in supplying the
merchant shipping and whalers with beef, which is also
exported to California. Flocks, too, are raised, but sheep
are not always successful; the temperature of the lowlands being too high for their proper habitude. They
answer better in the mountain districts; but the Hawaiians are not fond of the hills as a residence, with
their chill and showers. Horses have multiplied since
their introduction with extraordinary rapidity. Numbers
of them roam about at their own sweet will, breaking
fences and treading down crops, having lost a good deal
of their equine civilization, and re-entered on a semisavage state. There is almost a plague of horses in
Oahu, and their abundance has encouraged a passion in
both sexes for furious riding, dangerous in itself, and to
one part of the community very detrimental. It is not
to be wondered at that a people whose former delight
was in war, who would fight without armour, and make
a single battle last eight days; who, at the present time,
for their pleasure plunge down waterfalls, swim amongst
the breakers that burst over the reefs, and fight sharks
in single combat, should seize on a new muscular excitement with animation, and ride the last hobby nearly
to death. If nine-tenths of the common horses now
on the islands were destroyed it would prove a great
advantage to the inhabitants.
The table of Inland Revenue for 1860 gives 27,663
horses returned for taxation; and we may conclude the
actual number to have been greater, when we consider
the nature of the return. If to the horses be added
2781 mules, we have one animal to nearly every two
persons in the Hawaiian Islands. The value of horses
fluctuates a good deal: sometimes they fetch a fair
price, up to about a hundred dollars. The supply must




EXOTIC INTRODUCTIONS.


39


occasionally exceed the demand; and a sale of stock
was noticed in the 'Polynesian' lately, in which a
mare and two fillies were sold for a quarter of a
dollar-about one shilling! A   moderate price for
horse-flesh in any country.
Among exotic plants introduced, the most important
are the coffee-tree, cotton, indigo, tobacco, wheat, the
Irish potato, cocoa, the grape-vine, orange, citron,
melon, cucumber, pine-apple, fig, tamarind, guava,
and various fruits; beans, onions, cabbages, pumpkin,
and other vegetables. Coffee has thriven well, and
forms a valuable article of export from the islands,
where there are now large, well-cultivated plantations.
The berry is of a fine kind, but for a few years past a
blight, produced by an insect of the coccinea tribe, has
injured the trees and greatly reduced the crop. Indigo
jrows freely, and some specimens or samples of the dye
have been sent to Hamburg; but the article was badly
made and the quality was too inferior to encourage its
manufacture. The silk-worm may some day be tended
successfully, and the mulberry flourishes well.  Wheat
mnd potatoes thrive on the uplands of Maui; the sweet:otato is indigenous.
Commerce is carried on to some extent with most?arts of the world. About four-tenths of the imports
ire from the Atlantic side of the United States, and
tbout one-fourth is from the Pacific coasts of North
america. Great Britain stands next in order; then
lamburg and Bremen; China and Japan each send
heir contingent of merchandise; France furnishes her
vines and brandy; and by the custom-house returns for
he year 1860, goods were entered at Honolulu from
vancouver's Island, the Russian possessions, Tahiti,
Thili, and some other places. Guano was brought from




40


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


the Chincha Islands, and from  some islands named
Baker's and Jarvis's, a few days' sail from Hawaii.
The commerce of the islands was formerly dependent
in a great measure on the whaling trade of the North
Pacific. A large quantity of oil and bone is landed and reexported. In 1860, the transhipments of oil from Honolulu and Lahaina were 829,945 gallons, and of whalebone
571,966 lbs. The total number of whalers entering
Hawaiian ports in that year was 325 vessels; but several
ships made their appearance at more than one port,
and are entered for the spring and fall seasons. The
actual number of separate whalers engaged during the
autumn or fall of 1860 was 132; of which nine belonged
to the Hawaiian Islands, and 113 were American owned.
The fishery had been comparatively an unsuccessful
one. In the previous year the quantities of oil and
bone had respectively exceeded those of 1860 by 86,256
gallons of the former article, and 20,522 lbs. of the latter.
The total number of whalers visiting the Hawaiian
ports in 1859 was 549 visits, against 325 visits in 1860.
The failing of the 'catch' in the North Pacific does
not appear to be a temporary fluctuation, but has indicated itself for three successive seasons.  The whales
appear to have been over-fished-a consequence of the
great profits made by vessels employed in this trade in
the previous years-and to have migrated to other seas.
In 1864, the whaling trade was still farther diminished.
The whole number of visits in Hawaiian ports was 140;
and the transhipments wereSperm oil....   33,860 gallons
Whale oil....  608,502 gallons
Bone.....  339,381 lbs.
Of domestic exports (exclusive of oil and bone) sugar,




TABLE OF EXPORTS.


41


wool, hides, and coffee are the most important. The
following table shows the nature and quantities of
Hawaiian productions shipped at Honolulu in 1864:

Sugar.     10,414
Molasses and syrup
Coffee.
Pulu*
Hides 
Beef
Poit
Salt
Flour
Sweet potatoes
Fungus 
Horses
Mules
Wool
Tallow
Whale and Sperm oil
Whalebone 
Goat skins.
Horns
Tobacco
Pumpkins
Paddy
Rice
Corn
Cotton
Tapioca
Pia


L,441 lbs., or 4,649  tons


340,436
50,083
643,437.  355,651. 64
*..  271
*..  729
1,298. 419
368,835
*..  24.196,667
189,700
131,383
45,402
32,333
6,610. 500. 475.105,320.  311.,835
78,455
2,518
7,688. 100


gallons
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
barrels
barrels
tons
barrels
barrels
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
gallons
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.


* A silky substance, collected from the trunks of the large tree-ferns
which abound on the island of Hawaii. It has been used for centuries
by the natives for making pillows and mattresses, and is now exported
to California and British Columbia for the same purpose.
t Preparation from the taro root.
+ Used as an article of food by the Chinese.




42


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


Pork.
Bones 
Beche de Mer
Oranges..61 boxes and
Limes.    27 packages ane
Coker-nuts.
Bananas.  14 packages ai
Tamarinds..    6 casks
Sugar cane.   20 bundles
Pea-nuts 
Pine-apples
Taro.
Chinese Edible Roots 
Butter 
Bread 
Soap.. 
Rags.
Koa Wood
Sandal Wood
Besides curiosities and sundries.


11 barrels
20- tons.7,135  lbs.
61,000
1 77,000
17,491
nd 1,784  bunche
and 164 lbs.
and 500  sticks
18  bags
500
6 casks
166 packag
220   lbs.
~   572 lbs.
600  lbs.. 1,696  lbs.
600  feet.6,008 lbs.


us
es


The supplies furnished in the course of the year to the
shipping which visited the port, are estimated at
$113,100 value.
In 1860, the whole commerce of the country showed
a decrease on the preceding year-the defect arising
from a less successful whaling season, a drought affecting
the sugar plantations, and a blight in the coffee-trees.
The total value of the imports in 1859, was $1, 555,558;
in 1860, $1,223,749; showing a falling off of a quarter
of a million of dollars. The export trade suffered also,
but in a smaller ratio. In 1859, the value of goods exported was $931,329; in 1860, $807,459; exhibiting
a decrease in value of $123,870.
The causes which led to a decline in Hawaiian commerce were natural ones, and temporary; whilst increas



COMMERCE.


43


ing relations with California, British Columbia, China,
and Japan, are opening out new markets of export and
import. So that in 1864, the total imports had increased
again to $1,712,241; and the exports, of still greater
importance to the prosperity of the country, had grown
up to $1,113,329. The following table, derived from
the custom-house statistics, shows the value and origin
of imports in 1864:VALUE OF GOODS PAYING DUTY.


From the United States, Pacific
side, the United States, Atlantic
side.,Bremen.,Great Britain,, Vancouver's Island,, the Sea.
the Islands of the Pacific,  Mexico.


$519,243 09
99,966 32
183,872 15
86,049 60
54,153 47
9,187 13
16,822 55
537 50
- — $969,831 81


VALUE OF GOODS AND SPIRITS BONDED.


From the United States, Pacific
side.,, the United States, Atlantic
side..,, Bremen..,, Great Britain.
Vancouver's Island,, the Sea.
the Islands of the Pacific.
Sitka.
France..


$32,880 57
119,134 51
45,607 66
1,134 44
17,046 36
291,959 10
7,392 99
22,682 70
156 37
-   ~ —~ — - 537,994 70




41


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


VALUE IMPORTED FREE OF DUTY.


By animals,, curiosities.,, diplomatic representatives,, goods, old and in use,, Hawaiian Government,,,,   whalers
f,,oreign.,, His Majesty.,,machinery...,, pig and plate iron,,pictures,, plants and seeds, returned cargo,,specie.,, Steam Navigation Company,, sundries by permission.,, tools, specific use,,statuary 
Free.
Imports at Lahaina $1,006 23,,   Hilo. 2,491 34
Kauai. 346 39
3,843 96
Total.


$958 04
65 0(
2,888 0:
3,920 6'
3,710 44
93,728 71
9,481 4,
2,014 01
55,491 0(
4,834 01
1,036 4;
202 54
1,591 41
112,782 4,
4,071 4:
3,653 1'
1,691 0
125 0'
Dutiab]
$853 6
10,240 3
14 7
11,108 7
3,843 9


- $189,462 36
$1,697,288 87


-I A 0 Q I 9 74


-. 1,712,241.1,712,241 61


About 1000 of the natives are usually absent fronm
their country, engaged in the whaling trade at sea, or on
the guano islands of the Pacific.
The average passage of sailing vessels, from San
Francisco to Honolulu, between the 1st of October and




COMMERCIAL TREATIES.


45


1st of January, is sixteen days; the average voyage
from Victoria, Vancouver's Island, is twenty-seven days 
from  Kanagawa, Japan, twenty-six days; and from
Hong-Kong, sixty-seven days and a half.
The merchant-fleet under the Hawaiian flag, in 1860,
consisted of one steamer, the Kilauea, of 414 tons
burthen and 100-horse power; eleven whalers, with
a total tonnage of 2303 tons; seven foreign traders,
aggregate, 1426 tons; and thirty-two coasters, schooners,
and sloops, together 1475 tons. The Government owns
a steam-tug, the Pele, of 30-horse power.
In 1864, the number of Hawaiian-owned merchantvessels calling at all the ports of the islands was fortyfour, tonnage 8982 tons; foreign ships 270, tonnage
141,804 tons: of which thirty-six vessels were English
and 200 were American. Of ships of war visiting
Hawaii two were British and four were Russian.
Treaties of commerce exist between Hawaii and the
following nations: —Great Britain and France, made
in 1846; Denmark, in 1846; Hamburg, in 1848;
United States, in 1850; Bremen, in 1851; Sweden
and Norway, in 1852; new treaty with Great Britain,
in 1851; new treaty with France, in 1857. In 1860,
the admiral commanding the Russian fleet in the Pacific
visited Honolulu, and a treaty with Russia will probably result from the communications which then took
place; probably, also, with Japan, the ambassadors of
which nation stayed at Honolulu for nearly a fortnight,
on their way to Washington.
The Hawaiian Government is represented by consular
agents in Great Britain, France, Italy, Chili, Australia,
New Zealand, China, Japan, and the Russian settlements
on the Amoor.




46


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


CHAPTER IV.
OUR ROYAL CITY OF HONOLULU.
M  OST of the views which we have seen of the city
of Honolulu have this grave fault, that they
have evidently been taken before the city was erected.
They usually represent a good deal of mountain in
the background, and in front a large expanse of
water; —the harbour, bearing upon it a considerable
amount of shipping;-but they omit the buildings.
The photographic view of Honolulu, from which the
wood-cut given in this volume is taken, is comparatively modern; but even this scarcely gives the idea
of a city containing 12,000 inhabitants,-the metropolis of the North Pacific. It rather recalls those
pictures we are so accustomed to in our water-colour
exhibitions, where, under the catalogue name of 'View
of Calais, with Fishing-Boats,' we see a brilliantly
coloured chasse-maree occupying the foreground, and
the town of Calais represented in a small corner by a
white windmill and a couple of boarding-houses.
Few cities have a more noble situation than Honolulu.
In approaching it from the south-west, the island of
Oahu presents a very picturesque appearance. A chain
of lofty hills, stretching from north-west to south-east,
is the most prominent object inland. A remarkable
point of land closes in the bay at its lower extremity.




Wa...~~ ~ ~ ~~~~..  --—.W- - --
$i-3~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~kA\ 
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~\ ~\~  \ 
-a~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ 




f




SITUBATIOI{ OURFNO MO1~OMtlU4


47


It is a long hill, truncated above; which, while it shows
seaward a peak, named Diamond Head, when seen from
the town, or from the south-eastern direction at sea,
looks like a straight, detached ridge, a little elevated at
its end. The particular form of this promontory results
from its volcanic origin. Another remarkable hill of
the same character, crowned with a battery, guards the
entrance of the smaller bay which forms the harbour of
Honolulu. At the foot of the mountains extends a
fertile plain, ten miles in length, and, in parts, two miles
in width from the sea to the base of the hills. On this
plain Honolulu is built. The remarkable shapes of
the mountains, torn by ravines or divided by green
valleys, and of the plain also, unmistakeably speak the
fiery agencies which produced them. Those agencies
were exerted at a very ancient period. The substratum
of the plain is a deposited calcareous rock, containing
bones of animals and fish, marine shells, and branches
of white coral. This rock is hardest at its upper extremity, and becomes softer and more porous as its
depth increases. Above the chalk lies a layer of fine
volcanic ashes and cinders; and over all a rich alluvial
soil of the depth of two or three feet. By boring little
more than a dozen feet into the chalk stratum excellent water is obtained. It is a remarkable circumstance
that though the water in the wells rises and falls with
the tide,-showing that it reaches them by infiltration
from the sea-it is never salt or brackish to the taste.
The city is, therefore, blest with great 'water privileges,'
and a corresponding facility for drainage. It is built
round the harbour, which possesses quays and warehouses,
and slips for heaving up and repairing ships. Near it
are the custom-house, and a large building containing
the public offices.  There is also the fort, which, at




48


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


the time of Beechey's visit, mounted forty guns; but has
now been dismantled, and applied to other government
uses.
The central portion of the town consists of regularly
laid out streets, many of the houses standing within
gardens. There are two stone churches, belonging to
the American Congregationalists; a Native church; and
the Roman Catholic Cathedral. A distinguishing feature
of Honolulu is, that this large town is built without a
single chimney:-a cheerful city, under its brilliant,
unclouded sky; the blue sea spreading at its feet, with
a silvery line of breakers on the distant reef. The masts
of shipping in the port rise into view above the spreading roofs of the houses and stores; the flags on the
fort and at the consulates flutter in the fanning breeze;
and the sound of hammers,-welcome indication and
type of industry,-comes from the shipyards of the
harbour. People of all nations are meeting in the
wide streets; English, American, French, German,
Chinese, South Polynesians, are represented here; busy
with commerce, with politics, with dinner at the very
excellent hotels, or, in that rest-inviting climate, busy
doing nothing. The Queen's Hospital is to be visited;
or a salute from the battery on Punch-bowl Hill announces that a foreign man-of-war,-in the neater
American form, a national ship,-has arrived. Numbers
of Hawaiians, more or less in European dress, fill the
streets, giving a smile and the cheerful aloha, or
greeting, as they pass you. Women bring in plantains,
and oranges, or the delicious chirimoya, from gardens;
vegetables, and fish, and taro roots. The younger
women, though they have thrown off idolatry and thrown
on some clothes, must still crown themselves with flowing
chaplets as of old. They have discarded many things,




HONOLULU.


49


but cannot abandon that graceful taste and appreciation of nature which led them to deck themselves,both sexes occasionally,-with perfumed and manycoloured blossoms, formed in elegant wreaths.
Look, too, at these large placards; the Royal Hawaiian Theatre is open this evening. Great stars are
announced,-brilliant stars; though, like those of the
Southern Cross, unknown in our northern hemisphere.
The Equestrian Circus also invites to its new and amazing 'acts,' and it will not be left empty by a people
so devoted to horse-flesh. See, now, even whilst we
speak, how many riders of both sexes the eye takes in,
as one looks along the road! and we must take care
that we are not ridden down, for the police, with all
their care, cannot prevent the inconvenience of occasional racing in the streets. There seems an unusual
stir in the streets to-day; a greater than ordinary
crowd. Many country people are flocking in; and that
salute meant something more than the arrival of a national ship in the harbour. Let us walk onward, and
inquire what this gala appearance means: for flags are
flying, and we hear music at a distance. We can
inquire here at the office of the ' Hawaiian Gazette,'
an excellently conducted weekly newspaper, and the
Government official or semi-official organ. Nearly vis-avis is the bureau of the ' Commercial Advertiser,' also
a weekly journal, in English, devoted to the interests
of the American missionaries; and claiming, by its
generally adverse criticisms on ministers and measures,
to occupy, in the room of any senatorial body, the
place of ' His Majesty's Opposition.' The same party
have also a monthly publication, of many years'
standing,' The Friend.' We remark, in passing, that two
newspapers in the vernacular make their appearance




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


in Honolulu,-the 'Hae Hawaii,' weekly, and the
' Hockuloa,' monthly; a third paper, upon liberal principles, has lately been added, named ' The Star of the
Pacific.'
The animation of the capital is soon accounted for;
it is the 9th of February, and the King's birthday, who
completes this morning his twenty-seventh year.* We
learn that there has been already a reception at the
Palace. His Majesty was attended by his executive and
judicial officers; the members of the Privy Council;
the Governors of Oahu and Maui; his Aides-de-camp,
&c. And first, the Chancellor and Chief-Justice approached, and in the name of himself and his fellows of
the ermine robe offered, in a few loyal and pious words,
sincere congratulations on the day. Then the diplomatic body arrived, headed by M. Perrin, who, as senior
of the foreign representatives, presented, in French,
their felicitations.  General Miller, the British Commissioner, being absent from the islands, sent a written
address, which was read by the King's Foreign Minister.
The Consular body next expressed the kind feelings of
their respective governments. The King replied, severally, to the addresses, shortly, and with that good taste
which characterises His Majesty's communications.
As the day advances the town puts on a completely
gala look. It announces for itself a national holiday;
covers itself with flags; fires more salutes; and expatiates in picnic parties, in races, in amusements. Now
we see a procession coming from the direction of the
Palace. After the judiciary and foreign services had
had their audience, the King received a very important
* This passage was written in 1862. The scene is allowed to remain
without shifting, but (ldath has made sad havoc with the actors, in the
interval.




THE ROYAL FAMILY.


51


domestic body,-the Fire Department of Honollulu; the
members of which, after passing before His Majesty,
tersely expressed their joy in three hearty cheers. In
the United States, the functions of the community for
protecting their cities from fire have been wisely elevated into an unpaid and honourable service.  The
citizens who thus band themselves together against fire
as a threatening enemy, are actuated in the same
manner as our Rifle Volunteers, and evince a similar
corporate spirit. The Hawaiians have adopted the same
organization of Fire Companies, and hold them in the
same honour as in the States. Now the procession
appears. Three Engine Companies, with engines and
hose-carts; and one ' Hook-and-Ladder' Company, with
fire-wardens and engineers, all in uniform; and the
engines decked with flowers, ribbons, and flags. A boy
rides on each engine, buried among the blossoms, like a
young Love; and on the carriage of the 'Hooks,' beneath
a floral canopy, sit two pretty children, in gala dress;
but whether to impersonate the genius of fire and water,
or lively to represent a ' hook' and a ' ladder,' is left
undetermined. The city numbers four Fire Companies;
and 140 of their associated members are now doing
honour to their sovereign.
Whilst the 140, and some other guests, after their progress through the streets of Honolulu, are gone to lunch
in the rooms of No. 1 Engine, let us direct our steps to
the Palace, which they have lately left. The reception
is over; and we guess, by some vivas at a distance,
that the royal family are driving, and are coming this
way. Preceded by two outriders, in an open carriage,
-the most elegant that London can turn out —sits the
Queen,-fair and young, with an engaging expression
of face. Her embonpoint makes Her Majesty appear
E 2




52


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


some years older than she really is. A noble boy, the
Prince of Hawaii, sits opposite his mother; and the
King, on horseback, in a field-marshal's uniform, follows
the carriage. Very heartfelt are the alohas which greet
the modest cortege as it passes.
We enter the open gates of the Palace enclosure and
find ourselves in a garden, or pleasure-grounds, of about
an acre, with an avenue leading through it formed by the
deep green-leafed lcukcti and koa trees. A flight of steps
leads to a large hall, decorated in the European style.
Portraits of King Louis Philippe and his queen, presented
by the French monarch to Kamehameha III., hang
on the walls; and also a likeness of the late Admiral
Thomas, for whom, as the medium through which the
sovereignty of the islands was restored to their own
rulers, after Lord George Paulet's possession of them,
the Hawaiians have always entertained feelings of the
deepest regard. Vases and miniature copies of some of
Thorwaldsen's works ornament the hall. The left wing
of the small, sunny Palace is occupied by the throneroom,   This apartment has a completely European
air, and resembles a drawing-room in London or Paris,
with the addition of a decorated chair at one of its sides,
the modest throne of the dynasty'Simplex munditiis.'
Another room contains a very beautiful billiard-table,
also a present from the late King of the French; and
the present Emperor, — -not behind hi' predecessor in
making rich donations,-has recently sent the King a
large service of silver.
' On a small scale,' said King Kamehameha III. to
Mr. Hill, when the latter was presented to him in 1849,
'I am endeavouring to do, with the blessing of God,
what Peter the Great, of Russia, did on a large scale.'




NUUANU VALLEY.


53 '


Suffice it to say of the Palace, without tedious description, that it is appropriate, and is in proportion to
the kingdom and the capital of the islands; and in this
it differs from the royal residences in some of the small
German States, where the palace occupies half the
town, and its gardens a quarter of the territory.
And now to horse; and let us do what several others
are already doing this afternoon, ride over the plain behind Honolulu, and up the Nuuanu valley. There we
shall be refreshed and invigorated by the moving air
breathed at a higher elevation. The road leads across
the plain, which is level and fertile, but shows the scars
of ancient disturbance in some occasional ravines. Proceeding along this highway, which is in places planted
with trees and dotted with houses and villas, we reach,
at less than a mile's distance, the hills, rising on each
hand, and forming at their interspace the winding vale
through which a river reaches the sea. The mouth of
the valley, says Mr. Ellis, which opens immediately
behind the town, is a complete garden, carefully kept
by its respective proprietors in a state of high cultivation; and the ground being irrigated by the water from
a river that winds rapidly down the valley, is remarkably
productive. The valley rises with a gradual ascent;
and after walking about three miles through an unbroken series of plantation, it becomes gradually narrower, and the mountains rise more steeply on either side.
The scenery is romantic and delightful. The bottom
of the valley is gently undulated; and a rapid stream
takes its serpentine way from one side of it to the other,
sometimes wandering along with an unruffled surface,
at other times rushing down a fall of several feet, or
dashing and foaming among the rocks that interrupt
its progress. The sides of the hills are clothed with




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


verdure; even the barren rocks that project from among
the bushes are ornamented with pendulous or creeping
plants of various kinds; and in several places beautiful
cascades leap down the steep mountain's side into flowing rivulets beneath. The beauty of the scenery increases, until at length, after walking some time on
a rising ground rather more steep than usual, and
through a thicket of hibiscus and other trees, the
wanderer suddenly emerges into an open space, and as
he turns round a small pile of volcanic rocks, the famous
Pali, or precipice, bursts upon him with an almost overpowering effect.  The distance of this remarkable spot
from the city is seven or eight miles. Immense masses
of black and ferruginous rock, many hundred feet. in
height, and nearly perpendicular, present themselves on
both sides to his sight, while immediately before him,
he looks down the fearful steep, and beholds hills and
valleys, trees and cottages, wandering streams and
winding paths, cultivated plantations and untrodden
thickets, and a varied landscape many miles in extent,
bounded by lofty mountains on the one side and the
white-crested waves of the ocean on the other, spread
out before him as if by the hand of enchantment.. The
natives ascend the precipice from  the northern side,
the height being about 500 feet, sometimes carrying
considerable weights; but the ascent and descent are
difficult.*  In two places near the highest edge the
rocks rise with an apparently perpendicular and even
projecting point, which, it seems to the traveller, im* A contributor to the ' Commercial Advertiser' gives a graphic description of a party of women he met several miles north of Honolulu,
who were bringing to market an immense hog which they had fattened,
and which he estimated to weigh nearly 500 lbs. This unwieldy
animal had to be carried up the pali by the five or six females who had
charge of it.




THE PALI.


55


possible to surmount. Two idols stood beside the path,
in former days tutelars of the dangerous pass. These
were propitiated by those intending to descend the pali
by a garland of flowers, a piece of tapa (cloth), or the
oblation of a green bough only: whilst those who
had effected the ascent in safety, made an acknowledgment of a similar kind for the supposed protection which
they had received from these idol deities. The lines
which separate piety and superstition are not strongly
marked; and if the heart were grateful, it wanted but
additional light as to the object of adoration to convert a heathen impulse into a Christian act of devotion.
Ellis makes a remark which shows an enlightened
tolerance and moderation not always mingled with
missionary zeal. He says his converted native guides
used to overturn or break these presiding idols, which
are found at all dangerous passes, or they would roll
them down the pali:-' but their conduct was never
the consequence of our directions, and seldom received
our approbation; for we were not desirous to become
inconoclasts: our object was rather to enlighten the
minds of the people, to lead them to the exercise of
a better faith, and the adoption of a purer worship.'
He probably even thought that till the true sunlight
had risen en their night they had better not extinguish
the taper which was their only guide.
The Pali of Nuuanu was an important strategic position, and is a spot of historical celebrity. Several battles
have been fought in its neighbourhood; and in 1790,
it was the scene of the last battle fought between the
King of Oahu and the great warrior Kamehameha I.,
who had invaded his island, and who finally subdued the
whole group under his single sovereignty. The King
of Oahu, with his ally Kaeo, King of Kauai and Niihau,




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


had assembled his forces a few miles north-west of
Honolulu. His army having been defeated in an engagement with the invader's forces, and Kaeo slain,
he retreated to the valley of Nuuanu, where he was
joined by an ambitious chief of Hawaii, named Taiana.
Taking their stand two miles from the precipice, they
awaited the victorious Kamehameha; but they could
not resist the momentum of the body of his troops.
The King of Oahu fell, and his broken army was
chased wildly up the valley. Once more rallied by the
warlike Taiana, the patriots turned to bay.  Before
them were the war-gods of the enemy, behind them the
sheer destruction of the pali.  Taiana fell.  After the
death of their chiefs, Despair was the leader of that
gallant and diminished band. What was in man's
command they did. Four hundred warriors were driven
headlong over the precipice and dashed to pieces at its
base among the rocks. The rest of the little army was
entirely routed, and Kamehameha the conqueror was left
undisputed sovereign of the island.
In the month of March 1860, the city of Honolulu
was startled out of its proprieties by the arrival of the
Japanese Embassy, on its way to Washington.  The
sudden influx of eighty distinguished foreigners was an
event sufficient to tax the resources of etiquette. Baron
Merten and Elliot were consulted. All that the former
authority affords of the usages observed at a solemn
audience given to an ambassador or nuncio of the Pope
was digested, and made the groundwork of the reception
of these Eastern visitors. The royal remise was searched,
and every practicable carriage found therein was sent
down, together with a guard of honour, to escort to the
Palace the two Ambassadors and their suite, with Admiral Tattnall, commanding the United States East




VISIT OF THE JAPANESE AMBASSADORS.


57


India squadron, Captain Pearson, and the other officers
of the Powhattan steam frigate. The civilities on each
side were completely en regle. An audience of the
servants of His Majesty the Emperor of Japan was
appointed for two o'clock of the 9th of March. On the
arrival of the United States officers at the Palace
grounds, they were received at the lower gate by the
King's household troops on duty, and at the Palace
stairs by the Honolulu Rifles. The gallant Admiral
and suite, having been introduced by Mr. Wyllie,
Minister of Foreign Relations, were presented to the
King by the United States Commissioner, Mr. Borden.
The Legation from the Tycoon then arrived, and was
received at the foot of the stairs by Mr. Wyllie and
other officers of the King.  His Majesty welcomed
them to his Court; and the Ambassadors expressed
their acknowledgments,-the conversation being conducted in Dutch, with the assistance of an English
interpreter. The King then retired; and Her Majesty
Queen Emma entered the throne-room, accompanied
by the Princess Victoria, and attended by her ladies
and maids of honour, and with her usual grace received
the Ambassadors and the officers, asked their impressions
of her country, &c.; and the ceremonies terminated.
The high courtesies were continued the same afternoon.  The Ambassadors sent, through the American
Commissioner, some presents to the King. In acknowledging these, the Foreign Minister was ' happy to have
the opportunity of again assuring their Excellencies of
the very high respect and very distinguished consideration with which he had the honour to be,' &c.; and a
few days later, the Minister wrote a despatch, in which
the King proposes that a treaty should be at once
made, conditionally on after ratification, ' of perpetual




58


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


friendship, commerce, and navigation,' between Japan
and Hawaii. To this despatch, Sinmi Bozenno Cami,
First Ambassador; Mooragaki Awageno Cami, Second
Ambassador; and Ogooli Bungono Cami, First Associate and Remembrancer,-being three princes,-reply,
on ' the 25th day of second month of the seventh year
of Ansey, '-a date difficult for the historian to synchronise with our own era, but probably shortly after
Mr. Wyllie's despatch,- that they could not conclude
such a treaty under their powers, and that, therefore,
the despatch would be forwarded to Japan.
Not but that the two-sworded princes were ready ' to
swear eternal friendship on the stairs;' for they received
the kindest hospitality from the King, who placed his
house in Beritania Street at the disposal of the Ambassadors, and his marine villa at the command of the
Admiral. The following sequence of adjectives will
describe the Japanese Embassy,-quick, intelligent,
and inquisitive; possessed of a curiosity constant and
vivacious; polite, affable, and patient under the corresponding curiosity exhibited by the Hawaiians towards
them. They inspected every object, inquired into it,
described  it, and  sketched it,-an  accomplished
draughtsman forming one of the suite.
Other calls of ceremony and of kindness having
been made, the Japanese, after a stay in the islands of
about ten days, prepared to depart; and a P.P.C.
audience was held at the Palace.  If Austria piques
herself on the Vienna code of etiquette, she will learn
in Japan a transcendental rigtueur which quite eclipses
her own. The First Ambassador commenced a graceful
acknowledgment of all the attentions shown to himself
and his suite; and having spoken two or three sentences,
he was so overcome by his feelings,-no doubt at the








i::_::::::::~ ~ ~~~~~~~~~~~~.......
-     ii~ii:::i ENTRANCE  TO   THE   NI-: VA-   VALLEY-  IPINOLUTX



A JAPANESE LEAVF-TAKING.         59
exact place indicated in his instructions,-that his voice
shrank up to a piping treble, and he had to conclude
his speech in a suffocating whisper. So contagious
is deep feeling, that all the suite were affected in the
same manner and at the same moment, and could only
whisper their adieux, interrupted by their sighs.
And so they departed.




60


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


CHAPTER V.
DERIVATIONS OF THE HAWAIIAN RACE-TRADITIONS OF.
FEW persons, probably, who walk in Greenwich Park,
realize to themselves, as they pass Flamsteed House,
that they have stepped from one hemisphere of the
globe into another. Yet the meridian of zero is of
great geographical importance; and the line which bisects the earth longitudinally gives us the definite idea
'of an eastern and a western world. Great Britain is contained in the western hemisphere; for the convenience
of which statement, we overlook the kingdom of Kent,
the Eastern Counties, etc., which lie eastward of this
imaginary line. And since the western world is our
world, the Hawaiian Islands claim to have a geographical kindred with us, for they, too, are situated in the
western hemisphere.
From the east or from the west the population of
those islands has been derived; the only other solution
of the question of origin being that of ' Centres of Creation,' a hypothesis which finds favour in the United
States. We do not enter upon this theory; but seek in
personal similitude, in analogies of language and institutions and in cherished traditions, to identify the
Hawaiians with one of the divisional races of men, and
to trace the steps across the ocean by which they arrived
in this small archipelago.
The inquiry assumes larger proportions when we find




DERIVATION OF THE HAWAIIANS.


61


that it involves the derivation of the red inhabitants of
the American Continent, between whom and the Pacific
islanders there are points of resemblance. 
Stephens came to the conclusion, moreover, that
there was a unity of race throughout the continents of
America, and that the present Indian nomads represent
the old city-builders of Yucatan and Central America.
A fact supporting this view may be noticed here.
Stephens relates that in removing some of the large
flat stones that faced buildings, there was frequently
found on the plaster beneath, the impression of a
small outspread hand. When Catlin exhibited his
Indian Museum in London, some years ago, there was
to be seen on the buffalo leather, of which the tents
were formed, the print of a small outspread hand,
which had been dipped in red pigment and pressed
upon the leather. Thus this sort of crowning imprimatur on the plaster of the ancient buildings and on
the tents of the living race, the size and the attitude of
the hand being similar, may go for a small but ancillary
proof of identity between the past and present inhabitants of America; who, nevertheless, need not be
strictly its autochthones, but may have arrived on the
continent by an ancient immigration. The points of
resemblance mentioned by Ellis between the aborigines of
the mainland and of the Pacific Islands, are 'their modes
of war, instruments, gymnastic games, rafts or canoes,
treatment of their children, dressing their hair, feather
head-dresses of the chiefs, girdles, and particularly the
tiputa of the latter, which in shape and use exactly
resembles the poncho of the Peruvians.'
There seems also some resemblance traceable in the
building of parallel walls, which have been found in
Hawaii as well as in Central America. Whilst the




62


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


people who on the continent have left their pyramids
and sculptured stones used hieroglyphic writing, few
traces of the latter art exist among the islanders; and
the symbols found by Ellis on the compact lava rocks in
Hawaii were of the most rudimentary character. They
consisted of a number of straight lines, semicircles, and
concentric rings, with some rude imitations of the human
figure, cut out with a stone hatchet. Those who are
acquainted with Stephen's volumes and Mr. Catherwood's elegant illustrations, will, however, remark a
connection between the primitive symbols just mentioned and the recurring hieroglyphs of the American
sculptures, the cartouches, batons, and pellets, and the
grotesque human figure.
All the islanders of the Pacific are placed by Dr.
Latham in the division of Oceanic Mongolidee. These
may be subdivided into the Papuans, with black skins
and crisp hair, and the Malayans, or copper-coloured
race. We have at present to deal with the latter; premising that we do not assume the fact of their Eastern
origin contained in the name of Malayan,-that being
the subject of our present discussion.*
* 'Hervas, a Spanish Jesuit, anticipated Humboldt in establishing a
new family-the Malay, or Polynesian-spread over no less than 208
degrees of longitude; from Madagascar to the Easter Islands, on the
West Coast of America. This family is now included in the great
division called Turanian.' -Max iMller, Lectures on the Science of Language. 1861.
Hervas says (Catalogo de las Lenguas): 'Yo no sin trabajo material
de ojear muchos libros, y principalmente los que contienen las relaciones
modernas de los descubrimientos de Cook y de Bougainville, he notado
y recogido las palabras que en ellas he hallado de diversos lenguages de
varias islas del mar del Sur, y habiendolas cotejado con las de dialectos
claramente Malayos, he hallando que son tales dialectos las lenguas que
se hablan en las seguientes islas del mar del Sur, 1. En el hemisferio
boreal, las islas de Sandwych, a 20 grados de latitud y a 210 de longidud;' &c. Vol. 2, chap. 1.




UNITY OF THE OCEAN PEOPLES.


63


No writer, probably, is entitled to more weight in his
views of the identity and the heterogeneity of the
oceanic races than Mr. Ellis, who has spent many
years of a useful life among the groups of the Pacific,
noting intelligently and investigating patiently their
history, traditions, language, and relationship to each
other. He authoritatively states, from his own observations, that the natives of Chatham Islands and New
Zealand in the south, the Sandwich Islands in the
north,t the Friendly Islands in the west,: and all the
intermediate islands, as far as Easter Island in the east,~
are one people. 'Their mythology, traditions, manners
and customs, language, and physical appearance, in their
main features, are, so far as we had an opportunity of
becoming acquainted with them, identically the same,
yet differing in many respects from those of the islands
to the westward of Tongatabu.'ll
This grouping, though extensive, stretching through
seventy degrees of latitude and seventy degrees of longitude, is still comprised in the western hemisphere,
with the exception of New Zealand; and we presume in
these island-peoples a homogeneity of race; and also,
though with less pronounced characters, an identity
with the red and copper-coloured inhabitants of the
American Continent.
We will examine first the probability of an Eastern
immigration. We know that, at least as far back as
the end of the tenth century, Icelandic voyagers, themselves emigrants from Denmark, had discovered the
north-eastern coasts of America, and had made many
* Lat. 43.46 S. Lon. 176.14 W.  t Centre Lat. 20 N. Lon. 155 W.
+ Centre Lat. 21 S. Lon. 175 W. ~ Lat. 26.6 S. Lon. 109.17 W.
11 'Missionary Voyage,' 410.




64


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


excursions from Snowland thither, and had traced the
continent downward till they entered latitudes where
sunshine and verdure enamoured them with a land
which, in comparison with their own, they may well have
imagined to be the outskirts of heaven,-shores where
the wild vine grew so abundantly that the country was
named by them Vinland.* If the direction of one wave
may indicate the course of a whole tide, the appearance
of North American Indians passing over Bhering's
Straits into Asia might perhaps show that a circulation
had been established towards the sun-setting. In a
passage   quoted    by  Chateaubriand      from   the   Lettres
Edifi(antes of the Jesuits, it is said that a missionary of
that order met in Tartary a Huron woman whom he
had previously known in Canada; and that he concluded,
from this strange adventure, that the American continent approached on its north-west limit the continent
of Asia. t
* Whilst the Caliphate of Bagdad still flourished under the Abassides, and while the Samanides, whose reign was so favourable to
poetry, bore sway in Persia, America was discovered in the year 1000
by a Northern route, as far as 41. ~ north latitude, by Leif, the son of
Eric the Red. The first but accidental step towards this discovery was
made from Norway. In the second half of the ninth century, Naddod,
having sailed for the Faroe Islands, which had been previously visited
from Ireland, was driven by storms to Iceland, and the first Norman
settlement was established there by Ingolf, in 875.... The colonization of Iceland, which had been first called by Naddod Snowland
(Snjoland), now conducted in a south-westerly direction, passing by
Greenland to the New Continent.... The tract which received from
Leif the name of Vinland it Goda, Vinland the Good, comprised the
coastline between Boston and New York, therefore parts of Massachusets, Rhode Island, and Connecticut.
' Parts of America were seen, but not landed on, fourteen years before
Lief Eireksson, in a voyage which Bjarne Herjulfson undertook from
Greenland to the southward in 986.'-IHumboldt, Cosmos (Sabine), ii.
233 and note.
t This rather credulous account concludes thus: 'Et il devina ainsi




CANOE VOYAGES.


65


Beechey says, 'The objection' (that of such frail
vessels as canoes proceeding from the Malayan and
other great islands lying to the westward of Polynesia),
' has so powerfully influenced the minds of some authors,
that they have had recourse to the circuitous route
through Tartary, across Bhering's Straits, and over the
American continent, to bring the emigrants to a situation whence they might be drifted by the ordinary
course of the winds to the lands in question. But had
this been the case, a more intimate resemblance would
surely be found to exist between the American Indians
and the natives of Polynesia.'*
If the march of mankind was towards the west, and
they had already swarmed downwards and peopled the
upper continent of America, there would indeed be no
difficulty in the supposition that from the western shores
men had taken another departure and reached the
nearest of the islands of the Pacific. For the trade
winds blow steadily from the north-east during nine
months of the year, and cattle have been conveyed
in an open boat from the Californian coast to the Hawaiian Islands, which can be reached in a few days.
So that either accident, or a desire to make maritime
discoveries, might have thrown upon the shores of Hawaii the crew of a lost canoe or a more organised
band of emigrants. With regard to the small craft that
drift away from the coast of a continent it must, however, be remembered that the chances are manifold
against one that a single canoe should strike upon a
single island or a small group of islands distant a couple
of thousand miles, so that many drifting boats would be
1'existence du detroit qui longtemps apres a fait la gloire de Bering et
de Cook.' —Genie du, Christianisme, 432.
* 'Narrative of Voyage,' &c., vol. i. 262.
F




66


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


lost altogether before one would land its living freight;
whilst, on the other hand, any number of canoes drifting
in the opposite direction from the islands, must eventually impinge on the sea-board of an immense continent. Ellis, however, and his missionary associates,
never heard of a canoe voyage made to the eastward,
though they knew instances of canoes being out two or
three weeks at sea, and arriving at places 500 or 600
miles in direct distance from their starting-point.
We must always allow a lengthened period to consecutive migrations. The settlers in one spot will generally stay long enough to increase in numbers before a
new exodus from their adopted habitat becomes desirable or necessary. Sometimes the whole community
moves onward in search of 'pastures ever new;' but
more frequently a part of the community goes forth,
like a swarm from a hive, carrying with them the traditions and idiosyncrasies of the parent tribe. Thus
Tyre begets a Carthage, and Carthage begets a Carthagena. In each new home gradual changes take place;
the settlers acclimatise to the new locality; dirt, misery,
and other influences produce constitutional differences;
and, what is important, these pioneers of a descending
civilisation, with a half resemblance to the Bourbon
dynasty, learn nothing, but forget a great deal. Nevertheless, the aroma lingers perseveringly about the
emptied phial. Under new skies, and after centuries
of absence, original events remain as myths in the
popular memory; and arts, dwarfed and degraded, are
found among people of too deficient an intelligence to
have invented them. By these fragmentary arts,these
distorted histories, these shadowy recollections, a scarcely
discoverable thread of identity is kept along the progressive steps by which they traversed half our sphere.




SUPPOSED GREEK RESEMBLANCES.


67


In the midst of degradation, and with landmarks removed out of sight, nations which have become savage
still cherish the memory of a past that was glorious, and
turn their eyes towards their deified progenitors,
' And the august abode from whence they came.'
Speculations as to an Eastern emigration are scarcely
more than glanced at here; and it may appear almost
superfluous to refer to two groundless hypotheses which
have been formed-the first, that Greek remains have
been discovered in South America, and that faint vestiges of Greece are also traceable in the islands of
Hawaii. The other supposition is that of the Hawaiian
race being of Hebrew origin, and that these islanders
represent the lost tribes of the house of Israel.
With regard to Greek resemblances, they may be
classed under the following heads. First, the form of
the feather helmet of the chiefs, which bears a considerable likeness to the metal casque and crest of
the Grecians. Secondly, the employment of the dual
number in the Hawaiian language. Thirdly, the use of
the spear and the bow and arrow, and the recumbent
position at meals. Fourthly, sortilege by the entrails of
slain animals before battle.
As to the form of the helmet, it is probably a mere
coincidence. A covering for the head will generally
conform to the shape of the head (although the hats
worn in Europe are a large exception to such a rule);
and hence some resemblance must be established. As
defensive armour, the Hawaiian helmet was useless,
being formed of feathers closely arranged on a network.
The people, instead of using armour in war, like the
Greeks, went into battle with nothing on but the naro,
a girdle round the loins,-the smallest quantity of
F2




68


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


clothing conceivable. They used no shield, and it was
the chiefs only who wore the feather helmets, and that
for distinction and as insignia of their rank.
The dual form in speaking may have been introduced into the language by the native courtesy which
characterises the chiefs, and have been followed by plebeians in the same manner in which ' you' has superseded ' thou' in the speech of Europe.  The Hawaiians
had a double form of dual for their pronoun; the first
including the speaker and the spoken-to, the second embracing the speaker and the person spoken-of.* In
other respects there is little in common in the two languages. The Hawaiian alphabet contains only seven consonantst and five vowels. It has no sibilants,4 or sound
equivalent to the / or ). It is so destitute of consonant
diphthongs that the natives cannot pronounce two consonants together without the interposition of a vowel;
and their words have invariably a vowel termination.
With regard to the bow and arrow, although these
instruments are complex and involve a practical acquaintance with some physical laws, the weapon is
found so frequently among savage nations as well as
civilised that one is almost tempted to say that the
bow and arrow is an innate idea.  The recumbent position at meals may have been experimentally found an
easy one in a warm climate, and have suited well with
a people whose indoles is indolence.
Sortilege by the entrails of slain animals is more
difficult to account for.
* Vide Ellis, who gives a table of the changes effected by duality, at
length.
t So generally numbered: but nine, if the two pairs of interchangeables be reckoned as four distinct letters.
+ The Samoan is the only Polynesian group which possesses sibilants.




HEBREW SIMILARITIES.


69


There are a few words having an apparent similarity
to the Greek. Little weight, however, is due to a small
number of coincident vocables in two languages, when
the proper deduction is made for necessity and accident.
The following examples have been adduced:HAWAIIAN.        ENGLISH.          GREEK.
mele            a song           PuXoC.
aroha          love              spwt.
arii            a chief          "Aplc.
rani           the heavens       ovpav'c.
mahina         the moon           riv.
The similarity of sound in the last example is greater
than is at first apparent. When the universal terminal
vowel is thrown off, the two first syllables, pronounced
quickly, come very near the Greek word for month.
The three words which in the list contain the letter r,
lose their resemblance to the Greek when written with
an 1, which has been invariably substituted in modern
orthography for the former letter.
The number of customs among the Hawaiians corresponding to Hebrew practices is admitted at once to be
very remarkable. But even if such proofs were considered strong enough to substantiate the fact of Jews
having reached the islands, it would not necessitate an
emigration from the Mediterranean; the probability
would be as great of their course having been in the
opposite direction. As, however, the tribes of North
America have been claimed to have a Hebrew origin,
the points of Jewish resemblance may be properly
enumerated here. These consisted of1. Circumcision, which, previous to the establishment
of the American missionaries, was commonly practised
among the natives as a religious ceremony.
2. Separation and purification of women after childbirth, &c., enforced under penalty of death.




70


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


3. Cities of refuge,-an institution found in no other
heathen nation.
4. Pollution by touching a dead body, and purification therefrom by religious ceremonies.
5. Offering of the first-fruits to their gods.
6. Wearing sackcloth in mourning.
7. The custom of the chiefs of washing their hands
before and after eating.
8. Traditions resembling those in the Hebrew Scriptures.
9. A resemblance which Mr. Dibble perceived between the poetry of the Hebrews and the Hawaiians;
and a structural likeness in the two languages, especially in the causative form of the Hawaiian verb, which
is precisely the same as the Hiphil of the Hebrew.*
Of the similarity of the native traditions to the histories of the Old Testament, the following examples will
serve; and they are probably the most striking that
Mr. Dibble could adduce.
Hawaiian tradition relates, that man was originally
made of the dust of the earth, by Kane and Kanaloa,
two of their principal deities.
In the story of Waikelenuiaiku, we have a pretty
close counterpart of that of Joseph.    His father had ten
* 'The Hawaiians have no auxiliary verb "to be;" there are no
variations in nouns for case, number, or person; but the moods and
tenses of verbs are pretty clearly distinguished by simple prefixes and
suffixes. The mode of conjugating verbs, the existence of a causative
form, and the derivation of words from roots of two syllables, are
thought to indicate a resemblance and cognate origin with the Hebrew
and other Oriental tongues.'-Cheever, Life in the S. Islands. London,
1861.
Mr. Cheever also remarks a coincidence relating to the very frequent
addition of the word wai to names of places, and the similar addition in
the East of wadi, both words meaning water,-the changed Hawaiian
form arising from a consistent rejection of consonants where practicable.




CORRESPONDING TRADITIONS.


71


sons and one daughter. He was beloved by his father
and hated by his brethren, who cast him into a pit; his
eldest brother having, moreover, a greater pity for him
than the rest. He escaped into a country, the king of
which was Kamohoalii, by whom he was confined in a
dark place underground, together with many persons
imprisoned there for various crimes. Whilst in prison
he bid his companions dream, and he interpreted the
dreams of four of them. One had seen a ripe ohia,
and his spirit ate it; the second saw a ripe banana,
which his spirit ate; the third had seen a hog, which
his spirit ate; the fourth dreamed that he saw awa,
that he pressed out the juice, and his spirit drank it.
Like Joseph, he interpreted the three first visions unfavourably to their dreamers, and they were afterwards
slain; to the last he gave an interpretation of deliverance
and life, and he was accordingly saved. The king being
informed by this person of the wonderful powers of
Waikelenuiaiku, the latter was liberated and made a
principal chief in the kingdom.
There is also a tradition of a person who, like Jonah,
was swallowed by a fish, and afterwards cast out upon
dry land.
The natives also believed that a state of perpetual
night, or chaos, had preceded creation, in which antecedent state nothing existed but some of the gods. The
myth relating to Maui, a demi-god, has an analogy to
Joshua when he commanded the sun to stand still. This
same Maui was an important person in the Pantheon of
New Zealand.  The Hawaiians preserved a tradition of
a deluge, when rain fell, and the waters rose up until
all the land was covered, except the summit of Mauna
Kea. Some of the inhabitants saved themselves in a
laau, a vessel the height, length, and breadth of which




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


were equal; it was filled with men, animals, and their
food; and after floating for some time, finally rested on
the mountain Mauna Kea.
It must be remembered, however, that whilst these
myths of the Hawaiians bear a considerable resemblance to the relations of the Hebrew Scriptures, the
evidence of their coming from Jewish sources is not
conclusive. The belief of the North American Indians
in a Great Spirit, has been regarded as the inheritance of ages: Captain Burton, in his recent work on
the Mormon States, looks upon it as derived from the
teaching of Christian missionaries, and denies that the
Indian theology embraced any notion of the immortality
of the soul. These traditions of Hawaii (it may as easily
be supposed), have arisen from casual intercourse with
Europeans. It is unnecessary to remark, that in Hawaiian society, as in that of the Greek heroic age, a
very short time will suffice to impart an air of antiquity
to recently imported legends.
A great danger, too, exists in claiming cognation between two distant peoples from the coincidence of a few
words in both languages. The Persian name for slipper
is said to be almost the same as the North American
Indian word, mocassin. This coincidence should not be
allowed to prove that the Persians and the Indians of
Canada are kindred.  The Sanscrit name tala (wine
made from the juice of palms), closely resembles the
Hawaiian name of their universal edible, talo; but
we do not thence jump at the conclusion that the
Polynesian language is a derivative of the Sanscrit. The
human organs of voice are the same throughout our
race, and are only capable of producing a certain number of sounds and articulations, the great majority of
which articulations are common to all people, and must




LANGUAGE AND ARTS.


73
r4


be employed by them in expressing ideas. Then, if
the copia verborum of each of two nations consisted of
5000 separate words, there would be several probabilities of coincidence, viz., that in each language the same
articulation should be used to express one idea, and that
only accidentally; and the chances of selection in the
case of onomatopes would be still greater. The coincidence, therefore, of a few corresponding words is a
meagre proof of identity of nations.*
Equal circumspection is required before claiming
identity between nations upon mere similarities, however close, in arts, utensils, &c. Such resemblances
often argue nothing more than that common wants
seeking to supply their defect by the most obvious and
simple methods, lead to a similarity of forms of construction; —in the same way that the uniformity of the human organs of voice necessarily restricts the number of
producible sounds, and tends accidentally to some identities in vocables. Otherwise we shall have a Celtic
origin claimed for the Polynesian islands in virtue of
the Kist-vaens which are found upon them.           There is
* It is not remarkable that nations should frequently express ideas in
onomatopes, nor that a word of very easy pronunciation should be
selected in different languages for the same purpose. Papa, mamma, and
the monosyllable ta, are words so easily produced that they are amongst
the very first uttered by children. The syllables pa-ta become pater;
and it has been proposed to call Patarian that vast family of languages
which adopt this word and its metamorphoses to express Father. It is
more remarkable that some one idea should be independently selected
by several nations for expression under an onomatope, whilst in each
language the word is formed according to its own genius and without
reference to the imitative form used by other nations. Take for example
the English word whisper, corresponding in French with chuchtotemnet,
chuchoter; in Italian with bish!iglio, hisbigliare; in Latin with susurrus,
susurro; in Greek with PL0vp(Cw, 4AlplWaLa. Each language imitates the
whispering sound in the name, but each does so according to its own
plan, and in a manner quite divergent from all the others.




74


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


in Hawaii an ancient lava road, ascribed to Umi, a
king who flourished about 500 years ago. It remains
very perfect, and is defined on each side with a kerb or
bordering of stones. Along this road and near it are
several of the structures of four stones, such as are
found in this country, Brittany, &c.; three stones being
set upright and edgewise, the fourth forming a roof or
covering. They are between three and four feet in
height, and would afford shelter to human beings from
the weather. An account has been received of similar
structures existing in greater numbers upon Maiden's
Island, a low coral isle situated in 4~ S. lat., and 155~
W. Ion. It is uninhabited, but bears traces of its former occupants; and though only thirty feet in elevation
above the water, it gives evidence of several distinct upheavals. Captain Goddard, who visited the island in
the summner of 1861, found seven distinct, well-defined
beaches traced on its shore line. On the centre ridge
were counted more than a hundred made platforms,
cruciform in shape, outlined with coral slabs standing
three feet out of the ground, the area between the slabwalls being filled in with coral blocks, stones and shells,
in a compact mass. In several places paths formed of
stones and shells led from a cluster of these platforms
down to the shore, traversing in their course the five
upper or oldest beaches, but never in any instance going
beyond the sixth, or down to the present beach of the
sea. A number of other constructions were also discovered, consisting of three upright coral blocks, with
a fourth lying on top, resembling a box with one end
out. Upwards of thirty wells were examined. Many
were from six to nine feet in depth, cut through the
coral rock, and were either dry, or had salt water in
them.   A great number of very shallow graves were




A WESTERN EMIGRATION.


75


found, containing human bones more or less decayed,
and egg-shaped shell ornaments.*
We dismiss the idea of-an immigration from the sunrising; and we come now to consider the probabilities
of the Hawaiian people having approached their home
in the opposite direction-from the shores of Asia
lying to their west, which front them.
First, there is the expressed conviction of those who
have visited the islands of Polynesia; and this, from
their opportunities of comparing the inhabitants of separate groups, and of the Asiatic islands and continent, is
of great importance. One of the latest writers, Mr. St.
Julian, in his 'Official Report on Central Polynesia,'
endorses the general idea that the Malayan tribes' came
direct from Asia, travelling to the eastward, from island
to island, across the broad Pacific, until they poured upon
the western shores of the great American continent.'
Secondly, there is the unity of the tribes inhabiting
the islands of the Pacific. ' The New Zealander and
Hawaiian,' says Mr. Jarves, who resided four years in
the Sandwich Islands, ' though more than four thousand
miles apart, with all the intermediate tribes, are members of one family, and require but a short period to
acquire the faculty of a free exchange of ideas.'
For the better illustration of the similarity and homology of the two languages, or rather dialects of one language, I give in a foot-note a columnar version of the
Lord's Prayer in Hawaiian and New Zealand speech,
with a literal construe into English. It will be perceived by the vacancies in the Maori that there is in
it an absence of several words and corresponding ideas
which exist in Hawaiian. Among these blanks are king


* 'Polynesian,' September 21, 1861.




76


76          ~~~HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. 


and kin~qdom; and the want confirms what Lang says of
the New Zealanders, that they recognise only two classes
in society, the slave or prisoner of war and the rangatira or gentleman. This trilingual version was prepared
by the Reverend George Kingdon, who also adds the
interesting final note.*
* The Lord's Prayer in Hawaiian, with the corresponding words in
Maori:
HAWAIIAN.                 MAORI.
E                  E                        0
ko,                to(   teo0)              the of
inako              matou                    u
Makua              Matua                    Father
iMlOko             i roto                  inside
o                  o                        of
ka                 te                      the
Lani               Rangi                    Heaven
e hoanoia                                   hallowed be'
Kou                Tou                      Thy
Inoa               Ingoa                    Name
e biki mai         whiti, to cross over     come
Kou          ~~~mai =towardsthespeaker I  h
Kou           ~~TouTh
Aupuni                                      Kingdom
e malamaia                                  done be
Kon                Tou                      Thy
Makemnake                                   'Will
ma                 mna                      by
ka-nei             te-nei                   this
bonus              whenua,                  earth
e like me          e rite me                like as
is                 ia                      that
imalamaia                                  done
ma                 ma                       by
ka                 te                      the
Lani               Rangi                    Heaven
e haawi mai                                 give
isa makou          i a matou                us
i ai               i (te) kai              food
no                  MO                      for
(no, belonging to)




HAWAIIAN AND MAORI LANGUAGE.


77


The same writer remarks: ' The language spoken in
the groups so widely diffused over the Pacific Ocean has


HAWAIIAN.
keia
la
e kala mai
i ko
makou
lawehalaana
me
makou
e kala nei
i ka
poe
i lawehala mai
i a makou
mai
alakai
i a makou
i ka
hoowalewaleia mai
ata
e hoopakele
i a makou
mai
ka iuo
no ka mea
Nou
ke
Aupuni
a me
ka Mana
a me
ka
hoonaniia
a mau loa 'ku
Amene


MAORI.
tenei
ra
i to(=iteo)
matou
rawe, greatness; hara, sin
me
matou
i te
i a matou
arataki
i a matou
ite
whakaware, to hinder, amuse,engagetheattention
i a matov
te kino
no te mea
Nou
te
a, or me
te Mana
a, or me
te
S a mau roa atu.
roa, long; atu, onwards
Amine


this
day
forgive
the of
us
trespass
as
we
forgive
the
people
(who)trespass against
us
not?
lead
us
in the
temptation
but
deliver
us
from
the evil
for
Thine
the
Kingdom
and
the Power
and
the
Glory
for ever
Amen.


The Hawaiian k and 1 appear to be invariably changed in Maori into
t and r respectively; and the n and hfrequently into ng and wh. K is




78


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


the same common structure, with but such differences
as may be resolved into dialects,-the result of long
non-intercourse; while other peculiarities are to be attributed to difference of soils, climates, governments,
and other local causes.' And he urges that' when affinities of language, physiological resemblances, corresponding manners, and religious belief, and, more particularly,
well-established traditions, pointing to a common origin, appear among tribes which, in modern times, have
lost all means of communication, the enquirer finds
tenable grounds for believing in a general relationship.
This appears to be the case throughout Polynesia.'
I must resist being drawn in further by the fascinating subject of language, necessarily embracing ethnology; and gladly refer my readers to Dr. Lang's view
of the ' Origin and Migrations of the Polynesian Nation'
(London, 1834); and to the Second Series of Professor
Max MUiller's ' Lectures on Language.'
The habitat will account for special differences in the
physique of nations belonging to one family.    'The hair
of the Hawaiians,' says Mr. Ellis, ' is black or brown,
strong, and frequently curly; their complexion is neither
yellow, like the Malays, nor red, like the American Indians, but a kind of olive, and sometimes reddish brown.'
Thirdly, as to the possibility of long voyages from the
Asiatic shores, they have been demonstrated to be practicable by actual instances. Japanese junks, which have
been blown out to sea, have been finally stranded with
frequently inserted in Maori; as, for instance, it is a Maori tradition that
their ancestors came from 'Hawaiki,' which is clearly 'Hawaii.' The
causative prefix hoo becomes in Maori whaka; as hoomaikai, to praise
(literally, to make good); whakapai, to praise; hoonui, whakanui, to
magnify, to make great. Many other interesting particulars might be
discovered by a person acquainted with both languages.




CANOES ADRIFT.


79


qheir occupants on distant islands, and have even reached
the continent of America in the 46th degree of north
latitude. And an example still more in point is, that in
the year 1832 one of these junks was wrecked on Oahu,
Sandwich Islands, after having been tossed about at sea
for eleven months; four persons out of her original crew
of nine surviving. It is certain that every year many
canoes, crowded with people of both sexes, are picked
up at sea, after having drifted at the mercy of the elements to great distances from their places of departure.
The great number of islands, which may almost be said
to continue the continent of Asia far into the ocean,
form, comparatively, easy stepping-stones for a population projecting itself towards the Pacific Polynesia, and
thence by a last flight to the finality of the American
mainland. Ellis's assertion has been already quoted,
that of many stray canoes reaching Tahiti from eastern,
unknown islands, the voyages have always been in a
westerly direction; the missionaries never heard of one
towards the sunrise. Beechey says: All have agreed
as to the manner in which these migrations between the
islands have been effected, and some few instances have
actually been met with; but they have been in one direction only, and have rather favoured the opinion of
migration from the eastward. The accident which threw
in our way Tuwarri and his companions, who were driven
600 miles in a direction contrary to the trade wind, in
spite of their utmost exertions, has fortunately enabled
us to remove the objections which have been urged
against the general opinion. The fact. being so well
attested, and the only one of the kind upon record, is,
consequently, of the highest interest, both as regards
its singularity, and as it establishes the possibility of the
case. Though this is the only instance that has come to




80


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


our knowledge, there is no reason why many other canoes
may not have shared a similar fate; and some few of
many thousands, perhaps, may have drifted to the remotest
islands of the Archipelago, and thus peopled them.' *
Fourthly, the native traditions. These are scanty;
but one of them relates to a man and woman arriving
at Hawaii in a canoe bringing with them a hog, a dog,
and a pair of fowls. These persons became the progenitors of the Hawaiian people. By another story prevalent among the inhabitants of Oahu, a number of
persons arrived in a canoe from Tahiti, and perceiving
that the Sandwich Islands were fertile, and were dwelt
in only by gods and spirits, they asked and obtained
permission to settle there. The early missionaries found
the general opinion as to the origin of the Hawaiian
race, to be either that their first parents had been created
on the islands, or that the chiefs were descended from
Akea the first king, who appears to have been a demigod; or the more popular view, that their ancestors had
arrived in a canoe from Tahiti. Now the island of Tahiti,
the principal of the Society group, lies on the ecliptic, in
about lat. 18~ S., and long. 150~ W. It is consequently
nearly forty degrees south of Hawaii, and rather to the
westward of the latter group. There is nothing against
the probability of an emigration from Tahiti; but the
name tahiti itself is in the Georgian and Society Islands
a verb; and it has also a signification in the language of
the Sandwich Islands, being equivalent to the word
abroad, and is frequently employed to denote any foreign
country. But, as in this country, some centuries ago,
the word Spanish, though necessarily derived from the
country Spain, was used with the meaning of outlandish


* ' Narrative of a Voyage,' &c., vol. i. 252.




TRADITIONS OF ORIGIN.


81


or foreign; so Ellis thinks that the name Tahiti was
primarily employed to denote the whole of the southern
group or its principal island; but it did not include the
more contiguous group of the Marquesas.
According to native tradition frequent intercourse
existed between the various groups of islands, and the
canoes then used were larger and of a better construction. In the Hawaiian Meles, or songs, the names of
Nuuhiva and Tahuata, two of the Marquesan islands,Upolu and Savaii, belonging to the Samoan group,-and
Tahiti, with others in that neighbourhood, frequently
occur; besides the names of headlands and towns in
those islands. These songs also make allusions to voyages
from Oahu and Kauai to islands far west.
As the traditionary lore of the Hawaiians is rapidly
dying out, and printing is taking the place of memory, it is probable that little more of such transmitted
information will be procured from native bard or eld.
Mr. Ellis mentioned to me his conviction that if he
returned to the Sandwich Islands he should not now
obtain one-tenth of the myths or histories which he
gathered there five-and-thirty years ago. The chapter,
therefore, of popular palaeontology must be a short one;
and it may be closed with a question that arises in the
mind when we consider the present state of this or any
particular society of mankind, viz.: How has this people
arrived at its present status? Has it been by progression
or retrogression? Have they advanced from a somewhat
Gorilla condition, such as still holds the Earthmen of
Africa; or have degrading influences been at work and
marred gradually the goodly image which the Creator
formed? Are we to hold with Monboddo, the ' Vestiges,'
and Darwin:-or, with the more glowing and regretful
belief of South, that ' Aristotle was but the ruin of an
a




82


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


Adam, and Athens only the rudiments of Eden?' In
this world of flux and change it is probable that the
light shines on and is withdrawn from different nations
in turns. Those who love light and use it well may be
privileged to keep their faces turned towards it, and
follow it wheresoever it goes. ' It does not appear,' says
Humboldt, 'to belong to the destinies of the human
race that all portions of it should suffer eclipse or obscuration at the same time.  A preserving principle
maintains the ever-living process of the progress of
reason.'* And the Christian philosopher has something
to add to this, which seems a somewhat cold estimate of
the humani destiny.  We may believe that the lamp of
religious truth emits rays of warmth as well as of light;
and that a nation will receive a blessing from on high
and that a shield will be extended over her head whilst
she diligently trims that lamp and carries it forth in zeal
and love to enlighten other nations and the isles that sit
in darkness.


* 'Cosmos.' (Sabine), ii. 232.




83


CHAPTER VI.
EARLY ISLAND  DISCOVERIES- NATIVE IISTORY- COOK'S
FIRST ARRIVAL.
EARLY in the sixteenth century the pioneers of
navigation from Portugal, Spain, and Genoa, had
burst into the great Pacific Ocean. Magellan entered
the Pacific in 1520, and discovered the Marianas, the
Philippines, and some smaller islands. Gaetano discovered one of the Sandwich Islands in 1542; and following him, Quiros found Tahiti and the New Hebrides.
Sea voyages in the Pacific multiplied, but that sea long
continued the exclusive theatre of the enterprises of the
Spaniards and Portuguese. Its hydrography was, however, unfixed and imperfect, and, as Humboldt remarks,
the islands by which it was studded, from want of exact
astronomical determination of position, strayed to and
fro on the map, like floating islands.* That great observer says: ' It has been asked, how it was possible for
Spanish vessels since the sixteenth century to cross the
great ocean from the western coast of the New Continent
to the Philippine Islands without discovering the isles
with which that vast sea basin is strewed?' He answers
the question by the small number of voyages made; one
ship went and returned between New Spain and Manilla
during the year; scarcely more between the latter place
and Lima; by the difficulties of navigation at a period
* ' Cosmos.'
G 2




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


when the use of lunar distances and chronometers was
unknown to navigators; and by the necessity felt of
following an ascertained track, from which if they deviated, they feared falling in with shallows and shoals.
He enumerates the discoveries made by the Spaniards
in the great ocean, and says that the names of Viscayno,
Mendana, Quiros, and Sarmiento, undoubtedly deserve
a place beside the names of the most illustrious navigators of the eighteenth century. ' In 1542,' he says,
' Gaetano had already found several scattered islands
not far from the group of Sandwich Islands; and it
cannot be called in question that even this last group
was known to the Spaniards for more than a century
before the voyage of Cook for the island of Mesa indicated on an old chart of the galleon of Acapulco is
the same with the island of Owhyhee, which contains
the high mountain of The Table or Mowna Roa.'*
Christian missionaries, too, were pressing forward into
the newly discovered tropical lands of America: one or
more possibly reached Hawaii. Ellis found a tradition
preserved there among the people, and he heard it from
them in three different places, that in the reign of
Kahoukapu, a priest (Kahuna) arrived in Hawaii from
a foreign country. He was a white man, having the
name of Paao, and he brought with him two idols or
gods, one of which was large and the other small.
These were adopted by the nations, admitted into the
national pantheon, and were worshipped according to
the direction of Paao; the temple called Mokini, in
the district of Pauepu, near the north point of the island,
was built for them, as tradition states by a priest,
who afterwards became a powerful man in the nation.


* 'Polit. Essay on New Spain.'




TRADITIONS OF EARLY VISITORS.


85


It requires no great effort of the imagination to see,
under the native name Paao, a metamorphic form of
Paolo; in the two idols, large and small, images of the
Virgin and Holy Child; in the temple, a small church
or chapel. After Paao's death, his son (we presume the
priest's son is meant, and it militates a little against
the supposition just mentioned), whose name was Opiri,
officiated in the temple of Mokini. Of Opiri an interesting record is preserved orally, that he acted as interpreter between the king and a party of white men
who arrived at the island.
A tradition of white men, still more involved in
mystery, was found by the same inquiring author. The
great volcanic mountain, now extinct, Mauna Kea, is
said to have taken its name, not from   the snow
by which it is perpetually capped,-Kea being the
obsolete term for white,-but on account of some white
men, who are reported to have resided on the mountain
and to have come down to the seashore frequently in
the evening, and to have frightened the natives. These
people were called na Kea, ' the whites.'
One more native tradition deserves mention as indicating the knowledge the Hawaiians had in early times
of the existence of other groups, and as also connecting
a relation of the same order given by the old traveller
Rubruquis.  In 'The Voyage of Kamapiikai,' it is
stated, that one of the gods appeared to the priest
Kamapiikai in a vision, revealed to him the existence,
situation, and distance of Tahiti, and directed him to
make a voyage thither. He accordingly sailed with
forty companions in four double canoes. On the return
of this party after an absence of fifteen years, they
described the country they had visited, and which they
called Haupokane, as possessing handsome inhabitants,




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


delicious and plentiful fruits, &c.; and that there was
there a stream or fountain called the ' wai ora roa,' the
water of enduring life.' The priest made subsequently
three more voyages to the newly discovered country, accompanied by many Hawaiians; and from the fourth
voyage they never returned; having either taken up
their permanent abode at Haupokane, or perished at sea.
The inducement to the priest's fellow countrymen to
accompany him was mainly the qualities of the ' water
of enduring life.' It produced marvellous changes in
those who bathed in it. The infirm, the emaciated, and
the deformed came out of its wave young, strong, and
handsome. The island is not improbably one of the
Marquesan group, but under a name which cannot be
identified. The story preserved in Roger Bacon from
the travels of Rubruquis, and analogous to the relation
above, is his description of a land near Cathay, bounded
by the Eastern Ocean,-a happy land, 'where men and
women arriving from other countries cease to grow
old.' The marvellous waters of the wai ora roc agree
also with 'The Fountain of Youth,' which Ponce de
Leon sought for in vain in Florida in 1512. The
native legend maybe a transformed version of a relation
given by early Spanish visitors.
It has been already mentioned that in proportion as
printing has become used in the islands, oral tradition is
dying out. It was fortunate, therefore, that the early
American missionaries collected and preserved as much
as they did of the prescriptive history of Hawaii. Mr.
Ellis, at the time of his visit, found the bards able to
recount the successive reigns of about seventy kings;
and with regard to the thirty-five reigns nearest to
our own day, the accordance between the bards was
very exact.




TRADITIONARY VISITANTS.


Native traditions refer to the arrival of strangers a
long time before Cook's appearance. In the seventeenth
century Spanish merchantmen were crossing the Pacific,
and might have refreshed at these islands.   The
buccaneers, too, may have found the small harbour a
convenient place of concealment. On Captain Cook's
first visit, he found two pieces of iron in the possession
of the natives,- one a portion of a hoop, the other
apparently part of a broadsword. The islanders were
acquainted with the use of iron. It is not wonderful
that more of that metal was not found in an unchanged
state, because it would be converted into fish-hooks,
which the Hawaiians preferred making in their own
fashion from pieces of iron, to the hooks brought to
them ready made. Tradition states that many generations since, ships were seen passing the islands at a
distance. The name they gave them, and which is still
retained in the native language for all vessels, was
Mloku, or islands. A more precise tradition relates that
a boat arrived in Kealakeakua Bay, on the west side of
Hawaii,-the bay where Cook metlhis death,- that it
had no masts or sails, but was painted, and had an
awning over the stern. The persons who arrived in the
boat were clad in white and yellow cloth, and one of
them wore a hat with a plume, and had a pahi, i. e. a
sword, at his side. These people remained, and formed
alliances with the natives, rose to be chiefs and famous
warriors, and for a considerable period governed Hawaii.
The date of their coming, as far as it can be deduced
from circumstances, may have been about the year
1600. Later than this, perhaps in 1620, a vessel was
wrecked in the south side of the same bay. The captain of her, and a white woman, were the only persons saved.  On reaching the beach they prostrated




88


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


themselves there for a long while. The strangers were
hospitably received by the natives, formed connections
with them, and from this mixed race it is said that many
of the chiefs and common people have descended.
Those who are supposed to represent this race at the
present day, are distinguished by their lighter skin, and
by brown or red curly hair, called ehu.
We have to pass over more than a whole century,
and then we find that in the map of the world attached
to Anson's Voyages, published in 1748, the Sandwich
Islands are delineated under their Spanish appellations,
correct as to latitude, and but ten degrees too far to the
west. What use was made of this chart towards the
great re-discovery of the islands thirty years afterwards,
is not known; but, Mr. Jarves remarks, Cook enquired
at Tahiti if any islands lay to the north of them; and
in his journal no great surprise is evinced at discovering
land in that direction. The same writer observes of
that great navigator, that 'a silence in regard to the
maritime efforts of his predecessors is observable
throughout his journals.'
It was in the pause between two revolutions-two
years after the United States of America had in 1776
signed the Declaration of Independence; while France
had not yet broken out into those flames which reduced
her to a temporary dissolution,-that an English seaman,
somewhat in the spirit of Columbus, was calmly pursuing discoveries in the great ocean of the Pacific.
Ere the French revolution commenced, Cook's life had
been taken away under circumstances that have arrested
the attention of the world; but it happens that his
successor, Vancouver, visited the Hawaiian Islands in
that memorable year when news of the decapitation of
Louis XVI. caused every monarch in Europe to rise




CAPTAIN COOKS DISCOVERY.


89


the next morning with a crick in his neck. It is
interesting to relate cotemporaneous events so different
in their nature as a popular cataclysm and a geographical
discovery; and to remark that science, though engendered by social wants, has an existence independent
of the social life, and often pursues her way, as she
did in France at that very epoch, indifferent to the
madness or the misery of a nation. And so it was, that
whilst the New World was emerging from war, and the
Old World was about to plunge into that great calamity,
fair countries, lying gem-like on the ocean, unknown or
forgotten, welcomed in peace the flag that brought them
at once and for ever face to face with the benefits and
the ills of civilisation.
In January 1778, Captain Cook's two ships, the
' Resolution' and ' Discovery,' approached for the first
time the islands of Kauai and Niihau, the most westerly
of the Hawaiian group. The apparition naturally excited
the wonder and curiosity of the natives, who flocked
about the two ships in their canoes, bartering their
productions for iron, but could not be induced to go
on board. The next morning, when the islanders were
stirring, their amazement was even increased by seeing
the moving islands or forests at anchor in Waimea Bay.*
The first meeting of the savage and the civilised man
was not to take place without a display of evil passions;
and before day declined, Death, in a new form to the
Hawaiians, was at his work. The chiefs of the island
sent people to examine the ships, who reported the great
quantity of iron that they observed about them. The
thirst for iron in those distant islands was as strong as
* Three of the islands, if not more, have places named Waimea. This
one is on the south of Kauai. There is an inconvenient repetition among
native names; thus, that of Kona occurs on four of the islands.




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


the thirst for gold is in more enlightened communities.
A warrior at once decided to plunder the ships, feeling
strong within himself the ferri sacra fames. In his
attempt he was fired on by the crew and killed. The
incident did not, however, interfere with the intercourse
that was established between the white men and the
natives; the former gratified their passions, the latter
indulged, wherever practicable, their propensity for
thieving. Cook endeavoured to preserve the islanders
from the ill effects of this intercourse, but any discipline he could enforce on board was neutralized by
the facilities offered on shore by a people with whom
chastity was not counted among the virtues, nor shame
esteemed a feminine grace.
The appearance and get-up of the ' British seaman'
of that day, was a peculiar one; it was especially wonderful in the eyes of the Kanarlca.*  The cocked hat
adhering to the head, was to them identified strictly
with the wearer, so that the spies who went to examine
the ships described the people on board as having
' heads horned like the moon.' They had fires burning
at their mouths,-no doubt cigars; they ate the raw
flesh of men;-this was the red, juicy water-melon
brought from Monterey; they took, like Peter Schlemmil, anything they wanted out of their bodies,-such
was the first impression of pockets on the native mind;
and what was more laughable than all (for.the Hawaiians
are essentially a risible people), was the utterly unintelligible gibberish that the strangers spoke. All
these circumstances, together with the firing of some
more guns, made the natives conclude that their
visitors were gods.


* The native name for an inhabitant of the islands.




THE RETURN OF LONO.


91


There was an additional reason for such a belief.
Lono, the Hawaiian Hercules, was one of the major
gods. In a fit of jealousy he killed his wife; but,
driven to frenzy by the act he had committed, he
wandered through the islands, boxing and wrestling
with all he met: his answer to every astonished enquirer being,  I am  frantic with my great love!'
Having instituted the athletic games known as the
Mahakiki, in honour of his wife's memory, and which
were held annually, he sailed from the islands in a
triangular canoe, for a foreign land; but ere he departed
he uttered this prophecy: ' I will return in after times
on an island bearing cocoa-nut trees, swine and dogs.'
Cook's two ships, so much larger than any floating
objects the natives had hitherto seen, appeared to
them, not unplausibly, islands, the masts being trees;
and now Lono was returning to his own country. From
Lono were supposed to have proceeded the thunder and
lightning of the ship's guns which were fired. Still
the islanders thought at first of attacking the vessels;
but a female chief advised conciliatory measures; and
to propitiate the strangers, she sent her own daughters
and other women on board. This measure may only
have anticipated an evil which was certain to arise as
soon as shipping should make the island a place of
refreshment during their voyages, or a market for their
commodities. Nevertheless the seeds of a disease previously unknown were immediately communicated to
the natives, a disease which has spread through the
whole group, attended with the most fatal consequences.
'I said, ye are gods,' was the emotion of a simple
people at the first impact of the civilised world; but,
alas! the visitors showed themselves to be but frail,
passionate men.  'The great revolutions,' remarks




92


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


Mr. Jarves, 'the islands were to undergo, commenced on
one side with theft and prostitution, which was repaid
by death and disease. Still the superior knowledge,
humanity, and forbearance of the whites had been seen
and acknowledged, and the first moral lessons in the distinctions of property, the foundation of all commercial
prosperity, received.
The ships had remained a fortnight, principally at
Niihau, and then sailed with the south-west trade wind,
which prevails in the early months of the year, for the
north-west coast of America. The news of the great
event spread rapidly from Kauai to the next island,
Oahu. At that time each island was under the rule of
a separate king. Kalaniopuu reigned over the great
island of Hawaii, whose name in the journals of Cook,
Ledyard, and Beechey, appears as Terreoboo, Teraiobu,
and Teriapu. To account for the differences in the
orthography of native names, it is to be remarked that
the language is essentially vocal, having but seven consonants, and consequently it was difficult to transfix a
previously unwritten tongue, and give its sounds their
true phonetic value. The difficulty was increased by two
pairs of consonants being interchangeable, viz.: lk with
t, and 1 with r; and the difference between another
pair, b and p, not being perceptible. Whether it is
that the ear of the Hawaiians does not distinguish the
difference, or that the consonant they use is a compromise between each pair of letters, is uncertain. The
American missionaries did much to systematise the
spelling of the language; and in recent books and
papers the letter I has displaced its interchangeable r
-generally, but not always. The important root which
forms the food of the people is still spelt taro, very
rarely kalo. The older writers used the t and the r;




COOK'S FIRST VISIT.


93


and Ellis, who wrote five-and-thirty years ago, adopts
a mixed orthography in respect of the above letters.
To Kalaniopuu, then, the great news was carried from
Oahu; and the account of the strangers was embellished
and added to in the usual manner with oral traditions.
By Mohu's description the ships, as well as their crews,
were animated beings, the latter perhaps seeming a parasitical life attached to the former, or to have the same
relation which the coral insect bears to the common
coral branch. A small piece of canvas procured from
the English had been sent by the Chief of Kauai to the
King of Oahu, who presented the rarity to his wife. It
was not long before a public procession gave the fit
opportunity for female vanity, and the queen walked
proudly with the rag of canvas worn in the most conspicuous part of her dress. As that dress was particularly scanty, this exotic addition to it must have been
well displayed, and attractive of much attention. It
probably had an effect as dissipating to the wearer's
mind as Hans Christian Andersen's red shoes at his
confirmation.
Whilst Cook was absent, war had broken out between
Hawaii and Maui; the king of the latter island being
Kahekili-called by Cook and others Titeree. Kalaniopuu, King of Hawaii, invaded his neighbour's island;
and on that occasion he was accompanied by a youth in
whom was already lighted the fire of military and administrative genius, who became afterwards a great conqueror, and the founder of the present dynasty of
Hacwaii-Nei —i. e. the whole group of Hawaii, as distinguished from the single island of Hawaii. This was
Kamehameha, the future warrior king.
It is the effect both of sorrow and of success to
make men superstitious. The war-gods were carried




94


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


in the forefront of the armies, and in battle the islanders
trusted as much to the effect of terror produced by the
frightful countenances of their idols on their enemy,
as to their own prowess. The gods were at this
juncture in exaltation; and the minds of those who
trusted in them were more than usually accessible to
any fresh manifestation of divinity. This particular
state of feeling is woven up with the mixed narrative of
events which follows.
On the 26th of November a pitched battle was fought,
in which the invading king was triumphant. The victors at evening retired to Wailuku, a bay on the north
side of Maui, to refresh themselves after the battle; and
lo! a marvel awaits them: at morning they beheld in
the bay the very islands of gods, report of which had
been previously brought to them. Is not this the reward of victors? Can this be other than Lono returned
to salute the conquerors?  The belief that Cook was
indeed Lono, a belief which that great navigator thought
it his interest to acquiesce in, if not to cherish, became
in the end a proximate cause of his untimely death.
Kalaniopuu sent off a present to the ships of some hogs,
and afterwards made a state visit to the commander on
board, accompanied by the young Kamehanmeha. The
latter, with a few attendants, remained on board all
night, greatly to the consternation of those on shore,
who seeing the vessels stand out to sea, supposed the
god had carried away their young warrior, and made
loud and bitter lamentations for his loss. Kamehameha
was soon landed in safety, and Cook pursued his way for
Hawaii, and on the 2nd of December arrived at Kohala.




95


CHAPTER VII.
THE TRAGEDY IN KEALAKEAKUA BAY.
CONTINUING his course round the island, occasionJally trading with the natives, Cook's two ships
anchored, January 17, 1779, in the bay on the western
side of Hawaii, called variously Kaawaroa, Karakakoua,
and Kealakeakua. The time of his arrival there was
a week of tabu. An oppressive sacerdotalism united
itself with an absolute monarchy in governing the
nation. The priesthood and the kingship were obliged
to respect each other; and their union, instead of
counterbalancing the power which each possessed, and
so ameliorating it to the common people, was an alliance
which riveted the chain of feudalism more completely
round that people's neck. One of the great instruments
used by both king and priests for maintaining their
power and their revenue, was the system of tabu or
taboo. It was a consecration of any object, or person, or
period of time, for some exclusive purpose; and it was
enforced with sanguinary penalties. There were permanent tabus, as of the king's fish-ponds and bathingplaces: there were long-continued tabus, not taken off,
in some cases, for many years; and there were shorter
tabus, existing a week, or a single day. Sometimes a
whole district, or an entire island, was placed under
tabu, during the continuance of which it was excommunicated, no canoe or person being allowed to approach




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


it. In the tabu season, if it were strict,- for there was a
lighter and a more stringent kind,-every light and fire
was to be extinguished; all avocations were suspended;
on that wave which all the people, young and old of
both sexes, loved so much, no canoe might be launched;
and in it none might bathe. No one might be seen
out of doors; and as the purpose of the tabu would
be frustrated by any sound emitted by animal or bird,
to prevent such a catastrophe, the mouths of dogs
and pigs were tied up; and as for the poor garrulous
fowls, after having had their eyes bandaged, they were,
by way of further precaution, put under a calabash, and
their quietus made in double darkness. Such a tabu
was a living death. Nothing that the Church of Rome
has effected by her severest ban approached its completeness; the silence of an Indian dhurna was not so
depressing. The sacred chiefs alone, those who claimed
origin from the gods, the king and the priests, were
allowed locomotion. Before these the common people
prostrated themselves with their faces in the dust; but
neither priest nor king might touch anything themselves, and food was put into their mouths by other
hands than their own. It was at such a season that
Cook arrived in Kealakeakua Bay.
This bay is one of volcanic formation. In parts of it,
as along the whole of its north-west shore, the deep
water is close to land, so that a boat may pull close to
the rocks, which are entirely formed of lava, dark,
porous, and hard. At other places the bay has a beach
composed of the same material; and at the head of the
bay the lava rocks rise up steeply; and it would seem
that at some time a land-slip or an earthquake had torn
away a portion of the cliff, which has sunk below the
level of the sea, and has left exposed in the face of the




KEALAKEAKUA BAY.


'>7


rock caverns, through some of which can be traced the
flow of lava from the volcano. These caves are used
for places of sepulture.
Though silence reigned on sea and on shore when the
'Discovery' and 'Resolution' cast anchor in the bay, it
is a proof that their commander had quite acquired the
reputation of the returned Lono that the tabu was taken
off in consequence of his approach. Great numbers of
people then went on board, accompanied by a high
chief, Palea. With the Hawaiians, Mokualii was the god
of canoe-makers, and when the natives saw some of the
seamen caulking the vessels, they pronounced them to
be Mokualii's clan. Several of the ships' company were
smoking cigars, and these received the name of Lonovolcano. Many women, as before, visited the vessels,
and numerous persons of both sexes flocked round Cook
and paid him divine honours. An old priest, who had
once been a famous warrior, approached the captain
with the utmost veneration, threw over his shoulders a
piece of red cloth, and offered a pig, pronouncing at the
time a long oration. The Apostles at Lystra, when the
priests under similar circumstances were preparing to
sacrifice to them the garlanded ox, cried out with horror,
'We are men!' and prevented the intended rite; but
in the history of Cook's behaviour at Hawaii we do not
find that he deprecated the religious ceremonies of
which he was frequently the object, or disclaimed the
character of the god which the heathen people assigned
to him.
The multitudes who were attracted to the bay were
very great for a sparse population. Ledyard computed
the number of persons at upwards of 15,000, and he
states that 3,000 canoes were counted afloat at one
time. The latter fact appears more remarkable than the
Ht




98


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


number of human beings whom curiosity drew to the
shore. Cook landed, and conspicuous honours awaited
him. The King, Kalaniopuu, was still absent, engaged
with his conquest in Maui; but the tabu was broken, and
Cook was treated with a more than regal deference,-a
demonstration of respect which would have been ludicrous had it not been painful. Heralds announced his
approach, and opened a way for him through the crowds
that thronged him. Those among the people who were
more fearful, peeped at him from the houses, from behind
stone walls, and from the tops of trees. As he moved, the
assemblage covered their faces, and those nearest to
him prostrated themselves on the earth in the deepest
humility. As soon as Lono had passed, the people sprang
up erect, and uncovered their faces; and. some among
them not being rapid in their movements got trodden down by the advancing crowd. The evolution of
prostration and erection was found at last so inconvenient, and to require so unwonted an agility, that the
practical-minded people found that they could best
meet the case by going permanently on their hands and
feet; and so, at last, the procession changed a good
deal in character and appearance, and 10,000 men and
women, having little else on them than their nudity,
were seen pursuing, or flying from, Captain Cook on all
fours.
One feels ashamed at this ovation; ashamed at the
degradation of one section of humanity bowing down in
such servile sort to their fellow men; ashamed at one's
own countryman in his triumph, and for his enduring the
profane apotheosis which followed. He was led to the
chief heiau, or temple, and was presented in great form
to the idols; was taken to the most sacred part of the
enclosure, and then, being placed on a scaffold, ten men,




COOK S APOTHEOSIS.


99


bearing a large hog and some bundles of red cloth,
entered and prostrated themselves before him: he was
encircled in the cloth, and the hog was offered to him
in sacrifice, two priests the while chanting an antiphonal
hymn in honour of Lono. By them he was led to the
chief idol, which, following their example, he kissed.
Indeed, in that mad hour, Cook's own degradation
seems to have been equal to that of his ignorant worshippers. He was supported by the chief priest and by
Captain King, and placed between two wooden images;
then his face, hands, and arms were anointed with chewed
coker-nut; he drank awa-a drink prepared in a manner most disgusting to our notions,-and finally he ate
pork, which had previously been masticated for him by
an old man. The natives assert that Cook went through
all these heathen ceremonies without the slightest opposition.
Again, on the 19th, Cook visited another temple or
residence of priests, taking with him his artist, who
sketched the scene.  He was treated with the same
honours as before; and always afterwards, when he
landed from the ships, a priest attended him, and regulated the religious ceremonies which constantly took
place on his account.
A collection of histories, traditions, and Meles was
made in the early days of the Seminary of Lahainaluna
by some of the adult pupils, in the native tongue, the
volume having the name of Ka Moolelo Hawaii. In
this are recorded some of the circumstances of Cook's
visit and death in Hawaii.  It states, that in consequence of the people's belief that Lono, for so Cook was
called by them, was a god, divine honours were paid
to him, and all the offerings they were accustomed to
make to their deities, were made in a similar spirit to
H 2.....




100


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


him. During the prevalence of this belief, the island
was heavily taxed to supply the wants and to contribute
to the gratification of the officers and crews of the vessels. The people, as usual, suffered; and the screw of
despotism, which always pressed on them, received an
additional turn in order to keep up the supplies lavished
by the chiefs on their visitors. From the Englishmen's
point of view all was kindness, liberality, and frankness,
and it seemed to them that their arrival had produced
a general jubilee throughout the island. This was only
in appearance.  There was a curiosity mixed with
adoration, and a frivolous mirth, which oppressed people
easily indulge in; but to the cultivators, the stay of the
haole, or foreigner, was a heavy burthen, and whenever
they found the opportunity, they made reprisals, in the
way of pilfering, to recoup themselves for their forced
gratuities.
On the 24th the King, Kalaniopuu, returned from
Maui, and a change took place immediately in consequence.   A tabu was proclaimed, the people were
rigidly confined to their houses, and the ships did not
receive the customary supply of vegetables, &c. The
crews endeavoured to make the natives break the tabu;
a chief restrained them from doing so, till he was intimidated by a musket-shot fired over his head from the
ships, and the traffic was made to recommence in defiance
of the religious restriction.
Two days afterwards the King, attended by his chiefs
and by Kamehameha, visited Captain Cook in great
state. They came in three large double canoes, with
all barbaric pomp. In the first canoe were the King
and the royal retinue. They wore their bright cloaks
and helmets of feathers, the King's being all yellow.
In their hands were long shining lances. Under the
I,.i...,.:.!




MUTUAL CIVILITIES.


101


brilliant sun as the paddles of the rowers flashed out of
the shining water'The helmet and the helmet-feather
Burn'd like one burning flame together.'
In the second boat came the high priest and his
brethren, bringing with them hideous idols-frightful
caricatures of the human being. The third canoe was
filled with offerings of swine and fruits. After rowing
round the two ships to the solemn chanting of the
priests, the party proceeded to the shore, and landed at
the observatory, where Cook received them in a tent.
The King threw over Lono's shoulders his own cloak,
placed his own helmet on his head, and placed in his
hands a curious fan, one of the insignia of royalty. He
presented other cloaks of great beauty and value. The
offerings of pigs and fruit were then made with religious
rites and responsive chants.  The ceremony concluded
with an exchange of names, the greatest possible pledge
of friendship. The King and some of his chiefs were
then carried in the pinnace to the flag-ship, where they
were received with due honour. Cook gave Kalaniopuu
a linen shirt, and his hanger or cutlass. This rather reminds the reader of the reciprocity in dealing between
the Dutch settlers at New York and the natives there,
described by Knickerbocker, and the system of weights
established in buying furs, according to which a Dutchman's hand in one scale was a pound, and his foot was
equivalent to two pounds.
Profound silence reigned in the bay during these
ceremonious visits; no canoe was afloat; and on shore
the few inhabitants who were visible were lying prostrate
on the ground. Afterwards, at Captain Cook's request,
the tabu was removed as far as related to the King's
o,,,, * 




102


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


male subjects, but the females were still interdicted all
communication.
On shore, the followers of Lono who wandered about
the island, alone or in companies, continued to receive
kindness and hospitality. The natives could not, however, deny themselves the enjoyment of pilfering a
little; and this infraction of the rights of meum and
tuzrm, seen by the white men on the meum side, led to
some small shot being fired at the offenders, and to the
flogging a native on board the Discovery.' Our countrymen seem to have inaugurated a reign of liberty in that
oppressed country,-under which the natives had a perfect freedom to give, but were not at all free to take.
Probably, by this time familiarity with Lono and his
followers, and the expensive nature of such intercourse,
were producing changed ideas in the natives' minds respecting him. The Deus ex machina measured but the
height of a man, and exhibited in several particulars
very human tendencies. Most of us are, intellectually,
inclined to the deification of members of our race-to
entertain' proud views of human kind,
Of men to gods exalted and refined;''And to make idols, and to find them clay-'
and to feel the consequent disappointment;-and when
at last our eyes are opened, and the idol, 'despised
and broken,' lies in fragments at our feet, we are
sometimes apt to resent the misplacement of our
reverence, and the exhibition we have given of our
credulity.
A huge mistake was committed, which precipitated
the unfavourable impressions commencing in the natives'
minds. On the 2nd of February, Captain King, on the




COOK'S INTERCOURSE WITH THE NATIVES.


103


part of Captain Cook, requested of the priests to purchase the wooden fence which surrounded the top of the
heiau, or temple, for fuel.  It was not refused; the
wood was given, and nothing was demanded in return
for it. Many idols were attached to, or leaned against,
the wooden fence of the temple, and these were also
carried with it to the ships' boats. King says that he
from the first doubted the propriety of the request he
had conveyed; and fearing that the taking away the
idols would be looked upon as an impious act, spoke on
the subject to the high-priest; but the latter simply
requested that the central figure might be restored.  It
is possible that though no open opposition or resentment
was shown for an act so much in conflict with the
reverence felt by the natives towards their divinities
and their temples, it was because they looked upon the
living Lono with still greater reverence and fear: or
that the
'double sacrilege on things divine,
To rob the altar and deface the shrine,'
struck them dumb by its profane audacity.
Ledyard's narrative of this event differs from Captain
King's. He says that Cook offered for the fence two
hatchets, which were indignantly refused; and, upon the
refusal, he ordered his men to break down the fence and
carry it to the boats, he clearing the way for them; that
the images were taken off and destroyed by a few
seamen, in presence of the priests and chiefs, who had
not sufficient resolution to make resistance,-that the
hatchets were again offered, but were again refused;
that Cook insisted on their receiving them, and thrust
them into the folds of the priest's garment to whom he
spoke, and who trembled with emotion; and that meanwhile a concourse of natives assembled, expressed their




104


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


sense of the wrong in no quiet mood, and even attempted to replace the fence and the idols, which, however, in spite of their resistance, were safely conveyed
on board.
Other causes of dissatisfaction followed. The rudder
of the ' Resolution' had been sent on shore for repairs.
The master's mate, who had it in charge, requested
assistance from the natives in carrying it. In giving
this help the natives, either in frolic or by design,
worked confusedly, and several of them were struck
by the mate.   A chief who was present interposed,
the people mocked the white men, and stones were
thrown. The English seamen, seizing some wooden
treenails, struck the natives with them about their
heads and shoulders. The fray increasing, a guard of
marines was ordered from  the ship; but they were
furiously pelted with stones, and retired, leaving the
ground in possession of its rightful owners.
The death of one of the ship's company, and his
burial on shore, by proving Lono's followers to be
mortal, still further reduced the natives' faith in the
divine origin of their visitors. The very eupeptic condition of the white men, their voracious appetites, might
not have militated against that idea; but the quantity
of food which they daily consumed became highly inconvenient; the island was heavily taxed to provide the
necessary supplies the ships required, and the Hawaiians
became alarmed by the prospect of a famine. When
our countrymen came to be regarded in the light of
locusts, their presence, in spite of their higher civilisation, was looked upon as undesirable; and the news
that the ships were about to sail, created such genuine
pleasure, that the people joyfully collected and took
on board a farewell present of food, cloth, and other
I    'I4.




TIHE SHIPS OBLIGED TO RETURN.


105


articles, exceeding in quantity and value anything which
they had previously offered. They received nothing
in return for this munificent gift, unless an exhibition
of fireworks was considered an equivalent for this and
other favours. The pyrotechnical display created among
the natives the greatest astonishment and alarm.
On the 4th the ships set sail; but being becalmed in
sight of land during that day and the following, the
King sent off another present of hogs and vegetables.
It would have been well if intercourse between the
white and coloured races had then been discontinued
for a season. It is possible that lapse of time might
have softened into a pleasing picture the realities of a
visit in which good and ill were mingled. The benefits of that intercourse would, perhaps, have been remembered; the evil overcome and forgotten. After
a time the natives might have desired to see again the
wonderful moving islands and their inhabitants who
were armed with such extraordinary powers. On their
first visit the white people were beheld with astonished
curiosity; at another approach they might have been
welcomed with a desire to learn from them.
Unfortunately it happened otherwise. A week after
sailing, the ships returned and anchored again in Kealakeakua Bay. As the ' Resolution' had sprung her
foremast in a gale, the spar and some damaged sails
were sent on shore to be repaired, under a small guard
of marines, whose tents were pitched in the heiau they
had occupied before, and the priests protected the place
by proclaiming it tabu. The silence, the absence of
welcome, struck Cook, and he sent to inquire the cause
of the change. He was informed that the King was
absent, and had left the bay under a strict tabu. Some
degree of intercourse was at length reestablished with




106


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


the natives of both sexes, and it is probable that connections formed by the sailors excited the jealousy of
the men. Already, at the first visit, a blow had been
struck at the integrity of their religion, such as it was.
Whilst the chiefs had preserved the tabu on the heiau
in which were situated the English observatory and
workshop, with the utmost strictness, the seamen broke
through the protective restriction themselves, and caused
the native women to do the same by entering the
enclosure at night. The latter did this at first with
fear and trembling, but they perceived that they had
done so with impunity, and no indignant god had
avenged himself of the profanation. Thus the edifice
of superstition received a preliminary shake. There
remained, however, a general feeling of disapprobation
on the part of the natives at the sacrilege they had witnessed, for the hospital and sail-loft had occupied the
most sacred part of the heiau. As soon as the English
had taken their departure on the first occasion, the house
so used was burnt.
There was a'pervading irritation in the minds of the
Hawaiians.  It showed itself in disputes about the
traffic which recommenced. On the 13th of February,
some chiefs ordered the natives who were engaged
watering the ships, to disperse. The latter then armed
themselves with stones, as if for some attack. On Capt.
King and a marine approaching, the stones were put
aside, and the work continued; and Cook on being informed of the occurrence gave orders that if the natives
threw stones or behaved insolently they should be fired
upon with ball.
If we were writing the history of English adventure
and daring, we should probably justify and even applaud
every action of our countrymen,-as exhibiting the




CAUSES OF QUARREL.


107


resolution and skill by which they were guided under
all circumstances and in every emergency. The rights,
the property, the feelings, the religion of native races,
would only be the rudely-painted scenes before which
the Briton enacted his noble part to an admiring
audience. But writing some transactions which form to
a native race part of its history, we cannot look with
exclusive favour on one of the two performers; we even
place ourselves in the position of regarding the action
of the piece from a different point of view.
New causes of offence quickly arose. The same day
some musket shots were fired at a canoe from the
'Discovery.' The English narrative states that a theft
was the occasion of this act: the natives relate that the
foreigners seized a canoe belonging to a chief named
Palea, who, whilst endeavouring to recover it, was
knocked down by one of the white men. Cook and
King did not see this part of the transaction, as they,
with a marine, were running along the beach attempting
to cut off the canoe by which the theft had been committed. Its occupants escaped them and fled into the
country, pursued by Cook and his two associates, who,
after a chase of some miles, were obliged to desist. The
natives on the shore who saw their chief knocked down
interfered, and with showers of stones drove the seamen
into the water. The latter swam to a rock out of reach
of the missiles.  The ship's pinnace was taken and
plundered, and would have been destroyed, had not
Palea, on recovering from the effects of the blow he
had received, exerted his authority. He drove the
natives away, made signs to the sailors to come and
take away their boat, and restored to them  all the
articles which could be recovered, expressing his regret
at the affray.




108


1HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


The local wound was healed for the moment, but there
remained the deeper smart of mutual suspicion. Cook
ordered every islander to be turned out of the ships,
and doubled the guard at the heiau. At midnight a
native who was seen skulking about its walls was fired
at; and during the darkness, Palea, either to avenge
himself of his blow, or for the sake of the iron fastenings, stole one of the ' Discovery's' cutters, which was
moored to a buoy.
The morning which dawned calmly on that fair bay
was Sunday. It was doomed to be neither a day of
rest nor of peace. Cook resolved to recover the stolen
boat, and for that purpose he determined to secure the
King or some of the royal family, and retain them on
board until it was restored. He also gave orders that if
the cutter should not be recovered, every canoe was to
be seized which endeavoured to leave the bay. The
expedition on shore would probably have been led by
Clarke, the second in command, but being ill, he
requested that Cook would undertake the duty; and so
it happened that the adventurous discoverer set his
foot on the shore which in a few hours was to witness
his death and to refuse him a grave.
When in the year 1823, Mr. Ellis made his visit to
Hawaii, he found many persons at Kealakeakua and
other parts of the island who were present themselves
at Cook's death, or were well acquainted with its circumstances. By the accounts these people gave Mr. Ellis,
and from the collection made at Lahaina-luna, the Ka
Moolelo Hawaii previously mentioned, the native version
of this transaction is distinctly preserved. Their plain,
unvarnished tale, is told in sorrow, not in anger, and
without justification of themselves. They state that
Cook, having come on shore and had an interview with




NATIVE ACCOUNT OF COOK'S DEATH.


109


Kalaniopuu, the two walked together towards the shore,
Cook designing to take the King on board his ship and
detain him there till the missing boat should be restored.
The people seeing this, and having their suspicions
already roused, thronged round, and objected to the
King's going farther. His wife, too, entreated that he
would not go on board the ships. Kalaniopuu hesitated;
and whilst he was standing in doubt, a man came running from the other side of the bay, crying, ' It is war!
The foreigners have fired at a canoe from one of their
boats, and killed a chief.' On hearing this the people
became enraged, and the chiefs were alarmed, fearing
that Cook would put the King to death. Again his
wife, Kanona, used her entreaties he would not go on
board, and the chiefs joined with her, the people in the
meantime arming themselves with stones, clubs, and
spears. The King sat down; and Capt. Cook, who
seemed agitated, began walking towards his boat. Whilst
doing so, a native attacked him with a spear. Cook
turned, and with his double-barrelled gun shot the man
who struck him. Some of the people then threw
stones at the Englishman, which being seen by his men
in the boats, they fired on the natives. Cook endeavoured
to stop the firing, but on account of the noise he was
unable to do so. He then turned to speak to the people
on shore, when some one stabbed him in the back with
a pahoa, or dagger, and at the same time a spear was
driven through his body. He fell into the water, and
spoke no more.
This account agrees very nearly with Captain King's.
King believed, however, that he received the thrust of the
dagger whilst speaking to the boats to stop firing, and
that whilst his face was turned towards shore none of
the natives offered him  any violence; so that his




110


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


humanity in wishing to prevent more bloodshed cost
him his life.
Thus fell Cook in mid career. It causes regret to
think that his life was unnecessarily thrown away
through some failure in judgment and some faults of
temper, which his attached friend, King, admits ' might
have been justly blamed.' Had he lived longer he might
have added more discoveries to his already brilliant list,
but his fame would not have increased. The memory
of great men usually gains when its light is contracted
within a short compass, and when life terminates suddenly in its zenith. It is like the lustrous fracture of a
mineral ore. About half-a-million of persons die in
Great Britain every year. They go to the grave and
are forgotten; but our maritime nation looks back with
a fond tenacity of memory to some who have won themselves a name in different paths of honour and adventure.
Hundreds of lives have been hazarded to gain tidings
of an Arctic explorer; and English youth still throws
aside more modern books to read of Cook or the lost
La Perouse.




Ill


CHAPTER VIII.
THE SEQUEL OF COOK'S DEATH-SITBSEQUENT VISITS.
THE native account says that when the crowd which
was about Cook and the King, Kalaniopuu, heard
of the death of Kalimu, the chief who was shot in the
canoe, it became clamorous for revenge; and one of
the people with a short dagger in his hand approached
the captain, who, fearing danger, fired at him with his
gun. A general contest began, and Cook struck a chief
named Kalaimano-Kahoowaha with his sword. This
powerful warrior seized him with one hand to hold him,
not with any idea of taking his life, for supposing him
to be the god Lono he believed him incapable of death.
Cook, being about to fall, cried out, which dispelled the
chief's belief in his divinity, and he therefore killed
him. The seamen in the boat fired on the natives,
many of whom were cut down, and guns were discharged from the ship, by which more of the people
were killed. The King then fled inland, to the precipice, with his chiefs and people, taking with them the
bodies of Cook and four of his companions who had been
slain. The King presented Cook's body in sacrifice:
the flesh was afterwards removed from the bones in
order to preserve them, and the flesh was consumed
with fire. Three children, whose names are known,
found the heart, and mistaking it for that of a dog, ate




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


it. Some of Cook's bones were returned to the ship;
the rest were retained by the priests and worshipped.
The account of the whole transaction given by Ledyard, who was near his commander when he fell, though
fuller and more explanatory, does not differ in any
material points from  the native narrative-indeed,
not more than do any two independent histories of
one transaction. The English version gives some names
and circumstances which did not come within the
islanders' knowledge. Lieutenant Phillips, who had
landed his marines to support Cook, was close to the
latter, who when he was stabbed, fell with his face
downwards into the water, the margin of which he
had reached, and immediately expired.   Phillips,
who was a fine swordsman, threw down his fusee,
and engaging the chief who had stabbed Cook,
dispatched him with his sword. His guard by this
time were all killed, except two, who swam to the
boats, leaving the Lieutenant alone opposed to the
natives. His brave defence astonished the people who
were attacking him; but being at last wounded and
faint, he plunged into the sea sword in hand, and was
taken on board the boats. As soon, however, as he was
safe, one of the marines, who had swum from shore, was
seen lying at the bottom of the water. The wounded
officer hearing this, ran aft, plunged again into the sea,
and brought the man to the surface, and both were taken
into the boat.
Captain King was on the other side of the bay, where
the observatory was situated, and where the mast and
sails of the ' Resolution' had been landed. As soon as
the news arrived there of the affray, the natives commenced an attack upon the small force in charge, but
were repulsed, and a truce was agreed to, during which




SEQUEL TO COOK'S DEATH.


113


the property of the ship was carried on board. All
reverence for the English was now at an end. Insult
and injuries followed. The natives erected a breastwork
on the beach and sent the women into the interior.
Two men, however, brought off to the ship a portion of
Cook's remains, and mentioned that the rest of his flesh
had been burnt and that his bones were in possession of
the chiefs. In consequence of some taunts and bravadoes
the crews fired on the natives with the great guns, killing some of them, and slightly wounding the young
Kamehameha.
On the 17th boats were sent on shore, under fire of
the guns, to water the ships. The natives attacked and
annoyed the party thus engaged, and they in return, set
fire to some houses, which led to the destruction of the
whole village. All forbearance seems to have been lost,
and the English seamen gave way to their cruel and
unchastened passions. They even fired on a man who
approached them with the insignia of peace, and was
attended by a dozen boys. Not daunted by the fire of
the English, the herald reached the commanding officer,
and proved to be the priest who had on all occasions
shown himself the friend of Captain Cook. He came to
expostulate on the ungrateful treatment which he and
his brethren had received. Relying on a promise made
when the natives carried some remains of the coimmander on board, that persons and property of the priests
should be respected, they did not remove their effects,
as did others, to a place of security, and now their trust
was rewarded by the loss of their all.
Such is the natural levity of the Hawaiian character and the shallowness of Hawaiian feelings, that
throughout these hostilities numbers of native women
remained on board the ships, showing no concern when
I




114


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


the heads of their countrymen were brought off to the
vessels; and only remarking when the village was
burning, that it was a very fine sight.
At last, the next evening, messengers were sent from
shore to sue for peace, bringing their usual presents.
The conditions required were that the remains of Cook
should be restored. The messengers stated that the
bodies of the marines who fell had been burnt, except
the limb-bones, which were in the possession of the inferior chiefs, and that Kamehameha had the hair of
Captain Cook. Amongst the presents of provisions
which were sent to the ships that night were two from
the injured but forgiving priest.  We cannot scan
motives; but if this lenity and generosity proceeded
from the reverence he bore to his supposed Lono, it is
an instance of religious consistency and forbearance not
very common even in Christian lands.
The next day, all the bones of Cook which could be
recovered were brought on board, wrapped in fine tapa
and adorned with black and white feathers; and on the
21st a high chief came, bringing Cook's gun, his shoes,
and some other trifling articles. He informed the commanders that six chiefs had been killed, some of them
being the best friends the English had among the natives.
On the 21st, the remains of their commander having
been solemnly committed to the deep, the ships sailed
from the bay. They touched at Oahu on the 27th, and
proceeded to Kauai, their first station. Here they did
not receive a cordial welcome. A disease had been implanted among the natives, when the ships first visited
them, which had occasioned deaths and much suffering.
Some goats which Cook had left thinking they might
be useful on the island, proved to be a gift of Ate, and
created a contention which ended in a battle. No longer




A HERO WITHOUT A MONUMENT.


under the restraint which superstitious reverence for
Lono occasioned, the common people acted towards the
English in a troublesome and aggravating manner.  On
the 12th the exploring vessels finally took leave of the
islands.
No sufficient monument has been raised to the great
navigator who fell on the shore of Hawaii. A hundred
yards from the fatal beach, part of a cocoa-nut tree has
been set up in a bed of loose stones and broken lava, on
which successive visitors have fixed sheets of copper,
with inscriptions punched upon them. Mr. Hill on his
visit copied them and gives them in his volume, the
earliest being that of Lord George Paulet. The last
plate reads as follows:'Near this spot fell Capt. James Cook, R.N., the renowned
navigator, who discovered this island A.D. 1778.  His
Majesty's Ship " Imogine," October 17th, 1837.'
Whether the orthography of the ship's name depended
on the ship's carpenter who punched it on the copper,
or is the error of the copyist, is not discoverable.
About a mile from the bay, at an elevation of five
hundred feet above the sea, is another equally unostentatious monument. It consists of a post, ten feet high,
set in loose blocks of lava and enclosed in a wall of the
same material. The visit commemorated on the copper
plate the post bears is in all probability that of Lbrd
Byron in the 'Blonde':In the memory of Capt. James Cook, R.N., who discovered this
island A.D. 1778, this humble monument is erected by his
fellow-countrymen A.D. 1825.'
An attempt has lately been made to raise a more suitable memorial to Cook's fame. Her Majesty's late Consul and Commissioner in the Sandwich Islands, General
I 2




116


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


Miller, was active in promoting this object when illness
compelled him to leave Oahu for a time. In England,
a few names appeared in an announcement in the
'Times' responsive to a not uninteresting call; but no
success appears to have attended the effort made.
Cook had named the group The Sandwich Islands,
after his patron, John, Lord Sandwich, First Lord of
the Admiralty in Lord North's Administration. It does
not appear that there had been any collective native
name for the ten islands. Of these the largest was
called by the inhabitants Hawaii; and the discoverers
hearing the demonstrative article ' O ' used, ' 0 Hawaii,'
' This Hawaii,' understood it as being part of the name;
which soft vocable they wrote Owhyhee —not a bad phonetic equivalent.  At present when the word Hawaii is
used there, it indicates the great island of that name,
whilst when the whole group is intended it is expressed
Hawaii-nei,-q.d., ' All this Hawaii.'
It redounds to the honour of our own nation as well
as to that of the inhabitants of the Sandwich Islands, that
the blood-red dawn of intercourse, the violent death of an
eminent officer of our navy and some English seamen on
their shores, the wrongs and sufferings which unquestionably the aborigines received at our hands, have issued
not in strife and acts of war and hatred, but, generally
speaking, in works of beneficence on our side, and on
theirs in respect and gratitude. Our sovereigns personally,
and their government, have shown on many occasions
great kindness and consideration to the Hawaiian people
and their rulers; have taken a parental and rather unusual interest in a nation which in its nonage exhibited
strength and many fine qualities, and which thirsted for
that civilisation which they were able to bring to its
shores. The Hawaiians have answered these benefits with




SUBSEQUENT EVENTS.


117


a genuine and long-continued affection that is almost
filial; and they have, on more than one occasion, desired to place themselves under the English rule by
ceding the islands to us. England has within the last
few years seen the necessity or the duty of refusing
several such offers, when, if ambition only were her
impulse, she might have spangled her robe with island
possessions.*
The effect which the account of Cook's death produced in Europe was so unfavourable that, in spite
of the ardent description given in the journals of the
expedition of the beauty and fruitfulness of the islands,
no ships visited them for some years.  They were set
down as being a nation of savage barbarians, cruel,
revengeful, and were even accused of cannibalism. The
war with America, too, occupied men's minds, and probably indisposed them for adventurous voyages which
might be productive of much interest, but of little
immediate profit.  During their unvisited period the
islands were the theatre of long and destructive wars.
The true history of Hawaii takes its rise in these fierce
commotions; amidst the grim and bloody scenes of
which we begin to see a moving figure, a warrior of
sterner stuff and of higher aim than the rest, who rose to
be a leader of men, who by his talents and powerful
will united at last all the separate islands into one
kingdom, and became the founder of the present dynasty. This, at the time of which we are now writing,
was the youthful chieftain Kamnhameha.
Among the causes of the rapid decrease of population
in the Hawaiian Islands, the wars of this conqueror, then
* Latterly we may instance Borneo, and the whole Feejan Arclipelago,
consisting of two hundred beautiful islands, which were unconditionally
offered to this country a few years ago.




118


ITAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


commencing, and long continued, have a conspicuous
place.  Cook estimated the islands to contain 400,000
people; but he probably overstated the real number,
as his data were superficial and deceptive.  If at
most places where he touched, he saw a crowd upon
the beach and fleets of canoes, it must be remembered that many of the same individuals would make
their appearance at the several bays, flocking there
out of curiosity and from other motives. Unquestionably, the islands were once comparatively thickly peopled. This is seen by the traces of old cultivation, and
of public works; but it appears doubtful whether within
the last century the population ever amounted to the
mass Cook supposed. The subject of the disappearance
of the native race is one so important that it will be
treated of in a separate chapter.
It is not intended in this place to enter upon the
internal history of the islands, which will be slightly
sketched hereafter, and we proceed to enumerate the
other visitors there before commerce was regularly
established.  The first ships which arrived were two
traders from London, the ' King George' and ' Queen
Charlotte,' under the command of Captains Portlock and
Dixon, the former of whom had accompanied Captain
Cook in his last voyage. This visit was in 1786. The
conduct of the natives was at first unsatisfactory, but
the vessels touched at four of the islands, and, eventually, a fair system of barter was set up. In the autumn
of the same year the ships returned. When off Maui,
they picked up a canoe with four men in it in an exhausted state; the sufferers were restored by the English crews, treated with great kindness and presented
with gifts. On their being put on shore, they were
able to tell the story of the white men's humanity.




VISITS OF LA PEROUSE AND OTHERS.


Captain Portlock seems to have felt the attraction of the
islands, for in December we find the ships still there,
the chiefs at Kauai showing much kindness and liberality. Captain Portlock touched at the same islands in
October of the following year.
About the same time we have a momentary view of
La Perouse, as he vanishes into his silent fate. He
anchored his frigates near Lahaina, on the windward
side of Maui, on May 28, 1786, remaining there only
two days, but sufficiently long to form a favourable
opinion of the inhabitants, and to suppose that in their
shrewd turn for barter he found indications of former
communications with the Spaniards. Forty years afterwards the remains of this interesting navigator's ships
were discovered on the islands of the New Hebrides.
The next recorded visit was that of two merchant
captains, Meares and Douglass, in the 'Nootka' and the
' Iphigenia,' in August 1787. A chief, Kaiana, sailed
with the former to Canton, and the friendship formed
on that occasion was the means two years after of
saving the 'Iphigenia,'-some chiefs of Hawaii having
formed a plan for seizing the ship, but the plot was disclosed by Kaiana. The ambitious Kamehameha obtained
from Captain Douglass, in one of many visits which he
made during two years, a swivel gun, some smaller
fire-arms, and some ammunition.
The grim stories which had circulated after Cook's
death in relation to the Sandwich Islands were now dispelled, and numerous ships from England and America
sailed thither and commenced the trade which has enlarged and continued to the present time. The islands
were, however, in a state of chronic war; and when
men's minds are agitated by one evil raging passion, other
passions are easily evoked as wicked as the first. Thus,




120


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


in the spring of 1790 an event happened which stains
the page with its story of cupidity and revenge.
The American ship 'Eleanor' arrived at Hawaii in
the autumn of 1789, and remained there, trading, all
the winter. In the following February, she proceeded
to Maui, and anchored at Honuaula. Two chiefs of a
neighbouring district stole the ship's boat during the
night, whilst it was moored under the vessel's stern, the
watchman in it having fallen asleep. On his waking
he endeavoured to give an alarm, and on doing this a
second time he was killed by one of the natives. The
boat was successfully taken away, and was broken up
to extract the iron it contained, and which was the
object for which it was stolen. Captain Metcalf then
attacked the village, killed one man and took two others
prisoners, and ascertained that the real depredators had
come from a place on the coast named Oloalu. Thither
he proceeded, planning on his way a great and signal
vengeance. The seaman's life which had been taken
was perhaps expiated already by the blood shed in
return; but the boat, with its oars and its rollocks, its
iron bolts and the copper on its gunwale, cried aloud
for a larger vengeance, a wider destruction of human
life. On coming to an anchor at Oloalu a strict tabu
was found to prevail there. Death by burning was the
fate of any native who should put off to the ship in a
canoe. However, the bones of the murdered seaman
and some remains of the ravished boat, a reward for
both which had been offered by Metcalf, were delivered
up to him, and the innocent or ignorant natives asked
for the proffered reward. They had not yet read the
fable of the Stork, and the Fox which had swallowed a
bone. The American captain meditated a battue, and
formed a design similar to that by which Jehu slew all




THE ' ELEANOR AND THE ' FAIR AMERICAN.'


121


Baal's idolatrous priests. ' Yes, you shall have a reward.
As soon as the tabu is removed, come to me, and I will
give you even more than you ask!' Multitudes of people
hastened round the ship in their canoes to trade. They
were all made to lie on the starboard side, and when all
was ready, Metcalf, standing in the gangway, gave the
command, and a large gun loaded with musket balls
and nails was run out and fired into the midst of the unsuspecting fleet-the terrible destruction being aided by
volleys of musketry and small arms. One hundred
natives were killed, besides a vast number wounded.
This great victory having been achieved, Metcalf sailed
for Hawaii; and the bolts and nails of the ship's boat
seemed now really avenged. One gives a sigh of relief
at remembering that by the Declaration of Independence all fellow-citizenship between this miscreant and
ourselves had formally ceased.
But the page of retribution is not yet complete. The
'Eleanor' was accompanied by a small schooner called
the ' Fair American,' the crew of which, consisting of
five men, was commanded by Metcalf s son, a youth of
eighteen. The schooner proceeded to Hawaii, and not
falling in with the 'Eleanor,' anchored in Kawaihae
bay. A high chief of the island had, for some trifling
offence, been flogged by the elder Metcalf on board his
ship. Kameeimoku had nourished his burning shame
and rage, and had resolved to revenge himself on the
first white men that fell into his power. And now the
white sails of the little schooner appear in the offing,
and the ' Fair American,' like a new Iphigenia, anchors
in the fatal bay. The chief with his people boarded her,
bringing presents, and suddenly they seize young Metcalf and throw him overboard, and massacre all the crew,
except one man, Isaac Davis, whose wounds the natives




122


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


bound up, and carried him on shore, where he was kindly
treated. The schooner was stranded and plundered.
So strangely is woven the web of events, and so often
do we see a hand ' out of evil still educing good,' that
we find the shocking transactions just recorded issuing,
through apparently small channels, in the after history
of the islands, and connecting themselves with the prosperity and peace of the kingdom. Isaac Davis lived to
be of service in the islands, and to obtain the respect
and love of the people. He received presents of valuable lands near the sea, and was raised by Kamehameha
to the rank of a high chief. Another seaman became a
prisoner in Hawaii at the same time, whose after history
is still more interesting and important than that of
Davis. This was John Young, boatswain of the 'Eleanor.'
He had gone on shore about the time of the 'Fair
American's' seizure, and on attempting to return was
forbidden to do so by the King. The'Eleanor' remained two days in Kealakeakua bay, firing guns as
signals for Young to return on board; but he was not
allowed to leave the island, and the vessel sailed without him. Young became afterwards the trusty servant
of Kamehameha. Seamen of that day, as of this, were
not conspicuous for their education or moral discipline;
yet these two men had lived in lands where law and
civilisation were the atmosphere which all breathed;
and with faults almost equal to those of barbarians, they
could not but carry with them some degrees of knowledge and discipline which were not barbaric. Though in
their own country their slight acquirements and imperfect training showed but as a candle at noonday, yet
when brought into comparison with uncivilised aborigines, these men, by virtue of that slight education, were
like the same candle shining in a dark room. Soime




JOHN YOUNG'S INFLUENCE.


123


Christian virtues, too, adhered to their natures, as the
jewels stuck to the flesh which Sindbad threw into the
valley of diamonds. Young's career will necessarily
form part of the sketch of internal Hawaiian history
which is to follow, and it is sufficient to say of him here
that he was found faithful, and that he returned the
generosity of his patron and the confidence which was
reposed in him in the very best way. His character
seems to have risen to the emergency, and to have reacted with a humane influence upon the strong but
passionate nature of the despotic King he served. His
position was also influential as respected his own countrymen and other foreigners who visited the islands; and
the last point of interest about him to be noticed is that
he was the grandfather of the present young and
admirable Queen Emma.
At first the two unwilling settlers made many attempts
to get away from the islands; but they were jealously
watched, and upon one occasion being caught whilst
endeavouring to go on board a vessel would have lost
their lives, had it not been for the determined interference of the King. The latter, though ambitious and
covetous of power, was made of nobler stuff than many
of the chiefs, and was open to the counsel and the persuasions of his two white advisers.  He resisted and
overcame several plans of Kaiana and others for seizing
foreign vessels, though the motive for such robbery was
very strong —that of adding ships to his own navy.
The Eleanor' herself only escaped seizure, and her crew
murder, when the chiefs were already on board and
about to carry out their plan, by the King's going off to
the ship and compelling the chiefs to leave the vessel.
We pass on to a visit made by an English voyager, who
to an ardent love for discovery united a noble heart and




124


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


most humane disposition.  It is Vancouver. He had
sailed with Cook; and now, in 1792, returned himself to
the islands with the surveying vessels ' Discovery' and
'Chatham.' The first bay he entered was that in which
his chief had lost his life; but he came there with no
retributive thunders from his guns, but in peace.
Dropping ' like the gentle dew from heaven,' he coasts
along the islands, enters the bays, and, in passing, he
distributes to the chiefs garden seeds and other objects
which he thought might be useful to the people. Since
his first visit in 1778, fourteen years before, an extensive
depopulation had taken place throughout the group.
This was due to constant internal wars, and to imported
disease.  The disposition of the natives had not improved. The greed of gain had entered into their souls,
and seemed to be the one motive which actuated them
in their intercourse with the strangers. For this they
were ready to prostitute their wives and daughters, and
to display wantonness in so gross a form that it had the
effect of producing disgust and repulsion. Cf the chiefs
Vancouver had formerly known, one alone remained,
and that was Kamehameha.
His arrival and stay in the islands is a good deal
mixed up with their political history; but as a slight
historical sketch is to be given separately, the internal
events of the kingdom will only be noticed incidentally
and when unavoidable.  Vancouver found a foreign
trade already commencing, principally in the hands of
Americans, and confined to the islands of Hawaii and
Kauai, or, as it is spelt in his narrative, Atoovai.  The
articles sought for were sandal-wood and furs: the former
grew abundantly in the mountain districts; the latter
would be sought for in vain, considering that the only
native animals were hogs, rats, and dogs. The English




VANCOUVER'S INTERCOURSE.


125


who came to the islands were in pursuit of pearls. These
were found there, but not in abundance, and were of
three colours, white, yellow, and lead-hued. Vancouver
speaks in terms of praise of Kamebameha, of his good
faith, and the kindness he received from him.  The
King accomlpanied him from the east to the south-east
of Hawaii, whence Vancouver saw the smoke ascending
from the mountain range which culminates in the great
peak of Mauna Loa. He describes the priests of Pele
as a religious order who performed volcanic 'rites, sacrificing fire productions of the country to propitiate the
enraged deity who presided over the burning mountain.
Among things pilfered from his ships were knives;
and these were stolen by the natives not so much for
the steel blades, as for the ivory handles, to be converted into a species of neck ornament considered sacred,
and which were ordinarily made of fish-bones. Having
already become acquainted with the productions of
Europe and America, the islanders had ceased to care
for objects of mere ornament, and preferred in their
traffic cloth, hardware, and useful articles. It has to be
written with shame, that the white men occasionally
taught, by example, lessons of dishonesty, and even
worse faults, during their intercourse with the Hawaiians.
Scant measure, inferiority of quality in the goods sold,
and frauds more destructive in their effect, characterised
at times their dealings. When Laing and Clapperton
were engaged in their African exploration, they took
with them, among articles of barter, needles.  These
were properly packed, and labelled 'Whitechapel Sharps,'
and had not been examined before being used in trade;
but the manufacturer, for the small saving of labour,
omitted to drill the eyes of the needles; and the few
shillings gained by the fraud had nearly cost the travellers




126


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


their lives, so great was the indignation of the tribe
who took them in exchange when they discovered they
had been deceived and cheated. In the same way, some
of the muskets sold to the Hawaiians were so wretched
that they burst the first time they were fired,-often
producing dangerous injuries to those who used them,
and leaving safety only to those against whom they were
employed.
Ill faith on one side may be the model, but it cannot
be the excuse for malpractices in the other party to a
transaction. Unquestionably the islanders acted at times
in accordance with their savage nature, and with a cruelty
which they had not required to learn from civilised
nations. On the 11th of May, in the year of Vancouver's
visit, an English store-ship, the ' Daedalus,' approached
Oahu, and lay off Waimea, on the north side of the
island. Its advent seems to have produced all the
amazement that was excited by Cook's arrival at Hawaii
in 1778. The first thought of the natives was that the
coral rocks were floating, and when they saw the officers
and crew they took them to be gods on account of the
brightness of their eyes. Unfortunately, whilst the
seamen were watering the ship, a dispute arose between
them and the inhabitants which resulted in the death of
a Portuguese sailor. Lieutenant Hergest, who had charge
of the shore party, and the astronomer, Mr. Gooch, not
aware of the fracas, had wandered to some distance and
fell into the hands of a lawless band of natives, who, it
appears, owned allegiance to none of the local chiefs.
Again the same process was gone through as with Cook:
-first, there was the belief that the foreigners were
divine, and belonged to the expected Lono; then the
discovery that they were mortals, which seems to have
been a sufficient signal for attack, and the two unfortu



VANCOUVER'S RETURN TO HAWAII.


nate officers were killed. The ' DTedalus worked nearer
land, and fired on shore till evening, when she took her
departure. The presence of parties of depredators roaming about the islands was a consequence of the kings
and chiefs being engaged in their dissensions and wars.
In February 1793, Vancouver returned to Hawaii.
He had taken a voyage in the meantime to the northwest coast of America, and he had brought from California some cattle, intending to leave them at the
Sandwich Islands, with the benevolent design of their
introduction there. They had, however, all died on the
voyage, except a bull and a cow, which he landed, but
the cow died soon afterwards. Vancouver speaks of
Kamehameha with much admiration; he saw him possessed of great and unusual qualities, and in his intercourse with the famous warrior, he took the opportunity
of instilling into his mind counsels of wisdom and
humanity.  The King's sagacious mind seized with
promptitude the opportunities offered him, and he
seems to have become impressed with the idea of the
possibility of lighting in his benighted land the lamp
of civilisation from the tqrch brought to him by the
English navigator. Another remarkable person came on
board Vancouver's ship. This was Kaahumanu, Kamehameha's favourite queen, who plays a conspicuous part
in the subsequent history of the islands. At the time now
spoken of she was but sixteen, beautiful in person and
pleasing in manner. In after life she grew inordinately
stout; but the force of her will and character kept pace
with her bodily dimensions, and made itself felt in the
mastery she obtained over every one who approached
her, native or foreigner. Her name, like that of her
husband's, has become a dynastic title, and is assumed
by the female premiers to this day.




128


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


Vancouver was able, before he left the islands, to
present Kamehameha with five cows and some sheep.
In return for this kind act the chief gave the most
valuable object he possessed, his own war-cloak, pierced
with spear holes, which he desired might be made a
present to George IIL., with the injunction that as no
other person than its possessor had hitherto worn it, so
it was to grace no other shoulders than those of the
King of England. Vancouver also made an attempt to
bring about peace between the inhabitants of Hawaii
and those of the other islands with which they were
at war. His counsels were listened to respectfully, but
did not produce the desired result; and the chiefs of
Hawaii, on their part, asked his assistance in bringing all
the islands under their dominion, which centralisation
of government seems to have shown itself to them as
the only real means of putting an end to hostilities.
Vancouver proceeded to Maui, and repeated his lessons
of peace to the chiefs at Lahaina. At Oahu he earnestly
lectured the people on the distinctions between right
and wrong, and impressed upon them the principles of
justice and humanity. Her4 was an English seaman,
unpretendingly, and almost unconsciously, acting as a
Christian missionary. More than a quarter of a century
elapsed before the seed then scattered showed life and
put forth leaves; and long before Christianity was
publicly brought to the islands, Vancouver was sleeping
in his grave; but the leaven, hidden, and even forgotten,
seems, nevertheless, to have been working towards the
remarkable events of 1819 and 1820.
To stamp on the native mind the great lesson of retributive justice, Vancouver considered it proper to
punish the people of Oahu, for the murder of Lieutenant
Hergest, of the ' Dedalus,' Mr Gooch, and the Portu



LESSONS OF RETRIBUTION.


129


guese sailor.  The chiefs of the islands cleared them
selves before him of any complicity in the crime; and
three men had already been executed by their orders
for participation in the murder. However, as Vancouver
determined to bring the matter into the light of day,
three more men were sent on board his ship and tried;
and after evidence which seemed satisfactory as to their
guilt, sentence was passed on them, and they were
handed over to their chiefs, by whom they were shot
before a large concourse of people. It is true that it
was afterwards affirmed that the three men who were
thus killed were not the real murderers, and that they
were sacrificed to appease the English captain's anger.
If this were so, it is to be regretted that so good a man
should have made so great a mistake; and that the
execution which he ordered should have taken effect on
innocent victims. Vancouver's vessels left the islands
on the 30th of March. He returned for his last visit in
January 1794; and among other matters which signalized his stay, a vessel was built and rigged, and
named the 'Britannia.' The work was done by the
ship's people, assisted by an English carpenter in ths
King's employ. Vancouver also brought about a recolnciliation between Kamehameha and his favourite queen
Kaahumanu, who had been separated from him through
jealousy fostered by unfriendly chiefs. He gave the
King excellent advice as to the discipline of his troops
and his political conduct; urged the advantages of
peace, the folly of idolatry, the oppressive evil of the
tabu system, and made known to him the one true God,
Creator, Ruler, and Judge of all nations and all men.
Vancouver's visit placed the British in a new and
more favourable light with the native race. The impressions of events at and following on Cook's death
K




130


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


were in a great measure done away; and the people
rightly conceived England to be the greatest maritime
power in the world. As such, they sought her protection. They considered that she alone could secure peace
and the unification of the entire group under the sway
of the Hawaiian King. That some repressive power
was needed became apparent before Vancouver left; for
the inhabitants of Maui made a descent upon Hawaii,
and though they were driven back, the event seems to
have been the determining cause of the King and
chiefs ceding Hawaii to this country. This was done
on the 25th of February, on which day the chiefs
assembled on board the 'Discovery,' and Kainehameha
made a formal declaration of submission to the monarch
of Great Britain. He was followed by other chiefs,
who in speeches stated the advantages they expected to
derive from the cession of their country.
Mr. James Jackson Jarves, a candid and industrious
historian, but an American citizen, says, in his account
of the transaction, that the meeting on board the sloop
was, 'as the natives with more justice state, "to request
the King to protect our country."' That might have
been the motive, but the act itself was to make an
absolute cession of the island, not simply to place it
under a protectorate; for after the King's declaration,
Lieutenant Paget went on shore and planted the English
colours, and took possession of the island in the name
of His Britannic Majesty. A salute was fired, and the
natives shouted, ' Kanaka no Beritane!' We are men
of Britain.'
Vancouver left a certificate with Kamehameha recording the event, and the document was carefully preserved
for a long time. It ran thus:-' I beg to inform all
visitors, that on the 25th February, 1794, at a grand




CESSION OF HAWAII TO ENGLAND.


131


council of the principal chiefs of this island, assembled
on board His Britannic Majesty's ship under my command, Kamehameha made the most solemn concession
of the island of Owhyhee to His Britannic Majesty, his
heirs, &c.; and himself, with the attending chiefs, unanimously acknowledged themselves subjects to the British
Crown.'
Although out of the order of this narrative, it may be
well to relate here, that a few years afterwards, when
Kamehameha had gained possession of the islands of
Maui and Oahu, he wrote to George III., acknowledging
him  as his sovereign; and finally, when he had completed the conquest of the entire group, he wrote again
to that monarch, in the following terms:-*
'His Most Sacred Majesty George III., of the United
Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, King, Defender of the
Faith, &c., &c.
' BROTHER,-We, Kamehameha, King of the      Sandwich
Islands, wishing to render every assistance to the ships of his
most sacred Majesty's subjects who visit these seas, have sent
a letter by Captain Spence, ship 'Duke of Portland,' to his
Majesty, since which Timoree, King of Atooi, has delivered
his island up, and we are now in possession of the whole of
the Sandwich Islands. We, as subjects to his most sacred
Majesty, wish to have a seal and arms sent from Britain, so as
there may be no molestation to our ships or vessels in those
seas, or any hindrance whatever. Wishing your Majesty a
long, prosperous, and happy reign,-I am, Brother,
' KAMEHAMEHA.
'Woahoo, Autgust 6, 1810.'
The reason which Vancouver assigns for the voluntary
* The letter is given in a pamphlet by Mr. Alexander Simpson,
On the Progress of Events, &c., in the Sandwich Islands.' Smith,
Elder, and Co. 1843.
K 2




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


cession of Owhyhee to H. B. Majesty, and which he
accepted, is that the inhabitants were now commercially
acquainted with four nations whom they were informed
were equally powerful with the English, but that they
deliberately preferred the latter. In making this transference of power, great ceremonies were used. Religious
rites were celebrated in the great Morai, to which
Vancouver could not be admitted without going through
certain restrictive observances; one of which was that
he should not be wetted with sea water, or even sprinkled
with it; and another, that he was to shun the society of
those who did not attend the ceremonies or worship in
the temple. Profound silence reigned in the temple,
broken only by prayers uttered in the lowest voice,
scarcely audible, for His Britannic Majesty, &c. The
King repeats the prayers after the priests in the same
scarce audible tone; then in the profound silence he seizes
a hog, the legs of which are bound with cords, and dashes
it to death on the ground. If the animal had made a
moan or any sound, the sacrifice would have been
ineffectual.
King, and chiefs, and people, were entangled in the
complex net of idolatry; often chafing under it, yet unable to escape from its meshes. Hitherto they had seen
no alternative; and to change one system of gods for
another, was only to pass from bondage into bondage, —
the inwrought sacerdotalism ruling over and pervading
equally all the systems. The King and some of the chiefs
seem, however, to have seen, far-sightedly, that the white
visitants were animated by other motives than their
own pagan religion, and that they possessed a higher
instruction in morality; and after making the cession of
their islands to a nation which they, seeing only the
foot of Hercules, perceived to be great, powerful, and




APPEAL TO ENGLAND FOR RELIGIOUS TEACHERS. 133


wise, they requested of Vancouver that on his return to
England he would procure religious instructors to be sent
to them from the country of which they now considered
themselves subjects. Vancouver did not forget the
earnestness of this appeal; and, on reaching England,
he urged on the Minister, Mr. Pitt, the advantage of
sending clergy to Hawaii. That was not a missionary
age. It was not the accusation of that generation that
they would compass sea and land to make a proselyte.
That one prayer for religious light made to this land
was unattended to and forgotten. The revolution was
raging in France. Englishmen had shuddered or shed
tears at the story of a monarch publicly murdered by
his subjects; and the best excuse that can be offered
for the cold indifference exhibited when the Hawaiian
nation asked spiritual help of our country, is that
England was absorbed by events nearer home, and was
preoccupied in averting dangers which threatened her
own stability.
The prayer for English teachers was unanswered at
that time. The Hawaiian nation and its ruler continued
to wear the heavy chain of paganism, and Kameharneha
did not live to see the introduction of Christianity in
his kingdom; but the desire expressed in 1793 seems
to have become traditional, so that when in 1820 the
first American missionaries arrived in the Sandwich
Islands, it was enquired whether these were the religious
instructors whom the King and chiefs expected from
England. Finding that they were not, there was much
opposition to their landing; and it was only on the
assurance of the English settler, John Young, that these
missionaries came to preach the same religion as those
whom they expected, that they were permitted to come
on shore.




134


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


Vancouver took his final leave in March 1794; and
in 1798 this amiable man closed in death his eminent
but short career.
In the year of his departure, Captain Brown, master
of the English ship 'Butterworth,' discovered and surveyed the harbour of Honolulu. As arrivals of ships
became frequent after that time, it ceases to be interesting to refer further to their visits, with the exception of
the two made by Captain, afterwards Rear-Admiral,
Beechey, in H.M.S. 'Blossom.' The volumes containing
the interesting narrative of his voyages and discoveries
in the Pacific and Behring's Strait, published in 1831,
are very well known. Beechey's first visit took place
in 1826. The 'Blossom' left Tahiti on the 26th of
April, and arrived at Honolulu on the 20th of May.
The rapidity of this passage had left the impressions of
the former island strong on the mind and on the eye,
and it was the contrasts between the two places which
first struck the voyagers. They missed the green and
shady forests which skirted the shores of Tahiti; and
after intercourse with its effeminate inhabitants, the
Hawaiians' darker complexion and coarser features,
together with a wildness of facial expression, impressed
them at first unfavourably; but they subsequently learned
to respect these signs of a manliness and boldness which
were deficient in the Sybaritic people of the more
southern group. Other symptoms, indicating the footsteps of civilization upon the islands, met their eyes.
The forts in the harbour, the cannon, the ensign of
Kamehameha displayed on the ramparts of a fort
mounting 40 guns, and at the gaff of a man-of-war
brig and of some other vessels, rendered the distinction
between the two countries still more evident. Old
familiar words in their own language greeted them as




BEECHEY'S VISITS.


135


they walked up the town, already laid out in streets and
squares. In one place was the notice, ' An Ordinary at
One o'clock;' at another, 'Billiards;' here was the sign,
' The Jolly Tar;' there (and we fear at a considerable
distance), ' The Good Woman.'
The reception met with from the King and the chiefs
(including Madam Boki), was friendly in the extreme;
and as far as possible all the wants of the ship were
supplied.  Some astronomical and other observations
were taken, and Mr. Lay, the naturalist of the expedition, being in ill health, was left under the protection
of one of the chiefs, who, in compliment to the great
minister, had adopted the name of Pitt.  Early in
June the'Blossom' sailed for Kamschatka. She returned
to Honolulu in January 1827. By this time the etiquette of exchanging salutes had been established; and
with such forms intercourse was conducted in a land
where thirty years before the naked savage had struggled in deadly conflict with armed Englishmen. No doub
the contrast impressed the visitors, as Romans from the
capital would have been impressed who visited Britain
a century after the Julian invasion, and marked the
transition taking place in our barbarian ancestors.
The products of civilized nations had immediately become a passion with the Hawaiians, and they, being
very imitative, instituted many things which were properly in advance of their then state. There were not
only hotels at the time of Beechey's visit, but Kaahumanu's firniture numbered sofas and cushions of silk
and velvet, and she had in her chests (perhaps wardrobes), the most costly silks of China. The Chief Boki
had presented a service of plate to the King, for which
he had given three thousand dollars. Boki had similar
services himself; and his glass was from Pellatt and Green




136              HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.
in London. The King was always attended by a guard
under arms; soldiers paced the ramparts of the fort;
and in the stillness of the night, there fell on the
Englishman's ear the soothing and familiar words,
'All's Well.'




CHAPTER IX.


HISTORICAL SKETCH —  A DUST OF SYSTEMS '-' THE
LONELY ONE.9
IT would be a waste of time to give more than the
merest outline of the internal history of Hawaii
before its intercourse with European nations and with
America.   Each island had its king, its chiefs, its
dissensions, its ' oppressed nationalities.' To enumerate
the rulers of the eight islands would be uselessly to
encumber the page with native names which the reader
could not pronounce, and would not try to remember.
All that will be attempted here is to describe very
rapidly the dynastic condition of the Archipelago;
dwelling, for a few minutes, on the more salient points
of its story, in order to show how the eight separate
fibres of government were twisted into a single thread,
by the wisdom and determination of one man, at about
the beginning of the present century.
The bards, however, could recite from memory the
names of seventy-seven successive kings; and if only
five years be allowed to a reign, the traditionary history
would extend through nearly 400 years.   But the
reigns were probably of greater average length; since
the first three Karnehamehas occupied the present




138


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


century till the year 1854, when the late king ascended
the throne at the age of twenty-one, and reigned ten years.
An unavoidable pun, arising from dissimilarity of
languages, must be made in recording that the mother
of the islands was Papa. She created the Kalo, and
her history involves the doctrine of metempsychosis.
It is unnecessary to say that she lived in very early
times. Descending, in a bound, to a period when a king
was at least half-man in his nature, we come to Akea,
the first King of Hawaii. At the termination of his
reign, he passed into a region beneath, named Kapapahananaumoku (' the island-bearing stratum '), and there
founded a kingdom.     Akea was succeeded in the
monarchy by Miru, the Hawaiian Pluto, who, when he
died, descended to 'that uncomfortable place below,' and
shared the kingdom with Akea. The subterranean
realm has been invested by the native traditions with
strange fanciful poetry. It is a land of darkness.
Its inhabitants feed upon lizards and butterflies; they
drink from streams of water which flow there; they
recline beneath wide-spreading kou trees and large
kahiris-(insignia, formed of feathers on a tall handle,
round which they are set cylindrically). Some of the
natives described the hades of departed spirits, as 'a
bourn from which no traveller returns;' but by others it
was said, that occasionally a newly-arrived soul, after
having been questioned by Miru as to the doings and
pursuits of the kings and people above, was sent back
to the ao nmaramac, 'region of day,' with a monitory
message, to desire them to descend to his kingdom.
These visitations were rare, and little was generally
known of the land of Kapapahananaumoku except
what was communicated in dreams and visions of the
priests.




KINGLY SUCCESSION.


1.39


The Hawaiian kings for many successive generations
resided frequently at a town called Honaunau, on the
western side of the island, a little south of the bay
where Cook met his death. This place was formerly of
greater importance than it is now.  It possesses two
interesting objects:-the Hare o Keave, a mausoleum
containing the bones of about eight generations of
kings; which bones are carefully cleaned, and tied up
in bundles. A great number of frightful idols keep
guard within and without the regal ossuary. The other
place of interest is a sacred enclosure adjoining this
building, being one of the two pohonuas, or cities of
refuge, which existed on the island of Hawaii.  After
the unification of the islands the King and chiefs resided
generally at Lahaina or Maui.
The kingly office was hereditary, but not purely so.
The King could nominate his successor even though he
possessed offspring of his own. In matters of succession,
owing to the great laxity of the marriage tie, the female
descent was preferred, and a female always occupies the
next place to the King in the State. Her office is now
called that of Premier. It is stated in tradition that,
on two or three occasions, queens have reigned in the
island; and among the chiefdom many were, and still
are, females.  There is no reason to doubt that at first,
as with the beginning of other kingdoms, the strong man
ruled, and that the Hawaiians, like other nascent
nations, adopted
'... the simple plan,
That they should take who have the power,
And they should keep who can.'
Kings and chiefs having attained this social superiority,
maintained it with effect. Because they were strong,




140


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


they were enabled successfully to fortify their position
and become yet stronger. They admitted the priesthood to somewhat equal privileges, and they found the
advantage of having their aid, as they then possessed
the means of coercing the common people, both by
bodily force and through mental influences,-those of
induced fear and superstition. They held the people in
the most complete subserviency, and the whole system
was rigorously feudal. By the tabu, and the plan of
forced labour, called hana poalimna, the chiefs reduced
the commonalty to a servile and tributary condition;
whilst having abundance of food, rest, and shelter themselves, the physical difference between the chiefdom
and the common people became so marked, that it caused
a doubt in some observers' minds whether the chiefs
could be of the same race with the plebeian population.
The chiefs, male and female, attained to great height,
strength, and size, and had in later life a strong tendency
towards obesity.
With respect to the Crown, Wilkes* says, that in
former times there was no fixed succession, and that the
practice affecting it varied. Even when the right of
descent became established the rank of the mother was
an element in deciding the successor. Thus the eldest
son and daughter of the first Kamehameha, who had
several wives, were set aside in favour of younger
children by a wife of higher birth than their mother.
And with regard to female succession, the same writer
instances Queen Keokeolani, who, two generations
before the discovery of the islands by Cook, held the
throne, although she had several half-brothers, but who
were of lower rank on their mother's side than her own.


* Nar. U. S. Exploring Expedition.'




FORM OF GOVERNMENT.


The King would also occasionally appoint a younger son
to be his successor.
With all these variations and irregularities, however,
the nation preserved the pyramidal form, into which all
societies crystallize with as much certainty as Maldon
rocksalt. There was the kingly apex; the chiefs, of
several grades; and the great substratum of the people.
We have had ample and new opportunity lately of seeing
that the pyramid of society, like that in architecture, is
the most enduring form-a form of divine original; and
that when it is attempted to truncate or reverse the
figure, it falls into flatness and a ruin.
The King's power was absolute, and the system was
strictly feudatory. The King gave lands and whole
districts to chiefs, who, in their turn, lorded it over the
people in the most arbitrary manner. When the King
was personally weak, the true power lodged in the chiefs;
and the King, though still suzerain, was rather in the
position of a great chief, exercising control over his own
reserved possessions, but with little influence as a
monarch. Like John and his barons, he had sometimes to engage in domestic wars with his feudatories.
A king of stronger will would claim his true position and
power, and not remain content with being himself little
more than primus inter pares. The rank of chiefs,
priests, and officers of state was hereditary; indeed,
there seems to have been some approach to caste in the
continuation of occupations and offices; nevertheless,
the power of nomination to all offices remained in
the King, who would occasionally raise men from humble rank to the foremost stations. He could create
Wolseys, when the 'sterner stuff' of which ambition is
made was not deficient in the subject. Thus Kamehameha raised Karaimoku, surnamed William     Pitt,




142


THAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


after the great Englishman, his contemporary, to a rank
second only to his own. This man, originally a chief
of the third or fourth rank, was advanced to be prime
minister, and he held, in truth, the actual government
of the islands. In this and some other cases the discernment or the mere affection of the monarch unearthed
a gem of real value. The same remarkable man was
equally happy or equally foreseeing when he conferred
high rank on the English seaman John Young; for in
him he also had a servant of great capacity and of the
highest importance to the welfare of the nation.
It has been mentioned in a previous chapter that
when Cook arrived at the islands, Kalaniopuu was King
of Hawaii. He appears to have been not one of the
' rois faineants,' but to have possessed the actual as
well as the nominal power of the monarch. His reign
extended through thirty yeArs, and, as stated above, he
conquered the neighbouring isle of Maui and added it
to his kingdom. It was also mentioned that during
Cook's stay in Kealakeakua Bay, in January 1779,
Kalaniopuu, who had just returned victorious from
Maui, paid him a visit in great state, and that he
was accompanied in his canoes by the young chief
Klamehameha. This man, whose name is so closely
associated with the Sandwich Islands, and whose life
and exploits form so material a part of their history,
was born about the year 1754, probably at Kalaua, a
large district on the north-east coast of Hawaii, which
district he inherited as his patrimony. At the time of
his introduction to Captain Cook, he would be about
twenty-five years old. He possessed a vigorous constitution, and was unequalled in his acquaintance with all
the warlike games and athletic exercises of his country.
His mental conformation was in keeping with his




XAKI\mIr AM H' S YOUTi. r


143


physique. At an early age he was distinguished by his
enterprise, energy, and decision of character, and by
that quality so essential to success, an unwearying perseverance in the accomplishment of his objects. He
had associated to himself a number of young chiefs, his
own contemporaries, whose attachment and cooperation he secured, and into whom he instilled his own
daring spirit and resolution.  Such was the ore on
which time and opportunity were to work. When he
first immerges on our sight, in Captain King's narrative, his appearance is not prepossessing. He is described as having the most savage face ever beheld; its
natural ugliness heightened by a dirty brown paste or
powder plastered over his hair.  The diamond was
in the rough; yet, stirred by a restless energy, and
beckoned onward by an irresistible ambition, we shall
see him step forth from among his companions, the
foremost man-the Bonaparte of the Pacific.
Kamehameha had the unusual advantage of having
two fathers. He was at once reputed to be the son of
Keona, brother of the King Kalaniopuu (Cook's Tereobu), and he was equally claimed as the offspring of
Kahekili, King of Maui. As he received inheritances
from both claimants to his paternity, he could scarcely
object to an arrangement which in many cases might
be felt embarrassing. This patrimony he cultivated
and improved whilst he was young and before entering upon public life, with the same industry and
intelligence which characterized him at all times. He
laboured with his own hands in one of his fields, which
in consequence received his name; and his companions, following his example, selected other spots for
their personal industry, and to which their names
became attached. As Mr. Ellis walked through the




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


scene of Kamehameha's youth, a chief who accompanied
him pointed out with pride many memorials of his
late sovereign's energetic youth. ' These groves of noni
trees,' he said, 'were planted by Kamehameha before
his beard was grown.' He showed a perpendicular
pile of rocks on the shore, one hundred feet in height,
through which the young chief and his companions
had dug and formed a good road to the sea, with a
regular descent, in order that their fishing-canoes
might be drawn up and down; and in another place he
had dug through several strata of rock and lava in
the endeavour to procure water, but was unsuccessful,
-the material offering at last too great a resistance
by its hardness to the imperfect tools which were
employed.
In 1782 an event occurred which changed the current of Kamehameha's life.  Kalaniopuu, King of
Hawaii, died, leaving his dominions jointly to his son
Kiwalao and his reputed nephew Kamehameha, who,
however, was to be subordinate to Kiwalao. The island
was divided between the two heirs, the son receiving
the fertile districts on the south and east of Hawaii,
whilst the nephew's portion embraced the mountainous
and wilder regions along the western and northern
coasts. Heron-legged Ate was not long in seeing in
this arrangement an opportunity for discord, and she
threw in her lighted brand of strife, by which the whole
island quickly became enkindled.
The name of Kamehameha given to or assumed by
the young chief has the meaning of 'the solitary' or
' the lonely one.' It is a name very well appropriated
by ambition, which, in the midst of men, dwells apart on
the high mountain of its own dreamy egotism, ready to
use or to sacrifice its willing and devoted adherents



THE FIRST CONFLICT.


145


never admitting them to the inmost enclosure of its own
purposes and hopes and weaknesses.*
It cannot be told now whether Kamehameha had
hitherto conceived such ambitious views, leading to
kingly power, as afterwards brought into action all his
bodily and mental powers, and made him glance beyond
the limits of the small archipelago, soon to be all his
own, for fresh conquests; or whether the particular position in which he found himself lighted the lamp within
his breast, which had previously been kept filled and
trimmed, and ready for the taper that should make it
burn;-and whether, like young Saul, a new heart was
given him as soon as he saw power within his grasp. He
was, however, quickly called upon to act. The calmness
of the sea which washed the shores of Kona, one of
Kamehameha's newly-acquired districts, excited the cupidity of the chiefs of the neighbouring country of Hilo,
which was the possession of Kiwalao, and they desired
to obtain it for a fishing-ground. Having gained over
Kiwalao to their views, the Hilo chiefs embarked in
a war-canoe, carrying with them the remains of the
late king, and sailed for Kailua, the chief town of
Kona, under pretence of performing there the solemn
rites of sepulture. A sudden storm, however, obliged
the invaders to land at Honaunau where the House of
Keawe was situated, the mausoleum of the Hawaiian
kings, and there they deposited Kalaniopuu's corpse.
*    'Wakeful he sits, and lonely and unmoved,
Beyond the arrows, views, or shouts of men;
As oftentimes an eagle, ere the sun I
Throws o'er the varying earth his early ray,
Stands solitary, stands immovable,
Upon some highest cliff, and rolls his eye,
Clear, constant, unobservant, unabased,
In the cold light above the dews of morn.'
WALTER SAVAGE LANDOR, ' Count Julian.
L




146


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


One of the chiefs, Keeaumoku, father of Kaahumanu,
secretly detaching himself from the rest, hastened to
Kamehameha, and acquainted him    with these proceedings; and in his absence the invading party
concerted measures for seizing on the whole of Hawaii.
Consistent with his character, at once bold and cautious, Kamehameha immediately approached his enemies' camp, had an interview with Kiwalao, and the
two leaders were in appearance reconciled. Kiwalao,
to satisfy his disappointed chiefs, divided his own territories among them; but Keona, the reputed father of
Kamehameha, dissatisfied with his share, marched off
in a rage, with his followers, determined on war and
plunder. Unrestrained bythe ties of blood, he entered
his son's possessions with force and arms, cut down trees,
and engaging in a skirmish fatal to several, 'cries havoc,
and lets slip the dogs of war.' Hostilities thus commenced, quickly enlarged.  The furious chief was
joined by the king who did him wrong, Kiwalao; and
with all their united forces they threw themselves upon
their perfectly innocent rival Kameharnmha. There was
a fierce battle, in which Keeaumoku, the discoverer of the
plot, was sadly wounded, and was called derisively the
' yellow-back crab.' Not content with dagger-wounds,
and that unkindest cut of all, the epithet, his enemies
poured upon him to rob him of a very valuable whale's
tooth, which the chief wore round his neck. The movement attracted Kamehameha's attention, who, seeing
his friend's danger, rushed to his rescue, charging the
enemy furiously. The weak, but not ill-meaning, king,
Kiwalao, got knocked down with a stone in the meleee,
- an opportunity which the 'yellow-back crab' saw and
did not neglect, but jumping up, all smarting with his
wounds, put a quietus to the fallen king with a sword.




KAMIEHAMEIIHA INVADES MAUI.


147


The immediate effect of this coup-de-grace administered by his adherent was to terminate the biarchy, and
to leave Kamehameha sole ruler of Hawaii. A rout of
Kiwalao's party took place, some of them seeking shelter in the place of refuge at Honaunau, others flying
to the mountains and the sea. The kingdom was destined to be no quiet possession. The unnatural Keona
and another chief seized on the fertile possessions of
the late king lying on the westward side of the island,
practically leaving Kamehameha little more territory
than he had before.   Divisions and desertions, however, soon followed among the hostile party. The King
recommenced the war, and an obstinately-contested engagement took place, terminating in a drawn game, in
which victory declared for neither side. Kamehameha
immediately marched upon Hilo, one of the provinces
wrested from him, and in a skirmish received so dangerous a blow on the head as nearly to have finished
his career.
It is very advisable in those not actually engaged in a
war to remain strictly neutral. It is dangerous to declare
for either party whilst results are at all doubtful. This
truth was practically discovered by Kahikili, who had
obtained the sovereignty of the four large islands lying
between Hawaii and Kauai, the latter of which, the extreme north-westerly member of the group, being also in
the possession of his ally Kaeo. Kahikili sent assistance
to the opponents of Kamehameha, who in return invaded
Maui, the island nearest to Hawaii in its ruler's absence, and defeated his son in a very bloody battle. So
great was the carnage, that the little river Iao was
dammed by the dead bodies of the foe; many of the
warriors being hurled down the precipice from the
narrow defile where the fight took place, and from
L2




1 t8


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


which there was little opportunity of escape. It was in
this severe conflict that Kamehameha's extraordinary
powers   fully  discovered   themselves.     His immense
strength was already known, and his personal courage
was an established fact; but now were seen other qualities necessary to a general and a ruler of men. He
possessed an observing eye, and a cool sagacity that
enabled him, as he watched the contest from a commanding point, to issue clear and judicious orders; but
when the enemy's shock       was greatest, when his own
battle reeled or wavered, then he hurled himself into
the midst, like a descending Mars; and his animating
presence and the resounding tones of his deep voice,
gave new life to his men and turned back the forefront
of the enemy.
The battle of Kepaniwai, 'the stopping of the waters,'
has been celebrated    in many meles or historic songs.
These unwritten compositions are marked by simplicity
and feeling, and have about them the minor and melancholy cadence of the Ossianic poems.
In the meanwhile Kamehameha's chief opponent on
Hawaii, Keona,* had again invaded the provinces of
* Jarves speaks of Keona as the brother of Kalaniopuu, the previous King of Hawaii, whilst Ellis mentions him as his son, and cousin,
therefore, to Kamehameha. He may indeed be a different person,
though having the same name as the reputed father of Kam6hameha; and
it was customary for persons at pleasure to change names with one
another, or to assume new ones. The difficulty of identifying persons
is increased to us by a certain degree of similarity in the construction
of the names, and from the circumstance of the same name being spelt
in at least three different ways by different writers. To this must be
added a general indistinctness of parentage, before alluded to, and which
would hardly allow the Hawaiians to be addressed in the spirited
language of a patriotic Dixie song'Ye are sons of your sires,(In all probability ')-&c.




KAIANA.


149


the former; but was opposed by Kaiana, a distinguished
warrior of Kauai, the same who has been mentioned as
having made a voyage to Canton in an English vessel.
On his return, in the 'Iphigenia,' Kaiana found evil
influences at work against him in his own island; and,
being invited by Kamehameha, he settled in Hawaii,
and for his services received large possessions there and
high rank. He was a splendid specimen of his race; six
feet five inches in height; very handsome in face and
figure; active in mind and warlike in disposition. He
had improved the opportunity for observation which the
voyage to China gave him, and he returned to his
country laden, not only with mental acquirements, but
with material stores of arms, ammunition, and other
European and Asiatic articles-possessions which gave
him great advantages at home. From this time firearms became by degrees introduced into the wars of the
islands, and whilst they sharpened the conflict, they
shortened the fight. Traders, who now began to visit
Hawaii, found guns and ammunition ready subjects for
barter; they also commenced implanting among the
chiefs the taste for ardent spirits,-a taste so new to
them that spirituous liquors were at first offensive to
them. Would that they had ever remained so, and that
the original aversion had never been overcome!
The war proceeding in Hawaii was not without its
omens. Natural phenomena not only disheartened the
army of Keona, but, like a destroying angel, suddenly
transfixed a number of the combatants in death. There
is situated on the island a volcanic mountain of great
size, Mauna Kea, which has been already described.
Keona's troops, accompanied by their wives and children,
were descending the mountain by three nearly parallel
paths, separated from each other by some little distance.




150


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


As they marched, a sudden and very violent earthquake
and eruption of the mountain took place, attended with
noises exceeding thunder in loudness; the earth shook
and rocked beneath their reeling feet, and a shower of
ashes was thrown high into the air, filling a circuit of
many miles. The foremost of the three divisions appears to have been nearest to the centre of energy; a few
of their number were scorched to death, but the great
majority escaped. The division in the rear were subjected
to the same phenomena, which were quickly over, and
the people hastened forward, to come up with their companions who were in advance. As they approached
the central division they discovered that the people had
halted,-some of them apparently calmly sleeping on
the ground, whilst others were sitting upright with their
wives and children embraced in their arms, or pressing
their faces together in their usual manner of salutation.
They spoke to them, but there was no reply; they
touched them, but there was no motion; they examined
their comrades more closely, and discovered that they
were in the camp of Death. Every human being of
those four hundred was stiff and lifeless, killed by the
mephitic vapours that had issued from the mountain.
One living thing alone was left among them. A hog
was turning up the earth in search of roots, indifferent
to that terrible scene of death in life.




151


CHAPTER X.
HISTORICAL SKETCH- KAMEHAM EHA  THE  CONQUEROR- -
INEPTNESS FOR THE LYRE.
HE force under Keona, dispirited and reduced in
number, were soon afterwards met by Kaiana and
by Kamehameha, who had now (1791) returned to
Hawaii, and were routed with but feeble resistance.
Keona fled to Hilo and led a vagrant life there for two
years. In 1793 he determined to throw himself on the
conqueror's clemency. Having obtained permission of
Kaiana to pass to the shore, he proceeded to the coast
with a few friends, that he might sail round to a bay on
the north-west of the island, where Kamehameha was at
that time. Kaiana lent them canoes for the purpose,
and they went on, fanned by alternate hopes' and fears,
stopping at various villages along the coast; and at each
place where Keona touched, the people brought presents
of food and other things, and by every means demonstrated their affection for the chief. Some wept when
they saw him, for joy at his visit; others wept in sadness at his departure, with foreboding fears for what his
fate might be. He was casting a hazardous die in surrendering himself to his enemy. Generosity is a frequent halo of the most savage warfare; but here too
much of the conqueror's future success and peace depended on his rival's existence or death. Nevertheless,
whilst Keona remained at Paraoa, the last village at




152


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


which he landed, he received comforting assurances of
Kameharnmha's good-will towards him. On the third
morning he took leave of his friends there, and directed
his canoe towards Kawaihae.
Kamehameha was encamped in that bay; and, on the
arrival of Keona and his doomed companions, was
standing with his chiefs on the beach,-Ellis adds, with
the intention of protecting him. Jarves says that the
King had determined to rid himself of a valiant competitor, and one who had been so prolific a source of
trouble to him. The evidence is conflicting; but the
fact is of importance in the estimate we make of the
man's character. Possibly he hesitated. His warriors
knew enough of his feelings towards his rival generally;
and when a monarch finds the life of a Beckett inconvenient, there will not be wanting Tracys to turn his
indecision into resolve and his desire into action.
Whatever the King and other chiefs might determine,
there was one who had no doubts as to the expediency
of Keona's death. This was our former acquaintance,
Keeaumoku,-' the yellow-back crab.'   He was the
Joab of the piece; having Joab's devotion to his master,
and all his disregard of blood. This chief, fearing, says
Ellis, that Kamehameha might frustrate his purpose if
Keona's canoe were allowed to land, waded, above his
middle, into the sea, and, regardless of the King's orders
and the expostulation of the chiefs, seized the canoe
with one hand and with the other stabbed Keona to the
heart as he sat in the stern. Having dipped his hand
in blood, he proceeded to murder seven of the chief's
companions and friends who were in the same canoe.
In another boat were a younger brother of Keona, and
some others, whose lives were saved by Kamehameha's
interference. Jarves says that orders had been issued




KAM:HIAMISHA THE KING.


1.53


to Keeaumoku to entice the chief on shore and assassinate him. Ellis reports, what we would more willingly
believe, that Kamehameha and many of his chiefs regretted his death; and that the murderer justified his
act on the ground that there could have been no peace
or security if Keona had been allowed to live.  He
acted on Bentham's doctrine of the greatest happiness
to the greatest number.
And now Kamehameha was sovereign of all Hawaii,
which in area is equal to two-thirds of the whole group.
The island of Maui, with the small adjacent ones of
Lanai and Molokai, which he had lately subdued, taking
advantage of his absence, threw off their newly-acquired
yoke, and returned to allegiance to Kahikili their former
king.
The visits of Vancouver, which took place in 1792,
1793, 1794, and 1794, have been already noticed. He
observed with regret the depopulation which had been
caused in the islands by war since his first coming there
with Cook, in 1778. He was also struck with the
powerful character and the abilities of Kamehameha.
His countenance, which Captain King described, had
changed with years, and its look of stern ferocity had
softened into an expression of firmness mixed with dignity. Time, which makes black tresses grey, had done
something; responsibility, difficulties encountered and
to be encountered, and the stimulus of ambition,
had effected more. His carriage was majestic, and all
his motions were indicative of an uncommon mind.
His eyes were dark and penetrating, seeming to read
the thoughts of those about him, and the most courageous quailed before his angry glance. In figure he
was Herculean; his general disposition and bearing were
frank, generous, and cheerful. His sagacity was always




154


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


on the look-out for opportunities of improvement and
of aggrandizement. He gained much in his intercourse
with the benevolent Vancouver, who, though he could
not force his actions, yet influenced him by wise counsels which were remembered long after they were given.
He had a decked vessel built for the King, which was
named the ' Britannia;' and he assisted him in forming
and drilling a regular body-guard, armed with muskets
and divided into day and night watches. Here was the
commencement of the small standing army still maintained in the islands. Polygamy was customary among the
people, and especially among the chiefs. Kamehameha's
favourite wife was a beautiful young girl named Kaahumanu, who herself became remarkable afterwards for
her character and influence. Among Vancouver's kind
offices, was the reconciliation he brought about between
her-she was then but eighteen —and the King, who
had separated from her owing to her alleged intimacy
with the chief Kaiana; and he had the pleasure of reuniting their hands on the deck of the ' Discovery,' she
making the naive request that Vancouver would beg
Kamehameha not to beat her any longer. Vancouver
used all his efforts to put an end to the civil wars; but
in this he did not succeed. When, in March 1794, he
took is final leave of the islands, he left behind him a
name and a memory long lovingly cherished by the
people he had so earnestly striven to aid; a memory
unsullied by acts of wrong and violence, and a name
which they will not willingly let die, and of which our
own nation may be proud.
Intercourse with white men, and especially his conferences with the estimable Vancouver, afforded Kam6 -hameha glimpses of a new and wonderful world beyond
the limiting horizon of his own ocean. What he saw




LONGINGS FOR LIGHT.


155


were only indications of, or scintillae from, the great
distant light; but he learned from them something of
the grandeur of nations that had enjoyed civilization
through the dreary ages in which his own people had
existed in darkness. These strangers were strong; they
were enlightened, and they were Christians. Could he
not introduce among his own people something of civilization and of Christianity, that they too might grow
strong, or at any rate stronger, with the strength which
was in the Europeans. Imbued with this idea, ' Kamehameha and his chiefs, after the cession of Hawaii to
the British sovereign through Vancouver, on the 25th of
February, 1794, expressed a strong desire to the latter
to have religious instructors sent from England.' And
so definite was their wish that they should be British
teachers, that 'when the first American missionaries
arrived, there was much opposition to their landing, on
the ground that they were not the religious instructors
whom the King and chiefs expected from England.'*
Kamehameha never became a Christian: and it is possible that his invitation to clergymen from this country,
proceeded from a belief that through their means the
islands might be advanced in material prosperity and
political importance.
In the history of most nations there rises up a man
who, if unable to play the lyre when it is handed to him,
has the power of changing a small town into a great
city; one who by his genius and force of character constructs his country into what it afterwards continues to
be, or causes it to spring forward in his own lifetime
with an advance equal to several generations. Such a man
was Kamehameha. He is well entitled to his surname


* Mr. Wyllie's Despatch to me, 14th December, 1859.




156


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


of ' the great,' both on account of what he was and what
he did. If it be objected that his greatness was upon a
very small scale, it is enough to answer, that there may
be a great ruler of a small nation, as there may be a
very small ruler of a great people. It may be said that
he was cruel, disregardful of human life. He was more
humane than his predecessors; and, being engaged in
wars, regarded life perhaps with no greater indifference
than that with which it is treated during war by the
enlightened commanders of Christian countries, who
work the problem on the chess-board of the field of
battle, and often throw away their pawns with little
compunction. He practised polygamy: that was in accordance with the custom of his country. Christianity
has sanctioned and enforced monogamy, and society has
been the gainer by it; but moral science had not enlightened the Hawaiians on the relations of the sexes,
or given them statistics by which they might see, from
their nearly equal numbers, that the appointed combination of men and women is a binary one.
We resume the story of Kamehameha's life. He now
found himself surrounded with difficulties. The three
islands he had lately conquered had revolted from his
authority; and the powerful chief Kaiana who had been
so great a support to him, led away afterwards by ambitious projects of his own, had become his opponent,
and a deep dissatisfaction had for some time existed
between them. It was on account of a supposed intimacy with Kaiana that the quarrel with his favourite
wife Kaahumanu, and their consequent separation, had
taken place. His attached but unscrupulous adherent
Kameeimoku, whose seizure of the ' Fair American' and
murder of young Metcalf have been previously related,
also occasioned him trouble. The people of Maui even




WARS AND CONQUESTS.


157


made a descent upon the coast of Hawaii, but were repulsed. After Vancouver's departure, war broke out.
Keao (King of Kauai) uniting forces with Kahikili, King
of Maui, sailed in a large fleet of canoes for Hawaii.
They were met by the naval force of Kamehameha, at
the head of which was the schooner Britannia' bearing
the King's flag and armed with three brass guns. In the
action which took place, his enemies were conquered and
dispersed; the aged Kahikili died soon afterwards; and
later, Keao, who attempted to seize his ally's dominion
in wrong of his nephew and successor Kalanikupule,
was killed in battle.
Kamehameha's three brass guns must be looked upon
as an indication of advancing civilization. It is true
that before proof we should not have selected such an
index; but we find that among what is called, rather
sarcastically, the European family of nations, the carrying and destructive powers of projectiles, and the resisting powers of steel plates, are adopted as the ultimate
test of the progress of the arts; and that in the peaceful
convocation of nationalities held in London in the
Exhibition of 1862, Minies, Armstrongs, Whitworths,
and Lancasters had the place of honour beside models
of ' Gloires' and 'Warriors,' to the exclusion, possibly, of
other things which might be taken as clearer symptoms
of universal concord.
In 1795 Kamehameha invaded and reconquered the
islands of Maui, Lanai, and Molokai, and he prepared
for the subjugation of Oahu, to which Kalanikupule,
the heir of Kahikili, had retired. Throwing himself on
the island with part of his troops (his entire army now
consisted of sixteen thousand warriors), he left the main
body to follow him, under command of the estranged
and now treacherous Kaiana. The latter looked on the




158


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


King as a rival, and was struck with the opportunity presented to him of crushing him at once. Instead, therefore, of hastening to his master as he had been instructed,
he deserted, with the whole of the troops under his command, to the enemy. Perhaps he had not calculated on
the energy and elasticity of Kamehameha's nature, who,
as soon as he heard of this great defection, marched
to the Valley of Nuuanu, which has been already described as running up from the city of Honolulu, and
terminating in a remarkable precipice or pali. Here
he found his enemies encamped in what they supposed
to be an inpregnable position, being on a steep hillside, and protected in front by a stone wall. Young,
who accompanied the King, made such practice with a
field-piece, that the wall became, instead of a defence,
an instrument of destruction to the Oahuan army;
the stones multiplying the effect of each shot fired. The
renegade Kaiana fell, and the ranks of troops were soon
so disordered that they broke and fled.
Then occurred that terrible slaughter which has been
mentioned in the description of this locality.  The
routed troops were driven up the narrow valley to the
brink of the precipice, and four hundred of them, it is
said, fell headlong from it and were dashed to pieces on
the rocks below. Those who have seen the remarkable
fortifications at Namur, will remember that Vauban has
made use of a similar position in the defences; between
the parallel walls there are turfed spaces terminating
suddenly in faults or breaks of some thirty feet depth,
towards which it would be the object of the garrison to
drive an attacking force that had gained entrance.
Kalanikupule was amongst the slain.  Those who
escaped fled to Kauai; and Kamehameha, by his decisive
victory, was left sovereign of the island. His immediate




THE BATTLE AT THE' PRECIPICE.


159


intention was to have reduced the two remaining islands
of Kauai and Niihau; but his fleet was driven back by
violent adverse winds, and the project was deferred to
another season.
The islands were suffering greatly from war whilst
our new Augustus was wading through blood to a throne
of peace. Kamehameha is computed to have lost six
thousand of his troops, and the losses of his opponents
had been far greater. Scarcity prevailed; the hateful
brood of war-pestilence, famine, and cruel oppression,- followed behind her chariot; and the depopulation of the islands went on at a rapid rate. Among
other troubles, a rebellion broke out in Hawaii, headed
by Namakeha, brother to the late chief Kaiana. Some
collisions, also, took place between the natives and
the crew and officers of H.B.M. sloop 'Providence,'
under the command of Captain Broughton. In retaliation for an attack made on a landing-party at the island
of Niihau, the English burnt several houses and destroyed
sixteen canoes. This island, however, had not at that
time submitted to Kamehameha.
His restless desires of conquest were now extending
beyond his own little archipelago; and as soon as he
had subjugated Kauai, his intention was to have sailed
for Tahiti. This idea was frustrated by the insurrection
in Hawaii, which required his presence. He accordingly proceeded there at once, slew Namakeha, and put
an end to the rebellion.
If Kamehameha had had no other qualities than those
of a self-taught general to whom war was an exciting
game, as cricket is to our own youth, his title to our
consideration would not have been great. His nature
rose above the mere man-slayer's, civilized or savage,
and showed itself in administrative talent and in the




160


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


manner in which he established his power after asserting
it. He had shed blood freely; yet to the conquered he
showed more leniency than might have been expectedmore, probably, than natives were accustomed to receive
from conquerors. He was not neglectful of extending
his influence by donations, through which powerful chiefs
became bound to his interest, or by marriage alliances,
as a means of settlement and consolidation of the kingdom. In the latter respect, polygamy is singularly convenient; and a king whose marriage partnership are
not limited, may, by judicious courtships, add many
appanages to his crown.   Kamehameha had taken
prisoner, when he conquered Maui, Keopuolani, granddaughter of Kalaniopuu, a lineal descendant of the
ancient kings of Maui and Hawaii; from being his captive, he now made her his wife, an arrangement attended
with most satisfactory results. Kalaimoku, who had
fought against him, and also become his prisoner, had
his life spared; and such clemency was shown to him as
converted him into an attached friend and counsellor.
The descendants of the late king Kahikili were liberally
provided for. Other chiefs and the people received his
beneficence, and experienced such humanity that their
transfer to a new master was found by them a change
not to be regretted.  To many generous impulses
Kamehameha added the kingly faculty of apprehending
character, and of enkindling those about him with his
own natural resolution and energy. With regard to
Kauai, the most westerly of the larger islands, he contented himself, for the present, with the nominal submission of its king; and thus, finding himself ruler of
the entire group, he entered, at about the age of fiveand-forty, upon a more peaceful phase of life, dwelling
for some years in Hawaii, and afterwards living much




THE DAWN OF PEACE.


at Lahaina, a beautifully-situated town in the island of
Maui, and now second in importance only to Honolulu.
His time, though spent in peace, was not passed in
idleness. He was diligently occupied in establishing his
power on a permanent basis. The feudal tenure of
lands had been previously an acknowledged principle
throughout the islands; but Kanmehameha, by virtue of
his recent conquests, was able to reduce the theory to
very practical conclusions; and he claimed the entire
and absolute ownership of the land, which he divided
among his followers on the tenure of their paying him
a portion of its revenue and rendering him military service. We have hitherto considered the feudal system of
the Normans to be a very distinctive one; yet here we
see, almost at our antipodes, its perfect parallel. It
illustrates the fact that corresponding ideas are sometimes independently born in different nations, as in
different minds, among which there has been no intercourse and can have been no collusion; and ethnologists
should learn a lesson of caution from it, not to declare,
from identity of institutions, the identity or even the
cognation of races.
Kamehamhba added to the principle of his being himself the source of all property and office, the rule of hereditary succession: but he did not make this rule invariable,
as he retained to himself the power of confirming or
dispensing with inheritances. He appointed on each
island a governor, to whom it appertained to nominate
chiefs of districts, heads of villages, tax-collectors, and
all petty officers. The tax-gatherers, not being able
to write, kept their accounts by a method not unlike
the ancient tallies in the English Exchequer. Upon a
cord several hundred fathoms long, the several districts
were indicated by knots, loops, and tufts of various size,
31




12


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


shape, and colour; and by other ingenious devices the
taxable articles and rate of impost were marked upon
it.
Kamehameha instituted a council of chiefs, with whom
he advised on all important measures. At the head of
this was Keeaumoku, his father-in-law, a chief mighty
in strength, and warmly attached to his master, but unscrupulous in shedding blood when expediency required
it, as has been seen in his assassination of Keona. He
had, in addition to his council, a number of ' wise men'
(a sort of Saxon Wittenagemote), who assisted him in organizing laws and regulating the minor affairs of his
kingdom. He enacted laws against murder, theft, and
oppression; peace was everywhere firmly established;
and, compared with former times, his people had
entered upon a golden age, sitting every, one under his
vine and under his fig-tree, with a general security for
old and young, for the innocent and the helpless. It is
this part of Kamehameha's reign which entitles him to
the name which has been, perhaps fancifully, given him,
of the Hawaiian Alfred.




163


CHAPTER XL
HISTORICAL SKETCH —KAMEiHAMIHA THE KING —HIIS DEATH
— ( I COME TO BURY CzESAR, ANID TO PRAISE HIM.'
TAMEHAMIEHA showed his political sagacity in his
relations with the chiefs. To those whom he
could trust, important posts were given. Young was
made Governor of Hawaii, and held that position for
many years. Those chiefs who were dangerous from
their own ambition, or likely from weakness to be involved in the intrigues of others, he retained about his
person, taking them in his train wherever he went,
keeping them away from their own domains and under
constant observation. Thus Davis remained always
near the King, but enjoyed large possessions and was
freed from taxation. The two Englishmen assimilated
themselves to the native manners, and won popularity
by their usefulness and humanity.
The warrior monarch, now in peace, was not one whit
less a king. Henry the Eighth and' King' Elizabeth could
not have entertained higher views of royal dignity and
prerogative than did Kamehameha. He assumed great
state, and the people had less access to his person. All
the ancient king-customs were rigidly enforced, and
were added to. Wherever he went, all people uncovered
their heads and shoulders; and they were obliged to do
this when they approached any residence where the
M 2




164


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


King was, and even upon hearing his attendants' cry as
they carried his food to or from him. A greater nudation was required whenever his servants touched any
article;* and no one might cross the shadow of the
King or of his house. His drinking-water was brought
from certain springs many miles distant; and his chiefs
were obliged to observe ceremonies, obsequious in a
greater or less degree according to their rank. Nevertheless, he was too wise to let material advantages suffer
by his seclusion or routine; and to promote agriculture
and the fisheries, he set the example of diligence by
occasionally working at each pursuit with his own hands.
With foreigners also, he kept some barbaric state; but
in his desire to examine the finer specimens of shipbuilding, and the manufactures and arts of other countries, he would often put aside all forms in visiting
vessels which came, and, after one ceremonious visit,
would row himself off to them in a canoe, and go on
board without any restraints of etiquette. He made
great use of his remarkable powers of observation, and
soon began to found some of his own institutions upon
foreign models, according to the insight he could obtain
of them. He collected a small fleet of foreign-built
vessels; erected forts; mounted batteries of heavy guns;
drilled his soldiers, and gave them a uniform. He engaged in his service a number of European and American
artisans and seamen; and he had the wisdom, in his
treatment of these his foreign subjects, to liberate them
from the troublesome etiquette which the highest of the
* An etiquette tedious and inconvenient, if constantly observed. It
recalls the story, lately current, of a reigning German prince who, rigorously insisting that no person of his household should approach him
except in white gloves and a white cravat, was startled by the literal
obedience of one of his attendants, the gentleman entering the Duke's
presence dressed in white gloves and white cravat only.




KAIMEHAMEHA'S DOMESTIC LIFE.


natives were obliged to pay, whilst he kept them submissive to order and his own authority. It is not to be
wondered at that the port of Honolulu became very
well known, and much resorted to by ships; and in all
parts of his dominion foreign vessels and their crews
were welcomed and well treated; whilst ships of war
and those commissioned for scientific purposes received
his marked attention and hospitality.
His domestic life must be judged of with reference to
the customs of his country and race. Kamehameha
had two publicly-acknowledged wives or queens. To
Kaahumanu he was warmly attached. By her he had
a daughter, born in 1809. His other queen, Keopuolani,
grand-daughter of Kalaniopuu, former King of Hawaii,
was of much higher rank. She took precedence, and
her issue became successors to the throne: but this was
a marriage of state expediency; and as his attentions to
her were enforced, and he was to her at least a very
intermittent husband, she was allowed the same privilege as himself, and had another husband, Hoapili, with
the King's full consent. Besides these two wives, Kamehameha had Kekauluohi, daughter of Kaiana, his late
premier. She had been educated for him from a child,
a royal virgin brought up in the strictest seclusion and
with the utmost care. Their marriage appears to have
been hardly more than a nominal one, and after the
King's death she became the wife of his son. Besides
these he may have had other heterogamous connections,
-not essential to this history.
The royal family by Keopuolani consisted of Liholiho,
born in 1797, and invested in 1809 with regal honours,
in order to establish the succession to him. This was the
king who died in London; Kauikeaouli, born in 1814,
and who succeeded his elder brother, under the name of




166


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


Kamehameha III., and (lied in 1854; and a daughter,
Nahienaena, born in 1816, dead many years since.
When Kamehameha finally doffed his war-cloak, his
designs for subjugating Tahiti were also abandoned. It
was probably the surplus energy of manhood's noontide
that made him look round for new worlds to conquer.
Later in life, his relations with Pomare were very amicable and neighbour-like. Kind messages and friendly
gifts frequently passed between the two sovereigns,
separated from each other by forty degrees of latitude;
and a project for a double marriage in the royal families
was set on foot; but the death of the son of Kamehameha, who had been selected to marry the daughter of
Pomare, took place, and the plan collapsed.
Once only after the reign of peace had commenced
was it in actual danger of being broken. In 1801
Kamehameha, like the Israelitish king who remembered
that Ramoth-Gilead was his, but in the enemy's hands,
considered that Kauai had yet to be conquered; and he
proceeded to Oahu, the island nearest to Kauai, from
which it is distant about a hundred miles, to make preparations for war. The soldier, tired of a repose which
had certainly not been indolent, felt all his martial
ardour return, and he spent two years in equipping a
sufficient army and fleet. It was a modern one in construction compared with the former system, when men
fought almost naked, without defensive armour of any
sort, their weapons the spear and dagger, Death stalking
the field in a most unattractive and uncompromising
form. Now, the army consisted of seven thousand
native warriors and a contingent of fifty white men,
mostly armed with muskets; and for artillery it could
muster forty swivel guns and six mortars, with ammunition in abundance. The fleet, too, was equally changed.




NATIVE CHIVALRY.


167


The line of battle was formed of twenty-one small
schooners, the largest about fifty tons, some of them
carrying guns and commanded by Europeans. Supporting these was a cloud of war-canoes; and in 1804
there was added to the navy the ship 'Lady-bird,'
mounting twenty guns, which the King had purchased
of the Americans.
Kaumualii now reigned in Kauai, having succeeded
his father Keao. His nature was noble and chivalric
but inconsistent. He had the devoted attachment of his
own subjects, and not less that of the foreign residents
who had entered his kingdom. He was humane, intelligent, and an encourager of commerce; but in military
talent he was not to be compared with his adversary, and
in force of will was greatly his inferior. Kamehameha's
volition was of iron,-Kaumualii's was of Venetian
gold.
There is something romantic in the whole of this
transaction. In continuing the history of a little kingdom far away in the wastes of the Pacific, we are constantly surprised by what seem like reproductions or
faint echoes of memorable European events. Here we
have another Henry of England and another Francis of
France in the earlier and more generous period of their
lives, emulating one another in chivalrous deeds. Kaumualii, supported by his devoted people, who were
pretty well armed, and possessed European weapons and
ammunition, prepared to resist the invader.  During
Kamehameha's protracted preparation, the King of
Kauai sent him repeated messages of defiance, and
finally threatened to descend on Oahu, and carry war
there. Kamehameha determined on the bold step of
going with one of his officers to Kauai to examine the
condition of the island, and he was urgent on Captain




168


IHAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


Turabull, who was then at Hawaii with a merchant
vessel which he commanded, to convey him there; but
his request was refused, and the visit was not made.
When Kamnhameha's army was at last ready to embark, a very fatal epidemic broke out among the troops,
and spread over the islands, causing a great mortality.
Three hundred corpses are said to have been carried out
to sea from one place in a day, and the King was himself attacked by the disease. He lost at that time
several chiefs who were his most valuable advisers.
Kaumualii, notwithstanding his defiant cartels, fluctuated
much in his mind. Courage and terror played see-saw
on his heart; and, for a last resource, he prepared a
vessel in which he and his family might fly the island
in case of a defeat. Even this suggestion had something romantic about it. Launching their little ship
upon the wide untravelled waves, they were to ask the
winds to waft them to a new home in some undiscovered
islands, and there found a new dynasty.
The occasion, however, for such a desperate step never
arrived. Kauai was not invaded, and its king took
another proceeding as desperate and as romantic. An
American captain then at Honolulu, whose own interests
depended upon the maintenance of peace in the islands,
proposed to Kamehameha that the former should sail to
Kauai and endeavour to persuade Kaumualii to return
with him to Oahu, and there to negotiate with his adversary. The offer was accepted; Kaumualii, too, acceded to the proposal; and the first officer of the
American vessel being left in Kauai as a hostage, the
king sailed for Oahu, to cast himself upon the good faith
of Karmehameha, who had pledged his word for his safety,
-and whose word was respected and believed. His
truth and honour were established facts. The solution
was perfect. There was a sort of Field of Cloth of Gold.




A FIELD OF CLOTH OF GOLD.


169


There were princely greetings and festivities, exhibitions
of arms and demonstrations of friendship. The golden
will gave way to the will of iron, and Kaumualii ceded
his kingdom to his great entertainer. Kamehameha
had the generosity not to accept this concession, or to
take advantage of his noble rival now within his power
and influence; but in lieu, it was arranged that the island
of Kauai and the small isles adjoining should be held
in fief, having its king's particular rights respected, and
that, in return, they should be protected by the greater
power of Kamehameha. Thus the 'ancestral voices
prophesying war,' were hushed, and the last fiery cloud
passed away from Hawaii-Nei,-United Hawaii.
Kamehameha was able after this episode to devote
himself to the advancement of his kingdom, in carrying
out public works, and in maintaining friendly intercourse with foreigners. He acquired the English language in speaking, though he never learned to write it.
After remaining nine years in Oahu he sailed for Hawaii,
where he passed the rest of his life, residing principally
at Kailua, on the western side of the island, and at
Kealakeakua Bay, the spot where Cook had met his
death. He built some large heiaus, or temples, and
constructed extensive fish-ponds, which, being mostly
formed by sea-walls enclosing part of the coast, were
works requiring great strength. One of these, at Kiholo,
is remarkable for its size. A small bay there, about
half a mile in width, runs into the land. Kamehameha
enclosed the bay by building a wall across its mouth
twenty feet wide and six feet high, having several arches
filled with a grating of stakes, which admitted the water,
but prevented the escape of the fish. The space or
pond enclosed was two miles in circumference.  He
devoted himself warmly to commerce, and in the latter
part of his reign made some steps towards a direct trade




10


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


with the Russian settlements. The great article of export was sandal-wood, and in one year wood to the value
of 400,000 dollars was shipped. In return for this the
natives procured foreign objects in abundance. Kamehameha fitted out a ship on his own account, loaded her
with this valuable wood, and sent her to Canton. The
officers on board were English, but the supercargo was
a Hawaiian. This was the first occasion of the national
flag being seen in China. The flag adopted has eight
horizontal stripes, representing the eight islands of the
kingdom, with the English union at the upper left
corner. From heavy port charges, extravagance of the
captain and supercargo, &c., the whole proceeds of this
valuable adventure were dissipated; and on the vessel's
return the King found that, instead of being enriched by
his argosy, it had brought him into debt. Practical in
his character, he gave up kingly trading; and seeing
that a great deal of his money had gone in port charges,
he took a hint from his own loss, determining to increase his revenue by a similar impost; and harbour
fees were accordingly established at that time.
The first horse seen on the islands was landed in
1803 from a Boston vessel. Terror mingled with admiration was felt by the natives when they beheld the
noble animal, so much larger than any of their few indigenous quadrupeds. Other horses, soon after, reached
them from California, and they rapidly increased in
numbers, the people becoming daring and incessant
riders. The King was a good horseman, and was pleased
to exhibit his feats of equitation.
Whatever ideas Kamehameha had formed of Christianity during his intercourse with the generous Vancouver, and whatever was his anxiety at that time and
thereafter to procure teachers of religion from England,




:i. I~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ 
e;   i 1(  I!iii-i~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~i 
I~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~I:i~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~i




A,
-      a 
t: 




KING NOT PERSUADED TO BE A CHRISTIAN. 171
the Christian profession was, unfortunately, during the
subsequent years of hi reign, not presented to him in
an attractive aspect. There were seamen nominally
Christians, but their conduct was not likely to illustrate
the purity of the Gospel; there were some English
convicts, who had escaped from our penal settlements
and found their way to Oahu, the riotous and quarrelsome behaviour of whom would not advance in the
King's eyes the religion which white men were supposed
to follow; there was even a clergyman on the islands,
but he was a recreant one, who had forsaken his profession, and would be little likely to impress others with
the value of holy living, which had had so little power
over himself. Some persons, whether English or American does not appear, did make an attempt to convince the King of the truth of Christianity. Their zeal
was greater than either their reasoning or their persuasive capacity, and they were holding an argument
before a man of strong will and acute reason. They
were unsuccessful in results; and, at the conclusion of
a highly-coloured appeal about the power of faith,
Kamehamehapressed on them the crucial testof throwing
themselves, in faith, from the top of a neighbouring
precipice,-his belief to be dependent on their safe
arrival at the bottom of it.
So, to the end of his life, the King continued devotions to his idols. He was probably a very sceptical
worshipper; but he looked upon the national religion
as a great state instrument, which it was better on his
part to support by his patronage. He built a temple
or house for his special divinity, and at his mortal sickness his last prayers were made to his feathered god
Kukailimoku. It has been seen that the subject of
religion had not altogether escaped the attention of




172


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


visitors to the islands; but most of those who came
there were unfitted to promote its holy cause, and the
great majority were ignorant and indifferent about it.
Some, however, more thoughtful than the rest, were
struck with the great advantage to be gained if the
religion of Christ could be authoritatively taught to the
people. Such was the view of Captain Turnbull, the
commander of an English merchantman, who, on returning to this country in 1803, suggested the sending
out missionaries to the Sandwich Islands, a field which
he thought more likely to be successful than Tahiti had
showed itself.  Whatever efforts Turnbull made to
accomplish this object, they fell to the ground, and
England at that time did not send out the light and
truth of which she was a favoured depository.
In personal habits Kamehameha must be considered
moderate. He and his subjects acquired a fondness for
rum, which had been introduced by foreigners as an
article of trade. The King drank it, but not intemperately, and he kept the monopoly of spirits in his own
hands, and thus was able to restrain its use among his
people;-an important thing to do, for peace now being
universal, the Hawaiians might, in order to testify the
relief they felt, have fallen to heavy drinking.
For dress he adopted, with good sense, such articles
of European costume as were suitable to his own climate.
On occasions he appeared in uniform, of which he
had several rich suits. By recommendation from this
country the Windsor uniform was assumed.
Towards the end of Kamehameha's reign, the oppressive system of the tabu began to be infringed on
and frequently broken. This thraldom was deeply interwoven with their religious system, although the King
or a high chief could lay on a tabu at his own pleasure.




THE KING'S DEATH-SICKNESS.


Light was breaking in upon the native mind, but at
present only fitfully. The people showed their freedom,
but with trembling; and were obliged to assert new
views in secret, open violations of their superstition
being still visited with vindictive punishments. In
1818 the last case of capital punishment occurred for
breaking the tabus or religious restrictions. One man
was then killed for putting on a chiefs malo, or girdle;
another for eating something which had been tabooed;
and the third for leaving a house under tabu and entering
one which was not so.
The first man-of-war which entered the harbour of
Honolulu was the Russian ship ' Rurick,' Captain Kotzebue. This was in 1816; and, on her sailing, she exchanged salutes with the batteries of the port,-an
etiquette which took place for the first time.
In the year 1819 the King was seized with the sickness which terminated his life. There is very little
privacy in Hawaiian houses.  Persons of both sexes
remain at night, even in the sleeping-chamber of the
possessor, talking or smoking; and during illness, at a
time when we consider quietude to be particularly
necessary, the kind zeal of friends leads them to remain
in the room, or go in and out in considerable numbers.
It was thus with Kamehameha in his last illness.
Priests, doctors, chiefs, with officious affection, crowded
about him, and must have made his last moments very
unendurable. They brought him food and new idols; they
carried the moribund King from one house to another,at one time arranging so as to have his head in one house
and his feet in a dwelling adjoining.  In spite ofmay we not say in consequence of?-all these attentions
his weakness increased. At about midnight of the 7th
of May he was seen to be sinking. A little food and a




174


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


cup of water were pressed upon him, but he was no
longer able to swallow. The chiefs about him then
begged the King to give them his counsel; he was
unable to speak. As a last resource, they carried him
from the eating-house to his dwelling, there being
separate houses for different uses. Then one of the chiefs
addressing him said, 'Here we all are; your younger
brethren, your son Liholiho, and your foreigner (meaning John Young). Impart to us your dying charge that
Liholiho and Kaahumanu may hear.' Kamehameha
faintly enquired, 'What do you say?' Kaikoewa repeated, ' Your counsels for us.' Making a last effort,
the King began, 'Move on in my good way, and-' but
strength failed him, and he spoke no more. Young,
the foreigner, embraced the King and kissed his dying
master. Great was the respect and affection which had
sprung up between these two men during an intercourse
of many years. Hoapili also embraced the King, whispering something in his ear. Twice more he was
carried from one house to another, and at 2 A.M. of the
8th of May he expired.
It is very much to be regretted that Kamehameha
was unable to express to his heir and to his devoted
followers those counsels and last instructions which they
entreated. The dying words of all persons are received
reverentially and preserved with a pious care; but the
results of a life so remarkable as this Hawaiian chiefs,
and the practical conclusions he had himself drawn from
thechequereddramaof which hehad beentheprotagonist,
would have possessed a great value to his own people, and
would not have been uninteresting to studious observers
of character in other countries. It must also be remembered that before the art of writing was acquired, a
will by word of mouth was the necessary form of dis



DEATH OF KAM~HAM1HA.


position of honours and property. The words of a testator or donor, especially when formed into distiches or
doggrel rhymes, were retained with accurate fidelity by
the hearers, and handed down by bards or those nearly
interested with almost as much security as a written
document. The last words of Israel, of David, and
other persons recorded in Scripture, will be called to
mind; and our own Anglo-Saxon grants in lines of four
or five syllables show the means taken for retaining
words exactly in the memory.          In the Frithiofs-Saga
of Bishop Tegner, an admirable picture of ancient
northern customs and manners, the death-bed scene of a
king, and his charge or will to his children and people,
with his last words of gnomic wisdom, are given in a
very interesting manner.*
* The passage is too long for quotation, but a few stanzas may not be
out of place as an illustration of oral tradition under the circumstances
mentioned in the text. I translate from the German version of the
Saga by Ernst Jansen:"Children," quoth King Bele, "on me j Death's shadow falls:
Hear me! Loud for peace and union i the kingdom calls.
Force lives in harmony.- I The ring surrounding
The spear, gives, what besides were weak, | its strength abounding.
'" For watch and ward at port and frontier I set kingly power;
But let peace within th' enclosure [ put forth her flower.
The sword should wake for right, | not king's displeasure,
And shields but padlocks be, to guard I our hoarded treasure.
'"Wisdom lacks he who o'erburthens I his Father-land.
Powerless are kings without I the people's hand.
Droops the plant, its branches dwindle, | when the fountains
Of life and sap are wasted on I the barren mountains.
" Pillars four with strength uphold I the welkin's vault:
Law, one column, singly doth I kings' thrones exalt.
Misfortune hovers near when might alone finds hearing;
Justice is the only robe I befits kings' wearing.




176


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


So passed away from life the first King of HawaiiNei. As soon as he had drawn his last breath, a consultation of chiefs was held in the chamber of death,
and one of them, in the agony of his grief, proposed
that they should eat the corpse, raw. This suggested
method of testifying respect and affection was rejected
by the majority, and the body was taken into another
house for the due performance of rites by the priests
and the new king, and for apotheosis. The flesh having
been carefully separated from the bones, according to
custom, the latter were tied in a bundle of tapa and
put safely away-so safely, indeed, that, like some
other objects of value nearer home, they have never
since been found. At his obsequies a sacrifice was
made of three hundred dogs-an important fact to
notice, independent of the value of so large a number
of useful animals, because a few years previously, on
such an occasion, human victims would have been
sacrificed instead of this canine holocaust. One or two
of the King's most attached friends were only prevented
by others from killing themselves, as the procession
moved towards the tomb. Beechey says, indeed, that
some of his more ardent adherents did kill themselves,
and that many knocked out their front teeth, and
' "Build not on thy father's fame,- I 'twas his alone.
If thou can'st not bend thy bow ] 'tis not thine own.
What would'st thou with glory past? ] 'Tis flown for ever.
Its own waves only bear along | the seaward river."
'Thus the aged gave their counsel I in that old hall.
Such the Scald did after utter j in Hawarnal.*
From age to age in Norseland [ Wisdom's words descended,
At the grave-place whispered still I with night-winds blended.'
* A Songof the Edda. 




PAGAN OBSEQUIES.


177


otherwise mutilated themselves on that occasion, according to custom, and that several human victims
were offered to his manes by the priests in the Morals.
As this is not confirmed by later writers, it is to be
hoped that Beechey's information was erroneous as to
the sacrifice of human life.
A laboured eulogium   on the character of Kamehameha is uncalled for. The reader will form his own
estimate from the facts of his life as set before him,
however slightly. That long reign, lasting a quarter of
a century, witnessed the transition of his country from
savagery to civilization. And as, when in the articles of
death, the feet of the King were sheltered by the roof of
one house and his head was covered by another, so was
his life itself: its commencement was in the home of
barbarism, and before its close the dayspring of a
rapidly-advancing civilization was flushing the skies.
' His biographer,' writes Beechey, thirty years ago,
' will do him injustice if he does not rank him, however
limited his sphere, and limited his means, among those
great men who, like our Alfred, and Peter the Great of
Russia, have rescued their countries from barbarism,
and who are justly esteemed the benefactors of mankind. His loss as a governor, and as a father to his
people, was universally felt by his subjects.' 'Judged
by his advantages,' says Jarves, in 1843, ' and compared
with the more eminent of his countrymen, he may be
justly styled not only great, but good. To this day his
memory warms the heart and elevates the national
feelings of Hawaiians. They are proud of their old
warrior-king; they love his name; his deeds form their
historical age; and an enthusiasm everywhere prevails,
shared even by foreigners who knew his worth, that
constitutes the firmest pillar of the throne of his son.
Air~~~~




1;:8


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.. 'Since I have been King,' said Kam6hameha to
Kotzebue, 'no European has had cause to complain of
having suffered injustice here. I have made my islands
an asylum for all nations, and honestly supplied with
provisions every ship that desired them.' The King
conversed, says the same traveller, with a vivacity, surprising at his age; asked us various questions, and made
observations which his interpreter was not always able
to translate; the words which he used being peculiar to
the language of Owhyhee, and so witty that his ministers
often laughed aloud.
One cannot but feel a deep regret that, to a mind
so original and energetic as Kamehameha's, the Christian religion had not been presented under more favourable circumstances. The first impressions of it he
received from Vancouver seem never to have been quite
effaced, but his after-acquaintance with its nominal
professors was not likely to give him either a true or an
exalted conception of the power or the purity of the
faith in Christ. ' The changes which had occurred at
Tahiti,' writes Jarves, 'by the final triumph of the
Christian religion, aroused his attention, and he made
many enquiries in regard to the causes and results.
He desired to be instructed in the doctrines, and to
learn the nature of the Supreme Being the foreigners
worshipped. It was his misfortune not to have come
in contact with men who could have rightly influenced
his religious aspirations. The whites around him were
little calculated to explain the sublime truths, or to tell
him of the heavenly tidings of the Gospel.'
'These are our gods, whom I worship,' said Kamehameha to Kotzebue, whilst showing him one of the
morais or temples. 'Whether I do right or wrong I




AN EULOGY AND A REGRET.             179
do not know; but I follow my faith, which cannot be
wicked, as it commands me never to do wrong.
In one of the most beautiful of Dean Alford's sonnets, the poet, walking among the fallen pillars of
' Desert Academe,' sees approach him an Athenian'A very sad old man,-his eyes were red
With over-weeping;'and the cause of his inconsolable grief was that
beautiful Athens, in all her loveliness, was, in respect
of the boon of Christianity under which it is our own
privilege to dwell, ' only in the prime.' Her existence,
in regard to the highest revelation, was premature.
May we not appropriate to Kamehameha, who died one
year before the arrival of the first missionaries from
America, the mournful sentence of the visionary
Athenian, who
'cried and said,
THE LIGHT HATH RISEN-BUT SHINETH NOT ON ME!'




180


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


CHAPTER XII.
HISTORICAL SKETCH-ACCESSION OF LIHOLIHO-THE
ABOLITION OF IDOLATRY.
E are about to relate in this chapter one of the
strangest events that ever happened in the
history of a nation; a fact standing by itself-unparalleled. It is that of a people rising up, and at a blow
destroying the religious system in which they and their
ancestors had lived, sweeping away their idols, 'casting
them to the moles and to the bats;' and, what is more
strange than all, some of the priests concurring in and
assisting at the demolition. This spontaneous movement
was no triumph of Christianity,-for Christianity had
not yet claimed or even approached the Hawaiian Islands.
It was no reformation of a religious system, for it was
its total overthrow and abolition. The mountains were
being made low,-but as yet no voice was heard crying
in the wilderness, ' prepare ye the way of the Lord.' The
thin and torn but accustomed garment of paganism was
to be thrown violently away; and those who had worn
it were to remain for a time, not ' clothed upon,' but
left naked and shivering in absolute atheism.
We must recall briefly the efficient causes which led to
this event. Liholiho, the son of Kamehameha, succeeded
to the kingdom on his father's death, being at the time
twenty-two years of age. As has been stated, he had




A NATION OF SCEPTICS.


181


already, in 1809, been invested with royal honours, in
order to secure a quiet and uninterrupted succession to
the crown. In character he was very unlike his father.
His disposition was frank and humane, indolent and
pleasure-loving. The very force of one man's character
not unfrequently dwarfs that of others who long have
dwelt under its shelter. In his father's lifetime there
was no call, no room for original energy or action; and
there would be no competition of wills where the result
of a struggle was certain beforehand.  The prince
possessed dignified and agreeable manners, an enquiring
mind and a retentive memory; but he lived a dissipated
existence, and was intemperate in the use of stimulants.
As long as his father lived, little or no change was perceptible in the idolatrous system of the nation. Unquestionably there had been a growing scepticism in
the people's mind about the gods they bowed to, and
a growing knowledge of and impatience under the yoke
of oppressive services, tabus, &c., jointly fastened on
their necks by the tyranny of kingship, chiefdom, and
sacerdotalism, uniting in the common object of their
own aggrandizement. A leaven was working in the
mass. The sparks of light left by Vancouver were not
entirely trodden out. These were directly for good.
Intercourse with foreigners was a more mixed influence,
and a more indirect path towards better things. Sensual, scornful, and devoted to avarice as was the life of
many of the white visitors, it was denied even to these,
whatever might be in their heart, to be quite as the
heathen were. There was the vital phenomenon of
double consciousness; and in the fever of excess they
sometimes uttered the words of an early piety, and
reproduced long-forgotten fruits of childhood's teaching.
The foreigners set bad examples of Christianity: but




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


the universal 'Nay,' according to Mr. Carlyle, has to
precede the universal 'Yea;' and their open disbelief
and ridicule of the idolatrous system existing, made the
Hawaiians sceptical at least; though, as was natural,
fear in many cases mingled with their disbelief. They
were now eating of the tree of the knowledge of good and
evil, and their eyes were open: they saw that all things
around them were false, and that they themselves were
naked;-but the other plant, of heavenly growth, the
tree of life, had not been given to them as yet.
The rumour, too, had come to them, that in Tahiti
and in groups farther to the south the idols had been
destroyed without ill effects to the people. There Christian missionaries had commenced their work, the rivalry
of pagan images would not be tolerated, and they would
necessarily, as Christian principles prevailed, be suppressed. Unquestionably there were those among the
Hawaiians whose interest it was to continue the system
of idolatry; Uzzahs, who stretched out both hands to
uphold a tottering ark, and who struggled hard in every
way to support it; uttering short-sighted prophecies,of which the only afflatus was their own wrath and their
own wishes.
The material idols themselves existed in immense
numbers in the islands. They consisted of two or three
kinds; the greater number were grotesque figures
carved in wood, frightful caricatures of humanity having
a conventional imitation of nature which might have
satisfied our most fastidious art-critics of the present
day; the features often passing off into ornament, not
the least realistic, and the hair descending, like two
saws, to the feet. Some of the idols, including the
plinth in which they stood or sat, were sixteen feet high.
Besides these gigantic figures there were others of




IDOLS AND TEMPLES.


183


various sizes, in black and other woods, and of stone.
One wooden deity had human hair fastened on its head,
and shark's teeth in its huge gaping mouth. The
workmanship of some was fine. The image of Lono,
the Hawaiian Hercules, for whom Cook was mistaken,
was a tall, small, round staff of black wood, terminating
in a head of the same diameter as the rod, the eyes inlaid
with pearl-shell. Some of the idols were of an obscene
character.  The menacing expression and distorted
features of many of them were meant to terrify the
enemies of their worshippers, the idols being carried
during war in front of the army, with their bearers and
the priests making horrid yells and shrieks to give
greater effect to their ugliness. Besides these there
were feather gods very skilfully formed of the plumage
of birds closely imbricated, sometimes wrought upon
basket-work. Specimens of the idols can be seen in the
British Museum and in the Museum of the London
Missionary Society. Many were brought to England in
1824, when Liholiho visited this country; some of them
before being exhibited having received a necessary
castigation.
A gradual change of sentiment had been going on
during the last years of Kamehameha's reign, and the
materials for combustion were to some extent piled and
ready for the torch which was to make them ignite.
Whilst the King lived, his strong repressive hand allowed
no attack to be ventured on the idolatrous system which
he considered it advisable to uphold; indeed, his energy
in religion was in accordance with his entire character.
He had attended to its ritual; he had built and repaired
heiaus (temples), some of great size. Mr. Ellis and his
fellow-missionaries counted nineteen of these buildings
in one day's walk, the dimensions of one moral or heiau




184


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


being 270 feet by 210 feet, with massive stone walls,
and a circular mound of earth in the centre for an altar,
carefully formed, and having a kerb of stones round it.
Now he was gone, and the heavy restrictive hand was
removed. The death of a king or a high chief was
always signalized by a period of frantic grief and
mourning, which was followed by a kind of popular
madness,-a wild saturnalia, in which the dissolution
of morals was inconceivable. The meal after a Scottish
funeral and its whisky-drinking, and the battle-royal at
an Irish wake, make us less surprised at the phenomena
of grief relieving itself in intoxication and excess. At
the death of Kamehameha tVre does not appear to
have occurred as great disorder as usual. Opinion was
changing-advancing; and th. time had arrived when
it would make itself heard, though at first timidly and
uncertainly. On the very day of the King's death,
a woman ate a cocoa-nut wi4,impunity, and some
families broke tabu by taking-their meal together under
the same roof. Small indications these, butimportant,
inasmuch as they were the first rending asunder of a
system which had oppressed the nation through unknown
generations.
Female influence was greatly concerned in the destruction of idolatry, for females were the peculiar objects
of its tyranny. It is certain that there were instances
of great conjugal affection among the Hawaiians, and
that women, especially in war, acted with the noble disinterestedness which belongs so greatly to women's character; but in social position they were little raised above
domestic animals. To eat under the roof of the men's
apartment, was death. The same punishment followed
women's eating several kinds of food. Such treatment
made the ladies quite ready for a change of institutions.




INFLUENCE OF KAAHUMANU.


185


The two queens of Kamehameha had imbibed liberal
tendencies. Unlike each other in every other respect,
they coincided in this; and both played an important
part in the overthrow of the old religion. In relation
to one another and to their common husband, they
were as Leah and Rachel. Keopuolani had the higher
rank and precedence, and she was the mother of the
two successors of the King. Kaahumanu was beloved
for her own sake. She was a woman of remarkable
character, with strong passions and great failings: but
she was a fit mate for the warrior-king, and made no
unworthy Caia to his Caius. She seems to have drawn
in, during her long and intimate association with him,
her husband's own disposition; and when he died she
reproduced his character, reflected from her womanhood. It was the moon taking 'up the wondrous tale'
after the setting of her lord from whom she derived
her light. Kaahumanu had secured to herself, even in
Kamehameha's life, a great share of authority, to the
exclusion of her superior but less powerful rival; and
on the King's death it was Kaahumanu who transferred
the kingdom to Liholiho, announcing at the same time
that by his father's will she was to share the administration of government with him, and in case of his
misconduct the supreme power was to devolve upon
her alone. Kamehameha had had fears on account of
the dissolute tendencies of his son, and had planned
this wise check upon his follies and this succedaneum
for his incapacity. From that time a female has always,
until the present reign, occupied the second place in
the government; and, under the name of Premier, her
authority is essential in all public acts.
Both the dowager queens advised the young King
Liholiho, who wavered between his own scepticism and




cro
0
c'
r  -




cro
0
c'
r  -




188


8HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


In August of the same year, the French corvette
'L'Uranie,' commanded by Captain Freycinet, arrived
and remained at Honolulu for a few days. Whilst there,
Kalaimoku the prime minister (he to whom the English
residents gave the name of Pitt), and his brother Boki,
Governor of Oahu, received the rite of baptism according to the usage of the Roman Catholic Church,
and apparently at the hands of the chaplain on board.
The two chiefs do not seem to have been aware of the
meaning of the ceremony, but probably considered it a
piece of French etiquette; nor does the circumstance
appear to have had any great effect on the events which
shortly followed. The two chiefs interchanged presents
with Captain Freycinet and then returned to their idolatrous practices as before. Mention of the circumstance
is not, however, to be omitted.
Kaahumanu's opposition to the priests was in her,
meanwhile, becoming more determined; and in November she sent a message to the King, that on his
arrival at Kailua she should cast aside his god. Liholiho did not oppose his imperious coadjutor; but to
avoid bad consequences to himself for this impiety, he
kept off the shore, and remained afloat two days with
his suite, indulging in a drunken revel. At last Kaahumanu sent and fetched him on shore; his remaining
fears vanished, and he and the female Premier consulted as to the measures necessary for destroying the
tabus and idolatry. The King's first step was to drink
and smoke with the female chiefs. This, though
hitherto wrong and still dangerous, would not be unpleasant to a man of his disposition. In what ensued,
Mr. Jarves's account will be followed verbatim.




ABOLITION OF IDOLATRY.


189


A feast was prepared, after the customs of the country, with
separate tables for the sexes. A number of foreigners were
entertained at the King's. When all were in their seats, he
deliberately arose, walked to the place reserved for the
women, and seated himself among them. To complete the
horror of the adherents of paganism, he indulged his appetite
in freely partaking of the viands prepared for them, directing
the women to do likewise: but he ate with a restraint which
showed that he had but half divested himself of the idea of
sacrilege and of habitual repugnance. This act, however, was
sufficient. The highest had set an example which all rejoiced
to follow. The joyful shout arose, ' The taboo is broken! the
taboo is broken! ' Feasts were provided for all, at which both
sexes indiscriminately indulged. Orders were issued to demolish the heiaus and destroy the idols. Temples, images,
sacred property, and the relics of ages were consumed in the
flames. The high priest, Hewahewa, having resigned his
office, was the first to apply the torch. Without this co-operation the attempt to destroy the old system would have been
ineffectual. Numbers of his profession, joining in the enthusiasm, followed his example.  Kaumualii having given his
sanction, idolatry was for ever abolished by law; and tile
smoke of heathen sanctuaries arose from Hawaii to Kauai.
All the islands uniting in a jubilee at their deliverance,
presented the singular spectacle of a nation without a religion.
Certainly the event recorded is one on which a
philosopher may ponder, or an orator open his lips in
eloquence. It is one on which the Christian will look
with reverent interest, waiting to see the end; recalling
in the meantime such prophetic words as these, ' And
the idols he shall utterly abolish.' A native Hawaiian
has lately mentioned the fact that he himself saw forty
thousand idols destroyed. They were hurled from their
places, where they had been worshipped upon every
high hill and under every green tree; they were




190


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


contemptuously tossed aside to perish, or, more contemptuously, left forgotten, as they stood decaying
in grinning imbecility. Remains of these 'despised,
broken idols' are still occasionally to be found in the
islands, but they are regarded as curiosities, interesting
only as belonging to a former state of things.
Then, to fancy's ear, came moaning along the rocky
shores, murmuring in the passionate mountain torrents,
and sighing in the winds, the melancholy wail, ' Great
Pan is dead!' Through the old primeval forests clothing the flanks of the volcanoes, echoing from dread
precipices, and heard on the winds that rushed down
smiling valleys, came the same despairing strain, 'Great
Pan is dead!' The Ocean, as he ran his waves hoarsely
on the rude shore and into resounding caverns, took
up the universal cry. 'Blush, 0 Zion, saith the sea,'
was formerly the exhortation, when vile rites polluted
and human sacrifices terrified the Syrian shore: but
now, as the coming tide sent in her white breakers and
boomed over the coral ledges of Hawaii, the triumphant
song which mingled with the roar of waters had the
one burthen,-' Great Pan is dead!'
It would have been contrary to all experience that
such a revolution should be accomplished without disturbance and opposition. Vested interests scream and
writhe when the destroying foot is set on them. A
fierce, tyrannical sacerdotalism would not consent without a struggle to be turned adrift with the prospect
before it of its members having to starve, or, still worse,
of having to obtain a livelihood by the honest labour of
their hands. Accordingly, a party was quickly formed
to oppose the movement, and for its head was selected
Kekuokalani, a priest only inferior in rank to Hewahewa, and who was also nephew to the late King.




'GREAT PAN IS DEAD.9


Religion was made the bait to allure him in revolting
against the established government; but in addition to
the disinterested honour of being Defender of the Faith,
he was to have the crown of the kingdom, if success attended his standard. The rebels were soon encountered
by the government or freedom party, and in a slight
engagement, the former gained a success. On this intelligence reaching the King, a council was held; and
Kalaimoku (William Pitt), his trusty adviser, urged an
immediate attack with all the royal forces on the insurgents at head-quarters.  First, however, Hoapili,
guardian to the King's sister, and Naihe the orator,
were sent to the rebel camp on an embassage of conciliation. They were accompanied by the queen-mother,
Keopuolani, to whom Hoapili had stood, even in her
royal consort's lifetime, in the position of what may be
called her acting husband. The rebel chief was their
nephew. The negotiation, however well intended, was
ineffectual, and the ambassadors were glad to retreat
from the enemy's camp with their lives. The rebels
immediately marched from their position to Kailua,
where the King lay, hoping to surprise and take the
position. Kailua is situated in a small bay on the
western side of Hawaii, a few miles north of the scene
of Cook's death. The King's troops were prepared to
meet the enemy, and advanced to meet them.   At
Kuamoo they formed a line on the shore, having the
sea at their back, and on the enemy appearing, drove
them before them up a rising ground till the rebels
gained a shelter from a stone fence, and for a time
made a stand; but they were at length driven from their
position by a party of Kalaimoku's warriors. The insurgents were now in flight; but, rallied by their misguided chief, himself wounded and weak from loss of




192


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


blood, they made a final stand. Kekuaokalani, with
the courage that belonged to his race, fought desperately; but he fainted and fell during the engagement.
He revived, however; and sitting on a fragment of lava,
for he was too weak to stand, twice loaded his musket
and fired on the advancing party. He was then struck
by a ball in the left breast, and covering his face with
his feather-cloak, he expired, amidst friends who surrounded him. Again we are called upon to admire a
woman's devotion. His wife, Manona, had fought by
his side the whole day with dauntless courage; but as
soon as she saw him lying dead, the motive which animated her withered up, and she called for quarter to
Kalaimoku and his sister, who were advancing. As the
words were leaving her lips, a ball struck her temple;
and the faithful wife fell on the lifeless body of her
husband, and instantly expired.
The engagement, which commenced in the forenoon,
was continued till sunset, the idolaters fighting on,
though dispirited by the loss of their leader.  By
evening, the King's troops were left masters of the field,
their enemies having by that time surrendered or fled.
Thus ended the last battle which the narrator of
Hawaiian history has to record. War is a great evil;
but experience has shown it to be not an unmixed evil.
It evokes fierce passions, but it calls forth at the same
time dormant virtues, which are apt, in the piping time
of peace, to be forgotten, like an undrawn sword rusting
in its scabbard. Endurance, self-sacrifice, loyalty, discipline, hold no mean rank in the conclave of moral
qualities. The courageous Hawaiian women generally
followed the men to battle, to tend their wants, and
especially to assist them when wounded. The more
courageous of them, or the more affectionate, would




A HEROINE'S TOMB.


193


advance to the front of the battle, side by side with
their husband, bearing a calabash of water in one hand,
and poising a dart or holding a stone with the other.
If their warrior was killed, they seldom thought it
worth while, themselves, to survive.
Mr. Ellis visited the site of the battle of Kuamoo.
He found the place thickly studded with small piles of
stones, marking the graves of those who died in the
conflict. A tumulus larger than the rest, indicated the
spot where the chief and his heroic wife died together.
A few yards nearer the sea, a tomb ten feet long and
six wide, formed of piled stones, covered the grave where
Kekuaokalani and Manona were interred. Many lovely
flowering bushes grew around it, and a beautiful convolvulus in fullest bloom covered the tomb with its
foliage and blossoms.


0




194


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


CHAPTER XIII.
HISTORICAL SKETCH -ARRIVAL OF AMERICAN MISSIONARIES-THE VISIT   OF THE KING   AND QUEEN TO
ENGLAND, AND THEIR DEATH.
SOME young Hawaiians had been taken to the United
States, and there educated.  The blessings of
Christianity, which they valued in their effects on themselves, they desired to impart to their fellow-countrymen, by returning to the islands. This desire, and an
interest relating to the Sandwich Islands, which had
sprung up in the minds of the religious community in
America, determined the sending of some missionaries
to Hawaii. No intelligence had at that time been received of the events which have just been narrated.
When the missionaries went forth, therefore, it was with
the belief that the idolatrous system which had hitherto
prevailed would be opposed to them.
The courageous pioneers of Christianity despatched
from Boston by the American Board of Commissioners
for Foreign Missions, were accompanied by several native
youths, among whom was George Kaumaulii, son of the
former King of Kauai, and who, having acquired the
English tongue, were able to render the important
assistance of acting as interpreters.  On the 4th of
February, 1820, according to Ellis,* they arrived in
* By Jarves's account, the day was the 20th of March.




ARRIVAL OF AMERICAN MISSIONARIES.


195


Hawaii; and by a striking coincidence, if we may not
say by a directing providence, landed at Kairua, the
very scene of the last battle of idolatry. Instead of
those difficulties which they had every right to suppose
awaited them, they found the laws of tabu abolished;
the priesthood, as a body, dissolved; the nation set free
from its degrading superstitious system; and, religionless, lying ready, like a fallow ground, to receive the
seed of a new husbandry. The difficulties which awaited
the missionaries were of another kind.
They were visited on board their vessel, the 'Thaddeus,'
by Kaliamoku and the two dowager queens, by whom
they had previously been kindly received. Hewahewa,
too, the ex high-priest, welcomed them cordially, calling
them his ' brother priests.' We must respect this man,
who, without law, was a law unto himself, and acted
faithfully to the extent of the light he possessed. He
could not, of course, intuitively precognise the system of
Christianity; but he was able, before that system was
revealed to him, to discover by reason the falsity of his
national idolatry, and, with a noble self-sacrifice, assist
in the overthrow of the religion which upheld him in a
position only a little inferior to the King's. He had
publicly renounced heathenism, and had apprehended
Monotheism, proclaiming his belief in the One Supreme
Being. ' I knew,' he said, ' that the wooden images of
our deities, carved by our own hands, were incapable of
supplying our wants; but I worshipped them, because
it was the custom of our fathers. My thoughts have
always been. that there is one only great God, dwelling
in the heavens.' *
* The conduct of the High Priest, Hewahewa, on this occasion recalls
to mind a parallel in the history of our own land, when at the preaching
of Paulinus, Edwin of Northumbria was converted to Christianity.
2




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


Some practical difficulties and prejudices had to be
overcome before the missionaries were allowed to land
permanently; and now was the occasion of that question
which, as we have mentioned, had been asked previously,
— whether theywere the white teachers whom Vancouver
promised to send to them. For a fortnight, the Congregationalist ministers had to remain on board the vessel;
and then, after a council of chiefs had been held, they
were permitted to settle on the islands for one year, with
the understanding that on misconduct they would be
sent away. They were not to send for an increase to
their number, for fear that they might become a burthen
to the community. Among the Bostonians who landed
in Hawaii, were a physician, a farmer, a printer, and a
mechanic; and the three missionary ministers, as well
as their lay associates, brought with them their wives
and families.
Wordsworth, in a note to his fine sonnet on this occurrence, thus translates from Bede:
' "Who," exclaimed the King, when the council was ended, "shall first
desecrate the altars and the temples?" "I," answered the Chief Priest;
" for who more fit than myself through the wisdom which the true God
hath given me, to destroy for the good example of others, what in
foolishness I worshipped?" Immediately, casting away vain superstition,
he besought the King to grant him what the laws did not allow to a
priest,-arms and a courser; which mounting, and furnished with a
sword and lance, he proceeded to destroy the Idols. The crowd, seeing
this, thought him mad:-he, however, halted not, but approaching, he
profaned the temple, casting against it the lance which he held in his
hand, and exulting in acknowledgment of the worship of the true God,
he ordered his companions to pull down the temple, with all its enclosures. The place is shown where those idols formerly stood, not far
from York, at the source of the river Derwent, and is at this day called
Gormund Gaham.'
The remarkable difference between the two events is that the Hawaiian Pontifex was not impelled by the motive of a knowledge of the
true God, in his work of destruction.




AN UNEXPECTED WELCOME.


The propagandists of Christianity commenced their
work at once, and it proceeded rapidly. In Kauai,
which was still under the authority of a separate king,
though dependent on the general government, two of
the missionaries were placed, and they took with them
the young Christian, George, son of the King, who was
delighted to receive him and his white protectors.
George's arrival was hailed by a salute of twenty-one
guns, and the King continued till his death a steady
friend to the missionaries. In Hawaii the two exqueens and the minister Kalaimoku were the chief
patrons of the new religion; nor was Kamehameha II.
unfriendly to them; but his personal habits and his
personal associates were not such as would make him a
consistent follower of the Great Example of purity,
temperance, and self-denial.
The facile natives had few prejudices to oppose to the
new religion. Mentally, they were in a condition to
accept as readily that or any other faith which should be
proposed, as their bodies were to receive any new epidemic.  The chiefs eagerly espoused the cause, and
begged that the important subsidiary benefits which
were connected with the religious teaching might be
given to their people. They requested more artisans,
whom they offered to support liberally. The King
himself was very sensible of the importance of gaining
knowledge. He applied himself so diligently, that by
July he could read intelligibly, and several of the chiefs
made rapid progress in learning. It was characteristic
of their previous ideas, that at first these would not
allow the common people to learn to read, as they considered that knowledge, like the other good things of
life, was the exclusive right of the governing class.
Money, too, was given, both by natives and foreigners,




198


tAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


for the purposes of the mission. Six hundred dollars
were subscribed at Oahu for a school for orphan children,
and in November, four schools had been established,
containing one hundred pupils. At first the greater
number of learners in the schools were adults.
The quick, observing eyes of the natives found much
and sometimes amusing food for their curiosity. The
dress of the females, in which the ill taste of that time
was added to the primness and unworldliness of attire
befitting missionaries' wives, occasioned much astonishment to the decolletes Hawaiians. Their poke bonnets
were described by the people as 'hats with spouts;' and
they must indeed have presented an unbecoming contrast to the simple but elegantly-formed wreath of ilima
flowers on the brows of the young beauties of the Pacific.
The male missionaries excited watchful attention and
even alarm; for when, according to their custom, they
prayed standing, and with their eyes closed, the natives
supposed them to be sorcerers, and that they were praying them to death, and fled from such dangerous
strangers.
No system like that of the disciplina arcani troubled
the missionaries.  They seem  at once to have announced the deepest metaphysical mysteries that are
the objects of our faith, to a race whose language was
peculiarly deficient in words expressing abstract ideas;
who had not even a name for gratitude; and whose
poor, earth-bound faculties could only see things in a
very direct aspect. When, therefore, the doctrine of
the Holy Trinity was enlarged upon by the American
ministers, we do not wonder that sad confusion was
induced in respect to the Hypostasis, and that no nearer
approach to the truth could be reached by the people
than that the whites worshipped three separate gods, to




MISSIONARY TEACHING AND WORK.


199


whom were given the names of three of their own
discarded deities.
To the honour of the missionaries be it said, that
their little Augustinian band bravely laboured on; encountered with patience intellectual and other obstacles;
and made themselves masters of a difficult and very
vocalic language to which, from that peculiarity, it was
very hard to give phonetic expression. There was also
directed against the Americans the opposition of many
careless and depraved foreigners, who were incensed
by any efforts to curtail the freedom with which they
followed their cupidity and their libertinism.  The
King had made considerable advance in his studies,
and was acquiring a knowledge of geography and of
the customs, productions, and governments of other
countries; but, originally infirm of purpose, he forsook
his pursuits and often relapsed into periods of debauchery, to which he was often led by his foreign associates. It will not be out of place to introduce here a
short and approving summary of the missionaries'
labours which appears in the report of the American
Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions for the
year 1860; which year was the fiftieth of the existence
of the Board. The summary is from the hand of R. H.
Dana, whose name is well known in this country by his
published writings; and who, being a member of the
Episcopal Church in America and a barrister, is likely
to give an unprejudiced as well as an intelligent
resume of his own impressions and information derived
from a visit to the Sandwich Islands, from which place
he writes.
It is no small thing to say of the missionaries of the American Board, that in less than forty years they have taught this
whole people to read and to write, to cipher and to sew. They




200


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


have given them an alphabet, grammar, and dictionary; preserved their language from extinction; given it a literature,
and translated into it the Bible and works of devotion, science,
and entertainment, &c. They have established schools, reared
up native teachers, and so pressed their work that now the
proportion of inhabitants who can read and write is greater
than in New England. And whereas they found these islanders
a nation of half-naked savages, living in the surf and on the
sand, eating raw fish, fighting among themselves, tyrannized
over by feudal chiefs, and abandoned to sensuality; they now
see them decently clothed, recognizing the law of marriage,
knowing something of accounts, going to school and public
worship with more regularity than the people do at home,
and the more elevated of them taking part in conducting
the affairs of the constitutional monarchy under which they
ve, holding seats on the judicial bench and in the legislative
chambers, and filling posts in the local magistracies.
In a separate chapter, the successes and the failures
of the American missionaries in christianizing the
islands will be dwelt upon: and we need not now
extract more of Mr. Dana's remarks, or the conclusion
at which he arrived on the subject of a national
religion.
The King, whom we will continue to call Liholiho to
distinguish him from his predecessor, notwithstanding
the serious defects of his character and the frequent excesses in which he indulged, retained that noble courage
which distinguished his race. In Europe such courage
would be called chivalrous, or rash. Here, Quixotic
acts are sometimes the result of the code of honour, or
are performed under the knowledge that a multitude of
eyes are fixed upon the actor: in less sophisticated
peoples, they are impulsive. In 1821, Liholiho, being
angry or jealous of the titular King of Kauai, father of




PERILOUS EXPEDITION TO KAUAI.


201


the youth George who returned with the missionaries
to his country, determined to pay Kaumualii a personal
visit. The latter had addressed his suzerain as King of
the Wind ward Islands; an implication which made
Liholiho angry and uneasy. Kauai was one hundred
miles distant from Oahu, where the King was residing.
He had never made the passage; the channel is rough;
and when he sailed thither in an open craft the boatmen had neither chart nor compass, nor even water for
the voyage.  The King insisted, however, on their
steering for the island, he himself indicating the direction. Twice the boat, in which he had crowded thirty
attendants, including two women, had nearly capsized.
On his people entreating him to put back to Ewa, his
answer was an order to bale out the water and proceed;
adding that if, against his authority, they made the
boat return to Oahu, he would leap into the water and
swim to Kauai. With much exertion and great peril,
the island was at last reached, but a night of danger
had yet to be passed through. The day-break saw
them cast anchor off the shore, exhausted with fatigue
and. hunger. What followed redounds little to the
honour of Liholiho, however much his adventurous
voyage speaks for his courage.
Directly Kaumualii, the King of Kauai, heard of the
arrival of his suzerain, either ignorant of the spirit in
which he came, or rather, it would appear, from a highminded courtesy, he hurried on board the boat in which
his guest arrived, and welcomed him to his dominions.
Had he considered the Hawaiian an enemy, he might
easily have secured him and put him to death: instead
of this, he prepared a house for Liholiho's use, and
sent away two vessels to Oahu to bring two of his
wives, with their retinues. In the same forbearing




202


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


spirit, Kaumualii, instead of demanding from the King,
so completely placed in his power, a renunciation of
all authority, and a declaration of the independence
of Kauai, fulfilled his agreement made with Kamehameha; and offered a formal surrender of his kingdom to a guest who might have been considered his
prisoner. Faithful to the conditions of that compact,
he addressed Liholiho, though with much emotion,
acknowledging the superiority of the first Kamehameha, and on that king's death, the rightful succession of Liholiho.  He placed at his guest's disposal his ships, his forts, his ammunition, his island,
as being his; inviting him to name a governor for
Kauai, and to send himself (Kaumualii) where he
chose.
The chiefs magnanimity was met by deceitful conduct. Liholiho disclaimed in courteous language any
wish to assume the island, or to alter its guardianship
in any way. His reply commanded shouts of approbation on both sides. Kaumualii continued to treat
his guest kindly and hospitably; but the guest was only
waiting his opportunity. The chiefs he was expecting
having arrived in a fine vessel the King possessed, he
invited his host on board; and whilst Kaumualii was
being entertained below, sail was made on the vessel,
and he found himself, in an instant, a state prisoner.
Keeaumoku was made governor of his island, and the
Kauaian king was brought to Honolulu, where, though
he was allowed to retain his suite, all authority was
taken from him. He was even separated from his
favourite wife, and compelled to marry the imperious
Kaahumanu.
In 1822 the first printing-press was set up and used.
The energetic chief Keeaumoku was present on the




THE FIRST PRINTING-PRESS.


203


occasion, and assisted in working off the first impressions. This year, also, the missionaries occupied
themselves in forming a Hawaiian alphabet. The
King, Kaahumanu and many of the chiefs, became
diligent scholars; and, their example being followed by
many others, the schools increased and flourished. In
a short time Liholiho was able to write legibly. In
the spring of the same year Mr. Ellis, a missionary
then engaged in Tahiti, paid a visit to the islands. His
zeal is only equalled by his intelligence; and the interesting accounts he has published of his researches, his
tour through Hawaii, and his visit to Madagascar promote not only the cause of Christianity, but that also
of civilization, and scientific investigation.
The vessel which Vancouver had promised that his
sovereign would present to Kamehameha I. was sent
by George IV. to Liholiho. It was a schooner carrying six guns, and named the ' Prince Regent.' In acknowledging this gift, which was done by a letter
conveyed by Captain Kent on his return to England,
Liholiho announced to the King the death of his father
and the conquest of all the islands; and he begged to
place them all under the protection of His Majesty.
His letter conveys the intelligence of the abolition in
the islands of ' the former idolatrous system,' and contains the following words:-' We wish the Protestant
religion of your Majesty's dominions to be practised
here.'
Whilst we rejoice at seeing barbarism displaced by
growing enlightenment, we cannot but feel some interest
in those outward manifestations of an ancient error
which, now passing for ever away, become invested
almost with sentiment.  Pomps and ceremonies no
longer oppressive in their display, pass into the museum




204


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


of what is curious and antique. For this reason the
annual festival commemorating the death of his father,
held by Liholiho in 1823, deserves mention. It was
the last national exhibition of ancient Hawaiian
customs. Just before it was held, a large accession
of missionaries had arrived from America, and many
organic changes were at hand. This feast was the last
glowing light of the barbaric sunset. The missionaries
and all respectable foreigners were invited, and were
present at it. Two hundred persons sat down to dinner
in a bower which had the dimensions of a banquetinghall. The dress of the whole party was de rigueur.
Black had been adopted as the Court colour. In the
midst of dinner, a procession entered the salon which
must have been striking from its numbers, its object,
and the contrast it formed with the guests.  Four
hundred natives, clad in white, marching in single file,
deposited their taxes at the feet of the King. The
festival, which lasted several days, was concluded by another procession; this latter being in honour of the five
queens of Liholiho. Solid phalanxes of men bore aloft
platforms covered with cloth and beautifully-coloured
tapa, on which were supported boats: the outer rank of
bearers wearing feather cloaks of scarlet and yellow,
and superb helmets of the same material. In the first
boat was seated Kamamalu. She was habited in a
mantle of scarlet silk, and wore on her head a coronet
of feathers. An immense coloured and gilded umbrella,
carried by a chief, sheltered the queen from the sun.
Kalaimoku, the prime minister, and Naihe, the public
orator, clad in the malo, or girdle of the old regime,
of scarlet silk, and lofty helmets, stood on either side of
the queen. Each bore in his hand a kcahili, or staff of
royalty, thirty feet high, the upper part being a cylinder




THE SUNSET OF BARBARISM.


205


of scarlet feathers eighteen inches in diameter. Afterwards came the prince and princess, the queensdowager, &c., the chiefs carrying hereditary symbols of
rank. It was a many-coloured procession, brilliant with
gay plumes and wreaths of beautiful flowers whose gemlike setting was their dark-green foliage. Songs and
acclamations, many hundred dancers and singers, drums
and other native musical instruments, gave animation
to a scene which the spectators would not forget, because
sufficiently remarkable in itself, and which would also
be remembered because it was the last.
In the autumn, the queen-mother, Keopuolani, died.
Her conduct having indicated a change of character,
she was baptized before her death, and spent her last
hours in giving directions about the religious welfare
of her relatives and people. She was buried with the
rites of Christian sepulture. Minute guns were fired,
as the corpse, borne by the five wives of the King and by
a high-chieftainess, was carried to its last resting-place.
The stones of an old heiau, or temple, desecrated now
from its former idolatrous use, were to be consecrated
by the interment of a Christian neophyte, round whose
grave they were to form a wall. To do honour to the
departed queen, the stones were carried to their destination by chiefs, male and female: Kaahumanu, who
in size 'towered above her sex,' bore a large stone,
whilst the inferior people walked beside their laborious
superiors, carrying nothing but the feather kahilis.
The King, Liholiho, had entertained a growing desire
to visit England. In October a council was held at
Lahaina, and he embarked in an English vessel,
'L'Aigle,' together with his favourite wife Kamamalu,
who, at the age of twenty-six, was still beautiful, Boki,
a chief, brother to the prime minister Kalaimoku, with




206


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


his wife Liliha; Kapihi, the King's naval commander;
Kekuanaoa his treasurer, a steward, and some servants.
The King's younger brother, Kauikeouli, was appointed
successor to the throne and heir to his private lands, in
case he should never return. The 'Aigle,' with the
royal party on board, left Honolulu on the 27th of
November, amid sad forebodings of the people. Kamamalu, weeping among her weeping attendants, was the
last to leave the shore. Perhaps a prescience of her
doom oppressed her. Before stepping into the boat
which was to convey her to the vessel, she turned to
her affectionate people, whose love she had won by her
amiability and domestic qualities, and uttered one of
those touching laments or farewells which it had been
the custom of her ancestors to make at parting. Simple
and few were its words, but it was the genuine expression of a sad and loving heart.
After touching at Rio Janeiro, where the Brazilian
Emperor treated the royal party with flattering attention, and presented the King with a very handsome
sword, Liholiho and his cortege landed at Portsmouth
on the 22nd of May, 1824. The English Government,
on learning their arrival, appointed the Hon. F. Byng
as a sort of guardian to these children of the far ocean,
and to provide for their comforts. On reaching London
they occupied apartments at Osborne's Hotel in the
Adelphi. There was at first an easy abandon in their
dress. The Queen and Liliha, in loose, carnival sort of
trowsers, and improvised robes of original fashion, must
have struck visitors as being, though handsome specimens of womanhood, yet 'not of the world,' — the world
in which London and Paris move. However, tailors
and milliners took the royal group speedily in hand.
Liholiho adopted the Windsor uniform; and a profile




LIItOLIHO'S VISIT TO ENGLAND.


207


medallion of him was executed at that time, and presents
a singular likeness to his royal brother George IV.
Their time was occupied in sight-seeing and receiving
visits. The nobility showed them many attentions;
their likenesses were found in the picture shops. They
dined, they travelled, they saw sights, in fact they lived
in a whirl of engagements and excitements, which a
delicate London girl might bear, but which was destructive to the robust denizens of the Pacific. Before
an opportunity took place for an introduction of the
King and Queen to George IV., one of Liholiho's household was attacked by measles. Next day the King
sickened, and by the end of a week the whole party
were suffering from the same malady. The Queen
became seriously ill. She was attended by Sir Henry
Halford, Dr. Ley, Dr. Holland, and Mr. Peregrine; but
in spite of every care, the original disease degenerated
into inflammation of the lungs. The Chief Boki and
two more of the suite recovered rapidly. The King,
too, made some progress; and on the 4th of July was
able to give audience to the newly-appointed English
consul to his kingdom. On the 8th of July the interesting Queen Kamamalu was seen to be sinking.
Her parting with Liholiho was very touching. All
that her sorrowful soul had prophesied when she bade
farewell to her native shore, had come to pass. She
was dying,-far from her land and her beloved country.
The royal pair held one another in a long, last embrace,
their tears flowing unrestrained. In the evening the
Queen died. The King is described as standing by the
lifeless body, and apparently receiving some comfort
from the new religion of which he had been but a partial scholar. Lifting upward his eyes, he exclaimed,
'She has gone to heaven.'*  The body of the Queen
* The Times, 12th July, 1P24.




208


HIAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


lay in state; and was then placed in a coffin on which
the following words were inscribed: —
TAMEHAMALU,
QUEEN OF THE SANDWICH ISLANDS,
DEPARTED THIS LIFE IN LONDON,
ON THE 8TH JULY, 1824,
AGED 22 YEARS.
At the same time, and within the distance of half a
mile, there was also lying in state a noble of England;
one who had achieved greatness beside the greatness he
inherited. In the coffin of George Gordon, Lord Byron,
the hand which had written lines of fire was lying motionless and lifeless at his side; and thousands of his
countrymen went to view the hearse of him who had so
long stirred their souls with his song. Death had been
precipitate with his two victims;-a queen of two-andtwenty;-a poet of thirty-seven. Lord Byron's body
lay at Sir Edward Knatchbull's house, in Great George
Street. The circumstance is mentioned here, from the
coincidence by which the successor to his title, Captain,
afterwards Admiral, Lord Byron, was commissioned to
carry back the remains of the King and Queen of
Hawaii to their native soil in the ' Blonde' frigate.
Owing to the death of Kamamalu the King became so
depressed, that the partial recovery he had made was
lost, and he too sank. After much severe suffering he
breathed his last on the 14th. The event is thus described by the Court newsman of the day. ' It is our
painful task to record, this day, the dissolution of the
King of the Sandwich Islands; which took place yesterday morning, at 4 o'clock precisely, at the Clarendon
Hotel, Robert Street, Adelphi.' 
* The Times, 15th July, 1824.




DEATH OF THE KING AND QUEEN.


209


The same paper shortly afterwards gives an account
of the lying in state of the deceased King: how the room
was hung with feather tippets, and the regal war-cloak
of spotless yellow plumes was displayed; and from large
china vases, draped with white linen, rose many wax
lights;-a semi-barbaric but impressive scene, with the
dark-skinned friends and attendants of dead royalty, in
silent grief, filling the chamber.
Every attention and care had been paid to the sufferers. 'The King sent his own physicians, and the Duke
of York his surgeon, and everything that England
produced was at our command.' *
The following is the inscription on the coffin:KAMEHIAMEHA II.
KING OF THE SANDWICH ISLANDS,
DIED JULY 14, 1824,
IN TIIE 28TH YEAR OF HIS AGE.
MAY WE REMEMBER OUR BELOVED
KING IOLANI.t
The ' Blonde' sailed from Portsmouth on the 28th of
September, carrying the remains of the King and Queen,
and those of the retinue who survived. Before the
latter left England, the King granted them an interview
at Windsor. He received the little suite with his accustomed courtesy, and showed them more than accustomed
kindness; promising protection to their islands, in case
any other power was disposed to encroach upon their
sovereignty. Mr. Canning frequently conversed with
them.   All expenses whilst the Hawaiians were in
England were defrayed by the Government.
On the voyage home, at Valparaiso, another of their
* Rives's Letter to the Prime Minister.
t A name by which he liked to be called by his intimate friends.
P




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


number died, Kapihi, the commander of the King's
ships. Kekuanaoa the treasurer, and Liliha, Boki's wife,
were baptized by the chaplain of the ship, Lord Byron
standing sponsor.  On the 4th of May, 1825, the
'Blonde' reached Lahaina. It is not our intention to
enter into a description of the poignant grief with which,
here and at Honolulu, a highly demonstrative nation
greeted the funeral vessel. At Lahaina, the wail of the
multitude, as they lifted up their voices and wept,
echoed over the hills, and drowned the roar of the surf.
Wild sorrow had always been displayed at the death of
their kings and chiefs, although in so many cases they
were hard oppressors. The Scythians wept atthe birth
of a child: it seems more unaccountable that the
Hawaiians should have grieved so greatly at the death
of those who often lorded it over them with tyrannical
insolence,-but it was so.
The funeral obsequies took place at Honolulu. No
longer were the remains of the royal pair to be concealed, or carried to some open heiau, where grinning
hideous idols kept watch upon the massy walls; but
amidst 'pious orgies, pious airs,' and attended with
' decent sorrow, decent prayers,' those earthly relics
were borne in a Christian procession, received in a
chapel hung with black, and consigned to their long
silence with religious services. The coffins were drawn
on two cars surmounted by rich canopies of black, each
of which was moved by forty of the inferior chiefs. The
young King and his sister were followed by Lord Byron
and the English Consul. Lines of soldiers extended
half a mile, from the fort to the chapel, and the officers,
band, and marines of the 'Blonde,' walked in files, as
did the foreign residents. A hundred seamen of the
frigate, in uniform, closed the procession. Of all the




A CHRISTIAN FUNERAL.


21 1


mourners, none felt more poignantly, than the veteran
chief Kalaimoku, the prime minister.    He had loved
Kamehameha the warrior, and he had transferred his
love to his king's offspring.*  Now he saw them carried,
young, to the grave:-hence those tears, which flowed
freely down the old man's cheeks in spite of all his
efforts to control them.
* Kamamalu was the daughter of Kam6hamehla, though not thil
uterine sister of Lih,)liho.


P 2




212


HAIWAIIAN ISLANDS.


CHAPTER XIV.
HISTORICAL SKETCH-THE BROOK BECOMES A STREAMAN APOSTOLIC PREFECT ARRIVES-THE ARGONAUTS.
DURING the expedition to England, several changes
had occurred in the islands. Old things were
passing away. At Kailua, the memorable scene of the
last battle between idolatry and the iconoclasts, a place
of Christian worship had been erected, in which the
average attendance each Sunday was eight hundred
persons. Kapiolani had become a Christian, dismissed
all her husbands except Naihe, and had thoroughly
adopted the habits of civilized life. This is the female
chief who descended the crater of Kilauea. She died
in 1841. The ex-King of Kauai died in 1824, also a
convert, and a sincere one, to the new faith. He bequeathed his possessions to Liholiho.  Keeaumoku,
Kamehameha's old warrior, and Governor of Kauai, was
also dead a short time previous to the decease of the
sovereign of that island. His powerful grasp of the
government having ceased, the Kauaians, on learning
the death of their late king, threw off restraint, and
renewed many heathen practices. It cannot be a matter
of surprise that the echoes of heathenism would still
return at first, although the body of paganism was removed. They would be fainter, and only heard under
favouring circumstances; but in the present case they




CONVERSION OF KAAHUMANU.


213


had also a political association. The people connected
the former system with their former independence; and
in the anarchy which reigned for a time in the island,
an armed attempt was made to throw off subjection to
the central government, to expel the new governor, and
to promote George Kaumualii, the late King's son, to
the crown. The insurrection was, however, quelled by
the usual vigour of the prime minister, Kalaimoku,
after some vigorous fighting and the execution of some
chiefs. A grand council was held to settle the island
finally, and it was formally annexed to the kingdom of
Liholiho.
The most conspicuous effect of Christianity was the
change which took place in the Regent Kaahumanu. In
the days of her heathenism she had been the haughtiest,
the most imperious and the most cruel of her sex. When
angry, her glance carried terror to her trembling vassals.
No subject, however high his station, dared face her
frown. Though friendly to the missionaries, her personal deportment towards them was lofty and disdainful.
She possessed unusual energy, decision, and ability;
which qualities, united with the experience and judgment of Kalaimoku, had often extricated the nation
from the difficulties in which it was involved. After
she had sat as a disciple at the feet of Christ, her strong
character underwent an entire change. Her naturally
warm affections burst through the cold, contemptuous
habit with which she had overlaid them. She walked
with meekness and consistency in her new course; was
attached to those who had been the means of this renovation, and kind to all her people. 'The new and good
Kaahumanu' was the name by which she was frequently
spoken of. If we sometimes think that here and elsewhere the introduction of Christianity has resulted in




214


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


small and imperfect effects, it is important to observe
in such instances as this its overcoming and transforming
power. Her example led to the adoption of the Christian
profession by many others, for people took note 'that
she had been with Jesus.' She died in 1832.
Although the name of Kapiolani, the wife of Naihe,
has been already mentioned more than once, and her
daring exploit at the crater of Kilauea alluded to, that
courageous act must be again instanced, as indicating
the reality and power of the faith which she had
adopted. In the vast and wild region occupied on the
island of Hawaii by the great mountain Mauna Loa, its
summit indented with a gigantic crater, its sides rent
with other openings, through which at times the liquid
fire flows, the priests of Pele, the dreadful deity of the
volcano, lived in an almost inaccessible seclusion. It
is in mountain solitudes, amidst crags and precipices,
subject to the more awful phenomena of nature that
patriotism and superstitions, conquered and driven from
the plain below, find refuge, and preserve through
centuries a persecuted but obstinate longevity. After
Christianity had taken possession of the more general
and fertile portions of the Hawaiian Islands, the old
worship clung about that lofty and desolate mountain,
the base of which covers 120 square miles;-it even
clings there still, to some extent, nursed by groanings
and utterances from the tormented mountain, rocked by
the fierce wild winds and storms, sheltered by clouds
and mists, lighted by sudden spectral fires, and terrified
by quakings and rendings of the soil. Few dwellers
from below came to disturb the rites practised by the
uncanny worshippers of Pele, for their bodies could not
bear the cold and wet of the climate, and their souls
were daunted by the real and imaginary horrors of the




KAPIOLANI.


215


spot. It was at the great active crater of Kilauea, on
the side of this mountain, against the threats and vaticinations of the assembled priests, and against traditions
which till that time formed a part of her own nature,
that Kapiolani, trusting in the power which has made
all things, —exhibited the courage of a Christian woman,
invaded the fiery sanctum of the goddess, ate the sacred
berries, and cast some of them daringly into the heaving
lava; and having there praised God aloud, amidst the
most stupendous instances of His power, she reascended
to reprove the idolatry of the amazed worshippers of
Pele, and to urge them to forsake it.
There afterwards grew up in the mountain region a
strange mixture of Christianity and the old heathenism,
in which, like the Taiping in China, a Trinity was
conceived and adopted, Hapu, a former prophetess,
being united with Jehovah and Christ. This heresy
did not last very long. A single missionary coming
among the adherents of it, who were worshipping night
and day in the temple, was the means of their abandoning the hastily-constructed faith and burning their
temple.
Kauikeaouli, Liholiho's younger brother, succeeded to
the crown, receiving the dynastic name of Kamehameha
III. He had been born in 1814, and consequently was
only eleven years old at the time of his accession. Before
Lord Byron left the islands, a grand council was held
to confirm the succession to the young prince. Besides
Lord Byron, the English Consul and Mr. Bingham the
missionary were present at the meeting, with the high
chiefs of the kingdom. Kaahumanu was continued as
regent during the King's minority, and Kalaimoku as
the prime minister. At the council another important
act was passed, by which the landed possessions held




216


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


by the chiefs became strictly hereditary and inalienable.
By this organic law the feudal rights of the sovereign
in bestowing lands were greatly curtailed, and the inferior people were left with very little land of their
own, for the chiefs were found possessed of most of the
available property.
The history of the islands now becomes principally
concerned in internal matters, very interesting to those
who took part in them and to those who study what
may be called the biography of a nation, but they have
not sufficient breadth to detain a slight historical sketch
like the present. The chief point of interest which
marks the following years, was the struggle against
licentious vice, which was carried on by the missionaries,
and by the government and individual chiefs who had
come under the religious influence of the missionaries.
The various ships which touched at the islands had
previously found little obstacle to the association of
their crews with the native women.  Native females
used to visit the ships; and captains going voyages
would not unfrequently carry off with them a young
Hawaiian as a compagne de voyage. But now it was
found both by ships of war and by merchantmen that a
great check had been placed on such licence; and in
the anger which the new system elicited, attacks were
sometimes made upon the missionaries and others who
interfered with the immoral traffic. Such an event
took place in 1826, on the occasion of the U.S. schooner
c Dolphin' visiting Honolulu. Its crew made an attack
and riot in the town, demanding to have the law passed
by the chiefs abolished. Some dangerous wounds were
received in the melee, and the captain taking the part
of his ship's company, succeeded by importunity and
threats in restoring the visits of the women to the




ASSOCIATION OF MISSIONARIES WITH GOVERNMENT. 217


vessel during her stay there. Similar acts of violence,
fruits of the same passions, were enacted by the crews
of English and other vessels.
It was about the same time that the American missionaries became associated with the native government.
It has been a frequent matter of accusation against them
that they, being, as they consider, sons of Levi, took
too much upon themselves; that they interfered in and
finally assumed too much of the governmental functions,
forsaking for this purpose, as Dr. Judd and some others
did afterwards, their ministerial capacity as religious
teachers. Yet it is difficult to see how such a position
could be altogether avoided. The native government
was the head and the heart of that body politic which
the missionaries desired to recover from sickness to
health. With the countenance of the King and chiefs
they could do much for the nation.  They could do
most by informing that head, and regulating the action
of that heart. So they became in a strict sense amicb
curice; standing at first in the background, but prompting, teaching, guiding, and efforming the government
to some model, that model having its materials drawn
from the Scriptures of the Old Testament. It is to be
observed that, though they were citizens of the United
States, it never was the object of the missionaries to bring
about a republic in the islands. They had discretion
to see that the genius of the people was utterly unfit for
such a so-called self-government. They saw that kingship was a necessity, and the extent of their endeavours
and their achievement was to reduce the absolutism
which they found, to the limitations of a constitutional
monarchy, looking to Europe for the necessary types.
In their zeal they were likely enough to introduce too
much of the theocratic element, and they took the




218


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


decalogue announced by Moses as the basis of the laws
of Hawaii. None can doubt that some motives common to humanity mingled with these disinterested
aspirations.  Missionaries, after all, are men.  The
'desire of power, the charm of influence, the sacred
thirst for gold, are co-extensive with our race, and
the most sacred offices do not always exclude their
whisperings.
Parties in the islands soon polarized themselves. In
proportion as the chiefs, influenced by their teachers,
began to set their face against open profligacy and
hidden vice, and to enact laws in favour of morality,
with punishments and penalties annexed to them, the
curb was felt to gall those whose reasons for residing
in the islands were the gratification of their unchecked
passions and the unscrupulous acquirement of money.
Many foreigners add a few of the inferior chiefs formed
a party bitterly opposed to the converted government,
and still more bitterly opposed to the religionists who
were bringing about the change. The latter were accused
of having assumed the entire power; which however
never was the case, nor could be while the daring will of
Kaahumanu and the activity of Kalaimoku remained.
Besides, there were some intelligent and well-principled
lay visitors to the islands, whose counsels to the government were all for order, propriety, and progress.
Unfortunately, the consul appointed by the English
government placed himself on the side of the opposition.
As a secular agent, he might properly feel some jealousy
at the encroaching influences gained by the American
party; but his antagonism does not appear to have been
judicious or temperate, and he held out to the Protestant missionaries the threat of introducing Roman
Catholic priests on the islands for their opponents. Mr.




ANTAGONIST PARTIES.


219


Charlton's conduct was the more unfortunate, inasmuch
as his American adversaries were to be the historians of
the period, and because the world looks now with a
soberer eye upon the moral delinquencies of public men
than it did thirty years ago,-does not allow, in fact,
for personal peccadilloes, unless in very great men indeed, where the troublesome little black spots are lost
sight of in the dazzling brilliancy of the luminary.
The missionaries denied the allegations, pleaded martyrdom, and invited examination of their proceedings.
Captain Jones, in the U.S. ship ' Peacock,' arriving at
Honolulu at the end of 1826, was made the umpire in
such an investigation.  He found the missionaries
entirely in the right, Mr. Charlton and his lovites
entirely in the wrong. If exuberance of expression can
give additional force to rectitude, the American teachers
must have been very right indeed. 'This great trial,'
writes Captain Jones in his report, 'issued in the most
perfect, full, complete, and triumphant victory for the
missionaries that could have been asked by their most
devoted friends. Not one jot or tittle, not one iota,
derogatory to their character,' &c.
In March 1827 died Kalaimoku (William Pitt), ' the
iron cable of Hawaii,' as the people called him. He
was expiring of dropsy when Beechey visited the island,
and saw him extended on his back in his tent. On his
death the chief Boki, who had visited England and was
Governor of Oahu, was appointed guardian to the young
King —an unfortunate transition, for Boki's character
was weak, though not without its good points. At this
time the first attempts were made to codify the scattered edicts which had been issued by the King and by
chiefs. The first written laws framed under the new
regime were founded on the Mosaic decalogue. 'The




220


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


opposition' prevented the whole body going into operation. Those intended as restraints on the sale of
spirituous liquors and on certain immoral facilities were
pretermitted; and enactments against murder, theft,
and adultery were alone put into execution at that
period.
When Liholiho and his suite sailed on their expedition
to Great Britain, a Frenchman of very indifferent
character, named Rives, had attached himself to the
party by concealing himself in the vessel till she was
out at sea. The King, with his easy temper, allowed
the volunteer attache to continue with him in London
in the character of his interpreter. He was, however,
after a time dismissed, and he then went to France, and
occupied himself in schemes, the base of which was the
Hawaiian Islands. He projected an agricultural concern for which he required artisans; he also demanded
priests for the christianization of the kingdom. The
result was that Pope Leo XII. appointed Mr. J. C.
Bachelot Apostolic Prefect of the Sandwich Islands, and
he sailed thence in the ship 'Comet,' accompanied by
two priests and four mechanics. Rives, who had done
thus much in the cause of religion, would not venture
himself in the vessel with such a body of divinity, but
proceeded in another, landed on the west coast of South
America, and there disappears from history finally. The
'Comet' arrived at Honolulu in July 1827, and its
captain succeeded in landing the bishop, one priest,the other having been lost overboard during the voyage,
-and tle mechanics, without the permit necessary by
Hawaiian law. Their landing was entirely opposed by
the government. Kaahumanu ordered the captain to
take his living freight away again; whilst Boki, with a
moderation which does honour to his enlightenment,




LANDING OF ROMAN CATHOLIC CLERGY.


221


entered into an explanation with the priests, showing
them the serious disadvantage to a small and unprepared
community of having within itself the exhibition of
different doctrines. He pointed out that such a diversity
might exist with impunity amongst large and enlightened nations, whilst it was unfit and dangerous for
the Hawaiians, mere neophytes of the Christian faith.
IIe stated the universal wish of the chiefs that the
French should not remain on the islands.
However, there they were; and possession is nine
points in ecclesiastical as well as other law. No persecution was used, and the authorities at last gave the
settlers permission to remain till an opportunity could
be found for their returning to Europe. Bachelot and
his coadjutor, Short, were gentle and pious men. They
combined the harmlessness of the dove with the wisdom
of the serpent., Perhaps the serpent character a little
prevailed; for it is clear from their letters, that when
opportunities for their removal did occur, there occurred
always at the same time difficulties which prevented
their taking advantage of them. However, they were
servants of a Church that requires obedience in her
ministers. Their mission was to fix that Church in the
islands; and only two courses were open to the priests
-martyrdom abroad, or disgrace at home.
They could not complain of intolerance, either on the
part of the natives or the American missionaries. In
January 1828 they opened a small chapel; and, in order
that the priests might prosecute their necessary studies,
the American mission lent them their own works in the
Hawaiian language. This was very liberal: but there
is a great charm in having one's book read, even by our
adversaries.
Many natives were led to witness the ministrations




222             HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.
in the Roman chapel; and great confusion of mind was
the consequence on the subject of image-worship. The
native mind was not then in a state to take the distinctions between diulic and latria, between essence and
symbols. Kaahumanu, with her usual aplomb, cut the
matter short with her own subjects. She punished
many of them who had become converts to the Church
of Rome, referring in justification to the edict against
idolatry promulgated at the eventful period of 1819.
A polemic war ensued; but our little wayside brook of
history, now swelling to the proportions of a stream, is
rushing on too eagerly to busy itself with transactions
which can be imagined as easily as they could be read.
So we leave the sermons and discussions, the articles
and pamphlets, and run along the brink, trying to keep
pace with our busy rivulet.
Boki, the clever but unstable Governor of Oahu, with
his wife Liliha, relapsed sadly from the Christian faith;
and their example was followed by many others, who,
remembering the flesh-pots of Egypt and loathing the
light food of the new system, made somewhat like a
wilderness by too great restrictions, fell back gladly
into many of the licences of their former life. Even
the young King, of whom Boki was guardian, fell into
dissipation. A revolution was talked about, and some
steps were taken in it; but by energy, and judicious
conduct in the ruling powers, it was crushed in the
bud.
In 1829 the young King, then sixteen years of age,
first began to take an active part in public affairs.
He issued a proclamation to the effect that the laws
would be enforced against natives and foreigners
irrespectively.
At the end of this year an Argonautic expedition was




BOKI S FATAL EXPEDITION.


223


planned and executed, which ended most disastrously.
Boki had been extravagant, and had encumbered himself with debts. A large amount of dollars was found
in some manner to be owing to the Americans, and
which it was arranged by the captain of a U.S. man-ofwar, who played the part of a national conscience, should
be paid in sandal-wood. The crew of a vessel which
arrived at Honolulu informed Boki that they had fallen
in with an island in the South Pacific, which abounded
with this valuable wood. Boki resolved to sail thither,
though the direction was extremely vague, and, with
force and arms if necessary, take possession of the island
and its wood. Another account is, that Boki had resolved on conquering the New Hebrides, a group of
islands three thousand miles distant from Hawaii.*
The ' Kamehameha,' a beautiful man-of-war brig, was
fitted out, with the 'Becket,' a smaller vessel. Both
ships were well furnished with arms, ammunition, and
stores for colonizing. Five hundred people, including
seamen, soldiers, and the foreigners, embarked in the
two vessels. One hundred and seventy-nine crowded on
board the 'Becket,' the burthen of whichwas one hundred
tons! They sailed on the 2nd of September, a day of
grief and tears to the inhabitants of Oahu, who stood
weeping as they saw the ill-starred adventurers leave
its shores. Boki, with all his faults, seems to have had
something honest and noble in his nature; and as he
took leave, he turned and addressed the people thus:' Attend, my friends! Hear what I have to say. You
know my sin is great:-it smells from Hawaii to
Kauai:-it is enormous; and it is my own, and
not another's. I am about to take a voyage to


* The Sandwich Islands, Alexander Simpson. London, 1843.




224


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


extinguish the debt of the King, and not for unworthy
purposes.'
The poor man who found that his ' offence is rank, —
it smells to heaven, and daringly resolved to steer into
unknown seas in order to pay off his debt, was, in spite
of his rashness, more honest than if he had gone through
the Bankruptcy Court on his own petition.
The expedition arrived at the New Hebrides and
landed on the island of Rotuma, where, like the Spanish
adventurers in America, they treated the inhabitants
with harshness, and made them cut sandal-wood. Boki
then sailed in the' Kamehameha' for Erromanga, an
island only a few days distant from Rotuma.  The
' Becket' had orders to follow him in ten days. Fate
threw her black pall over the bold chief and his companions. Nothing was ever afterwards heard of the
'Kamehameha' or any of those on board. As they had
a quantity of gunpowder with them, and were accustomed to smoke in the most careless manner, it has
been thought probable that the ship was destroyed
by an explosion. The companion ship, the 'Becket,'
reached Erromanga, where the Hawaiians committed
many outrages on the natives.  Lives were lost in
fighting, and an epidemic broke out amongst the adventurers, in which the leader, Manui, died, and many
others. After a stay of five weeks at the island, to no
purpose, the solitary little vessel set sail for Oahu. Her
original company had been swelled by the addition of
forty-seven natives of Rotuma; so making two hundred
and twenty-six persons on board a vessel of one hundred
tons. Nothing that the ' Ancient Mariner' could relate
whilst he enchained listeners 'with his glittering eye'
approached the horrors which were enacted on this
eventful voyage.




THE ANCIENT MARINER.


225


Crowded with the sick, the dying, and the dead, the vessel
became a floating charnel-house. The sufferings of the living
were aggravated by famine. They lay under a burning sun,
enduring agonies of thirst, and were destitute of medicines or
medical skill. Feebler and fainter, day by day, arose the groans
of the suffering passengers, and the wails of the almost equally
helpless crew. The slow progress of the brig was tracked by
corpses.  The conduct of the foreigners, who seem to have
been wrapped in the selfishness of despair, was barbarous, and
its remembrance inflames the resentment of relations to this
day. The dying, as well as the dead, were reported to have
been cast overboard: and out of the two hundred and twentysix souls that composed the brig's living freight, but twenty returned,-and of these eight were foreigners. Twenty natives
had been left at Rotuma on their way, some of whom afterwards found their way back. On the 3rd of August, 1830,
the 'Becket' arrived at Honolulu; and as the news of the
disaster spread, the voice of weeping and wailing was heard
by night and by day. The loss of so many active, intelligent
men was a severe blow to the nation.*
* Jarves, Hist. Hawaiian Islands.


Q




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


CHAPTER XV.
HISTORICAL SKETCH-THE STREAM BECOMES A RIVERREIGN OF KAMIHAMfeHA III.
THE Roman mission had gained a footing upon the
islands, and was determined not to be dislodged.
There were now three parties at work, and amongst them
the natives fared ill.  There was the government,
which, inspired by the American independent missionaries, carried religious restrictions to a Puritanical
extreme, enforcing them by punishments, so that innocent amusements ceased.   Kaahumanu was much
influenced by Mr. Bingham, the principal member of
the mission, a sincere and disinterested man, possessing
talent and energy, but injudicious in not considering the
earthen vessels into which he was zealously pouring
heavenly treasure. No punishment was considered by
him and the associated government too great for the
most venial offence.  Riding on Sunday, even for
foreigners, was forbidden; the healthy exercise of swimming, in which the people ever delighted, was actually
abandoned; and police constables entered private houses,
and, like the intruders so touchingly described by
Mr. Lillyvick, without any 'with your leave' or 'by
your leave,' walked away with the fermented liquids
that might be on table.
Then there was the party of reaction. To this the




PURITANS AND PROFLIGATES.


927


young King inclined, who unfortunately evinced dissipated habits at an early age. It included most of the
foreign trading residents, the ' foreigners,' as they were
called par excellence, and a good many of the natives,
who were discontented with the rigid rule under which
they found themselves, and sought licence under the
name of liberty. The traders or 'foreigners' as a community, though immoral, were not in every respect bad.
They are described as 'an easy-going, free-living race;
associating together on terms of peculiar amity, and
indulging in frolics of the most extravagant description.
There was little rivalry among them.'* They seem
almost to have made a joint stock of their profits, and
were so careless or so trusting, that money and goods
passed about amongst them without a written acknowledgment ever being thought of, and they scarcely ever
entered into a settlement of accounts.   When they
wanted land for houses, the chiefs friendly to them used
to give it, and it was sometimes received without any
deed or written title. A bitter feud existed between
them and the missionary party. They accused the latter
of being the originators of the unwise restrictions of the
government, and of holding back the inhabitants from
advancement, in order to increase their own influence.
They viewed every action of the missionaries, however innocent or well meant, with suspicion; they called them,-and
by frequently calling them so came to believe them to be,hypocrites even in religion; they supported a school for teaching native and half-caste children English, mainly because the
system was opposed to the views of the missionaries; and
they maintained a newspaper for several years, the chief aim
of which was to attack their religious adversaries, and throw
doubt and discredit on all their efforts.t


* A. Simpson, Progress of Events, &c.


t Ibid.




228


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


Finally, there was the Propagandist party.  The
priests had been treated with consideration. They had
not been forcibly ejected from a land that never invited
their presence; and though Kaahumanu issued an order
forbidding natives to attend their religious services, the
Romanists were allowed to continue their labours among
foreigners. In spite of this ordinance, numbers of
native proselytes received instruction from the Roman
Catholics and met in their chapel; and it was in the
government's efforts to prevent and restrain its people,
using force to compel the natives' absence from rites
and schools, that ' The Persecution' consisted.
In thirty years, our own views on the subject of religious liberty have changed materially. We no longer
allow governments to persecute opinions; we only permit that valued privilege to the religious or political
parties themselves; and they certainly act the tyrant
with considerable zest.  Whilst, therefore, we regret
that the Hawaiian government in 1830 should have
unwisely used harsh and repressive measures, we can
scarcely blame them,-certainly cannot feel surprise:
but we do see from our present point of view, that
to impose penalties and imprisonment on the Romanist
converts, and to treat thirty of them as malefactors, was
exceedingly unwise.
It may be easily conceived that a strong feud would
exist amongst the three parties in whose ranks all the
population was distributed. The American missionaries
had been early in the field, and had laboured, if not
always judiciously, with great activity. In ten years
from the commencement of their mission nine hundred
schools had been established in the islands, taught by
native teachers, and containing 44,895 pupils. It is a
remarkable fact that in the Sandwich Islands education




RELIGIOUS PARTIES AND PERSECUTION.


229


has been more diffused, has embraced a larger proportion of the population, than it has ever done in Great
Britain, in Prussia, or in New England. The missionaries and a missionary government would naturally
look with jealousy and anger upon their Roman Catholic
rivals. Kaahumanu had appointed her brother Kuakini
Governor of Oahu.   He was a shrewd, stern man:
understanding the English language very well. With
great energy he suppressed an insurrection which was
developing itself on the island which had been placed
under his charge, and he next proceeded, in 1831, to
send away the priests from the country, to which they
had clung with a parasitic tenacity since their first unauthorized settlement. Three notices at sufficient intervals were given to the French priests, as they were
called, though one of them was an Irishman; but the
priests kept on never minding; or, rather, they moulded
the affair of extradition into such a form as to look
like a religious persecution of themselves. Government decided on sending them from the country at its
own expense: and as, opportunely, an invitation had
been given to the priests by the Prefect of the Missions
in California to join him there, where their presence
was much needed, they were shipped on board a brig,
and early in 1832 were landed safely at San Pedro, and
received a welcome reception from the Roman Mission
there. The artisans were not compelled to leave the
islands.
Motives, like the shield with gold and silver sides,
look very different from opposite points of view. Seen
from the government side, the Romanists were a set of
intruders, trespassing upon its patience as they did upon
its territory; disregarding a civil notice to quit, and
requiring an ejectment under the old auspices of John




230


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


Doe and Richard Roe: and even then, like the ghost of
the Amundevilles, refusing to be driven away. From
the station occupied by 'the faithful,' the two priests
were a picket of the army of martyrs, holding true to
their sacramental oath, and seeking by all means to
plant in Hawaii the banner of the Cross. The result of
their representations to the French government will be
seen hereafter.
This year, 1832, the year of the passing the Reform
Bill in England, died Kaahumanu, aged fifty-eight, —
beloved and lamented. She had come late into the
Christian vineyard, but when called within its enclosure
she seems to have laboured, according to her light, with
sincerity and activity. On her death her power and
place were transferred to Kinau, an elder half-sister of
the King's. She, like her powerful predecessor, was
much under the influence of Mr. Bingham. The following year the young King assumed the active duties
of government. Unfortunately he was ill-prepared for
such responsibilities.  His original temperament was
luxurious; and the persons he had adopted, or who had
adopted themselves, as his friends, had rather assisted
than restrained the power of his youthful passions,
and the temptations which surrounded a person of his
age and station. Things began to go very badly. The
King relapsed into a state of open immorality, and on
his own authority revoked all the penalties on crimes
affixed by law, except those on murder, theft, and
adultery. He issued a proclamation declaring that all
authority resided in himself, and that he possessed the
arbitrary power of life and death. It is disheartening
to read of the state of society which soon followed this
unhappy change. The people, galled with too severe
a curb on their habits and inclinations, broke loose in




A BRIEF REIGN OF TERROR.


231


debauchery and every sort of vice. Moral anarchy
prevailed not only in Honolulu, but throughout the
group. Schools were deserted, the teachers themselves
falling away; buildings for worship were burned, and
some lives were lost in the violence and confusion which
prevailed. The dark habits of heathenism sprang up
again, like the heads of Medusa, and, in one district at
least of Hawaii, idolatrous worship was once more performed. If we may give all credence to accounts which
come to us through the missionary party, the islands
must for a time have been a pandemonium. During
the height of this misrule, Kinau, the premier, with
all her determination and strictness of principle, had
no controlling power; nay, was obliged to keep within
the walls of the fort, with a few faithful attendants, to
escape the insult and violence to her person which
would have been offered had she ventured forth.
Happily, the reign of terror and profligacy was not a
long one. Such rein had been given to lust, rage, and
drunkenness, that the subjects of passion sank down
exhausted, sated, sick, and wearied, and a state of prostration followed the terrible excitement they had undergone. So great is the power of public example, when
the exemplar is in high place! So true Charles Caleb
Colton's epigrammatic expression of the fact:'The paltry watch in private pocket borne
Misleads but him alone by whom 'tis worn.
But the town clock, which domes and towers display,
By going wrong leads half the world astray.'
Happily, the King had the opportunity during a long
subsequent reign, extending to the year 1854, to atone
for that wild Walpurgisnacht of which he had been
the mad leader.   One who knew Kamehameha III.




232


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


long and intimately, even till his death, gives me such
a report of him as the following:If the first of the name was the one and proper man for his
epoch, the third Kamehameha was equally fitted for the time
on which he fell. He had private moral faults and irregularities over which, as they affected but little his public conduct,
we may well throw the veil of silence; and then we have a
king who, if any ever deserved the name of the father of his
people, was worthy of that honoured title. To him king-craft
came intuitively. Penetrating, patient, conciliatory, he knew
how to measure and to gain men. Many times, placed in circumstances of extreme danger and perplexity, he steered the
barque of the state out of them with all the caution and devotion of a pilot. It is no hyperbole to say of him that he was
ready to sacrifice himself to the public weal, because he actually did so, both on public and great emergencies, and in a
long course of watching and self-restraint. He denuded himself of privileges and prerogatives that he might clothe his
people with them. He freely gave up to that people his time,
his care, his income, and his territory.
The first turning-point with the young King, indicating a coming restoration, was the circumstance of
his confirming Kinau the premier, his half-sister, in
her office. The party in favour of disorder, and which
it is disagreeable to add included Mr. Charlton the
English consul, were desirous of having the princess
displaced. She had remonstrated earnestly with her
brother, and was incessant in her affectionate endeavours
to reclaim  him   from  the disastrous course he had
adopted.   Her influence triumphed; and the effect
upon the community when the confirmation of Kinau's
power was known is described as being electrical.  The
crisis was over; but Kamehameha oscillated, like all
bodies acted on by opposite forces: the storm was past,




ADVANCE IN MORAL CONDITION.


233


but the heavy sea had not yet found the hydrostatic
level. Sometimes he broke out into open habits of
licentiousness; at other times he was found respectful
and attentive in the house of prayer. The triumph of
wholesome counsels was marked in 1834, by the King
sanctioning the former laws, and placing restrictions on
the sale of spirits; so that while the licences produced
a revenue to the government, the evils arising from
excessive use of liquors were kept greatly in check.
This year Captain Seymour, in H.B.M.'s frigate
'Challenger,' arrived at the islands. His was a visit of
retribution. A year or more previously, an English
schooner was seized by part of her crew, who murdered
her master and scuttled the vessel at an uninhabited
island near the equator. The mutineers subsequently
found their way to Honolulu in a whaler. Of course
the Hawaiian government had no right to inflict capital
punishment on English subjects for crimes reported
to have been committed on the high seas; but it seems
to have been indiscreet, after hearing the acknowledgment of their guilt, to have harboured them and treated
them as it would have done honest men. Captain Seymour demanded their execution, and the pirates were
hanged.
Advance was now again made in the morality and
religion of the people. The worst features of the old
heathenism were disappearing. Much had been done
by the missionaries and their organization to raise the
standard of morals and to impart the Christian faith to
natives, who only fifteen years before had existed in
the heavy bondage of idolatry. That:the advance was
often forced, often more in appearance than real, must
not be doubted. Outward conformity is more easy to
secure than inward regeneration. Simulation was a




234


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


characteristic of the Hawaiian nation. Yet the missionaries felt their triumph, and could cry with some reality,
as they pointed to the people decently clothed, gathering
in chapels, thronging to schools, applying themselves to
laborious trades, using Christian prayers and singing
Christian hymns,-' What hath God wrought!'
The rumour of what was effected reached the religious
world in America and Great Britain, and created a
great sensation. Letters from zealous men detailing
the power and triumphs of the Cross are usually sanguine. Circumstances told with the best faith seem,
on reading them, almost like miracles, whether in reports to a Central Board of Missions, or in Lettres
Edifiantes to the Jesuit College. The transactions are
far away, nobody contradicts them; it coincides with
our own hopes and our own desires that success should
attend the ministry of those whom we sent forth with a
hearty ' God Speed.'
In the year 1836 the American missionaries became
more intimately and more openly connected with the
Hawaiian government. It has been a reproach used
towards them that some of the number who went forth
to those heathen islands to save souls by their teaching
and preaching, remained there to put away their missionary character and assume the part of amateur
statesmen, much occupied thereafter in secular matters,
and not altogether foregoing such secular honours as
their connection with that small state could bestow.
The missionaries have considered it necessary to reply
to this reproach, and to justify the course they took.
The substance of their apology is, that a necessity lay
upon them to act as they did; that an opportunity
presented itself of gently guiding. the ruling powers of
Hawaii to construct a government upon enlightened




APOLOGY OF THE MISSIONARIES. 


235


principles, of which the Christian religion should be the
directing star, and which should be free from foreign
influence; that this was the wish of the chiefs, who in
their darkness and incompetency to build on a model
they had never seen, endeavoured to procure the needful assistance where it was to be found; that to this
end they sent one of the missionary establishment, Mr.
Richards, to the United States with an invitation to
some public man to come to the aid of the Hawaiian
kingdom; one who could assist and advise in founding
a new constitution and in making new laws; that Mr.
Richards failed in the endeavour, and could not persuade any ' right man' that by going to the centre of
the Pacific he should be in the 'right place,' as far as
his own prospects in life were concerned: and that in
consequence of this failure there was no other alternative than that the missionaries should detach some
from their own ranks to be associated with the chiefs
in guiding, henceforward, the vessel of the state. They
say that the chiefs were at the time in an embarrassed
position with regard to foreign and internal affairs,
greatly needing immediate counsel; and that they made
the choice of those among their religious instructors
whom they considered most fit to walk the stage in
their new part, and to teach the science of political
economy.
And because public bodies, religious or commercial,
can never act except upon ' Resolutions,' the mission
drew up, in 1838, a series of eight resolutions explanatory of their conduct, and adumbrating a scheme of
government, or rather of the political ethics which were
to be the basis of government. That the resolutions
were entered on the Minutes some time after the principles were in operation, is not perhaps of importance




286


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


to notice, and is in accordance with the proceedings of
many other public bodies.
The missionaries had probably felt more fear than
the King and chiefs on the subject of foreign interference. Their own standing in the islands, and their
plans in favour of the people whom they had taken into
their protection, would be greatly damaged if the influences of such nations as England or France became
too pronounced. Indeed their fears had been heightened
to a painful degree in the very year of Mr. Richards'
mission to America.
An outrage, which seems to have been quite wanton,
had been committed on the property of a person named
Chapman, an English subject. His house had been
pulled down by order of the authorities, and his property plundered by those employed to commit this act
of violence. The sole cause of the proceeding appears
to have been a determination to show to white men
that they resided on the islands only by sufferance.* In
the course of 1836 Lord Edward Russell arrived in the
'Acteon,' on a visit of observation. Whilst there,
Chapman's wrong was made known to his lordship, and
he obtained reparation from the government for the
injury. Lord Edward maintained very friendly intercourse with the King, and before leaving the islands
he drew up a paper of Articles, which were duly signed,
conceived in an amicable spirit, and which, whilst they
were intended to protect English subjects against the
recurrence of such wrongs as Chapman had received,
involved nothing derogatory to the independence of the
Hawaiian kingdom, and contained expressions of friendship and good-will. The Articles were three in number.
The first permitted English subjects to come to the
* Simpson, Progress of Events.




LORD EDWARD RUSSELL'S STIPULATIONS.


237


Sandwich Islands with vessels and property; to reside
there; and, with consent of the King, to build houses
and warehouses. Such visitors and residents to conform
to the laws of the land. This article concludes with a
paragraph that ' good friendship shall continue between
the subjects of both countries, Great Britain and the
Sandwich Islands.'
The second gave liberty to English subjects to leave
the islands at their pleasure, and to dispose of their
houses, effects, &c., giving previous notice to the King,
and to take away the proceeds without impediment.
It declares that the land on which the foreigners' houses
are built remains the property of the King, and stipulates that he shall have no power to destroy the houses
or in any way injure the property of English subjects.
The third article relates to the effects of British subjects dying in the islands; giving immediate power
over them to the heirs and executors, or failing these,
to the consul or his agent. It also provides for the
collection of debts due in the islands to a deceased
English subject.
The stipulations contained in these three articles
appear reasonable, and their demands most moderate;
but they awoke the fears and jealousy of the missionarized government, and the King was induced to make
a vehement protest against them. The protest was
contained in a letter addressed to King William IV.,
and was signed by Kamehameha III. and Kinau, who
assumed the official name of Kaahumanu II. It states
that signature to the articles had been obtained by the
urgency of the commander of a ship of war and the
English consul, who threatened that the vessel would
open fire upon the town in case of refusal. It concludes
by stating that the King, under these circumstances,




238


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


had given his assent to the stipulations, but not his real
approbation.
Another trouble was impending over the vexed Archipelago, arising in a different quarter. A retribution
was preparing for the expulsion of the Roman Catholic
priests by the government. Religion had received a
wrong, and France felt that wrong keenly, and resolved
to punish it severely. In order to forward the reign of
peace, France sometimes finds it necessary to break
through the laws of nations, and to employ heavy
artillery.
In September another priest, named Walsh, arrived
in the islands. As soon as his profession became known
he was required to leave; but he eventually received
permission to remain until the arrival of the ' Acteon,'
which was daily expected. Shortly afterwards it was
notified to him again that he would not be allowed to
reside permanently. Previous to the arrival of Lord
Edward Russell, the French sloop-of-war 'Bonite'
touched at the islands; Walsh immediately appealed
to her commander, Captain Vaillant, and as the English
consul united in the request that the priest might be
allowed to remain, on the ground that Walsh was an
English subject and that his profession did not deprive
him of his natural rights, permission was granted,
with the proviso that he was not to attempt to propagate his religion.
In the meantime, Bachelot and Short had received in
California a papal brief, exhorting them to persevere
in their attempt to establish themselves at Oahu. They
were also in correspondence with Mr. Charlton the
English consul, and they were led to believe that the
way was sufficiently prepared for their returning safely
to the Hawaiian Islands. Walsh had violated his pro



EXCUSE FOR THE PRIESTS.


239


mise of not propagating the Romish religion; but he
was forbidden to open the chapel, and was again requested to leave. The names of the priests necessarily
appear in a prominent position, as if they were the chief
offenders. We must, however, be tender in our judgment of persons who were earnest in their endeavours to
carry forth what they believed to be the true Christian
doctrine; who were good and self-denying men; but
who were so bound by vows of obedience to what they
considered an authority over-riding all other authorities,
that the violation of engagements and even of truth
is almost more chargeable to the system which bound
them than upon their own consciences. We cannot
for a moment praise or defend conduct wherein truth
is sacrificed to expediency, or even, if it were not blasphemous to say it, to religion; but the priests of the
Roman Church look upon their allegiance as inviolable, and as excusing some acts which the clergy of
other churches would disdain and detest. They are in
the position of privates in an army. When the latter
take away the lives of men standing opposite to their
ranks, men against whom they have no personal quarrel
and whom they have never seen before, they look upon
themselves as instruments only, scarcely more accountable for the bloodshed than their rifles are. The responsibility of life remains with the superior authority;
their own judgment seems taken away, and the voice of
conscience to be suspended. All other violence, robbery,
and wrong, follow in the same category. It is war,and they are soldiers sworn to the articles of war;they have no choice. We state, but cannot defend the
position. At the great day, this scheme of human ethics
may hang in filthy rags upon its subjects, and every
man must be judged according to his deeds. In the




'240


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


meantime it may explain, even while it does not excuse, many wrong actions in thoughtful and pious men,
who place themselves under a headship which allows no
questioning.
In April 1837 the two priests ventured to return
from  California.  They were conveyed in a vessel
hoisting English colours, owned by a Frenchman named
Jules Dudoit, who claimed to be an English subject.
The questions of naturalization and domicil are too full
of intricacies to permit a decision as to which nation
Dudoit actually owed allegiance. The priests were
landed surreptitiously, without notice to the authorities.
On their arrival becoming known to Kekuanaoa, the
Governor of Oahu, he wrote them a distinct demand
that they should withdraw from the islands, and reminded them of their own statement that they only
intended to stay on the islands until they could obtain
a vessel to carry them thence. A despatch was then
sent to the King, who was absent at the time at Maui.
His Majesty issued a proclamation a few days afterwards, of which the following is a copy:PROCLAMATION.
Ye strangers from all foreign lands who are in my dominions,
both residents and those recently arrived, I make known my
word to you all, that you may understand imy orders.
The Men of France* whom Kaahumanu banished are under
the same unaltered order up to this period. The rejection of
these men is perpetual, confirmed by me at the present time.
I will not assent to their remaining in my dominions.
These are my orders to them, that they go back immediately
on board the vessel on which they have come; that they stay on
board her till that vessel on board which they came sails, that
is to me clearly right, but their abiding here I do not wish.


* Meaning the priests.




DEPORTATION OF THE PRIESTS.


241


I have no desire that the service of the missionaries who
follow the Pope should be performed in my kingdom, not at
all.
Wherefore, all who shall be encouraging the Papal missionaries I shall regard as enemies to me, to my counsellors, to my
chiefs, to my people, and to my kingdom.
KAMEHAMEHA III.
Unquestionably the hand of Mr. Bingham and his
coadjutors may be traced in the above production,
which, though couched in almost child-like language, is
peremptory enough, and so clear that they should have
run who read it, for that was its intention. The priests,
however, absolutely refused to return on board the
' Clementine,' and that vessel was made ready for another voyage; but the government was absolute, and
determined to put them on board. Officers were sent
to execute this intention. Bachelot enquired whether
violence would be used towards them, and the
English consul, who it may be said here, seems to
have had the faculty of acting in the most injudicious
manner conceivable upon every occasion, took part
against the officers, threatened them that the ' Clementine' was under tabu, and that any one approaching
her would be shot; and finally, by inducing them to
touch the priests as they were embarking, made out a
case of constructive violence, which was protested against
in solemn form before himself. M. Dudoit would not
have been a Frenchman in heart if he had let the
occasion pass without a little melodramatic action; so
he hauled down his flag,-they were English colours,and carried it on shore to Mr. Charlton the consul, who
publicly burnt it to protect it from dishonour! Never
before had been seen the parts of Virginius and Virginia
performed by an English consul and a Union Jack.
R




242


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


To complete the transaction, Iudoit protested that the
Hawaiian government had seized his vessel, and he
claimed damages therefore.
From the coloured statements of this affair, which
were sent to Europe and to America, it was believed
that a dreadful persecution of Roman Catholic Christians was raging in the Sandwich Islands. On the 7th
of July the ' Sulphur' surveying-sloop, commanded by
Captain, afterwards Sir Edward, Belcher, arrived at
Honolulu; and three days later appeared there Captain,
afterwards Admiral, Du Petit Thouars, in the French
frigate 'La Venus.' The two commanders demanded the
instant liberation of the priests, who remained on board
the 'Clementine.' As this was not complied with, a
body of marines were sent to the vessel and escorted the
priests to shore, where the two commanders reinstated
them in their former residence. The King was sent for,
and on his arrival an audience took place, when, after
eight hours' discussion, it was agreed that the priests
should remain in the islands until an opportunity for
their leaving presented itself.  Captain Thouars on
behalf of M. Bachelot, and Captain Belcher on the part
of Mr. Short, wrote a formal undertaking that the
priests should take their departure on the first favourable occasion, and, until that occurred, should desist
from preaching.
Before the ships of war left the islands two other
documents were signed. The first, dated July 23rd,
1837, was a consent by the King to a certain interpretation of the first of the articles agreed upon with Lord
Edward Russell. It related to the permission granted
to English subjects to come to and settle in the islands,
and it reads rather as an enlargement or variation of
the article. 'In the event of finding it necessary to




THE FIRST FRENCH TREATY.


243


exert the power of refusal to admit a subject of Great
Britain, we will grant a fair trial, and give satisfactory
reasons for our act, of which due notice shall be given
to the Consul of His Majesty the King of Great
Britain.'
The other document contains the germ of the French
treaty. Its brevity is admirable; but the doctrine of
development as in our own times caused the small seed
to assume the proportions of a tree with many branches.
It runs thus:Honolulu, Sandwich Isles, July 24, 1837.
There shall be perpetual peace and amity between the
French and the inhabitants of the Sandwich Isles.
The French shall go and come freely in all the states
which compose the government of the Sandwich Isles.
They shall be received and protected there, and shall
enjoy the same advantages which the subjects of the most
favoured nations enjoy.
Subjects of the King of the Sandwich Isles shall equally
come into France, and shall be received and protected there
as the most favoured foreigners.
(Signed)    KAMEHAMEHA III.
A. Du PETIT THOUARS,
Capt. Commander of the French
frigate 'La Venus.'
Ere he sailed, Captain Thouars appointed M. Dudoit
to act provisionally as consul for France. The Hawaiian
government made strong objections to receiving his
nominee in this capacity; but the French commander
was peremptory, and Venus had shown herself to be
Mars in disguise; and so the appointment was settled.


R2




244


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


CHAPTER XVI.
HISTORICAL SKETCH-THE FIRST FRENCH TRIBULATION.
THERE are certain places in a narrative where, although the stream   flows on without natural
hiatus, the historian seems entitled to stop for a couple
of minutes to take breath and to knib his pen. These
nodal points determine the length of his chapters. The
chapter which we now commence is, unfortunately, like
a new scene in a French play where the persons are
es memes.'
'La Venus' sailed away: her commander's destiny
being to enter into complications at Tahiti,-islands
lying forty degrees south of Hawaii. A few months
after Captain Du Petit Thouars's departure, another
priest, from Valparaiso, presented himself at the Sandwich Islands, but was not permitted to land.
The attention of France was now called to L'Oceanie.
The subject of propagating the Roman Catholic religion
in those distant islands, round which imagination, acting
upon slight actual information, knew so well how to
throw her softly-coloured halo, seized the thoughts of
the pious and amiable queen of Louis Philippe. To
the King himself Du Petit Thouars had represented the
advantages which would accrue to France from an




FRENCH PROPAGANDISM.


245


occupation of the islands of the Pacific. The means
for procuring the annexation of the Hawaiian Islands
to France lay in the introduction there of the Roman
Catholic religion. An opportunity for an armed French
vessel again appearing at Honolulu was soon found.
Under Captain Belcher's guarantee that the English
priest, Mr. Short, should withdraw as soon as possible,
the latter gentleman sailed for Valparaiso. Scarcely
had he left the island when the ship ' Europa' arrived
there, having on board M. Maigret, Pro-vicar of the
Roman Catholic Bishop of Nicopolis, the head of the
newly-formed see of Oceanica. H.B.M.'s frigate ' Imogen' had arrived there just previously. On Captain
Bruce sailing from Valparaiso, he had been applied to
by some priests to give them a passage to Oahu. This
he declined to do, and at the same time advised them
not to attempt to force themselves upon that country.
They disregarded his advice, however, and sought other
means of finding their way to the islands. M. Dudoit,
the French Consul pro tern., asked Captain Bruce to induce the native government to allow the priests, whom
he knew to be on their way, to land; but the English
commander refused to do so; and on the government
asking his view of the articles arranged by Captain Du
Petit Thouars, he clearly explained their weight and
scope, and showed them that one nation cannot force
upon another friendly nation either its religion, its laws,
or its language.
The 'Europa,' with M. Maigret on board, was not
allowed to come to anchor: and she was only permitted
to enter the harbour on her owner giving bond in the
sum of $10,000 not to permit the landing of the priest.
The government remaining firm in their resolution,
MM. Bachelot and Maigret purchased a schooner for




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


the use of their mission, and on the 23rd of November
sailed from the islands, leaving Mr. Walsh the only
priest in the Hawaiian kingdom. A few days after
sailing M. Bachelot died. The pause of several months
between this event and the arrival of Captain Laplace
in the ' Artemise' may be properly filled up with some
concurrent matters.
Since the transference of the vast dominions of the
East' India Company to the Imperial crown of Great
Britain, the Hudson's Bay Company is left the greatest
territorial proprietor extant.  The possessions of the
merchant adventurers trading in Hudson's Bay and
Rupert's Land, sweep across the continent of America
from the Atlantic to the Pacific. They extend from
corn-growing climates in the temperate zone to those
boundless fields of arctic ice, where land is of a nominal
value, and a fee-simple would remain invisible to its
purchaser for the greater part of each year, but which
have the adventitious value of being the hunting-ground
for the fox, the beaver, the otter, and the bear, as the
great prairies lying towards the Rocky Mountains are
for the bison or buffalo. The adventurers to Hudson's
Bay are essentially a trading company. Their standing
army consists of about twelve men; and their adopted
motto 'Pr'o Pelle Cutem' might afford to a jocose
Latinist several appropriate readings.  Vancouver's
Island was at that time one of their territories; and as
early as 1834, the company, still advancing towards the
setting sun, placed a trading agent in the Sandwich
Islands; not with a view of obtaining furs, there being
no ferce there, but for the purpose of selling English
manufactures. From the islands they took salt, and to
them imported salmon; they also took some of the
natives, transporting them from their sunny climate to




THE HUDSON'S BAY COMPANY.


247


the cold northern settlements of the Company. Some
of the emigrants lived and became useful servants, but
the greater number of them died in their new and inhospitable home. The Company continued their agency
there, operating with more or less success till about
seven years ago, when they withdrew from the field,
concentrating their commercial establishments in British
Columbia. In the year 1841, Sir George Simpson, the
territorial governor of the Company, accompanied by
his secretary Mr. Edward M. Hopkins, left London, and
passing over the American continent, crossed the Rocky
Mountains, entered California before the gold discoveries
had made that name so familiar to European ears, and
taking ship at Santa Barbara, proceeded to the Sandwich Islands. Sir George was able to render some important services to the Hawaiian government in pecuniary and other ways. Several chapters of his agreeable
volumes, ' An Overland Journey round the World,' are
occupied with an account of this visit, and with observations made there. Sir George on leaving the islands
made his way by the north-west settlements of Russia
through Siberia and Russia to Europe; and having
made a complete circuit of the globe, reached London
almost on the same day that his secretary arrived there
by a homeward journey over the Rocky Mountains,
and the lakes and prairies of North America.
We must now return to the American missionaries.
The Rev. W. Richards, who formed one of their number,
was a very kindly, well-meaning, pious, industrious
person, without any great intellectual power, who, during
his twelve years' residence in the islands as a religious
teacher, had acquired the native language very correctly,
and was principally employed by the mission in translating. He was selected to go to the United States on




248


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


the errand previously mentioned, which proved unsuccessful. Returning to the islands in 1838, after an
absence of two years, a new line of life opened itself to
the former humble missionary. He became the adviser
of the sovereign-a sort of conscience to the King; resided with him, accompanied him wherever he went,
and acted as his interpreter, or rather as his spokesman.*
He had put off his definite character of a minister of
religion, to assume the task of making laws and governing a people. Alas! ambition sometimes dwells beneath
unstarched white cravats and suits of black alpaca. In
1842 Mr. Richards was accredited to the United States
and the Courts of London and Paris as a Minister
Plenipotentiary and Ambassador Extraordinary.
He was not the only member of the mission who
dropped the purely spiritual office for the secular.
Whilst employes of the American Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions, these teachers of religion
were supported by the Board in a liberal manner, but
they were expected to attend exclusively to the duty
which had been assigned them, and they could not
appropriate any property which might fall into their
hands, but which was to belong to the Board itself.
Thus, the American missionaries were comfortably provided for against the common needs of life, and their
children were educated by the Society; but whilst in
the capacity of its missionaries, they could not call house
or furniture, land or cattle their own. A means was
found of liberating themselves from this too parental
tutelage, and of passing from bondage into a position
in which they could acquire and hold money, land, and
every sort of property. This was effected by represent

* See Simpson, ' Progress of Events.'




SECULARIZING MISSIONARIES.


249


ing to the Board that they desired to be no longer a
burthen on the funds of the Society; that they were
able to maintain themselves in the sphere of their
labours. They thus partially detached themselves from
the Board and its rigorous system, whilst they retained
the character of missionaries. Many of their number
are supported by the congregations among whom they
live, by subscriptions in money, provisions, and labour.
Some of the missionaries passed into government employ; and not a few of the number showed considerable
alacrity in the search of wealth, seeking it diligently,
and investing it in very remunerative securities. Subsequently to the time now under consideration, Dr.
Armstrong became President of the Board of Education,
and retained a post which he filled efficiently till his
death, which occurred accidentally in 1861.
Mr. Bingham, the most energetic of the first missionaries, appears to have been dissatisfied with the influence
and proceedings of Richards, and in 1840 he retired
to the United States. The latter found a coadjutor in
the person of Dr. Judd, the surgeon of the mission, who
on Mr. Bingham's departure took an active but undefined
part in public affairs, In 1842, however, office came
thick upon him. He was appointed a Commissioner of
the Board of Treasury, as well as Recorder, Interpreter,
and Translator to the government.
That government had continued its opposition to the
encroachment of the Roman Catholic mission. In 1839
all the priests were gone except Mr. Walsh, and they
would willingly have trodden out the last sparks of
Romanism, had they been able. Unfortunately, they
used harsh measures to the native converts,-measures
which, in the language of the present day, would unhesitatingly be called persecuting. The Governor of




250


HIAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


Oahu imprisoned many professed native Roman Catholics. It does not seem that these severities are to be
charged to the advice of the missionaries. No doubt it
was through them, originally, that the government tried
by repressive means to prevent the spread of a system
which was opposed to that of their own teachers; but
according to Jarves, the missionaries placed themselves
on the side of humanity, and prevented, wherever they
could, intolerant punishments and captivity. So much
did their remonstrances work on the King, that in June
1839 he issued orders that no more punishments should
be inflicted, and that all native Roman converts should
be liberated from confinement. The stigma of persecution had, however, fastened itself upon the Hawaiian
government; and a rod was in preparation which its
public abrogation was not to turn aside.
On the 10th of July, 1839, the French frigate ' Artemise,' Captain C. Laplace, arrived off Honolulu. Its
commander immediately sent to the King a letter or
manifesto, in which the indulgence and long-suffering
of France were pointed out; the enormities of the
Hawaiian government towards French subjects-their
'victims '-were portrayed; and most undisguised
threats were held out to a nation 'misled by perfidious
counsellors.' The government was accused of violating
treaties; and was informed that to 'tarnish the Roman
Catholic religion with the name of idolatry, and to
expel it under this absurd pretext, was to offer an insult
to France and its sovereign.' What embittered the
sting planted in Captain Laplace's heart was that, whilst
the French were suffering ' the most cruel persecution,
Protestants enjoyed the most extensive privileges.'.
Five conditions followed these prolegomena. They
were —




CAPTAIN LAPLACE'S FIVE CONDITIONS.


251


First. That the (Roman) Catholic worship be declared
free throughout all the dominions subject to the King
of the Sandwich Islands; that the members of this
religious faith shall enjoy in them all the privileges
granted to Protestants.
Second. That a site for a (Roman) Catholic church be
given by the government of Honolulu, a port frequented
by the French, and that the church be ministered by
priests of their nation.
Third. That all (Roman) Catholics imprisoned on
account of religion since the last persecutions extended
to the French missionaries be immediately set at liberty.
Fourth. That the King of the Sandwich Islands
deposit in the hands of the Captain of the 'Artemise'
the sum of $20,000 as a guarantee of his future conduct
towards France; which sum the government will restore
to him when it shall consider that the accompanying
treaty will be faithfully complied with.
Fifth. That the treaty signed by the King of the
Sandwich Islands, as well as the sum above mentioned,
be conveyed on board the frigate ' Artemise' by one of
the principal chiefs of the country; and also that the
batteries of Honolulu do salute the French flag with
twenty-one guns, which shall be returned by the
frigate.
This peremptory document concluded by stating that
the foregoing equitable conditions were the price at
which the friendship of France was to be preserved.
The King and his chiefs had their free choice to accept
or reject them; only with this proviso, that if they refused, Captain Laplace would ' immediately commence
war, with all the devastations and all the calamities
which would be its unhappy but necessary results.' It
was signed on the 10th,-9th, of July 1839.




252


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


Together with the manifesto, a letter was sent on
shore to the French Consul, intimating that in case of
the conditions being refused, hostilities would commence
at noon of the 13th,-12th, instant, and offering under
such eventualities, asylum on board the frigate to all
compatriots apprehending danger. A similar communication was forwarded to the American Consul; but to
the latter was added a clause that the offer of asylum
did not extend ' to those individuals born in the United
States, who form part of the Protestant clergy of the
chief of this archipelago, direct his councils, influence
his conduct, and are the true authors of the insults given
by him to France. For me, they compose a part of
the native population, and must undergo the unhappy
consequences of a war which they shall have brought on
this country.'
Poor Mr. Richards and his brethren felt this very
invidious and personal exclusion in its full force; particularly as Captain Laplace, in the greatness of his zeal
for religion, threw out, in addition, that if one man of his
vessel should be injured, his was to be a war of extermination. So tender is the commander of a French
frigate over the seamen of the navy who compose his
little flock.
The harbour of Honolulu was declared under blockade. The King was absent; and as he could not return
within the three days of respite, a further delay of two
days was granted by Captain Laplace before commencing hostilities. These days were filled up with
animated discussions, with fears, with rumours of the
extraordinary distance French guns would carry; also
with very good arrangements made by the native
authorities for preserving order in the town. There was
some talk, too, of resistance. Even the English Consul,




THE FORCIBLE ARGUMENTS OF ARTILLERY.


253


who arrived whilst matters were progressing, was not
pleased at the prospect of French domination. He
had never wished well to the natives, it is true, but he
wished ill to those who were now threatening them.
The King did not come. The missionaries grew
more and more alarmed. There were their wives and
their numerous and tender families. No doubt, they
stood in a very compromised position, and had real
grounds for fear. The net result of all these circumstances was, that counsels of fear prevailed; the Governor of Oahu together with the Premier signed the treaty
in the absence of the King, and the material guarantee
of $20,000, got together with great difficulty, was taken
on board the frigate. Then the salutes were duly fired;
and when all was finished, the King arrived. The
business happened to be transacted on a Sunday; and
when it was accomplished, Captain Laplace went on
shore, and under an escort of 200 seamen with fixed
bayonets celebrated a military mass in a straw palace
belonging to the King. So the thunders of the ' Artemise' did not wake to avenge the departure of a French
priest, who was formally pledged to leave the islands;
and the blood of natives and missionaries did not
mingle in a massacre of extermination, which was to
have been the condign punishment for the imprisonment of some native converts.
Yet Captain Laplace's mission was not complete.
There was an arriere pensee. The admission henceforth
of French bishops was in some manner to be coincident
with the admission of French brandy. A close connection of these two products of France became established;
and if the historian is obliged to mention, in the same
breath, the duties of the one with the duties upon the
other, it is done not with any desire to mingle the




254


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


spiritual with the spirituous, but because of an actual
nexus which we cannot dissolve. So identical did these
two interests become, that the same native name, palani
or fardni, was applied to brandy and Frenchmen.
To check intemperance, the council had induced the
King the previous year to prohibit the introduction of
ardent spirits, and to lay a heavy duty on wines. The
act seems to have been generally approved, except by
those who drank deeply, or made their profits by selling
these commodities. Another treaty was drawn up by the
French commander: but the King objected to some of its
provisions, one of which limited the duties on imports
to a maximum of five per cent. Again a little gentle
pressure had to be applied. The treaty was brought to
the King at 5 P.M. one afternoon, and he was required
to sign it by breakfast the next morning. The word
'extermination' was not indeed openly used, but rumours
were set afloat in the neighbourhood of the King, that
the ' Artemise' would be followed by a larger force, and
that the islands might possibly be transferred to another
power.   The treaty was of course signed, and the
'Artemise' sailed from Honolulu.
Soon afterwards the ' Clementine ' arrived from Valparaiso, bringing passengers, the Bishop of Nicopolis,
M. Maigret, and two other priests. Roman Catholicism
had now gained a secure footing in the islands; and
though no chief of importance joined its ranks, a considerable number of the inferior natives became proselytes
to its creed. A large stone church was commenced in
Honolulu for the service of the Roman Catholics.
In taking leave of this part of the subject, a sad
event has to be recorded, which enlists our sympathies
and overlooks denominations. The Bishop returned to
France to procure the instruments and ornaments re



ONE TOUCH OF NATURE MAKES THE WHOLE WORLD KIN.' 255


quired for the rites of his religion. On his way back
to Hawaii, with a company of nuns and other persons
who had joined the mission, and bringing with him the
ecclesiastical furniture and a cargo of goods for their
enlarged establishment, the vessel foundered at sea and
all on board perished.
The divisions among Christians are great; the bond
of a common humanity is still greater. Over the grave
of fellow-men who perished in the zealous pursuit of
duty, our tears may mingle together without distinction
and without reproach.
A pause of two years now occurs in the tribulation.
During that time no French Admiral's pennon or Captain's flag fluttered before the city of Honolulu. There
were grudges and complaints between the two sects
which divided the population; and among the lower
orders, there were occasional collisions between the
Protestants and the Roman Catholics. The latter would
not contribute their quota towards the public schools,
and this naturally gave dissatisfaction to the government party, which was greatly the most numerous.
The French fleet was pursuing its destiny in southern
latitudes. In the summer of 1842 news was received
of a French occupation of the Marquesan group, the
rocky and picturesque islands which shelter 'the
beauties of the, Pacific.' It was not reassuring to the
natives of Hawaii to see in August of the same year the
'Embuscade' corvette enter the harbour of Honolulu,
and come to her moorings without the customary salute.
The premonitory frown was quickly followed by the
rebuke. Captain Mallet commanding the corvette, placed
himself immediately in communication with the priests;
and on the 1st of September he sent to the King one of
those very decided documents made up of reprimands




256


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


and requisitions to which the Hawaiians were becoming
accustomed. It complained of insults heaped upon
ministers of religion; of quiet congregations menaced by
subaltern authorities; of converts driven to hear Protestant sermons and to attend Protestant schools; of
churches overthrown, and of treaties torn. Never have
any people been so persecuted as the French.
Then followed six remedies, which the patient was to
take immediately. They stipulated that a (Roman)
Catholic high school should be recognized, enjoying
all the privileges of the seminary at Lahainaluna, and
that the government was to make a concession of land
ad hoc. That the Roman Catholic schools should be
exclusively under the intendance of inspectors professing that faith; and a provision made for supplying a
kahlkula, or inspector, in certain cases. That permission to marry be given to Roman Catholics nominated
by the kahunas of priests.  That Roman Catholics
should not in future be forced to labour on schools or
churches of a different worship; and that the parents
of children that have embraced the Roman Catholic
religion should not be ill-treated on that account. That
no individual, whatever be his rank or position, be
permitted to destroy a church or school, or insult a
minister of the Roman Catholic religion without being
severely punished.
The above demands were numbered categorically,
and they were followed by a few more without numeration, but of considerable importance. By these the
King was desired to confirm a grant of land made by
the chief Boki to the Roman Catholic mission, and to
legalize a purchase of land made by the Bishop of
Nicopolis. His Majesty was to undertake a more delicate task. He was required to produce a proof that the




FRENCH WRONGS AND FRENCH REMEDIES.


257


Abbe Maigret had signed a writing by which he acknowledged himself to be a British subject, to the great
scandal of the French mission; or, if the report was a
mere calumny invented to ruin a priest in the eyes of
the inhabitants of the islands, then the King should
cause the author of it, John Ii, Inspector-General, to
sign a declaration that he had lied about the matter, or
that he had been deceived therein.
Then, as the document would not have been complete
or consistent without something about wine and spirits,
Captain Mallet demands explanations about the sixth
article of the treaty of the 17th July; and asks, with a
certain naivete, whether the King's limitation of the
sale of brandy to a certain number of gallons, was not
for the purpose of eluding this article of the treaty,not to say violating it.' Captain Mallet admits that he
cannot prevent the King from making judicious laws for
the welfare and prosperity of his people, only he would
be glad to receive information on this particular enactment, so that he might report on it to the Admiral commanding in chief the French forces in L'Oceanie, who
would decide on the course most proper to be taken
for the maintenance of treaties and of the national
dignity.'
The King returned an answer which Mr. Jarves very
properly describes as courteous and dignified. It touches
on all the points contained in the French commander's
letter, giving such general replies as would not compromise the laws of the land. The question about brandy
and wines is easily disposed of, as being a mere affair of
licences, which are obtainable from the proper officers.
As to John Ii, who was absent from Oahu at the time, an
examination should be held about the report lie had
circulated, and, if necessary, a trial should be granted.




25S             HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.
The King concludes by desiring Captain Mallet to inform the Admiral that he had despatched ministers to
the King of the French to beg that a new treaty might
be negotiated.
This answer, signed by Kamehameha III. and the
Premier Kekauluohi, though conveying the sentiments
of the King, was, without doubt, drawn up by the advisers he had about him; and the performance is exceedingly creditable. It also answered its end:-it
satisfied Captain Mallet, who sailed from the islands.
Soon after the ' Embuscade's' departure, news arrived
of the establishment of a French protectorate over
Tahiti, Society Islands. An alarm occasioned by French
encroachment was probably not lessened in the ' country
party' among the Hawaiians by the annexation of
California by the United States, which event occurred
about the same time.




259


CHAPTER XVII.
HISTORICAL SKETCH-ESSAYS IN CONSTITUTION-MAKING.
UP to the year 1838 the government of the Hawaiian
Islands was a despotism. The King's power was
absolute; and, as is usually the case with absolutisms,
his chiefs in their separate spheres were smaller despots.
It depended on the prowess and personal character of
the Monarch to control his chiefs and really be their
king, or to maintain only a nominal headship over them,
and to be simply a chief among chiefs. Of defined
laws it can scarcely be said that there were any. Some
common prescriptive ones must have existed, for they
are found in every human society. Such are rather to
be called natural and instinctive laws; and without
them men would dwell together as wild beasts. From
time to time the King and chiefs put forth changeable
decrees; and the oppressive system of tabu made itself
felt as an immemorial and inevitable condition of life.
Usage was almost the only system.
The American missionaries and ex-missionaries, the
latter being those who had ceased upon their own request
to be subsidized by the Boston Board of Missions, had obtained a considerable influence over Kamehameha III.;
and they began to exert it in endeavouring to obtain
s2




2~0


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


the King's consent to govern the nation constitutionally. The endeavour was bold and humane. It
is said that the King felt great repugnance, and
made some resistance, at parting with the absolute
unquestioned power which had always been the right of
kings of Hawaii. The missionaries, however, gained
their point, and a sketch of a Constitution, occupying a
sheet or two of foolscap paper, was produced. The first
notion of the Exhibition Palace in Hyde Park of 1851
was scribbled by Sir Joseph Paxton on a piece of
blotting-paper.
Whoever might have been the first investigator of
this essential departure from an ancient despotism,
Mr. Richards, who has been previously mentioned, took
a leading part, afterwards, in constructing the constitutional edifice.
On the 7th of June, 1839, the King signed a Bill of
Rights; and on the 8th of October, 1840, he voluntarily
conferred on the people a constitution which recognized
the three grand divisions of a civilized monarchy,king, legislature, and judges, and defined in some
respects the general duties of each.*
It is worthy of remark that the missionaries, who
were Americans, who had lived under and perhaps loved
republican institutions, never went so far as to attempt
to introduce a republic in the Hawaiian Islands. Such
an idea they knew to be preposterous; and they were
wise enough to aim at what might be within reach; to
introduce beneficial changes, and reconcile the King to
a system for which models had to be sought among the
old dominions of Europe. Their eyes, however, travelled
farther than mere earthly types, and, consistently with


* Preface to the Statute Laws of the Hawaiian Islands, 14, 184, 1846.




A THEOCRATIC CONSTITUTION.


261


their former profession as teachers of religion, they introduced into their scheme the theocratic element. In
the preamble of 'The Constitution of the Hawaiian
Islands,' borrowed partly from Scripture and partly from
the American Declaration of Independence,* they start
with the assertion that 'God hath made of one blood
all nations of men to dwell on the earth in unity and
blessedness. God has bestowed certain rights alike on
all men, and all chiefs, and all people of all lands.'
We are not to be surprised at religious language introduced into a state paper, when the document is
drawn up by a preacher. Possibly a sermon written by
a Secretary of State might be conspicuous for its
reticence concerning the spiritual.
The Constitution was dated October 1840. It provides that no law shall be enacted in the Hawaiian
kingdom which is at variance with the word of the Lord
Jehovah, or with the general spirit of His Word. All
laws of the island shall be in consistency with the general
spirit of God's Word. It proceeds to enunciate a feudal
system  as regards land-possession. ' Kmamhamha I.
was the founder of the kingdom; and to him belonged
all the land from one end of the islands to the other,
though it was not his private property. It belonged to
the chiefs and people in common, of whom Kamehameha
was the head, and had the management of the landed
property. Wherefore, there was not formerly, and is
not now, any person who could or can convey away the
smallest portion of land without the consent of the one
who had or has the direction of the kingdom.'
There was a good deal of misstatement in these
propositions, for the common people had little or no


* A. Simpson, 'Progress of Events.'




262


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


land as their own property; and, on the other hand,
Kamehameha had, individually, large possessions.
In the small volume of 200 pages duodecimo, which
contains the English version of the Constitution and
laws of 1840, the translator remarksThe laws as they now appear are most of them of quite
recent date. Some of them were enacted as far back as 1833,
and others had their origin as early as 1823. But all the
laws which were enacted previous to the former period, and
some of a later period, have undergone such modifications and
changes that they now appear with a date much later than the
original.
At these islands, as well as in more civilized countries,
there is something like a system of common law, independent
of special statutes. It consists partly in their ancient taboos,
and partly in the practices of the celebrated chiefs as the history of them has been handed down by tradition, and at the
present time the principles of the Bible are fully adopted.
The Constitution was to consist of the King; a House
of Nobles, containing sixteen persons, of whom five
were females; and a faint adumbration of the representative system, in seven individuals who were to be
chosen, and would sit in council with the nobles. The
manner of choosing the representatives was not very
carefully defined.
At first, then, the nobles and representatives assembled in one chamber, together with the King, who acted
as a kind of president. Subsequently the branches of
legislature occupied separate apartments. At the beginning, the sessions of parliament were yearly; under
the present system they are biennial.
'The Constitution' proceeds to organic laws. Perhaps, in examining these, they may appear to adhere
more closely to the letter than to the spirit of God's




SEVERITY OF THE NEW LAWS.


263


laws under the Mosaic dispensation. Mr. Simpson
pronounces them to be the Blue Laws of Connecticut,
with the addition of powers conferred on officers, to
practise extortion and tyranny, not even possessed by a
Turkish pasha. The code of laws regulates taxation;
gratuitous labour of the people for the government;
rent of land. It enacts curious regulations for the suppression of idleness and unchastity. If a man were
found 'sitting idle, or doing nothing' on one of the
days when he was free from government labour, even
then, an officer might set him at work for the government till the evening. Thus, like the boy at school who
was doing nothing, he was effectually taught not to do
it again. But the inventive genius of the new lawgivers
expatiated most ardently in regulations relating to the
vices, crimes, and sins of unchastity. It seems as if
they had spent days and nights in considering the subject, and presenting it in the most new, ingenious, and
unexpected lights. The result of their deliberations
was a sort of network very complex and very severe,
yet unequal in its texture, and even in parts open to
Bion's reproach of laws, that they caught the small flies
and allowed the great ones to break through. Suffice
it for the present to say, that in the 'Law respecting
Lewdness' distinctions are drawn which are rather fine
than nice, with heavy penalties for those who possess
money; while disproportionately severe punishments
were affixed to irregularities which morality condemns,
but about which European legislation is silent, conceiving itself concerned with crimes rather than vices,
and leaving the punishment of sin to another tribunal.
As an instance of this disparity, in a case where the
money fine for breaking the laws was fixed at twenty
dollars, its equivalent was five months' imprisonment




264


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


-an imprisonment in which all the days were to b6
spent in hard labour, and all the nights passed in heavy
manacles.
The Declaration of Rights and the Constitution were
led to by a series of lectures upon Political Economy
delivered to the chiefs by Mr. Richards. The organic
laws, although depriving the chiefs of several of their
old privileges and immunities, were passed by them
unanimously, nor were they afterwards resisted; but
the severity and the system of espionage which they
induced caused much dissatisfaction to the common
people. The laws established the government of the
islands very much as it now stands. They confirmed
the kingdom to Kamehameha III. and his heirs. The
King was to appoint his successor, and, failing any such
appointment by him, then the chiefs and representatives
had the power to appoint. It has been mentioned that,
at first, the three branches of legislature sat in one
chamber; but this was probably only on particular
occasions, as the Constitution provides that the chiefs
and representatives were to deliberate apart, and in
certain cases confer together. It continued the office
of Premier, and appointed four governors, under whose
charge the eight islands were placed.
That the laws were efficiently carried out, is proved
by a chief having been tried for murder and hanged;
and to give the laws against intoxicating liquids their
utmost force, in 1842 the King and chiefs took a pledge
of total abstinence. The Maine Liquor Law is one of
those enthusiasms which do not last, and which lead to
broken vows and to deception. The ardent spirits that
so discountenance their namesakes have still to learn
that moderation is the virtue set forth by the Word of
God. and not total abstinence.




A. POLITICAL PLURALIST.


265


On Mr. Richards leaving Oahu, in 1842, on his joint
diplomatic mission with Haaliliho to the United States
and Europe, Mr., or as he is more generally called Dr.,
Judd received the appointment of Recorder; such an
office having been suggested by Sir George Simpson.
He also was to act as Translator and Interpreter to
the government. In assuming these characters, Dr
Judd dissolved his connection with the mission. His
position was indeed more onerous than what these offices
imply; for he became the King's Secretary of State
for Foreign Affairs, and His Maj esty's universal minister,
and sole director of the state.* No wonder that the
ex-physician to the mission found his labours and
responsibilities —the blushing honours which he bore
so thick upon him-too great for his own credit and
the King's safety. Mr. Ricord, a native of New Jersey,
of French extraction, bred a lawyer, and who had afterwards been Secretary of State to General Houston in
Texas, whilst that country remained part of the Mexican
confederation, arrived in the Sandwich Islands in the
beginning of 1844. At the recommendation of Dr.
Judd, Mr. Ricord was appointed in March of that year
to be Attorney-General and the legal adviser of the
government.  He was a man well qualified for the
office in which he was placed, and showed considerable
talent in the codification of the laws, which he immediately set himself to effect. The King had made
some ineffectual efforts to procure such an officer from
England, but no lawyer from this country would give
up his practice and hopes here, unless for a salary
which it would have been impossible for the Hawaiian
exchequer to afford.
Mr. Ricord commenced his task; and on the 24th
* 'Polynesian,' July 13, 1861.




266


IHAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


of June, 1845, the following joint resolution was
passed:JOINT RESOLUTION.
Be it enacted by the Nobles. Representatives of the
Hawaiian Nation, in Legislative Council assembled,
That having taken into consideration the review of the
constitution made by the Attorney-General, which he read
before us on the 21st of May, he be requested to draw out for
us a digest of the constitution and laws, and also a project of
the organic acts which he recommends, accommodating them to
our condition and circumstances.
Passed in the Council Chamber, this 24th day of June,
1845.
(Signed)   KAMEHAMEHA.
KEONE ANA.
By the end of the year the work was completed, the
preface being dated 1st January, 1846. The course
taken in the compilation of the laws is thus described
by Mr. Ricord:The compiler submitted at intervals portions of the code to
His Majesty in Cabinet Council of his ministers, where they
have first undergone discussion and careful amendment; they
have next been transferred to the Rev. William Richards for
faithful translation into the native language; after which, as
from a judiciary committee, they have been reported to the
legislative council for criticism, discussion, amendment, adoption, or rejection. The two houses have put them upon three
several readings, debated them section by section, with patience and critical care, altering and amending them in numerous essential respects, until finally passed in the form in which
they now appear.*
Thus it appears that a very commendable care was


* Compiler's Preface. Honolulu, 1846.




CODIFICATION OF THE LAWS.


267


taken both in the construction and revision of the code.
The first publication of them is entitled
Statute Laws of His Majesty Kam6hameha III., King of
the Hawaiian Islands; passed by the Houses of Nobles and
Representatives during the Twenty-first year of his reign
and the Third and Fourth years of his Public Recognition.
A.D. 1845 and 1846, &c. Volume I.
The compiler, in speaking of the former system of
laws and the first constitution, says —
Some of the most obvious points in civil and criminal
jurisprudence have been in some measure provided for by declaratory and penal ordinances, either proclaimed by the King
before, or enacted by the legislature after the constitution was
given. * * * * These laws and rules, though universally promulgated at home, and somewhat extensively abroad,
were neither well known nor understood.  From detached
fragments they were collated and translated into the English
language in 1842 by the Rev. W. Richards; that translation
containing 200 pages 12mo is systematized for reference into
55 chapters, each devoted to some distinct subject of legislation. * * * * Criminally, the old law applies to the
most heinous offences-to open breach of public peace and
decorum-and to wrongs towards the person and property of
individuals. The native dialect not admitting of distinction,
these offences are all indiscriminately called 'hewa,' which
word literally means 'wrong.' It is, however, for the most
part erroneously translated into the English ' crime,' regardless
of the judicial meaning of that word;  *  *  *  *  And the
legal distinction between crimes, misdemeanors, and torts does
not definitely exist in the old compilation, except by adopting
the European and American measure of offences, the penalty
annexed to them.
Civilly, the old law likewise embraced the most usual
rights and duties of the social relations augmentative of population and incitative to industry. The fundamental basis of




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


landed tenures was declared, and cultivation of the soil, under
a feudal tenancy not much differing from that of ancient
Europe, was encouraged by relaxing the vassal service. The
revenue, derived chiefly from the native population, was
slight, and utterly insufficient to maintain the more regular
system demanded by the increase of foreign commerce and the
enhanced value of property; which required something more
of the Hawaiian courts than mere investigation of facts.
As a scientific work the new code is deserving of
great praise. Mr. Ricord possessed an energetic and
orderly mind, and treated any subject he, took up exhaustively. Among the faults of his production is the
disproportion of the legislation to the wants of the
people for whom   it was intended.  It was a framework large enough to have embraced a dozen such
nations; and the Hawaiians lived under its provisions
like a family for whom a mansion has been built, but
who had been accustomed to a cottage, and to whom to
dwell in a six-roomed house would have been the
advance they desired.
Mr. Ricord gives due credit to the previous labours
of the missionaries in legislating. ' The ordinances, as
results of missionary labour, have been greatly serviceable in preparing the nation for what has since become
indispensable to its political existence-a complete
code of laws, embracing organic forms of the different
departments, particularly executive and judicial, with
outlines of their duties and modes of procedure, and
comprehensive civil and criminal digests.
The constitution and code are contained in two acts
of Kamehameha III., which were supported by after
joint-resolutions of the legislative council. They bear
date respectively the 29th of October and the 10th
of December, 1845. The first is entitled 'An Act




ADMINISTRATIVE ORGANIZATION.


to organize the Executive Ministry of the Hawaiian
Islands.' It enacts that five ministers shall be appointed and regularly commissioned by the King under
the great seal of the kingdom to conduct the several
executive functions reposed by the constitution in His
Majesty; of whom   one shall be the Constitutional
Premier, and the other four be removeable at all times
and at the mere pleasure of the King, in concert with
the Premier.
The Premier was to be Minister of Interior Affairs:
the other four ministers were to hold equal rank in the
King's service, but to take precedence in the following
order:
1. The Minister of Foreign Relations. 2. The
Minister of Finance.   3. The Minister of Public
Instruction. 4. The Attorney-General.
The second act is entitled 'An Act to organize the
Executive Departments of the Hawaiian Islands.' It
is divided into five parts, relating to the five ministers;
the parts methodically subdivided into chapters and
articles; and it embraces everything, from the Military
Power, down to Exceptions to the Taxation of Cats.
As a matter of curiosity, a few instances may be cited
from this comprehensive legislation. For example, at
that early day an etiquette of the strictest order was
established. ' All orders of nobility-of etiquette and
precedence-of rank and title-of official dress-of
salutes —of official ceremonies and of national courtesy
-shall be established upon definite rules by orders in
council, signed by the King and attested by the
Premier, and duly promulgated for the information of
the people.' The rules of precedence of the Congress
of Vienna were adopted in all intercourse under the
head of Foreign Relations. Provisions were made for




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


the protection of inventions in machinery and art; for
the issue of patents to inventors, and copyright to
literary authors. The enactment as regarded religion
was ample and distinct. Protestantism was re-proclaimed as the religion of the government, 'but no
connection was to subsist between the ecclesiastical and
the body politic.' The Judaic leaven relative to the
Lord's day remained. It was named the Sabbath; all
transactions of worldly business on that day were unlawful, and it was to be a dies non in law. All documents dated on the Sabbath were to be deemed in law
to have no date and to be void in consequence. There
were some exceptions added for cases of crime and
fraud, where arrest and committal were of immediate
necessity.
The Minister of Public Instruction was to show no
partiality towards one denomination of Christians to
the prejudice of others, in conferring offices, or licences
to teach. The laws of Kamehameha III. orally proclaimed, abolishing all idol worship and ancient heathenish customs, were continued in force, with pains
and penalties attached, in the criminal code. Congregations of fifty individuals professing the same religious
tenets were to have permission, on petition, to erect a
church or other religious conventicle,' and to receive a
portion of land for a parsonage and for the support and
use of the clergyman.
The King in privy council could by proclamation
set apart days of fasting, humiliation, and thanksgiving;
and such decree, when promulgated, was to be obligatory
on all persons, provided that the days set apart had
no sectarian tendency, or favoured one sect to the
injury of another. It may here be remarked that, till
the present time, the first of January has always been




ILLUSTRATIONS OF THE STATUTE BOOK.


271


proclaimed a day of thanksgiving, by public announcement; and the people are religiously invited to recount
on that day God's mercies vouchsafed to the Hawaiian
nation during the past year.
The laws relating to filial duties are pretty strictchildren were to submit to correction, and not to run
away. All those above the age of fourteen absenting
themselves from parental control were, when caught, to
be amenable to the labour tax and liable to impressment
into the government service as vagrants. To encourage
the growth of population, fathers of two children were
in certain cases to be free from the chattel tax. Three
children exempted from the labour tax.
This oppressive tax was re-enacted with modifications.
The year was divided into thirteen lunar months, and
during the first week of the month three days' labour
were to be performed for the government, and in the
second week two days' labour. None was required
during the other fortnight.
Provision was made for a census;-the people are
enumerated every three years. The English standards
and divisions of weights and measures were established.
For currency, the silver coin adopted was the American
dollar, and a copper cent was to be coined with national
inscriptions and the King's head.
There was a law of Fish-tabu, distinguishing the
several kinds; some of which, like the sturgeon in
England, were royal fish, and were to be divided equally
between the King and the fishermen; with other provisions respecting piscary.
Not to be tedious, only two other enactments shall be
mentioned. There was a tax on household furniture,
and a dollar a year on dogs and cats: but dogs could
emancipate themselves from the tax by learning to be




272


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


useful in guarding houses, flocks, and herds; and cats
were not to be impoverished by taxation, if they kept
at home and watched warehouses.
Finally, the organic act was to be published in the
English and Hawaiian languages.
Such is a sketch of the constitution and code of 1845.
It was introduced on its completion by a speech from
the throne. Since that occasion a succession of royal
speeches have been pronounced. These addresses of
the two kings before the present Monarch have been collected and printed, and they serve as good landmarks for
tracing the onward destinies of the nation. The King's
ministers are, as is usual, responsible for their form and
language, but it is stated that the ideas conveyed in them
are very sincerely expressed, and expose truly the views
of the Monarch upon public questions.
The King spoke on the 20th of May, 1845, as
follows:Nobles and Representatives of the People:
I have called you together to deliberate on matters
connected with the good of my kingdom.
In the exercise of my prerogatives, I have appointed
Gerrit P. Judd, Esq., to be my Minister for the Interior Affairs
of my kingdom; Robert C. Wyllie, Esq., to be my Minister
of Foreign Relations; and John Ricord, Esq., to be my Law
Adviser in all matters relating to the Administration of
Justice.
I have ordered my Ministers to lay before you reports of
their several departments.
The Independence of my kingdom has been most explicitly
recognized by the United States, France, and Belgium. From
each of these powers I have received the most friendly
assurances.
It is my wish to cultivate the relations of peace and friend



A SPEECH FROM THE THRONE.


273


ship with all nations, and to treat the subjects of all with
equal justice.
With this view, I recommend to your consideration the
better organization of the Courts of Justice, the division of
powers, and a careful revisal of the laws.
The laws regulating licences, the tenure of lands, the registration of vessels, the harbour regulations, the duties, the fines
for the punishment and correction of offences, the laws for the
collection of debts and taxes generally, deserve your attention.
My Minister of the Interior will lay before you the estimates
of the expenses required for the ensuing year, for which it is
incumbent on you to provide, with a due regard to economy
and the means of my people.
It is my desire that you take measures to ascertain whether
the number of my people be diminishing or increasing; and
that you devise means for augmenting the comforts and the
prosperity of my islands.
I consider it the first of my duties to protect religion, and
promote good morals and general education. It will, therefore,
be your duty to consider by what means those blessings can be
best promoted and extended among the people of these islands,
and also among the foreigners resident in my dominions.
I am well aware that the Word of God is the corner-stone
of my kingdom. Through its influence we have been introduced into the family of the independent nations of the earth.
It shall therefore be my constant endeavour to govern my subjects in the fear of the Lord; to temper justice with mercy in
the punishment of crime; and to reward industry and virtue.
The Almighty Ruler of nations has dealt kindly with me
in my troubles, in restoring my kingdom, together with
special guarantees for its existence as an independent nation.
May He also aid you in your deliberations, and may He
grant His special protection to me, to you, and my people.
The constitution as settled in 1845 was not destined
to continue long. As soon as born it began to draw to
its end, or rather to be remodelled, altered, improved.
T




274


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


The missionary influence, which had hitherto been allprevailing over the government, was beginning to
decline; other elements were being introduced. The
Minister of the Interior, though an American, had
ceased connection with the mission to which he was
originally the physician. Mr. Ricord, the AttorneyGeneral, also an American, was a man of unusually
strong and independent mind; retaining a very slight
belief in democracy, and feeling decided tendencies
towards a monarchy, and respect for the advantages of
the British constitution. Indeed he does not hesitate
to say in one of his letters, 'I am a rank Tory in this
matter.'
Mr. Wyllie, the Minister of Foreign Relations, a
Scotch proprietor, who had spent many years in London,
Where he was well known, a man of indefatigable habits,
and who had become a thorough Conservative, formed
the key-stone of the governmental arch. Nor was there
wanting the inductive effect of outer influence; for the
late English Consul had been replaced by a man of much
higher character, William Miller, Esq., whose romantic
valour in the Chilian war of independence rivals that
of Cervantes, and resembles in some points the transatlantic portion of Garibaldi's life. Mr. Miller attained
the rank of General in the Chilian army, and received
the baton of a Field Marshal from Peru.  tie was appointed by the English government their Consul-General
in the Hawaiian Islands, which rank was subsequently
raised to that of English Commissioner. It is added
with regret that news of General Miller's death has been
received a few hours before these lines were written.*
* 1862. The official record of the English Foreign office thus
epitomizes General Miller's life:'WILLIAM MILLER served in the Field Train Department of the Royal




DECLINE OF MISSIONARY INFLUENCE.


2,75


New light was breaking in; the circumstances of the
world at large were changing; the Hawaiian nation, or
rather its King and his sagest advisers, saw that it was
necessary to meet the times. The advance of a true
liberality is observed in reading consecutively the royal
speeches.   Kamehameha, or as the people still call him,
Kauikeaouli the Beloved, showed a sincere devotion to
his people in the disinterested suggestions he made for
the benefit of his subjects, native and foreign, and still
more in what he gave up of ancient privileges and
possessions. From time to time the attention of the
legislative body was called to a reconsideration of particular statutes. In 1850 the King recommends the
two houses to take into their earliest consideration the
decrease of the native population, and to devise means
to stay its progress.  In the same speech he announces
the downfall of the old feudal system. ' In June, 1848,
in concurrence with my chiefs, and with the aid of my
Privy Council, I made a division of lands, upon the
principle of surrendering the greater portion of my
royal domain to my chiefs and people, with a reserve
of certain lands for the support of the fort and garrison
of my capital, and certain other lands as my own private
property, in lieu of the share which I, inheriting the
right of my predecessors, held in all the lands of the
islands. Under that joint-tenure, all lands howsoever
Artillery from January 1, 1811, until the peace of 1815; was present in
several of the sieges and actions in the Peninsular war, and also in
North America. Entered the Buenos Ayres Artillery in 1817; served
in Chili and Peru against the Royalist forces; was raised to the rank
of General of Division, April 8, 1823; during 1824 and 1825 was
under the command of General Bolivar; was appointed Consul-General
in the Sandwich Islands and other islands in the Pacific, August 16,
1843; and Commissioner and Consul-General in the Sandwich Islands
and their dependencies, December 1, 1855. Died October 31, 1861.'
T 2




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


or to whomsoever donated, were revocable at will; no
man's possession, even that of the highest chief, was
secure, and no man thought of improving land, the
possession of which was so uncertain. And for the
further protection of the interests of his poorer subjects,
the King announces that on the 21st of December,
1849, certain resolutions were passed with a view of
giving to the industrious cultivators of the soil an
allodial title to the portions they occupied, and to facilitate the acquisition of land, in fee simple, by others
inclined to be industrious.
To render the people provident, the King recommends the trial of a savings' bank. He also proposes
for the careful consideration of the legislature the project for a criminal code, along with several legal enactments and amendments of laws, of which experience
has demonstrated the necessity.
Such, and similar to these, were the efforts of the
King and his best counsellors to give the islands the
advantage of a good and enlightened system of government.
It resulted, in the process of time, that three commissioners were appointed, who were to prepare jointly
the draft of a new constitution. The King was represented in this commission by Dr. Judd, whose democratic prepossessions having been bred in the bone
remained unabated. The chiefs selected Joane Ii, one
of their own order, though not of high rank. He had
been concerned in the first constitution. The representatives chose Mr. Lee, the Chief Justice, a tenacious,
clear-headed man, born and educated in the United
States, and who had acquired a large measure of influence in the islands. Thus, republican principles were
maintained in the commission in the proportion of two




THE PREMIERSHIP.


277


to one; and even the native representative had but a
small bias towards monarchical institutions.
Under these auspices the constitution of 1852 was
engendered. The draft was submitted to legislature,
and after going through the necessary forms, it was
signed by the King on the 14th of June, 1852, and
became the law of the Hawaiian Islands, vice the
constitution of 1844, dismissed.
With such a democratic preponderance in the commission, we are only surprised that so much of the
monarchical remains in the constitution; and that so
original and strange an institution as the premiership
should have been retained. Kamehameha I. originated
the office, to which he appointed his beloved Kaahumanu. On the death of Kinau the Premier, the idea
was suggested that her infant daughter, Victoria Kinau
Kaahumanu, should in time succeed her mother in the
office nearest the throne. She is sister to the present
King.  During the Princess's minority, the chief John
Young (Keone Ana) acted as her locumn tenens. The
office of premier of the kingdom is a very peculiar one.
Whilst it adds no security to the operations of government, it detracts from the King's dignity. Every
document of State requires to be countersigned by the
Premier, an arrangement often fraught with the highest
inconvenience, and producing annoying delay. A commission or any other document of immediate necessity,
issued by the advice of Privy Council and bearing the
King's sign-manual, is invalid till it receives the Princess's counter-signature; and as the Premier's duties
are not supposed to detain her constantly at the seat of
government, the ill-consequences are sometimes very
serious. Upon a resistance by the Premier to sign a
document, the King has upon more than one occasion




278


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


dismissed the drag upon his wheels, and appointed a
new Premier; then, having obtained the desired countersignature, has restored his sister to her office.
By the last constitution, the Privy Council became a
more pronounced and important adjunct of the State,
whilst the element of representation still remains undefined, and as it were in its nonage. The people chose,
and probably still choose, their representatives, not with
that care and previous inspection with which Mrs.
Primrose chose her wedding-gown, but in an offhand,
al fresco manner. They placed more importance on
the selection of their tax-gatherers and road-inspectors
than they did on the election of their representatives in
parliament, for the operative functions of the former,
the petty officers, touched their purses and personal
well-being the more closely. Questions of irrigation,
and the length of a day's labour, had greater interest to
the country people than higher and more abstract discussions of the senate, though they soared to the divine
right of kings, or the peaceable relations of great foreign
powers.*
Had Mr. Wyllie, the intelligent and indefatigable
Minister of Foreign Affairs, with his stout attachment
to monarchy, been invited to the commission instead
of Dr. Judd, there can be no doubt that more actual
power would have vested in the King.      Whatever may
* Since the above passage was written, a remarkable exception to what
is stated has occurred. The biennial election of representatives took
place in January 1862, and was attended with the greatest excitement;
some acts of violence even, having been committed at the polling-places.
This popular fervour was the effect not so much of an increased value
attributed to the privileges of suffrage, as of religious partisanship
-the Roman Catholic voters pressing forward their candidates with
the utmost earnestness, and, of course, causing thereby as earnest an
opposition.




THE PREMIERSHIP.             279
have been the causes which operated on His Majesty's
choice, his able minister had no direct hand in drafting
the constitution. Yet Mr. Wyllie's weight and influence
with the government were well known; and though not
on board when the ship was launched from the stocks,
a good pilot was at the helm, and was doing all he could
to steer her straight.




so


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


CHAPTER XVIII.
HISTORICAL SKETCH —THE CARYSFORT AFFAIR.
N expression occurred in the King's speech given in
the preceding chapter which must now be explained. It was an expression of thankfulness for an
escape out of troubles, and it spoke of a restoration of
his kingdom.  The circumstances alluded to require
that we should retrace our steps several years.
The happy-and-united-family condition of the commercial community in its early days did not always
continue. As interests grew larger, and the mercantile
class comprised English and European traders as well as
Americans, there were occasional bickerings, jealousies,
lawsuits. The consular appointments had not been
happy. England was represented by Mr. or Captain R.
Charlton, a careless, free-living man, much opposed to
the straight missionary clique, not disliked by the native
population, but deficient in diplomatic knowledge; and
in a small way the trading consuls were obliged to act
in a political capacity and to exert personal influence.
Tile first Commercial Agent, as the Americans style their
consuls, was still more unfit for his office; and so objectionable did he become to the native government, that upon
their earnest remonstrance at Washington, Mr. Jones was
removed, and was replaced by a Mr. Brinsmade, the
senior partner of a house of business at Honolulu, trading




MR. BRINSMADE AND HIS FIRM.


281


under the name of Ladd & Co. Mr. Brinsmade was one
of those rapid, intelligent, all-sided men which the social
hot-bed of the United States produces so quickly and
in such numbers-a man who, if his practice as a surgeon fell off, would turn merchant; if he failed in that,
would become an editor; or meeting with disappointment in the last vocation, would without hesitation climb
the steps of the rostrum as a preacher; and even at a
pinch would offer himself as a candidate for the presidentship. Mr. Brinsmade's manners were not unpleasing; he wrote with point and rapidity, and his pen had
a scabrous edge. The firm of which he was the leading
member was a peculiar one.   Its three constituents
came out from the United States in 1833, to try the
experiment of conducting business on purely Christian
principles,' and of making their firm 'a pattern card of
mercantile morality.' It was thought that the house
received pecuniary assistance from the Boston Board
Missions; * it is certain that the missionary influence in
the islands was strongly exercised in its favour, and the
firm conducted the principal secular affairs of the
Mission. The partners obtained, for an insignificant
consideration, the grant of a long lease of a large tract
of land on the island of Kauai for the establishment of
sugar plantations; it also gained wharfage and warehouse sites in the harbour of Honolulu, together with
valuable privileges in the shape of exemption from
duties, and a supply of native labour. It is humiliating
to think that a house commencing business with an unlimited capital of Christian principles should end in
bankruptcy.
The peace of the happy commercial family had
been disturbed towards the year 1840 by claims and
* A. Simpson, ' Progress of Events.'




282


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


counter claims, arising out of business transactions
between the American and British traders. Such a
case occurred in 1839; and upon submitting the dispute
to arbitration, Brinsmade's house was declared indebted
to an English subject to the extent of 6,0001. Subsequently such claims were decided by juries; but as it
was before the promulgation of the Constitution and the
Code, proceedings were most irregular, and entirely of
an amateur character. In 1840, in consequence of the
refusal of English residents to contribute towards the
construction of a new road, the Governor of Oahu
forcibly caused the native servants of non-contributors
to labour on the work. Complaints were in consequence
made to the English Consul, — the Agent of the Hudson's
Bay Company being one of the complainants. A great
deal of ill-feeling was elicited between the British,
Governor Kekuanaoa, and the Americans who sided with
him. These difficulties arose about some jury cases and
the proportions of English and American empanelled.
A difficulty of this kind was referred to Captain Jenkin
Jones, who with H.B.M.'s ship 'Curacoa' was then in
the harbour; but the English commander's intervention,
if anything, made matters worse than they were before,
and the acrimony which existed between classes was
excessive. The English Consul, whatever good points
he might have possessed, was unfit for his position; he
was hasty in temper, and uncouth in his communications, and had made himself many enemies. In the
meantime the influence of Mr. Brinsmade, the United
States Commercial Agent, over the King and the native
government, was rapidly increasing
Sir George Simpson, the Territorial Governor of
Hudson's Bay, was at the time visiting the islands.
He gave the government the benefit of his advice,




A STAMPEDO.


283


and also made them   a loan of 10,0001. Amongst
other things, Sir George recommended that commissioners should be appointed to proceed to the United
States and Europe, to negotiate for an acknowledgment
of the independence of the islands, and for a guarantee
against their usurpation by any of the great powers.
The commissioners appointed on this errand were the
Rev. W. Richards, the chief Timoteo Haalilio, and Sir
George Simpson. The last-named immediately left for
the North-West Settlements of Russia, and travelling
through Siberia, made his way to London. In July
1842, Mr Richards and Haalilio started for the United
States, via Mazatlan.
There was quite an eastern emigration. Mr. Brinsmade had already taken his departure for Europe, with
designs which will be hereafter explained. He left his
partner, Mr. Hooper, to act in his absence. Lastly,
Mr. Charlton found, or fancied he found, that he was
dwelling in a wasp's nest, and that everybody was against
him. 'Irritated by the numerous insults he had received, and the open disregard by the government
officers of his interference when British subjects were
concerned; thinking also, that it was necessary that the
representations to be made by Richards and Haalilio
and their backers should be met on the spot, he determined to proceed to London, via Mexico.' * He
accordingly took wing from the islands in September
of the same year, leaving as his substitute, Mr. Alexander
Simpson, who had arrived there on business of the
Hudson's Bay Company. Simpson was a relative of
Sir George's, and brother to the discoverer of the same
name, who, with Dease, completed the survey of the
northern coast of America.
* 'Progress of Events.'




284


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


The temper in which the English Consul left Hawaii
will be seen   by the following    letter in which he
announced to the King his intended departure:British Consulate, Woahoo, Sept. 26, 1842.
Sir,
From the insults received from the local authorities of
Your Majesty's government, and from the insults offered to
my Sovereign, Her most Gracious Majesty, Victoria the First,
Queen of the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland,
by Mathew Kekuanaoa, Governor of this island; and for
other weighty causes affecting the interests of Her Majesty's
subjects in these islands, I consider it my bounden duty to
repair immediately to Great Britain to lay statements before
Her Majesty's government, and have therefore appointed, by
commission, as I am fully authorized to do, Alexander Simpson,
Esq., to act as consul until Her Majesty's pleasure be known.
Your Majesty's government has more than once insulted the
British flag, but you must not suppose that it will be passed
over in silence. Justice, though tardy, will reach you; and it
is you, not your advisers, that will be punished.
I have the honour to be Your Majesty's most obedient
humble servant,
RICHARD CHARLTON,
Consul.
His Majesty Kam6ham6ha.
This letter is a specimen of Mr. Charlton's written
communications, and are indicative of his humour when
he left the islands,-never to return.     But he had
another and a very personal cause of disquietude at that
time. A debt incurred to some persons at Valparaiso,
ten years before, was pressed; and the claimants had
commissioned Mr. Pelly, the agent of the Hudson's Bay
Company, to collect it for them. A suit was instituted
against Charlton, and shortly after his departure, a
verdict was given by a jury composed of foreigners,




THE SELF-BANISHED.


285 -

against the English Consul. It was in this mood, and
' all smarting with his wounds,' that he fell in on his
way to England with Lord George Paulet, commanding
H.B.M.'s frigate 'Carysfort.' Into his lordship's ear
he poured the story of wrongs, insults, and expected
dangers.
Of Mr. Charlton himself, we now take leave. He
went to the Foreign Office, and was summarily relieved
from his post by Lord Aberdeen, who disapproved of
his conduct in the islands, and particularly its ill-judged
conclusion.  Nor was his consular representative in
Honolulu, Mr. Simpson, in an agreeable or flattering
position. The King and the government would not
recognize him in his official character; the bickerings
increased; resolutions and counter-resolutions of the
residents were passed, condemnatory, complimentary,
&c., &c. In the meanwhile, though the English flag
drooped listlessly over the consulate, the consular substitute found himself excluded from the official circle,
and in his turn was lashing himself into great anger;
and in consequence of the verdict given against Charlton,
in his Valparaiso matter, the property of the latter was
attached for payment by an order of the Court. The
action of the judicature which had been invoked by the
creditors' agent was stigmatized as an interference, and
was condemned by a meeting of British subjects, On
the other hand, a solemn resolution was come to by
other residents, English and foreign, supporting the
government, deprecating the dangers and difficulties
into which it was being brought by ' machinations and
misrepresentations,' and declaring the conduct of the
Consul and Mr. Simpson to have been ' vexatious, arbitrary, and hostile in the extreme.' So the quarrel was
a very pretty quarrel as it stood.




VS6


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


In November Mr. Simpson addressed a letter to
H.B.M.'s Consul for the Western coast of Mexico, informing him of all the current events. The Consul
indoctrinated with his views Rear-Admiral Thomas,
Commander in Chief on the Pacific station. The English
Admiral believing the persons and property of English
subjects to be in peril, despatched Lord George Paulet
in the ' Carysfort' to enquire into and to redress these
wrongs, and to ward off these dangers. On February 10,
1843, that is, before the sale of Mr. Charlton's property
had been proceeded with, the 'Carysfort' arrived at
Honolulu, and showed by withholding the usual salutes,
that there was displeasure in her visit.
Mr. Simpson, the English Acting Consul, immediately
went on board the frigate, and had an interview with
Lord George, from whom he received letters from
Admiral Thomas. Dr. Judd also went on board, with
the intention of paying an official visit, but the King
being absent at the time on another island, he was not
received. Official visits from the consular representatives
of France and the United States were equally declined;
but mutual unofficial calls and civilities were proceeded
with. On the 11th Captain Paulet addressed a letter
to the Governor of Oahu, stating that his arrival at
Honolulu was for the purpose of affording protection to
British subjects and support to H.B.M.'s representative,
who had received repeated insults, &c., and adding that
it was his intention to communicate only with the King
in person. In reply to this despatch, Governor Kekuanaoa wrote that he would immediately send to Maui
where the King was, and His Majesty might be expected
at Honolulu in six days.
On the 13th, the United States corvette 'Boston,'
Captain Long, arrived. Her commander maintained a




LORD GEORGE PAULET'S DEMANDS.


287


proper neutrality during the proceedings; but her
presence was gladly, and naturally, welcomed by the
American residents. Proper courtesies passed between
Captain Long and Lord George Paulet.
On the 16th, the King having arrived from Maui,
Lord George. wrote, demanding a private interview.
This request having been considered by the King and
his counsellors, the private interview was declined.
The answer to the note stated the readiness of the King
and the Premier to receive a written communication;
and that in case any business of a private nature required
to be transacted, the King would appoint Dr. Judd ' his
confidential agent' to confer with Captain Paulet.
Whether the refusal of the desired interview was the
proper step to have taken, need not be discussed. Lord
George was irritated by it, and wrote the same day,
the 17th, declining to hold any communication with
Dr. Judd, and enclosing a paper of' demands' made on
the native government, to which compliance was demanded at or before four P. r. the following day,Saturday. The paper was entitled, i Demands made by
the Right Hon. Lord George Paulet, Captain, R.N.,
commanding H.B. Majesty's ship " Carysfort," upon the
King of the Sandwich Islands.' The demands were six
in number. The first required, that the attachment on
Charlton's property should be removed; that land
stated to be Charlton's, and which the government had
appropriated, should be restored, and reparation be
made for the heavy loss to which his representatives
had been exposed 'by the oppressive and unjust proceedings of the Sandwich Islands government.' The
second demand related to the rights and dignity of
Mr. Simpson, acting for the English Consul, and to Her
Majesty the Queen, who had been sorely insulted through




'288


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


Mr. Simpson's sides. These blots to be wiped out by a
public reception of the Acting Consul's Commission, and
by a salute of twenty-one guns to the English flag,
which salute should be returned by the 'Carysfort,'
The third demand was for a guarantee that no English
subject should be imprisoned in fetters, unless for
felony. The fourth, that a new trial should be granted
in the matter of Skinner versus Dominis. The fifth
demand related to disputes between British subjects
and natives, proposing that such disputes should be
referred to mixed juries, one half the number empanelled
to be English subjects. The sixth, demanded a direct
communication between the King and the English
Acting Consul 'for the immediate settlement of all
cases of grievance and complaint on the part of British
subjects.against the Sandwich Islands government.
Such were the concessions demanded from the King
and his advisers, for deciding on which demands the
King was allowed till four P.M. the following day. They
were the fruits of Charlton's unfitness and violence, and
the egotism of his substitute.
Lord George notified to the commander of the American corvette his intention to make an attack upon the
town at four o'clock the next day, if the demands sent
to the King were not complied with before that hour.
The Americans and some other foreigners placed their
funds and papers on board the 'Boston,' and prepared
to take refuge there themselves in the event of actual
hostilities.
The first feeling induced by Captain Paulet's communication was that of dismay; the next, of indignation.
The common people, ignorant of the effect of a broadside of 64 and 32 pounders from a frigate of a thousand
tons burden, began to arm. They would get them a




PERSUASION BY BROADSIDES.


289


sword though it were made of lath, against such an
armament as the 'Carysfort's.' The next morning the
frigate was cleared for action, and her battery brought
to bear upon the little fort. An English vessel was
towed out of the harbour, and the ladies and children,
protected by that flag, went on board of her. The
turmoil of natural feelings having had its play for
several hours, the advisers of the King and his chiefs
succeeded in demonstrating the fallacy of a possible
resistance on shore, or an attack, by boarding, on the
frigate. Before the sanguinary hour arrived, peaceful
counsels were allowed to prevail, and a letter, dated the
18th, was sent off to the ' Carysfort,' acknowledging the
receipt of the paper of demands, and making known to
Lord George, that Sir George Simpson and Mr. Richards
had been commissioned as ministers plenipotentiary to
the Court of Great Britain, with full powers to settle
difficulties, and to assure Her Majesty the Queen, of the
uninterrupted affection of the King and the Hawaiian
nation, and to confer with her ministers as to the best
means of securing harmony between the two nations.
The King and Premier, whilst they deprecated some of
the demands sent in as embarrassing to a feeble government and as contravening the laws, yet would comply
with the whole of them under protest, and with the
intention of representing their case to the English
government. The letter was signed by the King and
the Premier Kekauluohi.
This decision, however humiliating, was no doubt the
wisest that could have been come to. Lord George
replied immediately and appointed that an interchange
of salutes should take place at two o'clock the same
day. He also demanded as Her Britannic Majesty's
representative an interview with the King.
U




290


HIAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


Later in the afternoon a formal protest was lodged
against the proceedings of Lord George Paulet, and a
solemn appeal to the English government was entered
for redress, justification, &c.
Monday the 20th, was fixed for the interview. The
same day the King and the Premier visited the ' Carysfort,' and were received with royal honours.  This
interchange of civilities proved, however, most fallacious. The six demands had been acceded to under
great pressure, and any casus belli seemed to have been
removed; but the following day a new series of demands, in the form of claims for money, was sent in,
with some other rather oppressive stipulations attached
to it. There is a well-known fungus, the phallus
impudicus, which grows more rapidly than any vegetable production.  It springs up and attains its full
dimensions in a night, and its expansion can even be
observed by the eye. Yet the growth of this unpleasant cryptogam  did not equal in rapidity or
extent the sudden indebtedness of the Hawaiian government, as noted during a few hours on board the 'Carysfort' frigate. In half a day a mushroom debt of
$117,330, 89 c. (so scrupulously exact were the computers) had pushed itself into being, and been delineated on paper. One item alone may be mentioned
as a finance curiosity. The aid of a naval commanderin-chief had been invoked to prevent the sale of some
effects of Mr. Charlton, attached for debt. That sale
was happily averted by a captain of a frigate leaving a
lucrative station, and threatening an unprotected town
with his guns. But a 'connection of the sufferer' had
put by $10,000 in order to purchase his relative's
property sold under execution; and that sale not taking
place, the intended purchaser found himself endamaged




CONDITIONAL CESSION OF THE ISLANDS.


291


to the extent of $3,000 by the non-transaction. It will
be unnecessary after this, to audit the account of claims
farther.
The new schedule of demands filled the King and his
counsellors with despair.  It would occupy too much
space to describe the agitations, the conferences, the
plans which occupied them for the succeeding four
days. They saw that contention was hopeless, that
concession was only provocative of further demands.
An immediate cession of the islands to France or to the
United States was canvassed. Tie effects which would
follow an attempted resistance were too clear. Interviews and remonstrances were held with Lord George
Paulet and Mr. Simpson; and at last it was decided
to cut the knot of difficulty by ceding the Hawaiian
archipelago to the English government in the person of
Lord George Paulet; not so much handing them over
in part payment of the debt so suddenly developed, as
acting on the wise principle of placing oneself and all
one's valuables in a robber's hands, as the last resource
for personal safety.
The cession was made in the following terms:
In consequence of the difficulties in which we find ourselves
involved, and our opinion of the impossibility of complying with
the demands in the manner in which they are made by Her
Britannic Majesty's representative upon us, in reference to the
claims of British subjects, we do hereby cede the group of
islands known as the Hawaiian (or Sandwich) Islands, unto the
Right Hon. Lord George Paulet, Captain of Her Britannic
Majesty's ship of war ' Carysfort,' representing Her Majesty
Victoria, Queen of Great Britain and Ireland, from this date,
and for the time being: the said cession being made with the
reservation, that it is subject to any arrangement that may
have been entered into by the representatives appointed by us
u 2




292


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


to treat with the Government of Her Britannic Majesty; and
in the event that no agreement has been entered into previous
to the date hereof, subject to the decision of Her Britannic
Majesty's Government on conference with the said representatives appointed by us; or in the event of our representatives
aot being accessible, or not having been acknowledged, subject
to the decision which Her Britannic Majesty may pronounce
on the receipt of full information from us, and from the Right
Hon. Lord George Paulet.
In confirmation of the above we hereby affix our names and
seals this Twenty-fifth day of February, in the year of
our Lord 1843, at Honolulu, Oahu, Sandwich Islands.
Signed in the presence of G. P. Judd, Recorder
and Translator for the Government.
KAMEHAMEHA III.
KEKAULUOI.
Such was the document by which the Gordian knot
was cut. After four days of misery, doubt, and endless
conference, the King felt the natural relief which attends
a decision of any sort. If therefore he shook hands
with Lord George and Mr. Simpson after that decision
was made, and said, 'Now I'm happy, and I go to take
a ride,' it argues no levity or indifference about the
very grave position in which he and his kingdom had
been placed; it speaks only of the rebound from depressing anxieties, the springing up of the heart from
its prison of pain, and the desire to be quit of the
scene of indignity, and to find rest and refreshment in
rapid motion. The same day the cession was signed,
the King issued a patriotic address to the 'chiefs,
people, and commons from his ancestors,' and to 'the
people from foreign lands,' expressing under what
difficulty and perplexities he had given away the 'life




THE INTERREGNUM.


293


of our land' and his hope that it would be restored to
them. Too great weight need not be attached to this
document, because though in the native form of speaking, the pen was probably guided by Dr. Judd and his
associates.
Provision was immediately made for carrying on the
'government of the islands conjointly by the King and
chiefs, and a commission consisting, in addition, of Lord
George Paulet, Mr. Frere, a lieutenant on board the
' Carysfort,' and a gentleman then visiting the islands,
named Mackay.     The Hawaiian flag was hauled
down, as the deed of cession was read in the square
of the fort, and the British colours were hoisted in
its place; and at the same time the flag that waved
over the English consulate was struck, Mr. Simpson's
functions being at an end. It is worthy of remark that
the day when these transactions, so melancholy and
humiliating to the Hawaiian nation, took place, the
25th of February, was the forty-ninth anniversary of
the cession of the islands made to Vancouver.
The British flag was hoisted on all the islands, but
the people chafed under the new rule. The French
Consul refused to acknowledge the new government, and
his official functions were suspended; an additional duty
was levied on imports, and certain restrictions upon
vice having been abrogated, the old days seemed to
have returned, prostitution walked open and shameless
in the city, and women went off to the ships in the
harbour without restraint.  It is complained in the
history of that time, that the King and his chiefs were
repeatedly insulted, and that efforts were made to seize
on the national treasury and records.
On the 11th of March Mr. Simpson left Honolulu for
London, with despatches from Lord George Paulet to




294


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


the Foreign Office. The King and his chiefs wishing
to be represented there, Mr. Marshall, an American
subject, was secretly instructed, and travelled in the
same vessel, one belonging to the King, to Mexico, with
the exacting English Consul, and thence to the United
States-but without making known the object of his
journey.
At the end of June, Dr. Judd, who had previously
withdrawn from his office under the new government,
of King's deputy, removed the national records secretly
from the government house, to the tomb of the Kings.
Thither he retired, himself, to work; and ' in this abode
of death, surrounded by the sovereigns of Hawaii, using
the coffin of Kaahumanu for a table, for many weeks
he nightly found an unsuspected asylum for his own
labours in behalf of the kingdom.' In reading this
passage we seem to have wandered back to the neighbourhood of Damascus, and to be engaged with the age
of the Khalifat of Haroun Er Raschid and his trusty
Vizier. We feel glad that some energy and even romance
still remain in these pigmy times of ours.
On the 6th of July, the U.S. ship 'Constellation,'
Commodore Kearney, arrived at Honolulu, and protested against the ' seizure' of the islands, and he treated
the King and chiefs on all occasions as independent
princes. Lord George Paulet having written remonstrances to the King, the latter came from Maui, to
communicate with Commodore Kearney.     Captain
Paulet was irritated by this proceeding, and things
began to look badly, when on the 26th of the month,
the 'Dublin' frigate bearing Rear Admiral Thomas's
pennant, arrived off Honolulu. He had received letters
from Lord George, and had left Valparaiso in consequence. He immediately made known his intention of




RESTORATION OF THE ISLANDS.


295


restoring the islands to their natural governors. The
joyful news quickly spread among the people. On the
27th, the Admiral in an interview with the King agreed
to the terms of restoration; and although stipulations
were contained in these, very favourable to English
interests, and likely to occasion some embarrassments
to the native government in executing them, yet the
inconveniences were as nothing in the scale weighed
against the great and unexpected benefit conferred in
giving back 'the life of the land.' On the 31st, the
restoration was publicly made, amidst acclamations and
joy. Eastward of the city lies an extensive plain, which
was chosen for the scene of this conspicuous act of
justice. Thither poured the population of Honolulu
early in the day, under a cloudless and smiling sky. At
ten in the morning, the English marines being drawn
up in line, supported by a corps of artillery, the King,
escorted by his own troops, arrived on the ground. As
the royal standard was unfurled, the brass guns of the
' Dublin's' corps fired a salute, and simultaneously the
English colours were lowered at the forts, and the
Hawaiian flag rushed up and fluttered joyfully in the
morning breeze. Then spoke out their salutations, the
guns of the ships of war ' Dublin,' 'Hazard,' 'Carysfort,'
and ' Constellation,' together with those of the two forts
and the shipping in the harbour. If explosions of
powder can make men glad, the Hawaiians were glad
that day. The military having been reviewed, the King
returned to his house, where the native troops raised
by Lord George Paulet, saluted the King's flag, and
swore fealty to their sovereign. The officers who had
received British commissions kissed the King's hand.
At one, there was divine service at church, and then the
King in the sacred edifice addressed his people, and told




296


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


them how   the life of the land' had been restored to
him. His would be no cold words. The unrealities of
older civilized states had not yet taught the Polynesians
to listen to official eloquence with unbelieving calmness
and a condescending 'hear hear,' in its due place.
Kamehameha III. had serious faults of character, but
he loved his people and his land with a warm, true, and
devoted love, and the words which he uttered that day
were genuine and deeply felt both by the speaker, and
his breathless auditory. The King's speech was followed
by a spirited address from one of the chiefs, who announced, in his sovereign's name, a general amnesty,
the release of all prisoners, and a festival of ten days.
During that period of carnival, balls and entertainments
were given by the residents of Honolulu, in which native
chiefs, and the officers of the numerous men-of-war in
port, met in friendly intercourse; and before the festival
days were over, the U.S. ships ' United States' and
'Cyane' arrived, bringing with them news which increased the general joy, that the independence of the
Hawaiian Islands had been recognized by England and
France. As a final act to that eventful rejoicing, an
endeavour was made to take advantage of it to reconcile
all conflicting parties in the kingdom.
It is a peculiarity with the Hawaiians, that in all the
events in which our own country has been concerned
with them, they look to England with gratitude and
love. They have had to bear from us at times some
wrongs, and some of the arrogance of a superior people.
But they possess the happy temperament of being able
to forget a wound given, and bless the hand —the same
which stabbed-that binds up the wound. Thankfulness for the restoration of their country immediately
succeeded and supplanted any feelings of resentment;




NATIONAL GRATITUDE.


297


and among the most honoured names in the roll of their
remembrance, stands that of the late Admiral Thomas.
Lord George Paulet was a courteous but firm Englishman, who carried out with an unhesitating decision the
duty which seemed to lie before him. Towards him
the people did not seem to cherish any anger, and their
joy at the restoration of their islands has taken the
form of a perennial gratitude to the English officer who
was the instrument of that act of justice. Admiral
Thomas's day is one of three yearly celebrations kept at
Hawaii, and on that day the most distant consular
agents of the kingdom are required to hoist the national
flag. This grateful feeling follows him beyond the
grave, and seeks to express itself to his descendants.
There is an unusual simplicity in all this, very startling
in our days of complex motives and restrained sentiments.  We scarcely know whether to smile or to blush
at the lesson afforded us, and we are inclined to repeat
the words of the great reflective poet:I've heard of hearts unkind, kind deeds
With coldness still returning;Als! the gratitude of men
Hath oftener left me mourning.




29D8


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


CHAPTER XIX.
HISTORICAL SKETCH-THE ENVOYS EXTRAORDINARYTHE BELGIAN CONTRACT.
THE scene now shifts to Europe, whither the principal
actors in our history have simultaneously betaken
themselves. Thither has gone, burning with anger, the
English Consul, Mr. Charlton,-to be finally extinguished.  There, too, has gone Mr. Brinsmade, the
United States Consul, upon important business to be
mentioned hereafter, about which he laboured long and
with the most perfect unsuccess. Thither have gone,
though by different routes, the ministers plenipotentiary
and envoys extraordinary, viz., Sir George Simpson,
Governor of Hudson's Bay,via Siberia,and Mr. Richards,
the ex-missionary, and Haalilio, a chief of inferior rank,
and late secretary to the King,via United States. Thither
also has gone Mr. A. Simpson, late acting English
consul; to carry news to the English government of the
cession of the islands, and to find his news already
known, and himself as coldly received as the messenger
who brought the tidings of Saul's death to David. Lastly,
thither had gone Mr. J. F. B. Marshall, charged with
secret instructions from the King, to act as a corrective
to Mr. Simpson in England, the latter travelling with
him in perfect innocence of his mission,-as quietly




OLD FACES UNDER NEW SKIES.


199


as the acid and the alkaline powders rest side by side in
a seidlitz-powder box, though so antagonistic in their
nature, and so ready to fizz when finally brought into
contact. Simpson was doomed 'to find, too late, that
men betray,'-particularly American citizens. He says
in his pamphletA Mr. Marshall, an American shopkeeper at the islands,
by a ruse de guerre of Judd and the American consul, got a
passage in the schooner sent to convey me to Western Mexico.
He spread abroad the news as he passed through the Stateswhere it excited intense attention; and on his arrival in
England, entered, in conjunction with Richards and Haalilio,
into communication with the Foreign Office.
The first business of Richards and Haalilio was at
Washington.   There, after some negotiation, though
no declaration of independence was at that time obtained, the President, in a message to Congress on the
31st December, 1842, used language respecting the
Hawaiian Islands which was considerate enough, and
coupled with the appointment of a commissioner to
reside at the court of Hawaii, was taken to be tantamount to a formal recognition. The commissioner
despatched to Honolulu was Mr. George Brown. The
envoys arrived in London in February 1843, and being
joined by Sir George Simpson, had an interview with
the Earl of Aberdeen, who was at first unfavourable to
the idea of formally recognising the independence of
the islands, believing them to be too greatly under
American influence. On the 8th of March the envoys
went to Belgium, on their way to Paris. They saw
King Leopold, who pledged his influence to aid the
object of their mission. On the 17th they had an interview with M. Guizot, who received them with marked
courtesy, and promptly gave a pledge to acknowledge




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


the independence of the islands. The different impression made on the observant native chief Haalilio by the
two diplomatists is striking and amusing. 'When we
went to Lord Aberdeen,' he said, 'he was very grave and
angry-looking; but he gave us all we wanted: when
we went to Monsieur Guizot, he was very polite and
friendly, but would give us no satisfaction.'
Returning to London, the commissioners received, on
the 25th of February, in an interview with Lord Aberdeen, the assurance that the independence of the islands
would be virtually or really acknowledged, and that
Mr. Charlton would be removed; and on the 1st of
April his lordship formally communicated to them the
willingness of the English government, and its determination, to recognise the independence of the Sandwich
Islands under their present sovereign; adding that Her
Majesty's government desired no special favour or immunity for British subjects, but on the contrary wished
to see all foreigners residing in the Sandwich Islands
treated on a footing of perfect equality before the law,
and equal protection afforded by the government to all.
Shortly after this satisfactory decision of the English
government, the news was received of the provisional
cession of the group to Lord George Paulet. The same
intelligence had already been made known in the United
States by Mr. Marshall,' where,' says Mr. Jarves, ' added
to other causes tending to influence the national mind
against England, it created a prodigious excitement.'
The newspapers wrote sensation articles upon English
rapacity, and stump-orators worked up the English
captain's act into excellent political capital.
On the 13th of June Messieurs Haalilio and Richards
were informed that the English government had no
desire to retain possession of the Sandwich Islands;




INDEPENDENCE OF THE ISLANDS RECOGNISED.  301


and this decision was communicated to Paris and to
Washington.     At the latter place, our minister informed
the President that the seizure 'was an act entirely unauthorized by Her Majesty's government;' and             Mr.
Fox explained, at the same time, that his government
had during the past year instructed the English Consul
and the naval officers on the Pacific station to treat the
native rulers of the Sandwich Islands upon all occasions
with forbearance and courtesy, and to avoid interfering
harshly or unnecessarily with their laws and government. He disclaimed on the part of England any
desire to make the Hawaiians feel their dependence on
foreign powers, or to establish for itself any paramount
influence in the islands at the expense of that enjoyed
by other foreign powers.      All that was sought was that
other powers should not exercise, there, a greater
influence than that possessed by Great Britain.*
* The following letter from Lord Canning to the late Lord Herbert,
has been communicated to me by Mr. J. Pinhorn, R.N., secretary to
Admiral Thomas, Commander-in-chief of H.B.M.'s Naval Forces in the
Pacific:
'Foreign Office, June 13, 1844.
'Sir,
'I am directed by the Earl of Aberdeen to acknowledge the receipt of your letter of the 7th instant, enclosing copies of Rear-Admiral
Thomas's correspondence with the Admiralty, dated the 17th of February,
from the Sandwich Islands; and I am to request that you will state to
the Lords Commissioners of the Admiralty, that Her Majesty's Government have received with the highest satisfaction, the whole of Admiral
Thomas's proceedings at the Sandwich Islands, as marked by great propriety and admirable judgment throughout, and as calculated to raise
the character of the British authorities for justice, moderation, and
courtesy of demeanour, in the estimation of the natives of those remote
countries, and of the world.
'I am, &c.,
(Signed)   'CANNING.
'To the
' Rt. Hon. Sidney Herbert, M.P.,
' Secretary, Admiralty.'




302


1IAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


Subsequently, the claims made against the Hawaiian
government for money compensation, contained in
Lord George Paulet's second paper of demands, were
gone into at the Foreign Office, and were equitably
disposed of. A claim by the envoys for indemnification
to the Hawaiian government for damnification by the
acts of Lord George was disallowed, on the ground of
the spontaneity of the cession made by the King. On
the 28th of November the English and French governments united in a joint declaration of the independence
of the Hawaiian kingdom, in the following terms:Her Majesty the Queen of the United Kingdom of Great
Britain and Ireland, and His Majesty the King of the French,
taking into consideration the existence in the Sandwich Islands
of a government capable of providing for the regularity of its
relations with foreign nations, have thought it right to engage
reciprocally to consider the Sandwich Islands as an Independent State, and never to take possession, either directly or
under the title of Protectorate, or under any other form, of
any part of the territory of which they are composed.
The undersigned, Her Majesty's Principal Secretary of State
for Foreign Affairs, and the Ambassador Extraordinary of His
Majesty the King of the French at the Court of London, being
furnished with the necessary powers, hereby declare, in consequence, that their Majesties take reciprocally that engagement.
In witness whereof the undersigned have signed the present
declaration, and have affixed thereto the seal of their arms.
Done in duplicate, at London, the 28th day of November, in
the year of our Lord 1843.
(Signed)    ABERDEEN (L.S.)
ST. AULAIRE (L.S.)
Thus, the Hawaiian kingdom was admitted into the
brotherhood of civilised nations. The following spring
the envoys returned to the United States, and on the




INDEPENDENCE OF THE ISLANDS RECOGNISED.  303


6th of July, 1844, they received from Mr. Calhoun,
then Secretary of State, a 'full recognition, on the
part of the United States, of the independence of the
Hawaiian government.'
Their mission successfully fulfilled, the two commissioners sailed from Boston for Honolulu. Mr. Richards
reached the islands alone, his coadjutor Haalilio having
died at sea on the 3rd of December.* In February
1844 Consul-General Miller arrived at his post. He
brought with him  a convention drawn up in London,
requiring the admission of ardent spirits into the
islands, the limitation of duties to five per cent. ad
valorem, and some regulations about juries in criminal
cases in which foreigners were concerned. As these conditions were a restriction on the King's prerogatives, he
gave a very unwilling assent to them. In March the
same year, Mr. Ricord was appointed Attorney-General
to the kingdom; and the year following, Mr. Wyllie, a
friend of the late General Miller's, and who during a
visit to the Hawaiian Islands had become favourably
known to the King, chiefs, and the foreigners resident
at Honolulu, was invited by His Majesty to fill the
post of Minister of Foreign Relations. The appointment was one which would tend to upset the theory of
Mr. Alexander Bain; as here, undoubtedly, the right
man was put into the right place, contrary to that
writer's experience. For twenty years Mr. Wyllie devoted his energies and the powers of an enlightened
understanding to the service of the King and the nation
he adopted-for all government officers are required
to become naturalised Hawaiians. Would that he had
* In my own short personal intercourse with this chief, I was struck
by his intelligence and the gentleness of his manner.




304


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


lived longer, to aid the nation in its councils and to
promote its prosperity!
M. Dudoit had been appointed Consul for France,
and his respectful conduct towards the King and his
government, and his tact in the management of his
office, won for him the friendship and esteem of all
classes. The Roman Catholic clergy ceased to complain, ' and formally professed themselves gratified with
the entire toleration of religious beliefs that prevailed,
and the perfect impartiality of government. This was
high praise from the priests of Rome to a Protestant
government.' * In July 1844 Mr. James Jackson Jarves,
an American citizen, was appointed director of the
government Press, and editor of the 'Polynesian,' the
organ of government. The office was held by this
gentleman for about two years, and the power of access
it gave him to national archives and to public men,
greatly enabled him to collect materials for additions
to his very able and diligent history of the Hawaiian
Islands first published in 1843, in a third edition dated
Honolulu 1847, and to which the present volume is
largely indebted.
We have once more to return to Europe, where one
of our dramatis personce is wandering. This is Mr.
Brinsmade, the American commercial agent or Consul
already mentioned. The house of Ladd and Co., of
which he was a partner, had obtained concessions and
privileges in the islands of considerable value. It has
been mentioned that when they commenced business
they put out the platform that their firm was to be
'a pattern card of mercantile morality' and was to be
conducted on 'purely religious principles.' They had
the support, accordingly, of the missionary party, and
* Jarves' History.




BIP1NSAIADE'S PRIVATE POLITICS.


had great advantages with a government which was in a
highly missionarized state; but in spite of advantages,
concessions, and immunities, the house gradually became
insolvent, and in the year 1845 it was indebted to the
government $21,000, and to other creditors $140,000.
The state of its affairs being critical in 1841, though its
position was at that time unknown, except probably by
one member of government, Mr. Brinsmade started for
Europe, carrying with him blank powers for the sale of
land, and an extensive contract for grants and leases
under certain conditions entered into by the King with
the house of Ladd and Co. Brinsmade's object was to
sell their private privileges and grants, under a proposal for getting up a great joint-stock company in
Europe, of which humanity and brotherly kindness were
still to be polar stars, and the main object of which was
to be ' the development of the resources of the islands.'
The development of the resources of India by our own
nation has shown that, in the process, it may happen
that the country being developed passes into the
possession of those most anxious for its good and its
prosperity; and the same danger threatened the Hawaiian kingdom during the progress of ' The Belgian
Contract.' For these islands, from their weakness, their
loneliness of situation, and their desirableness, have
been for many years past in the condition of the flyingfish, which springs out of the wave to avoid a shark,
and then back into the water to escape from an
albatross. An escapement has ever been an important
part of the Hawaiian movement. Happily for the independence of the islands Mr. Brinsmade was bound at
the outset with a provision that ' unless the governments
of Great Britain, France, -nd the United States
acknowledge the sovereignty of the Sandwich Islands
x




306


HtAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


government, and accord to it all the rights, powers, and
privileges and immunities of an independent State,' the
contract of which he was bearer was to be null and
void. Thus philanthropic feelings, which might have
sold up the independence of the islands to a foreign
nation in order to develope their resources, were kept
in check by political engagements, and one of the most
complete and minutely organised schemes ever put on
paper happily fell to the ground.
Haalilio and Mr. Richards, whose primary mission
was to obtain a declaration of independence, were
concerned also in this great trading scheme.  The
latter bore with him the most plenary power of attorney
from the King, giving him permission to sign for His
Majesty, and affix the seal of State, with which he was
intrusted. He could also 'revoke, reclaim, nullify, and
render void any and every power and document heretofore given under the King's hand,' &c. &c. In fact,
the man who began life as a peripatetic trader in the
United States, who had continued it as a missionary
in the Pacific, and had passed through the stages of
legislator and minister, was now, in Europe, carrying
about with him the powers of a Pope, and had in his
trowsers pocket the fate of a kingdom.
The scheme embodied in the Belgian contract was
unquestionably the work of a man of genius. Brinsmade had energy and talent, and in the support he had
afforded the native government in 1837, by his forcible
writing on the subject of the Roman Catholic priests,
he had deserved and won its gratitude. His scheme,
too, was very plausible; for though its effect would
have been to have bound the Hawaiian government
hand and foot, and to have conveyed away the fee
simple of the islands piecemeal to foreigners, the




A JOINT-STOCK COMPANY-UJNLIMITED.


words 'civilisation' and 'independence' were never
forgotten or omitted in documents, or in speaking.*
The contract was drawn up in Brussels, and bore
date the 17th of May, 1843. It contained three chapters, subdivided into thirty-three articles; and the
'Statutes of the Royal Community of the Sandwich
Islands' were conceived in fifty-three articles; the whole
being formalized in the strictest notarial manner. The
foundation of the matter was the concession to the house
of Ladd and Co. in 1841. It was really a gigantic sale
of Ladd and Co.'s property, involving all concessions
and privileges obtained by them, the price for which,
taken in the contract, was $1,067,000, or 42,6801.
The manner of proceeding was, the transfer by Brinsmade of all property material and immaterial which he
had power to pass, together with rights and concessions
over which Mr. Richards had power, to the Belgian
Company of Colonization. The contract or treaty was
tripartite, the three parties to it being the King of
Hawaii, represented by Haalilio and Richards; the house
of Ladd and Co., acting by Brinsmade; and the Belgian
Company of Colonization, by its deputies, the Count of
Hompesch and M. Joseph Vanderburghen de Binckum.
The Colonization Company was only instrumental in
this transaction. Its office was to organize the ' Royal
Community of the Sandwich Islands,' and to transfer to
that society, when formed, the property, rights, and
titles which it was to possess. The community was,
however, on its European side, to remain under 'the
patronage and high administration of the Belgian
* I have a vivid recollection, in Mr. Brinsmade's intercourse with
myself upon this and other subjects connected with the islands, how
fluently such phrases as 'the development of the resources of the
islands' always glided from his lips.
x2




308


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


Company of Colonization; whilst in the scene of its activity, it would be under the patronage and protection of
the Hawaiian king. Four interests were to be created
in the undertaking, namely, the King of Hawaii; the
Belgian Colonization Company; the Labourers and
Employes; and the Stockholders. The King was to be a
partner, Mr. Richards to be president. Its objects were,
beyond relieving Ladd and Co. of their real and doubtful
possessions at an enormous price, to create an emigration
to the Sandwich Islands from Europe, and, in the lubricated language of the 9th article of the contract, 'to
develope as promptly as possible the civilization and
resources of the Sandwich Islands, by creating agricultural, manufacturing, and commercial establishments,
and by instituting commercial relations between these
islands and Belgium.' To carry out such desirable
objects, a capital was to be raised, of which the first
subscription was to consist of 4,000 shares of 1,000 francs
each, or 4,000,000 francs. The property acquired by
the Belgian Colonization Company was to be divided
into 500 titles, 100 of which were to be given to the
King of Hawaii, so that His Majesty would still possess
a share of his own country. By the 28th article, 'all
persons, of whatever profession in the service of the
community, and introduced into the islands under the
auspices of the community, with the approbation of the
King of the Sandwich Islands, shall receive in fee simple
twenty hectares of land.' By the 27th article, 100 titles
were set apart to support schools for the children of the
labourers, a health establishment, an orphanage, and
pensions for impotent and superannuated employes. It
would be tedious to enter into further details of the
complicated machinery of the design; the effect of
which, had it actually become operative, would have




EPITOME OF THE BELGIAN CONTRACT. 


309


been to have destroyed the independence of the islands
and to have gradually vested all property in them in
the proprietary of the Belgian Company.
Fortunately for the people of Hawaii, this new South
Sea scheme never went into operation. The first blow
which fell on its promoters was the news of Lord George
Paulet's occupation of the islands; then came the
corroding tooth of delay, and after dragging on till
October 1844, a new suggestion was made by some
merchants in Ghent, to reconstruct the plan ' as a purely
commercial company.' Nothing, however, came of the
last proposition; and even Brinsmade's energetic nature
began to feel the depressing influences of the failure of
magnificent plans, which at one time seemed so nearly
arrived at fruition. Mr. Richards now withdrew from
all connection with the futile monopoly, having previously left Europe for America; but before leaving, he
and Haalilio, as the King's commissioners, had given
their consent to the sale and contract, but the latter did
so with great reluctance. Brinsmade then turned his
thoughts, as he did his steps, towards London, where
he stayed some time, endeavouring to enlist the aid of
Sir George Simpson in getting up a joint-stock company; but plans and arguments had now assumed too
dream-like a character, and Sir George wisely declined
taking any active part in the matter. Lastly, the very
means of living and moving in Europe dried up, and
the sanguine, intelligent schemer, vanishes from our
continent.  So ended the immediate danger to the
independence of the islands; but not to after-troubles
arising out of the ruined hopes and house of Ladd and
Co., in Honolulu. The firm was insolvent: the government had afforded it assistance to the extent of its power,
with the endeavour to uphold its credit and existence,




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


as it was still a tradition or a superstition, that in some
way Ladd and Co. were pillars of church and state, and
that on them, as on a foundation stone, rested the
religion, honour, civilization of Hawaii, and, of course,
the development of her national resources. Notwithstanding that one partner, Brinsmade, had been dealing
with and signing away to the contractors all the property
the house possessed in the islands, the partners out
there mortgaged it largely to creditors. In November
1844, at the time of Brinsmade's expiring efforts in
England, the Hawaiian government, consulting, however, the ruined firm, levied on the property of Ladd
and Co.: their store was closed by the sheriff, and their
stock, leases, &c., were sold for the benefit of their
judgment creditors. From these proceedings originated
tedious law-suits, mixed with threats and bluster from
one of the partners of the house. The government had
made large advances, and now a claim was set up
against it for the sum of $378,000 for alleged illegal
acts done by it in the matter of the sale, and in preventing the completion of the Belgian contract. Mr.
Brinsmade having returned to the islands in 1846, the
King consented that the claim set up against his
government should be referred to the arbitration of two
American residents, and in case of their disagreement,
to the decision of Commodore Stockton, commanding
the U.S. naval force in the Pacific, and who was expected to arrive shortly at Honolulu: failing him, the
chief justice of the state of New York to be final
umpire. The United States government had sent as
their commissioner to the islands, Mr. Anthony Ten
Eyck, an experienced lawyer, and he acted as counsel
for Ladd and Co. in the arbitration, Mr. Ricord appearing for the King. Examination of witnesses, books,




PROTRACTED LITIGATION.


311


&c., consumed many months, and government gave its
opponents free access to the archives of the kingdom for
all documents and information they required to support
their case. Seven hundred printed pages of record
were adduced. An attempt was made to compromise
the matter, but was unsuccessful. The government was
willing to cause the protracted strife to cease, and would
have accepted terms by which Ladd and Co.'s property
and liabilities should have been assumed by government, and thereby a dividend be secured to all the creditors; but so much acrimonious feeling, personal and
political, had been imported into the proceedings as
shut the door to amicable arrangement, and occasionally
led to great loss of temper in the counsel on both sides,
during their contention before the Arbitrators' Court.
The suit continued till the end of the year 1846, and
was pursued with much bitterness against the government. And amongst the other items of claim, a demand was set up by Ladd and Co. against Mr. Jarves,
editor of the 'Polynesian,' for $50,000 for injury done
to the character of Mr. Brinsmade by some short remarks in the government newspaper, and which Mr.
Brinsmade called libellous. On the 29th of December,
the French consul, M. Dudoit, offered his mediation in
an endeavour to terminate this protracted suit amicably,
and the offer was accepted by both the weary litigants:
the attempted arrangement, however, fell through, and
the unsettled questions are hybernating, probably to
bud and burgeon again at some future season.




312


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


CHAPTER XX.
HISTORICAL SKETCH —THE TREATIES OF COMMERCE AND
FRIENDSHIP-AND CONSEQUENT HOSTILITIES.
SEVERAL treaties have been negotiated between the
Hawaiian and foreign governments.
The first agreement in order of time, approaching at
all to a treaty obligation, was made on the 23rd of
December, 1826, by Captain Ap Catesby Jones, on
behalf of the United States of America, on the occasion
of his interference in settling some claims made by
American citizens upon the Hawaiian government.
Captain Jones endeavoured to provide some available
means for settling any future differences, and to prevent
their recurrence.
The next written document of the kind was a short
treaty effected by Captain Lord Edward Russell, on the
16th of November, 1836, when engaged in arranging
some old disputes between his countrymen and the
native authorities. His intention was to avoid future
disputes, and to promote amity between the subjects of
the two nations.
In 1837, Captain Du Petit Thouars negotiated the
treaty of 'perpetual peace and amity' already given in
an earlier part of this volume. It introduced the ' most




EARLY TREATIES.


313


favoured nation clause,' but did not allude specifically
to brandy or bishops.
The two latter subjects were sufficiently considered
in the treaty which Captain Laplace procured in July
1839. Having established a position for the Roman
Catholic clergy, the two following articles were framed.
Art. IV. No Frenchman accused of any crime whatever
shall be judged otherwise than by a jury composed of foreign
residents proposed by the Consul of France and accepted by
the government of the Sandwich Islands.
Art. VI. French merchandize, or merchandize known to
be of French origin, and especially wines and brandies, shall
not be prohibited, nor pay a higher duty than 5 per cent. ad
valorem.
The government in giving its constrained consent to
these oppressive clauses, fully saw the infringement of
its prerogative, but it saw at the same time its own
helplessness.
Great Britain having in 1844 restored the islands,
which had 'been conditionally ceded to this country
through Lord George Paulet, appointed a ConsulGeneral to reside at the Hawaiian court, and offered a
treaty in which the two objectionable articles of Laplace's treaty were copied and had a place. Efforts
were immediately made to obtain from the governments
of England and France, treaties that should be more
just, equal, and reciprocal. The two European governments having by their joint declaration secured the
independence of the Hawaiian kingdom, concerted
together new identical treaties, and they were executed
in Honolulu on the 26th of March, 1846. They each
contained eight articles. The preamble of both states,
-mutatis mutandis —that 'It being desirable that a
general convention should be substituted for the various




314


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


instruments of mutual agreement at present existing
between Great Britain and the Sandwich Islands, the
following articles have for that purpose and to that
intent been mutually agreed upon and signed,' &c. &c.
The first article propounds perpetual peace and amity
between the reciprocating nations. The third article
provides for English subjects accused of any crime
whatever: (the French treaty here makes an important
variation,-' d'un crime ou delit quelconque'). 'They
are to be judged by a jury composed of native or foreign
residents, proposed by the Consul of their country, and
accepted by the government of the Sandwich Islands.'
This stipulation was an advance on the Laplace article
in reference to French subjects.
It was the sixth article which proved the cradle of
troubles that lasted as long as the siege of Troy, which
led to a French invasion, and which have not been
entirely disposed of to this day.  It reads thus:Goods of France, or those which are recognised as coming
from French possessions, shall not be prohibited or subjected
to an import duty higher than 5 per cent. ad valorem.
Wines, brandies, and spirituous liquors are excepted, and shall
be liable to any reasonable duty that the government of the
Sandwich Islands considers it fit to impose; but on condition
that such duty shall never be so high as to become an absolute
prevention to the importation of the said articles.
The clause from the French treaty is here substituted
for the corresponding English article, because the small
imports from France have consisted almost entirely of
wines and spirits, whilst England is indifferent about
this kind of merchandize.
The identical treaties were ratified by Queen Victoria
on the 8th of October, 1846, and by King Louis Philippe
on the 18th of November, the same year.




ENGLISH, FRENCH, AND DANISH TREATIES.


315


In the autumn of 1846 the Danish frigate ' Galathea,'
commanded by Captain Steen Bille, in circumnavigating
the globe, under large powers from his government,
called at the Sandwich Islands. Having during some
weeks' stay there informed himself of their condition,
Captain Steen Bille offered an honourable and beneficial
treaty. This was the first perfectly satisfactory conpact entered into by a foreign nation with the Hawaiian
kingdom: and whilst it contained all necessary stipulations for a free and advantageous intercourse, it did not
trammel the island government with oppressive clauses
or ambiguous expressions which an ambidexter might
afterwards turn to any use he desired. The Hawaiian
government have always regarded this treaty with
pleasure and gratitude, as the initial and model of other
equitable mutual obligations.
The Danish treaty was first followed by a treaty in
almost identical words with the free Hanseatic city of
Hamburg, dated the 8th of January, 1848.
In August 1851, a similar treaty was negotiated with
the free Hanseatic city of Bremen.
Previous in time to the last treaty, the long-desired
convention with the United States was carried out. It
is styled ' a treaty of friendship, commerce, and navigation;' and after a preamble profuse in expressions of
mutual admiration and love, it agrees upon seventeen
articles, stated in the most ample language, affording a
strong contrast to the treaties hitherto mentioned. It
is dated, Washington, the 20th of December, 1849; and
ratifications were exchanged in Honolulu, dated the
24th of August, 1850.
On General Miller's appointment as British ConsulGeneral, in 1843, he brought with him to Hawaii the
draft of a treaty, known as that of Lahaina. In 1851,




316


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


another treaty, drafted in London, was sent to him, very
similar to that concluded by the United States. It
provides for the mutual reception of national ships of
war in all harbours, rivers, and places; restricts import
and export duties to the level of the most favoured
nation; and provides that the diplomatic agents and
consuls of the Hawaiian Islands in the dominions of Her
Britannic Majesty shall enjoy whatever privileges, exemptions, and immunities, are or shall be granted there
to agentsof the same rank belonging to the most favoured
nation; with similar enjoyments to the diplomatic and
consular agents of Great Britain in the Hawaiian Islands.
This treaty is signed on the 10th of July, 1851, and
ratifications exchanged on the 6th of May, 1852.
On the 1st of July, 1852, another treaty on the same
model was signed in Honolulu, by Captain Virgin,
on behalf of ' the King of Sweden and Norway and of
the G(oths and Vandals.' It was ratified on the 5th of
April, 1855. The only alteration of importance in this
compact was in the 15th article, in which it is agreed
thatAll vessels bearing the flag of Sweden or of Norway in time
of war shall receive every possible protection short of actual
hostility (sic) within the ports and waters of His Majesty the
King of the Hawaiian Islands; and His Majesty the King of
Sweden and Norway engages to respect in time of war the
neutral rights of the Hawaiian kingdom, and to use his good
offices with all other powers having treaties with His Majesty
the King of the Hawaiian Islands, to induce them to adopt the
same policy towards the Hawaiian kingdom.
It is easily seen how greatly to the advantage of the
smaller kingdom the foregoing clause was.
Between the signing of the Swedish treaty and the
new treaty with France, which bears date the 29th of




FRENCII GRIEVANCES.


317


October, 1857, a train of circumstances occurred which
it will now be our duty to unravel and give some
account of. They are painful and humiliating. A
great and powerful nation, set in motion by and acting
through its distant agents, bringing its force to bear on
a small and defenceless people who in its hands are
but as the mouse which a cat dailies with before giving
it a coup de grace with its claw, is not a spectacle to
be proud of. To know that private feuds and jealousies,
private follies and imaginary grievances among governmental and diplomatic officials, led the way to years of
real trouble and crises of actual danger to the country
in which they occurred, converts the reader's smile of
amusement into a frown of impatience and anger. Yet
all this was the case.  France invaded the territory
and the capital of a friendly nation, to vindicate national honour and to protect national interests, when
all the while the wrong was to the wounded feelings of
her consular agent; and the interests at stake were
some difference in rent upon a house the Consul hired
near the city. Here was the real Briseis in the Hawaiian
Iliad —hence the gloomy estrangement of the FrancoHibernian Achilles in Polynesia.
It began to be rumoured that the French treaty was
not working well; that France was dissatisfied; and that
that great nation felt itself oppressed beyond the powers
of endurance by certain clauses of the treaty. First
there was subject of language. Why was not French to
be used in the diplomacy of Hawaii? To exclude its
employment was a pointed insult and wrong done to
his sovereignty of France. This ought to be altered.
French must be used equally and identically with
English; and all French documents must be read, and
answers returned to them in the French language, in




318


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


precisely the same time required for reading and writing
in English.  The 'Pourquoi non' argument is one
difficult to answer; but a similar right might as well
have been claimed on behalf of the Sanskrit, or for the
unknown tongue.
The second grievance was, of course, relative to
brandy. In the interests of sufficient drinking it was
asked, why the government should set their face against
regulated intemperance. Unless a moderate intoxication was allowed, how were French interests to be
protected? The whole thing was certainly a sham.
Abstinence pledges and Dash-away associations were
abominations about whose origin we will not enquire, but
were certainly directed entirely against the Vignerolles
of sunny France.
There were a few subsidiary grounds of quarrel selected, which, like the pleas in a brief after the two first,
we hastily read, but do not dwell upon or plead. Such
were the management of Roman Catholic schools; impertinent difficulties thrown in the way of the virtuous
intercourse between French seamen and Hawaiian
females, and a few others; but the battle-field chosen
was language and brandy.
A community too small to admit of defined political
parties, in which personal antipathies can range themselves on opposite sides, is capable of no more than
individual hatred, or, at most, of some irascible cliques.
Political virulence is an advantage denied to a very
confined society. The state of parties in Honolulu
must be judged of as being under these circumstances.
The beginning and course of the quarrel, plainly told,
are as follow:-An uncomfortable state of feeling had
sprung up within the ministry. Dr. Judd considered that
by his patronage Mr. Wyllie was helped into office, and




THE DILLON LETTER.


319


now growing jealous of his protege, he would willingly
have assisted him to vacate his post. Mr. Dillon, an
Irishman by parentage, but born in France, had replaced M. Dudoit as French Consul. Mr. Wyllie having
been a friend of Dudoit's, was, by a sort of necessary
antithesis, disliked by his successor in the consulate. To
the immediate antipathy which Mr. Dillon felt towards
the foreign minister, he added a national jealousy of
English influence. With these mixed feelings he composed a remarkable letter addressed to Dr. Judd, dated
the 11th of August, 1848, and which was afterwards produced to the privy council and printed. In this letter
are found many sarcastic and disparaging remarks on
Mr. Wyllie, who, as Dillon suggested, was endeavouring
to undermine Dr. Judd, and uproot American influence
around the King; and what was perhaps still worse for
all parties, Mr. Wyllie was misrepresenting everything
said and written by Dillon, ' as in the case of the ratification of the French treaty;' he was conspiring against
Dillon personally; and had 'joined with Dudoit in
organising dark and foolish intrigues both in London
and Paris to the advantage of the latter.' Upon these
and other grounds, among which the rent and furniture
of a house are obscurely mixed, Mr. Dillon makes the
proposal to Dr. Judd to murder (politically) Mr. Wyllie.
And the text which is to justify this proposition is a
French proverb which says, 'When the devil attempts
to kill you, be beforehand with him, and kill the devil,
-if you can.' Mr. Dillon is a diplomatist and a philosopher. He 'knows what state necessities are, and
what a diversity of tricks and courses men in office, even
the purest, may stumble into. He is, therefore, full of
indulgence.' But he wishes to disabuse Dr. Judd of
one erroneous impression, viz., 'that the Sandwich




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


Islands are a kind of little plum-pudding which France
is anxious to stick her fork into, and that he (Dillon),
is the destined instrument of this carving.'
Now, letters of this kind are dangerous. They were
particularly so in the case we are narrating; for in the
first place, the communication fell into the hands of
Mr. Wyllie himself, and it did not tend to improve the
writer's place in his estimation; and, secondly, it failed
to convert Dr. Judd into the conspirator which was
intended, but had another effect, that of making him
most hungry to know what machinations were being
plotted against himself; so that the letter, missing its
mark, was like a narcotic, which, if it fail to produce
sleep, makes the patient doubly restless.
Dr. Judd, eager to make discoveries in the cabal,
directed, as he puts it, against the government (for as
he considered himself inseparable from government, any
wrong to himself was an injury to the powers that be),
-committed the serious indiscretion of bribing one
Peacock, a printer, to abstract some MSS. from the
office of the newspaper in opposition to the native
government. The act was more detestable than a crime,
it was a blunder. It immediately placed all the foreign
representatives in arms; they entered their protest to the
King against the unscrupulous minister of finance, and
proceeded to a step opposed to all international propriety, that of advising the King to dismiss his ministers.
To Mr. Dillon the time seemed now arrived for finding
and working a French grievance; and the two clauses
in the late treaty, those which concerned language and
spirits appeared the proper materials for a quarrel, and,
if necessary, a castes belli.
The quarrel prospered to a wish. Ill-will grew up
vigorously. Mr. Wyllie and Mr. Dillon darted their




A FRENCH INVASION.


321


goose-quill javelins at one another, till each adversary
was brought to the last degree of irritation; and at last
the epoch arrived for invoking French interference.
Accordingly in August 1849, Admiral de Tromelin
arrived off Honolulu, in the French steam corvette
'Gassendi.' Another blunder was committed.   The
Admiral requested an audience of the King, which was
unwisely refused; and the former landed his forces, took,
and occupied the fort, locked, and placed guards before
the public offices, doing a great deal of damage during
these proceedings, and carried off the royal yacht. One
act of triumph he could not, however, accomplish. The
Hawaiian national colours waved high above the fort;
and as no native could be induced to lower them, the
standard of the vanquished, ' like a tall bully, reared
its head and lied,' above the occupying conquerors.
The few words which have been hitherto spoken
about the French Roman Catholic missionaries, were
generally those of approbation. Some political crookednesses were swallowed up in their earnest and self-denying labours among the ignorant and poor people. The
same tone cannot be continued in relation to the part
the mission took in this humiliating struggle. They
greatly abetted Mr. Dillon in the concoction of his
charges against the government of unfair dealing towards
France; and the jealousy which they had cherished in
secret about school-management now gave evidence of
its intensity and of its unreasonableness.
Towards a solution of the pending difficulties, a conference on board the 'Gassendi' was proposed. The
King appointed for his commissioners the offending
Dr. Judd, and Chief Justice Lee; Mr. Hopkins attending as secretary.  On the Admiral's part were the
French Consul, Mr. Dillon, 1M. Jam, commander of the
y




322


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


frigate 'Poursuivant,' and the Admiral's secretary, M.
Erguieo. A report of what took place on that memorable occasion has been printed at length. On the
French side the tone of de haut en bas prevailed generally; and diplomatic amenities were not always regarded. Thus Admiral Tromelin says on one occasion,
' I should be considered an officer that had no firmness,
if I return without having settled the matter. I must
have either a pleasant arrangement, or else put this
country at war with France.' Upon which Mr. Dillon
courteously remarks, 'You must remember that we,
and French officers in general, are not picked up in a
field and sent off at once as ambassadors; we have a
known character, and higher powers.' The Admiral
continues, 'If you refuse to alter the treaty in regard to
brandy, we cannot go into any discussion on the point.'*
The proposal which the commissioners had to make
was that the treaty disputes should be referred to
France, to be settled with a commissioner sent from
Hawaii; an umpire to be chosen if the referees could
not come to an understanding. This proposal was refused for some time, but at the end of the conference
something of the kind was agreed upon; and in conclusion the King's commissioners placed in the Admiral's
hands a document to the following effect:The King is perfectly willing to fully fulfil and execute the
treaty of the 26th of March, 1846, according to the interpretation which the two nations who jointly proposed it may
jointly agree to give it, in all its parts; but without prejudice
to the new treaty that His Majesty's special plenipotentiary
may negotiate with France, the United States, and Great


* Appendix to Report of the Minister of Foreign Relations, p. 85.




THE STORM PASSES OVER.


32.3


Britain, placing the three nations upon a footing of exact
equality, in all respects.
(Signed)   G. P. JUDD.
WM. L. LEE.
CHARLES G. HOPKINS, Secretary.*
The French invasion was thus terminated. It is a
matter almost of certainty that the unhappy situation
just described would never have been brought about
had Mr. Perrin, who concluded the treaty of the 26th
March, 1846, been sent out instead of Mr. Dillon in
1847.  Mr. Perrin on leaving Hawaii proceeded to
Tahiti, and thence to Paris; and he had with him
sufficient documents for elucidating his own treaty, and
for explaining and amending those points in it which
proved such unjust restrictions on the free actions and
rights of the Hawaiian government.   Unfortunately
Mr. Dillon was accredited as Consul of France, and his
particular temperament and egotism led the way to all
the mischief. It is proper to add that the difficulties
were much increased, and ill-will greatly fomented by
the violent part taken by the total-abstinence party in
the islands.
The reference of the disputed treaty to Paris, had
for its fruit a project for a new convention: and Mr.
Perrin was empowered in September 1852 by the
Prince President of the French Republic to proceed to
Honolulu as plenipotentiary, consul, and commissioner,
to negotiate a new treaty with Hawaii. Nothing can
be more conciliatory than the preamble of the Power,
in which the motive of the new compact was stated to
be the desire 'to draw closer and closer the relations
of friendship between France and the Hawaiian government, and to regulate the commercial intercourse
* Appendix, p. 100.
Y 2




324


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


established between the two countries.' The new treaty
with Great Britain had already been concluded,- 10th
of July, 1851; and also that wiih the United States in
1850. The way was thus paved for a more enlarged
and considerate dealing with the distant and defenceless
people who were anxious to be on good terms with
their great and sometimes crotchety neighbours.
It was not till July 1855 that preliminaries were
arranged for negotiating this new treaty. The King
empowered Mr. Wyllie, Minister of Foreign Relations,
in connection with Mr. Allen, Minister of Finance, to
act in his behalf in this important and protracted affair.
The treaty itself bears date the 29th of October, 1857,
and is signed by Mr. Wyllie, Mr. Perrin, and by Prince
Kamehamtha, in the place of Mr. Allen. It contains
twenty-seven articles, and was the result of twenty-two
lengthened conferences. The Hawaiian commissioners
fought hard against those articles which infringed on
the King's dignity, or encroached on national freedom;
and the final inducement with them to sign a document
which they did not like in many of its stipulations, was
the agreement for an additional secret article, ad referendumn, which would keep the door open for emendations
and ameliorations.  Besides which, the promise of
Mr. Perrin had great weight. He engaged that he would
support in Paris the scheme for a general political
treaty with all nations, to be negotiated thereunder the
auspices of the Emperor. From that engagement, however, Mr. Perrin, after the ratification of the treaty,
receded. He would probably have had little weight ir
Paris-still less with Europe.
The treaty on completion was referred to the Prive
Council, who reported on it to the King unfavourably
They objected, first and generally, because ' several of it




OBJECTIONS TO THE NEW FRENCH TREATY.


325


provisions were of a character derogatory to the King's
dignity and rightful authority as the constitutional
sovereign of an independent state, and as interfering
with the undoubted right of free legislation which
belongs alike to every independent nation, whether
great or small.' The council then proceeded through
its provisions in detail, stumbling in limine over that
awkward stone, the official use of the French language.
Next came the 10th article, limiting the amount of
duties on wines and spirits. They could not fail to see
the uselessness of restrictions which would not affect
France, because France was scarcely bringing any goods
to Hawaii, whilst they affected very greatly the freedom
of government in dealing with questions of excise,
revenue, and internal police. In the fifteen years from
1845 to 1859 inclusive, the total imports from all parts
of the world have been $14,800,000 in value; of which
the goods from French ports direct were less in amount
than $72,000, i.e., less than one-half per cent. of the
whole! And in the three years 1857, 1858, 1859, the
importations from direct French ports were nothing!
The council remarked on the want of reciprocity in
the article relating to rights and privileges of residence,
commerce, and navigation; on the subject of administration of intestate estates; on the loss of jurisdiction in
civil and criminal matters concerning the captains and
crews of French vessels in Hawaiian ports and waters.
They objected to it on the ground that the treaty
rendered necessary the repeal or modification of many
existing laws; also on the ground of the expense and
loss of revenue involved in some of its provisions; the
article of French translation being estimated to necessitate a cost of $5,000 or $6,000 per annum; on the
subject of exemption of consuls and the whole consular




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


staff from appearing as witnesses in courts of justice.
They objected to the treaty, because its provisions were
so numerous and complicated, and its language in
several places so dubious as not to be easily understood,
&c. &c.  And finally the council objected that the
treaty did not accord with the letter and spirit of the
powers granted by the King to his plenipotentiaries.
They therefore respectfully, in the discharge of their
duties, advised His Majesty not to ratify the treaty.
This document was signed by three native and two
naturalized foreign Privy Councillors, the first signature being that of Governor Kekuanaoa, the King's
father.
A serious difficulty had arisen. The labours of more
than two years were rendered nugatory, and the treaty
was wrecked on the bar of its port. Throughout the
conferences, it is plain, the King's commissioners had
been making a fighting retreat; they had used and exhausted every argument, and but seldom gained a
substantial advantage. How exhaustive Mr. Wyllie's
reasoning was, and how ample his illustration, is seen
in his fence about the French language. A memorandum prepared by him ' for so much of the discussion in 1855, with Mr. Perrin, as relates to parity of
the French with the English language,' commences
thus: —
'The original language spoken by Adam and the
prediluvian race of man, if not the post-diluvian Hebrew,
has disappeared. So have the languages of the ancient
Egyptians, Assyrians, Chaldees, Persians, and even of
the Romans and the Greeks.'
If ancient precedents would have touched the French
diplomatist's heart, or moved him from his steady purpose, here he surely should have given way:-but it is




RATIFICATION OF THE FRENCH TREATY.


327


evident that, the production of the grammar of the
Proselenes would have been disregarded by that
impassive negotiator.
More preliminaries to final Protocols, more letters,
more opportunities for expressing the high consideration, &c., a little, almost imperceptible, pressure of the
screw, the political threat expressed in the most oblique
manner, a little more retreating done, a la mode of the
Parthian horsemen, who 'wound us as they fly,' some
reference, if we mistake not, to King David's messengers,
whom Hanum the son of Nahash treated so ignominiously
in respect to their beards and their clothing;-finally,
the sop of a secret article, and the thing was accomplished. The treaty was ratified on the 7th September,
1858: but still ad referendum, as to the additional
article.  What has taken place since, what is taking
place still, is not yet ripe for history. Suffice it to say,
that the additional secret article was not ratified in
Paris, and that the import duties stand at the present
day and for ten years after the date of this treaty, as
follows:-For low-class French wines known by the
name of vins de cargaison,' a maximum duty of 5 per
cent. ad valorem on invoice cost; for wines of less than
18 per cent. alcoholic strength, the maximum duty of
15 per cent. ad valorem. Duty on brandy not to
exceed three dollars per gallon.




328


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


CHAPTER XXI.
HISTORICAL SKETCH-REIGN OF KAM3IHAMf1HA IV.
THE decline of missionary influence in the Hawaiian
government constitutes the opening of a new era in
its history. Still leaning on foreign support, both in the
legislative and administrative capacities, the nation has
escaped the leading-strings in which it was long held
by American teachers of religion, who became amateur
law-makers and constitution-manufacturers. Acting
from the same instincts which led Russia to draw to its
court the talent of more advanced nations and to use it
in all departments, the Hawaiian Cabinet is composed
of British, American, and native elements; and naturalized subjects from England and the United States take
their part in the Houses of Nobles and Representatives.
From exclusive missionary influence the Hawaiian
nation has escaped: the influence now exercised upon
it has probably a useful and corrective function.
In the year 1850, during the reign of Kamehameha
III., Prince Alexander Liholiho, whom the King had
adopted and appointed for his successor, accompanied
by his brother, Prince Kamehameha, with Dr. Judd for
Mentor, visited Europe. During their short visit they
were introduced to the late deeply-lamented Prince
Consort; in the drawing-room of the Duchess of Suther



21
ii~r
i
a,irss
I:
i,
i'l El.
,"'
5i" ""i"
O




iu~:Ai~ ~~~ ~~~ ~~~ ~~~ ~~~ ~~~ ~~~ ~~~ ~~~ ~~~ ~~~ ~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~




PRINCES' VISIT TO EUROPE.


ago


land they had glimpses of the highest English society;
and in Paris they received flattering attentions. As
those gems which have basked in the effulgence of a
tropical sun are said, afterwards, in colder climates and
in darkness, to emit rays of that imprisoned light, the
impressions received in Europe appear to have been
sealed indelibly on the Prince's nature, and to have
tinged the whole tenour of thought and aim of this pair
of royal brothers in their after-life. In returning to
their country through the United States, an insulting
slight, received in public, produced an opposite but
as ineffaceable effect upon their minds.
In May 1847 the King announced to his legislature
that through Captain Steen Bille he had made a treaty
with the King of Denmark. This was important as
being the first regular treaty of friendship and commerce negotiated between the Hawaiian kingdom and
other governments, and it was followed by other treaties
which have been enumerated in the preceding chapter.
The King in the same speech informed the houses that
such relations as subsisted with other nations were of
the most friendly kind.
In 1848 died Mr. Richards, who has been frequently
mentioned. At the time of his death he occupied the
position of Minister of Public Instruction. The same
year a treaty was concluded with the city of Hamburg.
It being seen that the tenure of land as it existed was
very embarrassing, a division of lands was amicably
effected between the King and his konohikcis, and the
tenure was much simplified. The King set apart a
certain number of lands (estates or domains) to be the
property of the chiefs and people, reserving to himself
a portion of lands as his own private property, to descend
to his heirs in perpetuity.




330


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


In August 1849, difficulties arose with the French
republic, originating in acts done by French officers at
the islands.  These troubles have been sufficiently
treated of in the previous chapter, and need not again
be entered upon. In order to set himself right with
the French government, and to arrange the impending
question, the King despatched his Minister of Finance,
Mir. Judd, as plenipotentiary to Paris. He had, previously to the French quarrel, appointed Mr. Jarves, as
special commissioner to the United States, Great Britain,
and France, for the purpose of explaining to those
governments the impartiality of his foreign policy, and
the desirableness of their concurrence in adopting
treaties precisely similar, with the Hawaiian kingdom,
and of their giving a mutual engagement to respect its
neutrality, and to lay down for their agents in the kingdom rules which might prevent jealousies among themselves, insure their respect to the laws, and forbid their
secret or open interference with the internal affairs of
the country. Mr. Jarves being detained too long in
America by some private affairs, and the French
aggression having commenced, he was superseded in his
mission by Mr. Judd.
The King, in referring to the distribution of lands
which was carried out in June 1848, remarks that in
surrendering the greater portion of the royal domain to
his chiefs and people, the reservation he had made to
support the fort and garrison of the capital and for his
private use, was in lieu of his right inherited from his
predecessors of a share in all the lands of the whole
islands. Under the former tenure, all lands, to whomsoever donated, were revocable at will; no man's possession, even that of the highest chief, was secure, and
the effect of such a tenure was that no man thought of




LAST SPEECHES OF KAMIEHAMiHA III.


331


improving land, the possession of which was so uncertain.  This great bar to improvement was now
removed, and to afford still further protection to the
poorer people, the King, with his chiefs and privy
council concurring, had come to certain resolutions
which would give to industrious cultivators of the soil
an allodial title to the portions they occupied, and
would facilitate the acquisition of land in fee simple, by
others inclined to be industrious.
In the same speech, April 10th, 1850, the King, with
the object of rendering the people industrious and
provident, recommends the institution of a Savings'
Bank. He also proposes for the consideration of legislature, the project for a new criminal code, which had
been prepared.
About the end of the year 1852, there were grounds
for believing that a filibustering expedition was being
prepared in California, for the invasion of the islands.
The King issued a proclamation on the subject, and
claimed the aid of the United States commissioners, and
the danger passed by. In allusion to such attempts,
the King said: 'It is my anxious desire so to govern
my subjects, as that no one can expect to benefit himself
by any political change. With that view, I voluntarily
and freely granted the constitution of 1840; and I am
ready to grant another now, for the good of my people.'
In the last speech the King made, on the assembling
of the nobles and representatives, April 8th, 1854, His
Majesty began by expressing thanks to the Almighty
for 'the cessation of the frightful pestilence which had
during part of the past year and of the present, carried
to the grave so many thousands of the people, notwithstanding all the efforts made by the government and
commissioners of health, aided by the zealous and




332


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


gratuitous labours of the resident physicians, surgeons,
and other philanthropic individuals.'
The last public document issued under the King's
hand, was a proclamation dated the 8th December,
1854, against an annexation attempt and design to
overthrow the government. If such a new peril was
really imminent, it was by timely action crushed in the
bud.
A few days after making this proclamation, the King
died, at the age of forty-two, having reigned thirty
years. Though not a remarkable man, Kamehameha
was a man of the people. He was a true Hawaiian in
his good qualities, and even in his faults. He was true
to Hawaii in every act of his maturer life, after he had
escaped those evil influences which surround princes in
every nation. and which in his case seemed designed
with the diabolical intention of making shipwreck of
his body and mind. But love of his country was the
guiding-star which enabled him to rise above the waves;
and he carried out faithfully every intention of his own,
every suggestion of others, when the advantage of
Hawaii was concerned. Though assuming his father's
name, Kamehameha, he was, and is better known in his
own country by the first in the list of his formidable
appellations.  His names in full were Kauikaeouli
Kaleiopapa Kuakamanolani, Mahinalani Kalaninuiwaiakna, Keaweawealaokalani, ---a good specimen of the
composite character of the native language. The King's
only two children died in his lifetime; and being childless, he adopted as his son and heir, Alexander Liholiho,
son of Kinau, daughter of Kamehameha I., t>y Governor
Kekuanaoa, and therefore grandson to the conqueror.
In private life, says the obituary, the King was mild, kind,
aflable, generous, and forgiving-never more happy than when




ACCESSION OF KAMfHAMIEHA IV.


333


free from the cares and trappings of State. It is hardly possible to conceive a king more generally beloved than was his
late Majesty; more universally obeyed, or more completely
sovereign in the essential respect of independent sovereignty,
that of governing his subjects free from any influence or control coming from beyond the limits of his own jurisdiction.
Although this passage has a strong smack of the
'Court Newsman ' about it, it may be said with certainty,
that the King was greatly beloved by his people, and
that amidst many difficulties and discouragemehts, his
reign was a good one, and under it the nation made a
great advance.
Prince Liholiho was proclaimed king under the name
of Kamehameha IV., on the 15th of December, 1854.
He was then just twenty-one years of age, and came to
the throne with more preparation, and under better
auspices, than his royal predecessor. 'Chiefs,' said the
young King, in his short and manly address to the
privy council, ' I have become, by the will of God, your
father, as I have been your child. You must help me,
for I stand in need of help.'
On the 11th of January, 1855, the King took the
oath prescribed by the Constitution, in the following
form:
I solemnly swear, in the presence of Almighty God, to
maintain the constitution of the kingdom whole and inviolate,
and to govern in conformity with that and the laws.
He then addressed his subjects in the native tongue.
The address was solemn and eloquent, and from its
being pronounced in the Hawaiian language, is far
more valuable than an English speech prepared by his
ministers in English would have been. It is too long
for quotation entire, but a few passages may be quoted




334


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


from  the translation given in the 'Polynesian' of the
13th of January: -
Give ear, Hawaii o Keawe! Maui o Kama! Oahu o Kuihewa! Kauai o Mano! *
The good, the generous, the kind-hearted Kamwehameha is
now no more. Our great chief has fallen! but though dead
he still lives. He lives in the hearts of his people! He lives
in the liberal, the just, and the beneficent measures which it was
always his pleasure to adopt. His monuments rise to greet us
on every side. They may be seen in the church, in the
school-house, and the hall of justice; in the security of our
persons and property; in the peace, the law, the order, and
general prosperity that prevail throughout the islands. He was
the friend of the Makaainana,t the father of his people; and
so long as a Hawaiian lives, his memory will be cherished!
By the death of Kamehameha III., the chain that carried us
back to the ancient days of Kamehameha I. has been broken.
He was the last child of that great chieftain: but how unlike
the father from whom he sprang! Kamehameha I. was born for
the age in which he lived, the age of war and of conquest. The
age of Kamehameha III. was that of progress and of liberty
-of schools and civilization. He gave us a constitution and
fixed laws; he secured the people in the title to their lands,
and removed the last chain of oppression. He gave them a
voice in his councils, and in the making of the laws by which
they are governed. He was a great national benefactor, and
has left the impress of his mild and amiable disposition on the
age for which he was born.
To-day we begin a new era. Let it be one of increased
civilization-one of decided progress, industry, temperance,
morality, and all those virtues which mark a nation's progress.
The importance of unity is what I most wish to impress upon
your minds. Let us be one, and we shall not fall!
* It is impossible to render into English this ancient form of invocation to the four principal islands of the group.
t The common people.




A VIGOROUS BEGINNING.


335


In these and the remaining parts of the speech, the
translator will no doubt have considerably anglicised
the language, and possibly the editor may have improved
upon the translator: but that the young King had acquired the habit of thinking in English is apparent, by
the impromptu remarks which he addressed in that language to the foreign listeners then present, when it was
suggested to him to do so.
Among other things the King said:
I cannot fail to heed the example of my ancestors. I therefore say to the foreigner that he is welcome. He is welcome
to our shores-welcome so long as he comes with the laudable
motive of promoting his own interests and at the same time respecting those of his neighbour. But if he comes here with no
more exalted motive than that of building up his own interests
at the expense of the native-to seek our confidence only to
betray it-with no higher ambition than that of overthrowing
our government, and introducing anarchy, confusion, and
bloodshed-then is he most unwelcome I
On the 7th of April the King opened the session of
legislature with a speech, longer than that which is
heard from the throne of England, but considerably
shorter than the message of the President of the United
States.  The several topics touched on, show the
advance which was taking place. The office of Kuhina
Nui, or Premier, was separated from    that of the
Ministry of the Interior. To the former post the King
appointed his sister, the Princess Victoria Kamamalu.
His brother, the Prince Kamehameha, occupied the
position held by the King before his accession, of
Commander in Chief. Mr. Lee, the chief justice and
chancellor, had been sent on a mission to the United
States, where he attended to some practical matters
tending to the improvement of Honolulu, &c. Certain




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


proposed changes in the department of Public Instruction were to be submitted to legislature; the national
finances required to be enlarged; the duties on spirituous
liquors to be reconsidered. Attention was to be turned
to the state of agriculture, and means taken to procure
some approach to equilibrium between imports and
exports, the latter of which, consisting principally of
sugar, coffee, and tobacco, were very much in defect.
The decreasing numbers of the population were feelingly
and seriously alluded to. 'It is a subject,' said the
King, 'in comparison with which all others sink into
insignificance;-our acts are in vain unless we stay
the wasting hand that is destroying our population. I
feel a heavy and special responsibility resting on me
in this matter.' The King then recommends to the
consideration of the legislature the establishment of
public hospitals, and this is the first germ of the noblest
institution possessed by the Hawaiian people, the
present Queen's Hospital.  Disappointment is expressed at the result of Chinese coolie emigrants, and it
is suggested that an immigration from other Polynesian
groups should be encouraged in preference, as more
congenial in ideas and language, and more easily
acclimated.
The session disagreeing on the Bill of Supplies, the
King exercised his prerogative of dissolving the houses,
on the 16th of June, and convening legislature afresh
six weeks afterwards.
The King had addressed letters announcing the
death of his royal predecessor to Her Britannic Majesty;
the Emperor of the French, the Emperor of Russia;
the Kings of Denmark, Prussia, and Sweden and
Norway; and to the Presidents of the United States,
Hamburg, Bremen, Chile, and Peru. Thus did the




THE PRESENT ADMINISTRATION.


337


little kingdom dwelling far away from the nations of
Europe, keep itself in correspondence, and claim its
brotherhood, with them.
To maintain his foreign relations, the King was
represented abroad by diplomatic or consular agents
in Paris, in London, in the chief ports of Great Britain,
in Copenhagen, Hamburg, Bremen, New York and
other places in the United States, at Lima, Valparaiso,
San Francisco, at Canton, Hongkong, in the Friendly,
Fiji, and Navigators Islands; at Sydney, Melbourne,
and other places; and he had a political commissioner
to the independent states and tribes of Polynesia and
Tasmania.
The administration, originally containing five departments, has been redistributed into three portfolios and
an attorney-general.
That of the Interior is held by Dr. F. W. Hutchison,
and it includes the Bureau of Public Improvements;
Foreign Relations by M. C. de Varigny, who is also
charged with the duties of Secretary at War; Finance
by Mr. C. C. Harris. Public instruction is no longer
a ministry, and its President reports to the department
of Interior. The Cabinet office of Attorney-General is
at present vacant.
Mr. E. A. Allen is Chief Justice. The 'Hawaiian
Gazette' is avowedly the organ and mouthpiece of the
government, announcing and advocating its views. In
its columns the government makes official announcements, or gives semi-official intimations. At the close
of the year 1861, the office of director of the press was
abolished.
About ten years ago the Hawaiian Agricultural
Society was founded; an institution which has already
been of very great service in the islands. It ranks among
z




338


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


its members Dr. Hillebrand, Mr. Green, and other men
of enlightened mind and extensive scientific knowledge.
It promotes among the people the knowledge of natural
laws, and gives advice on the several subjects which
the large name of agriculture embraces; it imports
seeds, plants, and animals, and maintains a small experimental garden and arboretum for acclimatization,
&c. At the opening of the Native Hawaiian Agricultural Society, a sister institution, on the 5th of January,
1856, the late King, as President, made a remarkable and
very interesting speech, in the native language. This
address was taken down in short-hand and translated
into English. In doing this, the reporter naively says,
The difficulty of taking short-hand notes in English of what
is being said in the native dialect, the construction of which is
peculiar, a sentence often beginning at the end, and ending in
the middle, must be our apology for doing so little justice to
the eloquent language and sound common-sense ideas expressed
by the President.
On that occasion His Majesty said:
One of the greatest prospective advantages we see in the
assiduous pursuit of agriculture is the reformation it would
work among the people. It is not in the ranks of modern
farmers that you must look for the most ignorant and immoral
men. We all know that when an individual enters upon an
undertaking, of the mode to accomplish which he is ignorant,
he applies for information where it may be found, having
learnt that a man unqualified for his task must fail in it.
Having acquired thus much experience, and being solicitous
for the prosperity and happiness of his children, he will on no
account omit sending them to school, so that they may not be
trammelled in after-years by ignorance, as their father was.
Thus the rising generation. The children find themselves, on




THE AGRICULTURAL SOCIETIES.


339


starting in life, possessed of the information necessary to success; whereas their father had to struggle on his way in the
midst of darkness and misapprehension.  Suppose a step,
similar to the one I have described, were made by the young
people from one end of the islands to the other. Would not
ignorance give way to intelligence?  Would not darkness
become light?  Would not inexpertness succumb to proficiency? The general result could only be a largely-increased
sum of individual and national prosperity.
The King spoke of the particular advantages of climate with which the Hawaiian Islands are favoured:
Who ever heard of winter upon our shores? When was it
so cold that the labourer could not go to his field? Where
among us shall we find the numberless drawbacks which in less
favoured countries the working classes have to contend with?
They have no place in our beautiful group, which rests on the
swelling bosom of the Pacific like a water-lily.  With a
tranquil heaven above our heads, and a sun that keeps his
jealous eye upon us every day, whilst his rays are so tempered
that they never wither prematurely what they have warmed
into life, we ought to be agriculturists in heart as well as
practice.
The royal speaker then proceeds to point out the ills
arising from a foolish hospitality, which is extended
everywhere, towards the lazy and good-for-nothing
equally with those who are worthy of hospitality. Thus a
class of strong, idle young men, went 'loafing' about the
country-nati consumere fruges-not ashamed to appropriate in any house the scanty meal which had been
provided by hard labour, but which was never denied
to any who claimed hospitality.
I am well aware, says the King, that the sharing of food with
every stranger and visitor that comes along, is dignified with
the name of ancient HawaLiial hospitality. I now tell you it is
z 2




340


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


not true hospitality. Can that hospitality be correct in theory
or practice which sends old men and sick men to work under a
hot sun, whilst lusty young people lie in the house playing cards?
At present we are a poor people, for the surplus produced by
the few who work is consumed by the many who claim at their
hands the rights of your boasted hospitality. Never close your
doors on those who are hungry through sickness, misfortune,
or the wrongs they have received; but, on the other hand,
never help those who are too lazy to help themselves.
Thus the young King, as the father of his people,
gave humane advice to his subjects, preaching from the
text of the cultivation of the soil; and his suggestions
were none the less benevolent on account of the strong
common sense which prompted them and clothed them
in words. He tries to check another common fault,
that of impatience for results. He deprecates the dream
in which too many of the people indulged, that of
supposing that a fortune was to be acquired in a very
short time. He tells them that want of perseverance is
the cause of their non-success, when much is in their
favour-when their patches of land are granted to them
by law, and their hands not tied either by natural or
artificial bonds.
This address we are told was listened to by the royal
speaker's audience with great earnestness, and from
time to time subdued expressions of ' Oiaio no '-' True,
true,'-broke from different parts of the house.
Besides the two allied agricultural societies, other
institutions sprang up; a Chamber of Commerce, a
Chapter and Lodge of Freemasons, the King himself
being Grand Master of the Progres de l'Oceanie. This
fanciful and mystical name itself speaks that love of
progress which has shown itself so strongly in the
dynasty of Kamehameha; and young as his present




THE KING'S MARRIAGE.


341


Majesty was when he came to the throne, he immediately began to develope the family tradition, and announced himself the man of advance.
On the 19th of June, 1856, the King married Emma,
daughter of Naea, a chief lineally descended from the
ancient kings of Hawaii. Her Majesty's mother, Fanny
Kekela, is the daughter of the famous Englishman, John
Young, the right hand of Kamehameha I., and whom
the conqueror delighted to honour. Queen Emma has
consequently one-fourth part English blood in her veins,
the remaining stream being high and pure Hawaiian.
Young, who in native is called Keoni Ana, married the
high female chief Kaoanaeha. As a child Her Majesty
was adopted by Dr. Rooke, a physician residing in the
islands; and both by her education and natural disposition, is eminently adapted to sustain the place she fills
with grace and dignity. She was, moreover, the earnest
seconder of her royal husband in every patriotic design
for the welfare and advancement of their people.
On the 3rd of November in the year of his marriage,
the King issued a proclamation, which had become
customary, calling his subjects' thoughts to thankfulness
for the blessings their land had enjoyed during the
year; and recommending that on Christmas-day, those
not unprepared feelings should find expression in acts
of public thanksgiving. There is something very sweet
and primitive in such an observance. A young king,
not so much in the character of a patriarch as that of
the elder brother of a wide-spread family, beaming with
newly-acquired domestic happiness, and calling upon
all his great household to choose a day for thankful
retrospection,-to rejoice and be glad in it; that day
too, when all the world is invited to hail the rising of
the Sun of Righteousness, with healing in His wings.
e




342


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


'Whereas,' says the p-oclamation, 'during the year now
drawing to a close, we have enjoyed as a people, numerous and
great blessings; peace and tranquillity have prevailed throughout our islands; we have been not only free from dangers
from abroad, but have continued to enjoy the most friendly
assurances of protection in our independence from the most
powerful governments in the world; although the times have
been hard through the scarcity of money, and our people have
suffered from a drought almost unparalleled, neither our agriculture nor commerce has entirely failed; both begin to
revive; perhaps we have never enjoyed a year of more general
health; our laws have been sustained; religion and education
have been free and prosperous. For all of which numerous
and invaluable blessings we owe, as a nation, a formal, general,
and heartfelt tribute of thanksgiving to the Almighty, on whose
favour all prosperity, whether individual or national, depends.'
On the 20th of May, 1858, Her Majesty gave birth
to a son, to the very great delight and happiness of all
classes. Apart from parental joy, the event was auspicious as promising to continue a regular succession to
the throne in the present family. The following day,
all the separate services and orders, soldiers and ministers, native subjects and foreign consuls, hastened to
offer their sincere congratulations at the palace; the
King replying to each address in feeling and appropriate
expressions.  On the 29th, royal letters patent were
issued, constituting and declaring the style and title of
the heir-apparent to be ' His Royal Highness the Prince
of Hawaii.' On the 3rd of October, 1859, at an extraordinary session of the House of Nobles held at the
palace 'in contemplation of a vacancy in the chief
executive office, at all times liable to occur,' the King
called attention to the importance of having the succession to the crown definitely established in a constitutional manner; and he then designated his infant son




BIRTH OF THE PRINCE OF HAWAII.


343


his heir and successor to the throne. The following
proclamation was issued the same day:
Kam6hameha IV., of the Hawaiian Islands King, to all our
loving subjects and others to whom these presents shall come,
greeting:Be it known that We, in concurrence with our House of
Nobles, hereby appoint and proclain Our son, His Royal
Highness the Prince of Hawaii, to be Our Successor and
Heir to the Hawaiian Throne.
Done at Our palace, at Honolulu, this third day of October,
in the year of our Lord 1859, and the fifth year of Our
reign.
(Signed)    KAMEHAMEHA.
(Signed)    KAAIIUMANU.
By the King and Kuhina Nui, (Signed)  L. KAMEHAMEHA.
In the speech to legislature delivered by commission
on the 14th of August, 1860, the Queen Consort was
named Regent during the minority of the heir-apparent
in case of a vacancy of the throne.
The subject of public hospitals had been broached
by the King in his first speech to legislature after his
accession, in 1855. In September, 1859, His Majesty
had the happiness of opening the admirable institution
which had been named after the young Queen. From
the MS. notes of one who was present on that interesting
occasion, the following sentences are transcribed:One of the institutions which should have been first, came
into existence last-the hospital. To the personal exertions of
the present king and queen the hospital owes its being. A
gap in the existing order of things had been talked about and
written about; the one thing remaining most necessary for the
people had been piously recommended to the legislature by two
kings in their turn, and more than twice by each of them, and




344


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


yet there arose no refuge for those who were being plucked into
the grave by penury and pushed into it by disease. At last,
the young father of his people and his younger wife, weary of
protestations of good-will, which ended where they began, went
out to beg; and the stately intimations from the throne merged
into a prayer of earnest heart. One might have thought they
were canvassing for some candidate in whom they had a personal interest, so pertinacious and so unavoidable was their
request. It was certainly a novel sight to see a king and queen
going about to gather names to a subscription list: but so it
was; and day after day, and for this end, their Majesties' carriages 'stopped the way.' This episode of royalty mendicant
may disarrange the ideas of some who have only seen their
sovereign surrounded by the halo of a triumphal arch, or by a
brilliant setting of lords and ladies, too happy and too grand
(as it seemed) for every-day employments. Yet we might remember how a queen of mighty England even once begged on
her knees for the lives of half a dozen burgesses, and five hundred pictures have since celebrated that pious act of love. That
appeal is bright with all the colours of romance, whilst this
before us appears in homespun. Queen Philippa's prayer was
addressed to a king, and has a grand air about it, but this was
made by a king to the people; and so prosaically, that a lawyer's
office, a trader's counting-house, or a lady's parlour formed the
background to the humble scene. However, the effort succeeded. Human charity, and a touch of nature, which 'makes
the whole world kin,' with a fancy-fair or two, established
the hospital, legislature not refusing its due assistance.
The ladies of Honolulu hemmed the sheets, and their
daughters made the pillow-cases. A German gentleman-a
consul in fact-volunteered a design for the building: it was
erected on his plans, and there the hospital stands, solid, light,
airy, clean, commodious. The King, assisted by his brother
masons, laid the corner-stone; and to commemorate the
woman's part, they have called the hospital after the Queen.
Within its walls, already, many lives have been saved, many
weary days of sickness have been shortened and sweetened by




THE QUEEN'S HOSPITAL.


345


gentle ministrations. And well we know that those walls which
often reverberate to the moaning of suffering and weakness,
fail not to hear at night and morning praises to God, and
blessings on their Majesties.
The last act of the King that will fall within the
scope of this chapter is the request which he preferred
to the Church and people of England, to establish a
branch of the reformed Episcopal Church in Hawaii.
On the 5th of December, 1859, Mr. Wyllie communicated to His Majesty's representative in London, the
desire of the King and the Queen to have a church
erected in their capital; towards the support of which
the King offered on his own behalf and that of residents
who desired the church's services, a certain income.
His Majesty devoted a piece of land for the church, and
to erect a house. The King directed his representative
to confer on the subject with the Archbishop of Canterbury, the Bishop of London, and the Church Societies.
Subsequently, the King wrote an autograph letter to
Her Majesty, and, by His Minister of Foreign Relations,
to the Primate, and to Earl Russell.
In another letter it is explained that under the second
article of the constitution no national or state religion
is to be adopted; but all Christian denominations are
placed on an equal footing of right, and possess a
perfect freedom of religious worship. Hence no special
appropriation could be made by government towards
the Episcopal Church. It was desired that the services
should be performed with all the rites and ceremonies
sanctioned by the Church; and that all vestments, instruments, and ornaments, proper to their due celebration, should be sent from England, and that it was
necessary to provide an organ, bell, font, &c.




346


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


This despatch recalls the fact of a request, already
mentioned in the foregoing pages, having been made
to the British Sovereign by Captain Vancouver, to send
religious teachers from England to Hawaii. A similar
requisition was afterwards made to George IV.; but
neither of these appeals was acted upon. To show that
the desire for the introduction of the English Church
was not new or sudden, it is mentioned that in 1844, a
subscription list was circulated and numerously signed in
Honolulu for the support of an English clergyman; and
other attempts for the same object were made in the years
1847, 1851, and 1858. They had failed hitherto; but
the wish had long existed, and the first idea was fairly
to be ascribed to the first of the royal line of Kamehameha.
It is written with gratitude, that the appeal made in
England in 1860 has not been neglected. Men's hearts
warmed with the thought that new realms invited the
Church's mission, that the distant islands of the ocean
waited to be embraced in that kingdom which must
extend till the company of preachers who have gone
abroad to the east and to the west, again meet one
another; and that the craggy heights of far Hawaii
might now 'stand up and take the morning.' The new
mission has produced an additional interest, inasmuch
as this invitation to our Church is the only one that has
been made by an independent sovereign. The sister
Church in America welcomed the opportunity of joining in the labour of love, and was prepared to go hand
in hand with the Church in Great Britain in sending
out clergy. The troubles which subsequently broke
out in the North American continent did, for a time,
interrupt the intended joint action. A committee for
conducting in England the affairs of the Hawaiian church




INVITATION TO TIOE CEU1eN   OF ENGLAND.  347
mission was formed; nLd on the l5th of Decmber,
1861, the Rev. Thomas Nettleship Staey, DDl,, late
fellow of Queen's College, Cambridge, was eonsecrated
first Bishop of Honolulu, in Lambeth Chapel by the
Archbishop of Canterbury, the Bishops of London and
Oxford being assessors. The day was that on which
Dr. Thompson, the present Archbishop of York, was
consecrated Bishop of Gloucester and Bristol, and the
CHURIC PIOPO   TO B  IS XOMT D IN  t ONLULl.
service, at all times a solemn one, was rendered yet
more memorable by the news which was spreading
itself among the congregation present, of the death of
the Prince Consort the prvios might.
A subsequent chapter wil be devoted to the establiisment and progress of th  English charc h in the
andwi. Is nds.
mo3~rBe~ m Femorilc  yenwswll         s   sri




348


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


CHAPTER XXII.
HAWAIIAN CHARACTERISTICS.
'T HAVE visited many parts of the earth,' writes an old
voyager, 'but nowhere in my travels have I met
with more than two sorts of human beings,-men and
women.'
It will seem trite, after this remark, to say that in
the Hawaiian character good and ill qualities are combined; yet, because this is essentially true, it must be
said in spite of its triteness. The important question
is, whether the mixed ore, upon analysis, holds out the
hope of reduction to a valuable metal.
The most salient points in the native race are courage,
hospitality, a friendly and affable disposition, a constitutional good humour and mirthfulness. This much for
good. On the other hand must be written against
them, indolence, sensuality and licentiousness, improvidence, and a carelessness about life and death, apparently
arising from ignorance of, or disbelief in, a future existence.  In things indifferent, their natural taste is
aesthetic; they have a great love of beauty, are imitative,
and ambitious to copy the manners, habits, dress, and
luxuries of foreigners. They have as much imagination
as other Pacific tribes, but in their religion they were
materialistic idolaters, and in this were strongly distinguished from the red tribes of North America, whose




PHYSICAL CONFORMATION.


worship is purely spiritual, having no visible representations of divinity, and is addressed to the great
spirit Manetou. Considerable importance should be
given to the fact of this distinction in comparing the
aborigines of North America with those of Oceanica.
After this short summary, we will proceed to examine
the features of the Hawaiian character more in detail.
And first a word as to the physique of the race. The
Hawaiians are strong, well-made, and active; in height
rather above the average of our own country. In complexion they vary much among themselves. The fishing
and other classes, which expose themselves very greatly
in the sun, become almost black: on the other hand,
there are natives who might be properly called fair, and
these of pure blood; the half-castes being, naturally,
lighter in hue. Speaking generally, their skin may be
said to be olive brown, approximating to the tint of the
Moors of North Africa. The hair is black and waving,
frequently quite straight. Its curl is perfectly free from
the woolliness of the African, scarcely differing from the
hair of those Europeans who are fortunate enough not
to have straight locks. The women are unquestionably
attractive. Their figures whilst young keep the juste
milieu between lightness and embonpoint; the limbs
and bust are finely formed, and the hands, feet, and
ankles are small and delicate. Their beauty is inferior,
on the whole, to the Marquesan women's, but they retain it much longer than women generally do in tropical
climates, or even in Europe. Many Hawaiian females
are still handsome at fifty, the common fault brought
by advancing years being that of excessive corpulency.
In men and women the countenance is characterized by
a fulness of the nostrils, although the nose is not flat;
the face is wide, and the eyes bright and black. The




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


women are attractive from their cheerful, smiling, and
lively expression; whilst their merry laugh and pleasant
aloha, or welcome, show the face to be an index of
their mind. From the remarkable height and bulk of
the chiefs, both males and females, the dominant class
has been considered by some writers to be a distinct
and conquering race. Residents in the islands are not
of this opinion, and account for the difference in size
between the chiefs and the common people as arising
from abundance of food and rest and other hereditary
advantages.  Sir George Simpson speaks of a chief
and chiefess to whom he was introduced as so unwieldy,
that though in perfect health, they were unable to
walk.
Courage-stronger than battering-rams-is the basis
of every fine character. The Hawaiians possess the
virtue in an unquestionably high degree. It was shown
in the old warlike times by their open, standing-up
fight: Their bodies were unprotected by armour or
even by clothes; their weapons were the spear, the
dagger, the club, and stones. They did not resort to
artifice or stratagem in war, and they kept up a fight
with the determination of a Witherington, and for a
length of time which makes Chevy Chase shrink into
insignificance.  War has been entirely abolished for
forty years, but their valour shows itself under new
forms.! The Hawaiians are now as peaceful a people as
any upon earth; they are more free from crimes of
violence than almost any nation that can be named.
Their natural courage crops out in their love of, and
daring in, riding; in their delight in swimming among
the heavy breakers rolling over the reefs; their descent
of precipices, and even in their games. Kamehameha I.
would allow six of his warriors to throw their spears




PHYSICAL AND MENTAL CHARACTERISTICS.


351


at him, himself armed only with one of the javelins,
with which he would turn aside the flying weapons,
each ready to let out his life-blood. The women no
longer follow their husbands to the battle, to staunch
their wounds or fight beside them; but they endure
long journeys, and bear heavy burdens, swim        through
the raging surf, and plunge down the waterfall into the
ocean when the leap is forty feet and upwards in height.
The courage of both sexes is exhibited in the calm indifference with which they await death. The king of
terrors does not much appal them. This may arise
partly from stoicism, and partly from    unbelief or want
of a strong belief in an after-state; it probably is also
due in part to their constitutional firmness.*
It appears strange, and contrary to analogy, that a
people of bold and forcible character, should express
themselves in a language more fitted for the Sybarites.
We are accustomed to look upon language as among
national idiosyncrasies and indicative of the national
character. The angular teutonic speech with its crowd
of obstructive consonants, seems natural and necessary
to the peoples which use it; the vocal and emasculated
derivations from the Latin, flow congruously from the
* The following remark of a missionary may seem somewhat at
variance with the above view; but superstition is an infection which
saps many bold and even religious minds:' The Hawaiians can lie down and die the easiest of any people with
which I am acquainted.. I have pretty good reason for the belief that
they sometimes die through fear, believing that some person having the
power to pray them to death is in the act of doing so; and the imagination is so wrought up that life yields to intense fear.' (' Answers to
Mr. Wyllie's Questions.')
The yielding up of life under these circumstances is not, however,
inconsistent with the possession of great courage; because the Hawaiians had a settled belief that no degree of courage or resistance
could avail them in such a case, and they in consequence submitted
themselves calmly to their fate.




352


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


pleasure-loving  inhabitants of South Europe.    The
Greek language was born of masculine energy and
elegant fancy; and so delicate was the people's apprehension of the expressive, that several dialects necessarily grew up where there were geographical and other
differencing circumstances within the nation.    The
Hawaiian language is so soft as rather to be compared
to the warbling of birds than the speech of suffering
mortals.  It is usually said to contain but twelve letters,
namely, seven consonants, and five vowels. This is,
however, only the case by counting the two pairs of
interchangeables as two letters.  The k and t, and the
I and r, are so blended, that the distinction between the
letters of each pair is not observed by the natives, or
even by those who have been long resident in the
islands. It is probable that the two interchangeable
pairs were really two real letters, not found in European
alphabets, and were analytically resolved into two elements by the missionaries, in order to give them known
phonetic expression. The Arabic guttural, combining
g and r, cannot be phonetically expressed in our language.*
Assuming, however, the two pairs to be four letters,
the Hawaiian alphabet consists of the vowels a, e, i, o, u,
and the consonants h, k, and t, 1, and r, m, n, p, and w.
The consonants rejected are b, (since the residence of
white people, added for foreign words) c, not used as a
sibilant, and only found under the sound of k; d, f, g,
j, q, s, v, x, y, and z. Our ears are so accustomed to a
centrifugal language, that we can scarcely conceive how
a people could get on without an f, a g, or an s. Whole
* I do not speak decisively on this point. An informant who knows
the language very thoroughly, states that the k and t, and the I and r
are as pure in a Hawaiian's mouth as in a European's.




LANGUAGE.


35.3


sentences may consist of vowels without the admixture
of a single consonant.
The language may, on the whole, says Sir George Simpson,
be considered as pleasing and agreeable to the ear after a time,
though at first it sounds childish, indistinct, and insipid. It
lacks, of course, everything like force and expression; and the
natives are by no means to be compared as orators with the
aborigines of North America. The language is not capable of
reaching the lofty strain of the Blackfeet, the Crees, or the
Saulteaux, but flows on in a mellifluous feebleness, which,
though it never offends the ear, always leaves us unsatisfied.
The indistinctness and confusion which arise from the scantiness of its elements, and its consequent repetition of the same
sounds, are considerably aggravated by the copiousness of the
vocabulary-a copiousness which is said to have been in a great
measure caused by the pride and policy of the chiefs, who habitually invented new words for their own peculiar use, and
constantly replaced them, as soon as they became familiar to the
people, with other novelties of the same kind. Under those
circumstances, to say nothing of the intricacy and precision of
the grammar, a foreigner can never hope entirely to master the
tongue; and even the missionaries, in spite of all their industry and zeal, often find their ears at fault, more particularly
when the natives, as is their custom in cracking their jokes at
the expense of strangers, chant their barely articulate strings
of vowels in a quick and monotonous strain.
The Hawaiians have, moreover, a different dialect
for their poetry; or, at least, if the language be the
same, its inflections and construction appear very different, and its metaphors and allusions, which give
enjoyment to the native race, elude the comprehension
of residents who are well acquainted with the Hawaiian
language used in prose.   A young poetess, lately dead,
who suffered under the intractable name of Poki, enchained the people with her lyrics; yet an informant,
AA




354


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


who knew the prose language so perfectly that he could
report in shorthand the speeches made in the houses of
legislature, was entirely baffled in his attempts to comprehend the poetry, which by turns melted and inflamed
its native hearers. The people were fond of fabulous
tales and songs, and formerly spent much of their time
in telling stories, and crooning their meles, or songs, to
the accompaniment of the small drum or the musical
stick. Indeed the Hawaiians equalled the Marquesans,
the most lively natives of the Pacific, in the number of
their songs, and exceeded in that respect the Society
Islanders.
The fatal gift of beauty, a delicious climate, which
rendered clothing unnecessary -except the flowery
wreath, which both sexes wore, partly from innate taste
and partly to shade the eyes-an indolent and pleasureloving constitution, abundant opportunity, their houses
small and undivided by partitions, and the absence of
adverse public opinion, are among the prevalent causes
of a general absence of chastity among the Hawaiians.*
Till taught otherwise by the missionaries, the natives
had no conception that aphrodisiac indulgences were
even wrong or hurtful; they had not even a word to
express chastity in their language.   To learn to look
upon sensual love as sin, was to acquire a lesson as new
as it was difficult; for the teaching of ancient custom
was universally opposite to such a doctrine. It is true
that in special cases adultery was severely punished,
but this seems to have been the fruit of expediency and
* The men wore the malo, a narrow girdle of linen passing round the
waist and between the thighs, very similar to the cloth of the Hindoos.
The women used the pau, a short petticoat reaching from the waist
nearly to the knees. In addition to this scant measure of clothing, the
people very frequently wore a short mantle or tippet.




LICENTIOUS HABITS.


respect for chiefdom. Even hospitality would not have
been complete without an unconditional offer to an
honoured guest of a transient partner, to be selected
from the female household. The light of nature had
not taught them to restrain their appetites, and society
went on under those licentious conditions. To such a
nation as this, the cold injunctions of morality were
powerless, and a doctrinal religion not insisting on
fruits of holiness was as inoperative. The highest argument of the schools prevails little against the inexorable
logic of the senses stirred by passion.  Why linger
more on so ungrateful a theme? It is perhaps not
quite true that the Hawaiians did not feel some moral
degradation, though they could not rise above it; and
the sense of want of self-respect led them commonly to
speak of themselves as ' beasts.' * Yet if they did not
love wisely, they could love well, and they had among
themselves many shining instances of constancy, even
to death, under circumstances where it might be
supposed constancy must have faltered and died.
The American missionaries, and the native government actuated by the missionaries, threw themselves
unenquiringly and at once into a crusade against the
prevailing licentiousness of the people.  Fines, imprisonment, severe labour, and informers, were the
weapons of their warfare. A great apparent change
was rapidly effected. They clothed and converted the
natives, and they produced, not, alas! a regenerated
people, but a nation of hypocrites. It is no difficulty
to the Hawaiians to dissemble; simulation and dissimulation are dramatic costumes they readily assume.
They not only seemed to do what the missionaries required, but they imitated the manner, tones, and the
* See 'Answers to Mr. Wyllie's Questions,' No. 63.
AA 2




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


very appearance of the missionaries themselves. In
fact they are admirable mimics.  The missionaries'
gesture and intonation, their soft feline style of approach, their very seat in the saddle, the sun-burnt
black suit, all were exactly counterfeited,-nothing
escaped them! It is only doing the missionaries justici'
to say that they might well have been deceived by such
a looking-glass resemblance of themselves.
Indolence is another grand fault attributed to the
Hawaiian race. It is very true that the delicious,
equable climate engenders in those constantly within
its influence a lotus-eating habit, a love of the dolce far
niente. Their absolute wants were few; and as the
chiefs would have pounced down on any little surplus
the people could have acquired by labour, they lost the
powerful stimulus of a desire to accumulate.  It is
going beyond the truth to say that indolence was entirely ingrained in the people's nature. It was enforced
upon them by circumstances.   'The moral effect of
unpaid labour upon their habits is to do as little as
possible when at work, and that little as unfaithfully as
possible.  The influence of unwilling labour when
excessive, as I understand it, is injurious to health, so
far as a healthy state of body depends upon cheerfulness
of mind.'* Thus with a distaste for labour forced upon
them; with the knowledge that the fruits of labour
would be stolen from them, and with a tolerable certainty that they would not actually starve if they did
the minimum quantity of work, we are not surprised that
many Hawaiians were lazy drones, in the absence of a
religion which erects diligence in business to the rank of
a God-beloved virtue. Nor is it correct to say that indolence was universal. It is true that a taro pit having
*' Answers to Mr. Wyllie's Questions,' No. 25.




INDOLENCE AND CHEERFULNESS.


357


the area of an ordinary dressing-room will keep a man in
food the whole year-if it be diligently cultivated.* But
there are few species of labour more constant and more
wearing than that of cultivating the esculent arum. The
men work in the heat of the day in the patches or pits,
which require to be kept filled to a certain height with
water. Irrigation has to be attended to, the plant
continually tended, and even when used, the process of
converting the root into poi, which is done by pounding
it for a long time with a heavy stone pestle, is heavy
and tedious work. Ellis remarks,' We have often been
struck with the restless avidity and untiring effort with
which they pursue even the most toilsome game.'
The natural disposition of the Hawaiians is everything
that is opposite to the gloomy and morose. The pleasant, universal ' aloha' or salutation, the merry ringing
laughter of the women wherever found, proclaim the
people to be a light-hearted race.     No occasion to
address to them, as Southey does to the fair sex on a
consideration of the shortness of life, 'a melancholy
exhortation to be cheerful while they may,'-for the cares
of life sit lightly on them. It is consistent with such
mirthful and good-tempered temperament to be wanting in very deep human feelings; but the people are as
kindly and as hospitable as any who inhabit our planet.
Nothing is more offensive to a Hawaiian's feelings than
that a traveller should not return the ' aloha' or salutation; and they are very observant of the 'haole' or
* It has been calculated that a square mile of taro will feed 15,151
persons during the same period.  When raw the root is acrid and
styptic, and is used in that state medicinally. The plant is propagated by tops cut from the suckers of one year's growth. Beds are dug
two or three feet deep in the earth, and are beaten hard to make them
hold water. There is a red and a white species, with several varieties of
both kinds.




358


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


foreigner. In living, they are simple, having few artificial wants.   The chiefs especially exhibited great
courtesy. Their hospitalities were always accompanied
by a polite behaviour peculiarly gratifying to those who
came within their range, and indicated a degree of
refinement seldom found among uncivilized nations.*
This courtesy was remarkably shown in the use of the
graceful dual in their speaking, and their delicacy by
the constant practice which prevailed among the chiefs
of washing the hands before and after meals. Personal
cleanliness must have been greatly promoted by the
universal bathing habits of the people.
The dwellings of the natives, writes Sir George Simpson, are
extremely neat and clean both internally and externally. They
are constructed of a framework of bamboos covered with grass.
The furniture is very simple, though generally sufficient for the
wants of the inmates in such a climate. The houses (he is
writing in 1842) are commonly separated into sleeping and
sitting compartments by means df curtains hung across from
wall to wall: but everything, whether exposed to view or not,
whether within the house itself or merely within the surrounding inclosure, is scrupulously clean and neat, presenting, in this
respect, a wonderful contrast with the filth and confusion of
most of the native lodges of the Continent. At whatever time
of the day we dropped into a house, we found no difference in
any of these particulars; there was never any unpleasant smell
about the premises. In fact, as far as my experience goes,
cleanliness may be ranked among the cardinal virtues of the
Htawaiians.t
* Ellis mentions, as an instance of their hospitality, that two hundred dogs were cooked at one feast: and that Auna, his guide, had seen
four hundred baked dogs at one entertainment, with proportionate quantities of fish, hogs, and vegetables. The value of the dogs, which are
bred and fed purposely for eating, would be very great.
t ' Overland Journey,' ii. 41.




LOVE OF LITIGATION.


359


Other observers, it must be added, give by no means
the same satisfactory account of their cleanliness.
In no country is there greater safety to person and
property. Murders occur at about the rate of one in
three years, and the malefactors are chiefly Chinese
immigrants. A few petty larcenies enliven the criminal
courts; but the newspapers complained lately that no
burglary has taken place to give animation to their
columns, and interest to their readers.
The Hawaiians are devotedly fond of litigation. It is
the form the combativeness of their nature has taken
since war and violence have been abandoned. Some of
the natives make shrewd lawyers, and their courts are
always pretty full of business. Justice is administered
in many parts of the islands by native judges, some of
whom show great aptitude for their office. The writer
of some rural sketches in the ' Commercial Advertiser,'
was much struck by an individual of this order, whoni
he describes as a fine-looking fellow about six feet high,
well-proportioned, and with a hand that might well
have belonged to a high-born patrician woman. He
had abundance of the dignity befitting his occupation.
This dignity characterized the chiefs. Those whom we
have seen in Europe possessed it in a large degree.
They were at their ease in the best society; and whilst
never intrusive, they expressed in their bearing that
sense of nobility which makes itself felt in the leaders
of a civilized or of a savage society.
These Polynesian islanders are, as already stated, an
aesthetic people, having an extreme love of the beautiful.
During the first glimmerings of civilization they imported from Europe fine glass and china: the fashions
of Paris are reproduced in Honolulu. Their admiration of personal beauty is extreme in all classes. Some




360. HAWAIIAN ISLANDS*


few years ago, there landed on the wharf at Honolulu a beautiful stranger, the native of another island
of the group.   Beauty will always assert its sway
and draw us with a single hair. The highest instance
of beauty in every race would be admitted to be admirable in every other nation. A young beauty from
China would create a sensation in a London drawingroom or a Parisian salon. This Aphrodite stepping on
shore from the lapping waters was instantly recognized
as superlatively beautiful. She was immediately surrounded by unaffected admirers, each of whom in his
unsophisticated adoration saluted her with his lips.
Never was a first-born child more 'fretted with sallies
of his mother's kisses.' The news of her arrival spread
like wildfire. Men left their anvil and their poi, and
crowded round the lovely stranger. She stood there
like the moon within a coloured halo,-only the halo
pressed rather close, and came near stifling her. The
police were obliged to interfere; and even then a fate
like that of the late Miss Verey, who was looked to
death by admirers, became imminent; when the happy
thought occurred to the chief constable, or (but we
hope not) to the lady herself, of placing a tariff on her
ruby lips, of a quarter of a dollar for each salute. The
money was cheerfully paid, but the 'pull' against the
public had gradually the desired effect, and the beautiful
stranger in a few hours was released.
Their love of the graceful and beautiful was seen in
the universal use of flowers and leaves for coronals.
Even in their churches the people would throw themselves on the ground in graceful attitudes wreathed as
at a festival. They have lately been taught better
manners. The writer of the rural sketches previously
mentioned thus describes an unpremeditated picture on
which he chanced:



APPRECIATION OF BEAUTY. —LOVE OF ANIMALS. 361


It was a group of which a painter might have been proud,
consisting chiefly of a party of native girls. Their hair and
necks were ornamented with the gay flowers of the ohelo
(Gualtheria penduliflorum), as beautifully interwoven as if
done by fairy fingers. They appeared as unsophisticated and
happy as if they were strangers to every sorrow. In the
centre was an old man, nearly one hundred years of age, who
had lived in the days of Kamhllameha I., and had witnessed
the annihilation of several pagan temples, and the destruction
of 40,000 idols.
It is to be hoped that the centenarian was a good old
man, and was teaching that young galaxy of beauty
some useful moral lesson.
The Hawaiians are a somewhat agricultural people,
and were so when first discovered, and indeed from
their earliest history. In this respect they differed
from the aborigines of North and South America, as
they did also in regard to their worship, being idolaters,
whilst the red races of the northern continent maintained an immaterial worship. This agrarian tendency
may account for their love of animals. They took to
riding as if 'to the manner born.' Every woman has
a pet animal; and mothers who are nursing their offspring will suckle a puppy at the same time-a rivalry
by no means in favour of the strength or number of
their own progeny. Sometimes the favourite is a young
pig. Their tenderness towards this unclean animal was
amusingly exemplified by a traveller who came upon
a group of native women surrounding a hog of five
hundred pounds' weight, which lay panting in the
midst. The females had denuded themselves almost
entirely, and were cooling the pig by dipping their
garments in water and covering him with them.
In old countries where races have amalgamated and




362


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


systems changed, where a remnant of the past runs
parallel with the body of the present or blends intricately with it, it is not always easy to trace each
peculiarity of the national mind to its source. But in
Hawaii, unconquered and uncolonized, retaining its
language and the broader conditions of social existence
the same at the commencement of this century as they
had been for untold ages gone by, this homogeneity
makes it less difficult to discover the connection between
cause and effect in what is called the genius of the
people. Of their moral failings en6ugh has already
been said, and the sources of the laxity have been sufficiently alluded to.  Their indolence has also been
accounted for, an indolence which must not be confounded with sloth. From time immemorial the people
lived under chiefs of greater or less influence.  For
them they worked and fought, and from them they received protection and the necessaries of life, either
directly in the shape of a share of the common product,
or of the produce of their individual labour on little
patches of land set apart for their particular use. They
did the work of the chiefs in companies, each company
having a luna or head man. The rapidity with which
they could build and thatch a large house, or lay up
great lengths of stone wall, or prepare and plant acres
of land with kalo, or cut and carry to the beach cargoes
of sandal-wood, was quite surprising. The particular
work having been done, the people would fall forthwith
into a state of repose, or hurry back to resume their
own little affairs at home. Thus their minds acquired
a habit of alternating between action and inaction,
which distinguishes them to the present day. We have
spoken of them as indolent, but there is hardly an individual among the natives who is not capable, at times,




POTENTIAL ENERGIES.


of very severe exertion and of great activity. The
nature of their private agricultural employments tended
then, and still tends, to create the same habit of intermittent labour. To prepare a kalo patch for planting,
after it has lain fallow and its loamy bottom become
sunbaked, is no easy matter. To accomplish the task is
very hard work; but the proper preparations made, its
possessor may spend his time easily enough, for any
woman or child is able to tend the kalo as it advances
towards maturity. To fell a tree and chip out a canoe
and shape it is hard work, and to carry it through the
woods and down rough valleys and precipices on human
shoulders is not less so; but to paddle it about when
floated and bring it to land on the crest of a breaker is
more a matter of skill and pleasure than of strength.
These instances may suffice to show that habits of continuous labour were not necessary in the social condition
of the people, and were therefore not formed; but it
would be an injustice to presume that therefore they
cannot be formed under different auspices. The men
who hire themselves on the sugar and coffee plantations
and labour day by day all the year round, might be
pointed to in order to show that the Hawaiian can
assimilate himself to new habits of labour; and it is to
be observed that they generally re-hire themselves at the
expiration of their engagement. Then there are the
printers and salesmen, the carpenters, blacksmiths, seamen, tailors, and house-servants, all of whom labour
continuously. No doubt there are many strong, heavylimbed young men who prefer riding about on horseback, calling from house to house, and eating where
hospitality offers, to regular industry. But would not
a great many of the working men in England do the
same if they had the opportunity? That drones should




364             HAWAIIAN ISLANDS,
be permitted in the hive is unwise, but as long as they
are permitted there will be no lack of them. These
remarks are important in estimating the calibre of the
Hawaiians, for in this bustling age little interest can
be felt in a hopelessly lazy man or people.
The effect of the ancient custom of the chiefs calling
upon their retainers to go together to labour, and return
together to repose, is observable in many of the popular
habits at the present time. The people of a village
often agree that on a certain day they will in a body
undertake such or such a job, though the work done by
each is on his own account. In our country we are
accustomed to see each individual perform what he has
to do when it best suits his own convenience, and are
surprised at a procedure so different from our own.
In the same way the women will enter into a convention that on a given day they will go into the woods to
pick apples or gather flowers for wreaths, although the
apples would have tasted as sweet and the wreaths have
become them as well if gathered on any intervening
day.
Among the Hawaiian customs may be mentioned a
fashion of giving a feast on the death-day of those who
were dear to them. On such, to us sad, occasions they
make quite as merry as if they were assisting at the
celebration of a birth. They very frequently, also, keep
the bodies of the dead, coffined, but unburied, in their
dwelling-houses, eating and enjoying themselves in that
solemn presence, and telling good stories of the departed,
whom they indicate by name, or, more forcibly, by
pointing to the bier. Widows of rank sometimes have
a tent pitched near the graves of their husbands, to
which they retire with a retinue every evening, to sleep
or mourn. Yet they fear spirits, and when they see




CUSTOMS.-FAMILY RELATIONS.


365


one in the dark (as the females often do), they scream
till the hills echo their alarm.
A common practice existed in Hawaii of giving away
children at their birth. It was, and still is, very much
the custom to do so. Children so made over have at
least as much, and very often more, love for their adoptive than their natural parents. They regard the real
authors of their being in much the same light as uncles
and aunts; and as if to assist an indefiniteness of feeling
in these respects, the real or the adoptive parents go by
the same title as uncles and aunts; and it does not require a near connection to make an uncle or aunt. As
a consequence, it is sometimes difficult to know the
exact relationship of some person alluded to. For instance, a young Hawaiian may be speaking of his
'makuakane.' You ask him if he means his actual
father?  No. —His adoptive father, then?  No. Who
does he mean?    Why, the brother of his father's
brother's wife. The father's brother's wife being his
aunt, all her sisters are his aunts, and all her brothers
his uncles, and are known (unless particular distinctness is required) by the same definition of relationship as his father and mother de facto. A great many
wise things might be said about a custom which
breaks up what has been considered the nucleus of all
government, to wit, the relationship between parents
and their offspring.  The custom  referred to arose
probably in the good old troublous times, when the
people, females as well as men, were a good deal ordered
out by their superiors, and a family of young children
was inconvenient. We may fancy, too, that the chiefs,
who liked to increase the number of their retainers,
encouraged those under them to adopt the children of
others who were less in a condition to be burthened




366             HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.
with them. But then the chiefs did the same thing;
perhaps from considerations of policy in another shape.
Whatever the origin of the custom, of late years it has
probably been complied with principally from a desire
on the part of the person adopting to have some young
thing to take care of, and be amused by, or to secure
an heir. To whatsoever causes we assign the present want
of fecundity among the Hawaiian females, we must
suppose them to have been more prolific when this
custom first prevailed. To the desire of the childless
for children, therefore, can hardly be traced the origin
and universality of what in most countries would be
called an unnatural practice.




367


CHAPTER XXIII.
THE DEPOPULATION OF THE ISLANDS-KIBROTH-HATAAVA.
nHE depopulation of the Hawaiian Islands is a
chapter which must be written, with however
much regret.
There are, of course, some general principles involved in the phenomenon of coloured races dying out
in the presence of the white man. They are sufficiently
obscure; and were the fact of depopulation confined
to a few instances, some obvious natural causes might
seem sufficient to account for the decay of native
races when in contact with white-skinned settlers or
invaders. But as the rule of decay of dark races seems,
rather, to be universal, we must suppose some more
comprehensive agents of destruction. The fact had
attracted the attention of the Hawaiians themselves
many years ago. Mr. Hill, who visited the islands in
1849, mentions that one of his European friends who
mingled much with the natives informed him that there
was a general impression among them of their early
extinction. Even in the year 1823, when Mr. Ellis
was in Hawaii, a fear of the consequences of the
approach of white men prevailed.
At Waikiki the natives seemed to doubt the propriety of
foreigners coming to reside among them permanently. They
said they had heard that in several countries where foreigners




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


had intermingled with the original natives, the latter had soon
disappeared; and should missionaries come to live there,
perhaps the land would ultimately become theirs, and the
Kanaka iaore (aborigines) cease to be its occupiers.
It is now generally agreed that Captain Cook overestimated the population of the islands at the time of
his visit. He supposed, from what he saw on the coasts,
that the entire number of people on the group was
about 400,000. He would, perhaps, make allowance for
the concourse at any particular bay which such a great
event as the arrival of his ships would draw together,
but he probably overlooked the identity of the crowd,
as to part of its numbers, when he moved from one
anchorage to another.  A theatrical manager would
have put him right at once, because accustomed to
make numerical display of a limited company, by many
exits and entrances: or if he had watched a city
pageant, he would have ascertained that part of the unsatiated spectators in one street filter through side-lanes
and alleys and form a portion of the crowd in another
thoroughfare before the procession arrives there. Two
hundred thousand would be probably the more correct
computation of the Hawaiian population in 1778-9.
Even then it seems likely to have been on the decrease,
and that good old times had preceded that age-times in
which a more numerous people covered the islands, and
left traces of their strength and abundance in roads,
walls, temples, and other works. From Cook's time to
the present, the decay of the population has been continuous and rapid. At the time of Mr. Ellis's visit,
(1823) the number on the whole of the islands was
estimated at from 130,000 to 150,000 souls, of which
85,000 lived on the great island Hawaii.  A rapid
depopulation had certainly taken place in the previous




DECREASE OF POPULATION.


369


fifty years; and among the causes of this decrement
he places the frequent and destructive wars of the early
part of the first Kamehameha's reign; the ravages of a
pestilence first brought by foreign vessels, and which
twice swept through the islands; the awful prevalence
of infanticide; and the increase of depravity and vice,
with their destructive consequences. By the natives'
own account, the population of the islands had diminished to one-fourth its number within forty years.
This statement was probably an exaggeration; but if
it at all approached the truth, it would give support to
Captain Cook's estimate of the people. In Ellis's time
there was no census or systematic means of ascertaining
the true numbers.
When Mr. Hill was in the islands (1849) the population had fallen, by the last census, to 80,000. At the
period of his visit the people were suffering from three
distinct diseases, all of European and American importation-namely, the measles, the influenza, and
dysentery: and they were dying in such numbers that
before he left, the loss was estimated at 10,000, or
one-eighth of the entire population.
By the census of 1853, the total number of the
inhabitants of the islands was 73,137,-of whom 2,118
were foreigners. By the census of 1860 the numbers
had fallen to 69,800,-viz. 67,084 natives and 2,716
foreigners, showing a decrease in seven years of 3,337
persons. To the above numbers, however, must be
added 1,000 Hawaiians who were absent from the islands
at the enumeration, being engaged at sea and in the
guano trade. The excess of males over females at the
last census was 6,198. It is believed that the downward
progress is at present at a stand, and that there is a
probability of the next census showing some small




HIAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


augmentation of numbers. The subjects of most concern in the remainder of this chapter are the causes of
the depopulation, the possibility of their removal or
alleviation, and the means for effecting so desirable an
end.
Taking the lowest estimate of the population at the
moment of Cook's discovery of the islands, the Hawaiian race has diminished to one-third in the last
eighty years. New elements of destruction have certainly been introduced by the contact of the white
man, and full weight must be given to their action:
nevertheless it is almost certain that destroying causes
were already at work, and that the Hawaiians,-we
may say the Polynesians generally,-were a doomed
race.
Ellis (in 1822-3) found, from those chiefs who
were induced to be communicative, that infanticide
still prevailed throughout all the islands; and, with
the exception of the higher class of chiefs, was, as far
as he could learn, practised by all ranks of the people.
However numerous the children among the lower
orders, parents seldom reared more than two or three,
and many spared only one; all the others were destroyed shortly after birth, generally during the first
year of their age. FReticide and abortion are meant no
doubt to be included under the general name of infant
murder; for he says ' the means by which it is accomplished, though numerous, it would be improper to
describe: several methods frequently proved fatal to
the mother also.' From all the information he was able
to obtain, and from facts which came to his knowledge
in the neighbourhood where he resided, there was every
reason to believe that two-thirds of the children were
destroyed. The motives assigned for this wholesale




CAUSES OF DEPOPULATION.


371


infanticide were idleness, the avoidance of restraint to
their habit of wandering, and of the trouble of bringing
up families, and the desire to preserve the mother's
personal charms, which the nursing of children diminished. A greater number of girls were destroyed than
boys: the disproportion of the sexes in the schools was
very marked.
In the year 1846, Mr. Wyllie, the Minister of Foreign
Relations, issued a circular addressed to all the missionaries engaged on the islands, to planters, graziers,
and others from whom statistics could be obtained,
relative to the condition of the Hawaiian people, state
of the laws, religion, topography of the islands, mineral
wealth, &c., comprising in all 116 questions, to which
were added, in 1858, six more questions relating specially to the continuance and well-being of the native
race. To the answers to the first 116 questions (those
to the remaining six have not been received), we turn
for the most authentic information obtainable at the
date of the returns, 1848.  These answers are fromn
eleven missionaries stationed on the five principal
islands, and, as may be supposed, the results obtained
from different islands vary considerably, in consequence
of inequality of climate, foreign immigration, and other
causes. Speaking generally, the following facts were
established. Of epidemic diseases influenza was the
most frequent, prevalent, and fatal. In Oahu it appeared during the wet season about once in two years,
sweeping away many persons very suddenly. Asthma
was a common complaint. Of contagious disorders venereal types were common and destructive. In returns
from two or three districts the annual number of deaths
greatly exceeded the births. The land was much underpeopled; the two districts of Hilo and Puna in Hawaii
B B 2




372


H7AWAIIAN ISLANDS.


would alone support 400,000 inhabitants; in most
places the population was not more than one-fifth of
what the land would advantageously maintain. The
prevailing vices were indolence, deceit, lewdness, and
intemperance.  Lewdness abounded at the seaports,
was encouraged by foreign visitors, and not kept in
check by much social disapprobation. In Maui licentiousness prevailed still more among married persons
than the single, and great complaint was made of the
conduct there of men of standing from Europe and
America. The sin was greatly increased by the numbers of whalers and merchantmen which put into the
ports to refresh. The consequences were but too apparent. The blood of the nation was affected by it;
energy and procreative power were withered up, and
the probability of a healthy progeny was cut off. Early
decrepitude and barrenness bespoke the miserable taint.
In some places, however, a change for the better
was showing itself in the opinions and habits of the
people.
In answer to the direct question No. 73, as to the
cause of the decrease of the population, it was answered,
indolence, improvidence, and ignorance of the laws of
animal life; but the most direct, certain, and fearful of
all exterminating causes are early and protracted habits
of licentiousness. Oppression was also adduced as a
cause of decrement, and an intelligent native, David
Malo, placed foreign influence among such agents;
and he asked, 'Why did not our children die as frequently in the time of our dark-heartedness as they do
now?' The adoption of foreign materials for clothing
appeared unfavourable to health, though conducive to
decency; but whatever reasons the respondents to the
questions give for the falling-off of population, they are




CAUSES OF DEPOPULATION.


373


invariably brought home to the enormous dimensions
of the evil which had fallen, and was still falling, on
the Hawaiian race, in consequence of illicit intercourse
with men from Christian countries. One of the answers
differs from the rest, and turns the thoughts to the
general fact of coloured races dying out in the presence
of white-skinned men. Mr. Coan gives as a cause, the
mysterious will of God.' There are causes beyond the
reach of human investigation, to which must be referred
the unfruitfulness of many not the subjects of disease,
and the early death of children and females who might
have been expected to live and add to the natural
increase of the nation.
Later writers confirm the foregoing views of causes
destructive to population.  Sir George Simpson, in
writing of the years 1842-3, having referred to a great
waste of life caused in obtaining sandalwood from the
mountains, in the early part of the late king's reign,
refers to two then existing causes which poisoned the
national life —immigration of the men, and the depravity
of the women. A thousand males in the very prime of
life were leaving the islands for California, Columbia, on
long voyages, and in whaling-vessels. As to the women,
in addition to infanticide, and that too in its most
appalling form of living burial or of artificial abortion,
with its consequent sterility, mothers were in the habit
of exchanging children, and allowing pet puppies to
share nature's food with their own offspring. As to
results, the phenomena of the census taken in 1840
were but too conclusive. There was less than onefourth part of the population of one district under the
age of eighteen. By the census of Great Britain in
1851, the proportions of persons under twenty years
old and above twenty years were as nine-and-a-half




374


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


millions to eleven-and-a-half millions.*     In the enumeration of Kauai, referred to above, the progeny deducible
was about half a child for each couple that could be
classed as men and women.
Mr. Hill, writing of the year 1849, comparing th6
waste of life in white and coloured populations, remarks:In the islands of the West Indies, and in those near the
coast of Africa, quite free from the pestilential malaria of the
continental shores, and possessing a similar soil to that of these
islands and a not very dissimilar vegetation, beneath the most
brilliant skies and amidst the abundance of Nature, the white
man withers and dies, while the native flourishes; but in the
islands of the Pacific the white man lives, while the native
dies at such a fearful ratio as to threaten the speedy depopulation of the group.... For the sickness generally of the
natives we must look chiefly to causes which are perhaps
beyond the reach of any human means to check.
* A tabulated statement issued by authority, comparing the two
census years 1853 and 1860, gives the following results for seven
islands, full details of each of their several districts being exhibited
therein:
1853. Number of males..  37,079    Females.. 33,940
1860,,... 35,379,.      31,705
Total in 1853.... 71,019
1860...       67,084
Decrease in 1860..   3,935
Persons under twenty years, 1853. 29,923  Above twenty. 41,096,,,,,   1860. 20,829,,. 46,170
Decrease in 1860.. 9,094         Increase. 5,074
Thus the disproportion between the old and the young, the passing
generation and that which should succeed, was greatly increasing, the
proportions being in 1853, 1 young person (under 20) to 1'375; whilst
in 1860 the ratio had sunk to 1 young person to 2-216 old.




CAUSES OF DEPOPULATION.


375


Still more recently, the author of ' Progress of Events,'
remarking on the decay of the Hawaiian race, says:Many will attribute this decrease entirely to the intercourse
with men from civilized lands; and that doubtless has had
much effect in one respect-the introduction of disease, which,
from the universal licentiousness of the people, has been widely
disseminated, and of which the numerous sores and cutaneous
affections to be seen among them are melancholy evidence:
but in other respects the intercourse with foreigners has had
no share in this depopulation; for in secluded districts and
unfrequented islands of the group, where ardent spirits are
quite unknown, and where no white men (save missionaries)
reside, the decrease of the population is even more rapid than
in the country surrounding places where white residents are
concentrated, and which shipping frequents.
The oppressive system of government, the discontinuance of
ancient sports, and consequent change in the habits of the
people, have been powerful agents in this work of depopulation; and the ill-judged enforcement of cruel punishments
and heavy penalties for breaches of chastity have much aided
it, by giving an additional stimulus to the practice-always
too common among Polynesian females-of causing abortion,
of which practice sterility is the natural result.
We have treated this painful topic as slightly and
delicately as possible, consistently with giving any view
at all of the causes affecting the decay of the Polynesian
population. To have observed greater reticence would
have been simply to have left the subject untouched;
and to have afforded no data for after-considerations as
to the conservation of a very interesting race, which the
philanthropist may still hope to see 'take root downwards and bear fruit upwards' as Heaven rains in greater
measures its healing influences on these nations.
It is true that some of the missionaries of whom
Mr. Wyllie made his enquiries, and Dr. Armstrong




376


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


himself, the President of the Board of Education, speak
in the language almost of despair as to the chances of
preserving the native race. ' It is hardly worth while,'
writes one of them, ' to seek for the best means of preserving a people, when it is a given point that all means
for the purpose will be alike unavailing.' And in the
summary to the questions answered, the writers say:
' On the whole, it is doubtful whether the native race
will be able to withstand the shock which the overwhelming wave of Anglo-Saxon energy, enterprise, and
cupidity has given it.' The active and benevolent mind
of Mr. Wyllie seems to have imbibed some similar
desponding views. In 1857 he writes: ' It is my frank
belief that unless Hawaiian females can be rendered
more pure and chaste, it is impossible to preserve the
Hawaiian people in being. If that vice (prostitution)
subsist, in less than a century the Hawaiian sovereign
will have no native subjects t6 govern, and the besom
of destruction will have removed this people from the
face of the earth.'
It is evident that unless, by some speedy interposition,
the destroying agencies above described can be arrested
or reduced, the unmixed Hawaiian race will follow the
Dodo, and be extinguished within the term of our own
generation. It has been marching with accelerating
steps down the fatal slopes, and the remnant which yet
remains is'... but a wreck and residue,
Whose only business is to perish.'
Happily, some gleams of hope and encouragementalready
are bursting through the gloom. Reduced in number
to little more than 70,000, the population seems to
have touched its lowest point. Some of the causes of




EFFORTS OF THE GOVERNMENT.


377


destruction are diminished. Oppression, which makes
wise men mad, is past. The falling-off of the whaling
trade of the North Pacific during the past few years,
though attended at first with the inconvenience of a
corresponding decrease of revenue and commercial
activity, is one of the greatest benefits the islands could
have received. The crowd of whalers, which visited all
the Hawaiian ports and roadsteads, greatly increased depravity, and propagated fell disease among the natives,
which evil of course was propagated back among the
visitors of the islands. The false stimulus given by the
whaling trade drew all the energy of the islands to the
coasts, and left their interior resources undeveloped,
or only utilized for the fattening of herds and the
production of vegetables.
The attention of legislators, physicians, and philanthropists has been powerfully drawn to the preservation
of the race; and government has engaged itself with
plans tending to regulate and confine vices, which it
may be out of its power to extirpate entirely. Its recent
enactments on the subject of prostitution have reduced
the number of the hetserm of the streets, and the assignment of a syphilitic ward in the new Queen's Hospital
at Honolulu has already saved many lives, and been
attended with the most marked sanitary advantages.
These well-intended regulations, deliberately framed by
the two houses, affecting public women, have led to a
protracted discussion, and no small amount of obloquy
has been cast on the legislative body in consequence.
The actions of government receive a very free criticism
in one or two of the newspapers published in Honolull,
and the governing body has been severely and sometimes intemperately attacked, for its endeavours to
control a vice it has not power to abolish.   The




378


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


Missionary journal can see no distinction between
regulating a vicious condition of society and the open
encouragement and legislation of vice. It views the
syphilitic ward of the Queen's Hospital as a direct
premium for the continuance of a state of things which
the legislature ought, in its opinion, to have made vanish
with a magician's wand, or to have exorcised with an
apostle's power. It shuts its eyes to the absolute benefits which the community has already received from
medical treatment of the disease, both in its terrible
and destructive effects on the subjects of it, and the
check it has given to its spread even within the twelve
months that the hospital has been open for patients.
It demands war to the knife against sin and the sinner,
-unenquiring condemnation and unpitying punishment. In the meantime government feels its hands
strengthened by the approbation of enlightened observers, and by the progress already made in decreasing
the power of a scourge which had been steadily decimating its subjects.
But it is to higher influences we must look for the
possible salvation and regeneration of the Hawaiian
nation. The instrument must clearly be the inculcation
of a pure and gentle religion; a holy and exalted doctrine, illustrated and made living by the Christian
conduct and self-denying lives of its professors and its
teachers. Such influences have already had some weight;
but there has been about former efforts of the American
missionaries a 'hidden want,' which shows that vital
power is lacking, the loving power which works by
assimilation,-the leaven which must permeate the
mass and take hold of the affections and will of the
natives, and convert them not into hypocrites but
Christians. Whilst in some districts the more open




AT SPES NON FRACTA.'


379


forms of vice have been abolished, and some of the
wasting sins which have been alluded to have almost
entirely vanished, the bulk of the people are Christians
only in name. Independents and Romanists frankly
avow the smallness of their success in producing a vital
change.  There remains for trial the efforts of the
English Church. We wait to see what may be the
effect on the Hawaiian mind of the beauty of her holiness, which has usually been made more conspicuous
and intense in missionary spheres. That religion which
bears on its credentials that it is pure, must also show
itself gentle. It is not the rod of the avenger, but the
staff of the shepherd, which will reclaim the sheep that
have wandered, and guard and lead the lambs of the
flock.  Barnabas may prevail where Boanerges is
powerless.
To take the young Hawaiian girls at an age so early
that even they have not been contaminated, to keep
them as in a parental home, to watch them by day and
night, and screen them from sights and sounds of impurity, to teach them to control transmitted passions,
and to fill their minds with interesting subjects of
thought, to befriend them always, and finally to see
them married respectably-these are the means by
which the nation must rise in true morality, and become an increasing people-a high and inspiring task
to those who undertake it, and in the hands of some
Florence Nightingale an instrument of enormous power:
a subject of earnest prayer for those who long for the
extension of Christ's kingdom, and for the ingathering
of the farthest isles in the day when the great trumpet
is blown. The painter or the sentimentalist may exclaim against this change of natural habit, instincts,
picturesque attitude, this assimilation of the wild and




380


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS..


the beautiful to the thoughts, manners, dress, and expression of a hackneyed Europe. Well, something
must be sacrificed. We may have to forsake the temple
of art, to dwell in the temple of God. Hawaiian maids
may be no longer allowed to rise on the traveller's
sight from their favourite streams, like laughing naiads;
they must be won from the hula dance, and led away
from every temptation, though at some loss of natural
beauty and grace. Clothed, and in a better mind, they
may themselves consent, willingly, to abandon tastes
and pursuits in which they once rejoiced, to learn a
more enduring joy in the narrow but not uncheerful
path that leads towards the gates of Heaven. Even
the simplicity of their flower-garlands it may be found
wise to lay aside, though a sigh follow the long-loved
ornament, plucked from Nature's own wardrobe; and a
loving regimen may find it necessary to teach the
Polynesian girls contentedly to walk discrowned on
earth, that hereafter their brows may be wreathed with
flowers which cannot wither.




I/ Ijjl
/1jl1161
i:;ir
i:iili iiiiliiiiiiiliilEilii "
liral
i!E Clr It;i
iii i
ii",i liL;
i i c:
ii
ri "iP a
1;.It
i 151 S
I
~iiiiii!
II/'"'iiii'
-'"""
'jiiiiilIili::iliiiii:liill;
IP '
iirillrtiiliiifiiii i




I




381


CHAPTER XXIV.
MISSIONARY ACHIEVEMENT AND FAILURE.
CHRISTIANITY has now been on its trial in Hawaii
for forty years. During all that time, its exponents
have been United States missionaries of the Congregational or Independent denomination. For a quarter of
a century the Church of Rome has also had a footing
in the islands, and during the last ten years has proselytized with activity, and greatly extended the cords
of her tent. The Roman Church, however, dwells in
lands foreign to the sway of the Pope, as a body of
exiles,-or, rather, as a religious clique, differing somewhat in form, under the atmospheric pressure of
Protestant opinion, from the perfect development she
exhibits in lands which she calls her own. As she does
not exert any direct political influence in the Sandwich
Islands, her action is to be regarded rather as a large
exception than as an operative rule, and we do not at
present concern ourselves, except incidentally, with her
communion.
But forty years afford a fair opportunity of observing
what life and potentiality there may be in the largest
and most forcible form of dissent, unimpeded for the
greater part of that time by any rival or antagonist,




3?2


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


and unfettered by any open connection with the State.
If the American missionaries have not succeeded in all
that they have attempted, or filled the large programme
they had sketched, it is nevertheless no small work
which they have accomplished in the Hawaiian Archipelago. In an age of 'immeasurable desires and weak
volitions' failure and incompleteness are seen around us
at every step: and it is with no unfriendly hand that
we trace the proceedings of the missionaries, and endeavour to form some estimate of the ultimate effects
and capabilities of religion as taught by them and
exemplified in their conduct.
We will first listen to their own voice in the summary
of their successes given in the Annual Reports of the
American Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions,
published at Boston, Mass., and to the evidence of an
impartial observer who lately exercised his intelligent
eyes on men and things during two months' wandering
through the islands of Hawaii. In recording the impressions of Mr. R. H. Dana, the persons who are
responsible for drawing up the above reports have
quoted so much of his letters as eulogised the missionaries. We have no right to complain that they
omitted further remarks commendatory of the Roman
Catholic clergy, and on other important subjects, which
would have been unsuitable to the objects of the Report,
if not unsatisfactory to the supporters of the mission.
To the omitted portions of Mr. Dana's letters we shall
have to call attention in the latter part of this chapter.
' Before the introduction of the Gospel,' writes the Report of
1859, 'a feudal despotism held the mass of the people in the
most abject bondage. The land all belonged to the King; and
all kinds of property, and even life itself, were subject to his




IMMEDIATE EFFECTS OF CHRISTIANITY.


383


caprice. Under the benign influence of the Gospel a constitutional monarchy has been introduced.  Lands have been
divided among chiefs and peoples, and a feesimple title given.
A liberal constitution and an enlightened system of laws have
been adopted. The lower house of the legislature, which meets
biennially, is chosen by the universal suffrage of the people.
Regular courts of law are established throughout the Islands,
with a supreme court at the metropolis. Life and property
are as safe as in any nation of the earth. Taxes are light, and
the government is administered on just and economical principles. Industry, comfortable houses, a civilised dress, and the
other blessings of civilisation follow in the train of these
changes. Foreign aid, of various kinds, is called in to help
forward this onward progress; but Christianity has been the
foundation and support of all these improvements.'
Claiming for Christianity the material prosperity and
advancement of the Islands, the Report of 1860 challenges comparison of their condition in the year 1820and
the fortieth year after. In national finance, the public
income, in two years ending the 31st March, 1860, was
$655,866, and the expenditure $643,088. The imports
in the year 1859 were $1,089,660, and the exports
$931,329. The judicial statistics show the convictions
in 1859 to have been 4,007, exhibiting a decrease of 800
on the previous year. Two-thirds of the entire number
of persons convicted were for drunkenness, fornication,
and adultery; whilst there were only nine convictions
for burglary, and a portion of these may have been
foreigners. Attention is called to public improvements,
viz., the water-supply of Honolulu, the inter-island
steamer, the harbour-dredging, &c. Coming to subjects
more cognate to the special work of a religious mission,
the income raised by the school-tax in 1859 was
$31,491.




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


The number of Free Schools in that year was.. 285
The number of scholars.... 8628
Schools in which English is taught...  1
Native youths in the latter.... 804
White children in school......190
Mixed children in do.....          166
Total number in the schools.....9782
More noticeable, perhaps, is the fact that the Hawaiians
are themselves missionaries, and possess a missionary
vessel, the ' Morning Star,' which keeps up communication with the stations established in the Marquesan
and Micronesian groups, making occasional visits to
other islands. The Marquesan mission is supported by
the Hawaiian 'churches,' which contributed for the
purpose $1,918-the total receipts of the Hawaiian
Missionary Society being $3,310. The people are liberal
in supporting their ministers and edifices,-very liberal
considering their small means. At Lahaina the inhabitants of the town had expended $4,341 in rebuilding
their meeting-house.
We turn now to Mr. Dana's excerpted remarks,
contained in the Mission Report of 1860, and quote
the passage of the report which contains them in
extenso:'It is no small thing to say of the missionaries of the American
Board,' says a gentleman who visited the Sandwich Islands the
past year, and wrote thence, 'that in less than forty years
they have taught this whole people to read and to write, to
cipher and to sew.  They have given them an alphabet,
grammar, and dictionary; preserved their language from extinction; given it a literature, and translated into it the Bible,
and works of devotion, science, and entertainment, &c. They
have established schools, reared up native teachers, and so
pressed their work that now the proportion of inhabitants who




DANA ON THE MISSIONARIES.


885'


can read and write is greater than in New England; and
whereas they found these islanders a nation of half-naked
savages, living in the surf and on the sand, eating raw fish,
fighting among themselves, tyrannised over by feudal chiefs,
and abandoned to sensuality, they now see them decently
clothed, recognising the law of marriage, knowing something of
accounts, going to school and public worship with more regularity than the people do at home -and the more elevated of
them taking part in conducting the affairs of the constitutional
monarchy under which they live, holding seats on the
judicial bench and in the legislative chambers, and filling posts
in the local magistracies.'
The gentleman who writes thus is Richard H. Dana, Esq.,
a respected member of the Episcopal Church, and of the
Boston Bar, who describes himself as, in the two months spent
in the Islands, 'the guest of many of the mission families,
more or less acquainted with nearly all of them.' After commending their hospitality, intelligence, general information,
and solicitude for the education of their children, he says:'I have seen in their houses collections of minerals, shells,
plants, and flowers, which must be valuable to science; and the
missionaries have often preserved the best, sometimes the only,
records of volcanic eruptions, earthquakes and other phenomena,
and meteorological observations. Besides having given, a. I
have said, to the native language an alphabet, grammar, distionary, and literature, they have done nearly all that has been
done to preserve the national traditions, legends, and poetry.
But for the missionaries, it is my firm belief that the Hawaiian would never have been a written language; there would
have been few or no trustworthy early records, historical or
scientific; the traditions would have perished; the native government would have been overborne by foreign influences:
and the interesting, intelligent, gentle race would have sunk
into insignificance, and perhaps into servitude to the dominant
whites.'
The testimony is so explicit that the Committee make
further extracts fiom the letters of Mr. Dana:C




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


'Among the traders, shipmasters, and travellers who have
visited these Islands, some have made disparaging statements
respecting the missionaries; and a good deal of imperfect information is carried home by persons who have visited only the
half-Europeanised ports, where the worst view of the condition
of the natives is presented. I visited among all classes-the
foreign merchants, traders and shipmasters, foreign and native
officials, and with the natives, from the King and several of
his chiefs, to the humblest poor, whom I saw without constraint
in a tour I made alone over Hawaii, throwing myself upon
their hospitality in their huts. I sought information from all,
foreign and native, friendly and unfriendly; and the conclusion
to which I came is, that the best men, and those who are best
acquainted with the history of things here, hold in high esteem
the labours and conduct of the missionaries.
'Doubtless the missionaries have largely influenced the
legislation of the kingdom and its police system; it is fortunate
they have done so. Influence of some kind was the law of
the native development. Had not the missionaries and their
friends among the foreign merchants and professional men
been in the ascendant, these Islands would have presented only
the usual history of a handful of foreigners exacting everything
from a people who denied their right to anything. As it is, in
no place in the world that I have visited, are the rules which
control vice and regulate amusement so strict, yet so reasonable and fairly enforced.
'The Government and the best citizens stand as a good
genius between the natives and the besieging army. As to
the interior, it is well known that a man may travel alone, with
money, through the wildest spots unarmed. Having just come
from the mountains of California, I was prepared with the
usual and necessary belt and its appendages of that region,
but was told that these defences were unheard of in Hawaii.
I found no hut without its Bible and hymn-book in the native
tongue; and the practice of family-prayer and grace before
meat, though it be over no more than a calabash of poi and a




THE MISSIONARIES ON THEMSELVES.


387


few dried fish, and whether at home or on journeys, is as common as in New England a century ago.'
These statements, with those in the Report of last year
(which was drawn up by one of the older missionaries, then
in this country), contain, doubtless, a correct representation
of the results of divine grace at the Sandwich Islands. Yet
so imperfect is the language, and so foreign to our experience is
the social condition of the Hawaiian people, that it is difficult
to convey correct impressions concerning them to untravelled
minds. The correspondence between the Prudential Committee and their brethren at those islands on the subject of a
native pastorate for the churches now in progress, has called
forth some affecting representations concerning that peopleenough almost to create a doubt, whether gospel institutions
can ever become entirely self-supporting amongst them. The
more important parts of this testimony have been published in
the 'Missionary Herald.' The testimony, however, is strangely
conflicting; and we must suppose, either that the character of
the people stands at very different points of elevation, on the
scale of moral purity, in different parts of the Islands, or else
that the witnesses take too strong views, probably on both
sides. It must be admitted, however, that while the Christianization of the Sandwich Islanders is as real as that of any
nominally Christian nation in the world-the proofs of a national Christianity being all there-the people must needs
be far below the standard of the other Protestant Christian
nations, which have been nominally Christian for ages.
Now, we can supplement these statements with data
from other sources. The statistics given below are
from a government return, and a chief source of their
interest lies in comparing the numbers against those
of the population. In the non-census years, the number
of the people is deduced:

cc2




388


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


Number                    Average
Number  Number of  Cost of  Average
Years  Population  of  Scholrs     oos  Dys each Convictions
Schools                    School
1845.     640    20,000
1846..        18,644  $20,000
1847.     625    19,644    21,706.
1848   87,063   527    19,028    22,319  145-8
1849   84,165   540    15,620    21,990  164-1
1850   83,988   543    15,308    25,890  153-3
1851   80,620   535    15,482    25,271  137-8
1852   79,650   440    13,948    24,049   30      3,043
1853   73,137   423    12,205    20,563  127-8    3,173
1854   73,079   412    10,241    20,705  132-5    3,571
18556  73,032......    4,946
1856   72,740   332     8,671    25,827   143     3,932
1857   72,338   312     8,460    27,578  164      4,007
1858   71,954   293     8,628    29,215  192
1859   71,275   289     8,628    34,165  179


And we select from the answers given to Mr. Wyllie's
questions these replies, which speak greatly in favour
of the missionaries:
QUESTION 54. What fees, if any/, are charged, either by Protestants or Catholics, for baptisms, funerals, or marriages?
ANSWER. No fees have ever been charged, and no gifts are
received in this district by Protestants for any of these services
(Iilo, Hawaii); and the only exception in the answers to this
question is, that a small fee or present (half-a-dollar) is received,
sometimes, when a marriage is performed in a private house.
QUESTION 56. What, if any, sources of jealousy exist between
the Protestant and Catholic missionaries and teachers?
ANSWER. None of a personal nature exist.
QUESTION 57. Suggestions to promote mutual concord and
charity?
ANSWER. A free and full declaration of religious sentiments
on the part of each is not inconsistent with the most enlarged
Christian charity.  The only suggestions, therefore, to be
offered are, that free toleration of sentiments be allowed, and a
truly evangelical course pursued in propagating doctrine, and




CAUSES OF FAILURE.


389


that urbanity and Christian kindness characterise every movement in personal intercourse.
And now, possibly, some will ask, in respect to the
American missionaries, what lack they yet?-what are
the faults they can be charged with? and, if these be
their successes, what, and to what extent, are their
failures?
To such questions we offer a candid and impartial
reply. The missionaries have not attained the measure
of success which might have been expected from the
long and strenuous efforts they have made. They have
not truly Christianized  or regenerated the nation
Their proceedings have been attended with grave and
obvious faults. They have been wrong in their presentment of Christianity to the native mind. They
have presented Christianity as a severe, legal, Jewish
religion, deprived of its dignity, beauty, tenderness, and
amability.  They have not made the people love
religion. Like the Jewish Law, their system has been
the office of a pedagogue leading children to the school
of Christ; but the scholars have attended His porch
reluctantly, and have gladly escaped from His teaching.
In their rigorous sabbatarian view of the Lord's Day,
in their desire to enforce a Maine liquor-law, and in
some other matters, they have attempted to infringe on
the natural rights of men, and have in native eyes reproduced the detested tabu system,-the nightmare
from which the nation escaped in 1820.
They have been wrong in their hothouse plan of
forcing Christianity on an unprepared people, endeavouring to make them run before they could walk,
or even stand alone; pouring water out of buckets on
small-mouthed phials; and, by using the means of




390


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


secular punishments and espionage, converting the
nation into hypocrites instead of Christians. They have
been wrong in using their former great influence with
the native government, in urging a hard repressive
system of legislation. They have been wrong in some
of their views of education, especially in setting their
face against the teaching of the English language,
although they know that the civilisation and the religion
of Europe and America cannot be conveyed to the
people's mind in the meagre copia verborum of the
Hawaiian language, which has not words to express
ideas of every-day occurrence in the civilised world.
They have been wrong-at least they have been unfortunate-in the personal disqualifications of many of
their teachers for their task, when so much of a missionary's success depends upon appearance, manner, and
knowledge.,
They have made, indeed, an essential mistake in their
conception of a religion,-producing it in a cold didactic form, with nothing to allure the heart and understanding through the medium of the senses and aesthetic
tastes. They have not chosen to see that all religions
worthy of the name of systems, combine moral sanctions
with an outward worship. At the commencement of
the Scriptures we read of sacrifices and altars; and in
the Apocalyptic wonders which conclude the inspired
Canon, we read of elders and living beings worshipping
before God's throne, and the infinite choir of harpers
sending forth their everlasting melody.
It must not be supposed that these accusations are
gratuitous and unfounded. They are all based on facts
contained in many documents, and from the mouths of
many witnesses. They lead to the conclusion that
religion still waits to be seen in the Hawaiian Islands




CONTINUATION OF MR. DANA'S ACCOUNT.


391


in its true colours,-winning, persuasive, holy, and
altogether lovely. We proceed to adduce remarks from
several late observers.
And first we call the testimony of Mr. Dana himself,
whose impartiality we can hardly doubt, after the kind
and ample praise he has given of the missionaries, and
which we have already quoted. His remarks are contained in a letter to the 'New York Tribune' newspaper. Having spoken of the Congregationalists, he
has something to say in commendation of the Roman
Catholic clergy:I had a letter of introduction to the Roman Catholic Bishop
(M. Maigret), and visited several churches and schools under
their jurisdiction, which extends over all the islands of the
group. So far as I observed, the missions are successful: the
churches are well filled, and the priests bear good reputations
for fidelity and self-denial, and several whom I met I found to
be men of thorough education. They gained,' especially in
public, esteem by their conduct during the terrible visitation
of the smallpox a few years ago.
The minds of the natives of this zone of the globe peculiarly
require something to retain their attention and interest. The
missionaries have recognised this law in their schools, and find
it expedient to fix the attention of the scholars in recitation by
classes, by responsative and general reading and answers, by
the use of figures on black-boards, and by maps and pictures.
The only system of worship and discipline which the missionaries have introduced has been that which is known at home
as the Puritan or Independent, and in this they have had the
field to themselves. The houses of worship are plain naked
buildings, with pews and benches and a large desk, in which the
preacher, sometimes dressed in the tweed sack-coat of the shop
and market (or, as I once saw, with the spurs on his boots),
stands to read, preach, and pray. The congregation sit through
the whole service, not only never kneeling or standing in
prayer, but not even bending the head forward in token of




392                HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.
reverence.  The music is solely the singing of one or two
rhyming hymns, performed by a small choir. The congregation have no part in the service-they are simply listeners
from beginning to end; young or old, learned or unlearned,
they are expectel to be attentive listeners for some two
hours, without a word to say, a thing to do, a sound to utter
for themselves.  My observation, after attending several
places of worship in the principal islands, is that the natives,
except there be some stirring passage in the sermon, are
languid and easily-distracted listeners and irreverent actors.
In their family-worship they kneel, and are more reverent,
being left more to their instincts. At public worship they
come in at all times, sit, look about, easily fall asleep, and
when the last prayer ends, start for the door a good deal as
a theatre breaks up-hardly ever waiting for the benediction.
It is not difficult to see the Roman Catholic Church, with its
open doors, free sittings, daily mass and vespers, its corps of
teaching and visiting nuns, its sacramental system, its worship
addressed to the mind and heart through the eye and ear, as
well as by the word to the understanding; with its service,
which gives a part to all, and especially its system of commemnorations, and, in the modern sense, its 'spiritualism' of angels
and departed saints, has strongly enlisted the almost vacant
native faculties.
As an instance, too, of the power of the accommodation
possessed by the Roman Catholics, it is not too small a matter
to notice that, while in the open assemblies of the American
missionaries, the natives sit on benches in constrained attitudes,
and come dressed in imitation of the European fashion, the
men in black hats, boots, tight coats and trousers, and the
women in out-of-fashion bonnets and unaccustomed shoes,-in
the Roman Catholic places of worship, they kneel on mats and
chairs, wearing the looser and easier dress of every day-the
women with bare heads, and never-failing garlands of flowers
and berries; and young men come to the porch in straw hats
decked with flowers and green leaves.
The subject has attracted attention in the Islands. I found




PERSONAL QUALIFICATIONS OF MISSIONARIES.  393


that many who agreed with me in a high estimate of the good
the missionaries have done, yet felt the defects of the public
worship; and one of the missionaries told me he had long
thought that changes must be made in their system in the
direction of the ritual and liturgy of the English Church.
Then as to internal and external personal qualifications of the American missionaries, as compared with
those of the Roman communion, Dr. Rae, in a series of
articles published in the 'Polynesian' during 1861,
entitled ' Thoughts on the System of Legislation,' says
in a footnote: —
I do not recollect having been in any mixed company in
these Islands where the subject of the Protestant mission was
introduced, without hearing either a sneer, a sarcasm, or a
reproach against it. On the other hand, wherever I have been,
and with whomsoever I have met, I have never encountered
one, except in controversy, who did not speak in terms of
respect of the Catholic priesthood.  Some have expressed
surprise, that men could be found at this time of day thus
to sacrifice their lives; some have spoken of their culte
as savouring of superstition; but all have granted them the
praise of sincere self-devotion-all have expressed a desire that
their labours might benefit the natives. I simply note a fact —
it is for the reader to draw the conclusion.
The same writer, remarking more especially on the
hitherto prevalent system of legislation, brought about
by the missionaries, says:Those in the seat of power will deceive themselves into the
belief that their preaching has made true Christians of the
whole population, or, at least, that it ought to have done so;
and they will proceed to mete out punishments against
transgressors of what they conceive to be Christian morality,
with all the severity of their fathers in the days of the 'blue
laws.' A code of coercive morality will be established, which




394


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


would not be submitted to by any European or American
community, but which the Hawaiians, accustomed to bend to,the will of their superiors, will not resist, but will evade.
From this source a tissue of lying and deception will spring
up and spread among them, pushing its poisonous meshes
through every household, and everywhere contaminating and
destroying the native virtues of the people. For it were
altogether a mistake to imagine that virtue-though that
virtue may be of the earth earthy-does not exist in this
race. They have ever had a right and a wrong-a pono and
a pono ole-no words are more frequent in their mouths;
and then their native virtues have hitherto sufficed to give
prosperity to the land-to give industry to the man, fecundity
to the woman. Destroy them-give nothing better in their
place-and you take from   their system  every sustaining
prop, and cause it to fall to the ground in, it may be,
irremediable confusion.
Again, in commenting on the Queen's Hospital, the
editor of the ' Polynesian,' in an article dated July 6,
1861, writes:There is one fact, as revealed by these reports, to which, sad
and disgraceful as it is, we must nevertheless call the attention
of the civilisers-the instructors and preachers of this people,
who think that all morality lies in the Hawaiian spelling-book,
and that the principles of civilisation culminate in vulgar
fractions; and it is this-that out of the 373 women on the
register (of public women), 220 were married women, having
lived apart from their husbands for a longer or shorter period,
while 23 were actually living with their husbands while
professedly leading a life of vice and infamy! How low the
moral condition of these people must be, it is fearful to contemplate. What a mockery of the marriage institution! How
horribly loose the bonds which sanctify and knit together
society! What revolting examples! What hideous prospects
for the unhappy children of such unions! We have seen vice
and depravity in their most loathsome forms in numerous




AN INOPERATIVE RELIGION.


395


other cities; * * * * * * yet never was it known
before that two-thirds of the abandoned women in any place
were recruited from the marriage-bed. And where are the
husbands of these lost ones? We hazard nothing in saying
that the greater part are living in adultery with other women,
And thus morality is undermined, and society crumbles from
its very foundations. And yet we are asked to admire and
let alone an educational system, which indirectly does not
prevent such results in this people, by leaving the religious instruction of the young heart to the operation of chance or
of political convenience; and that too when, as is well known,
(and must of necessity be the case with a people so lately
emerged from barbarism), an abiding moral sentiment and
religious duty are not imbibed with the mother's milk, but
must be engrafted on the rising generation, by whatever
means, at whatever sacrifice, so great an object may require.
Forty years' assiduous evangelising-two entire generations
born and bred in the Christian faith-public schools in every
village- religious revivals almost every  year -prayermeetings innumerable,-and yet two-thirds of the abandoned
women married persons! The thing is incredible were it not
attested. And when we remonstrate against such a state of
things, we are called a 'crazy fanatic,' and coolly told that 'the
gradual change of time' will repair all present ills:-in the
grave, we surmise.
We need not pursue such testimony. Religion as
taught by the American missionaries, zealously, fiercely,
has hitherto failed to affect the hearts of the mass.
Many superior natives have doubtless submitted themselves earnestly to the yoke, and a few guileless
Nathaniels may be reckoned among ten thousands of
professors; but the national morality is not what it
should be,-the nation is not regenerated.
Estranged for many years from, or originally ignorant
of, the old paths of established religion, the missionaries




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


have committed mistakes, which, though lamentable,
may be pardonable in those who made them. No
wonder that the Roman Church saw an opportunity in
this failure, and succeeded in winning a large proportion of the people to her banner. It is true that the
natives were perplexed at the entire difference between
two religions, each of which called itself by the name
of Christ; and, in the homage paid before images of the
Virgin and the Saviour, thought they saw a return to
their old idolatry. But they felt the attractiveness of
the forms of worship, and they felt relief at a system
of dependence on a conscience not their own.
Obedience, says Sir James Stephen, prompt, absolute, blind
and unhesitating... such submission, however arduous
in appearance, is, in reality, the least irksome of all self-sacrifices. The mysterious gift of freewill is the heaviest burthen
of the vast multitude of mankind.... Men everywhere
desire to walk by sight, not by faith-to obey the stern command of a superior, if so they may be absolved from listening
to the still small voice of conscience-to bear the yoke of
spiritual bondage, if so they may escape the fatigue of study,
the labour of meditation, the pains of doubt, and the anxieties
of mental freedom.*
Well, the missionaries have made many mistakes, and
not among the least is the impatience they have shown
for rapid and immense results. But forty missionary
families, even if no earthly interest ever attracted them,
are not numerous enough to convert a heathen nation
in forty years to an all-permeating Christianity. To
bring up a couple of children as true Christians may
well, and almost exclusively, occupy many years of their
parents' lives; and can the most zealous religionist hope
that partial efforts on 80,000 human beings, surrounded
* Essays. 'Founders of Jesuitism.'




THE TEACHING OF EXAMPLE.


397


by many temptations, should be crowned with a so
much larger and more rapid success? The mistake of
the missionaries was a very common one-they were
treating symptoms instead of the disease. Outward
acts, which were but eruptive indications of the inward
ailment, they sought to get rid of by a severe repressive
hygiene. The disease under which the patient suffered
was one of the heart-and the heart they had not
touched, and scarcely prescribed for. Yet, had this
charge been made against the missionaries, they would
possibly have replied, indignantly, that they had gone
to the fountain-head of all cure; that they had taught
the Hawaiians the highest heights of theology; that they
had set before them the doctrines of the Trinity, Justification, Original Sin, and that great mystery, which
'-binding Nature fast in Fate,
Left free the human will.'
Alas! between that transcendental teaching and the
actual workings of a depraved nature, there was a great
chasm which their doctrine did not bridge over. A
more simple and parental education was required-line
upon line and precept upon precept, but patiently and
lovingly applied, and dropped like the gentle dew from
heaven. As the angler casts his fly delicately upon the
water, watches, waits, withdraws it, and throws it again,
so the fisher of souls must by many tentative essays
perseveringly strive to catch men. Men will not be
driven into Christianity like sheep into a pen; and the
human heart refuses to be transformed by enactments,
penalties, and imprisonments. Of means within our
own power for religious advancement, the contemplation
of examples is the most certain and the most powerfulto gaze on holiness in fellow-men, and, most of all, to
gaze upon the Prince of Purities, until He becomes in




398               HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.
our eyes 'fairest among ten thousand and altogether
lovely.' ' It is the burthen of Xavier's letters,' writes
Sir James Stephen, 'that the living exhibition of the
Christian character is the first great instrument of
Christian conquest over idolatry, and that the inculcation of elementary truth is the second.'




399


CHAPTER XXV.
GLANCES AT THE PAST AND GUESSES AT THE FUTURE.
THE day upon which Hawaii has entered is one in
which the light is neither clear nor dark. She ranks
among the family of nations, as the last baby in a
household, when it can speak and run, is gradually admitted into the companionship and games of its brothers
and sisters. The isolation of her position in the centre
of the ocean gives a special value and interest to the
group, but leaves it open to every assailant that chooses
to bring a frigate's broadside to bear on the capital.
Her defences must be the equal treaties of other nations,
supported by mutual jealousies, rather than the sixty
guns of the forts of Honolulu. But treaties, even, will
not guard her from the testy act of one foreign government in the absence of the others' ships of war, or from
piratical and filibustering expeditions. Like the midnight pull at the house-bell, the annoyer will have
vanished before the arrival of the police, and the whole
strength of a division will not repair the injury done to
the nerves of the disturbed inmates.
Under the guarantee of America, France, and England,
writes Sir George Simpson, referring to the period of his visit
(1843), the Sandwich Islands are secured as effectually as any
other community against foreign interference, excepting that,




400


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


from their position and the inexperience of their rulers, they
are peculiarly liable to come into collision with the very
powers that have guaranteed their independence. Their position alone, with respect to the trading interests of England and
America, will render neutrality extremely difficult, if not altogether impossible, in the melancholy event of a war between
those kindred states; while any infringement of the law of
nations in this respect will be sure to lead to the occupation of
the group on the part of England, either as the avenger of her
own wrongs, or as a protector against the vengeance of America.
But, unlike this occasional danger, the inexperience of their
rulers is a rock on which they may be dashed at any time with
fatal effect; and within these few short years the cause in
question has placed the native government at the mercy both
of France and of England.
During the progress of the Crimean war, the possible
extension of which was uncertain, the King, Kameham6ha III. issued a proclamation of neutrality, with a
prohibition to his subjects to engage, directly or indirectly, in privateering. Such a step may be cynically
compared to the frogs in the fable protesting against
the battle of the bulls.  Admitting the similitude, it
must be granted that the danger which threatened the
Hawaiian kingdom from an European war was that
which the frogs deprecated, and theirs was a situation
in which insignificance would not act as a safeguard.
On the breaking out of hostilities between the states
of North America, a similar manifesto was issued. The
proclamation is as follows:KAMEHAMEHA IV., KING OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.
Be it known to all whom it may concern, that we, Kamehameha IV., King of the Hawaiian Islands, having been officially notified that hostilities are now unhappily pending
between the Government of the United States and certain




PROCLAMATION OF NEUTRALITY.


401


states thereof styling themselves 'The Confederate States of
America,' hereby proclaim our neutrality between said
contending parties.
That our neutrality is to be respected to the full extent of
our jurisdiction, and that all captures and seizures made within
the same are unlawful, and in violation of our rights as a
sovereign.
And be it further known, that we hereby strictly prohibit
all our subjects, and all who reside or may be within our jurisdiction, from engaging, either directly or indirectly, in privateering against the shipping or commerce of either of the
contending parties, or of rendering any aid to such enterprises
whatever; and all persons so offending will be liable to the
penalties imposed by the laws of nations, as well as by the
laws of said states; and they will in nowise obtain any protection from us as against any penal consequence which they
may incur.
Be it further known, that no adjudication of prizes will be
entertained within our jurisdiction, nor will the sale of goods
or other property belonging to prizes be allowed.
Be it further known, that the rights of asylum are not
extended to the privateers or their prizes of either of the contending parties, excepting only in cases of distress or of compulsory delay by stress of weather or dangers of the sea, or in
such cases as may be regulated by treaty stipulation.
Given at our Marine Residence of Kailua, this 26th day of
August, A.D. 1861, and the Seventh of Our Reign.
KAMEHAMEHA.
By the King,      KAAHUMANLT.
By the King and Kuhina Nui,
R. C. Wyllie.
The 'Polynesian,' the government organ, in repeating
the foregoing proclamation, remarks:To proclaim neutrality, however, is one thing, and to
enforce it is another. Strong and powerful governments are
D D




402


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


seldom imposed upon in this respect; and when they are, they
right themselves as the occasion may call for,-as the United
States did in the Anglo-French war with Russia, when they
sent the English Minister his passports for violating the
neutrality of their country. But weak and small powers may
not always be in a position to repel or resent an infraction of
their neutrality. Still, if they have done their best, and shown
a proper disposition and spirit, there is no doubt that, in
justice and international law and equity, the will will be taken
for the deed, and such a power be held guiltless in the eyes of
the world.*
If, therefore, whilst the Hawaiian kingdom labours
for peace, other nations make them ready to battle, the
fault does not lie at the door of the former.   Peace,
with all its arts and advancements, the gentle plants
that flourish in its soil, is unmistakeably the boon for
which Hawaii must earnestly pray; but it requires all
the prudence of her rulers to avoid stepping on the
corns or the gout of the nationalities with which she is
brought into close contact.  And for the eventualities
of private invasion there can be no guarantee.   Upon
two occasions already this danger has threatened. The
first of these is thus announced in the King's speech of
the 13th of April, 1852:The peace of my kingdom has been threatened with an
invasion of private adventurers from California. An appeal
was made to the United States' Commissioners, which, being
promptly acted upon by Captain Gardner, of the United
States' ship 'Vandalia,' tranquillized the public mind. I have
taken some measures to create a military force.  *  * *
Such a force is considered indispensable, to enable me to
protect efficiently the lives and property of all who live under


* 'Polynesian,' Sept. 14, 1861.




THREATENED INVASIONS.             403
my dominion. It will be for you to provide the means of
maintaining such a force permanently, so as that the very
defencelessness of my kingdom  may not invite the evildisposed to invade it.
On the second occasion of danger the King issued a
proclamation-the last made before his death --
Whereas, it has come to my knowledge from the highest
official sources, that my government has been recently
threatened with overthrow by lawless violence; and, whereas,
the representatives at my Court of the United States, Great
Britain, and France, being cognizant of these threats, have
offered me the prompt assistance of the naval forces of their
respective countries; I hereby publicly proclaim my acceptance of the aid thus proffered in support of my sovereignty.
My independence is more firmly established than ever before.
KAMEHAMEHA.
Palace, 8th December, 1854.
Reading the future by the past, the necessity for
keeping up some military defences and a small standing
army seems to be established. The very efficient volunteer rifle corps, now of several years' standing, and a
considerable body of police, render a large number of
regular troops unnecessary. The inherent courage of
the race would, with a very little preparation, offer a
strong resistance to attempts of violence.
In the contest of progress in the arts and civilization,
the monarchs of the dynasty of Kamlhameha have
shown themselves determined not to be kings of Colophonia. Indeed, their avid adoption of the luxuries and
etiquette of European nations appeared for many years
precocious and disproportioned to the general state of
the nation. The passion of the chiefs for European
luxuries was remarked by Beechey when he visited the
islands in 1827, and was the more extraordinary at that
D D 2




404


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


time in a nation which had so lately emerged from barbarism.' He mentions that articles of American manufacture, the productions of the China market, wines, &c.,
were found in the stores or shops of Honolulu. There
were at that period two hotels and two billiard rooms.
Kaahumanu's house was furnished with silk and velvet
sofas and cushions. She had chests filled with the most
costly silks of China. The chief Boki paid three thousand dollars for a service of plate to be presented to
the King, notwithstanding he had other services for the
table in his possession, one of which was of expensive
cut glass from Pellatt and Green in London. The King
was always attended by a guard under arms. Admiral
Beechey remarks on the unusual advance which had
been made in the islands so remote and holding so little
intercourse with the civilized world, and he expresses a
hope that it may not prove too rapid to be advantageous to the country, which had already several expensive establishments to maintain and extravagant
ideas to satisfy.* In education he thought the progress slower 'than every well-wisher of the country
could desire....   Many of the natives remain
ignorant even of the nature of the prayers they
repeat; and in other subjects are entirely uninstructed.
The missionaries appear to be very anxious to diffuse a
due knowledge of the tenets of the Gospel among all
the inhabitants, and have laboured much to accomplish
their praiseworthy purpose; but the residents in Honolulu well know what little effect their exertions have
produced, probably on account of the tutors having
mistaken the means of diffusing education.  In the
Sandwich Islands, as in all other places, there is a mania


* 'Voyage of the " 3Blossom,"' ii. 97, et seq.




PRECOCIOUS CIVILIZATION.


405


for everything new, and, with due reverence to the
subject, this was very much the case with religion in
Honolulu, where almost every person might be seen
hastening to the school with a slate in his hand, in the
hope of being able soon to translate some part of the
pala pala (Scriptures).' At a later period the adoption
of the code of etiquette of Vienna showed 'an unbounded stomach' to rank with old and advanced
nations. The method and language of the diplomatic
correspondence of the Hawaiian government has called
forth expressions of surprise and praise in Paris. At
the present time, crinoline is as expansive, rooms as
well lighted, evening assemblies and morning picnics
as agreeable, and beauty probably more abundant in
Honolulu than in London and other capitals. Whether
these things are desirable is another matter. Older
civilizations, those which eventually enlarged themselves
and became permanent, began in a hardy plainness,
and slowly ' degreed themselves' in conveniences and
luxury. Marco Polo found the nomadic population of
Tartary using paper-money. This prophetic dash at
currency science has not made the hordes advance in
other respects. The iron money of Sparta was perhaps
as desirable in her early days as if her sons had carried
about notes issued by the bank of Lacedaemon. Indeed,
restraint is necessary even in national progress, lest a
spurious and showy external cover a low and inchoate
civilization in essential things. To desire to advance
in arts and politeness is good, but the feet must not run
as fast as the aspirations.
Were the crawling caterpillar to feel within himself the
wings that are to be, and to be haunted with the intuitive
forebodings of the time when he shall hover above flowers and
meadows, and expatiate in heavenly air-yet the wisdom of




406:


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


that caterpillar would be to remember his present business on'
the leaf-to feed on green herbs and weave his nest, lest, losing
himself in dreams, he should never become a winged insect at
all.*
The advance of national prosperity, as indicated by
income and expenditure, has been, on the whole, satisfactory. It is an undisputed fact that commerce is in
every country subject to fluctuations, and that its periods
of exaltation and depression have something of the
regularity of cycles. It is wise, therefore, not to overestimate the permanence of high activity, or to despair
when the tide runs out, as if it never would return.
But these violent fluctuations have their use in throwing
commercial energy into new directions. The Hawaiian
Islands had grown to depend too exclusively on the
great North Pacific whaling fleet. In providing meat,
vegetables, and some other articles for the whalers,
ready markets were found on its shores, and the activity
of the people for good and for evil was on the surface
of the islands, whilst interior resources were much
neglected. The whales, thinking that fishing had been
carried to fanaticism, or from other motives, began,
several years ago, to forsake their habitat. Disappointment and loss to those engaged in the pursuit was the
consequence, and year after year the trade of Hawaii
declined. The tables of imports and exports show a
corresponding diminution in their figures; and as the
scarcity of whales appears to have become permanent,
some of the business houses have withdrawn from the
islands; the fine herds on the pastures are comparatively worthless, and are being replaced with sheep,
rice, and other sources of wealth. Things are in a


* Robertson's Lectures on Corinthians.




TRANSITIONAL STATE OF TRADE.


407


state of transition, painful at the moment, but fraught
with future benefit. If the Hawaiians resolutely turn
their faces inland, and ' develope the resources of their
islands,' the present pinch will do more for their eventual
prosperity, and effect more moral change, than if the
whales had laid their prejudices aside and had continued
to be caught in greater numbers than before.
The following Table of revenue and expenditure
between the years 1845 and 1860 exhibits a fair fiscal
progress; not indeed uniform, but, on the contrary,
indicating one or two panic years, with a consequent
sudden fluctuation. The last two biennial periods show
that the decrease of whaling success was telling upon
the commercial prosperity of the islands.
The imports, as far as they depend on home consumption, have been no doubt affected, also, by the decay
of the population; but the degree to which the defect
in numbers has acted cannot be so well ascertained, because although the people have been, till lately, decreasing, new customers among the islands have been brought
into contact with foreign productions by the opening
of roads and facilities for inter-island communication.
There is a great deal of locomotive activity among the
Hawaiians. Thus in the first nine months of 1861, 5,093
passengers arrived at Honolulu by sailing vessels, and
3,762 by steamer, making together 8,855 passengers.
As an equal number may be supposed to have left the
capital in the same time, the entire number of passengers
during the three first quarters of the year will be 17,716,
or nearly one-fourth of the population. During the
same period 489 persons arrived at Honolulu from
abroad, and as many left. This internal communication
is likely to increase, and another steamer is intended to
commence running among the islands.




Table of Public Income and Expenditure in the Hawaiian Islands, from the


year 1845 to 1860 inclusive.




FOrea gnO  Internal  n       Total Revenue
Year                       s       Commerce             from all    Expenditure. posts   (Excise)             Sources


1845......
1846....
1847....
1848....
1849......
1850....
1851....
1852....
1852?(from 1st March 1852 to 1st Jan. 1853)
1853 (from 1st Jan 1853 to 1st Jan.1854)
1853 (from 1st Jan. 1854 to 1st Jan. 1855)
1855
1855 (from 1st Jan. 1855 to lst Jan. 1856)
1856 
186 (from 1st Jan. 1856 to April 1858).
18581 (from 31st March 1858 to 31st March 1860
1860~


$51,144-42
118,901-38
140,131-79
68,699-72
139,457-59
135,797-30
146,171-17
231,201-23
213,209-08


$75,947-08
12,353'80
22,514-75
25,194-49
22,065-14
26,769-85
35,157-50
37,766-47
63,471'53
62,528-26


$27,638-42
52,455-26
57,360-16
38,117-93
43,033-18
45,057-58
83,579-27
134,306-09
108,841-85


9138,352-44
153,242-20
196,751'34
215,430-42
166,286-41
301,576-61
330,546-03
385,993-95
234,169-44
336,386-77
393,984-75
473,565-34
667,138'03
656,215-92


$138,352-44
161,678-91
183,546-63
166,480-20
179,034-34
250,707-56
330,408-67
224,272-77
265,195-36
339,647-67
424,778-24
<666,788-79 or
1296,350-57 pr. An.
643,088-40 or
1 321,544-20pr.An.




TABLE OF IMPORTS.            409
In a former chapter a table of population was given,
with deduced numbers for those years in which no
census was taken; those figures lead to the inference
that the downward progress of the people has at last
ceased, and that the coming years may present more
cheering results.*
The following Tables exhibit the import trade of the
Sandwich Islands in the years 1845 to 1859, and the
shares which the several nations have contributed with
whom there has been a direct trade:


Value of Imports in 1845,,  1846,,   1847,,,,   1848,,,,  1849,,,,      1850,,   1851,,   1852,,   1853,    1854,,   1855,,,,   1856,,,,        1857.,,,,      1858,,,,      1859.  546,939
598,391
710,143
605,114
729,734. 1,035,053. 1,791,080.   619,636. 1,375,130. 1,540,697. 1,334,430. 1,118,614
873,134
759,383
~. 1,173,366


1'


Participation of foreign nations in the direct import
trade during the same period:America (United States): Atlantic and Pacific ports..,8,635,405
Great Britain: British ports and colonies..        2,897,380
France: French ports direct......     71,937


* It is quite certain that population will increase in the direction of
half-breeds, of fairer skin than their mothers,-but whether with higher
virtues remains to be tested. The half-blood race in Mexico has certainly not led to the conclusion of great good arising from human
hybridizing; but the future is all uncertain. Strange things have happened, and do happen, and in the last twelve months a mule has given
birth to a fine foal in the islands. (1862.)




410


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


Bremen 
Chili.
Central America 
China
Fanning's Island..
Hamburg.
Kamschatka and Sitka
Mexico
Philippine Islands 
Society Islands.
Sea. Whalers; and from other Ports
Japan
Peru.
Ascension Island
Jarvis's Island.
Marquesas Islands 
French Frigate Shoals
M'Kean's Island 
Total..  422,441
521,631..~. ~..      4,593
995,734
8,882
378,105
53,863..  70,768
109,145
106,693
530,377
1,108
175
220
1,421
15....      955
55
14,810,843


In 1864, the value of imports was $1,712,241, and
the value of exports, including supplies to whalers, was
$1,113,329.
The principal article on which the excess is found, is
sugar, of which 4,649 tons were exported in 1864, against
1,065 tons in 1861. Increased attention has been paid
to rice, and a considerable quantity of land has been
thrown into its cultivation. Its quality is said to be
equal to the finest Carolina. The sugar and coffee also
grown in Hawaii are of very fine quality. The coffee
plantations had suffered for several successive years very
greatly from the blight which infests the plants in
Ceylon, called the white and the black bug. The last
accounts from the islands bring the intelligence that
the coffee crop is again improving, new trees having
been planted. The young trees do not suffer so readily
from the blight; and as there is abundance of land
applicable to coffee growing, a succession of young crops




STAPLE PRODUCTS OF THE ISLANDS.


41 1l


may probably be resorted to, till the scourge has been
eradicated from the old trees by running sheep among
them, thinning plantations, and other experimental
means.
Coffee and sugar, then, with wool and hides, may be
set down as the great future staples of the islands.
The sugar cane, says a very late observer, continues to
grow for two years, and attains a size which is almost
incredible. The quantity raised per acre is about two
tons; but four and even six tons have often been obtained. As labour, including the labourer's food, costs
only eight dollars per month, and as the sugar commands in the San Francisco market eight and nine
cents per pound (fourpence and fourpence-halfpenny),
the profit on this article is very great. Tobacco, though
it grows freely, is affected, apparently, by the nature of
the soil, and its quality is not so good as to promise
great or profitable results for its cultivation.
The indigo plant, which is indigenous and exists as
a troublesome and ineradicable weed over the islands,
will probably prove of greater importance. Knowledge
and capital are required for utilizing this valuable plant,
and those are advantages which the coming years must
bring with them.
Cotton, the watchword of the day, is beginning to
receive attention. The natives inhabiting the district
of Kau, Hawaii, are planting cotton extensively on their
mountain side, and it flourishes admirably.  Some
specimens which have been sent to England are
pronounced equal in quality to ' Sea-island' cotton.
Silk is cultivated in small quantities. The morus
papyrifera abounds in parts of the islands. From the native grapes a fair wine is made. The proof of wine is in
the drinking; and none has yet reached this country.




412a


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


Some beautiful woods adapted for cabinet-making
grows in the forests. Specimens have been received of
articles made of the Koa and Kou wood. It was hoped
that these woods would form part of the products shown
at the International Exhibition of 1862; and at the
same time that there would be exhibited the magnetic
sand, and the substance called pulu: as it proved, unfortunately, no Hawaiian products were received in time
for exhibition.
I append here the Report made to the English Foreign
Office by Mr. Consul-General Synge, on the trade of
Hawaii, and presented to Parliament in July 1865.
The official returns of the Collector of Customs, giving the
whole commercial statistics of this kingdom for the year 1864,
and a comparative statement of trade in each year from 1846
to 1864 inclusive, exhibit a very marked increase in the trade
of these islands. The export of sugar, which was 3,005,603 lbs.
in 1862, and 5,292,121 lbs. in 1863, rose to 10,414,441 lbs.
in 1864.
New plantations are being constantly started, and the export
of sugar this year is expected to be far larger than the last,
whilst the area of land still untouched by cultivation, but
capable of profitably producing sugar, is supposed to be ten to
twenty times the quantity non-yielding.
In view of these statistics and my general knowledge of the
country, I think it my duty to state my belief that the importance of the Sandwich Islands as a producing and trading
country has been much underrated; and that, with a continuance of the same good government and security which is
now enjoyed, it will rapidly take rank as the West Indies of the
North Pacific Ocean.
By far the largest trade is now and has for some time been
done with San Francisco, which is the nearest market for our
productions, and also the most convenient port whence to
obtain our manufactures, goods, provisions, &c. A competition




MR. CONSUL SYNGE S REPORT.


413


for a portion of this trade has, however, recently sprung up, viz.,
the British port of Victoria, Vancouver's Island. The imports
thence, which, in 1862, were only 4,672 dollars 22 cents,
rose in 1863 to 32,210 dollars 52 cents, and in 1864 to 54,153
dollars 47 cents.  The larger proportion of these values
consisted of British products and manufactures.
This trade, only recently commenced, must continue to
increase very rapidly if Victoria preserve her free port system,
as the high rates of duty on imports into San Francisco will
tell very seriously against the latter port, especially when the
market of Victoria grows larger.
The system of bonding goods in San Francisco, although a
palliative, I am given to understand by merchants here, does
not at all offer the advantages to commerce which are presented
by the total absence of duties at Victoria; and I believe that
it only requires time for the development of Victoria as a free
dep6t for British manufactures to transfer a very large proportion of the trade of the Sandwich Islands now enjoyed by
foreign countries, merchants, and vessels, to that British
colony, and to British merchants and vessels.
In view, therefore, of the probable very rapid increase and
future value of the trade of this kingdom, I beg to call your
Lordship's attention to the importance to British interests, as
well as to those of the Sandwich Islands, of preserving, if possible, the port of Victoria, Vancouver's Island, a perfectly free
one.
The people here being so much occupied with sugar, which
has been proved to answer, have not paid much attention to
cotton, the result of which, when planted on a large scale, is
yet problematical; but recently the Peruvian cotton-plant has
been found to thrive and produce so well, that it is very
likely some plantations on a respectable scale will shortly be
attempted.
A great assistance to British commerce with these islands
would be a screw-steamer or steam clipper between this
and Panama direct; and I believe a very moderate subsidy
for carrying the mails would induce merchants here to place




414


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


one on this route. By connecting with the West India line for
passengers, and with the Liverpool screw-steamers for cargo,
a considerable traffic might be expected.
When it is remembered that the commerce and the productions of the volcanic island of Mauritius, in the same latitude
south that these islands are north, are, at the present day, nearly
thirty times greater than those of the Sandwich Islands, whilst
the latter have several times greater area and available land,
as well as greater diversity of climate and resources, it will
readily be seen what an opening is presented for future commerce, and how valuable this trade may become to Great
Britain, especially if a British free port be preserved so near
to us as Victoria, Vancouver's Island.
On the whole, the future looks smiling as to the
commercial and, consequently, the fiscal, prosperity of
the islands. Even the right whales appear to be returning to their old haunts, and though during the past
autumn season the number of vessels engaged in fishing
has been greatly reduced, the average of results is materially higher. It is not desirable, however, that after a
temporary suffering from the falling off of this trade,
the energy which has been thrown into internal resources and industry should be checked, or again largely
diverted to the more transient and often hurtful trade
of the coasts and extremities of the country. The
national revenue has suffered, and it may be some years
before internal production will replace the immediate
income derived from customs, duties, &c. Having this
state of things in view, the government have wisely
determined to make large reductions in every branch of
public expenditure capable of contraction: and while they
are thus endeavouring to meet the times, the outer
public, on its part, urges the necessity for economy.
The avoidance of public debt is the more important in




VALUE OF MONEY.                 415
a country of high interest. The use of money commands from one per cent. per month to twenty per
cent. per annum, and even higher rates of interest. The
following table, showing the fluctuations of interest
from  1846 to 1860, was prepared by the registrar of
public deeds and conveyances:MINIMUM and MAXIMUM RATES OF INTEREST on Promissory Notes,
secured by Bond and Mortgage.
Minimum Rate        Maximum Rate
1846.. 0.5 per cent. per month  1  per cent. per month
1847..  1,,,         1..
1848.. 1,,,          1-5.
1849.. 1,,              2,,
1850.. 1,,,          4.5
1851..1,,              5.
1852.. 1,               3 
1853.. 1,,              2,,
1854..  1,,           3.
1855.. 1,,          5,
1856..  1,,          3,
1857.. 1,,          4 
1858.. 1,,,         2.
1859.. 1,,,         2-5 
1860..  1,               1 
1861.. 1,,              1-25.
With regard to journalistic literature in the islands,
the 'Polynesian' ceased to be a government institution,
and in 1864 was allowed to expire. Its place has been
taken by the ' Hawaiian Gazette,' as the semi-official
organ of government. 'The Commercial Advertiser'
continues to reflect in strong colours the views of the
American missionary party, and constitutes itself' His
Majesty's opposition.' 'The Friend,' an interesting
monthly periodical advocating missionary principles, has
entered on its twenty-third volume. The ' Hae Hawaii'
and another small paper in the native language circulate




416


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


amongst the people; and a new journal of more ambitious
pretensions and of more enlarged views has just been
started, also in native, under the name of the Hoku o
Ka Pacipila-' The Star of the Pacific.'
On a retrospect of the moral changes which have
taken place in the Hawaiian people, we are struck with
the extreme vigour with which, in the year 1820, the
nation liberated itself from the thraldom of an ancient
and universal idolatry. It was an act which stands
alone upon the page of history. The whole transaction
remains'A truth so strange, 'twere bold to think it true,
If not still bolder far to disbelieve.'
The overthrow of idolatry shows that the Hawaiian
race possesses not only great energy of character but
some unusual idiosyncrasies, capable of being turned
to bad or good account. There was a dumb and sceptical reasoning going on in the popular mind about
their pantheon, its worthlessness, its falsity. The system
was withering in their estimation, and required but a
spark to enkindle it with a destructive fire, in which it
was consumed with the rapidity of a heap of crackling
thorns and dry leaves. Then their hatred to it as a
system broke out again, and the unutterable groanings
which their spirits had been subject to under the
oppression of priestcraft, and especially the tabu institution, found a voice in action. With regard to idolatry
itself, whatever may have been the best aspect of paganism, seen in the halo of Grecian art and intellectual
cultivation, with uncivilized peoples it always takes the
form of a cruel and bloodthirsty system. The King of
Dahomy, who sacrifices two thousand victims at once as
a holocaust to his deceased father; the Tahitian king,




TRANSITION OF CHARACTER.


417


who was accustomed to tread on the warm bodies of slain
men each time he landed on any of his islands; and
the mis-shapen idol Pele of the Hawaiians, to which
rites of blood were performed, are among the instances
of this general tendency. In Hawaii it has been seen
that the whole structure fell to pieces at the first
glimmering approach, the faintest twilight rays of
Christianity and mental enlightenment,- or rather,
before the watching eye could detect in the sky any
beams of the Sun of Righteousness. The trooping
ghosts were ready to retire and crouch in their congenial
darkness.
'Ev ep 0aEL icai taXtov.
The change of character produced by the abolition of
idolatry, and the reception of Christian truths imperfectly
understood, and Christian practice imperfectly accepted
as it was, was marked and wonderful. From a fierce
people delighting in war, the Hawaiians became gentle
and peaceable; their very countenance softened in
expression, and hospitality and kind affections sprang
up vigorously throughout the islands. It was not, however, that the people became saints or sages. Their
hearts were not the rasa tabula which the religious
theorist so earnestly desires. They were pages scribbled
over with many evil and stubborn lines which had first
to be erased. But still there is something very hopeful
in that mixed character. The Hawaiians are not dull
and torpid; and they can love;-that is something.
Let it be seen what will be the effect upon the nation
at large as the services and teaching of the Church are
generally extended among them; services that have a
warmth in them; which give the worshippers a part to
take; that symbolize with decent forms and sympathetic
E E




418


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


attitudes the humiliation, the gratitude, the praise,
the petition, as they come in their oft-repeated round.
Let it be seen what the effect upon their minds will be
when gathered within the walls of a temple solemn yet
cheerful, cared for, but accessible to all at all times —a
church in which art walks as the handmaid of religion,
and never arrogates to herself the higher place. Let
them mingle their voices with the diapasons of the
organ; let them hear the invitation of the bell as it
chimes its gracious welcome. Let spire, and cross, and
ornate doorway be there, and a meaning be set on each
part, till the people come to love the gift which this
country is prepared to make them, and say of their
Church, ' This is none other than the house of God, and
this is the gate of heaven!'
As the preceding account of the resources and trade
of Hawaii was going to press, I received the commercial
statistics for the year 1865, and they show a large advance in production and general prosperity.  The
quantity of sugar exported had increased to 15,318,097
lbs. (6,838 tons), or nearly 50 per cent. more than the
previous year. Coffee 263,705 lbs., or five times the
growth of 1864. The total exports in 1865 were in
value $1,569,894, against $1,113,329 in 1864, an excess
of nearly 30 per cent. It is a significant fact in favour
of the internal prosperity of the islands that the imports
remained the same as the year before, and they now
exceed the exports by less than two millions of dollars.
The cultivation of cotton is quite recent in the islands,
and is yet in its infancy. In 1864, about a ton weight
of cotton, of fine quality, had been shipped; in 1865,
11,750 lbs. were exported, or nearly four times the




POSTSCRIPT.


419


quantity. The Custom-house receipts for the last year
were $192,566; showing an enlargement of upwards of
thirty-three thousand dollars compared with the preceding period.
The value of real estate had shown a corresponding
rise; and in some districts the value of land had doubled
itself in the twelve months.
A line of Steamers has just been established between
California and the Islands; and the first vessel of the
California Steam Navigation Company, the 'Ajax,' has
arrived with a hearty welcome, at Honolulu.  The
Hawaiian Steam Company is taking measures to keep
up a more rapid and constant inter-island communication with their boats.


EE 2




420


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


CHAPTER XXVI.
KALELEO-KA-LANI; 'THE FLIGHT OF THE CHIEF.'
THE dynasty of Kamehameha seemed firmly established. The royal stirps had taken root, and
was bearing noticeable fruit. Four kings of the name
had occupied the time from 1782 to 1862, i.e. eighty
years; which in a country not famous for longevity was
in itself a remarkable circumstance. And there was yet
a grandson of the first Kamehameha, under thirty years
of age, the elder brother of the King, on whom the
government would devolve in failure of the direct heir,
the young Prince of Hawaii.
The feeling of the people towards the Prince Royal
was already love and pride, rather than hope. They
had him in possession, so that hope seemed to have no
proper place in their hearts. For hope differs from love
in this respect, that, even.when perfect, hope does not
cast out fear, and hath torment —sometimes unutterable;
and her heaven has always, somewhere, its threatening
cloud.
Nor was it alone to his people that the boy prince
was an object of great interest. All foreigners in the
islands or elsewhere who wished well to Hawaii, and were
led from any circumstance to watch her efforts towards
advancement, saw in the youthful successor of the
fourth Kamehameha the laying of another stone on the




THE PRINCE OF HAWAII.


421


foundation, and a further gage of stability to the kingdom. Inherited rights are a chain which gains strength
by every link added. The faults of a father are not
generally visited, in this case, on the son, but are ' oft
interred with his bones;' and subjects who perhaps
writhed under the oppressive rule of the king whom
death removed, discover that their wrath for the individual does not extend to the race, and gladly accept
the new ruler and that permanence to affairs which a
quiet succession promises. It is affirmed that to pick
up a pebble alters the centre of gravity of the solar
system; and there were observers in Europe whose acute
sight informed them that the peace of the world was in
some measure affected by the life or death of a Polynesian chief.
The Prince was a fine, vigorous child, and forward for
his years in mental development. He was already acquiring a royal courtesy of demeanour. It was a custom
in Honolulu, both in the palace and in private dwellings,
to introduce refreshments when visitors called, even in
the forenoon of the day. It was a custom which prevailed in our own court some centuries ago; and those
who are curious can read elaborate regulations about the
cup and spice-plate in Grote and other antiquarians.
The grace of the young Prince as he preferred to his
parents' guests, with his own hand, the fruit or the
wine, won the admiration of those who witnessed it.
His were the ministrations of a Ganymede.
When rather past the age of four years, he is thus
described by one accustomed to see him. ' Lovely in
appearance, with delicately-formed features, and bright,
intelligent, meditative eyes, he early developed those
amiable qualities of mind which made him the idolized
love of his parents. To them obedient, courteous to




422


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


strangers, kind to inferiors, with an observant eye, a
retentive memory and a genial disposition, his whole
being seemed to diffuse a sunshine of inexpressible
sweetness over the palace and over the land.'
The education of this noble boy was not neglected,
and capacities like his took away all difficulties from the
task of instruction. From his mother he learned the
great lesson of religion; learned it from his best teacher;
for to the infant the mother is the true priest and
schoolmaster. One who met the royal party campaigning
in the woods during a summer excursion, describes the
effect produced on himself by coming unintentionally
on the group of the Queen and her child very early in
the morning, as beneath the trees he found the Prince
with clasped hands kneeling at his mother's knees,
putting up his artless prayer to ' his Father who is in
heaven,' and whose unveiled face his own infant eyes
were so soon to behold.
The Prince's further education had been provided for
in securing for his tutor one of the clergy then travelling
with the first bishop towards Hawaii,-the present
Archdeacon Mason. A more judicious choice could
scarcely have been made, nor to the intended instructor
a more congenial task given. Indeed, the approach of
the English Mission was much connected with the future
of the boy. This public admission into the Church by
baptism was to have been the inauguration of the
functions of the bishop and his clergy in the islands.
The rite was to be administered by the hands of the
bishop; the Queen of England had graciously undertaken to be his female sponsor, and had intrusted to her
commissioner Mr. Follett Synge a rich gift to be presented at the ceremony. The child's christening had
been delayed much longer than would have usually been




A HURRIED BAPTISM.


423


desirable that this public act so gratifying to all who
took part in it might be fulfilled.
Mr. Synge's arrival at Honolulu preceded by a short
time that of the bishop. He arrived there about the
28th of August, 1862; but on the 19th the royal child
had been attacked by illness, inflammation of and
pressure on the brain. All the medical skill of the
islands, and that was not small, assisted by the care of
the surgeon of H.M.S. 'Charybdis' would not avail to
turn aside the descending blow. Early on the morning
of the 23rd the symptoms were too unmistakeable to
allow them to delay any longer the Prince's baptism.
All state preparations had then to be dispensed with;
a clergyman of the Episcopal Church was not at hand,
and the initiatory sacrament was administered with
extreme solemnity and according to the English
liturgy, by the Rev. Mr. E. H. Clark, in presence of
the King, the Queen, the members of the Royal Family,
the Ministers of Government, and most of the High
Chiefs.  Mrs. Synge, the wife of the English commissioner, had the honour of standing proxy for Her
Britannic Majesty; the male sponsors being H.R.H.
the Prince of Wales, and the Prince Kameharneha, the
present King of Hawaii. The dying child received the
names of Albert Edward Kaukeaouli a Kamehameha.
Thus with haste was the heir of the throne gathered
into the outer court of the Christian temple. Whatever
cries and, strong supplications were poured forth to
heaven by the distracted parents were confined within
the limits of four days. Two hours after sunrise on
Wednesday the 27th of August the child quietly expired; and the minute guns from the palace boomed
out the truth to the sorrowing people. The tolling of
bells in Honolulu prolonged the nation's sigh; and from




424


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


the ships in the harbour and from those that were
anchored beyond the coral reefs, flags, that fluttered and
fainted half-mast high, repeated the sad intelligence,
and seemed to mourn the death of the heir of the island
kingdom.
On the following morning, the Prince was laid in
state in the great reception room of the palace. He
wore in death a look of ineffable sweetness and calm
repose. On small tables around the couch stood vases
filled with fragrant and beautiful flowers; and at his
head was placed a large silver vase of the finest workmanship-the christening gift of his august godmother.
For three hours, unchecked, a continuous stream of
people of every condition and class was allowed to pass
through the room and round the catafalque on which
the remains of the prince reposed, and take their last
look of a face they loved as if their own offspring. 
The day following the funeral, at a Court held for the
public reception of H.B.M.'s commissioner, Mr. Synge
in addressing the King and assuring him of the continued interest which the Queen and Government of
Great Britain took in the welfare and prosperity of the
Hawaiian kingdom, spoke as follows:-'I was further
commanded by Her Majesty to inform you, Sire, tlat
it is with very sincere gratification that she accepted
the office of godmother to His Royal Highness the Crown
Prince of Hawaii; inasmuch as she was thereby enabled
to evince to you the very cordial friendship which she
entertains for your Majesty, for your gracious Consort,
and for your royal house.... It was Her Majesty's
earnest desire that the christening sup which she sent
to the Prince, and which I had the honour to present
in the Queen's name to your Majesty, should have been
preserved by him as a testimonial and memento of his




THE PRINCE'S FUNERAL.


425


royal godmother's friendship and regard....  Queen
Victoria, who herself has drunk so deeply of the cup of
sorrow, will heartily feel for your Majesty and for your
Royal Consort in this the terrible bereavement which
has befallen you, and will greatly deplore the untimely
death of a prince in whose welfare she was so especially
and so nearly interested.'
The funeral of the young prince took place on the
7th of September. From sunrise till nearly noon,
service guns were fired at five-minute intervals; and
when the last solemn rite commenced, the batteries on
shore fired minute guns, which were responded to by the
cannon of H.B.M.'s frigate  Termagant.' The ceremonial was kept as private as it could consistently be
made, and when the bereaved father and mother took
their places at the head of the coffin, the deep and
visible emotion of the assembly could not be suppressed.
After the service, the coffin was suffered to remain open
in the throne-room, that those who desired to make
their last 'Aloha' might take a parting look at the
placid corpse. In the evening the coffin was deposited
within a tomb temporarily built in the palace grounds
in the shadow of a beautiful tamarind-tree.
The Hawaiians had a custom, which also prevailed
among the Hebrews, of occasionally bestowing on a
person a new and significant name, in commemoration
of some remarkable event in which he had been concerned. The King, on the death of their first-born and
only child, bestowed on his Queen the name of Kaleleoka-lani-a name by which she is now generally known
among her own people, and by which she frequently
subscribes herself. To make the sentiment and appropriateness of this new appellation understood, it is
necessary to explain that nearly all the names of the




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


superior chiefs terminate in the dissylable 'lani.' The
word means both 'a chief' and 'the heaven,' its radical
notion being that of height or elevation. Kaleleo-kalani may consequently be rendered either the ' flight or
evanishment of the chief' or the ' removal or disappearance of the heaven:' and each version expressed in
sympathetic and poetic language the loss sustained by
the mother who received and the father who inscribed
this epitaph of the heart.
Ere the coffin-lid which was to hide his child was
finally attached, the King tore from his breast the star
of diamonds he wore, and laid it on the bosom of his
son. It descended with the corpse into the tomb; and
those lustrous gems are as dark and rayless as the deep
night which envelopes them.
Johnson, in his censure of Milton's Lycidas, says,
' Passion plucks no berries from the myrtle and ivy, nor
calls upon Arethusa and Mincius.... Where
there is leisure for fiction there is little grief.' But
grief, like other great passions, is capricious, and cannot
be confined to a uniform rule of conduct. The King
was quite sincere in his sorrow, yet he sought out a
name for his partner in affliction which prosaic persons
may consider too fanciful. And he was equally sincere
when in consecrating the richest jewel he possessed, he
was committing in the eyes of utilitarians an extravagance, because the act led to no useful end. But it is
not the first time that the most precious possession has
been sacrificed at the passionate impulse of a devoted
heart; and 'this waste' been reproved by those who
could not see the beauty of an uncalculating action.
As for the Queen's sorrow, it was deep instinctive
anguish, alleviated by Christian faith. It is woman's
power or privilege to suffer and yet survive: and




RIZPAH.                   427
Kaleleo-ka-lani outlived this blow to endure yet deeper
waves of sorrow. For four days and nights she never
stirred from the little grave beneath the tamarind-tree.
There, not farther intrusive into the sanctity of grief,
we leave her for the present, fixed in her attitude of
mourning, like ' Rizpah the daughter of Aiah' watching
beside her dead. There is something peaceful, at this
distance of time, in the picture: the princely child
sinking gently asleep; the mother beneath the loving
sky of heaven, beautiful by day and yet more beautiful
by night, with fixed gaze, seeing the flickering shadows
of the leaves cast in turn by sun and by moon on the
little spot of earth, more dear to her than all the world,
where her innocent child reposes motionless and still' A lovely beauty in a summer grave.'




428


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


CHAPTER XXVJI.
BROKEN-HEARTED.
THE strong nature of the King had received by the
death of his child a blow the momentum of which
could not at first be estimated by others, or, probably,
by himself. It had shaken his whole being; but the
insidious fractures did not show themselves till time had
brought the disintegrating power of its heats and chills,
and especially its stormy rains. For the present he
returned into himself, and did not know that his wound
was incurable. He resumed the work he had undertaken before the Prince's illness, and retiring with the
Queen to a residence they possessed some twenty miles
from Honolulu, he proceeded with the translation of the
English Book of Common Prayer into his native tongue.
So, in their several literary occupations, Cowper strove
against his deathlike despondency, Burton against the
melancholy he anatomized, and Cruden against his fits
of intermittent madness. The King's translation of our
book of offices is in every respect a very remarkable
work. It is remarkable in its origin; that he should
of his own mere notion have designed such a labour; and
without help and without fearfully weighing the difficulties of transfusing into his own language, deficient in
words, and more deficient in abstract ideas, the moral
and theological conceptions of the Church, should have




THE TRANSLATION OF THE PRAYER —BOOK.


429


proceeded at once to his successful accomplishment of
the task proposed to himself. It is remarkable for the
original manner in which the King, exercising his own
discretion, arranged the contents of the volume, placing
the services in an order corresponding with what he
conceived to be their importance and their frequency of
use.  The book commences with the sentences of
morning prayer; the beginning of the Exhortation being
rendered ' Ena hoahanau aloha!'-the last word, one
of great significance and frequency in the mouths of
Hawaiians, conveying, as has been already mentioned,
love, salutation and good wishes. It is their universal
word at greeting and at parting. Like the poi which
the Hawaiians of every class eat, they could not go on
without the word ' aloha.' It most fitly makes its appearance there thus early, when the congregations are
joined together to serve the Lord. Matins are followed
by the order of evening prayer; the Litany,-in
which the names of Kamehameha and Queen Emma,
take the place of those of our royal family;-the occasional prayers and thanksgivings. These are immediately succeeded by the catechism and the baptismal
services. Then come the collects and the epistles and
gospels; the administration of the holy communion;
the burial service; matrimony; the churching of
women; rules for finding the dominical and epact; the
calendar, and the table of Feasts, &c.
The execution of the book is also remarkable. The
King took extreme pains in the translation; and
persons well acquainted with the Hawaiian language
and competent to judge, inform us that the work has a
right to be entitled a good translation, and that they
are satisfied with the general truth and beauty of it.
As an instance of the good taste with which Kamehameha




430


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


proceeded, it may be mentioned that no foreign words
are employed, except a few Latin titles to psalms. Not
the least curious parts of the work are the calendars,
tables for finding Easter, &c., presented in Polynesian
garb.
The book is remarkable also for what it omits. The
name of 'Halelu Davida' appears on its title-page,
but the King's hand was cold in death before this part
of his task was completed. The other omission to
notice is that of the Athanasian Creed. Its absence is
to be accounted for, in the first place, from the insuperable difficulties which would have encountered the
King in trying to give expression and meaning to its
language. The King knew his people well, and what
the native mind was capable of apprehending. He was
himself well acquainted with the history of the Church
and the heresies which successively assailed it in its
early course. He had even, it is said, described the
progress of the Church in a series of letters in a
native paper: but in preparing a book of offices for all
classes of his subjects, young and old, inveterately ignorant or partially instructed, he (we think wisely) left
unsaid what he knew would be uncomprehended, and
might be perverted. The Hawaiians, so lately heathens,
had never conceived the erroneous ideas combated in
the ancient Athanasian symbol, against which false
views it was to be a doctrinal bulwark. They had not
even words in which to clothe those ideas. From the
very form of this creed, to have taught his subjects by
its means speculative truths would have been to make
them scholars in speculative errors, and to have presented
to minds requiring to be fed upon milk, doubts and
questionings which they could not have digested. Indeed, the very application of the remedy would have




THE KING'S PREFACE.


431


been to have propagated the virus of the disease which
was apprehended.   So the King, with thoughtful regard
to the present condition of those who were to use the
prayer-book, left the Athanasian Creed untouched.*
That part of the work, however, which in this country
excites most surprise is the explanation, or preface as
it would properly be called had it not been placed at
the end of the book. It is a description or explanation
of the prayer-book, and an argument for the use of
stated prayers in congregational service.  We have the
distinct assurance that this admirable composition is
the unaided work of the King.      Without such assurance, one would scarcely believe from its form, its
argument and its language, that its author's mind had
not received an European training.     It is connected,
simple in style, earnest in spirit, and of such a length
as to command attention without fatiguing it. The
King had been long accustomed to hear the so-called
extempore prayers of the American missionaries; he
had marked the fallacy of the system, and had seen how
soon the round of variety in praying was completed,
leading to the inevitable result either of a return to
previous phrases and petitions, or to the omission, for
the sake of varying the prayer, of supplications for the
supply of man's always-recurring and never-ceasing
necessities.t
It is a matter of some wonder how the King found
time to execute his task, for he had the cares of a kingdom upon him. The supreme government of a country,
* ' The Athanasian Creed, indeed, was received tacitly, not formally,
by the Church, embodying as it does, the faith authoritatively set forth in
the four first General Councils.'-Pusey, 'Eirenicon.'
t The Preface to the King's Prayer-book has been reprinted by the
Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, Tract No. 1,357, and has
gone into extensive circulation in England.




432


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


however small, is not to be carried on, especially by one
who rules as well as reigns, without labour and cost of
time: and Kamehameha IV. made it his duty to know
and be master of all things which concerned his kingdom, and to read every despatch received in each department, even those which were only semi-official.
But he was a very early riser, the great secret of having
time for work. One of the clergy of the English mission
mentions that before six one morning, and ere he was
up, the King and Queen came to him requesting him
to see a poor dying native whom they had themselves
visited that day already.  Most other nations rise
earlier than the English, or, what is more true, the
English do not rise so early as other nations; and at
5.30 A.M. the generality of Englishmen are, and without
reproach, still asleep.
The engrossing nature of the work was of great value
to the King after the death of his son. It was necessary
that occupation should prevent the little face, which
filled his thoughts so much by day and formed his dreams
so frequently at night, becoming too fixed an idea.
He seems to have felt the danger, and to have tried, in
appearance at least, to pursue and find pleasure in his
former routine of life, and frankly mingle with those
of his subjects who were worthy of his regard. He was
at this time twenty-nine years of age; a man of six feet
in height, elegant in figure and movement; his skin,
the full copper-colour, and his features exhibiting the
oceanic Malay-type of the Polynesian race. The expression of his face was sweet and animated. His
bearing graceful and courteous in the highest degree.
He was an admirable rider, a good whip, shot well, and,
at proper times, thoroughly enjoyed a game of cricket or
of billiards. He was an English gentleman cut in




THE KING'S TASTES AND MORAL CHARACTER.  433


olive. He had read English literature and European
history.  We speak in part from  our own personal
recollection, and will add from personal knowledge, that
the private letters of Kamehameha to his friends had all
the freedom, not only of handwriting, but of expression
and flow, which is characteristic of the writing of our
educated countrymen; whilst they sparkled with more
humorous turns and strokes of playful raillery than the
generality of English correspondence.
He possessed taste in the constructive arts, and was
fond of designing furniture. The native woods, though
not adapted to building purposes, are excellent for
cabinet-making. The last effort of the King of this
kind was to design a work-table for Queen Victoria,
which was executed in koa and kou woods, and is now
in the palace of Windsor.
It was renarkable that up to the time of the arrival
of the English Episcopal Mission in October 1862, the
King had made no outward demonstration of religious
life. It is not pretended that his youth had been free
from  faults and careless living; but he was at the
period named very happily married, and, without any
assumption of piety, was living quietly, and attending
strictly to the duties of his position. How wicked is the
malice of some persons who now, when the subject of
their anger is silent in the grave, overlooking all his later
life of usefulness and religious devotion, find pleasure
in recounting the foibles or the recklessness of a mere
boy, and strive, as it were, to make the penitent dead
' possess the sins of his youth.' The secret of the King's
reticence in religion, and his abstention from external
profession, was the want of sympathy he felt for the
religious teachers about him. He expressed this fact
himself; and it is with no view of provoking angry
F F




434


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


feeling that it is now repeated, but because it is the
true reason of a circumstance that was observed, and
which required explanation. The greatest reserve that
is possible is maintained throughout this historyin speaking of religion, or rather of religionists, in connection
with Hawaii; but when the cause of truth demands a
candid statement, it must be given in all simplicity.
Some volumes and pamphlets which have appeared
during the last. eighteen months, opposed to the establishment of the English Church in the islands, have
used this candour, and sometimes have dispensed with
that reserve.
As to the King, it is certain that the faults of the
past weighed heavily on his mind during the last year
of his life. Before he was five-and-twenty, in a moment
of excited passion, he was led to the commission of
an act which had a sad termination.   If the most
heartfelt sorrow, if the tenderest care, and the amplest
reparation possible could have availed to avert the
threatened catastrophe, a life would have been saved.
In his self-reproaches he went so far as to offer to lay
aside the prerogative of the crown, and make himself
amenable to justice, should he on trial before a criminal
tribunal be adjudged guilty. If he resembled David in
the greatness of occasional transgressions, he resembled
David in the deepness and sincerity of his contrition.
And we may now turn from the dark shadows of the
picture to its brilliant lights. The eclipse lasts an hour,
but the sun shineth for ever. The King had looked
forward to the arrival of the English bishop and clergy
for that religious help and sympathy he needed. Ere
they came he made such fitting preparations for their
establishment and comfort as his own private means
would allow, added to the assistance which some of the




HIS WARM WELCOME TO THE ENGLISH MISSION.    43.


chiefs and foreign residents gladly gave: and when they
arrived at last, and he came out of his mournful retirement to greet them, his noble and generous nature
did not allow him to offer a half-hearted welcome. In
the tender communion of Bishop Staley, so soon to be
smitten himself with the same blow which had desolated
the royal pair, he found abiding comfort. No false
pride prevented him now making open profession of his
faith, and he and his Queen were confirmed in public,
and he thenceforward became a constant communicant
at the Lord's Table. From the very interesting letters
and journals of Archdeacon and Mrs. Mason which
have been received in England during the last two
years, many pleasing traits and notices of the late
King are to be gathered. Their intercourse with him
and the Queen was very frequent and always happy.
'The King shows in his conversation and in the things
he writes an extraordinary amount of reading.' * * * *
' His great personal attractions are his remarkably easy
and gentlemanlike address, and his soft pensive eyes. His
manner with ladies is particularly refined.' * * * The
King joined in a game of cricket, and again showed how
well he can unbend with his people, without appearing
to condescend, and yet without losing his dignity.' * *
'The King was present at a meeting at the Court House
respecting the mission. It is so very delightful to see
a King acting as really the father of his people; caring
for their spiritual as well as their temporal interests.'
He strove, at least he showed himself willing, to enter
into the little enjoyments of his new guests; joined in
some excursions with them, rejoicing at their admiration
of the natural beauties of Hawaii, and insisting on
giving up the arrangrements which had been prepared
for his own comfort, that the new comers might not be
FF2




436


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


incommoded by mosquitoes, &c., in their al fresco
campaign.
But under the external show of cheerfulness, and
under the round of daily duties and constant acts of
kindness, there throbbed a breaking heart; and all that
the world saw were the expiring manifestations of a life
that was sapped and would shortly disappear. Wordsworth describes a man whom he had known, and whose
reason gave way in aberration, under the smart of
wounded affections, as
- one of giant stature, who could dance
Equipp'd from head to foot in iron mail.'*
Such a description would not have overstated the
physical powers of Kamehameha; and yet he was
fading away beneath the canker of a bosom grief: ' If
ever'-writes one who was accustomed to be daily in
his society,-' If ever I saw a broken-hearted man, it
s the King.' His sun was to go down at noon, yet not
without one hour of twilight. The last year was truly
a crepuscule of glowing, tender light, the unexpected
but fit prelude to the setting of that bright informing
spirit in death.
On the 27th of September, being the anniversary of the
Prince of Hawaii's decease, the King and Queen called
on Archdeacon and Mrs. Mason in the evening, bringing
with them six little native children, whom they desired
should be educated at the expense of the royal pair, in
commemoration of the death of their son; one of them
being the foster-brother of the lost prince. Thus the
great grief of their life was already sanctifying itself, by
claiming to be united to acts of beneficence to man and
of piety towards God.


* 4 'Tis said that some have died for love.'-Wordsworth's Works.




FORE-SHADOWINGS.


437


It is under the tender hues of declining life that we
are called upon to exhibit the strong nature of the King.
All must have noticed at some time the magic of the
evening hour, to which we have compared the last year
of this great chief. Under its influence we have seen
the stagnant pool, with its unlovely foreground and
accessories, light up into beauty-the slant sunbeams
dappling it with lights and deep mysterious shadows,
so that the artist would gladly have transfixed the scene
upon his canvas; whilst nobler things, the ivy-clad
rock and columned portico, gathered greatness to their
greatness, and stamped themselves upon memory, to be
retained whilst memory has any power to hold her
treasures. In the autumn of 1863 the King and Queen
met with a carriage accident, which placed their lives
in great peril. Whilst driving, their horses ran away,
and were approaching a precipice, when the carriage was
upset and its occupants were thrown out, and though
saved from their impending fate, were much bruised and
shaken. Their first impulse was to send to the clergyman and request that their thanksgiving might be
offered during the evening service; a eucharist which
was repeated the next morning, by receiving the holy
communion at the bishop's hands. This circumstance
is mentioned as showing how immediate to the King's
thoughts was religion, and how softened his character
was under its influences.
Whether this accident had any ulterior effect on the
King's health is uncertain; but an incident will now
be mentioned which had occurred some months previously, an incident very affecting in its circumstances,
and which exercised a permanent influence on the
whole man.
In the month of February, 1863, the Kingleft Hono



438


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


lulu accompanied by Bishop Staley, and his aide-decamp Colonel Kalakawa, on a visit to the island of
Hawaii. On Saturday the 28th they arrived at the
village of Kailua, where the King had a summer residence, and where he intended to remain a few days.
Major Hoapili, who had already taken the resolution to
resign his secular appointments, both in the army and as
a district judge, and was preparing himself under the
bishop's superintendence for holy orders, was also of
the party. As the bishop was leaving in the afternoon
to hold services at Kona, a village fifteen miles distant,
he left in the hands of the royal party a prayer book,
bracketed in pencil, so that, in the absence of a clergyman, public prayers might be offered by one of the
suite.
In this country residence, beside the ever-murmuring
ripple of the blue Pacific, the King had had his last
intercourse with his darling child whilst in perfect
health. As he wandered through the house, the memories of that happier time thronged upon him and greatly
affected him. At last, he chanced upon a box containing playthings which the little prince had used;
and never before did toys present such sad and solemn
associations. At seeing them the bereaved father could
not restrain his grief; and in such a tender and melancholy mood the morning of Sunday opened upon him.
Near the King's retreat there was a meeting-house of
the Congregationalists; and though no resident minister
was stationed at Kailua, a service was held that day in
the chapel by a native preacher. The King and his
suite attended the service, which mainly consisted of a
high Calvinistic sermon, in which a terrifying picture
was drawn of the God of the Christians, and the preacher
descanted with zealous unction on judgment and the




A ROYAL SERMON.


439


second death, intermixing it with sweet contemplations
on the eternal punishment of the damned. Lacerated
in his own feelings, and grieving for those of his poor
subjects who found no more spiritual food presented to
them than these alarming representations, the King
determined to hold a second service in the afternoon.
When this intention was known, the building was
crowded with natives, and Major Hoapili putting on a
white surplice, read prayers in the manner indicated
by the bishop. Then the King, also wearing a linen
surplice, and thus marking to the native mind the
different office he assumed, addressed to the attentive
auditory an extempore sermon. To say that the text
he selected was the pearl-like sentence in St. John's
Gospel, ' Jesus wept,' speaks volumes in itself. The
preacher's own bleeding heart was clinging to all the
tenderness and sympathy of a Saviour's love, and he
recommended that abounding love and beneficence and
long-suffering as the motive for holiness and for hope to
his hearers. Deep was the silence and the attention of
that auditory. It was their king who spoke-the old
feudal spirit would alone have made them earnest to
catch every word and observe every gesture. It was
their Christian King, the mourner for whose loss, on his
approach the previous day, the women had raised the
wail of grief-who was uttering golden words of consolation, and they were riveted by his voice. It was a
scene to be lastingly remembered. It has been truly
said of it that we must trace back the stream of history
even to Charlemagne if we would meet with its parallel,
and see a king of men in humble love setting forth to
his subjects the love of the King of kings.
But the excitement of his agitated feelings was too
great for the King. When the sermon was over a




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


X numbness seized one of his hands and presented symptoms of incipient paralysis.       A   messenger was sent
to the bishop at Kona, who despatched one of his
clergy  travelling   with   him, Mr. Ibbotson, and        the
resident doctor, and they reached Kailua at midnight.
The attack appeared to pass away; but it seemed to
the King himself sufficiently serious to lead him to send
to his devoted Queen and beg her to come to him from
Honolulu.*
* I may be transgressing the part of a historian in reproducing in a
foot-note some verses which the incident narrated above called forth,
and which appeared in a London periodical. The circumstances were
sufficiently varied at the time to prevent their application being too
personal:BROKEN TOYS.
I have bow'd beneath the stroke, and the storm is passing o'er:
I will walk, and will not murmur, though my lips may smile no more.
The world is quite forsakenMy beautiful is taken
To the dim eternal shore.
I have learn'd to watch the little spot of earth that is my boy's,But scarcely yet I dare to touch his broken toys.
'Mid the shadows of the evening, in the blackness of the night,
That struggle and that piteous look come back upon my sight;
Until I cry, ' Thank Heaven,
Short was thy fearful levin,Not longer was the fight.'
And I recall the resting limbs, the peaceful, smiling face,
Sunlit, as if of pain it ne'er had known a trace.
I have gathered up his few small books,-they stand beside my bed;
I have folded up for treasures the clothes from which he fled:
The cambric shirt, with stain
Of blood from the blue vein
Of his arm when he was bled.
I can bear these suffering tokens,-but not those of his joys;A mother's heart is broken by these broken toys.




THE RECEPTION AND THE VACANT PLACE.


441


In the course of the autumn circumstances, both
political and in connection with the royal family,
occasioned the King disquietude: and those about him
felt uneasy on the subject of his health, though no
definite indications of its failure yet appeared. The
sun had even then left the zenith.
He retreated from state ceremonials as much as
possible, and preferred the private life; yet on necessary
occasions-the presentation of a new diplomatic agent
or the commander and officers of a freshly-arrived
national ship-he showed at the palace his usual simple
but dignified courtesy to the new comers. Late in the
year it was thought desirable to hold a public reception,
and with no small effort and self-denial the King and
Queen consented to bear about the mockery of whatever gaiety and pleasure is supposed to be connected
with such gatherings.   The evening of the 28th of
November, 1863, was the appointed time. The King's
health was known to be infirm, but none seemed to have
been aware that the flame of life was burning low, and
was even then flickering in the socket.
The 28th of November is a white day in the Hawaiian
calendar; and the twentieth anniversary of the recognition of the independence of the country by England
and France was fit in the people's estimation to be
joyfully celebrated throughout Hawaii Nei'. Therefore
the small but pretty Iolani palace was bright with lights
at 8 o'clock that evening. Military music gave animaHow weak I am! how changeful, how desolate, how lone!
Bear with my faithless grief, 0 Thou, to whom all grief is known!
I will think upon Thy story;
I will think upon his glory
Who from my arms is flown;
And try to figure to myself the bliss that is my boy's:But my heart is well-nigh broken by these broken toys!




442


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


tion to the sight, and the scent of flowering plants in
the palace enclosure, and the paler hues of the blossoms
in the flood of silver moonlight, reminded European and
other guests that they were in a climate where winter
is not a stepmother to nature; but where the maidens
can wreathe their heads with flowers, and youths fill ti
leaves with ripe strawberries through all the months.
Among those who thronged to the reception were the
Bishop of Honolulu, the English Commissioner Mr.
Synge, the American Minister, all the political and
judicial functionaries, and many foreign and native residents. Uniforms of aides-de-camp, robes of clergy, and
the full dresses of ladies, made an ensemble which
differed from that of European courts in magnitude
only, not in brilliancy or elegance.
It was at once perceived by the assemblage that no
member of the royal family was present; and when the
Queen entered the reception chamber she was alone.
She remained there an hour, and received the presentation of several official and many private persons, spoke
some kind words to those who approached her, and retired from that bright scene to watch by the bed-side
of her husband.
On the 30th, at nine o'clock in the forenoon, there
being no apparent cause for alarm  or symptoms of
approaching dissolution, the Queen was entirely alone,
but still watching the countenance of the King, who
spoke to her in a low voice. He ceased suddenly and
drew a long breath, when the poor wife (no queen at
that minute, only a loving anxious woman) supposing
that a spasm had caused her husband to lose his breath,
or that he had fainted, bent her lips to his, and tried
with her breath to restore the action of his lungs. She
might as well have tried to bestow life on a marble




THE SUDDEN END OF ALL.


443


statue.  A  slight muscular motion remained in the
heart, and added to her incredulity that she was face to
face with death. The bishop and the ministers were
hastily summoned, and the first comers reached the
chamber too late to see their sovereign still alive.
It was some time before the Queen could dispel the
dull disbelief that the man to whom she was passionately
attached was taken from her. This scepticism 6f survivors at the first moments of their bereavement is an
opiate mercifully afforded in many cases, and dulls the
agony which might destroy them by its blow, and lay
them  on the same bed of death.    But like other
anodynes, the veil is sooner or later rent asunder, and
then the pangs of pain or grief resume their full reign.
With the Queen, disbelief had to give way to the certain
knowledge that she was a widow, and that the corpse of
Kamehameha was already growing cold. But with a
constancy, which has been seen at the death of her
child, and was now still farther exemplified, she could
not be removed from the side of the corpse. Bowed
down, silent and fasting-for in eight (lays nothing but
a few grapes and a little water passed her lips-she
remained unconscious to the whole outer world; whilst,
as in the case of Job, in the first onslaught of his sufferings, her friends and attendants could only watch round
her in silence and tears. The only sound which reached
her, and which soon by its continuance became unobserved, was the wail of men and women, which during
two months went up incessantly by night and day round
the walls of the palace. Yes, there was one influence
which made itself a way to the Queen in the very flood
of her distress,-it was her religious faith. One soft
footstep was heard by an ear inattentive to louder
sounds,-it was that of the bishop, as he came at the




444


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


Queen's desire to administer to her at 7 o'clock, the
morning after her bereavement, the sacramental bread and
wine, the instrument to which she looked for consolation
if not for comfort. Among those of her own sex who
watched by the Queen, were Mrs. Staley the bishop's
wife; Mrs. Mason and Mrs. Synge, respectively the
wives of the now Archdeacon of Maui and of the English
commissioner. These ladies scarcely ever left her.
In this age of veneer, when the solid mahogany of
thought and principle has been so generally discarded,
and we economize by overlaying ourselves with a thin
external coat of political or moral ethics, electrotype our
feelings, and sickly o'er our learning with a very pale
cast of thought, the concentration and devotion of the
royal widow and her sympathizing attendants, and the
genuine and sustained sorrow of the King's humbler
subjects, bring to the mind a sensation almost of
refreshment, and a renewed belief
' that in our embers
Is something that doth live:'
and prove that in an age marked, as a French writer has
observed, by a general absence of conviction, there yet
linger hearts in which love and grief and zeal and piety
are realities; powerful motives influencing the whole
being they possess, and having in themselves the power
to kill or to keep alive.
Thus ended, at the early term of thirty years, the
earthly career of Alexander Liholiho, surnamed Kamehameha IV. If the absence of public achievements,
and the want of ambition, which requires to be made of
sterner stuff than was the King's delicate nature, do
not entitle him to be called great, there were materials
in his character which would have adorned the reign of
any sovereign; and possibly were sufficient to have
made him a greater King had he been placed on a larger




SPECIAL CHARACTERISTICS.


445


stage. Reviewing the occurrences of his later years, he
must be named a man of sorrows, but it may be truly
added of him, that it was good that he had been afflicted;
the chastisement that was upon him  discovered the
beauties of his disposition. Alas! why are the song of
the swan and the iris hues of the dolphin only the
certain premonitions and preludes of death?
The King had possessed in an eminent degree that
power, generally exercised unconsciously by the subject,
of attaching to himself those who came in contact with
him. So we observe golden opinions expressed of him
in the written and verbal communications of those who
had known him personally. It is not to be inferred from
what has been said of the King's want of ambition, that
he was deficient in firmness: his dismissal of the legislature in 1856, and some other passages of his life,
prove the contrary; but the character of his mind was
thoughtfulness, kindness, and love, the desire for information, and for the safety and progress of his people.
He had attracted the affection of those who knew him
in his boyhood and adolescence; and in after years he
did not lose their kind regard. As to his qualifications
for his high office, one who had been long intimate with
the King writes thus: 'Not unconscious of his own
powers, he wanted to employ them in the service of the
state, and he always felt that, as a constitutional
monarch, he was rather the arbitrator between opposing
views than the supporter of any line of policy which
recommended itself to his own judgment, and which,
off the throne, he could have better vindicated with his
own logic. As General Commanding in Chief, to give
an instance, he showed an appreciation of system and a
knowledge of detail which proved, beyond controversy,
his executive talent.' Again, the same writer says,
'that the King's talents were brilliant, his feelings keen




446


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


his appearance elegant, his conversation sparkling and
bright, and his sorrows unfathomable, we all know. He
was a prince to be proud of; and his nation mourned
him more for the promise that was in him than for his
position by birth.' Then alluding to the great grief of
his life, the same writer adds: 'We have all read in
history of an English King, who after his son's death
was never seen to smile again; and those who were
most about our late King assert that after his son's
death, he thought of him every hour of every day, and
dreamed of him by night. Now that they have met
again, it cannot be wrong to say, that the death of the
son hastened the death of the father. God grant that
we may never again see so heart-broken a man.'
The Bishop of Honolulu, who only became personally
acquainted with the late King during the last thirteen
months of his life, but through that time was in constant,
almost daily intercourse with him, thus describes him,
particularly in reference to his religious character,
knowledge, and views: ' A man of rare physical powers,
of elegant tastes, keen perceptions, who could enjoy
Kingsley, Thackeray, Tennyson, and was ever quoting
Shakespeare, the bent of his mind was still theological.
He had the strong religious instincts peculiar to his
race. Those he felt could never be satisfied by truths
which addressed themselves only to the logical faculty.
The Catholic faith, as taught in the Church of England,
in its integrity, seemed to meet fully the ciavings of his
soul.  He loved to dwell on the regularity of the
English orders, and few laymen could vindicate with
the same ability every link in the chain of their transmission. He was familiar with the works of Wheatley,
Palmer, Courayer, Perceval.  A true churchman on
conviction, he was no less opposed to Roman error than




RELIGIOUS CONVICTIONS.


447


to Congregationalism; but no one ever heard from his
lips an uncharitable word with regard to other religious
systems. He used to remark the soundness of our
position as a Church-that of Scripture interpreted by
"the old fathers "-and he would say "the waters become purer as you approach the fountain." In the last
conversation I had with him, he remarked, with reference to a service that had been held for the American
residents, "I highly approve your attempts to soften
down national feelings of irritation.  The Church is
Catholic, and knows no nationalities."  Talking over his
plan of visiting England next year with the Queen, he
said, I want to go as a member of the Anglican Church
myself, and ask my fellow-churchmen to aid me in
saving my poor people."'
On the morning after his death the body of the King
was removed into the throne-room of the palace. How
changed was that apartment in the three days since the
reception. The hall that had been so brilliant with
artificiallight,now dimmed bythe partial exclusion of the
natural day. The then subdued sound of many voices,
of salutations, not unmixed with anxiety, the whisper of
rustling silk, the clink of peaceful swords on the floor,
rnd the faint pauses of music from without, now bushed
into such silence, that a breath was heard, and a sigh
startled the ear like a cry of pain. Only from the circle
of mourners who surrounded the palace there reached;hat apartment the pathetic monotonous chant of wailing,
aow low, now rising higher, as if by new accessions of
~rief; just as from the encircling reefs the island hears;he murmur of the surf varying in force with the varying winds. The throne with its crimson hangings was
o1 longer the point to which all eyes turned; but a
bier in the centre of the room, draped with black cloth,




448


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


on which lay extended the stalwart form of the late King
arrayed in his Field-marshal's uniform, and elongated
by death into a giant's length. At his head was a small
table or altar, on which stood the emblem of his faith.
The officers of state formed a silent group beyond the
catafalque, and at each extremity were native chiefs,
bearing in their hands the tall kahilis or feathered
wands of office, with that patient immobility attained
only by the unsophisticated races of men. And, lastly,
at the front corner of that couch of death was bowed a
figure hidden by a black veil, chief mourner of all those
who sincerely mourned their sovereign, and whose
statue-like attitude struck every heart with awe and
pity.
And such remained the scene when the subjects of
Kamehameha, high and low, were allowed to pass
through the room and bid their chief a silent last
aloha. The lying in state was protracted, owing to
the preparation of the funeral obsequies, which were on
a scale unprecedented in that country. All honours
which the love and reverence of a people could suggest
were paid at the funeral; and the erection of a new
mausoleum was commenced, on rising ground looking
down on the city of Honolulu, the distant Waianae
mountains, and the ocean. 'The situation was well
chosen; and while the fan-like landscape spreads out
its unspeakable softness and beauty to the west, and
the setting sun seems to linger over the ocean's rim, as
if loth to part from a scene so lovely, sunrise and
resurrection stand close behind the mountain curtain
which fringes the valley on the east, and which prolongs the freshness and sweetness of the morning
hours.' *
* Polynesian. December 12, 1863.




THE NEW NAM E.


449


The circumstances of the new name which Queen
Emma received from her husband on the death of their
only child, the Prince of Hawaii, and the import of it,
have been mentioned in the previous chapter; and now
in her early widowhood —for the Queen was not sevenand-twenty at the time of the King'aAeath-the people,
in their affectionate sympathy, changed her name once
more.  The adjective particle na, meaning 'all,' or
'the entire,' was substituted for that of ka, which is
genitive singular. So instead of the name ' Kaleleo-kalani,' ' the flight of the chief, or heaven,' the desolation of
the wife as well as the mother was thenceforward expressed by 'Kaleleo-na-lani,-'the flight of ALL the
chiefs, or the entire heaven:' for it seemed to the
people that to their Queen, now, all joy was darkened,
and that her earth was utterly empty and void.


G G




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


CHAPTER XXVIII.
THE WILD OLIVE TREE.
IT was on the 11th of October, 1862, that Dr. Staley,
consecrated to the see of Honolulu, accompanied by
Mr. Mason, now Archdeacon of Maui, and by Mr. Ibbotson, also in priest's orders, landed in his diocese; where
he was followed soon after by Mr. Scott, also a priest, who
had gone by ship from England to San Francisco. It
can never be forgotten by those most interested in this
movement that the mission to the Sandwich Islands was
one sown in tears. The much lamented Prince Consort
of England died the day before Dr. Staley's consecration, and when the mission touched land they heard of
the death of the young Prince of Hawaii. A strange
and unaccountable gloom had fallen on the spirits of
one of the clergy who journeyed with the bishop, the
one probably fullest of hope and buoyancy, as they
neared the port of Honolulu, the goal of their long
travel; and the sad news of the blighted hope of a
nation was received by him without surprise, and
almost as if he had been prepared for the intelligence.
Within a year, the venerable prelate who had laid his
hands on Dr. Staley's head was reposing in the tomb,
and a child of the Bishop of Honolulu, and one of
Mr. Scott, were added to the number of the dead. The
death of the good Kamehameha IV. makes up the
melancholy catalogue.




THE ENGRAFTING OF THE CHURCH.


The mission, bringing with them  a branch of the
universal Church of Christ, was received in the kindest
manner. Let it be said to the honour of all those who
under different denominations serve God, whether
Romanist or Dissenter, that a welcome came from all,
and a kind hand was held out o    their arrival. If
differences of opinion soon showed themselves, if weekly
papers sought to widen divergencies and to sow feuds
of jealousy,
For whispering tongues can poison truth,
there was at least a smile of kindness when the little
band of Englishmen first trod the shore of Oahu.
The bishop and his clergy had made the most of the
opportunities for study which a voyage afforded, and
had so advanced in a knowledge of the Hawaiian tongue
that they were able immediately on their arrival to
hold a service in native.
A great deal of displeasure has been expressed in
Hawaii, in America, and some even here, at the planting of the church as it exists in England in the North
Pacific. It is not the duty of a historian to be a controversialist; far less should it be his pleasure to reply
to attacks, partly personal to himself, or to add acrimony to acrimony. It will be sufficient to say that
Dr. Rufus Anderson has written a book lately on the
Hawaiian Islands, in which a chapter is devoted not to
the praise of 'the Reformed Catholic Mission.' Each
writer has perfect liberty to give the view of a subject
he believes to be correct; but he cannot secure the
power of drawing on a discussion, during the progress of
which charity may be lost and the reading public find
themselves weary. A very few independent remarks
will be all that are necessary.
G G 2




4.52


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


As, however, the name of a distinguished English
prelate is often mentioned, it will be right to agree at
once that Samuel Wilberforce, Bishop of Oxford, the
worthy son of a man whose name became a watchword
throughout the civilized world in the cause of freedom,
was very instrume] l in the sending forth this mission
in its present form. He does not shrink from the responsibility, if it be one, of having urged on the English
promoters of the mission, on the late Archbishop of
Canterbury, and elsewhere, the absolute necessity of
giving an episcopal head and a proper organization to a
branch which was to represent the Reformed Church
Catholic, as she exists in Great Britain, in a distant
land; that so, when planted and watered and taking root
in that far-off soil, she might resemble in her degree
the Church, her mother, in her integrity, and perhaps in
after time become herself 'a pillar'd shade,' the parent
of other scions in various Oceanic groups. In Convocation the Bishop of Oxford instanced Hawaii in his
speech on the consecration of missionary bishops, and
bishops receiving sees in the dominions of friendly,
independent sovereigns. And, unquestionably, his hand
was active in so guiding proceedings that a licence was
issued to the Primate of all England which neither
compromised the Queen's Majesty as temporal head of
the Church here, nor intrenched on the dignity of the
Archbishop, nor invaded the sovereign rights of the
King of Hawaii.   In all the necessary steps which
were taken the bishop acted with the zeal and wisdom
which make him so valuable as a supporter of Church
missions in all parts of the world.
It was the duty of the writer of this history to inform
his late Majesty Kamehameha IV. as to the steps taken
about the form of the mission and the form of the




THE CARE TAKEN TO AVOID OFFENCE.


warrant by which the Archbishop was enabled, without
danger of premunire, to exercise his spiritual power of
consecrating a bishop for Hawaii at the King's own
request. He acquainted the King that no allegiance
was claimed from this new bishop, and no jurisdiction
was attempted to be conferred upoqhim; and also that,
had the word jurisdiction been used, its meaning extended no farther than that of power to the bishop to
decide civil causes in his own court among such Englishborn subjects as chose to come before him as suitors.
Never was a graft inserted into the wildling olive
with more tendernesss or care. The earnest consideration of the late Primate and the Bishops of London and
Oxford was assisted by the views of the Lord Chancellor
and the Attorney-General. The steps taken here were
most constitutional; and in result a bishop left the
English shores as unfettered as any on record, and his
landing in the Hawaiian Islands had nothing which
could raise a fear as to infringement of the King's
sovereignty and prerogative, or excite alarm of encroachment as regarded any Christian communities
already settled there. The Church in Hawaii is free and
independent.  She has been espoused by the royal
family and many of the chiefs; by foreign residents
and large numbers of the native population. Her
mission, she feels, is not to usurp-but to teach and
bless and save.
The cry of injury and fear which Christian denominations in the islands have uttered at the coming of the
English Church-which they describe as an entering in
on other men's labours, a trespass on their preserves —
and the opposition which they offer, if not strange, are
at least uncalled for. The Roman Catholics cannot
have already forgotten the aggressive means by which




454


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


their church obtained a lodgment in the islands, however those transactions may have been afterwards condoned by the Hawaiian government in consideration of
the personal piety and quiet behaviour of the Romanists
there. And the American Nonconformists must surely
remember those 1nciples of religious liberty and
equality which they instilled (much to their credit)
into successive constitutions and enactments, they being
the advisers of the King and his chiefs. They can
scarcely have intended that that religious liberty was
to be confined to their own body, or that equal rights
supposed no competitors.    For the    information of
readers not so well informed as to the state in which
religious profession was placed under the constitutional
monarchy, the following extracts are given.
The second article of the constitution granted by
King Kamehameha III, in        1852, and by Kamehameha V. in 1864, declares 'All men are free to
worship God according to the dictates of their own
consciences; but the sacred privilege, hereby secured,
shall not be construed as to justify acts of licentiousness
or practices inconsistent with the peace or safety of the
kingdom.' Of the statute laws enacted in 1845-1846,
the sixth and seventh sections of the second Act relate to
religion, and proceed as follows:SECT. VI. The religion of our Lord and Saviour Jesus
Christ shall continue to be the established national religion of
the Hawaiian Islands. The laws of Kamehameha III., orally
proclaimed, abolishing all idol worship and ancient heathenish
customs, are hereby continued in force, and said worship and
customs are forbidden to be practised in this kingdom, upon
the pains and penalties to be prescribed in the criminal code.
SECT. VII. Although the Protestant religion is the religion
of the government as heretofore proclaimed, nothing in the




RELIGIOUS FREEDOM AND PROTECTION.        455
last preceding section contained shall be construed as requiring
any particular form of worship, neither is anything therein
contained to be construed as connecting the ecclesiastical with
the body politic. All men residing in this kingdom shall be
freely allowed to worship the God of the Christian Bible, according to the dictates of their own consciences, and this
sacred privilege shall never be infried upon. Any disturbance of religious assemblies, or hindrance of the free and
unconstrained worship of God, unless such worship be connected with indecent or improper conduct, shall be considered a
misdemeanour, and punished as in and by the criminal code
prescribed.
The above articles and sections express complete
tolerance in religion, and disclaim the implication of a
state religion, farther than in connecting the government with the Protestant form of Christianity.
Still less will the dissenting community deny with
truth the historic fact that England was frequently
invited during sixty years to send clerical assistance to
Hawaii; from the time when Vancouver bore the first
message for help, and Liholiho preferred the same request with his own lips on his visit to this country.
Mr. Wyllie, the late Foreign Minister, in a letter to the
writer of this account, dated 14th December 1859, recounts the successive attempts which were made to
obtain an episcopal church and clergyman in Honolulu,
evidencing a continuous desire for it. It is true that
the Hawaiian kings and chiefs did not ask for a bishop
-they might in former years as well have thought of
asking for the moon. The time for missionary bishops
was not come,-but now is come: and the English
Church does not feel she has done her duty in propagating herself in distant places, by sending a single
unaided clergyman to struggle with overwhelming




456


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


numbers and difficulties, to sink or swim in his solitary
endeavoulrs to convert millions of heathens, having at
the same time to sustain the glow-worm-like flame of
his own faith and courage and energy. So the request
of 1859, it is well known, did not at first contemplate
a bishop. When DIan Swift was asked by a beggar for
a mug of his honours small-beer, he replied that beggars
should not be choosers, and he ordered him up a jug
of ale. On the request for a clergyman being made,
those in England who know now what missions must be
to be effective, pointed out the necessity for an episcopal
head, and showed their readiness in trying to procure
one for Hawaii; and this enlargement of the plan was
immediately and gladly followed by the King's request
that a bishop should be appointed and consecrated for
his dominions. The Bishop of Oxford distinctly stated
that he would not join in endeavours to send forth a
mission that was not properly constituted by having a
bishop at its head; and in this view he spoke the mind
of some of the most important of its promoters. The
writers and speakers who have been ready to complain
of one particular prelate having taken so considerable
a part in the planting of the English Church in the
islands of Hawaii have connected with that bishop's
name the names of one or two other persons who are
often seen associated with him in. active works of religion. They also have asserted that one great body in
the church has been exclusively the promoter and supporter of the mission. This latter assertion is not
correct. Among the contributors to the mission are
numbered some of those who take to themselves the
distinctive title of Evangelical-a title which no real
Christian will consent to forego, except as a convenient
distinction of schools existing in one church. When




ALL ASKED TO CO-OPERATE.


4;5r


invitations were addressed to the Societies for Propagating
the Gospel, and for the Promotionof Christian Knowledge,
a similar appeal was made to the Church Missionary
Society: and it is only due to that great Society, as well
as to the Hawaiian Mission, to mention that the grounds
of non-compliance with the work of co-operation submitted to the managers of the C. M. S. were stated to
be, that the grants made by the Society already exceeded
its income; and its fundamental rule that its efforts
were to be directed to lands where Christ is not named,
and not to those countries which already profess Christianity. It is right that these facts should be stated;
because although, in one land, men earnest in the cause
of religion, impressed strongly with their particular
views, think it well to work apart from others, yet in a
country too young in religion and too far removed to
understand the distinctions which lead to this division
of labour, there ought to be but one church, as there is
but one sun in the heavens.
Under the declarations contained in successive constitutions quoted above, there can be little fear of an
Erastian Church founding itself in Hawaii: and the
danger in the case of the Reformed Catholic Communion
is still farther removed from the tendencies of that
church itself-its independence and its autonomy. It
has already adopted synodal action, and its synod is
composed of laymen and clergy, the former preponderating in numbers. The members of this council or
synod are also the trustees of the church buildings and
property. There can be no state endowment of the
church. The American missionaries and their friends
pronounce themselves strongly against all future grants
or endowments, either to the Anglican body or to
themselves.  The English perfectly assent to this




'458


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


decision: but one has to remember that the American
missionary churches, schools, &c., are already endowed,
and that nearly all the former missionaries received
grants. It is always pleasing to see self-restraint; but
that virtue is not so striking when the practitioner of it
denies himself receiving what he already possesses, and
checks his appetite after he has eaten and is fill.
There ought, then, to be no ground for strife among
those who profess their lives devoted to bringing to the
Hawaiian people the blessings of the Gospel, and not
only converting them, but training them in a new and
sanctified life. Let not the most earnest among the
American body judge the Ghurch of England hardly
even in this day, if it be so, of small things. There are
men among the former of enlightened views-instance
the late Dr. Armstrong-and of gentle, earnest spirit;
men whom love directs. If it be not invidious to select
one name from among several, that of Mr. Damon
might be stated, about whom no word of dispraise seems
ever to be uttered: and who, by a long course of Christian devotion and kindness, has won to himself the high
esteem of all who know him. He pursues his ministrations in his chapel in Honolulu, called the Bethel
Church, the place of worship specially intended for seamen who visit the port.
If the American missionary party would calmly and
candidly survey the results of forty years of their occupancy of the islands as religious teachers, and of the
million of dollars which they urge has been spent by
America in supporting their mission, so far from being
satisfied with what has yet been done, they should gladly
see any fresh Christian agency brought to bear on a
population still for the greater part sunk in ignorance,
vicious habits, and, it must be added, idolatry: a popu



CAUSES OF FORMER NON-SUCCESS.


459


lation sinning against the laws of health as well as
morality, and perishing from the earth in consequence.
Enough has been written already about their vices;
but later witnesses, those who have acquired the language, tell us how the pollution of mind and body
spreads itself in their most ordinary conversation, and
infects almost the lisping words of children. And then
the snaky form of idolatry, so tenacious of life, and
which proves to have been scotched, not killed, is lifting
up her head again. Kahunas (priests) of Pele are still
to be met with; the old heathenism shows itself when
under terror or pain the man throws aside the mask
and speaks out; and many well-authenticated cases of
praying to death have been met with even within the
last two years.
Several circumstances would conduce to the want of
more complete success on the part of the American
missionaries, even leaving out of sight the radical
question as to the promise of power which accompanies
authority in those duly sent forth to evangelize the
world, by Christ. It is not a question which I shall
enter upon; nor do I leave out of sight the fact that
the missionaries were acting in a field where authorized
teachers had not been sent. There were practical detriments independently. There was a mistake as to the
characteristics of the native race; a mistake as to the
adaptiveness of Christianity to conform itself to mental idiosyncrasies, and form itself into new vessels
moulded differently from those which had previously
contained it.  There was, probably, incompatibility
between some of the persons and the work they engaged
in,-the difficulty of square, even angular, men in
round holes, and so forth. They were blind to salient
features in the national character-their belief in aris



460


HIlAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.


tocracy, their fine organization of eye and ear, their
acute observing and reasoning powers, their sense of
the ludicrous. It was a drawback to the dignity, and
therefore to the usefulness, of the missionaries, that
many of them engaged in trade, and that of a very
retail kind. They may urge that it was needful to have
some means of supporting themselves and their families,
several of them being proletary in character. Farther,
they may perhaps remind us that Paul the apostle was
Saul the tent-maker. As to the former difficulty, we
may point out the fact they themselves are justly proud
of, that Northern America contributed a million of
dollars for the support of the mission; that there were
schools of missionaries' children, and other provision
made in their behalf. If, then, it was necessary for a
missionary to keep a store, we say that it was an unfortunate adjunct, and a detriment to his more spiritual
functions; for a congregation can hardly be so much impressed with Sunday preaching against unworldliness
and in praise of elevation to the spiritual life, when
they remember that on Saturday they haggled with
their minister about the price of a pair of shoes, or, on
Friday, had to complain to him of short weight in a
piece of bacon. And as to any argument based on the
example of the apostles, we must bear in mind that the
world has changed its views in this and many other
secular things, and has.introduced lines of demarcation
which did not exist when the Roman citizen was deemed
incomplete who had not acquired an art or a trade.
St. Paul acted according to the customs of his contemporaries, and in conformity with their ways of
thinking in these matters. Now, there are different
customs in society and new modes of thought, and the




OUR OWN HEART-IDOLS.


461


ministers of the Church, with great advantage, adapt
themselves to the atmosphere in which they live.
It is in no spirit of triumph that these facts are recorded. They only show the infection of our nature,
and the weakness of our means to struggle against and
overcome it. We need but look at home, and we shall
see that-after centuries of Christianity, ministers of
religion spread throughout the land, books, tracts,
Bibles laid open, millions of surprises,
The sound of glory ringing in our earsidolatry is not extinct; it only takes another and less
material form. Self, our will, power, are the gods of our
idolatry. A calf of gold, it is true, is no longer set up
for our prostrations; but money is worshipped by rich
and poor, and a guinea is the graven image to which
we bow down.
Great then is the need for help; and this should
rather have made the teachers of religion who have
the people's welfare at their heart joyful to see new
labourers enter the vineyard, though themselves had
already borne the heat of some hours of day, and to
have induced them to be tolerant if they found the
new comers differ from themselves in certain lines of
thought and methods of proceeding; for still there
might have been maintained truth in essentials, liberty
in non-essentials, and charity in all things. But it had
not this effect. It is said that Romanists and Dissenters
made friends on the approach of those whom they looked
upon as a common enemy, and that men of the extremest divergence in religion approached in order to
exclude the English Church. We are reminded of what
Wheatley speaks of the religionists of his day, whom he
compares to the foxes which Samson tied together by




462


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.,


their tails with a fire-brand between them, to burn the
Philistines' corn; for they whose heads were turned in
contrary directions were united in this, the desire to do
mischief to the Church of England. How needful then
is the prayer which that church uses day by day, ' that
all who profess and call themselves Christians may be
led into the way of truth; and hold the faith in unity
of spirit, in the bond of peace, and in righteousness of
life.'
It has been already mentioned that the bishop and
his clergy were received on their arrival with the utmost
kindness, though the King and Queen were absent from
Honolulu. The King's father, Governor of Oahu, together with Mr. Wyllie the Foreign Minister, and Mr.
Synge the English Commissioner, came on board to
welcome them, and a residence had been provided for
the bishop's family and for Mr. Mason's. A meetinghouse had also been purchased in Honolulu for the
Church Mission, which though mean, ugly, and insufficient, was important to have at once; but an immediate
transformation was made in its interior by arranging
the furniture and other movables they had brought with
them from England. This wooden and temporary
structure is, up to the present time, the only building
representing the bishop's chair or cathedral of Honolulu.
On the 23rd the King, who had returned to the
capital immediately on hearing of the arrival of the
mission, presided at a meeting held at the Court House
for deciding on its plan of action. On this occasion
the name and style of the mission was fixed as 'The
Hawaiian Reformed Catholic Church.' A synod was
also decided on for the government of the temporal
concerns of the new church, and for the assistance of




FIRST ACTS OF THE MISSION.


463.


the bishop in consultation. Among the first members
of the synod were Governor Kekuanoa the King's father,
Judge Robertson, and Mr. Harris, the Attorney-General,
Mr. T. Brown, together with the Bishop and his clergy.
The death of the Prince of Hawaii having prevented
the public inauguration of the mission which had been
intended, the adhesion of the King and Queen was
made known by their being publicly confirmed in the
church on the 28th of November. For many years
persons had lived in his islands without having the
opportunity of participating in the rite of confirmation,
who now took advantage of the arrival of the Bishop;
and on St. Andrew's Day, being also Advent Sunday,
Mr. Wyllie, Judge Robertson, and Mr. Harris were
confirmed.
The twilight of Advent was leading to a bright sunrising that Christmas. The zeal of the new comers,
and the readiness of those among whom    they came,
united in a Christian festival which was as brilliant as
it was impressive. The following interesting account
of the proceedings is taken from Archdeacon Mason's
letters, and is given here in his own words:
'On Christmas Eve, the arrangements in the church were
finished by 5 P.3., and I never saw in England a church so
beautifully decorated. The natives have great taste in these
matters. Here too we have all the advantage over you in
being able to get all kinds of flowers at this season.
' To make up for the want of holly, we were able to make use
of a shrub with large red cone-shaped berries. Crosses, circles
(emblems of eternity), and the sacred initials I.H.S. abounded.
Over the altar was the text " The Word was made flesh," in
native and in English: other texts about the church, such as
"Unto us a child is born," " Emmanuel, God with us," &c.
The King lent all his silver candelabra, so that when night




"tHAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


Came, and the time for the midnight service arrived (11.30),
the church was a perfect blaze of light. The Litany was first
softly chanted in native. Then the bishop and clergy put on
their best robes, and with a choir of twenty in surplices we
walked in procession round the church singing "Adeste
Fideles" (Draw near, ye Faithful). Then the Holy Communion service commenced-choral throughout. About thirty
received. After the consecration of the elements we sang, on
our knees, the beautiful hymn " Thee we adore a hidden
Saviour " (Novello's hymns, Ancient and Modern).
'The church was densely crowded, but all conducted themselves in a most orderly manner. Service over at 1 A.M. A
salute was fired from the battery, and then commenced such a
grand night-scene as I can only faintly describe. Tar barrels
were lighted on the top of Punchbowl Hill and rolled down.
The King had provided twenty torches eight feet long, made
of Kukui wood and cocoa-nut fibres dipped in tar-also an
innumerable number of blue lights. We all formed in rank,
the King, Bishop, and Mr. Synge walking together, the torchmen forming our bodyguard-and thus we proceeded through
the town, singing carols. It was a beautiful night, and the
effect was one never to be forgotten. The grand close was at
the palace, where we at last arrived. The torches and blue
lights were ranged round the small circular piece of water in
the middle of the palace courtyard. The fountains played
grandly, and the reflection of the torch lights, together with
the clear brilliant moonlight of these latitudes on the water,
and on the dark excited faces of the people, was very remarkable. At this moment some really good fireworks were
let off, and rockets shot up into the air, amidst deafening shouts
from a thousand voices for the King and Queen. Then we
sang the grand old carol of " Good king Winceslaus; " and
after a glass of champagne-punch we made the air ring with the
National Anthem, and another round of protracted " Hurrahs,"
and so to bed.'
Such was the first Christmas eve in Honolulu. Its
enthusiasm will provoke in some a smile of pity or an




ORGANIZATION OF THE MISSION.


465


expression of disdain. The circumstance of the king
of a nation joining in the midnight revelry will enhance
the ready sarcasm. David's dance before the ark will
be remembered and cited,-his answer to the woman
who expressed her scorn for her husband will be conveniently forgotten.
Before the return of Christmas eve Kamehameha was
dead. In 1864 some slight festivities of the same sort
were attempted, but they were flat in comparison of
their predecessor. To the mourning Queen the return
of the great Christian feast comes fraught with mixed
emotions. The very brightness of past joy casts a distincter image in the dark water of the present; and she
cannot help knowing by her own sad experience
' That a sorrow's crown of sorrow is remembering happier things.'
The work and organization of the mission proceeded
earnestly. Mr. Scott was established at Lahaina, on
the neighbouring island of Maui, and the second town
of importance belonging to the kingdom. Mr. Mason
and Mr. Ibbotson remained in Honolulu. The services
in the church were crowded, and on account of the insufficient size of the building, numbers of persons had
to go away each Sunday from want of room; yet there
were six services held in the church on that day. Mrs.
Mason conducted a female school or college built by
the King at his own expense. Schools and schoolteachers were the great necessity; and Mrs. Staiey gave
up the nursery governess she had brought with her from
England to take charge of a school at Lahaina. Mr.
Hyde having arrived to work as a schoolmaster, and
Mr. Elkington having been ordained deacon by the
bishop, farther education became possible; but the
H i




466


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


teaching power was quite inadequate to the work that
waited to be done.
Major Hoapili, who has since received deacon's
orders, assisted as a catechist, and hopes were entertained that two females who were sent out to the
mission from this country would have proved serviceable. Their going, however, was a mistake, and has
been a cause of disappointment to the bishop.
Far different has been the result of the arrival of
three sisters from the Devonport House, one of whom
had to return after some months, whilst her two companions remained to devote their energies and lives in
the cause they have espoused. All these ladies were in
the Crimea during the Russian war; and the knowledge
of medicine and surgery which one of them acquired
has been of the utmost service to the natives among
whom she is placed. They not only keep a girls' school
at Lahaina, but visit the natives at their habitations.
The Romanist Sisters of the Sacred Heart may be as
indefatigable in their labours, but they do not visit or
employ themselves beyond the walls of their convent.
One of the first institutions organized by the bishop
in Honolulu was the Cathedral District Visiting Society,
composed of ladies both native and English, for the
sick, poor, &c. Of this the Queen became the head and
patroness; 'and, it must be added, the most constant
and devoted visitor in the homes of the poor and afflicted
natives. Services were established in the Queen's Hospital and in the prison.
Besides the Industrial Female College at Honolulu,
to which the government contributes 1001. per annum,
the Cathedral Grammar School for boys was started,
and an adult Sunday school opened. At Kauai, another
island, a station was commenced with church and boys'




THE BISHOP'S PASTORAL ADDRESS.


467


school.  A  brotherhood, composed of natives and
foreigners, was also set on foot for the advancement of
the activity of the Church, and for doing offices of
mercy, &c.
Thus as much work was taken in hand as the bishop's
limited staff could possibly hope to accomplish-more
than the limited means of the mission could quite support; and the bishop had to forego part of the small
stipend that was assigned to him. To all who took
part in the mission it was a work and labour of love.
In consequence of misrepresentation, which, as a
matter of course, soon assailed the English Church, and
in answer to misstatements contained in a report of the
American Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions,
sitting at Boston, and the attacks made in Dr. Rufus
Anderson's book, previously mentioned, the bishop delivered on the 1st of January, 1865, a pastoral address
to his congregation, in refutation of the assertions which
had been made, and to set the facts of the case before
the world. This address was afterwards printed and
largely circulated.
Later in the year, a Romanist having sought in print
to invalidate English orders, Archdeacon Mason wrote
a defence, in the form of a pamphlet, which, short as it
is, is an admirable compendium of statement and argument: and it forms a useful handbook for churchmen
in other places besides Hawaii, especially as it is conceived in an earnest and kindly temper.
The Episcopal Church in North America has expressed
from the first promotion of the Hawaiian Mission her
readiness and pleasure in joining her efforts with those
of the English Church, and in going hand in hand with
her on so great an errand of love. The supervening of
the civil war at the moment when she would have lent
HH 2




468


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


her aid, prevented for the time that joint action she had
intended. As soon as the cloud of battle and the tramp
of marching men had ceased to dim the eye and oppress
the ear, the American Church redeemed her promise to
us and to herself. At the commencement of 1865, the
Reverend Peyton Gallagher arrived in Honolulu from
the United States; a man in many ways highly fitted
to give great assistance to the work and to strengthen
the bishop's hands. Later in the year another clergyman, Mr. Whipple, brother of the Bishop of Minnesota,
came. The former, when he approached the head of the
mission, bore with him a flag to be carried by the bishop
as his ensign when he directed his path across the
waters to the islands of his diocese. As with the old
prophets-Isaiah carrying the cup to the kings of the
earth in turn, or Chenaanah with his horns of iron,-so
the outward symbol of conquest and expansion attracted
the eyes of all who saw that meeting, and perhaps led
them to think that Christianity is a living and expansive
power, and that other ocean groups beyond their own
archipelago are still sitting in darkness, and mutely
waiting till the torch of light and truth shall be handed
to them, that they too may arise and shine.
In the autumn of 1865 the Bishop of Honolulu
visited the United States, and was present at the congress of bishops held at New York. Resolutions were
passed that the Church in America would assist with all
her power the mission in Hawaii, and would support two
clergymen there, to be under the bishop's jurisdiction.
Material help was given, and the utmost kindness shown
in the States to Dr. Staley.
The present ecclesiastical organization in Hawaii
consists ofThe Bishop; the Right Reverend T. N. Staley, D.D.




STAFF OF THE ENGLISH MISSION.


469


Clergymen in Priest's ordersThe Venerable Archdeacon G. Mason, M.A.
The Rev. E. Ibbotson.
The Rev. Peyton Gallagher, M.A.
The Rev. H. B. Whipple.
(The two last are from America.)
In Deacon's ordersThe Rev. J. J. Elkington.
The Rev. W. Hoapili Kaauwai.
(The latter is the first ordained native.)
The lay members of the Synod consist ofH.R.H. M. Kekuanaoa. (The King's father.)
The Hon. D. Kalakaua.
Judge Robertson.
The Hon. C. C. Harris: Attorney-General.
G. H. Luce, Esq.
D. Smith, Esq.
T. Brown, Esq.: Treasurer.
Another English clergyman is on his way to the islands,
having left his preferments in this country for a period
of three years, to take part in the work of the mission.
And a gentleman trained in the college of St. Augustine's,
Canterbury, is making preparations to proceed there,
and to build a church in some district where it is most
needed.
The venerable Society for Propagating the Gospel in
Foreign Parts pays a moiety of the stipend of two
clergymen; the sister Society, for Promoting Christian
Knowledge, has also made grants to the extent of 1,2001.
towards the purposes of the mission.
Thus the vital scion of an ordained and pure Church




470


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


has been ' grafted in' on the stock of the wild olive. It
requires to be sheltered from rude winds and watched
over against the canker which may sap its life. Watered
by the prayers and donations of fellow Christians, and
waiting always for a blessing from on high, it may grow
and spread, and be a crowning joy to islands that long
sat in darkness. But much requires yet to be done to
make this effort successful in a large sense. It wants
more clergy, more schoolmasters and mistresses, an endowment to place the mission on a secure and permanent
basis, and to prevent the recurrence of appeals to other
countries for large help. It requires a church in the
capital, spacious enough to contain the usual congregations which attend the services, and sufficiently solid
and handsome to take its place with the Roman Catholic
cathedral and the two stone edifices of the American
congregations. It is necessary that all who go forth to
the work should be capable people; zealous, well in-*
structed, and fine tempered. Those who go thither to
procure a mere living, or to carry out their own religious
hobbies, are worse than useless, and become a dead
weight on the mission and its funds. One great element
of prosperity must be the Christian lives of those lay
residents and visitors in the islands who profess 'that
worthy name,' and are the representatives of Christian
England. Terrible scandals have occurred, even quite
recently, in the conduct of our country people. Such
misdoings sow doubt and contempt on a nation and
Church, whose children profess not only to be themselves enlightened by religion, but to come among less
happy peoples to communicate those blessings to them.
Female help is especially needed: for in the present
condition of the population of the islands, the assistance
of English ladies, spotless in character, pure in spirit,




WHAT IT LACKS YET.


471


and possessing good abilities, is invaluable. More than
all to be desired, are additions from such as have been
prepared and trained in sisterhoods or under the superintendence of their parochial clergyman, and are able,
as soon as they arrive in Hawaii, to commence systematically the offices of teaching in schools and at home,
visiting the poor, consoling the sick and sorrowful-for
even the work of consolation requires to be learnt —
winning back the erring and fallen, and remedying and
healing bodily hurts and illness in places where regular
professional aid is not to be had.
But it may be thought that there is danger in pure
and young women being thus brought face to face and in
daily intercourse with the vicious and the impure. To
religious and well-instructed women, however young,
the danger apprehended is little or nothing. Vice will
not assume to them its seductive mask; its naked
'features of such hideous mien,' are those she will
present: whilst the effect on the sinful of a character
full of holy love and sympathy is powerful beyond all
other moral levers. One whose own pure life and intellectual endowments made us lament his defection
from our Church, and dispirited us ' as when a standardbearer fainteth,' remarks: ' We find, even among men,
that sympathy is more or less perfect, as the holiness of
the person is more or less so.... Just as a man
becomes infected by the power of evil, he ceases to
sympathise with others.... None hate sin but
those who are holy, and that in the measure of their
holiness...    To have sinned ourselves is not
necessary to perfect our sympathy with sinners. Rather,
it is the property of spotless sanctity to flow forth with the
fullest stream of compassion. Who would mourn over
a sister's fall so intensely as she who is all pure and full




4'2


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


of sensitive fear of so much as a sullying thought? To
have fallen and to have repented could add nothing to
her intense love and sorrow, to her absolute humiliation for another's transgression.' *
It will not be here attempted to combat-indeed
there is not space-the prejudices which may have
been conceived to the procedure of the English Church
in Hawaii. With regard to ritual and the aid of music,
there will be, in a church where both freedom and
multitudinism prevail, differences of view as to the
exact line of demarcation. If an ornate service, compared with the services customary with Calvinistic and
other dissenting bodies, be the means of drawing the
people to the church, as certainly seems to be the case;
and if many who come to listen stay to pray, and good
doctrine enter ears which were opened by sweet sounds,
then, on the very ground of expediency, such services
cannot be complained of. If this be taking men with
guile, the great Apostle of the Gentiles is ready with an
excuse for so acting, that 'by all means he might save
some.' We need only add that musical and emblematical services were in daily use till the Jewish temple
was changed for Christian churches, and that, notwithstanding this change, musical and emblematic services
were continued certainly till the sixteenth century. We
will not dispute the fact, that a religion that can preserve its fire and life without any adventitious aids is a
higher and less sensuous worship than one which is
helped by eye and ear and tongue and gesture, yet
whilst men walk on earth, children, not angels, all helps
are valuable that first lead men even to the door of
religion. Such assistance is neither to be discarded or


* Manning's Sermons. ' The Sympathy of Christ.'




RITUAL AND NON-ESSENTIALS.


473


too much relied on; it can only be the humble handmaid to faith and good works. Its use must be proportioned to the taste and desire of the people, and
according to the good the instrument effects. A little
of the feminine mind is likely to mingle itself with the
mental constitution of persons whose profession removes
them from the more earthly and masculine walk of
laics,-and female men are found in all professions,and a little insidious love of dress and display will creep
unawares into the hearts of good people, which, after
all, might be occupied with feelings sterner, harder, and
less innocent. And we must concede that, beginning
in a genuine and reverential motive, the desire to decorate the house of God and to render holy worship
attractive, minor details exercise a charm and afford
relaxation to persons whose souls are deeply set on
deeper things. As St. John the Divine used to recreate
himself by playing with a tame partridge, so the
arrangement of flowers, the embroidery of a stole, or
the illuminating a text in illegible letters, may afford
relief to minds weary with labour, and hearts heavy
with the darkness and misery they see around them.
Let us make tender allowance, therefore, for these nonessentials, and suppose that time and good sense will
tame them, if ever they have exceeded, and keep them
within their proper limits, and in due subordination to
the whole system. The opponents of our Church are
not to suppose that that Church erects means into ends,
or thinks to secure success by arts or strifes or political
manceuvre.
When Furius Cresinius, the Roman peasant, was
accused by his jealous neighbours of sorcery, because
his few diligently cultivated acres produced abundantly,
whilst their great neglected estates brought forth but




474


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


little, he was cited before the tribunal and was commanded to bring the instruments of his magic with
him. The honest man laid on the floor of the court
his mattock, his hoe, and his rake; and when told to
produce the apparatus of his black art, he pointed to
his tools, and said, 'these are my only instruments of
magic, except my bullock and my plough, which I left
at the door. By these, together with the sweat of my
brow by day and my anxious care at night, and the
assisting labours of this my good daughter, have the
crops which excite my rich neighbours' anger been
won from the soil; and these are all the instruments of
my thaumaturgy.' The judges immediately gave their
suffrages in favour of Cresinius, and his accusers left
the court with shame.
And thus it must be with the Church Mission in the
Sandwich Islands, and with all Christian missions. It
is not by detraction of others that they will seek to
succeed, nor by asserting magic in sacraments, or erecting the omission of a ceremony into a deadly sin:
salvation will not be paraded as a thing of albs and
chasubles; neither will eternal life be taught as depending on crying 'glory!' at the hour of death, nor
by making acts, in themselves indifferent, sins by act of
legislature, and snares to weak consciences.  The
weapons of a successful warfare of the mission will be
those of gentle love, forbearance, self-sacrifice, a consistent course; the evidence of a sound faith, diligent
teaching and preaching; the frequent use of ordinances;
the constancy of prayer; earnest care in educating the
young and sheltering the lambs of the flock from contaminating influences; and, above all, the example in
the missionaries and their families of a holy, unostentatious life, more eloquent than a thousand homilies.




THERE IS HOPE IN THINE END.


475


Yet with all devotion, and anxious care, and after
years of labour, the results may be very disappointing.
It is very hard to train one individual in holiness, even
when the affections and care of a life concentrate upon
him. What then of the thousands of souls committed
to a single clergyman? What of a people long inured
to frightful impurity, to the traditions of idolatry, and
brought up in invincible ignorance? Can the leopard
change his spots? Can habits of centuries be transformed in a day? A very desponding opinion has been
formed by some in the Hawaiian islands that nothing
can be hoped for in the present adult generation.
Ephraim is joined unto idols: let him alone! Terrible
doom. And they think that all hope must be limited
to the generation which has to succeed, by taking the
children, newly-born infants even, and training them
up in seclusion from evil that surrounds them. Happily,
this view is not shared in by all who have given themselves to this particular work.  Happily, bright examples are found of adult men and women among the
natives who shine as lights, and send rays of hope into
the beholder's heart. Cry, ' faint not!' therefore; but
lay the hand resolutely to the plough. ' Look not on
the dead bones, and dust, and difficulty; but on the
promise. Yea, let us be steadfast, immoveable, always
abounding in the work of the Lord, forasmuch as we
know our labour is not in vain in the Lord.' *


* Baxter.




476


1HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


CHAPTER XXIX.
ACCESSION OF KAMiHIAMHIA V. THE COUP D'IETAT.'
TTNDER the style and title of Kamehameha V.,
Prince Lot Kamehameha, as he had been named
by suggestion of the American missionaries-Prince
Lota, as he was called by the native people-succeeded
to the Hawaiian throne, on the 30th of November, 1863.
Born on the 11th of December 1830, the present King
was three years the senior of his deceased brother. With
many features of resemblance, there were sufficient
points of difference in his character to make him unlike Kamehameha IV. Possessed of great energy and
firmness, he had shown large administrative capacity
as Minister of Interior; and he still shows an unusual
disregard for the mere externals of royalty, though he
loves and maintains the substantial part-the power of
his position.
The new King's first act was one of clemency. He
liberated from prison certain persons confined under
judicial sentence, and restored others to their civil
rights which they had forfeited. Prisoners and malcontents seem, in all parts of the world, to have a
valuable interest in the death of kings. His next step
was to reorganize the Board of Health. He then turned
his thoughts to a subject which, indeed, had occupied




THE CONSTITUTION AS IT WAS.


477


them long before-the constitution of the kingdom, and
he was dissatisfied with it.
By the articles of the constitution, given to the people
in 1852 by Kamehameha III., it was incumbent on the
successor to the vacant throne to take an oath that he
would maintain the constitution of the kingdom whole
and inviolate, and would govern in conformity therewith.  The King abstained from  taking this oath.
There were components in the existing constitution
which were in his mind objectionable, and he resolved
to seize the opportunity for making reforms and bringing
the kingdom into farther accordance with the most
enlightened European monarchies. During his brother's
reign, he had had leisure and means for observing the
working of a system which contained the elements of
democracy and puritanism. It will be necessary to
recall in a few words the growth of this political system.
Up to the year 1839, the Hawaiian Islands were governed
by an absolute monarch, and upon strictly feudal principles.  In that year the efforts of the American
missionaries and ex-missionaries, who had given much
useful assistance in governing the country, worked so
far on the patriotic and bon-vivant King, Kamehameha III., as to induce him to sign a Bill of Rights,
and the following year, to grant a constitution, by
which absolute rule was yielded up, and irresponsible
power exchanged for government by the three estates
of king, nobles, and people.
Theoretically considered, the rights of men living in
societies are hexagons.  This is deducible from the
antecedent proposition that the right of each individual,
in isolation, extends as a circle round the person; and
were the wills of all men of equal intensity, the circles
would be of equal diameter. By the gravitating force




478


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


of society, a pressure being exerted on all the circles,
they become converted into hexagons, coterminous and,
again theoretically, impenetrable.  But, in practice,
stronger wills extend larger circles and harder outlines.
Thus, other right-cells are crushed, deformed, and
obliterated; and the will of a leviathan annihilates the
operative will of millions, reducing them to nonentities, or mere rudimentary existences-nails, and screws,
and unseen bricks in the social pyramid. It is rare indeed to find the leviathan voluntarily denuding himself
of his monopoly. It is sometimes wrung from him by
knowledge, which gradually re-animating the dead nails
and screws, and restoring the elasticity of the crushed
dissepiments, restores in part the personality of the multitude, and clothes them with some defigurated rights.
The King had never been out of his own small
dominions. He had to be guided by the teaching and
advice of the active-minded men who had already
volunteered to assist in holding the reins of government, and who showed that they would not be averse
to take the ribbons entirely into their own hands upon
occasion.  But at that time the King's advisers did
not prompt to greater change than the conversion of
absolutism into limited monarchy.
The scheme of government thus produced was naturally a hybrid one. Its promoters were Americans;
they were missionaries, or persons who, having been
missionaries, had left that calling for official or officious
life. The constitution was a mosaic, to which the
Pentateuch, the British Government, and the American
Declaration of Independence each contributed a part.
Yet, in spite of manifold defects, it was a revolution in
the right direction. It lasted twelve years; and under
it the nation advanced in civilization and prosperity.




GROWTH OF A CONSTITUTION.


479


The administration consisted of four departments;
there was a minister of interior affairs, who was also
premier; a minister of foreign relations, of finance, of
public instruction; and an attorney-general. Statute
laws were passed, and a little tinkering of the constitution began.
It seemed the fate of all political opinion, when
acclimatized in Hawaii, to 'suffer a sea change.' So
we see a tyrant taking up limited monarchy, democrats
from the United States constituting a kingdom; and
now we are to witness an early and ardent member of
the Reform Club converted into a staunch Conservative,
and an American attorney-general writing himself in
one of his letters 'a rank Tory.'
With the infusion of fresh blood, it came to pass
that, in 1850, the King recommended a new constitution, and appointed a commission of three persons to
frame a new model. It was perfected, and, in 1852,
was signed by the King, who died in something less
than two years afterwards. This constitution was an
advance on the former one; but a good deal of the
Levitical element and some revolutionary rags remained
in it. Dr. Judd was one of the three commissioners,
his coadjutors being the chief Joane Ii, and the Chief
Justice Lee. The two former of this triad will make
their reappearance hereafter.
It happened that while much discussion was going
on in Honolulu about the proposed new constitution,
the Hawaiian consulate in China was represented by the
senior member of the commercial house of Jardine and
Company. At the same time, Sir John Bowring was
governor of Hong Kong; and a correspondence was
brought about between the latter and Mr. Wyllie on
the same subject, and a draft of the constitution was




480


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


sent to Sir John for his opinion. The editor of Jeremy
Bentham objected to the opening sentence, in which it
is asserted that all men are created free and equal.
Bentham had himself been the correspondent of several
of the American Presidents; and in his ' Critical Examination of the Declaration of Rights,' exposed the
pretension that ' all men are born free and equal.' ' No
man ever was, is, or will be, born free; all are born
helpless children, in a state of absolute subjection to
parents, and, in many countries as slaves, in vassalage
to owners; and as to equality, the statement is absurd,
the condition of no two men, to say nothing of all,
being equal, in the many gradations which exist, of
wealth and poverty, servants and masters, influence
and position.' Sir John, who had been Bentham's most
intimate friend and executor, quoted the views of his
master, which also appeared to his own mind incontestable. In spite, however, of any efforts which Mr.
Wyllie could make, supported by the China correspondence, the constitution commenced with the old assertion, 'God hath created all men free and equal.'
Article 12 pronounced that, 'No person who imports a
slave, or slaves, into the king's dominions, shall ever
enjoy any civil or political rights in this realm.' Article
19 prescribed, 'All elections of the people shall be by
ballot;' and Article 78 established manhood-suffrage.
Moreover, the king's power was checked and controlled
by the strange institution of the Kuhina-Nui-an invention which, if borrowed from any other nation,
must have come from Japan. This 'regulator' to the
government machine, who stood above ministers, and,
as it were, on the uppermost step of the throne,
might be a man or a woman-indeed, was generally
the latter. Her power at times must have been not a




A CONVENTION RESOLVED ON.


481


little detrimental to the progress of business, since the
constitution provided that ' the King and the Kuhinanui shall have a negative on each other's public acts.'
Among his, or her, miscellaneous offices, the Kuhinanui had charge of the great seal of the kingdom, the
royal standard, and the national flag. Also, in case of
the King's death or minority, this solid shadow had to
perform all duties, and exercise all powers ordinarily
vested in the King. Such were some of the features of
the constitution which existed till August, 1864.
Kamehameha V. came to the throne, as we have
related, in November, 1863, and commenced the exercise of his functions, but without taking the oath prescribed by, and in favour of, his then constitution.
Mr. Wyllie continued minister of foreign affairs; Mr.
C. Gordon Hopkins, whose devotion to the Hawaiian
nation was undoubted, received the portfolio of interior;
M. De Varigny, formerly vice-consul for France, had
charge of the finances; and his attorney-general was
Mr. C. C. Harris, an American, who, like others of his
nation on the bench and at the bar, was loyal, clearsighted, and had definite views of government. It was
not a bad team for the first stage out of town, and the
start was promising.
The King had determined not to take the oath.
From after occurrences, it is to be inferred that there
were differences of opinion in the cabinet on this subject. The attorney-general, and the minister of foreign
relations, however, appear to have been consistent in
their support of the King's view, and a convention was
resolved on to amend the constitution.
The word convention has to English ears an uncanny ring. It reminds them of Paris in 1792, and of
England in 1848. Four of the five points in the charter
I I




482


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


then clamoured for here, already existed in theiHawaiian
constitution; viz. the ballot, universal suffrage, nonproperty qualification, and paid representatives. Annual
parliaments were excluded because it was more convenient to members to assemble biennially.  Now
Kamehameha V. wished to get rid, by means of a
national vote, of universal suffrage, and to replace it by
a qualification based on income and property, united
to a certain advance in mental acquirements and moral
fitness.
The reason why a convention was necessary to the
King's purpose was this-that though the constitution
contained power for the legislature to amend it, the
consent of two biennial parliaments was necessary to
effect any reform. Such a delay was a strain on the
King's patience, and he remembered that he had not
yet taken what may be called the coronation oath.
But the decisions of a specially convened body might
be followed immediately by a session of parliament,
and thus the reconstruction of the State might be completed within three or four months. This was the
motive which decided the King's actions. A convention
was accordingly summoned by proclamation —political
feeling instantly responding throughout the islands.
The prime objects of the King and his advisers were
known, or felt to be, to destroy the radical element in
the constitution, to base electoral privilege on a property
qualification, and to give a larger place in the State to
the King, allowing him to govern as well as reign. The
native, long acccustomed to the feudal yoke, felt no
aversion to this design; but it alarmed the minds of
many settled foreigners-the American missionaries
(but not all) being especially roused at the prospect of
absolutism and aristocracy, Puseyism and Popery.




COMPOSITION OF THE CONVENTION.


483


They raised an outcry in their districts, and led the
people to think it their duty to send, not representatives,
but delegates to the convention.
The King in the meantime was not idle. He made
a progress through his dominions, attended by his faithful foreign-office minister. They delivered speeches —
some judicious, some inopportune-and on the 7th of
July, 1864, the convention was opened by the King,
who, before proceeding to the court-house, attended
service at the Episcopal church.
The business of the session began the following day,
the three estates sitting in the same chamber. The
composition of the convention was as follows:-First,
the King-president. Second, nobles, sixteen in number,'headed by the Kuhina-nui: of the remaining fifteen
nobles eleven were natives, two Britons, and two Americans. Third, delegates, twenty-seven in number; the
white skins and native blood being about equally
divided. Judge Robertson was appointed vice-president; and M. de Varigny and the Attorney-general,
though neither nobles nor representatives, attended, like
the French Minister without portfolio, to assist in the
debates. The House appointed Mr. Judd to be secretary; Mr. Judd named a native chaplain, and AngloSaxons for interpreter, reporter, and serjeant-at-arms..
Of the nobles, as might be expected, the very large
majority seconded the King's views. One of this estate,
however, possessed of the short but emphatic name of
Ii, who had been one of the three commissioners engaged
to construct the constitution of 1852, was less tractable
and more democratic than his peers.  He was also
more talkative; and both from the frequency of his
being on his legs, and from the two conspicuous vowels
which composed his name, he quite fulfilled the clever
II 2




484


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


definition of egotism, viz. letting the private I be too
much in the public eye.
The King, in his opening address, pronounced with
great facility in English and in his native tongue,
briefly informed the convention of the objects for which
he had summoned them; and in all subsequent speeches
he used the bi-lingual method. The reports published
under the name of The Convention are printed in
parallel columns of the two languages.
'History repeats itself.' The very question which so
long agitated the assembled States-General in 1789,
whether the three orders should sit in one or in separate chambers, excited in Honolulu long and obstinate
discussion. It was nearly a week before the question
was settled. The conclusion arrived at was that the
three estates should sit and debate in one chamber.
After which the rules were debated and carried; that
relating to voting being that there should be united
voting on the rules or by-laws, but constitutional subjects should be introduced by the representatives and
put to the vote among themselves. If a resolution
failed there in consequence of a minority, its quietus
was made. If it passed the lower house, the votes of
the nobles were taken on it; and after a majority of
that estate, it was submitted to the King for his approval
or veto.
Comparing these proceedings with those of the StatesGeneral in Paris, we see that whereas the Tiers Etat
demanded that their 'brothers the nobles' should sit
and vote in one, and that the People's Chamber, the
wish of the Hawaiian representatives was rather to vote
apart.  Five weeks were required for the popular
victory at the Luxembourg; nearly a week was occupied in Honolulu.




THE BALLOT-BUCKET.


485


The rules established for discussion were good, and
there was considerable ability shown in the management
of the debates. The weakest part of the proceedings of
this convention was, that when a question had been
apparently definitively settled and a resolution passed
one day, it was occasionally re-opened the next, under
the form of a new resolution.
The business of the convention advanced rather
slowly.  Determined opposition to the King's design
soon showed itself among the representatives; and a
junto of some five or six members of the extreme left
made a stand-up fightL One of the nobles, a cabinet
minister also, whose views were opposed to the meeting
of the Assembly, absented himself on the plea of illness,
and retired to his own estate, nor returned till near the
close, and that under pressing solicitation. The determined knot of root-and-branch men just mentioned
consisted chiefly of Dr. Judd, ex-missionary, ex-minister,
and ex-United-States-man; his son, the secretary; a
rural missionary; a native lawyer; and a Scandinavian
resident, named Knudsen. Among the constitutional
weapons which the Opposition armed themselves with,
sarcasm was not wanting; and a subject for their irony
was easily discovered. It happened that in some outlying district the ballot-papers of the electors were
collected in a bucket; and so greatly was this joke or
this grievance worked, and so often was the pail returned
to, that the convention was in considerable danger of
being wrecked on that very small rock.
After three weeks of discussion, pauses, wrangling,
and voting, the King himself withdrew for a time, from
the real or assumed cause of indisposition.   His
Majesty's place was supplied in the interim by Judge
Robertson and M. De Varigny. At last, came the great




486


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


questions of universal suffrage, and property qualifications in voters and representatives. The abolition of
the Kuhina-nui had been easily managed. There was
hard hitting about the suffrage. Yet the American
party blundered when Mr. Knudsen drew a lamentable
picture of the English people-poor, oppressed, starved,
ignorant, and irreligious, all owing to the want of manhood-suffrage.  His statements were derived from
' Mr. Joseph Kay, appointed by the University of Oxford
to investigate the condition of the lower classes.' The
reply came swiftly and hard from a chief, the Hon.
D. Kalakana, a native who had never left the confines
of home. He said, 'Mr. Knudsen had been very ready
to give them instances of English poverty, which that
gentleman considered arose from the fact of the people
not having universal suffrage; but he forgot to say
anything of the state of things in America, where universal suffrage did exist, and which was one cause of
the present war. The statement of Mr. Knudsen referred to the social condition of England in 1851, but,
had he been there in 1861, he would have found a very
different state of things existing; for, within those
years, great improvements have been made with regard
to the poor-law and condition of the lower classes,
though, no doubt, a portion of the manufacturing districts of England were now suffering in consequence of
the American war.   Mr. Knudsen also stated that
purity of election existed in the United States, where
the ballot system prevailed; but, according to reports
of American papers, it seems as if there was not much
purity of election existing from the ballot; but the
reverse. This had been confirmed to him by a naturalized American gentleman, who was well known in
California, who had told him (Mr. Kalakana) that "if




UNIVERSAL SUFFRAGE —PO AND CON.


487


you wanted a man's vote in New York, just show him
a revolver or a bowie-knife." In California, the result
of universal suffrage was the establishment of a vigilance committee to preserve law and order.'
It is curious to see political events and persons transmitted through different media, or reflected back from
a distance. Mr. Gladstone would probably find some
amusement in seeing his views of the extension of the
suffrage reviewed in the legislative assembly of the
Sandwich Islands —which was done.
In the long and serious discussion on property and
income qualification, dollars were pitted against education, and the natural right of all men to drop papers
into ballot-boxes was sustained against both with the
vigour of despair. It was Carlyle's ' Gigability' against
the voting instinct of the natural man. Mr. Hitchcock
led the van. ' Neither dollars nor want of dollars was
the criterion of respectability.' Mr. Green, a missionary, followed on the same side, and presented the sad
picture of a notorious thief being elected as a representative, and elections being decided by the constable
of the district. These were the certain consequences of
a legislation of voters. He held the right of universal
suffrage as one of the greatest and dearest rights of a
free people.
M. De Varigny, on the part of the King, inquired
whether it were right to give a candle to a blind man
to carry in a powder-magazine, or a vote to a man who
could neither read nor write. Would representatives
place an open razor in the hands of a baby, or the
franchise in the hands of those totally incompetent to
use it properly, or unable to read the name written or
printed on a ballot?
On the 9th of August, the King was able to return




488


HIAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


to his place at the convention, and he listened to the
debate on this main question with considerable patience.
Intermixed with some other subjects-as for instance,
the kingly dignity, the King qua King, opposed to
'chief magistrate '-the qualification discussion continued till the abrupt termination of the convention
four days later; producing some excellent debate, and
showing that the spirit of statesmanship was not wanting in that assembly.  The most remarkable of the
speeches were those delivered by two native representatives named Kahaleahu and Kaawahi. These addresses
exhibit the powers and characteristics of the Polynesian
mind in a very favourable light.
'May it please your Majesty, the nobles, and the
delegates,' commenced Kahaleahu, 'a great deal has
been said on both sides during this discussion, and
much ability displayed both on the part of the ministry
and that of the opponents among the delegates. The
question for the convention to decide is, as to the expediency of allowing the very poor among the people
the privilege of voting for representatives...  It
is objected to this provision, that it is taking away the
right of the people. The right of the people, without
regard to property qualification, is protection for each
in his person and the products of his industry. These
are amply provided for under the laws, and therefore it
is erroneous to say that any right of the people is taken
away by the 62nd article.'
Mr. Kaawahi said, speaking of the disputed 62nd
article, 'If I believed that it really was taking away a
right from the people, I would very quickly support the
motion to reject this article.... What were the
motives of his Majesty in placing this article before
us? Did he thereby intend to take away one of the




A NATIVE POLITICIAN.


489


rights of the people? I do not think so. His Majesty
is of the same race with his people; he is their sire;
and whatever he sees is for their good, that he proposes, and whatever is detrimental to them that he
withholds.  Believing this, I decidedly object to the
offensive language used before his Majesty about his
taking away the people's rights. Neither the King nor
his ministers have ever done, or attempted to do, anything of the sort..... I would ask the delegates
to remember the words of the delegate for Makawoa
yesterday, when he said the people of his district could
take care of themselves, without any assistance from
the ministry. Who and what are the ministry? Are
they not the hands by which the King carries on the
government? Are they not the servants of the people
-of those of Makawoa as well as other places?...
The delegate for Kaanapali says there are a great many
impoverished people in his district. I am well aware
of it, and also that they are a hard-working people,
and able to earn a great deal more than the amount
proposed in this article, and that there is plenty of employment to be had in the district. The delegate from
Kaanapali says they have bought land from the Hon.
Mr. Bishop. Well, there is plenty of fire-wood on that
land, and the Lahaina sugar-mill wants it, but they
don't bring sufficient. Then they have large plains on
which to raise stock. Altogether, I cannot admit that
they have any right to be impoverished; and if they
are, it is certainly their own fault. Let them not object
to a law which is for the benefit of the whole country
from one end to the other. It is not a reasonable argument to put forward about the poverty of the people,
preventing them from obtaining the privilege of voting,
when we consider our position. Here we are pleasantly




490


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


situated as to climate; we can plough and plant and
reap at any and all seasons of the year, without any
winter or dry season to interfere with our labours.
Employment is to be had in abundance, throughout
the land, on the various sugar plantations, and labour is
in demand. There is no lack of a market for our produce, for we are on the high way of commerce. The
seas are open and free to the fisherman, the forests are
waiting for the woodman's axe, and there are a hundred
different branches of industry in every direction, open
and waiting for the hands to improve them. Why, then,
is this cry of poverty raised as an argument for striking
out the property qualification, and permitting the idle
to indulge in their dreams? If the people are made to
understand and appreciate the great privilege of the
ballot, it will be an incentive to industry, in order to
choose whomsoever they may desire to represent them
in the legislature.' But his Majesty's Opposition was
not to be moved.
On the 13th of August, the King's patience had
broken down. ' This is the fifth day of the discussion
of this article,' said his Majesty. 'I am very sorry that
we do not agree on this important point. It is clear
to me that if universal suffrage is permitted, this
government will soon lose its monarchical character.
Thank you, delegates and nobles, for the readiness with
which you have come to this convention, in accordance
with my proclamation. As we do not agree, it is useless to prolong the session. And as at the time his
Majesty Kamehameha III. gave the constitution of the
year 1852, he reserved to himself the power of taking
it away, if it was not for the interest of his government
and people; and as it is clear to me that that king left
the revision of the constitution to my predecessor and




THE NEW CONSTITUTION.


491


myself; therefore, as I sit in his seat, on the part of the
sovereignty of the Hawaiian Islands, I make known
to-day that the constitution of 1852 is abrogated. I
will give you a constitution.' His Majesty requested
ministers to remain at present in their respective positions, in order to avoid confusion and disturbance, and
he then dissolved the convention.
It was, perhaps, time for the incubation to be over.
The convention had been sitting five weeks with no
profitable result. The obstinacy of the Opposition had
defeated itself.
On the 20th of August, a week after the breaking up
of the convention, the promised new constitution appeared. It omits the obnoxious axiom about ' free and
equal,' abolishes the office of 'Kuhina-nui,' gives the
King a larger place in the State, makes cabinet ministers more responsible, excludes the ballot, prescribes as
the minimum qualification of a representative real estate
of five-hundred dollars' value, and annual income of two
hundred and fifty dollars; and of an elector, property
of one hundred and fifty dollars, or twenty-five dollars
a year rent on leasehold property, and seventy-five
dollars yearly income, together with certain intellectual
acquirements. It includes a stringent article on royal
marriages, and on the succesion to the Crown; and, the
King being unmarried, it provides for a new stirps for
a royal family, should the present race become extinct.
Under the new constitution affairs have been working
well. The prosperity of the islands has healthily increased. The public revenue is certainly not large: it
is principally derived from duties on imports, added to
some excise imports, poll tax, and a few other internal
sources. The Custom's receipts for the year 1864 were
as follows: —




492


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


Honolulu, viz:Import duties-Goods,,,,       Spirits,,      Bonded Goods 
Blanks.....
Fees...
Storage
Hospital Fund (Passengers)
Marine Hospital Fund (Seamen)
Buoys...
Coasting Licenses
Passports.
Interest 
Wharfage.
Fines and Forfeitures
Registry.
Samples...
Suspense.. 
Total 
Lahaina..
Hilo..
Kawaihae. 
Kealakekua. 
Koloa...
Total.


C.,  95,706  01
29,368  16.   6,416  36
4,410  50
1,614 75, 1,888   66
1,432 00.   1,104  87
512 00.     1,535 72
219 00
508 05. 11,222  91
608  74
795 00
7 00
10    00. 157,359  73
239  96
1,348  56
95  47
5 00.  68  00. 159,116  72


And a comparison of wants supplied, and of internal
productivity, shows:$     c.
Value of Foreign Goods exported... 548,852 66
Domestic,,,... 970,228 81,,,,    furnished as supplies.  143,100 00
Total....   1,662,181 47
The government has made, and is making, humane
endeavours for the physical health and well-being of
the people. In the face of a protraced and almost bitter
opposition from well-meaning but mistaken persons,
a measure was carried in legislature, under the succinct
title of ' A Bill to Mitigate, &c.,' to check and abate the
terrible ravages consequent on prostitution and licentiousness. Seeing by the example of Europe and




LEPROSY.


493


America that no penal enactments will abolish sin, they
did see that by police regulations some of the misery,
disease, and death which it inflicts may be avoided and
controlled. Curative measures were also taken, and a
ward of the Queen's Hospital was appropriated for
patients suffering from the consequences alluded to;
but this arrangement was not effected without an opposition as violent and abusive, as that which impeded
the ' Bill to Mitigate.' Thus'does bigotry with closed
eyes, and the sword of its zeal, cry havoc, and cuts
down as an enemy the messenger of peace.
A disease presenting several of the signs of lepra
having latterly made its appearance in the islands, a
careful observation of symptoms has been instituted,
and Dr. Hillebrand, who has been despatched to China,
who after an autopsy of cases in the three leper villages
near Canton, and elsewhere, has written a valuable
memoir on the Chinese leprosy. It is to be feared that
little doubt remains that the same scourge, possibly
modified, exists in Hawaii, especially as many Chinese
are settled there. Already the government has established an hospital for patients, supposed to be so suffering, four miles from Honolulu, and has arranged that
all cases in an advanced stage of disease shall be removed to a settlement on the island of Molokai, at a
greater distance from the community.
The progress of sugar-making and other branches of
internal production demanding more labour than the
islands can at present supply, the importation of coolies
from China was determined on. Dr. Hillebrand was
commissioned to proceed thither and superintend the
emigration of a sufficient number of willing labourers.
Two vessels freighted with coolies have already arrived,
bringing about five hundred labourers. Every provision




'494


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


for their physical and moral welfare on their passage
was made, and a considerable number of femalestwenty-five per cent.-were included. The labourers
arrived in good health and condition. It happens that
the Sandwich Islands are one of the few places to which
the Chinese do not object to emigrate. They know
them as the Tang-heang-shan,-the sandal-wood islands,
or 'isles of the fragrant wood.' They think of them as
being near China, and on the road to Kin-shan (California); and they know that their countrymen who
have settled in them are well off. It is, however, greatly
to be regretted that the Hawaiians themselves cannot be
made more available in agriculture, to the exclusion of
immigrants.
The ' Hawaiian Gazette,' which has already been
spoken of as the government organ, is an able and
excellently conducted newspaper. Of a series of enlightened articles which have already appeared in its
columns, may be mentioned those on native industry,
cotton, pearl-fishing, the beche-de-mer, sugar-planting,
draining, leprosy, the vine, coffee, coolie labour, cochineal, and phosphate fertilizers.
From the late Sir William  Hooker at Kew, from
China, and other places, the Agricultural Society of
Hawaii has received new plants, seeds, birds, and animals, with a view to their acclimatization.  Le Progres de l'Oceainie,' which is the name of one of the
lodges of Freemasons in the islands, seems at present
to find its counterpart in fact.
There is little more to add. The flowing tide of
time still casts some fresh events or facts to our feet,
which we will continue to gather into our wallet; and
possibly at some future day we may sit on the higher
shore, and sort what we have collected, and make them




VISIT OF QUEEN EMMA TO EUROPE.


495


ready for the inspection of others. In May, 1865, the
Queen Dowager of Hawaii left Honolulu for Europe, in
H.M.S. 'Clio,' which conveyed her to Panama; and on
the 16th of July she set foot on English ground at Southampton, receiving salutes from the ships and forts.
It had been a cherished plan of the Queen and her
late husband to visit Europe together; a pleasant dream
which was not to be so realized. Several considerations
weighed with Queen Emma, inducing her still, though
now alone, to make the journey. The cordial reception
which awaited her she could not with certainty have
foreseen, and it must have afforded her extreme gratification. Those whom kindness and curiosity immediately drew about ber modest majesty saw in her a
presentation of royalty already familiar to them, and in
which they had been trained to sympathise; they saw
a widowed lady, of gentle and dignified manner, assuming nothing to herself, struggling with a heart sorrow
as deep as it is constant; well-read in our history and
literature; looking with eyes full of interest, though
often clouded with tears, at sights and scenes wellknown to her by report and description; realising her
previously formed conceptions, and comparing them
with their realisation; much enjoying, yet feeling,
wherever she goes,
' That there hath passed away a glory from the earth.'
In the excitement and fatigue of almost constant
travel, and change of scene and persons, which she went
through for some months in England, so different from
the more even tenour of life in her native land, the
Queen was aided by good health, a light burthen of
years-for she was under thirty-the pleasurable stimulus of variety and novelty, and the tender consideration




4%                  HAWAIIAN ISLANDS,
of those among whom she went. She was also upheld
by a steadfast, earnest piety, which, lifting her above the
earth, made its roughnesses and labour less perceptible..So that whilst she knows that nothing can give back
the past, which has been
'For ever taken from her sight,'
she has found that she can
'rather find
Strength in what remains behind;
In the primal sympathy
Which, having been, must ever be;
In the soothing thoughts that spring
Out of human suffering;
In the faith that looks through death.'




497


CHAPTER XXX.
ROBERt CRIC1TON WYLLIE.
NO account of the Hawaiian kingdom could now be
considered complete without a notice of the life
and services of the statesman whose name stands at the
head of this chapter. The telegram which brought the
news of his death on the 19th of October 1865, made it
possible to speak in the present history of the powers
and character of a man whose devotion to the land of
his adoption was as remarkable as it was disinterested.
During his lifetime, references to his labours or to his
idiosyncrasies would have seemed the language of
flattery or of unfriendly criticism; but now it is the
decent act of his survivors to linger a short space beside
his grave, to recount his somewhat eventful career, and
to trace in bas-relief upon the marble of his tomb a
sketch of the man.
Robert Crichton Wyllie, who for several years before
his death occupied the post of Minister of Foreign
Relations, or as we should say, Secretary for Foreign
Affairs, was born at Hazelbank in the parish of Dunlop,
Ayrshire, in the year 1798. Without claiming to belong to the family of ' Sir Matthew Wyllie of that ilk,'
he came of respectable parentage, and his father appears
K x




*
498             HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.
to have been possessed of the lands of Hazelbank. His
mother, from whom he derived his second Christian
name, could trace her descent from the Admirable
Crichton. Like many others of his nation, Mr. Wyllie
did not go back to his country to settle there, but loved
it dearly-perhaps even more dearly-at a distance.
He carried on his mental associations with the place of
his birth to the end; magnifying its importance a little,
perhaps, through the fairy lens of time and separation.
By the pre-decease of an elder brother he inherited the
homestead where he was born, an estate of a few acres,
which the proprietors around him would have designated
'just a house and kale-yard.' But the little property
was dear in the eyes of a stranger in a strange land;
and in writing to the author, in 1860, of his naturalization in Hawaii, he says, ' I have always carefully preserved my native allegiance as the very humble " Bonnet
Laird" of Hazelbank, Ayrshire.'
It is an honourable incident in his history, that on
revisiting his native land after his first long absence in
South America, during which period of fourteen years
he had prospered in worldly wealth, he built a comfortable house at Hazelbank,-not for himself, for he never
inhabited it after his parents' death, but as a dwelling
for his father and mother. Mr. Wyllie completed his
education at the college in Glasgow by qualifying himself for the surgical profession, and he received a
diploma before he had attained the age of twenty. He
made one or more voyages to the North Sea as surgeon;
met with all the hardships of that stormy navigation,
and was wrecked three times. At some period of his
early life he proceeded to our Australian colonies, and
applied himself for a time to sheep-farming. Somewhat later, he visited the Southern States of America;




LIFE IN CHILI.


499


and, next, found his way to Chili, and became a partner
in a successful firm at Valparaiso, known as Begg,
Wyllie, and Company. His life in Chili was active and
adventurous. He rode about the wild territories of
that young republic with loaded pistols at his girdle
collecting the silver dollars due to his house of business.
Whilst there, he acquired a perfect familiarity with the
Spanish language, which he spoke and wrote with the
fluency of a native of Spain.
He also allowed his surgical and medical knowledge
to be made available, and attended the inmates of
several of the convents and nunneries. From these be
would receive no fees; and the form which their gratitude took was at once elegant and costly. The religious
houses presented to him, on three or four occasions,
small trees, from the branches of which hung gold and
silver coins, ornaments and valuable trifles. He preserved these graceful memorials untouched; and used,
when afterwards residing in London, to display them
on his dinner table with satisfaction and pardonable
pride.  In Valparaiso Mr. Wyllie accumulated in a
comparatively short time a fortune which even in these
advanced days would be called considerable. In 1824,
the daring of the man in his early life is exhibited by a
voyage which he made across the vast ocean from
Mexico to India, in a small vessel of fifty tons burthen
- scarcely more than a boat in size-and uncoppered;
visiting on his way the islands of the South Pacific. In
a letter written in the year 1860, Mr. Wyllie refers to
this voyage, and mentions the little craft as his ' Yacht
Daule.' We next meet with him in Mazatlan. With
the same love of adventure wihch so greatly addicted
him to roving about the world, he took charge of a
cargo of cattle and sheep for India. This voyage led
K & 2




500


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


to a new phase in his career, by introducing him to a
gentleman whose brother was engaged in mercantile
business in London and Calcutta. As a result of this
meeting, Wyllie proceeded to England and joined the
house spoken of, the title of which thence became
Lyall, Wyllie, and Company. During the time this
partnership subsisted, Mr. Wyllie occupied a house in
Mayfair jointly with a friend, to whom I am indebted
for several of the particulars here given. He became
an early member of the Reform Club, and was well
known there. Some who read these pages may still
remember him, a well-dressing man, of animated but
rather tedious conversation, and possessed of a remarkably retentive memory.
Wyllie had once or twice in life made some heavy
pecuniary losses; and after about four years of London
routine, dinner-parties, and Reformism, the bachelor
friends broke up their joint establishment, and 'parted
like two rivers;' one to Italy, 'where silvery Padus
gleams;' the other, the subject of this memoir, to
America; being drawn thither with the view of saving
or gaining back part of his funds, and acting for the
interest of others, bond-holders of some of the repudiating States.
To walk down one street instead of another may
change, as some one has remarked, the whole course of
our life: for by so doing we may meet or miss a person
who can influence our future. This happened to Wyllie.
In America he fell in with General Miller, whom he
had known before at Valparaiso, and whose career in
the Chilian war of independence had been brilliant and
remarkable. By Miller, who had been appointed ConsulGeneral in the Hawaiian Islands for Great Britain, he
was persuaded to accompany him thither, and he arrived




AN ALL-SIDED MAN.


501


at Honolulu in March 1844. It was not long before
his business talent was called into use. General Miller
having to leave the islands for the purpose of visiting
Tahiti, Mr. Wyllie was appointed acting English Consul,
in which capacity he continued about a year. On
Miller's return to his post, Wyllie was invited to enter
the service of King Kamehameha III. The portfolio
of Foreign Affairs was entrusted to him on the 24th of
March 1845, and he continued to act as Foreign
Minister till his death in October 1865.
And now commenced the real work of his energetic
life. He cast himself entirely into the part he had
accepted, and left no labour unapplied, no means unused
to consolidate the dynasty of Kamehameha, to establish
the independence and security of the island kingdom,
to advance the country of his adoption in material
prosperity, in social advance, and in the standing it was
to take among the family of nations. His industry was
prodigious; his foreign correspondence voluminous;
his mind was omnivorous. A contributor to the 'Hawaiian Gazette' thus writes of him, at the commencement of his career in the islands: 'IHis activity and
deep interest in Hawaii Nei is fully shown in his notes
published in the " Friend," during the very year of his
arrival (1844); in which he treats of almost every subject of value and interest to the country, from the
premiership to the cultivation of the taro plant. His
remarks, addressed a generation ago, may seem crude
and sometimes odd to us; but we affirm that they contain germs of good, by no means developed even in the
year of grace 1865. His ideas of a parochial clergy
may be deemed highly inappropriate, but his hints as
to the establishment of schools of art at the capital are
well urged. It is true that he refers here to the




502


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


mechanical arts, but manufactures necessarily entail
the fine arts of design; and the fine arts are a real
element of true civilization, however much the ignorant
may presumptuously despise them. In treating of so
stern a subject as political economy, it is rather amusing
to find a " Note on Society" and on "Foreign Ladies"
all jumbled between the "CWhale Fishery," " Oath of
Allegiance," and" Small-Pox;" and his remarks on their
" personal charms " are as gallant as they are, no doubt,
exact. Another note, on "Native Houses," has never
received the attention which the subject demands at
the hands of the interested.'
In fact, Mr. Wyllie's mind was eminently discursive,
but his purpose was settled and definite. Like the
needle of the compass, trembling yet constant, some
minds make nutations to passing ideas, and are not
inattentive to the minor subjects which approach them
sideways, but claim them for incidents and affluents
to the stream of their design; yet in the somewhat
wider path they pursue, they keep, after all, the mean
line of their true direction.
Mr. Wyllie's high endeavour, that from which he
never swerved, but devoted his energies till his dying
day, was the independence and advance of the Hawaiian
nation. He saw beneath the rust and stain of ignorance and supineness of the native race the true metal.
He saw there was good material, if he could save it.
He also saw the great importance of the position of the
islands geographically, and how necessary it is that
they should not fall into the possession of any one great
maritime power. Their central position to the coasts
of so many vast countries made it apparent that their
office was to be cosmopolitan: and to make them so,
their independence, guaranteed by all the great nations,




SCRIBENDI CACOETHES.


503


was the object earnestly to be sought. His dream was
of a joint treaty to be signed in good faith by the
civilized governments of Europe and America. Did
his dream embrace the condition that a treaty should
never be torn?
To carry out his object, he established or increased
diplomatic correspondence with all countries. Boxes
of papers in my own archives witness his industry. In
four years his letters to Sir John Bowring, principally
concerning the treaty question, filled five large volumes.
His handwriting being nearly illegible, made his letters
seem longer than they were; and his secretary was kept
writing day and night, and the utmost order was observed in his correspondence. When not otherwise
occupied he would set the printing-press at work, and
distribute to different countries masses of state documents, commencing twenty years before. He nearly
ruined some of the smaller monarchies in postage, for
all these volleys of papers were charged the full rate as
letters.  The expenses of printing so crippled the
treasury of his own government, that restricted grants
to the foreign department compelled Mr. Wyllie, much
to his chagrin, to give up printing documents.
In all his efforts to secure Hawaii from foreign 'protection' or 'annexation,' Mr. Wyllie entertained no
arriere pensee in favour of the country his own predilections might naturally have chosen to see the possessor
of this ' pivot group.' England was to lead the way in
the treaty of guaranteed independence. Nor did he
neglect countries because weak or inland. Italy was
appealed to two years ago; and even Switzerland was
not neglected. Should the Swiss ever send a fleet into
the Pacific, it will be as kindly entertained as the
Russian fleet was when at Honolulu.




504


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


He, indeed, brought to his task working powers of
no ordinary capacity, and a memory tenacious in the
extreme for facts and dates-at least for those in which
he had himself been in some way concerned. Most
persons have occasionally met, in public or in private,
with such memories; have wondered at them, and set
them down as a nuisance. In Mr. Wyllie's speeches,
and in his correspondence, he would refer to words
which had been written or uttered twenty years before;
would send his hearer or his correspondent to back
numbers of extinct periodicals, or to despatches long
since buried, too deep for resurrection, in boxes of
archives. If, like Mr. Carlyle or some French writers,
we were to summarize the whole man in an epithet, we
should name Mr. Wyllie 'Ad Referendum.' This tendency to discursiveness and parenthesis made its possessor a bad debater. It exhausted the patience of his
auditors; and it is noticeable, in reading the prolonged
discussions which took place in the convention of 1864,
that Mr. Wyllie was frequently called to 'Question,'
and on more than one occasion sat down without finishing his speech. This was an imperfection: and yet,
who can say that it was a material one in a nascent
community where people were feeling their way as
best they might to enlightened institutions? And above
the slight obscurities which surrounded the base, the
strength and purpose of the man rose high and clear.
His desire was to conciliate the world: and he was wise
in perceiving the danger of a great power making a
casus belli, and snatching up the islands in a fit of
anger or of outraged honour; and also the danger of a
strife in their immediate neighbourhood, when, like
the frog in the fable, they would be exposed to being
trampled to death by one of the belligerent oxen, with



HIS GENUINE LOVE OF COUNTRY.


out his even knowing that he had done any mischief.
Mr. Wyllie was quite in earnest; and occasionally, when
money was necessary for carrying out his endeavours,
and the treasury could not, or would not, immediately
give him the means, he would make his own private
resources available to the political object he had in
hand. Not that he was careless about money; he was
rigidly exact in his transactions, and insisted on others
with whom he had dealings being so too: but he knew
the time to scatter as well as the time to save. He was
above any tortuous policy. He desired beyond all
things that the Hawaiian islands should be known.
The publicity of their existence in the world he looked
upon as essential to their being and their independence;
and he wished that they should stand fair and justified
with their great compeers. As to the nation itself, he
laboured for its wealth, development, and moral condition; for universal justice and for intellectual culture.
If he did not actually select the motto adopted in the
national arms, he at least was a thorough believer in
the sentiment it expresses:UA MAU KEEA KA AINA KA PONO.
BY RIGHT THE LIFE OF THE LAND IS PRESERVED.
In 1861 Sir John Bowring, who had been previously
acquainted with Mr. Wyllie, was commissioned by the
Hawaiian Government as Envoy Extraordinary and
Minister Plenipotentiary to effect the great scheme of
a general treaty with Hawaii. I select from a communication which Sir John has made to me, and in
which he very highly eulogises the late Hawaiian
Foreign Minister for his ability, untiring diligence and
oneness of purpose, the following passage:



HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


'Mr. Wyllie did not look as many look to the jealous rivalries of the great powers as a security against the intrusion of
any one of them upon Hawaiian independence, though to a
certain extent that security exists,-for it is certain that neither
Great Britain, the United States, France, nor Russia would
regard with complacency or indifference the annexation of the
islands to any but itself, and none of them would probably be
disposed to encounter the odium and incur the risks which the
overthrow of a national and popular monarchy, and the usurpation of a remote sovereignty would bring with it.
'It was not however to the fears or rivalries of the influential
governments of the world that Mr. Wyllie looked for the tranquillity and security of Hawaii-but to the establishment of
amicable relations with every people, whether mighty or impotent —to a legislation dealing with all alike in a spirit of
equal commercial liberality-giving special privileges to none,
but inviting all to trade on equal and easy terms-in a word,
he would have made the islands a welcoming centre for the
grand circumference of the Pacific, and have made free intercourse the foundation of international law.
'A succession of treaties with the different European and
American powers were the natural instruments for giving
effect to this policy, and such treaties exist with the principal
monarchies and republics of the eastern and the western hemispheres. They recognise equality of condition as the groundwork of mutual obligation. In the solitary case of the treaties
with France some great privileges were granted to the wines
and spirits of that country as a compensation for supposed
claims, but the influence of this preferential legislation has
failed-as a narrow and selfish policy generally fails-and while
the trade with the United States, with Great Britain and her
colonies, has progressed and prospered, that with France is insignificant and declining. Hawaiian subjects enjoy in all the
leading communities of the world the privileges of the citizens
of the most favoured nations; and foreigners settled in the Hawaiian islands are bound by the same laws and regulations as
the natives themselves. In all the later treaties a clause has




WYLLIE'S PASSION FOR WORK.


507


been introduced by which the contracting powers agree that
any question which is not amicably settled by diplomatic correspondence be referred to the arbitration of some friendly
power.
'It is to the honour of the late King of the Belgians that he
expressed a desire that his country should give an example of
forbearance and humanity by which the arbitration of the
sword should be superseded by the amicable intervention of a
pacific tribunal, and it will not be forgotten that on more than
one occasion some of the greatest powers of the world have
consented to accept of his decision, and to avoid any appeal to
arms.'
Mr. Wyllie's love of work was as remarkable as his
affection to the country for which he worked. He
loaded himself with labours; at one time taking on
himself two other departments of administration in
addition to his own portfolio, and writing the reports
of all three. Moreover, he engaged at times in commerce, and devoted himself, especially in the latter part
of his life, to sugar cultivation. He also kept up his
private correspondence with friends in Europe. The
present King is probably as hard a worker as his Foreign
Minister was; and it is a question whether an enervating
climate tells most on the energies of a native or a foreign
resident. A secret about both these laborious persons is
that both were early risers and both were unmarried.
Mr. Wyllie's zest for work was a bulimia. It did not
require the salad of praise or the sauce of poverty. If
he were at all incited by 'the last infirmity of noble
minds,' his ambition was not conspicuous as egotism in
his communications with others.   Neither does he seem
to have been much impelled by the desire of posthumous fame,* purchased dearly by one man who lives
* He did not write his own memoirs; nor was I aware till engaged
on this slight sketch that he had made any preparations by which others




508


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


miserably through seventy years, in order that the world
may be startled a week after his death by hearing that
he has left half a million of money behind him; purchased cheaply by another, who buys an eternity on
the Table of Benefactors in his parish church, by giving
the produce of 51. to be distributed 'on Lammas Day, to
twelve poor widows, for ever.'
Of all the bubbles which men blow and then pursue,
posthumous fame is the most hollow. Present fame is
unsubstantial enough; ' the breath of the people being
but air, and that often not wholesome:' but the praise
of which we speak is only the shade of this shade, and
a sound which can never fall upon the ear of him to
whom it appertains. Some noble natures, indeed, as
they steer down life's swift river, blow a blast, which
the echoing rock on shore-a people's approbation-is
glad to resound and repeat. But, alas! so rapid is the
current which hurries the hero onward, that he is swept
past ere the echo he has wakened can reach and stir
his heart. Yet, knowing this, men go on laboriously
laying up a treasure which is to be inherited by
'Death, the skeleton,
And Time, the shadow:'
Oblivion stands by, and smiles at having spared an
immaterial voice, whilst she hides the substance in an
unremembered grave.
Neither did Mr. Wyllie seem affected by desire which
acts on some of his fellow-countrymen, of returning to
the land of his nativity and to his ' brither Scots' in the
might be enabled to construct a biography. But I now learn with
pleasure that his papers will be confided to the hands of a lady, a
countrywoman of our own, to whom our literature is already indebted:
and in the selection of Miss Ross as his biographer, Mr. Wyllie has shown
discrimination and wisdom.




THE WORKER'S DREAM OF REST.


509


evening of life, of enlarging his little patrimony and
living the life of a laird, which he would have been
able to do with the ample means he had acquired, and
the name he had justly earned by his talent and energy.
He does not seem to have formed any such plans. One
of his last intentions, it is true, before his rather unexpected death, was to have visited Europe; but this
design appears to have been rather with a view of benefiting his health, and acting in some political capacities,
than under the idea of a permanent residence in Scotland.
Such considerations did not move Wyllie much. He
had adopted a new and beautiful country, and he clung
faithfully to the land of his adoption. He had done
much for its institutions and its people; and doing
benefits, though it often fails to beget gratitude in the
objects, generally does breed in the doer the desire to do
yet more. And he was not the man to turn capriciously
aside after a new quarry. He laboured because he believed it necessary to the State that he should do so. He
laboured because he loved work, and would have laboured
on, as numerous official men do, because the office they
have undertaken lays it daily on them, and they both
impel the wheel, and are dragged onward by the wheel
which they impel. They have swum voluntarily towards a whirlpool, but being there, they are no longer
masters of themselves, but must swim in the circle
whether they will or no. Such men find their rest in
talking of the repose which they hope some day to
enjoy. So Wyllie spoke and wrote with delight of the
necessity to himself of leaving office and retiring to
his Princeville estate. This property, situated in the
Hanalei valley on the island of Kauai, the 'Eden of
the Hawaiian group,' combines in itself almost every




510


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


conceivable beauty of nature. At Lanihuli, the name
of the immediate village, he had built a charming house,
of one storey, a hundred feet long and forty in width,
with a broad verandah running the entire length. A
verdant lawn behind lost itself in shrubberies of flowering plants, above which a row of kukui trees gave their
shade. Among the blossoms of the underwood mingled
the rich scarlet berries of the kikania. The slopes of
the hill on which the house is built, profusely covered
with the guava, led downwards to a bright rushing
stream, its banks grown with ferns and other plants,
which pours its meandering current into a naturalbathing
pool surrounded with embowering thickets, where
Musidora might have unveiled without a blush, lulled
by the breeze sporting in the branches overhead, and by
the plash of the waterfall by which the stream finds its
exit. About the house a grove of loaded orange trees
offered itself to all the senses, and the graceful pandanus
drooped the shelter of its fan-like leaves. In front a
lawn, more studiously kept, terminated in a terraced
wall, on which beds of beautiful flowers were planted
with taste, and, especially after a shower, made the
whole air balmy with their odour. On one side of his
dwelling the eye was led through the greenery of the
valley, and on the other looked on the high bluffs
running for miles along the coast and on the fat pastures at their feet, where hundreds of cattle were grazing;
whilst far beyond all, the blue waters of the Pacific and
the azure sky of the tropics blended into one. Such
was the paradise which invited Mr. Wyllie: but not this
even to 'idlesse all;' for his sugar plantations, mills
and machinery, were at hand, so that even the rest
which he desired would have been tempered with




FUNERAL OBSEQUIES.


activity. But he never attained that evening life at
Princeville, but died in official harness at his villa in
the Nuuanu valley near Honolulu, which he named
Rosebank.
An almost royal funeral was granted by a grateful
sovereign to his faithful minister. There is not space
here to describe the service in the English cathedral,
the mustering of troops, the attendance of the masonic
bodies, in which Mr. Wyllie had attained high rank, or
the final procession at night by torch-light, when his
corpse was carried to its last earthly resting-place in
the new royal mausoleum. The burial-place of the
Hawaiian Kings in the Nuuanu valley having been
completed, this opportunity was taken for removing
into it all the coffins containing the remains of the royal
family. The' Hawaiian Gazette' of the 4th of November
1865 contains a complete and interesting account of
this procession, the order of the coffins, and the inscriptions on them. The earliest in date of the Hawaiian
chiefs were Liloa and Lonoi Kamakahike, whose bones
were brought from the secret place in which, according
to ancient Hawaiian custom, they had been concealed,
and were placed in one coffin. Liloa was the father
of the celebrated King Umi, the progenitor of the
present royal family, who is supposed to have ruled
about five hundred years ago.
In Mr. Wyllie Hawaii has lost a sure and strong
friend. It is too soon yet to speculate what changes
may be the consequence of his death.  He was the
Nestor of the Council, the adviser of Kings, an example
of industry, and a benefactor to the native race. Poor
Hawaii may perhaps have occasion to aay, with the
Tekoan herdsman, 'By whom shall Jacob arise, for he




512             HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.
is small!' It is such men as Wyllie to whom King
and people and foreigners also still must look; and
whilst their searching eyes glance round the horizon,
their lips may prayerfully exclaim
EXORIABE ALIQUIS!




b13


APPENDIX.
CORAL ISLANDS.
T is the general assumption that coral islands are built up
from the bottom of the ocean by the unaided labour of
lithophytes. Doubts of this fact have, however, been entertained and expressed. Captain Wilkes, who commanded the
United States Exploring Expedition (1838-1842), has stated
his decision, that coral islands cannot possibly be entirely the
work of zoophytes. He pronounces the labours of these minute
animalculae inadequate to produce effects so enormous, and
says that the appearance of the reefs themselves contradicts
such a presumption; and he adds that Darwin's ingenious
theory of an equal growth and subsidence of coral taking place
is at variance alike with the configuration, extent, and general
construction of the reefs. Darwin argues thus:-From the
limited depth at which reef-building polypifers can flourish,
one ought to conclude that both in atolls and barrier-reefs the
foundation to which the coral primarily is attached has subsided, and that during the gradual depression of the base of the
coral, reefs have grown upward. He says this will satisfactorily explain their outline, general form, and distribution;
that the existence of reefs and islands dispersed in large tracts
of ocean, which islands and reefs are formed by the growth of
kinds of coral, the insects of which cannot live at great depths,
is inexplicable, except on the theory that the base to which the
reefs are first attached slowly and successively sinks whilst the
corals grow upwards; that no positive facts are opposed to this
view, &c. (' Voyages of the Beagle.')
If we consider the stupendous workmanship required to
LL




514


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


upheave a reef hundreds of miles in length,-and such exist;
that on the north-east coast of New Holland and New Caledonia extending four hundred miles,-or islands many hundred
square miles in area, and believe the lithophytes' labour to be
a sufficient cause, it requires a credulity as to Nature's workings
such as commonly existed before the time of Bacon, and even that
of Boyle, but which has since been rebuked by experimental
philosophy. Soundings made by Beechey, Flinders, and others,
show that depths of two and three hundred feet of water sometimes occur near the raised reef, within the enclosure of lagoonislands, whilst outside the depth is often unfathomable. Wilkes
found no bottom with a line of 150 fathoms (900 feet) at that
distance from the perpendicular cliffs of Aurora Island; and
Dana says that within three-quarters of a mile from the
southern point of the island of Clermont Tonnere, the lead
brought up suddenly at 350 fathoms (2,100 feet) and then
dropped off again and descended to 600 fathoms (3,600 feet)
without reaching bottom. The lagoons within the circular
reefs are, however, generally shallow in comparison, and a
great depth inside is exceptional.
In the Indian Ocean and Coral Sea still deeper soundings
have been made than those mentioned. Dr. Maury ('Physical
Geography of the Sea') quotes a letter from Mr. Brooke stating
that the sounding-rod reached bottom in the Indian Ocean with
a line of 7,040 fathoms (42,240 feet). It must, however, be
observed that the length of line does not always express the perpendicular distance, as there is always a driftage of the line,
sometimes a very great one. Maury mentions a specimen of
the bed of the Coral Sea brought up with Brooke's soundingrod at a reported depth of 2,150 fathoms,-two miles and a
half.
Mr. Cheever, in his volume on Hawaii,* has given an
interesting chapter on the subject of coral formations. He
reasons that as some of the reefs, lagoons, and islands of coral


* ' Life in the Sandwich Islands; or, the Heart of the Pacific,' &c.
By the Rev. H. T. Cheever. London, 1851.




GALYANO-ELECTRIC THEORY.


515


rock rise from the sea-bottom at an unfathomable depth, to the
conditional height required for the lithophytes to work, the
lower portion or foundation must be produced by different and
independent causes; and he seeks such agencies in sudden
submarine galvanic action, sufficient to separate from the water
of the ocean and deposit ridges and piles composed of lime and
other substances existing in sea- water in enormous quantities,
and so universally diffused as to be ever at hand for any purpose. Giving full weight to the amount of material combined
with or in solution in the water of the depths of ocean, it is,
nevertheless, difficult to conceive a single voltaic action (and it
must be single or the effect would not follow) sufficiently
strong to raise from the bottom a ridge of separated lime many
thousand feet in height, and having a base wide enough to
support such a superstructure.  As an auxiliary argument
Mr. Cheever quotes the opinion of another missionary in the
South Seas, Mr. Williams, who puts forward a theory that the
calcareous coverings of marine molluscs are not necessarily
secreted by the animals themselves, but suggests that they only
secrete a sort of gluten, to which calcareous particles in the
water adhere, and form a shell. Mr. Williams had probably
in his thoughts the common caddis worms found in fresh
water. Mr. Cheever goes on to say:-' Let there be a
chemical precipitation of the minute calcareous particles floating in sea-water, by any means, and there might be formed a
reef-agreeably to the experiment in which the passing of a
stream of electric fluid through water having calcareous and
siliceous particles in solution produces stone. The lightning
in tropical regions, and the electric fluid engendered by submarine and other volcanoes which abound in the South Seas,
may thus produce an effect adequate to the formation of those
wonderful and invaluable structures.  This is a much more
rational theory to account for the existence of immense coral
reefs and coral islands in the Pacific than that alluded to above,
which supposes them wholly the work of saxigenous polypes
or lithophytes.'
We need not commit ourselves to the lightning theory, or to
LL2




516


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


that which supposes the inorganic matter suspended in seawater to become organic by mere adhesion and agglutination
to a living animal, to admit readily that the quantity of material suspended in sea-water is sufficient for the production of
very extensive formations; and that its elimination is very
rapid. Its lime, magnesia, soda, &c., are diffused so generally
and so abundantly, that there wants but the creative word and
the necessary condition, to cause them to pass into our sight as
organic forms. The growth of shelled animals in tropical seas is
astonishingly rapid. A friend informs me that, when an officer
on board one of the East India Company's ships in 1819, on a
voyage from Singapore to China by the eastern passage, the
vessel off the south coast of Borneo passed through, during
calm weather, continuous tracts of slimy water. Several
streaks or planks of the ship about the water-line became
covered with small gelatinous substances,-apparently derived
from the slimy water. In a short time these substances
became small shells, of the Lepas or barnacle kind; and at the
end of about four weeks the cephalopods had completely coated
that part of the vessel, from stem to stern. They were of all
lengths, up to one and a half and two inches; and it was found
necessary to take advantage of a calm day to lower all the
boats, and to scrape off these rapidly-increasing obstacles to
the sailing of the ship. I have myself, quite recently, seen
brought on shore on the English coast, two pieces of wood,
each about the size of the two open hands, studded as closely
with barnacles as the peduncles could be packed, and of greater
length than those of the Indian Seas just described.
All this growth proceeded from inorganic material in the
water selected and transformed into organic matter by a vital
process, as soon as the necessary opportunity for adhesion presented itself. The inference follows, that if the accidental
passage of a ship afforded the condition sufficient to reveal or
cause organic life to so large an extent, the amount of possible
life, even in the one field traversed, that did not receive the
proper conditions for its developement, must have been enormous. What, then, must be the entire chemical potentialities




. LAGOON AND CHAIN ISLANDS.


of the ocean for producing solid matter? Other shelled
molluscs and infusoria, unlike those described, may not require
for their production and developement adhesion to fixed or
floating substances. Their production may go on in the water,
unaided by such conditions, rapidly and with constancy. Each
individual in its short existence transforms inorganic matter
into the beautiful forms of ammonites, navicule, nummulites,
&c.; and after the animal's death, the shell sinks. At a short
distance below the surface of the sea its waters, free from
agitating winds and currents, probably remain in stagnant immobility; and in those depths, during ages untold, the two
processes of formation of shells and their quiet deposit go on.
Thus will have been produced the wonderful chalk deposits,
hundreds of feet in thickness, all parts of which showing, under
the microscope, that they are mainly composed of entire shells
or the detritus of shells. In a similar manner the emery stone
may have been formed from the beautiful siliceous wing-cases
of diatomacese.
Several passages in Dr. Maury's valuable contribution to
science, his 'Physical Geography of the Sea,' are so confirmatory of the preceding remarks, and are in themselves so
interesting, that I have selected and strung together at the end
of this chapter some detached portions of his work which bear
upon the subjects herein treated of.
It is, in fact, to volcanic action that we must look for the
production of long ridges and vast circular reefs forming chain
and lagoon islands rising from the profound depths of the
ocean. Darwin, whilst he dismisses the volcanic hypothesis,
says, 'the theory generally received is, that lagoon-islands or
atolls are based on submarine craters.' *  Wilkes remarks that
all the coral islands lie within an ocean subject to the effects
of volcanic action; and his presumption is that many islands
and groups now separated, were once united in extensive tracts
of land, and that their alteration and dismemberment have
been brought about by the same causes that affect other lands.t
* Voyages of the Beagle.
t United States Exploring Expedition.




518


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


The late Admiral Beechey, in his Narrative of a Voyage
to the Pacific, states that he examined fifty coral islands, and
that for thirty-two of them he sent plans, soundings, &c., to
the Admiralty. He is, consequently, entitled to form an
opinion upon their character and origin. Twenty-nine of
these thirty-two islands had lagoons in their centres, and the
rest appeared to have once possessed an internal depression,
but which had become obliterated by having been filled up
with coral and such substances as the sea cast upon these low
islands. He says, 'the general opinion now is that they have
their foundations upon submarine mountains, or upon extinguished volcanoes, which are not more than four or five hundred feet immersed in the ocean; and that their shape depends
upon the figure of the base whence they spring.'* He also
detected in what were called Chain-islands, consisting of a
number of islets grouped in a circular or oval form, that the
visible islets were only the higher portions of a ridge having
that general shape; and that the ridge was continuous at forty
and thirty fathoms below water, and even at less depths. The
comparatively large group of the Gambier islands, of which a
careful plan with soundings is given in his volumes, is, in all
likelihood, the irregular wall of a very large submarine volcano. The islands which rise in the central space are probably
cones, which are always thrown up within craters in activity.
In most, or all cases, a current sets out from the lagoon within
a coral island through an opening in the wall or ridge; and
the hiatus in the reef is nearly always on the windward side.
Its place is sometimes determined by the course of fresh water,
when there are springs on these islands, as the lithophytes do
not work or live within the influence of fresh water. Beneath
the gaps, as has already been said, at some fathoms depth, the
ridge even in these places is continuous.
The circular ridges forming lagoons and chains of islands
must, then, be regarded as the walls of craters. Above water
these are illustrated by the rocky ridges of immense diameter
which surround the craters of Kileaua, and Hale-a-ka-la,
* Vol. i. p. 261.




GROWTH OF CORAL.


519


described in the text of this volume. They represent a
lagoon-island, only still farther elevated, and discharged of the
water it enclosed.
The straight reefs or ridges must be looked upon as having
been lifted up by linear volcanic action, or ejected from fissures
formed in the crust of the globe, as the outer strata in cooling
contracted upon the incompressible core within. The process
may be seen by allowing a poker to heat to redness in the fire
and remain long enough for the surface to become well oxidised. On exposure to the air, the incrustation on the metal
cools first, and is caused by the hot unelastic iron beneath to
split with irregular fissures, and
to fall off. Apply this to the
earth. Let a and b represent 
portions of the cool and contracted crust. Let c be the internal fluid mass; e the fissure
formed in consequence of the
crust contracting on the incompressible core. The arch of
cohesion being broken, one side of the fracture will be free
to gravitate downwards and fall in, displacing an equivalent
of fluid matter, which will be ejected in a form the section of
which is that of an unequal prism, d. Let the fissure take the
direction north and south, and Andes and Cordilleras are produced, with unequal sides, a scalene triangle in section,
descending rapidly with a short base of detritus into the ocean
depths on one side; spreading out gradually, or in waves, on
the other side. Such cosmic agonies are not without visible
and audible phenomena, tempered according to depth, if below
water; agitating the ocean, and throwing huge waves on to
shores with corresponding retirements, until the disturbance
has subsided and the equilibrium is regained. Earthquakes
and waterquakes are also the attendants of these fractures, which
are now only on a small scale compared with the gigantic
fissures which formed the continuous range of Andes and Rocky
Mountains, the spine of North and South America; the Indian
t-hauts, &c.




520


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


A ridge, whether longitudinal or circular, having been
uplifted sufficiently near the surface of the sea, offers the
condition proper for coral formation. It seems necessary that
the lithophytes be covered generally with water, but the depth
of water must not be too great. Light appears essential to
the polyps; and it is probable that it is the loss of light at
considerable depths, which limits their workmanship to certain
distances below water. The rapidity of coral formation is in
opposite ratio with the depth of water in which it proceeds.
Thus, in water from three to ten fathoms deep, the coral
attains its average height, viz. ten to twelve inches, in eight
years. Ten years are required for an equal growth in fifteen
fathoms; twenty-five or thirty years where the depth is increased to 100 fathoms (600 feet); whilst at 900 feet, at least
forty years are occupied in producing the same height of coral.
It is presumable that below a thousand feet of water the production of coral does not take place. In the Mediterranean
and Red Seas, coral is never met with in less than about ten
feet of water, nor at a greater depth than 900 feet; but in the
Pacific, Mr. Cheever mentions having collected at the island of
Molokai, Sandwich Islands, fine living specimens from a reef
which never had more than two feet of water on it, and which
must sometimes at low water have been laid bare. An even
temperature of 76 degrees Fahr. seems most congenial to the
growth of coral.
The coral stem is very destructible: it is quickly abraded
by tides and currents, and is found pierced in every part by
worms. Its attachment at the base is easily overcome. It
becomes pulverised and mixed with chalk and sand, and with
other organisms; and in this state it forms the amorphous part
of the coral rock, and itself the foundation for a fresh growth
of coral, rising from its surface, each successive growth being
not more than twelve inches in height. Even the amorphous
coral rock is based on a deposited substratum of rock less
organized than itself. 'The more solid and compact texture
of the rock, often stratified, would also lead one to ascribe it to
a different origin from the corals, whose exact and beautiful
cellular structure evinces an animal agency as plainly as the




GROWTH OF CORAL.


521


honeycomb of a bee-hive. It is therefore unnecessary to
suppose the calcareous coral rock either secreted by insects, or
the exuvie of insects, or the dead bodies of insects themselves;
but they are simply carbonate of lime precipitated from the
sea-water which holds its particles in solution, mixed and
cemented together with broken shells and pieces of coral.'
Such rocks are the true base of the coral islands, where the
base is not volcanic or a platform of chalk or inorganic rock
lifted up above the general sea-bottom. It is one of the most
established cosmical processes that elevations and depressions
of the crust of the earth are constantly taking place-some
rapid, as by volcanoes and earthquakes, others slow and
gradual, acting through long or secular periods. Thus some
shores of the Baltic are rising with a very minute yearly elevation. In volcanic regions the alterations of level are often
sudden and conspicuous. The island of Molokai, one of the
Hawaiian group, bears evidence of rapid local elevation; welldefined coral being found on it at the height of 500 feet above
the sea-level. A missionary reports a statement made by the
natives of Kauai that a bed of coral or coral sand exists on one
of the mountains there, 4,000 feet above the ocean. Beechey
describes Henderson's Island as bearing unmistakeable symptoms of having been raised. It is composed of dead coral,
elevated eighty feet above the sea, and having perpendicular
cliffs nearly all the way round it ' as if, after being formed in
the ocean, it had been pushed up by a subterranean convulsion.' It is now nearly encompassed by a reef of living coral.*
Malden's island, mentioned in the earlier part of the text
of this work, was examined by Captain Goddard during the
year 1861.   It indicates by seven distinct beaches or
water-lines, six successive elevations since its first emergence
from the ocean, the last upheaval being so recent that paths
made from the higher platform where the remains of human
dwellings appear, pass through six of the beaches on their way
to the sea, and invariably terminate before reaching the seventh
beach.
* Narrative, vol. i. p. 264.




5s2


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


The following excerpted passages from      Maury's 'Physical
Geography of the Sea' will form a proper and interesting
pendent to the chapter:
I was delighted to find that all these deep soundings are filled
with microscopic shells: not a particle of sand or gravel exists in them.
They are chiefly made up of little calcareous shells (Foraminifera), and
contain also a small number of siliceous shells (Diatomacece).
It is not probable that these animals lived at the depths where these
shells are found, but I rather think that they inhabit the water near the
surface; and when they die, their shells settle to the bottom.'-(Letter
from Professor Bailey, of West Point.)
These shells were from the great telegraphic plateau, and the inference is that there, if anywhere, the waters of the sea are at rest. There
was not motion enough there to abrade these very delicate organisms, &c.
~ 271.
It is now suggested that henceforward we should view the surface of
the sea as a nursery teeming with nascent organisms, its depths as the
cemetery for families of living creatures that outnumber the sands on
the sea-shore for multitude. ~ 723.
These oceans of animalcule that make the surface of the sea sparkle
and glow with life, are secreting from its surface solid matter for the
very purpose of filling up those cavities below. These little marine
insects are building their habitations at the surface, and when they die,
their remains, in vast multitudes, sink down and settle upon the bottom.
They are the atoms of which mountains are formed and plains spread
out. Our marl-beds, the clay in our river-bottoms, large portions of
many of the great basins of the earth, are composed of the remains of
just such little creatures as these, which the ingenuity of Brooke and
the industry of Berryman have enabled us to fish up from the depth of
more than two miles (12,000 feet) below the sea-level. ~ 730. The
diatoms from the coral sea were very few in number, and mostly fragmentary. ~ 753. However, the specimens of sea-bottom from the
ocean between Lon. 168 to 175 E. and Lat. 56'46 to 60-30 N. were
very rich in the siliceous shells of the Diatomacese, which were in an
admirable state of preservation, &c. ~ 758, note.
The deep sea-soundings from the Pacific differ considerably from those
of the Atlantic. The latter soundings were composed almost wholly of
calcareous shells of the Foraminiferae; those from the coral sea contain
very few Foraminifere, and are of a siliceous rather than of a calcareous
nature. ~ 754. (This seems a little discrepant.)
As to the repose of the sea at great depths, the unabraded appearance of these shells, and the almost total absence of the mixture of any




VITALITY IN THE OCEAN.


523


detritus from the sea, or foreign matter, suggest forcibly the idea of
perfect repose at the bottom of the deep sea. ~ 760.  Ipdeed, these
soundings suggest the idea that the sea, like the snow-cloud with its
flakes in a calm, is always letting fall upon its bed showers of these
microscopic shells. ~ 71.
And as to the immensity of life, and the power of converting inorganic
material, we have now had specimens from the bottom of the 'blue
water' in the narrow coral sea, the broad Pacific, and the long Atlantic,
and they all tell the same story, namely, that the bed of the ocean is a
vast cemetery. ~ 759. The ocean, especially within and near the tropics,
swarms with life. The remains of its myriads of moving things are
conveyed by currents, and scattered and lodged in the course of time all
over its bottom. The process, continued for ages, has covered the depths
of the ocean as with a mantle, consisting of organisms as delicate as
the macled frost, and as light as the undrifted snow-flake on the mountain. ~ 761. The rivers convey to the sea this solid matter mixed with
fresh water, which being lighter than that of the ocean, remains for a
considerable time at or near the surface. Here the microscopic organisms
of the deep sea lead are continually at work, secreting this same lime
and soda, &c., and extracting from this sea-water all this solid matter
as fast as the rivers bring and empty it into the sea. They live and
die at the surface, then sinking, the bottom of the sea is strewed with
them. ~ 738. The task of secreting the calcareous matter from the seawater appears to have been left by these little mites of creatures to the
madrepore and shell-fish, while these little mites themselves undertook
the hard task of getting the siliceous matter out. ~ 757.
LONDON
PRINTED BY SPOTTISWOODE AND CO.
NEW-STREET SQUARE




I,




1873.1


0GENERAL LIST OF'WORKS
IUBLISHEMD BY
MESSRS. LONGMANS, GREEN, AND 00.
PATERNOSTER ROW, LONDON.
History, Politics, Historical Memoirs, &c.
The HISTORY of ENGLAND from the Fall of Wolsey to the Defeat
of the Spanish Armada. By J&~tss ArrzTnoxy FRoUDE1, M.A. late Fellow
of Exeter College, Oxford.
LiBuAnY EDITIoN, 12 VOLS. 8VO. price ~8. 18s.
CABINET EDITION, in 12 vols. crown 8vo. price 72*.
The ENGLISH in IRELAND in the EIGHTEENTH CENTURY.,ntP13y Jmics ANTHrONy F.RoUDE, M.A. late Fellow of Exeter College, Oxford.
VOL. I 8vo. price 16s.
ESTIMATES of the ENGLISH KINGS from WILLIAM the CONQUEROR to GEORGE III. By J. LANGTON SANFORD. Crawn
8vo. price 12s. 6d.
The HISTORY of ENGLAND from the Accession of James IL B3y.
Isord MACAULAY.
STUDENT'S EDIMiN, 2 vols. crown 8vo. 12*.
PEOPLE'S EDITION, 4 Vols. crown 8vo. 161*.
CABINET EDITION, 8 Vols. post 8vo. 488..
LIBRARY EDITION, 5 vols. 8VO.94.
LORD MACAULAY'S WORKS. Complete and Uniform Library
Edition. Edited by his Sister, Lade TREVELYrAN. 8 vols. Svo. withPortrait,
price ~45. 5s. cloth, or ~8. 8s. bound in tree-calf by Riviere.
VARIETIES of VICE-REGAL LIFE. By Sir WILLIAM DEIsoiM,
K.C.B. late Governor-General of the Australian Colonies, and Governor of
Madras. With Two Maps, 2 vols. Svo. 28s.
On PARLIAMENTARY 3GOVERNMENT in ENGLAND; its Origin
Development, and Practical Operation. By ALPHXus TODD, Librarian o'
the Legislative Assembly of Catada. 2 vols. Svo. price.~1. 178.
The, CONSTITUTIONAL HISTORY of ENGLAND, since the Accession of George III. 1760-1860. By Sir THrOMAS ERasHicif MAY. C..B. Second
Edition. Cabinet Edition, thoroughly revised. 3 vols. crown Wv. price 18*.
A




2       NEW WORKS PUBLISHED By LONGMANS AND CO.


The HISTORY of ENGLANDp from the Earliest Times to the Year
1365. By C. D. YOIGE, BA. Regius Professor of Modern History in Queen's
College, Belfast. New Edition. Crown Svo. price78s.6d.
The OXFORD REFORMERS-John Colet, Erasmus, arid Thomas
More; being a History of their Fellow-work. By FREDERIC SEEBOIIR.
Second Edition, enlarged. 8vo. 14s.
LECTURES on the HISTORY of ENGLAND, from the earliest Times
to the Death of King Edward II. By WILLiAm LON*GMAN. With Maps
arid Illustrations. 8vo. 15s.
The HISTORY of the LIFE and TIMES of EDWARD the THIRD.
By WILLIAM LONGMAN. With 9 Maps, 8 Plates, and 16 Woodcuts. 2 vols.
8vo. 28*.
MEMOIR andaCORRESPONDENCE relating to POLITICAL OCCURRENCES in June and July 1834.      By EDWARD Jouw LITTLETOW,
First Lord Hatherton. Edited, from the Original Manuscript, by HENRY
REEVE. 8vo. price 7s. 6d.
WATERLOO LECTURES; a Study of the Campaign of 1815. By
Colonel CHARLES C. CHESNEY, R.E. late Professor of Military Art and
History in the Staff College. New Edition. 8vo. with Map, 10s. Gd.
ROYAL and REPUBLICAN FRANCE. A Series of Essays reprinte dfrom the -Edinburgh, Quarterly, and British and Foreign RPeviewsq. By
HENRY REEVE, CEB. D.C.L. 2 vols. 8vo. price 21*.
CHAPTERS from FRENCH HISTORY; St. Louis, Joan of Arc,
Henri IV. with Sketches of the Intermediate Periods. By J. H.
GURNEY. M.A. New Edition. Fop. 8vo. 6U. 6d.
The LIFE and TIMES of SIXTUS the FIFTH. By Baron HETrBxRR.
Translated from thle Original. French, with the Author's sanction, by
HUBERT E. H. JERNIWGIIAM. 2 vols. Svo. price 24s.
IGNATIUS LOYOLA and the EARLY JESUITS. By STEWART ROSE.
New Edition, revised. 8vo. with Portrait, price l1s.
The SIXTH ORIENTAL MONARCHY: or, the Geography, History,
and Antiquitl.ss of Partbia. Collected and Illustrated fromn Ancient and
*Modern sources. By GEORGE RAWLINSON, M.A., Camden Professor of
Ancient History in the U~niversity of Oxford. With Maps and illustrationIs.
8vo. price, 16s.
The HISTORY of GREECE. By C. TIHILWALL, D.D. Lord Bishop
of St. David's. 8 vols. fop. Svo. price 28*.
GREEK HISTORY from Tbemistocles to Alexander, in a Series of
Lives from Plutarch. Revised and arranged by A. H. CLOUGH. New
Edition. Fop. with 44 Woodcuts, 68.
The TALE of the GREAT PERSIAN WAR, from the Histories of
Herodotus. By GEORGE W. Cox, M.A. New Edition. Fcp. 3*. 6d.
The HISTORY of ROME. B3y WILLIAM IuNvi. English Edition,
translated and revised by the Author. VOLS. I. and II. 8vo. price 30*.
HISTORY of the ROMANS under the EMPIRE. By the Very Rev.
C. XicRivALm, D.C.L. Dean of Ely. B vols. post Svo. 48*.




NEW WORKS PUBLISHED BY LONGMANS AND CO. 


3


The FALL of the ROMAN REPUBLIC; a Short History of the Last
Century of the Commonwealth. By thesame Author. 12mo. 7s. 6d.
THREE CENTURIES of MODERN HISTORY. By CHARLES, IDuKE
YONGE, B.A. Regias Professor of Modern History and English Literature in
Queen's College, Belfast. Crown 8vo. price 7s. 6id.
A STUDENT'S MANUAL of the HISTORY of INDIA, from the
Earliest Period to the Present. By Colonel MEADOWS TAYLOR, M.R.A.S.
M.R.I.A. Crown 8vo. with Maps, 7s. 6d.
The HISTORY of INDIA, from the Earliest Period to the close of Lord
Daihousie's Administration. By JoaN OLARK HAR5IIMAN. 3 vols. crown
8vo. 22,s. Gd.
INDIAN POLITY: a View of the System of Administ-ration in India.
By Lieutenant-Colonel GEo-RGE CiTESNEY, Fellow of the University of
Calcutta. New Edition, revised; with Map. Svo. price 21s.
A COLONISr on the COLONIAL QUESTION. By JEHiu MATHEWS,
of Toronto, Canada. Post 8vo. price 68.
The IMPERIAL       and COLONIAL      CONSTITUTIONS      of the BRITANNIC EMPIR0., including INDIAN INSTITUTIONS. By Sir EDWARD
CREASY, M.A. With 6 Maps. 8vo. price 15s.
REALITIES of IRISH LIFE. By W. STEUART TRENCHi, Land Agent
in Ireland to the Marquess of Lansdowne, the Marquess of Bath, and Lord
Digby. Fifth Edition. Crown 8vo. price 6s.
The STUDENT'S MANUAL of the HISTORY of TRELAND. B3y
MARY F. CUSACK, Author of 'The Illustrated History of Ireland, from the
Earliest Period to the Year of Catholic Emancipation.' Csown 8vo. prioe 6a.
CRITICAL and HISTORICAL ESSAYS contributed to the Edin'burgh
J-eeiew. By the Right Hon. LORD) MACAULAY.
CABINET EDITION, 4 vols. post Svo. 24s. LI-BRARY "ElDITToN, 3 vols. 8vo. 36..
PEOPLE'S EDITION, 2 vols. crown 8vo. Ss. I STUDENT'S EDITION, 1 Vol. cr. 8vo. 6a.
SAINT-SIMON and SAINT-SIMONISX; a chapter in the History of
Socialism in France. By ARTlIIur J. BOOMt. M.A. Crown 8vo. price 7s. Gd.
HISTORY of EUROPEAN MORALS, from Augustus to Charlemagne.
By W. E. H. LECKY, M.A. Second Edition. 2 vols. 8vo. price 25..
HISTORY of the RISE and INFLUENCE of the SPIRIT of
RATIONALISM in EUROPE. By W. E. H. LECRY, M.A. Cabinet Edition,
being the Fourth. 2 v ols. crown Svo. price 16..
GOD in HISTORY; or, the Progress of Man's Faith in the Moral
Order of the World. By Baron. BuNsEN. Translated by SusA-NNA WiwK.
WORTHT; with a Preface by Dean STANLEY. 3 vols. 8vo. price 42s.
The HISTORY of PHILOSOPHY, from Thales to Comte. By
GEORGE HENRY ILEwEs. Fourth Edition. 2 vols. 8vo. 319.
An HISTORICAL VIEW of LITERATURE and ART in GREAT
BRITAIN from the Accession of the H-ouse of Hanover to the Reign of
Queen Victoria. By J. MURRAY GRAHAM, M.A. 8vo. price 12:.
The MYTHOLOGY of the ARYAN NATIONS. B~y G~oRGE W.
Cox, M.A. late Scholar of Trinity College, oxford, Joint-Editor, with the
late Professor Brando, of the Fourth Edition of 'The Dictionary of Science
Literature, and Art,'Author of 'Tales of Ancient Greece' &c. 2 volsi. ~rvo. 23s.
A 2




4      NEW WORKS PUBLISHED By LONGMANS AwD CO.


HISTORY of CIVILISATION in England and France, Spain and Scotland. By HENRHY THOMAS BUCKLE. New Edition of the entire Work,
with a Complete INDEX. 3 vols. crown 8vo. 24s.
HISTORY of the CHRISTIAN CHURCH, from the Death of St. John
to the Middle of the 2nd Century: comprising a fuill Account of the Primitive Organisation (f Church Gcivernment and the Growth of Episcopacy.
By the Rev. T. W. MossMATN, B.A. 8vo.                  [Just ready.
HISTORY of the CHRISTIAN CHURCH, from the Ascension of
Christ to the Conversion of Constantine. BY E. BURTON, D.D.- late
Prof. of Divinity in the Univ. of Oxford. New Edition. Fcp. 3s. 6d.
SKETCH of the HISTORY of the CHURCH of ENGLAND to the
Revolution of 1688. By the Right Rev. T. V. SHORT, D.D. Lord Bishop of
St. Asaph. Eighth Edition. Crown 8vo. 7s. 6d.
HISTORY of the EARLY CHURCH, from the First Preaching of the
Gospel to the Council Of Nicisa. A.D. 325. BY ELIZABETH M. SEWELL,
Author of 'Amy Herbert.' New Edition, with Questions. Pep. 4*. 6d.
The ENGLISH REFORMATION. By F. C. MASSINGBERD, M.A.
Chancellor of Lincoln and Rector of SouthOrmsby. FourthEdition, revised
Fep. 8vo. 7s. Gd.
KAUNDER'S HISTORICAL TREASURY; comprising a General Introductory Outline of Universal History, and a series of Separate Histories
Latest Edition, revised and broutght dowu to the Present Time by the
Rev. GEORGE WILLIAMt Cox, M.A. Fep. 6s. cloth, or 10s. calf. 4.
ENCYCLOP.EDIA of CHRONOLOGY, HISTORICAL and BIOGRAPHICAL; comprising the Dates of all the Great Events of History.
including Treaties, Alliances, Wars, Battles, &c.; Incidents in the Lives of
Eminent Men and their Works, Scientific and Geographical Discoveries.
Mechanical Inventions, and Social, Domestic, and Economical Improvemerits. By B. B. WOODWARD, B.A. and W. L. R. CATES. Svo. price 42s.
Biographical Works.
BIOGRAPHICAL and CRITICAL ESSAYS. Reprinted from Reviews.
with Additions and Corrections; a New [Series. By A. HAYWARD, Q. C.
2 vols. 8vo. price 28*.
MEMOIR of GEORGE EDWARD LYNCH COTTON, D.D. Bishop of
Calcutta and Metropolitan. With S'elections from his Journsis and Correspondence. Edited by -Mrs. COTTON. Second Edition, with Portrait.
Crown 8vo. price 7s. 6d.
MEMOIR of the LIFE of Admiral Sir EDWARD CODRINGTON.
With Selections from his Public and Private Correspondence. Edited by
his Daughter, Lady BOU.RCJI1ERz. With Two Portraits, Maps, and Plans.
2 vols. 8vo. price 30*.
LIFE of Alexander VON HUMBOLDT. Compiled in Commemoration of the Centenary of his Birth. By Herr JULIUS L6WENBERG,
Dr. RZOBER.TAvr '-LALLE-A-N-T, an~dDr. ALFREDDovu,, Edited by Professor
KA.RL BRUHNS,Director of the Observatory at Leipzig. Translated by
JANEg and CAROLINE LASSELL. 2 vols. 8vo. with Three Portraits, price 36&.:
MEMOIRS of BARON STOCKMAR. By his SON, Baron E. VON
STOCKHMAR. Translated from tihe German by G. A. M. Edited by F. MAX
MULLER, M.A. 2 yols, crown Svo. price 21s.




NEW WORKS PU13LI5JVRP BT bIJONG31AINSkAND CO.


5


MUSICAL CRITICISM       and BIOGRAPHY, from        the Pub~lishe-(.d and
Unpublished Writings of TuOMAS DAMA —N-T EATON, late President of the
Norwich Choral Socieiy.   6elected and edited by his 6oNs.  Crown
8vo. 7s. 6d.
AUTOBIOGRAPHY of JOHN MILTON; or, Milton's IUfe in his own
Words. By the Rev. JAM-,ES J.G. GRiAAM, M.A. Crown 8vo. price Ss.
LORD GEORGE BENTINCK; a Political Biography. By the Right
Hon. BENJAMIN DISRAELI, M.P. Eighth Edition, revised, with a N~ew
Preface. Crown 8vo. u)rice 6s.,,
The LIFE of ISAMBARD KINGDOM BRUNEL, Civil Engineer.
By ISAMBARD BRUNEL, B.C.Li. of Li ncoln's Inn; Chancellor of the Diocese
of Ely. With Portrait, Plates, and Woodcuts. 8vo. 218.
The LIFE and LETTERS of FARADAY. By, Dr. BENcE JONE-s,
Secretary of the Royal Institution. Second Edition, thoroughly revised.
2 vols. 8vo. with Portrait, and Eight Engravings on Wood, price 28s.
FARADAY as a DISCOVERER. By JoHN TYN.DALL, LL.D. F.R.S.
Professor of Natural Philosophy in the Royal Institution. New and Cheaper
Editioi, with Two Portraits. Fcp. 8vo. 3s.6Sd.
RECOLLECTIONS of PAST LIFE. By Sir HENRY HOLLAND, Bart.
M.D. F.R.S. &c. Physician-fin-Ordinary to the Queen. Third Edition.
Post 8vo. price 10s. 6d.
The LIFE and LETTERS of the Rev. SYDNEY SMITH. Edited
1W his Daughter, Lady HOLLAND, and Mrs. AuSTINT. New Edition, complete
ini One Volume. Crown 8vo. price 6s.
The LIFE and TRAVELS of GEORGE WHITEFIELD, M.A. By
JAMES PATERtSON GLEDSTONE. Svo. price 14s.
LEADERS of PUBLIC OPINION in IRELAND; Swift, Flood,'
Grattan, and O'Connell. By W. E. II; LEeRY, M.A. New Edition, revised
and enlarged. Crown Svo. price 78. 6d.
DICTIONARY of GENERAL BIOGRAPHY; containing Concise
Memoirs and Notices of the most Eminent Persons, of all Counitries, from
the -Earliest Ages tothe PresenitTime. Edited by W.L. R.CATES. 8vo. 21s.
LIVES of the QUEENS of ENGLAND. By AGN-ES STRICKLAND.
Library Edition, newly revised; wvith Portraits of every Queen, Autographs,
aiid Vignettes. 8 vols. post Svo. 78. 6d. each.
LIFE of the DUKE of WELLINGTON. By the Rev. G. R. GLEIG,
M.A. Popular Edition, carefully revised; with copious Additions. Crown
Svo. with Portrait, 58.
APOLOGIA PRO VITA SUA; being a Hi story of his Religious Opinions,
by JoRtN HENRY NEWMAN, D.D., of.the Oratory of St.,Phiflip Neri. New
Editioni. Post Svo. price 68.
FELIX MENDELSSOHN'S LETTERS from Italy and Switzerland,
and Letters from 1833 to 1847, translated by Lady WAlLACIC. New Edition,
with Portrait. 2 vols. crown 8vo. 5s. each.
MEMOIRS of SIR HENRY HAVELOCK, K.C.B. By JOHN CLARK
MAItSHMAN. Cabinet Edition, with Portrait. Crown 8vo. price 3s. Sd.




6        NEW WORKS PUB3LISHED iBY JONGMANS AND CO.
VICISSITUDES of FAMILIES. By Sir J. BERNARnD BURKE, C.B.
Ulster King of Arms. New Edition, remodelled and enlarged. 2. vols.
crown Svo. 218.,
The RISE of GREAT FAMILIES, other Essays and Stories. By Sir
J. BERNARD Buauca, C.B. Ulster King-of-Arms. Crown 8vo. price 128. 6d.
ESSAYS in ECCLESIASTICAL BIOGRAPHY. By the Right Hon.
SirJ. STrPEifs,LL.D. Cabinet Edition, beingthe Fifth. Crown Svo.7s.6d.
KAUNDER'S BIOGRAPHICAL TREASURY. Thirteenth Edition,
reconstructed, thoroughly revised, and in great part rewritten; with about
1.000 additional Memoirs and Notices, by W. L.H.CATEs. Fep.8Svo. price 6s.
LETTERS and LIFE of FRANCIS BACON, including all his Occasional Works. Collected and edited, with a Commentary, by J. SPEnDDING,
Trin. Coil. Cantab. 6 vols. 8vo. price ~3. 12s. To be, completed in One
more Volume.
Criticism, Philosophy, Polity, &C.
A SYSTEMATIC VIEW of the SCIENCE of JURISPRUDENCE.
BY SITELDoN Amos, M.A. Professor of Jurisprudence to the Inns of Court,
London. 8vo. price iss.
The INSTITUTES of JUSTINIAN; with English Introduction, Translation, and Notes. By T. C. SANDALS, M.A. Ba'rrister, late Fellow of Oriel
Coil. Oxon. New Edition. 8vo. 15s.
SOCRATES and the SOCRATIC SCHOOLS. Translated from the
German of Dr. E. ZELLER, with the Author's approval, by the Rev. OSWALD
J. REICHEL, BOCL. and M.LA. Crown 8vo. 8s. 6d.
The STOICS, EPICUREANS, and SCEPTICS. Translated from the
German of Dr. E. ZELLEL, with the Author's approval, by OSwALD J.
Rmrcica, B.C.L. and M.A. Crown Svo. price 14.%
The ETHICS of ARISTOTLE, illustrated with Essays and Notes.
By Sir A. GRAN~T, Bart. M.A. LL.D. Third Edition, revvia,(d and partly
re~writteii.                                     [In the press.
The NICOMACHEAN ETHICS of ARISTOTLE newly translated into
English. By R. WILLIAMs, B.A.IFellow anidlate Lecturer of I erton College,
and sometime Student of Christ Church, Oxford. Svo. 12s.
ELEMENTS of LOGIC. By R. WHATELY, ID.D. late Archbishop of
Dublin. New Editiou. 8vo. 10.. Wd. crown 8vo. 4s. 6d.
Elements of Rhetoric. By the sa me Author. New Edition. 8vo.
10s. 6d. crown Bvo. 4s. 6d.
English Synonymes. By E. JANE WHATELY. Edited by Archbishop
WHiTELY. 5th Edition. Pep. 3s.
BACON'S ESSAYS with ANNOTATIONS. By R. WHiTELY, D.D.
late Archbishop of Dublin. New Edition. 8vo. 10s. 6d.
LORD BACON'S WORKS, collected and edited by J. SPEDDING, M.A.
R. L. ELLIS, M.A. and D. D. HEATH. New and Cheaper Edition. 7 vols.
8vo. price ~3. 13s. Gd.
The SUBJECTION of WOMIEN. By JOHN STUART MILL. New
Edition. Post Svo. 5s.




NEW WORKS PUBLISHED By LONGMANS AND CO.


On REPRESENTATIVE GOVERNMENT. B.7 JOHN~ STUART MILL.
Third Edition. 8vo. 9s. Crown 8vo. 2s.
OIL LIBERTY. By JOHN STUART MILL. Fourth Edition. Post
Bvo. 7s. 6d. Crown 8vo. Is. 4d. 
PRINCIPLES of POLITICAL ECONOMY. By the same Author.
Seventh Edition. 2 Vols. 8vo. 30s. Or in 1 vol. crown 8vo. 58.
A-SYSTEM of LOGIC, RATIOCINATIVE and INDUCTIVE. By the
same Author. Eighth Edition. Two vols. 8vo. 258.
UTILITARIANISM. By JoinS STUART MILL. Fourth Edition. 8vo. 5s.
DISSERTATIONS and DISCUSSIONS, POLITICAL, PHILOSOPHICAL, and HISTORICAL. By JOHN STUART *IILL. Second Edition, revised.
3 vols. 8vo. 36s.
EXAMINATION of Sir W. HAMILTON'S PHILOSOPHY, and of the
Principal Philosophical Questions discussed in his Writings. By JOHN
STUART MILL. Fourth Edition. 8vo. 168.
An OUTLINE of the NECESSARY LAWS of THOUGHT: a Treatise
on Pure and Applied Logic. By the Most Rev. W. TsroasoN, Lord Arch.
bishop of York, 1).D. F.R.S. N ith Thousand. Crown 8vo. 5s. 6d.
PRINCIPLES of ECONOMICAL PHILOSOP1*!. By HEINRY DnmNiw
MACLEOD, M.A. Barrister-at-Law. Second Edition. In Two Volumes.
VOL. I, 8vo. price 15s.
A. Dictionary ofrPolitical Economy; Biographical, Bibliographical,
Historical, and Practical. By the same Author. VOL. I. royal 8vo.80*9.
The ELECTION of REPRESENTATIVES, Parliamentary and Mani
cipal; a Treatise. By THoatA. HARE, Barrister-at.Law. Fourth Edition,
with Additions. Crown Svo.-7s.
SPEECHES of the RIGHT HON. LORD MACAULAY, corrected by
Himself. People's Edition, crown Svo. 3s. 6d.
Lord Macaulay's Speeches on Parliamentary Reform in 1831 and
1832. 16mo. is.
A. DICTIONARY of the ENGLISH LANGUAGE. By R. G. LA-THAN,
M.A. M.D. F.R.S. founded onl the Dictionary of Dr. SiAMUNL JORNSON1, 3*.
edited by the Rev. RI. J. Tomn, with numerous Emendations anl Additions.
In Four Volumes, 4to. price ~7.
THESAURUS of ENGLISH WORDS and PHRASES, cias'sified and
arranged. so as to facilitate the, Expression of Ideas, and assist fit Literary
Composition. By P.M3. Ro  T, M.D). New Edition. Crown Svo. 10&.6d.
LECTURES on the SCIENCE of LANGUAGE. By F. MAx MULLER,
MI.A. &c. Foreign Member of the French Institute. Sixth Edition. 2 vols.
crown 8vo. price 16-3.
MANUAL of ENGLISH LITERATURE, Historical and Critical. By
THOMAS ARN-OLD, MLA. Newv Edition. Crown 8vo. price 7s. 6d.
THREE CENTURIES of ENGLISH LITERATURE. By CHARLES
DuKE YONGE, RegiLns Professor of Modern History and English Literature
in Queen's College, Belfast. Crown 8vo. p~rice 7s. 6d.
SOUTHEY'S DOCTOR, complete in One Volume. Edited by the Rev.
J. W. WARTE.R, B.D. Square crown Svo. 12*. Od.




8      NEW WORKS'PvUiSHIRsu  iy LONGMANS AND CO.


HISTORICAL and CRITICAL COMMENTARY on the OLD TESTA.
MENT; with a New Translation. By M. M. KALISCH, Ph.D. VOL. 1.
Genesis, 8vo. 18s. or adapted for the General Reader, 12.s. VOL. IL Exodus,
15s9. or adapted for the General Reader, 12*. VOL. ITIL Leviticusv. PAnRT I.
1I-s. or adapted for the General Reader. 8s. VOL. IV. Leviticus, PART II.
15s. or adapted for the General Reader, 8*9.
A  DICTIONARY      of ROMAN    and   GREEK    ANTIQUITIES, with
about Two Thousand Engravings on Wood from Ancient Originals, illustrative of the Industrial Arts and Social Life of the Greeks and Romans.
By AN TILONY Ricir, B.A. Third Edition, revised and improved. Crown 8vo.
price 7s. 6ct.
A   LATIN-ENGLISH      DICTIONARY.      By JoHNq T. WHITE, D.D.
Oxon. and J. E. RIDDLE, M.A. Oxon. Third Edition, revised. 2 vols. 4to.
pp. 2,128, price 42s. cloth.
White's College Latin-English Dictionary (Intermediate Size),
abridged for the use of University Students 'from the Parent Work (NO
above). Medlium 8vo. pp.1.048, price 18s. clIoth.
White's Junior Student's Complete Latin-English and English-Latin
Dictionary. New Edition. Square l2mo. pp. 1,058, pricel12s.
The ENGLISH-LATIN DICTIONARY, price Is. lid.
1eaatl  Th~e LATIN-ENGLTS H DICTIONARY, price 7s. 6d.
An ENGLISH-GREEK LEXICON, containing all the Greek Words
used by Writers of good authority. By C. D. YoNGE, B.A. New Edition. Ito. 21s. -
Mr. YONGE'S NEW LEXICON, English andaGreek, abridged from
his larger work (as above). Revised Edition. %SquareI2mno. 88.6Gd.
A GREEK-ENGLISH LEXICON. Compiled by H. G. LIDDELL, TD.D
Dean of Christ Church, and R. ScoTT, D.D. Dean of Rochester. Sixth
Edition. Crown 4to. price 36s.
A Lexicon, Greek andaEnglish, abridged from' LIDDELL and SCOTT's
Greek-English Lexicon. Fourteenth Edition. Square 12mo. 7s. 6d.
A SANSKRIT-ENGLISH DICTIONARY, the Sanskrit words printed
both iritthe original Devanagari and in Roman Letters. Compiled by
T. BENr.Er, Prof. in the Univ. of Grbttingen. 8vo. 52s. 6d.
A PRACTICAL DICTIONARY of the FRENCH and ENGLISH1 LANGUAGES. ByLT. CONTANSEAU. Fourteenth Edition. Post 8vo. l0s. 6d.
Coatanseau's Pocket Dictionary, French and English, abridged from
the above by the Author. New Edition, revised. Square 18nmo. 3s. 6d.
NEW PRACTICAL DICTIONARY of the GERMAN LANGUAGE;
German-English and English-German. By the Rev. W. L. BLACKLEY. M.A.
and Dr. CARL MTARTiN FRIEDLXNVDER. Post Svo. 7s. 6d.
The MASTERY of LANGUAGES; or, she Art of Speaking Foreign
Tongues Idiomatically. 'By THoIMAs PRENDERGAST, late of the Civil
Service at Madras. Thiird Edition., 8,vo. Os.
Miscellaneous Works and Popular Metaphysics.
MISCELLANEOUS andaPOSTHUMOUS WORKS of the Late HENRY
THOM &S BUCKLE. Edited, with a Biograpbical Notice, by HELrEN.
TAYLORz. 3 vols. 8vo. price 52s. Oct.




NEW WORKS PUBLISHEND By LONGMANS AND Co.


MISCELLANEOUS WRITINGS of JOHN CONINGTON, M.A. late
Corpus Professor of Latin in the University of Oxford. Edited by J1. A.
SYMONDS, M.A. With a Memoir by H. J. S. SMITH, M.A. LL.D. F.R.S.?, vols. 8vo. price 28s.
SEASIDE MUSINGS ON SUNDAYS AND WEEK-DAYS. By
A. K. H. B. Crown Svo. price 3s. 6d.
Recreations of a Country Parson. By A. K. H. B. FIRST and
SECOND SERIES, crown Svo. 3s. 6d. each.
The Common-place Philosopher in Town and Country. ByA. KH. B.
Crown 8vo. price 3s. 6d.
Leisure Hours in Town; Essays Consolatory, JAsthetical, Moral,
Social, and Domestic. By A. K. It. B. Crown tvo. 3s9. 6d.
ThelAutumn Holidays of a Country Parson; Essays contributed to
Fraser'8 Magazine, &c. By A.K.H. B. Crown tvo. 3s. 6d.
The Graver Thoughts of a Country Parson. By A. K. H. B. FIRST
and SECOND SERIEs, crown 8vo. 3s. 6d. each.
Critical Essays of a Country Parson, selected from Essays contributed to.Praser's Magazine. By A. K. H. B. Crown 8vo. 38. 6d.
Sunday Afternoons at the Parish Church of a Scottish University
City. By A. K. H. B. Crown Svo. 38. 6d.
Lessons of Middle Age; with some Account of various Cities and
Men. By A. K. H. B. Crown Svo. 38. Gd.
Counsel and Comfort spoken from a city Pulpit. By A. K. H. B
Crown 8vo. price 3s. 6d.
Changed Aspects of Unchanged Truths; Memorials of St. Andrews
Sundays. By A. K. H.B. Crown Svo. 38. Gd.
Present-day Thoughts; Memorials of St. Andrews Sundays. By
A. K. H. B. Crown 8vo. 38. Gd.
SHORT STUDIES on GREAT SUBJECTS. By JAMES ANTHONY
FRotTDE, M.A., late Fellow ot Exeter Coll. Oxford. 2 vols. cr. Svo. price 128.
LORD MACAULAY'S MISCELLANEOUS WRITINGS:
LIBRARFY EDITION. 2 vols. Bv. Portrait, 218.
PEOPLE'S EDITION. 1 vol. crown 8vo. 4s. Gd.
LORD MACAULAY'S MISCELLANEOUS WRITINGS andaSPEECHIES.
STUDENuT'S E DITION, in crown, 8vo. price6s
The Rev. SYDNEY SMITH'S MISCELLANEOUS WORKS; including his Contributions to the Edinburgh Review. Crown Svo. 6s.
The Wit and Wisdom of the Rev. Sydney Smith; a Selection of
the most memorable Passages in his Writings and Conversation. 16m~o. 38. Gd.
The ECLIPSE of FAITH; or, a Visit to a Religious Sceptic. By
HENRY ROGERs. Twelfth Edition. Fcp. 8vo. price Os.
Defence of the Eclipse of Faith, by its Author; a rejoinder to Dr.
Newman's Reply. Third Edition. Fcp. 8vo. price 38. Gd.
CHIPS from a GERMAN WORKSHOP; being Essays on the Science
of Religion, and on Mythology, Traditions, and Customs. By F. M1AN
MtLLER. M.A. &c. Foreign Member of the Freuch Institute. 3 vole. Svo. ~2.




10     NEW WORKS PUBLISHED B3Y LONGMANS AcND CO.


ANALYSIS of the PHENOMENA of the HUMAN MIND. By
JAMES MILL. A New Edition, with Notes, Illustrative and Critical, by
ALEXANDER BAIN, ANDREw FINDLATER, aiid GEORGE GROTE. Edited,
with additional Notes, by JOHN STUART MILL. 2 vols. 8vo. price 28s.
An INTRODUCTION to MENTAL PHILOSOPHY, on the Inductive
Method. By J. D. MORELL, M.A. LL.D. 8vo. 1286.
ELEMENTS of PSYCHOLOGY, containing the Analysis of the
Intellectual Powers. By the same Author. Post Svo. 7s. 6d.
The SECRET of HEGEL: being the Hegelian System in Origin,
Principle, Form, and Matter. By3.J1.H.STIRLING, LL.D. 2 vols. 8vo. 288.9
SIR WILLIAM HAMILTON; being the Philosophy of Perception: an
Analysis. By J.11. STIRLING, LL.D. 8vo. 5s.
LECTURES on the PHILOSOPHY of LAW. Together with Whewell
and Hegel. and Hegel and Mr. W. R. Smith; a Vinidication in a PhysiceMathematical Regard. By J. H. STIRLING, LL.I). 8vo. 6s.
As REGARDS PROTOPLASM. By J. H. STIRLING, LL.D. Second
E dition, with Additions, in reference to Mr. Huxley's Second Issue and a
new Preface in reply to Mr. Huxley in 'Yeast.' 8vo. price 2s.
CAUSAILTY; or, the Philosophy of Law Investigated. By the Rev.
GEORGE JAXIEsoN, B.D. or Old Macbar. Second Edition, greatly enlarged.
Svo. price 12s.
The SENSES and the INTELLECT. By ALEXANDERt BAiN, M.D.
Professor of Logic in the University of Aberdeen. Third Edition. 8vo. 158.
MENTAL and MORAL SCIENCE: a Compendium of Psychology
and Ethics. By the same Author. Third Edition. Crown 8vo. 10s. 6id.
Or separately: PART I. Mental Science, price 6s. 6d.; PART II. Moral,Science, price 4s. 6d.
LOGIC, DEDUCTIVE and INDUCTIVE. By the same Author. In
Two PARTS, crown 8vo. 10s. 6d. Each Part may be had separately:PART I. Deduction, 4. PART II. Induction, Os. 6d.
TIME and SPACE; a Metaphysical Essay. By SIIADWORTH H1.
HODGSONr. (This work covers the whole ground of Speculative Philosophy.)
Svo. rone, 108.
The THEORY of PRACTICE; an ETHICAL ENQUIRY. By the same
Author. (This work, in conjunction with the foregoing, completes a system
of Philosophy.) 2 vols. 8vo. price 24s.
The PHILOSOPHY of NECESSITY; or, Natural Law as applicable to
Mental, Moral, and Social Science. By CHARLES BRAY. Second Edition.
8vo. iOs.
A Manual of Anthropology, or Science of Man, based on Modern
Research. By the same Author. Crown 8vo. price 6s.
On Force, its Mental and Moral Correlates. By the same Author.
Svo. 5s.
A TREATISE on HUMAN NATURE; being an Attempt to Introduce
the Experimental Method of Reasoning into Moral Subjects. By DAVID
RUmE. Edited, with Notes, &c. byT~. H. GREEN, Fellow, and T. H.
GRosE, late Scholar, of Balliol College', Oxford. 2 vols. 8vo. [In the pree8.
ESSAYS MORAL, POLITICAL, and LITERARY. By DAvID HumE:.
By the same Editors. 2 vols. 8vo.                  [In the prees.




NEW WORKS rUBLISHED By ILONGMANS AND Co.   i


ii


UEBERWEG' S SYSTEM of LOGIC and HISTORY of LOGICAL
DOCTRINES. Translated, with Notes and Appendices, by T. M. LiNDSAX,
M.A. F.R.S.E. Svo. price 16s.
A BUDGET of PARADOXES. By AuGUSTUS DR, MoRGAN, F.R.A.S.
and C.PP*S. Reprinted, with the Author's Additions, from the Athenceum.
8vo. price 15,s.
Astronomy, Meteorology, Popular Geography, &c.
OUTLINES of ASTRONOMY. By Sir J. F. W. HERSCHEL, Bart.
M.A. Eleventh Edition, with 9 Plates and numerous Diagrams. Square
crown 8vo. price 12s.1,
ESSAYS on ASTRONOMY: a Series of Papers on Planets and Meteors,
the Sun and sun-surrounding Space, Stars and Star Cloudlets; and a Dissertation on the approaching Transit of Venus: preceded hy a Sketch of the
Life and Work of Sir John Herschel. iBy RICHARD A. PR~OCToRz, B.A. Hon.
Sec. H.AS. With 10 Plates and 24 Woodlcuts. Svo. price L2s.
The SUN; RULER, LIGHT, FIRE, and LIFE of the PLANETARY
SYSTEM. BY RICHALRD A. PROCTOR, B.A. F.R.A.S. Second Edition
with 10 Plates (7 coloured) and 107 Figures on Wood. Crowni 8vo. 14s.
OTHER WORLDS THAN OURS; the Plurality of Worlds Studied
under the Light of Recent Scientific Researches. By the same Author.
Second Edition, with 14 Illustrations. Crown 8vo. L0s. 6d.
THE ORBS AROUND US; a Series of Familiar Essays on the Moon
and Planets, Meteors and Comets, the Sun and Coloured Pairs of Stars.
By tihe same Author. Crown 8vo. price 7s. Gd.
THE STAR DEPTHS; or, Other Suns than Ours; a_ Treatise on
Stars, Star-Systems, and Star-Cloudlets. By the same Author. Crown 8vo
with numerous Illustrations.                       [Nearly readyl.
SATURN and its BY STEM. By the same Author. S-vo. withl14 Plates, 14s.
SCHELLEN'S SPECTRUM ANALYSIS, in its application to Terrestrial Stihstances anid the Physical Conistitution of the Heavenly Bodies.
Transil ted by JANE and C. LASSELI; edited, with Notes, by W. HUGGINs,
LL.D. F.R.S. With i0" Plates (6 coloured) and 223 Woodcuts. Svo. price 28-s.
A NEW STAR ATLAS, for the Library, the School, and the Observatory,
in Twelve Circular Meaps (with Two Index Plates). intenided as a Companion to 'Webb's Col~,estial Objects for Commnon Telescopes.' With a
Letterpress Introduction on tile Study of the Stars, illustrated by 9 Diagrams. BY RICHAR:D A. PR~OCTOR, B.A. Hon. See. it.A.S. Crown 8vo. 5s&
CELESTIAL 0BJECTS for COMMON TELESCOPES. By~ the Peev.
T. W. WEBB, M.A. F..R.A.S. New Edition, revised. s; h a large Map of
the Moon, and several ~ Woodcuis. Crowvn Svo. price, 7s. 6d.
AIR and RAIN: the 13eginnings of a Chemrical Climatology,. By
ROBERT ANGUIS S-MITH, Ph.D. F.R.S. F.C.S. Government Inspector of
Alkali Works. With 8 Illustrations. 8vo. price 24s
NAUTICAL SURVEYING, an INTRODUCTION to the PRACTICAL
and THEORETICAL STUDY of. BY JOHN 1KNOX LAUGHTON, M.A.
F.R.A.S. Small 8vo. prico 6s..
MAGNETISM and DEVIATION of the COMPAS55. For tile Use of
Students in Navigation and Science Schools. By JonMv 31rlIRRIVIELD, LLtD.
F.R.A.S. 18mo. price Is. 6d.




12      NEW WORKS PUBLISHED By LONGMANS AND CO.


DOVE'S LAW of STORMS, considered in connexion with the Or~inary
Movements of the Atmosphere. Translated by B.H. SCOTT, M.A. T.C.D.
Svo. 10s. 6d.
A GENERAL DICTIONARY of GEOGRAPHY, Descriptive, Physical,
Statistical, and Historical: forming a comrn nete Gazetteer of the World. By
A. KEITn JOIHNSTON, 1LL.D. F.R.G.S. New Edition, thorouzhly revised.
[In the press.
A MANUAL of GEOGRAPHY, Physical, Industrial, and Political.
By W. HUrGHES, F.R.G.S. With 6 Maps. Fcp. 7s. 6d.
MAUNDER'S TREASURY of GEOGRAPHY, Physical, Historical,
Descriptive, and Political. Edited by W. HUGHFEs, F.R.G.S. Revised
Editioni,with7 Maps and 16Plates. Fcp.os. cloth, or10*.bhounidin calf.
The PUBLIC SCHOOLS ATLAS of MODERN GEOGRAPHY. In
31 M1apTs, exhibiting clearly the more important Physical Features of the
Countries delineated, and Noting all the Chief Places of ilistorical, Coinmnercial, or Social Interest. Edited, with an Introduction, by the Rev. G.
BUTLExa,.A. Imp. 4to. price Ss. 6d. sewed, or 5s.cloth.
Natural History and Popular Science.
TEXT-BOOKS of SCIENCE, MECHANICAL and PHYSICAL.
Edited by T. M. GOODEVE, M.A. and C. W. MERRIFIELDI, F.R.S.
1. GOOnDEVE's Mechanism, 3s. 6d.
2. B3LoxA.'S Metals, 3s. 6d.
S. MILLER'S Inorganic Chemistry, 3s. 6d.
4.. GRIFFIN'S Algebra and Trigonometry, 3q.s 6d.
Notes and Solutions to Algebra and Trigonometry, 3s. 6d.
5. WATSON'S Plane and Solid Geometry. 3s. 6d.
6. MAXWELL's Theory of Heat, 3s. 6d.
7. M~ EREIFIELD's Technical Arithmetic and Mensuration, 3s. Gd.
HUNTER'S KEY to MERRITIELD's Arithmetic and MeInsuration, 3s. 6d.
8. ANDE RSON'S Strength of Materials and Structures, 3s. Gd.
V. J NKIN'S Electricity and Magnetism, 3s. 6d.
ELEMENTARY TREATISE on PHYSICS, Experimental and Applied.
Translated and edited from GANOT'S Elimentq de Physique (with the
Author's sanction) by E. ATKINSON, Ph.D. F.C.S. New Edition, revised
and enlarged; with a Coloured Plate and 726 Woodcuts. Post 8vo. 158.
NATURAL PHILOSOPHY for GENERAL READERS and YOUNG
PERSONS; being a Course of Physics divested of Mathematical Formuim,
expressed in the language of daily life. Translated from GANOT'S Cours
de Physique, with the Author's sanction, by E. ATKINSON, Ph.D. F.C.S
Crown 8vo. wvith 404 Woodcuts, price 7s. Gd.
Mrs. MARCET'S CONVERSATIONS on NATURAL PHILOSOPHY.
Revised by tho Author's Son, and augmented by Conversations on Spectrum
Analysis and Solar Chemistry. With.36 Plates, Crown 8vo. price Us. Gd.
SOUND: a Course of Eight Lectures delivered at the Royal Institution
of Great Britain. By JOHIN TYNDA.LL, LL.D. F.R.S. New Edition, crown
8vo. with Portrait of 2S. (Jhladsi and 169 Woodcuts, price 98.
HEAT a MODE of MOTION. By Professor JOHN TYNDALL-, LL.D.
F.R.S. Fourth Edition. Crown 8vo. with Woodcuts. 108. 6d.




NEW WORKS PUBLISHlED By LONGMANS AND CO.


CONTRIBUTIONS to MOLECULAR PHYSICS in the DOMAIN of
RADIANT HEAT; a Series of Memoirs published in the Philosophical
Transactions and Philosophical Magazine. By JoiiN TYNDAlL., LL.D. F.R.S.
With 2 Plates and 31 Woodcuts. 8vo. price 16s.
RESEARCHES on DIAMAGNETISM and MAGNE-CRYSTALLIC
ACTION; including the Question of Diamagnetic Polarity. By the same
Author. With 6 Plates and many Woodcuts. 8vo. price 14a.
NOTES of a COURSE of SEVEN LECTURES on ELECTRICAL
PHENOMENA and THEORIES, delivered at the Royal Institution,
A.D. 1870. By JOIN TvDALL, LL.D. Crown Svo.1is. sewed, or ls.6d. cloth.
NOTES of a COURSE of NINE LECTURES on LIGHT delivered at the
Royal Institution, A.D. 1869. IW the same Author. Crown 8vo. price is.
sewed, or 1s. 6d. cloth.
FRAGMENTS of SCIENCE. By JoHN TYNDALL, LL.D. F.R.S. Third
Edition. 8vo. price 148.
LIGHT SCIENCE for LEISURE HOURS; a Series of Familiar
Essays on Scientific Subjlects, Natural Phe~nomenia, &c. By R.A. PRocToR,
B.A. F.R.A.S. Second Edition, revised. Crown Svo. price 7e. 6d.
LIGHT: Its Influence on Life and Health. By FoRBEs WINSLOW,
M.D. D.C.L. Oxon. (Hon.). Fcp. 8vo. 68.
The CORRELATION of PHYSICAL FORCES. By W. R. GRovE,
Q.C. V.P.R.S.. Fifth Edition, revised, and followed by a Discourse on Continuity. 8vo. 10s. 6d. The Discourse on Continuity, separately, 2s. 6d.
Professor OWEN'S LECTURES on the COMPARATIVE ANATOMY
and Physiolog~y of the Invertebrate Animals. Second Edition, with 235
Woodcuts. Svo. 218.
The COMPARATIVE ANATOMY and PHYSIOLOGY of the VERTEbrate Animals. By RICHARD Owzx, F.R.S. D.C.L. With 1,472 Woodcuts. 3 vols. 8vo. X31is. 6d.
The ANCIENT STONE IMPLEMENTS, WEAP&Ns, -and ORNAMENTS of GREAT BRITAIN. By JonN EVANs, F.R.S. F.S.A. With
2 Plates and.476 Woodcuts. 8vo, price 28s.
The ORIGIN of CIVILISATION and the PRIMITIVE CONDITION
of MAN; Mental and Social Condition of Savages. By Sir JohN LuiBB~ocX,
Bart. M.P. F.R.S. Second Edition, with 21 Woodcuts. 8vo. price 16:.
The PRIMITIVE INHABITANTS of SCANDINAVIA: containing a
Description of the Implements, Dwellings, Tombs, and Mode of Living of
the Savages in the North of Europe during the Stone Age. By 'SNuEV
NILSSON. With 16 Plates of Figures and 3 Woodcuts. 8vo. 18,s.
MANKIND, their ORIGIN and DESTINY. By an M.A. of Balliol
College, Oxford. Containing a New Translat~iol of the First Three Chapters
of Genesis; a Critical Examination of the First Twvo Gospels; an Exaplanation of the Apocalypse; and the Origin and Secret 1Mleani))g of the Mythological and Mystical Teaching of the Ancients. With 31 illustrations. Svo.
price 31s. 6d.
BIBLE ANIMALS; being ~t Description of every Living Creature
mentioned in the Scriptures, from the Ape to the Coral. By the Rev. J. G.
WOOD, M.A. F.L.S. With about 100 Vignettes on Wood. Svo. 218.
HOMES WITHOUT HANDS; a Description of the Habitations of
Animals, classed according to their Principle of Construction. By the Rev.
J. G. WOOD, M.A. F.L.S. With about 140 Vignettes on Wood. 8vo. 21*.,




14      NEW WORKS rUBLISHED By LONGMANS AND CO.


INSECTS AT HONE; a Popular Account of British Insects, their
Structure, Habits, and Transformations. By the Rev, J. G. WOOD, M1.A.
F.L.S. With upwards of 700 Illustrations engraved on Wood (I coloured
and 21 full size of page). 8vo. price 21s.
INSECTS ABROAD; being a Popular Account of Foreign Insects,
their Structure, Habits, and Transformations. By.1. G. WOOD, M.A. F.L.S.
Author of 'Homes without Hands,' &c. in One Vnlume, printed andi
illustrated uniformly with 'Insects at Home,' to which it will form. a Sequel
and Companion.                                        [in the press.
STRANGE DWELLINGS; a description of the Habitntions of
Animals, abridged from 'Homes without Hands.' By the Rev. J1. G. WOOD,
M.A.-F.L.S. Withiabout 60WoodcutlIllustrations. Crown 8vo. price 7s.6d.
A FAMILIAR HISTORY of BIRDS. By E. STANLEY, D.D. F. R.S.
late Lord Bishop of Norwich. Seventh Edition, with Woodcuts. Fcp.3SS. Od.
The HARMONIES of NATURE and UNITY of CREATION, By Dr.
GEORGE HARTWIG. 8vo. with numerous Illustrations, 18s.
The SEA and its LIVING WONDERS. By the same Author. Third
(English) Edition. 8vo. with many Illustrations, 218.
The SUBTERRANEAN WORLD. By Dr. GEORGE HARTWIG. With
3 Me   and about 80 Woodcuts, including 8 full size of page. 8vo. price 21s.
The TROPICAL WORLD; a Popular Scientific Account of the Natural
History of the Equatorial Regions. By Dr. GEORGE HARTWIG. New
Editioi, with about 200Illustrations. 8vsoprice lfs.6d.
The POLAR WORLD' a Popular Description of Man and Nature in the
Arctic and Antarctic Regions of the Globe. By Dr. GEORGE HARTWIG.
With 8 Chromoxylographs, 3 Maps, and 83 Woodcuts. 8vo. 21s.
]KIRBY and SPENCE'S INTRODUCTION to ENTOMOLOGY, or
Elements or the Natural History of Insects. 7th Edition. Crown Svo. 5s.
MAUNDER'S TREASURY of NATURAL HISTORY, or Popular
Dictionary of Zoology. Revised and corrected by T. S. COBIBOLD, M.D.
Fcp. with 900 Woodeuts, OIs. cloth, or l0s. bound in calf.
The TREASURY of BOTANY, or Popular Dictionary of the Vegetable
Ki-ngdom; incluiding aGlossary of BotanicalTerms. Edited byJ.LnixDaxY,
F.R.S. and T. MOORE, F.L.S. assisted by eminent Contributors, With 274
Woodcuts and 20 Steel Plates. Two Parts, fcp. 12s. cloth, or 20s. calf.
HANDBOOK of HARDY TREES, SHRUBS, and HERBACEOUS
PLANTS. containing Descriptions4, Native Countries, &c. of a Selection of
the Rest Species in Cultivation; together with Cultural Details, Comparative Hardiness, S~uita-bility for Particular Positions, &c. By W.B. HEMSLEY,
formerly Assistant at the Herbarium of the Royal Gardens, Kew. Based on
DEcxizsF, and NAuDIs.'S M1an e de l'Amateuer des Jardins, and including
the 264 Original Woodcuts. Medium Svo. 21s..
A  GENERAL      SYSTEM     of  DESCRIPTIVE       and   ANALYTICAL
BOTANY. T. Organography. Ana tomy, and Physiology of Plants. 11. Tconography, or the Description and History of Natural Families. Translated
from the French of E. LE MAOUT, M.D. and J. DECAISNE, Member of the
Institute, by Mrs..HOOKER. Edited, and arranged accordingLo the Botanical
System adopted in the Universties and Schools of Great Britain, by J. D.
HOOKER, M.D. &c. Director of the Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew. With
5,500 Woodcuts from Designs by N. Stenheil and A. Riocreux. Medium
8v0. price 52s..




INEW WORKS PUBLISHED B~Y LONGMAKS AND CO.    1


is


An EXPOSITION of FALLACIES in the HYPOTHESIS of Mr.
DARWIN. By C. R. BREF, M.D. F.Z.S. Author of 'Birds of Europe not
observed in the British Isles' &c. With36W~oodcuts. Crown Svo. pricel14.
The ELEMENTS of BOTANY for FAMILIES and SCHOOLS.
Tenth Edition, revised by THoMAs Moonx, F.L.S. Fop, with 154 Woodcuts, 2s. 6d.
The ROSE AMATEUR'S GUIDE. By TnoasAs Rmitiiu Twelfth
Edition. Fop. 4s.
LOUDON'S ENCYCLOP2EDIA of PLANTS; comprising the Specific
Character, Description, Culture, History, &c. of all the Plants found in
Great Britain. With upwards of 12,000 Woodcuts. 8vo. 42$s.
NAUNDER"S SCIENTIFIC and LITERARY TREASURY. New
Edition, thoroughly'revised and in great p art re-written, with above i,000
new Atrticles, by 4J. Y. JoHrisow, Corr. M.Z.S. Fop. 6$. cloth, or los. calf.
A DICTIONARY of SCIENCE, LITERATURE, and ART. Fourth
Edition, re-edited by W. T. BRANDE (the original Author), and GEoRGE W.
Cox, M.A. assisted by contributors of eminent Scientific and Literary
Acquirements. 3 vols. medium Svo. price 63.. cloth.
Chemistry, Medicine, Surgery, and the
Allied Sciences.
A DICTIONARY of CHEMISTRY and the Allied Branches of other
ISciences. BY HENRYt WATTS, F.R.S. assisted by eminent Contributors
Complete in 5 vols. medium 8vo. ~7 3s.
Supplement; bringing the Record of Chemical Discorery dlown to
the end of the year 1869; including also several Additions to, and Corrections
of, former results which have appeared in 1870 and 1871. By HENWRY WATTS,
B.A. F.R.S. F.C.S. Assisted by eminent Scientific and Practical Chemists,
Contributors to the Original Work. 8vo. price 31s. Gd.
ELEMENTS of CHEMISTRY, Theoretical and Practical. By W. ALLEN
MILLER, M.D. late Prof. of Chemistry, Kindrs Coll. London. New
Edition. 3 vols. 8vo. ~3. PART I. CHEMICAL k'HYSICS, 15a. PART II.
INORiGAISIC CHEMISTRY, 21$9. PART IIL. ORGANIC CHEMISTRY, 24.
A Course of Practical Chemistry, for the use of Medical Students.
By W. ODLiNrG, F.R.S. New Edition, with 70 Wood' uts. Crown Bvo. 7U. 6d.
A MANUAL of CHEMICAL PHYSIOLOGY, including its Points of
Contact with Pathology. By J. L. W. TuiVDiCIium, M1.D. With Woodcuts.
Svo. price 7s. 6d.
SELECT METHODS in CHEMICAL ANALYSIS, chiefly INOR.
G&NIC. By WILLIAM CRooHKEs, F.R.S. With 22 Woodcuts. Crown Svo.
price 12s. 6d.
CHEMICAL NOTES for the LECTURE ROOM. By THOMAS WOOD,
F.C.19. 2 vols. crown Bvo. I. on Heat &c. price 5s. II. on the Metals, 6$.
The HANDBOOK for MIDWIVES. By HENRY FLY Sxr'nr, B.A.
M.B. Oxon. M.R.C.S. late Assistant-snrgeon at the Hospital for Women,
Soho-squsare. With 41 Woodcuts. Crown 8vo. 5s.
The DIAGNOSIS, PATHOLOGY, and TREATMENT of DISEASES
of Women iincluding the Diagnosis of Pregnan cy. BY GRAILT HEWITT,
M.D. Third Edition, partly re-written; with several additional Ilius.
trations. Svo. price 24s.




IS   NEW WORKS PUBLISHED i3 LONGMANS AND CO
On SOME DISORDERS of the NERVOUS SYSTEM in CHILDHOOD; being thbe Tiumlpian Lectures delivered before the Royal College of
Physicians iin March 187t. BY CHARLECS WEST, N.D. Crown 8vo. price 5s.
LECTURES on the DISEASES of INFANCY and CHILDHOOD. By
CHKARLES WEST, M.D. &c. Fifth Edition, revised and enlarged. 8vo. 16s.
The SCIENCE and ART of SURGERY; being a Treatise on Surgical
Injuries, Diseases and Operations. By JOHN 'ERIC ERicHSfqEN, Senior
Sureon to University College Hospital, and Hol me Professor of Clinical
Surg,ery in University College, London A new Edition, being the Si-xth,
revised and enlarged; with 712 Woodeuts. 2 vols. Svo. price 32s.
A SYSTEM    of SURGERY, Theoretical and Practical. In Treatises
by Various Authors. Edited by T. HOLMES, M.A. &c. Surgeon and Lecturer
on Surgery at St. George's Hospital. Second Edition, thoroughly revised,
with numerous Illustrations. 5 vols. Svo. ~5 5*.
The SURGICAL TREATMENT of CHILDREN'S DISEASES. By
T. HOLMES, M.A. &c. late Surgeon to the Hospital for Sick Children.
Second Edition, with 9 Plates and 112 Woodeuts. 8vo. 21*.
LECTURES on the PRINCIPLES and PRACTICE of PHYSIC. Byv
Sir THrOMAS WATSON, Dart. M.D. Fifth Edition, thoroughly revised.
2 vols. 8vo. price 36s.
LECTURES on SURGICAL PATHOLOGY. By. Sir JAMSrs PAGET,
Dart. F.1R.S. Third Edition, revised and re-edited by the Author and
Professor W. TuRNER, M.B. 8vo. with 131 Woodcuts, 21*.
COOPER'S DICTIONARY of PRACTICAL SURGERY arid Encyclopedia of Surgical Science. New Edition, bronght down to the present time.
By. A. LANE, Surgeon to St. Mary's Hospital, assisted by various Eminent
Surgeons. 2 vols. Svo. price 21*. each.
On CHRONIC BRONCHITIS, especially as connected with GOUT,
EMPHYSEMA, and DISEASES of the HEARlT. Dy E. HEADLAM
GREENEow, M.D. F.R.C.P. &c. 8vo. 7*. 64.
The CLIMATE of the SOUTH of FRANCE as SUITED to INVALIDS;
with Notices of Medfiterranean and other Winter Stations. Dy C. T.
WILLIAMS, M.A. M.D. Oxon. Second Edition. Crown 8vo. 6s.
PULMONARY CONSUMPTION; its Nature, Varieties, and Treatment: with an Analysis of One Thousand Cases to exemplify its Duration,
Dy C. J. B. WILLIAMS, M.D. F.R.S. and C. T. WILLIAMS, M.A. M.D. Oxon.
Post 8vo. price 10s. 6W.
CLINICAL LECTURES on DISEASES of the LIVER, JAUNDICE,
and ABDOMINAL DROPSY. Dy CHARLES MURCHISON, M.D. Post 8vo.
with 25 Woodcuts, 10*. 6d.
A TRE&TISE on the CONTINUED FEVERS of GREAT BRITAIN.
Dy CHARLES MURCHISON, M.D. New Edition, revised.   [Nearly readyi.
QUAIN'S ELEMENTS of ANATOMY. Seventh Edition [18671,
edited by W. STIARTPEY. M.D. F.R.S. ALLEN. TnlonirsoN, M.D. F.R1.S. and
J. CLELAND. M.D. With upwards of 800 Eugravings on Wood. 2 vols. 8vo.
price 3lls, 64.
ANATOMY, DESCRIPTIVE and SURGICAL. By HENRY GRAY,
F.R1.5. With about 400 Woodcuts from Dissections. Sixth Edition, by
T. HoLmES, M.A. Cantab. with a new Introduction. Royal 8vo. 28*.
OUTLINES of PHYSIOLOGY, Human and Comparative. By JOHN
MARSHALL, F.R.C.S. Surgeon to the University College Hospital. 2 vols.
crown 8vo. with 122 Woodcuts. 32s.




NEW WORKS PUBLISHED By LONGMANS A"D CO.


PHYSIOLOGICAL ANATOMY and PHYSIOLOGY of MAN. By, the
late R. B. TODD, M.D. F.R.S. and W. BowmAX, F.R.S. of King's College.
With numuerous Illustrations. VOL. II. 8vo. 258.
VOL. 1. New Edition by Dr. LIONEL S. BEsALE. F.R.S. In course of publication, with many Illustrations. PARTS L. and IL price U*. 6d. each.
COPLAND'S DICTIONARY of PRACTICAL MEDICINE, abridged
from the larger work and throughout brought down to the present State
of Medical Science. Svo. 36s.
On the MANUFACTURE of BEET-ROOT SUGAR in ENGLAND
and IRELAND. By WILLIAM Cnoonxs, F.R.S. Crown 8vo. with 11
Woodcuts, 8s. 6d.
DR. PEREIRA'S ELEMENTS of MATERIA MEDICA and THERAPEIJTICS, abridged and adapted for the use of Medical andiPharmaceutical
Practitioners and Students; and comprising all the Medicines of the
British Pharmacopoeia, with such others as are frequently ordered in Prescriptions or required by the Physician. Edited by Profes4sor BENTLEY,
F.L.S. &c. and by Dr. REDWOOD, F.C.S. &c. With 125 Woodcut Illustrations. 8vo. price '25s.
The ESSENTIALS of MATERIA MEDICA and THERAPEUTICS.
By ALFRED BARINGt GARROD, M.D. F.R.S. &c. Physcian to King's College
Hospital. Third Edition. Sixth Impression, brought up to 1S70. Crown
8vo. price 12*. Gd.
The Fine Arts, and Illustrated Editions.
GROTESQUE ANIMALS, invented, described, and portrayed by E. W.
CooKE, R.A. F.R.S. F.G.S. F.ZS8. &c. in Twenty-four Plates, with Elucidatory
Comments. Royal 4to. 21s.
IN FAIRYLAND; Pictures from the Elf-World. By RICHARD
DOYLE. With a Poem by WV. ALLINGREAM. With Sixteen Plates, containing
Thirty-six Designs printed in Colours. Folio. 318. Gd.
HALF-HOUR LECTURES on the HISTORY andaPRACTICE of the
Fine and Ornamental Arts. By WILLIAM B. SCOTT. New Edition, revised
by the Author; with 50 Woodcuts. Crown Svo. 8s. 6d.
ALBERT DURER, HIS LIFE and WORKS; including Autobiographical Papers and Complete Catalogues. By WILLIAM B. SCOTT.
With Six Etchings by the Author, and other Illustrations. Bvo. 16s.
The CHORALE BOOK for ENGLAND: the Hymins translated by
Miss C. WINKWORTHa; the Tunes arranged by Prof. W. S. B3ENNETT and
OTTO GOLDSCH-MIDT. Pep. 4to. 128. Gd.
The NEW TESTAMENT, illustrated with Wood Engravings after the
Early Masters, chiefly of the Italian School. Crown 4to. 63s. cloth, gilt top;
or 0.5. 5s. elegantly bound in morocco.
LYRA GERMANICA; the Christian Year. Translated by CATHERINE
WINIIWORTITI; with 125 Illustrations on Wood drawn by J. LEIGHTON,
F.S.A. 4to. 21*.
LYRA GERMANICA; the Christian Life. Translated by, CATHERINE
WINKWORTII; with about 200 Woodcut Illustrations by J. LEIGHTON, F.rS.A.
and other Artists. 4to. 21s.




18      NEW WORKS PAT25LI5111D By LONGMAN$ A&w CO.,


The LIFE of X[AN SYMBOLIZED by the MONTHS of the YEAR.
Text selected by RI. PIGOT; Illustrations on Wood from Original D4esigns by
J. LzIsuTorr, ]?.S.A. 4to. 42g.
CATS' and FARLIE'S MORA.L EMBLEMS; with Aphorisms, Adages,
and Proverbs of all Nations. 1 n1 Illustrations on Wood by 3. LExGHTozi5
F.S.A. Text selected b.y R. PlflT. Imperial Svo.31s. 6d.
SACRED and LEGENDARY ART. By Mrs. J.&xsovsr.
Legends of the Saints and        Martyrs.    New    Edition, with   19
Etchings and 187 Woodeuts. 2 vols. square crown Svo. 31s. 6d.
Legends of the Mlonastic Orders.      New   Edition, with I11 Etchings
and 88 Woodcuts. I vol. square crown 8vo. 21s.
Legends of the     Madonna. 'New     Edition, with 27 Etchings and
165 Woodcuts. 1 vol. square crown 8vo. 21s6.
The History of Our Lord, with that of his Types and Precursors.
Completed by Lady EASTLAKCE. Revised Edition, with 31 Etchings and
281 Woodcuts. 2 vols. square crown Svo. 42-..
Pie Use1 ul Arts, Manufactures, &c.
HISTORY of the GOTHIC REVIVAL; an Attempt to shew how far
the taste fnr Mediawaol Architecture was retained in England eluring the
last two centuries, and hads been re-developed ini the present. ByC. L. EASTLAKE, Architect. With 48 Illustrations (36 full size of page). imperial 8vo.
price 31s. 6d.4 -GWILT'S ENCYCLOPEDIA of ARCHITECTURE, with above 1,600
Rngravings on Wood. Fifth Bc tion, revised and enlarged by WYATT
PAPWORTIL. 8vo. 52s. Od.
A  MANUAL      of ARCHITECTURE: being a Concise History and
Explanation of the principal Styles of Europcan Architecture, Ancient,
Mcdi wal, and Renaissance; with a Glossary of Technical Terms. By
TnoXAs MITewEaL. Crown 8vo. -with 150 Woodcuts, 10s. Od.
HINTS on HOUSEHOLD TASTE in FURNITURE, UPHOLSTERY,
and other Details. By CrrARL-Es L. EASTLAXrE. Architect. New Edition
with about 90 Illustratio s. Square crown 8vo. 1.4s.
PRINCIPLES of MECHANISM, designed for the. Use of Students in
the Uaniversities, and for Engineering Students generally. By R
WILLIS, ALA. F.R.S. &c. JTacksoniani Professor in tbe University of Cam.
bridg e. Second Edition, enlarged; with 374 Woodeuts. Svo. 8sa.
GEOMETRIC TURNING; comprising a Description of the new Geo
mnetric Chuck cons tructed by M~r. Plant of Birming-ham, with directions for
its -uc, and asenies of Patterns cut by it, wvith Explanations of the mode of
liroducing, thes n, nil n" accolunt Of a Now Process of Deep Cuttinig and
of Gravin i oni Copper. liy H. S. SAVORY. With -numerous Woodcuts.
8vo. 21s.
LATHES aind TURtNING, Simpie, X!echanical, and ORNAMENTAL.'
By W. HiENRY NORT11COVT. With about 240 Illustrations on Steel and
Wood. 8vo. 18-9.
PERSPECTIVE; or, the Art of Drawingr what one Sees. Explained
an1d, alapted to thbe use of those 'Sketchin- from Nature. By Lieut. W. H.
COL1,INs, R.E. FXtAS. With 307 WVoo-J~nts. Crown Svo. pric. 5s.




NEW WORKS PUBULSHED By LONGNANS AND (10. 


19


URE'S DICTIONARY of ARTS, XANUFACTUIRES, and MINES.
Sixth Edition, chiefly rewritten and greatly enlarged by ROBDERT HUNT,
F.R.S. assisted by numerous Contributors eminent in Science aud the
Arts, and familiar -with Manufactures. With above 2.000 Woodeists. S vols.
medium 8vo. price ~4. 14s. (Id.
HANDBOOK of PRACTICAL TELEGRAPHY. By R. & CULLEY,
Memb. Inst. C.E. Engineer-in-Chief of Telegraphs to the Post Office.
Fifth Edition, with 118 Woodcuts and 9 Plates. 8vc. price 14s.
EJOYCLOPEDIA of CIVIL ENGINEERING, Historical, Theoretical,
and Practical. By E. CREsy, C.E. With above 3,000 Woodcuts. 8vo. 42s.
The STRAINS in TRUSSES Computed by means of Diagrams; with
20) Exam ples drawn to Scale. By F. A. RA.NKEN, M.A. C.E. Lecturer at
the Hartley Institution, Southampton. With 35 Diagrams. Square crown
Svo. price6*. 6Id.
TREATISE on MILLS and MILLWORK. By Sir W. FAXEBAIRN,
Bart. F.R.S. New Edition, with 18 Plates and 322 Woodcuats. 2 vols.
8vo. 32*9.
USEFUL INFORMATION for ENGINEERS. By the same Author.
FIRST, SjccoND, and TuIRD SEizES, with many Plates aud Woodcuts,
8 vols. crown Svo. 10*. (Id. each.
The APPLICATION of CAST and WROUGHT IRON to Building
Purposes. By Sir W. FAIRBAXmN, Bart. F.R.S. Fourth Edition, enlarged;
with 6 Plates and 115 Woodcuts. 8vo. price 16s.
A TREATISE on the STEAM ENGINE, in its various Applications
to Mines, Mills, Steam Navigation, Railways and Agriculture. By' JBoua~ies,
C.E. Eighth Edition; with Portrait, 87 Plates, and 5466 Woodcuts. 4to. 42s.
CATECHISM of the STEAM ENGINE, in its various Applications to
Mines, Mills, Steam Navigation, Railways, and Agriculture. By the same
Author. With 89 Woodcuts. Fep. 6s.
HANDBOOK of the STEAM ENGINE. By the same Author, forming a
KEY to the Catechism of the Steam Engine, with 67 Woodcuts. Fcp. 9*. 
BOURNE'S RECENT IMPROVEMENTS in the STEAM ENGINE in its
various applications to Mines, Mills, Steam Navigation, Railways, and Agriculture. Being a Supplement to the Author's 'Catechism of the Steam
Engine.' By JOHN BOURNE, G.E. New Edition, includling many New
Examples; with 124 Woodcuts. Fep. 8vo. 6*.
PRACTICAL TREATISE on METALLURGY, adapted from the last
German Edition of Professor KER~s Metallurgy by W. CRooxEs, F.R.S. &-c.
and E. RORRIG, Ph.D. Xi B With 625 Woodcuts. 3 vols. Svo. price ~4. 19*.
MITCHELL'S MANUAL of PRACTICAL ASSAYING. A Now Edition, bOing the Fourth, thorouglhly revised, wviih recent Discoveries incorporated, by W. Caoonxs. F. 1R.S. With numerous Woodcuts.
[Nearly ready.
LOUDON'S ENCYCLOPIEDIA of AGRICULTURE: comprising the
Laying-out, Improvement, and Msanagement of Landed Propert~y, and the
Cultivation and Economy of the Productious of Agriculture. With 1,100
Woodcuts. Svo. 21*.
Loudon's Encyclopeedia, of Gardening: comprising, the Theory and
Practice of Horticulture, Floriculture, Arboriculture, and Landscape Gardening. With 1,000 Woodcuts. Svo. 21s.
BAYLDOX'S ART of VALUING RENTS and TILLAGES, and Claims
of Tenants upon Quitting Farms, both at Michaelmas and Lady-Day.
Eighth Edition, revised by J1. C. MORTON. 8vo. 10*. 6d,




20     NNW WORKS PUBLISHED By LONGMANS A,)rD CO.


Religious and Moral Works.
EIGHT ESSAYS on ECCLESIASTICAL REFORM, by Various Writers;
teter with a Preface and Analysis of the Essays. Rdited by the Rev.
ORBeY S1HJYLEY. M.A. Crown 8vo. 10s. 6d.
The SPEAKER'S BIBLE COMMENT &RY, by Bishops and other
Cegof the Anglican Church, critically examined by the Right Rev.
JW.COLENSso, D.D. Bishop Of Natal. 8VO. PART L. Genesis, 3s. 6d.
PART IIL Bxodus, 4s. 6d. PART III. Leviticus, 29. 6d. PAnT IV. Numbers,
$*. 6d. PART V. Deuteronomy, price 5s.
The OUTLINES of the CHRISTIAN MINISTRY DELINEATED, and
brought to the Test of Reason, Holy Scripture, History, and Experience,
with a view to the Reconciliation of Existing Differences concerning it,
especially between Presbyterians and Episcopalians. By C. WORDSWORTH,
D.C.L. Bishop of St. Andrews. Crown 8vo. price 7s. 6d.
CHRISTIAN COUNSELS, Selected from the Devotional Works of
F6nelon, Archbishop of Cambrai. Translated by A. M. JAMES. Crown Fsvo.
price 5s.
CHRIST the CONSOLER; a Book of Comfort for thle Sick. With a
Preface by the Right Rev, the Lord Bishop of Carlisle. Small 8vo. price Os.
AUTHORITY and CONSCIENCE; a Frqe Debate on the Tendency of
Dogmatic Theology and on the Characteristics of Faith. Edited by CON'WAY
MOREL. Post 8vo. price 7s. 6dl.
REASONS of FAITH; or, the ORDER~ of the Christian Argument
Developed and Explained. By thelRev. G.S. DRaEWM.A. Second Edition,
revised and enlarged. Fep. 8vo. price 6s.
The TRUE DOCTRINE of the EUCHARIST. By THOMAS S. L. VOGAN,
D.D. Canon and Prebesndary of Chichester and Rural Dean. 8vo. price 18*.
CHRISTIAN SACERDOTALISM, viewed from a Layman's standpoint
or tried by Holy Scripture and the Early Fathers; with a short Sketch of
the State of the Church from the end of the Third to the Reformation in
the beginning of the Sixteenth Century. By JOHN JARDINE, M.A. LL.D.
Svo. price 8s. 6d.
SYNONYMS of the OLD TESTAMENT, their BEARING on CHRISTIAN FAITH and PRACTICE. By the Rev. ROBERT BAKER GIRDLESTONE, Mt.A. 8vo. price 15s.
An INTRODUCTION to the THEOLOGY of the CHURCH of
ENGLAND, in an Exposition of the Thirty-nine Articles. By the Rev.
T. P. BOULTBEE, LL.D. Fcp. 8vo. price Os.
FUNDAMENTALS; or, Bases of Belief concerning MAN and GOD:
a Handbook of Mental, Moral, and Religious Philosophy. By the Rev.
T. GRIFFITH. M.A. 8vo. price 10s. 6d.
PRAYERS for the FAMILY and for PRIVATE USE, selected
from the COLLECTION of the late BARON BUNSEN, and Translated by
CATHERINE WINKWORTH. Fcp. 8vo. price 3s. 6d.
The STUDENT'S COMPENDIUM of the BOOK of COMMON
PRAYER    being Notes Historical and Explanatory of the Liturgy of the
Church of 1hngland. By the Rev. HI. ALLDEN NASH. Pep. Bvo. price 2s. 6d.
CHURCHES and their CREEDS. By the Rev. Sir PMILIP PEnnING,
Bart. late Scholar of Trin. Coll. Cambridge, and 1kx~xversity Medallist.
Crown 8vo. price 10s. 6d.




.NEW WORKS PUBLISHED BY LONGMANS AND CO.    2


21


An EXPOSITION of the 39 ARTICLES, Historical and Doctrinal.
By E. H~AnoLD BRowNE, D.D. Lord Bishop of Ely. Ninth Edit. 8vo. J&1.
The LIFEI and EPISTLES of ST. PAUL. By the Rev. W. J.
CON"YI3ARB, M.A., and the Very Rev. J. S. Howsox, D.D. Dean of Chester: —
LiBEASIT EDITION, with all the Original Illustrations, Maps, Landscapes
on Steel, Woodcuts, &c. 2 vols. 4to. 48s.
INTERMEIDIATE EDITION, with a Selection of Maps, Plates, and Woodouts.
2 vols. square crown 8vo. 21s.
STUDENT'S EDITION, revised and condensed, with 46 Illustrations and
Maps. 1 vol. crown 8vo. price 98.
The VOYAGE and SHIPWRECK of ST. PAUL; with Dissertations
on the Life and Writin s of St. Luke and the Ships and Navigation of the
Ancients. By JAMES NMITH, F.R.S. Third Edition. Crown 8vo. 10s. 6d.
COMMENTARY on the EPISTLE to the ROXANS. By the Rev.
W. A. O'CoNwon, B.A. Rector of St. Simon and Si. Jude, Manchester. Crown
8vo. price 3s. 6d.
The EPISTLE to the HEBREWS; 'with Analytical Introduction and
Notes. By the Rev. WV. A. O'CONNolL, B.A. Crown 8vo. price 48. 6d.
A CRITICAL and GRAMMATICAL COMMENTARY on ST. PAUL'S
Epistles. By C. J. ELLICOTT, D.D. Lord Bishop of Gloucester & Bristol. 8vo.
Galatians, Fourth Edition, 8s. 6d.
Ephesians, Fourth Edition, Ss. 6d.
Pastoral Epistles, Fourth Edition', 10s. 6d.
Philippians, Colossians, and Philemon, Third Edition, 10*. 6d.
Thessalonians, Third Edition, 7s. 6d.
HISTORICAL LECTURES on the LIFE of OUR LORD JESUS
CHRIST: being the I3ulsean Lectures for 1859. By C. J. ELLICOTT, D.D.
Lord Bishop of Gloucester and Bristol. Fifth Edition. 8vo. price 128.
EVIDENCE of the TRUTH of the CHRISTIAN RELIGION derived
from the Literal Fulfilment of Prophecy. By ALEXA.NDEit KRITH, D.D.
37th Edition, with numerous Plates, in square 8vo. 12s. 6d.; also the 39th
Edition, in post 8vo. with 5 Plates, 6*.
History and Destiny of the World and Church, according to
Scripture. By the same Author. Square Svo. with 40 Illustrations, 108.
An INTRODUCTION to the STUDY of the NEW TESTAMENT,
Critical, Exegetical, and Theological. By the Rev. S. DAVIDSON, D.D.
LL.D. 2 vols. 8vo. 30*9.
EWALD'S HISTORY of ISRAEL to the DEATH of MOSES. Trans-.
lated from the Geruian. Edited, with a Preface and an Appendix, hy RuSSELL
MARTINEAU, M.A. Second Edition. 2 vols. 8vo. 248. VOLS. Ill. and IV.
edited by J. E. CA.RPIENTER, M.A. 1)rice 218.
The HISTORY and LITERATURE of the ISRAELITES, accordin
to the Old Testament and thep Apocrypha. By C. DB ROTHSCHILDan
A. DER ROTHSCHILD. Second Edition, revised. 2 vols, post svo. with Two
Maps, price12s. 6d. Abridged Editiont, in 1vol. fep.8Svo. price 3*.6d.
The TREASURY of BIBLE KNOWLEDGE; being a Dictionary of the
Books, Persons, Places. Events, and other matters of which mention is made
in Holy Scripture. By Rev. J. AmRie, M.A. With Maps, 16 Plates, and
numerous Woodcuts. Fcp. 8vo. price 68. cloth, or 10s. neatly bound in calf.




SI      NEW WORKS PtMLISHED vy LONGMANS A1qW CO.


The GREEK TESTAMENT; with Notes, Grammatical and ExegetioahL
]BY the Rev. W. WEBSTRE, N.A. and the Rev. W..P. WILKIxsoN, M.A.
2 vols. 8vo. ~2 4e.
EVERY-DAY SCRIPTURE DIFFICULTIES explained and illustrated.
B~YJ. B. PRESCOTT, M.A. VOL. I. Matthew and Mark; VOL. IL Lukek and
Jokn. 2 vols. Svo. 9s. each.
The PENTATEUCH and BOOK of JOSHUA CRITICALLY EXAMINED.
By the Right Rev. J. W. COLENfso, D.D. Lord Bishop of Natal. People' s
Edition, in 1 vol. crown Svo. Os.
PARa: VI. the Later Legislation of the Pentateuch. Svo. price 24*.
The FORMATION of CHRISTENDOM. By T. W. ALLIES. PinTS I.
and II. Mv. price 12e. each Part.
ENGLAND and CHRISTENDOM. By Ancunsisos. MANNING D.D.,
Post 8vo. price 10*. 6d.
A VIEW of the SCRIPTURE REVELATIONS CONCERNINGa
'FUTURE STATE. By RIOCHARD WHATELY, D.D. late Archbishop of
Dublin. Ninth Edition. Fcp. 8vo. 5*.
THOUGHTS for the AGE. By ELIZARETHI M. SEWELL, Author of
IAmy Herbert'I &o. New Edition, revised. Fcp. 8vo. price 5*.
Passing Thoughts on Religion. By the same Author. Fcp. 8vo. 3s. 6d.
Self-Examination before Confirmation. By the same Author. 32mo.
price Is. 6d.
Readings for a Month Preparatory to Confirmation, from Writers
of the Early and English Church. By the same Author. Fop. 4U.
Readings for Every Day in Lent, compiled from the Writings of
Bishop JnuEarv TAYLoR&. By the same Author. Fop. 5s.
Preparation for the Holy Communion; the Devotions chiefly from
the works of Jmiazry TAYrLOR. By the same Author., 32mo. 3*9.
THOUGHTS for the HOLY WEEK for Young Persons. By the Author
of ' Amy Herbert.' New Edition. Fop. 8vo. 2*.
PRINCIPLES of EDUCATION Drawn from Nature and Revelation,'
and applied to Female Education In the Upper Classes. By the Author
of 'Amy Herbert.' 2 VOls. fop. 129. 6d.
LYRA GERMANICA, translated from the German by Miss C. WiNKWORTH. FIRST Sxsurs, Hymns for the Sundays and Chief Festivals.
S-AcOwD SERIEs, the Christian Life. Fop. 3*. 6d. each SERtiEs.
SPIRITUAL SONGS for the SUNDAYS and HOLIDAYS throughout the YeaXs By 3.5S. B. MONsELL, LL!). Vicar of Egham and Rural Dean.
Fourth Edition, Sixth Thousanid. Fop. 4*. 6d.
TRADITIONS and CUSTOMS of CATHEDRALS. By MACKENZIE
E. C.-WALCOTT, B.D. F.S.A. Prlvoentor anod Prehendary of Chichester,
Second Edition, revised and enlarged. Crown Svo. price 6s.
ENDEAVOURS after the CHRISTIAN LIFE: Discourses. By
JAMES MARTINIiAIT. Fourth Edition, carefully revised. Post Svo. 7s. 6d.
WHATELY'S INTRODUCTORY LESSONS on the CHRISTIAN
Evidences. i8mo. 6d.
FOUR DISCOURSES of CHRYSOSTOM, chiefly on the Parable of the
Rich Man and Lazarus. Translated hy F. ALLEN, B.A. Crown 8vo. 3s. 6d. 




NEW WORKS PUBLISHED xvy LONGMANS Axb CO.


BISHOP JEREMY TAYLOR'S ENTIRE WORKS. With Life by
Risxaor HiRBsxx. Revised and corrected by the Rev. C. P. EDEN., 10 vo IS,
price ~5. 5s.
Travels, Voyages, &C.
RAMBLES, by PATRICITUTS WALKER. Reprintel fromt Fraser's magfazine
with aVignette of the Queen's Bowver in tlhe New Forest.Crown 8vo. 10u.6(d.
SLAVE-CATCHING in the INDIAN OCEAN; A Record of' Naval
Experiences. By Capt. CoLoXB,.RN. Svo. withlilluistratioins fromnPhotographs, &c.                                          [Yearly ready.
UNTRODDEN PEAKS and UNFREQUENTED VALLEYS; A Midsummer Rlamble am~ong the Dolomites, by AM-ELIA. B. EDWARDS. With a
M1ap and -numerous Illustratiolns, engraved on Wood by E. WwvrrHpin
Medium Svo.                                          [lit the Spr-ing.
SIX MONTHS in CALIFORNIA. By J. G. PLAYER-FRowD. Post
8vo. price Cs.
The JAPANESE in AMERICA. By CHARL-Es LAmvxw, Americ.an
Secretary, Japanese Legation, Washington, U.S.A. Pest Svo. price 10s. 6d."
MY WIFE and I in QUEENSLAND; Eight Years' Experience in
the Colony, with some. account of Polynesian Labour. By CHARL '5 H.
EDEN. With Map and Frontispliece. Crown 8vo. price Os.
LIFE in, INDIA; a Series of Sketches shewing something of the
Ang'lo-Indian, the Land he lives in, and the People among whom 'helJives.
By E DWARD BRcADDONr. Post 8vo. price 9s.
HOW to SEE NORWAY. By Captain J. R. CAMPBELL. With Map
aud 5 Woodcuts. Fep. Svo. price 5s.
PAU and the PYRENEES. By Count HENR.Y RUSSELL, Member of
Ithe Alpine Club, &c. With 2. Maps. Fep. 8vo. price 5s.
CADORE; or, TITIAN'S COUNTRY. By JOSIAn GILBERT, one of.
the Authors of 'The Dolomite Mountains.: With Map, Facsimile, and 40
Illustrations. Imperial Svo. 319. 6d.
HOURS of EXERCISE in the ALPS. By JOHN TYNDALLT, LL.D.
F.R.S. Thiird Edition, with 7 Woodcuts by B. WH-mPER. Crown 8vo.
price 12*. 6d.
TRAVELS in the CENTRAL CAUCASUS and BASHAN. Tncluding
Visits to Ararat. and Tabreez and Ascents of Kazbek andl Eibrax. By
1l. W. FRE~sjiRFIED. Square crown Svo. with Maps, &c. 18s.
MAP of the CHAIN of MONT BLANC, from an actual Sunray in
18,13-1864. By A. ADA-.Ns-RHJLLYr, F.R.G.S. M.A.C. Published under the
Authority of the Alpine Club. In Chromolithography onl ertra stout
drawing-paper 28in. x 17in. price 10s. or mounted ou canvais In a folding
case, 12*. 6d.
HISTORY of DISCOVERY in our AUSTRALASIAN COLONIES,
Australia, Tasmania, and New Zealand, from the Earliest Date to the
Preseut Day. By WILLIAM HO-WITT. '2 vols. Svo. with 3 Maps, 20*.
The DOLOMITE MOUNTAINS; Excursions through Tyrol, Cairinthia,
Carniola, and Friuli, 1861-1863. By J. GILBERT and Gy. C. CHuRacHILL,
F.R.G.S. With numerous Ijlustrations. Square crown Svo. 21*.




24      NEW 'WORKS$ PUBLISHED By LONGMANS AND CO.


GUIDE to the PYRENEES, for the use of Mountaineers. By
CHAR.Lzs PAcxz. 2nd Edition, with Map and Illustrations. Cr. 8vo. 7e. 6d.
The ALPINE GUIDE. By JOHN BALL, M.R.I.A. late President of
the Alpine Club. Thoroughly Revised Editions, in Three Volumes, post
8vo. with Maps and other Illustratious:
GUIDE to the WESTERN ALPS, including Mont Blanc, Monte Rosa,
Zermatt, &c. Price 68. 6d. 
GUIDE to the CENTRAL ALPS, including all the Oberland District.
Price 7s. 6d.
GUIDE to the EASTERN ALPS, price l0,s. 6d.
Introduction on Alpine Travelling in General, and on the Geology
of the Alps, price 1s. Each of the Tphree Volinmes or Parts of the Alpine
Guide may be had with this INTRODUCToION prefixed, price 1Is. extra.
VISITS to REMARKABLE PLACES: Old Halls, Battle-Fields, and
Stones Illustrative of Striking Passages in English History and Poetry
By WILLIAM HOWITT. 2 vols. square crown 8vo. with Woodcuts, 25s.
The RURAL LIFE of ENGLAND. By the same Author. With
Woodcuts by Bewick and Williams. Medium Svo. 12s. 6d.
Works of Fiction.
POPULAR ROMANCES of the MIDDLE AGES. By GEORGE W
Cox, M.A. Author of 'The Mytbology of the Aryan Nations' &c. and
EUSTACEHuNTON JoNEs. Crown 8vo. price lOs. d.
TALES of the TEUTONIC LANDS; a Sequel to ' Popular IRomances
of the Middle Ages.' By the same Authors. Crown 8vo.1l0s.6Gd.
The BURGOMASTER'S FAMILY; or, Weal and Woe in a Little
World. By CHRISTINE MIULLER, Translated from the Dutch by Sir JouRw
SiIAWN LmEvERE, F.R1.S. Crown ivo. price (is.
NOVELS and TALES. By the Right Hon. B. DIs-RARLI, M.P.
Cabinet Edition, complete in Ten Volumes, crown 8vo. price (is. each, as
follows:LOTIrAIR, 68.                 HENRIETTA TEMPLE, 6*.9
CONINGSBY, 68.                CONTARINi FLEM-INiG, &c. 6s.
SYBIL, 68.                    ALROY, lXubE, &c. 6s.
TANCIZED, (is.                The YOUNG Duwu, &c. 6s.
VENETIA, 6s.                  VIVIAN GR.EY, 6s.
The MODERN NOVELIST'S LIBRARY. Each Work, in crown Svo.
complete in a Single Volume -
MELVILLE'S GLADIATORS, 2s. hoards; 2s. 8d. cloth.
--       GOOD FOR NOTHING, 2s. hoards; 2s. fCd, cloth.
-     HOLMBY HousER, 2s. boards; 2s. 6d. cloth.
--       INTERPRETER, 219. boards; 2s. 6d. cloth.
KATE COVENTRY, 2is. boards; 2*. 6d. cloth.
— QUEEN'S MARIEs, 2s. boards; 2s. 6d. cloth,
- DIGBY GRAND. 2s. boards; 2s. 6d. cloth.
— GENERAL Bou.NCE, 2s. boards; 2s. 6d. clothi.
TROLLOPE'S WARDEN, 1s. 6id. boards; 2s. cloth.
-        BARCRESTER TWERS, 2s. hoards; 2s. 6d. cloth.
BRAMLEY-MOORE'S SIX SISTERS of the VALLEYS, 2s. boards; 2U. 6d. cloth,




NEW WORKS PUB3LISHED By LONGMANS AND CO.


CABINET EDITION of STORIES and TALES by Miss SEWELL:
Ax~y RHaBEaT, 2s.Bd.            IVORS, 2*9. 6d.
GERTRUDEm, 2*. 6d.              KATHARINE ASHTON, 2s. 64.
The EiA-L's DAUGHTER, 2*. 6d.   MARGARET PERCIVAL, 38.6Cd.
EXExiRINwCR of LIFE, 28. 6d.    LANETON PARSONAGE, 38.6Sd.
CLEVE HALL, 28.6d.              URSULA, 38. 6d.
WONDERFUL STORIES from NORWAY, SWEDEN, and ICELAND.
Adapted and arranged by JULIA GODIDARD. With an Introductory Essay
by the Rwev. G. W. Cox, M.A. and Six Woodcuts. Square post 8vo. 68.
BECKER'S GALLUS; or, Roman Scenes of the Time of Augustus:
with Notes and Excursuses. New Edition. Post 8vo. 7s. 6d.
BECKER'S CHARICLES; a Tale illustrative of Private Life among the
Ancient Greeks: with Notes and lixcursuses. New Edition. Post Bvo. 78. Sd.
TALES of ANCIENT GREECE. By GEoRGEP W. Cox, M.A. late
Scholar of Trin. Coil. Oxon. Crown 8vo. price 6s. 6d.
Poetry and The Drama.
BALLADS and LYRICS of OLD FRANCE; with other Poems. By
A. LANG, Fellow of Merton College, Oxford. Square fep. 8vo. price 5s.
MOORE'S IRISH MELODIES, MaClise's Edition, with 161 Steel Plates
from Original Drawings. Super-royal 8vo. 31s. 6d.
Miniature Edition of Moore's Irish Melodies with Maclise's Designs (as above) reduced in Lithography. Imp. 16mo. 108. 64.
MOORE'S LALLA ROOKH. Tenniel's Edition, with 68 Wood
Engravings from original Drawings and other Illustrations. Pep. 4to. 21*.
SOUTHEY'S POETICAL WORKS, with the Author's last Corrections
and copyright Additions. Library Edition, in 1 vol. medium Bvo. with
Portrait and Vignette, 14*.
LAYS of ANCIENT ROME; with Ivry and the Armada. By the
Right Hfon. LORD MACAULAY. 16mo. 38. 6d.
Lord Macaulay's Lays of Ancient Rome. With 90 Illustrations on
Wood, from the Antique, from Drawings by G. SCHARF. Pep. 4to. 21*.
Miniature Edition of Lord Macaulay's Lays of Ancient Rome,
with the Illustrations (as above) reduced in Lithography. Imp. 16mo. 10*.6Sd.
GOLDSMITH'S, POETICAL WORKS, with Wood Engravings from
Designs by Members of the ETCHING CLUE. Imperial 16mo. 7*.6Sd.
The ~NEID of VIRGIL Translated into English Verse,. By JOHN
CONINGTON, M.A. New Edition. Crown Svo, 98,




26     NEW WORKS PunLISHg.D n LONGMANS AND) CO.


The ODES and EPODES of HORACE; a Metrical Translation into
English, with Introduction and Commentaries. By Lord LYTToir. With
Latin Text. New Edition. Post Svo. price 10s. ed,
HORATII OPERA. Library Edition, with Marginal References and
English Notes. Edited by the Rev J. E. YONSGX. 8vo. 21s9.
ROWDLER'S FAMILY SHLAKSPEARE, cheaper Genuine Editions.
7.1edium. 8vo. large type, with 36 WooDcvTrs, price 14e. Cabinet Edition,
with the same ILLUSTRArIONS, 6 vols. fcp. 3s. 6d. each.
POEMS. By Jua&x~ INsGrnow. 2 vole. fcp. 8vo. price 108.
FIRnS SnxIMs, containing I Dmwxnam" The STAxVs VONuMXNTr, c
Sixteenth Thousand. Fcp. 8vo. price s8.
S800NDi SxaRes,'I A STORYi of Doom,' GLADYS and her ISLAND,' &c. Fifth
Thousand. Fcp. 8vo. price 58.
POEMS by 3ean Ingelow. Frasr Siouem, with nearly 100 Illustrations,
engraved on Wood by the Brothers DALZIEL. Fcp. 4to. 21s.
Rural Sports, &c.
ENCYCLOPRDIA of RURAL SPORTS; a complete Account, IHim-o
rical, Practical, and Descriptiwe, of Hunting, Shooting, Fishing, Racing,
and all other Rural and Athletic Sports and Pastimes. Ry D. P. BLAr1SX.
With above 600 Woodcuts (20 from Designs by Jouin LEEtCHj. SVo. 218.
The DEAD SHOT, or Sportsman's Complete Guide; a Treatise on
the Use of the Gun, Dog-breaking, Pigeon-shooting, &c. By M-ARx8XAN.1
R~evised Edition. YFcp. 8vo. with Plates, 38.
The FLY-FISHER'S ENTOMOLOGY. By ALFRED RONALuS. With
colo~ured Representations of the Natural and Artificial Insect. Sixth
Edition; with 20 coloured Plates. 8vo. 14s.
A BOOK on ANGLINO; a complete Treatise on the Art of Angling
In every branch. By Fnuscis FRAxcTs. New Edition, with Portrait
and 15 other Plates, plain and coloured. Post 8vo. 15s.
WILCOCKS'S SEA-FISHERMAN; comprising the Chief Methods of
Hook and Line Fishing in the British and other Seas, a Glance at, Nets,
and Remarks on Boats and Boating. Second Edition, enlarged; with so
Woodcuts. Post 8vo. 12*. 6d.
HORSES and STABLES. By Colonel F. FITZWYGRAXXV. the King's
Hussars. Wi1th Twenty-four Plates of Illustrations, containing very
numerous Figures engraved on Wood. 8vo. 15s.
The HORSE'S FOOT, and HOW to KEEP IT SOUND. By W.
MiLis, Esq. Ninth Edition, with Illustrations. Imperial Mv. 12*. 6d.




NEW WORKS PUBLISHERD iDy LONGRIANS AND CO.


A PLAIN TREATISE on HORSE-SHOEING. By the same Author,
Sixth Edition. Post Svo. with Illustrations, 2U. "d
STABLES and STABLE-FITTINGS. By the same. Imp. 8vo. with
13 Plates, 158.
REMARKS on HORSES' TEETH, addressed to Purchasers. By the
same. Post 8vo. la9. 6d.
A TREATISE on HORSE-SHOEING and LAMENESS. By TosspH
GAMGXE, Veterinary Surgeon,, formerly Lecturer on the Priuciples and
Practice of Farriery in the New Veterinary College, Edinburgh. 8vo. with
55 Woodcuts, price 15s.
ELAINE'S VETERINARY ART; a Treatise on the Anatomy, Physioloy, nd  uraiveTreatment of the Diseases of the Horse, Neat Cattle
andShep. evethEdition, revised and enlarged by C. STEWL, M.RXC..SJ.L
Svo wth laes ndWoodcuts. 15*.
The HORSE: with a Treatise on Draught. By WILLIAM YOUATT.
New Edition, revised and enlarged. 8vo. with numerous Woodcuts, 12*. 6d.
The DOG. By the same Author. 8vo. with numerous Woodcuts, 6s.
The DOG in HEALTH andaDISEASE. By STONEHENGE. With 70
Wood Engravings. Square crown 8vo. 7s. 6d.
The GREYHOUND. By SToNEHENGE. Revised Edition, with 24
Portraits of Greyhounds. Square crown 8vo. 108. 6d.
The SETTFER; with Notices of the most Eminent Breeds now Extant,
Instructions how to Breed, Rear, and Break;- Dog Shows. Field Trials, and
General MNanagement, &c. By EDwAuE LlvERACX. Crown 4to. with 2
plates, price 7s. 6d.
The OX; his Diseases and their Treatment: with an Essay on Parturi.tion in the Cow. By3. U.RDoasorr. Crown Svo. withlIllustrations, 7s. Gd.
Worlk8 of Utility and General Information.
The THEORY and PRACTICE of BANKING. By H. D. MAULEOD,
M.A. Barrister-at-Law. Second Edition, entirely remodelled. 2 vols. Svo. 30*..
A DICTIONARY, Practical, Theoretical, and Historical, of Commerce and Commercial Navigation. By J. R. M'CULLOCHr. New and
thoroughly revised Edition. Svo.price 63*. clorth, o'70*. half-bd. in russia.
The CABINET LAWYER; a Popular Digest of the Laws of England,
Civil, Criminal, and Constitutional: intended for Practical Use and
General Information. Twenty-third Edition. Fcp. Svo. price 78. Gd.
A PROFITABLE BOOK UPON DOMESTIC LAW; Essays for English
Women and Law Students. By Pinexia.s, Junior, 1'I.A. Barrister-at-Law
Post 8vo. 10*. 6d.




28      NEW WORKS PVUBLTBISD BY LONGMANS AND CO.


BLACKSTONE      ECONOMISED, a       Compendium    of the   Laws of
England to the Present time: in Four Books, each embracing the Legal
Principles and Practical Information contained in the respective volumes
of Blackstone, supplemented by Subsequent Statutory Enactments, Important Legal Decisions, &c. BV D. M. AIRD, of the Middle Temple.
Barrister-at-Law. Post 8vo. 7s. 6d.
A HISTORY and EXPLANATION of the STAMP DUTIES: containing Remarks on the Origin of Stamp Duties: a History of the Stamp
Duties from their Commencement to the Present Time; Observations on
the Past and Present State of the Stamp Laws; an Explanation of the
System and Administration of the Tax; Observations on the Stamp Duties
in force in Foreign Countries: and the Stamp Laws at present il force in
the United Kingdom. By STEPIEN DOWELL, MI.A. Assistant-Solicitor of
Inland Revenue. 8vo. 12s. 6d.
PEWTNER'S COMPREHENSIVE             SPECIFIER; a Guide to the
Practical Specification of every kind of Building-Artificers' Work; with
Forms of Building Conditions and Agreements, an Appendix, Foot-Notes,
and a copious Index. Edited by W. YOUNG, Architect. Crown 8vo. price 6s.
COLLIERIES and COLLIERS; a Handbook of the Law and Leading
Cases relating thereto. By J. C. FOWLEs, of the Inner Temple, Barrister.
Third Edition. Fcp. 8vo. 78. 6d.
The MATERNAL MANAGEMENT of CHILDREN in HEALTH and
Disease. By THOMAS BULL, M.D. Fcp. 5s.
HINTS to MOTHERS on the MANAGEMENT of their HEALTH
during the Period of Pregnancy and in the Lying-in Room. By the late
THOMAs BULL. M.D. Fcp. 5s.
HOW   to NURSE SICK      CHILDREN; containing Directions which
maybe found of service to all who have charge of the Young. By CHARLES
WEST, M.D. Second Edition. Fcp. 8vo. ls. 6d.
NOTES on LYING-IN INSTITUTIONS; with a Proposal for Organising an Institution for Trsining Midwives and Midwifery Nurses. By
FLORENCE NIGHTINGALE. With 5 Plans. Square crown 8vo. 7s. 6d. 4
CHESS OPENINGS. By F. W. LONGMAN, Balliol College, Oxford.
Fcp. 8vo. 2s. 6d.
THE THEORY OF THE MODERN SCIENTIFIC GAME OF WHIST.
By WILLIAM POLE. F.R.S. Mus. Doc. Oxon. Fifth Edition, enlarged.
Fcp. 8vo. price 2s. 6d.
A PRACTICAL TREATISE on BREWING; with Formulas for Public
Brewers, and Instructions for Private Families. By W. BLACK. 8vo. 10s. 6d.
MODERN COOKERY for PRIVATE FAMILIES, reduced to a System
of Easy Practice in a Series of carefully-tested Receipts. By ELIZA ACTON.
Newly revised and enlarged Edition; with 8 Plates of Figures and 150
Woodcuts. Fcp. 6s.
WILLICH'S POPULAR        TABLES, for ascertaining, according to the
Carlisle Table of Mortality, the value of Lifehold, Leasehold, and Church
Property, Renewal Fines, Reversions, &c. Seventh Edition, edited by
MONTAGIE MARRIOTT, Barrister-at-Law. Post 8vo. price 10s.
MAUNDER'S TREASURY           of KNOWLEDGE       and LIBRARY       of
Reference: comprising an English Dictionary and Grammar, Universal
Gazetteer, Classical Dictionary, Chronology, Law Dictionary, a Synopsis
of the Peerage, useful Tables &c. Revised Edition. Fcp. 8vo. price U6.




INDEX


AOTON's Modern Cookery.................. 28
AIBD's Bfackstone Economised............28
ALLEN'S Four Discourses of Chrysostom.. 22
ALLIES on Formation of Christendom....22
Alpine Guide (The).......................24
AMOS's Jurisprudence....................  6
ARNOLD'S Manual of English Literature..7
Authority and Conscience.................   20
Autumn Iolidays of a Country Parson....      9
AYRE'S Treasury of Bible Knowledge.....      21
BAOON'S Essays, by WHATELY..........    6
-       Life and Letters, by SPED DING..   6
----    Works, edited by SPEDDIN...... 6
BAIN'S Logic, Deductive and Inductive.... 10
-       Mental and Moral Science........ 10
on the Senses and Intellect..1.........   0
BALL'S Alpine Guide...................... 23
BAYLDON'S Rents and Tillages............19
BECKEt'S Charicles and Gallus............25
BENSFEY' Sanskrit Dictionary............8
BLACK'S Treatise on Brewing..............28
BLACKLEY'S German-English Dictionary..        8
BLAINE'S Rural Sports...................26
Veterinary Art.................. 27
BLOXAM'S Metals.......................... 12
BOOTH'S Saint-Simon......................3
BOULTBEE on 39 Articles.................. 20
BOURBX   'S Catechism of the Steam Engine. 19
-..        Handbook of Steam Engine.... 19
-Improvements    in  the   Steam
Engine........................ 19
-Treatise on the Steam Engine.. 19
BOWDLER'S Family SHAKSPEARE........ 26
BRiADDON'S Life in India.................   23
BaAMLEY-MIOOl    E's  Six   Sisters of the
Valleys...................................  24
BRANuDI'S Dictionary of Science, Literature, and Art............................. 1
BIAY'S Manual of' Anthropology.......... 10
Philosophy of Necessity...........  10
----    on Force.,1.........................  10
BREE'S Fallacies of Darwinism............ 15
BROWNE'S Exposition of the 39 Articles... 21
BRUNEL'S Life of BlIUNEL................
BUCKLE'S History of Civilization..........   4
--        Miscellaneous Writings..........   8
BULL'S Hints to Mothers..................28
-        Maternal Management of Children     28
BUNBEN'S God in History.................     3
Prayers.........................  20
Burgomaster's Family (The).............     24
BUitmK  's Rise oft Great Families.........6
_    -   Vicissitudes of Families..........
BURTO'N'S Christian Church................    4
Cabinet Lawyer............................27


CAMPBELL'S Norway....................  2
CATES'S Biographical Dictionary..........
and WOODWARD'S Encyclopaedia         4
CATS' and FARLIE'S Moral Emblems...... 18
Changed Aspects of Unchanged Truths....
CHESNEY'S Indian Polity..................  S
---. Waterloo Campaign...........   2
Chorale Book for England..................17
Christ the Consoler........................ 20
CLOUGH'S Lives from Plutarch............   2
COI)IN'GTON'S (Admiral) Memoirs........     4
COLENeSO (Bishop) on Pentateuch.......... 22
----- On Speaker's Bible Commentary        20
COLLINS'S Perspective.....................  18
COLO'MB'S Slave Catching.................. 23
Commonplace Philosopher, by A. K. H. B.
CONINOTON'S Translation of the 2fneid...   25
---    --     Miscellaneous Writings......  9
CONTANSEAU'S French-EnglishDictionaries     8
CONYBEARE and Howsox's St. Paul...... 21
COTTON'S (Bishop) Life....................   4
CooiK's Grotesque Animals.1...........    17
COOPEBR'S Surgical Dictionary............. 16
COPLAND'S Dictionary of Practical Medicine 17
COTTON'S (Bishop) Memoir................   4
Counsel and Comfort from a City Pulpit....  9
Cox's Aryan Mythology..................... 3
-      Tale of the Great Persian War......  2
Tales of Ancient Greece.............. 25
-  and JON'Es'S Popular Romances.... 24
___ ---  _    Tales of Teutonic Lands 24
CREASY on British Constitutions..........  3
CRESY'S Encyclopaedia of Civil Engineering  19
Critical Essays of a Country Parson......  9
CROOKES on Beet-Root Sugar.............. 17
---— 's Chemical Analysis..............15
CULLEY'S Iandbook of Telegraphy........    19
CUSACK'S History of Ireland...............  3
DAVIDSON'S Introduction to New Testament 21
Dead Shot (The), by MARKSMAN.......... 26
DECAISNE and LE MAOUT'S Botany...... 14
DE MORGAN'S Budget of Paradoxes...... 11
DENISON'S Vice-Regal Life................  1
DISRAELI'S Lord George Bentinck........    5
--   -      -Novels and Tales.............. 24
DOBSON on the Ox.......................... 27
DOVE on Storms..........................., 12
DOWELL On Stamp Duties.................   28
DOYLE'S Fairyland........................ 17
DIEW'S Reasons of Faith............2.... 2
EASTLAKE'S Hints on Household Taste.... 18
---    Gothic Revival....;.......... 18
EATON'S Musical Criticism................  5
EDEN'S Queensland........................ 23
E uWARnD's Travels in Tyrol.............. 23




30       NEW WORKS PUBLISHED-BY LONGMANS AND CO.


Elements of Botany.....................  15
ELLICOTT'S Commentary on Ephesians.... 21
-_ _ _____  -- Galatians.... 21
________     __-__   ~Pastoral'Epist. 21
_           Philippians, &c. 21
-__  ________ -Thessalonians 21
-        Lectures on the Life of Christ.. 21
EBRICHSEN'S Surgery...................  16
E VANs's Ancient Stone Implements.....13
EWALD'S History of Israel...............  21
FAIRaAIRA'S Applicationsof Iron.........19
Information for Engineers..19
^______ r  Millsand Millwork.........  19
FARADAY'S Life and Letters..........5.....
FITZWYGr  AM on Horses and Stables..... 26
FOWLER'S Collieries and Colliers........  28
FRAmOIS'S Fishing Book...................  26
FIBEIHPFELD'S Travels in the Caucasus.... 23
FBRODE'S English in Ireland............  I
__     History of England............  1
Short Studies on Great Subjects  9


GAeGEEz on Hose-Shoeing................
GA3OT's Elementary Physics..............
__    Natural Philosophy..............
GARROD'S Materia Medica................
GILBERT'S Cadore, or Titian's Country...
GILBERT and CHURCHILL'S Dolomites....
GIRDLESTONE'S Bible Synonymes........
GLEDSTONE'S Life of WHITEFIELD......
GODDARD'S Wonderful Stories............
GOLDSMITH'S Poems, Illustrated..........
GOODEVE'S Mechanism...................
GRAHAM'S Autobiography of MILTON....
-         View of Literature and Art....
GRANT'SEthics of Aristotle................
Graver Thoughts of a Country Parson......
GRAY'S Anatomy..........................
GRENHOW On Bronchitis...............
GRIFFIN'S Algebra and Trigonometry....
GRIFFITIH'S Fundamentals................
GROVE on Correlation of Physical Forces..
GURNEY'S Chapters of French History....
GWILT'S Encyclopaedia of Architecture....


27
12
12
17
23
23
20
5
25
25  '
12
5
3
9
16
16
12
20
13
2
18


HowITT'S Australian Discovery...........
-       Rural Life of England.......... 24
--      Visits to Remarkable Places.... 24
HbBNER'S Memoir of Sixtus V.............     2
LHuftHEO'S (W.) Manual of Geography.... 12
HUMBOLDT'S Centenary Biography........ 4
HUME'S Essays............................ 10
- Treatse on Human Nature...... 10
IHE'S Roman History....................    2
INGELOW'S Poems.......................... 26
JAMES'S Christian Counsels................  20
JAMESON'S Saints and Martyrs............ 18
------- Legends of the Madonna........ 18
--         Monastic Orders................ 18
JAMESON and EAsTLAxE'S Saviour...... 18
JAIrIESON on Causality.1................... 10
JARDINE'S Christian Sacerdotalism........ 20
JOlNBTON's Geographical Dictionary...... 12
KALISCH'S Commentary on the Bible......      8
KEITH on Fulfilment of Prophecy.......... 21
_ —         Destiny of the World............ 21
KERL'S Metallurgy....................... 19
KIRBY and SPamE'S Entomology.....1..... 14
LANG's Ballads and Lyrics................ 25
LANMAN'S Japanese in America............ 23
LATHAM'S English Dictionary..............    7
LAUGHTON'S Nautical Surveying.......... 11
LAVERACK'S Setter........................ 27
LEOKY'S History of European Morals...... 
_ -      ----     Rationalism.........   3
Leaders of Public Opinion........   5
Leisure Hours in Town, by A. K. H, B.....    9
Lessons of Middle Age, by A. K. H,B.......   9
LEWES' History of Philosophy............  3
LIDDELL and SCOTT'S Two Lexicons......      8
Life of Man Symbolised...................   18
LINDLEY and MOORE'S Treasury of Botany      14
LONGMALN'S Edward the Third...........   2
Lectures on the History of England..........................  S
_     Chess Openings................ 28
LOUDON'S Agriculture.................... 19
Gardening...................... 19
Plants.......................... 15
LUBBOCK on Origin of Civilisation.......... 13
Lyra Germanica........................ 17,22
LYTTON'S Odes of Horace.................. 26
MACAULAY'S (Lord) Essays................    3....- -. ---         History of England.. 1
_ --- —-— _ — Lays of Ancient Rome 25
_ --- — -   M        nMiscellaneousWritings 9
—.. Speeches.............  7
--  C            rks-Complete Works...... 


HARE on Election of Representatives......  7
HARTWIG's Harmonies of Nature.......... I4
Polar World.................... 14
Sea and its Living Wonders.. 14
-        Subterranean World..........I 1
---  Troptcal World.............. 11
HATHERTON'S Memoirand Correspondence       2
HAYWARD'S     Biographical and    Critical
Essays; Second Series..................  4
HEMSLEY'S Handbook of Trees and Plants 14
HEBRSCtEL'S Outlines of Astronomy.......   11
HEWITT on Diseases of Women............ 15
HODGsoN'S Theory of Practice.......... 10
-     Time and Space................ 10
HOLLAND'S Recollections..................  5
HOLMES'S System of Surgery............   16
--------— Surgical Diseases of Infancy.... 1i




'NEW WORKS PUBLISHED BY LONGMANS AND CO.


31






MACLEOD'S Economical Philosophy........ 
Dictionary of Political Economy....................... 
-     TheoryandPractice of Banking   27
MCCULLOOE's Dictionary of Commerce -. 27
Mankind, their Origin and Destiny........ 13
MANEJIO'S England and Christendom.... 22
MARBCET'S Natural Philosophy............  12
MARSHALL'SB Physiology.................... 1
MARsHmAw's Lil of Havelock............     5
History of India............  3
MARTIUaH    'S Christian Life............ 22
MAssniaom  ED's History of theReformation   4
MATHEWS on Colonial Question.........   3
MAUNDBI'BS Biographical Treasury........    6
Geographical Treasury...... 12.__        -. lHistorical Treasury..........  4
Scientific and Literary Treasury.......................... 15
Treasury of Knowledge...... 28
Treasury of Natural History   14
MAXWELL'S Theory of Heat................ 12
MAY'S Constitutional History of England..   1
MELVILLE'S Novels and Tales............ 21
MEBDELSSOHN'S Letters..................    5
MERIVALS'S Fall of the Roman Republic..     3
- Romans under the Empire     3
MEtRIFIELD'S Arithmetic & Mensuration. 12
_  _        Magnetism................ 11
MILES on Horse's Foot and Horseshoeing.. i2
_____   Horses' Teeth and Stables...... 27
MILL (J.) on the Mind...................... 10
MILL (J. 8.) on Liberty....................  7
onRepresentative Government       7
on Utilitarianism..............    7
MILL'S (J. S.)Dissertations and Discussions  7
Political Economy..........  7
System of Logic..............  7
Hamilton's Philosophy......     7
Subjection of Women........   6
MILLER'S Elements of Chemistry.......... 15
-     Inorganic Chemistry............ 12
MITCHELL'S Manual of Architecture...... 18
_ Manual of Assaying..........     19
MONSELL'S Spiritual Songs................ 22
MoonE'S Irish Melodies.................... 25
__         Lalla Rookh.................... 25
MORELL'S Elements of Psychology........ 10
-       Mental Philosophy.............. 10
MOSSIrAN'S Christian Church..............  4
MULLEB'S (MAX) Chips from      a  German
Workshop..........    9
_   Lectures on Language    7
MUncIISOoN on Liver Complaints.......... 16
____ — on Continued Fevers........ 16


NORTHCOTT's Lathes and Turning........ IS
O'Co.NNou's Commentary on Hebrews             21
 P-4mans                 21
ODLING'S Course of Practical Chen2lgtry.. 15
OwzN's Lectureson the Invertebrate,...... 13
Comparative Amatomy mind Physio.
1ogy*f`Vert;ebr&teAmb:n%1.... 13
PACKE'S      de to the Pyrenees............   4
PAGET's Lectures on Surgical Pathology.. 16
PEREIRA'S Elements of Materia 3jedica,.. 17
PzRKiNs's Legal E ssays.................. 27
PERRING's Churches and Creeds.......... 2o
PEWTNER'S Comprehensive Specifter             28
PLAYE R-FRowiDls California.............. 23
POLE's Game of Whist                          28
Pnr,,NDERGA6T'8 Mastery of Languages.... 8
PRESCOTT'S Scripture Diffilculties            22
Present-DAy Thoughts, by A. K H. B,.....     9
PnocToRls Astronomical Essays.......... I I
-Wew Star Atlas................ 11
Orbs Around Us................ ILI
Plurality of Worlds............ 11
Saturn and its System........ 11
Star Depths.................... 11
Scientific Essays.............. 13
Sun............................ II
Public Schools Atlas (The)................. 12
QUAIN's Anatomy.......................... 16
RA-NKRN. on Strains in Truims............ ig
RAWLINSOIN'S Parthia....................      2
Recreations of a Country Paxson, by
A. K. 1:1. B...............................  9
REFvEls Royal and Republican France.. g
REILLY'S Map of Mont 131ane.............. 23
iRicit's Dictionary of Antiquities.........., 8
RivEits' Rose Amateur's Guide............ 15
RoGiiLits's Eclipse of Faith..................  9
-     -   Defence of ditto..................  9
ROGET'S English Words and Phrases......       y
RONALD's Fly-Fisher'a Entomology...... 2r,
RosEls Ignatius Loyola....................    2
ROTHSCHILD'S Israelites.................... 21
RusszLL's Pau and the Pyrenees.......... 2,1
SANDARS'S Justinian's Institutes..........
SANFORD'S English Kings................
SAVOitys Geometric Turning.............     18
SCIELELLEN'S Spectrum Analysis............ it
S COTT's Lectures on the Fine Arts........ 17
_   _     Albert Durer...................... 17
Seaside Musings, by A. K. H. B...........    1)
S-REEonm's Oxford Reformers of 1498......     2
SEWELL'sExamination for Confirmation.. 22
History of the Early Church....     4
Passing Thoughts on Religion.. 22
Preparations forCornmunion.... 22
Principles of Education.......... 22
Readings 11or Confirmatioa.... 22




NORTHCOTT'S Lathes and Turning........ 18
O'Co0Nso'S Commentary on Hebrews.... 21
----— m -      Romans... 21
ODLIXa's Course of Practical Cahenistry.. 15
OweN's Lectures on the Invertebrata...... 1
--   Comparatave Anatomy and Physio.
logy of Vertebrate Animal.... 13
PACrK'S Guide to the Pyrenees............   4
PAGET's Lectures on Surgical Pathology.. 16
PEREIRA'S Elements of Materia Medica.. 17
PjsRKias's Legal Essays................ 27
PERRING'S Churches and Creeds.......... 20
PEWTNER'S Comprehensive Specifier..... 28
PLAYER-FROWD1'S Califoria.............. 23
POLE'S Game of Whist.................... 28
PRENDERGA6T'S Mastery of Languages....       8
PRESCOTT' Scripture Difficulties..........22
Present-Day Thoughts, by A. K. H. B....  9
PnocrTR's Astronomical Essays......,. II
----- -     New Star Atlas.............. 11
---   _     Orbs Around Us................ I
--   Plurality of Worlds............ 11
-  Saturn and its System......   11
----        Star Depths....................  11
----         Scientific Essays.............. 13
Sun............................ 11
Public Schools Atlas (The)................ 12
QUAIN'S Anatomy.......................... 16
RANIsKi   on Strains in Trusses............ 19
RAWLL]SOSN'S Parthia...................  2
Recreations of a Country Parson, by
A.K.1. B...........       s..............  9
REEVE'S Royal and Republican France..    2
REILLY'S Map of Mont 31anc.............. 23
ItRiCH's Dictionary of Antiquities..........  8
RIVEns' Rose Amateur's Guide......... 15
RoGEas'sEclipse of Faith..................   9
__  -     Defence of ditto.................. 
ROGET'S English Words and Phrases......       7
RONALD'S Fly-Fisher's Entomology...... 26
ROSE'S Ignatius Loyola....................  2
ROTHSCHILD'S Israelites............2....  21
RUSSELL'S Pau and the Pyrenees........ 23
SANDARS'S Justinian's Institutes..........  ~;
SANSFOD'S English Kings................     1
SAVORYS Geometric Turning............      18
SCHELLEN'S Spectrum Analysis............ 11
SCOTT'S Lectures on the Fine Arts........ 17
--      Albert Durer......................  17
Seaside Musings, by A. K. II. B........... 
SEEBOHM'S Oxford Reformers of 1498......     2
SEWELL'S Examination for Confirmation.. 22.. History of the Early Church....     4
-     Passing Thoughts on Religion.. 22
-       Preparations for Communion.... 22
Principles of Education.......... 22
-__   _    Readings tor Confirmation.... 22




NASH'S Compendium of the Prayer Book..
New Testament, Illustrated Edition......
NEWAN'S Apologia pro Vita Sua..........
NIGHTINGALE on Lying-In Institutions..
NILSSON'S Scandinavia....................


20
17
5
28
13




82       NEW WORKS PUBLISHED BY LONGMANS AID 00.


SENWEL'/  Readings for Lent.............. 22
Tales and Stories................ 25
Thoughts for the Age............ 22
Thoughts for the Holy Week.... 22
SHIPLEY on Eccleiastical Reform........ 20
SHORT'S Church History....................  4
SMITH'S (J.) Paul's Voyage and Shipwreck    21
(SYDNEY) Miscellaneous Works..      9
Wit and Wisdom......     9
-      Life and Letters........  5
-     (Dr. R. A.) Air and Rain.......... 11
— _     (Dr. Fly.) Handbook for Midwives 15
SOUTHBY'S Doctor........................  7
- -      Poetical Works................ 25
STANLEY'S History of British Birds....... 14
STEPHIEN'S Ecclesiastical Biography......   i
STIRLING'S HAMILTON.................... 1
----  H L........................ 10
-     Philosophy of Law......... 10
-  Protoplasm.................... 10
STOOKMAR'S (Baron) Memoirs..............    4
STOXBBHENGE on the Dog.................. 27
--            on the Greyhound............ 27
STRIOKLAND'S Queens of England.......... 
Sunday Afternoons at the Parish Church of
a Scottish University City, by A. K. II. B..  9
TAYLOR'S History of India................   3
-   --  _ (Jeremy) Works, edited by EDEN     22
Text-Books of Science......................  12
THIRLWALL'S History of Greece............    2
THOMSON'S Laws of Thought............       7
THUDICHUMf'S Chemical Physiology...,..     15
TODD (A.) on Parliamentary Government        1
TODD and BowMAN'S Anatomy and Physiology of Man...........................  17
TRENCH'S Realities of Irish Life..........  3
TROLLOPE'S Barchester Towers............ 23
-----      Warden...................... 24
TYNDALL on Diamagnetism...............     13
-------        Electricity.................... 13
-       EHeat..................   12
Sound......................   12
---     ' Faraday as a Discoverer...... 5
--       -..Fragments of Science....... 13
__ ---—. ---Hours of Exercise in the Alps 23
--  ---     Lectures on Light............ 13
----     --— Molecular Physics............ 13


UBEBsRWEQG'S System of Logic.............    11
UaE'S Arts, Manufactures, and Mines...... 1
VOGAN'S Doctrine of the Eucharist........ 20
WALCOTT'S Traditions of Cathedrals...... 21
WALKXR'S Rambles......................       23
WATSON'S Geometry...................... 12
--  --     Principles & Practice of Physic. 16
WATTS'S Dictionary of Chemistry..........15
WEBB'S Objects for Common Telescopes.. 11
WEBSTER and WILKINON'S Greek Testament......................................  22
WELLINGTON'S Life, byGLEIG............        5
WEST on Children's Diseases................ 16
--—.Nursing Sick Children..........          28
--    's Lumleian Lectures................ 16
WHATELY'S English Synonymes..........         6
------         Logic........................ 6
--- Rhetoric...................   6
WHATELY on a Future State.............. 2.     ---  ~ Truth of Christianity......     22
WHITE'S Latin-English Dictionaries.....       8
WILCOCKS'S Sea Fisherman................26
WILLIAMS'S Aristotle's Ethics............     6
WILLIAMS on Climate of South of France        16
--------     Consumption................ 16
WILLICH'S Popular Tables...............28
WILLIS'S Principles of Mechanism........ 
WINSLOW on Light........................13
WOOD'S Bible Animals....................     13
--        Homes without Hands............ 13
-—.-      Insects at Home.................. 14
----   _ --- —Abroad..................        14
-----      Strange Dwellings................14
--        (T.) Chemical Notes..............  15
WORDSWORTH'S Christian Ministry...... 20
YONGE'S English-Greek Lexicons.......... 
--       Horace..........................  26
-- -   istory of England..............   2
--   English Literature..............    7
-  -   Modern History..................    3
YOUATT on the Dog..............2.......      27
--         on the Horse......................  27
ZELLER'S Socrates.........................     6
-          Stoics, Epicureans, and Sceptics..  f


Spottiswoode & Co., Printers, Newtcstreet Square, London.


P i
a j   ""'
42, ~:C4 




i




THE UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN
DATE DUE
Nov 20 1996
_.~




3  015 01475
DO NOT REMOVE
OR
MUTILATE CARD




_~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ I i                                 1    I_ 
_           |    g    11     g   SW~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~.1141  
9'~